Ir 346-348CL 22e

FCR XG-1/CR CL
CR-IR346/348CL
Service Manual
Document No. 010-054-22E

First Edition : Oct. 20, 2000
22nd Edition : Dec. 10, 2010
Printed in Japan
Export Restrictions Applying to this Equipment

Japanese export restrictions and foreign exchange regulations apply to
this equipment. Therefore, government approval obtained through due
procedure is required in order to export or otherwise remove such
equipment from Japan.
Note that the same restrictions and regulations apply not only to the
main unit but also to after-sale parts, service manuals and service
training (for exporting or transferring technology) when such items are
dispatched or shipped to foreign countries and when service training is
given for trainees from foreign countries.
Precautions in Using the Service Manual

This manual should not be used by anyone other than the servicing staff
members qualified through the training specified by our company. Since
this manual contains confidential information including engineering knowhow related to product development, it is prohibited to distribute the manual
to users or to allow them free access to the manual without obtaining prior
permission from FUJIFILM Corporation.
This manual is intended to assist the service person in the safe and efficient
servicing of the equipment described.
The equipment must be used in accordance with the procedures contained in this
manual and must not be used for purposes other than those which are described
herein.
The equipment should only be used by persons having recognized qualifications
and, if relevant, having adequate training on this equipment, especially regarding
protective measure such as laser radiation protection.
It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that existing legal regulations regarding
installation of the building with respect to the equipment are observed. Moreover
the legal regulations regarding the operation of the equipment are to be observed.
Incorrect operation, or failure of the user to maintain the equipment in accordance
with the schedule of maintenance, relieves the manufacturer or his agent from all
responsibility for consequent non-compliance, damage, injury, defects and/or other
malfunction.
FCR is a trademark or registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation.
Copyright 2000-2010 FUJIFILM Corporation. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted
in any form or by means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise,
without the prior written permission of FUJIFILM Corporation.
CR-IR348CL Service Manual
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
WARNING
Important Notice Concerning this Manual
This manual is written for International distribution (including

distribution in the U.S.) and therefore may contain references to
mammography related options.
Mammography functionality for this product is not commercially
available in the US, pending FDA Approval.
This functionality must not be activated on US models, the only
breast related functionality available in the U.S. is the Specimen
Imaging Application.
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
BLANK PAGE
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)
MD: Machine Description......................................
MT: Machine Troubleshooting...........................
RI: Reinstalling the Software..........................
MU: Maintenance Utility. .......................................
FR: Function-specific Reference....................
10
Abbreviations Adopted in This Manual:................................ 47
SP: Service Parts.......................................................
12
Name of the Target Product of This Manual:........................ 47
PM: Preventive Maintenance. ............................
13
Introduction.............................................................................. 37
Safety Precautions.................................................................. 41
Cautions Relating to Electromagnetic Compatibility........... 42
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)..................................... 42
Further information for IEC60601-1-2:2001............................ 43
Caution for Handling Personal Information.......................... 48
IN: Installation
IN-A: Installation Connection to
One XG-1 RU or CR-IR355RU/356/357.... 14
IN-B: Installation Connection to Two or
More RUs, 5000 plus and CR-IR356/357/
359/362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372.... 16
IN-C: Installation
Connection to 9000 Series Equipment.... 18
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Appx IN: Installation Appendix....................
19
OE: Connecting
the CL to Other Equipment.......................
21
PC: Performance Check........................................
35
MD: Machine Description

1. System Configuration.......................................................
2.20 HP Compaq dc7900 SF................................................ 28
1.1 PC Used for XG-1 (one RU+CL) Connection. ................
2.21 Dell OptiPlex 780. ........................................................ 29

2.22 HP Compaq 8000 Elite SF............................................ 30
1.2 PC Used for 5000 plus (FCR 5000 Series+CL) or

CL-RU N:N Connection and 9000 Series Connection.....
2. Connectors and Slots.......................................................
2.1 Dell OptiPlex GX110.....................................................
4. Software Function Overview............................................ 33
2.2 Dell OptiPlex GX150, 50, 60. ........................................
5. Relationship between RU and CL.................................... 41
2.3 Dell OptiPlex GX260.....................................................
5.1 RU Software (AP/OS) and Data Flow............................ 41
2.4 Dell Precision WS340...................................................
5.2 Mechanism of RU-AP/RU-Config AUTO UPDATE. ........ 43
2.5 Dell Precision WS330................................................... 10

2.6 Dell OptiPlex GX270..................................................... 11
2.7 NEC PC....................................................................... 12
2.8 Dell OptiPlex GX280..................................................... 13
3. System Connection Examples......................................... 31
6. RU-CL N:N Connection Function Overview.................... 45

7. Ordering Function Overview............................................ 46
8. Cluster Connection Function Overview.......................... 47

2.11 Dell OptiPlex GX620..................................................... 17
2.13 Dell OptiPlex 745. ........................................................ 19
2.15 Dell OptiPlex 755. ........................................................ 22
2.16 Dell Precision T3400. ................................................... 24
2.17 HP Compaq dc7800 SF................................................ 25
2.18 Dell OptiPlex 760. ........................................................ 26
2.19 Dell OptiPlex 960. ........................................................ 27
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MT: Machine Troubleshooting

1. Error Code Table...............................................................
1.1 Referring to Error Messages.........................................
1.2 Precautions..................................................................
1.3 Error Message. ............................................................
2. Using the Event Viewer....................................................
4.6 Changing the Barcode Reader/

Magnetic Card Reader Driver Software. ........................ 34
2.1 Overview of the Event Viewer. ......................................
4.7 Reinstalling the Network Driver..................................... 41
2.2 Starting the Event Viewer. ............................................
4.8 Installing the 3Com Network Driver (Ver. A10)............... 48
2.3 Configuration and How to View the Event Viewer...........
2.4 Details of Events..........................................................
5. Troubleshooting (for NEC PC)......................................... 51
2.5 Saving the Event Log. ..................................................
2.6 Deleting the Event Log. ................................................ 10

2.7 Quitting the Event Viewer. ............................................ 10
4.3 USB Ports Recommended for Barcode Reader/

Magnetic Card Reader Mounting (for GX150 Only). ....... 30
4.4 Resetting the Refresh Frequency.................................. 30
4.5 Resetting the Touch Panel Sound................................. 32
5.1 Error Analysis Tool (TeDoLi)......................................... 53

5.1.1 Error Analysis Tool (TeDoLi) Startup and
Shutdown Procedures. ......................................... 53
5.1.2 Device Test Procedures........................................ 54
5.1.3 Log Save Procedure............................................. 55
3. Information Useful for Error Recovery............................ 11
5.2 Service Parts Replacement........................................... 56
3.1 CL/RU Connection Recovery Procedure to

be Performed upon RU Memory Initialization................. 11
5.2.1 Preparation for Parts Replacement......................... 56

5.2.2 Covers. .............................................................. 57
3.2 Typical Procedure for Achieving Recovery from an

LP (Local Printer) Printout Generation Failure................ 19
5.2.3 CPU Fan. ........................................................... 57
3.3 Messages Displayed upon an RU-AP/RU-Config

Update (RU-AP of version A06 or earlier)...................... 21
5.2.5 CD-ROM Drive and FD Drive................................. 59
3.4 Precautions to be Observed During

the Use of Output Options............................................. 23
5.2.7 Housing Fan........................................................ 61
4. Troubleshooting (for DELL PC)....................................... 24
5.2.9 Memory.............................................................. 62
4.1 Checking the Memory................................................... 26

4.2 Checking the Hard Disk................................................ 29
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
5.2.4 Hard Disk............................................................ 58

5.2.6 CPU................................................................... 60
5.2.8 Power Supply Unit. .............................................. 61
5.2.10 Motherboard........................................................ 63
5.3 NEC PC Diagnosis Messages During Initialization. ........ 64

5.4 Confirmation Required When Beeps Sound at PC Startup.... 66
Appendix 1 CL Error Message Table

(A00 to A11, V1.0(B) to V8.1(B)).................... Appx1MT-1
Appendix 2 Cooper Application
Error Message Table...................................... Appx2MT-1
Appendix 3 Precise Enlargement Function
Appendix 4 QA ROI Measurement
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
RI: Reinstalling the Software

1. Installation Flowchart (DELL PC)....................................
2. Installing and Setting Up the OS.....................................
2.1 Installing and Setting Windows 2000.............................
4
2.1.1 Installing Windows 2000. ......................................
4
2.1.2 Installing the Driver Software................................. 14
2.1.3 Setting the OS..................................................... 17
2.2 Installing and Setting Windows XP................................ 22

2.2.1 Installing and Setting Windows XP. ........................ 22
5. Installing the CL-AP.......................................................... 87

5.1 Installing the CL-AP...................................................... 87
5.2 Replacing the Menu Database...................................... 91
5.2.1 Replacing the Menu Database
(for the Japanese OS). ......................................... 91
5.2.2 Replacing the Menu Database
(for an OS other than Japanese)............................ 95
6. Installing the Screen Saver.............................................. 98
7. Installing the CL Components......................................... 99
2.2.3 Setting the OS..................................................... 36
7.1 Built_inConsole (A02 or later). ...................................... 99
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista............................. 42
7.2 FRIS Modules (A04 or later).......................................... 100
2.3.1 Installing and Setting Windows Vista....................... 42

8. Installing the Standard Key.............................................. 102
2.3.3 Installing Windows Vista SP2................................. 61
8.1 Installing the XG-1 Standard Key. ................................. 102
2.3.4 Setting the OS..................................................... 62
8.2 Installing the 5000 Standard Key................................... 103
3. Setting Up the Monitor...................................................... 82
8.3 Installing the Standard Key........................................... 104
3.1 Monitor with Touch Panel. ............................................ 82
9. ****BLANK****.................................................................... 105
3.2 17" CRT Monitor........................................................... 83

3.3 Super Resolution LCD Monitor SL-IC300....................... 83
10. Option Key Installation..................................................... 106
3.4 LCD Monitor SL-IC200. ................................................ 83
11. AP Key Installation............................................................ 108
3.5 Ikegami 1k Landscape Monitor...................................... 83
12. Initializing the Image Database........................................ 109
4. Installing MSDE/Database Management System

and Its Service Pack......................................................... 84
13. Display Optimization (LUT file settings)......................... 111
4.1 For Windows 2000/XP.................................................. 84

4.2 For Windows Vista. ...................................................... 86
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
14. Restoring the CL-Config................................................... 112

15. Creating the FTP Server (Windows 2000/XP only)......... 115
16. CR-IR346RU Settings........................................................ 117
6. Touch Panel Driver......................................... Appx RI A-9
16.1 Installing the RU M-Utility.............................................. 117
7. Console Software (Built_inConsole)............... Appx RI A-13
16.2 Setting Up the FTP Server............................................ 118
8. FRIS Modules [Applicable only in Japan]....... Appx RI A-14
16.3 Installing the RU-AP and Restoring the RU-Config......... 120
9. DVD-RAM Driver [Applicable only in Japan].... Appx RI A-15
17. CR-IR35X/36X/37X Settings.............................................. 123

18. Setting Up NetMeeting [Reference]................................. 124
19. IIS Network Virus Protection............................................ 127
20. Settings Necessary for Installation of Windows XP
Service Pack 2................................................................... 131
21. Checking the Virtual Memory Size.................................. 137
22. Setting the Event Log....................................................... 139
23. Canceling AutoPlay Mode (Windows Vista only)........... 142
24. Firewall Settings (Windows Vista only)........................... 143
10. POCKET id Console-AP................................. Appx RI A-16

11. ActiveSync...................................................... Appx RI A-20
12. Synapse Client Software
(Synapse Workstation)................................... Appx RI A-21
13. Exposure Guidance
[Applicable only in Japan]............................... Appx RI A-22
14. Precise Enlargement Software....................... Appx RI A-23
15. Windows Mobile Device Center
[Applicable only in Japan]............................... Appx RI A-26
16. QA ROI Measurement Software..................... Appx RI A-27
Appendix B Changing the CL Host Name........... Appx RI B-1
Appendix A Uninstalling the APs......................... Appx RI A-1
Appendix C Removing/Reinstalling the Board

(PEI/PSI)............................................. Appx RI C-1
1. CL-AP............................................................. Appx RI A-2
Appendix D Upgrading the AP............................. Appx RI D-1
2. MSDE (SQL SP Included) / SQL Server......... Appx RI A-3

2.1
For Windows 2000/XP................................ Appx RI A-3
2.2
For Windows Vista..................................... Appx RI A-4
3. RU-AP............................................................. Appx RI A-6
4. RU M-Utility..................................................... Appx RI A-7
Appendix E Setup for Security Enhancement.... Appx RI E-1

1. For Windows 2000/XP.................................... Appx RI E-1
2. For Windows Vista.......................................... Appx RI E-4
Appendix F Installing the Video Board Driver....
Appx RI F-1
5. Option Keys.................................................... Appx RI A-8

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appendix G Reinstalling the Software

(NEC PC)............................................ Appx RI G-1
1. Installation Flow.............................................. Appx RI G-1
21. Setting the Virtual Memory Size..................... Appx RI G-17

22. Setting the Event Log..................................... Appx RI G-17
2. Installing and Setting Up the OS..................... Appx RI G-3
Appendix H Installing CL-AP V3.1....................... Appx RI H-1
3. Setting Up the Monitor.................................... Appx RI G-14
Appendix I RAID-related Settings.......................
Appx RI I-1
1. Setting to Enable the RAID Mode...................
Appx RI I-1
2. Creating a RAID Level-1 Configuration..........
Appx RI I-2
3. Creating an Intel SATA Driver FD and

Installing the RAID Driver...............................
Appx RI I-4
4. RAID Structure Confirmation

(only for DELL OptiPlex 960MT/780MT).........
Appx RI I-7
4. Installing MSDE and Its Service Pack............ Appx RI G-14

5. Installing the CL-AP........................................ Appx RI G-14
5.1
Installing the CL-AP. .................................. Appx RI G-14
5.2
Replacing the Menu Database..................... Appx RI G-14
6. Installing the Screen Saver............................. Appx RI G-14
7. Installing the CL Components......................... Appx RI G-14
8. Installing the Standard Key............................. Appx RI G-14
9. ****BLANK****................................................. Appx RI G-14
10. Installing the Option Key................................. Appx RI G-14
11. Installing the AP Key and Setting
the User Interface........................................... Appx RI G-14
12. Initializing the Image Database....................... Appx RI G-15
13. Optimizing the Screen Display
(Setting the LUT file)....................................... Appx RI G-15
14. Restoring the CL-Config................................. Appx RI G-15
15. Creating the FTP Server................................. Appx RI G-15
16. CR-IR346RU Settings..................................... Appx RI G-17
5. Replacement Procedure of
Damaged RAID Configuration HDD
(only for DELL OptiPlex 960MT/780MT)......... Appx RI I-8
5.1
Confirmimg which HDD is damaged.............
Appx RI I-8
5.2
Replacing HDD. ........................................ Appx RI I-10
5.3
Rebuilding RAID........................................ Appx RI I-10
5.4
Verification................................................ Appx RI I-12
6. Setting the RAID Status Display Tool
(Windows XP / Vista only).............................. Appx RI I-13
6.1
Installing the RAID Status Display Tool......... Appx RI I-13
6.2
17. CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X Settings............. Appx RI G-17
6.3
18. Setting Up NetMeeting [Reference]................ Appx RI G-17
6.4
19. IIS Network Virus Protection........................... Appx RI G-17

20. Settings Necessary for Installation of
Windows XP Service Pack 2.......................... Appx RI G-17
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Setting the operation of

RAID Status Display Tool............................ Appx RI I-15
Settings Necessary for Dell Precision WS370
(Intel Application Accelerator).................... Appx RI I-16
Disabling RAID Status Display Tool.............. Appx RI I-16
Appendix J Reinstalling the Software (HP PC)

[Applicable only in Japan]...............
Appx RI J-1
MU: Maintenance Utility

1. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility..................................
2. Overview of Service Utility Functions.............................
3. Various Configuration Settings

Setup Configuration Item.............................................
3.1 Meanings of Individual Tree Items.................................
3.2 Editing the Listed Configuration Items. .......................... 10

3.3 Saving the Configuration Data....................................... 11
3.4 Configuration Details 1. IMAGE MODALITY.............. 12
3.5 Configuration Details 3. QA FUNCTION.................... 24
3.6 Configuration Details 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION............ 28
3.7 Configuration Details 7. CONFIG OPTION................ 55
3.8 Configuration Details 8. CONFIG QC........................ 57
3.9 Configuration Details 9. CONFIG PDA...................... 58
7. Verifying the Connection to

Other Connected Equipment Verify Connection....... 72
8. Management of Various Databases
DataBase Utility............................................................ 74
8.1 Initializing the Image Database. .................................... 74
8.2 Clearing the Contents of the Image Output Queue......... 75
8.3 Initializing the Patient Database. ................................... 76
8.4 Initializing the Study Reservation Database
(Only for B version). ..................................................... 77
9. Setting the Magnetic Card Magnetic Card Setting.... 78

9.1 Setting the Hospital Card Data Format. ......................... 78
9.2 Defining the ISO Card Character Read Code................. 78
10. Setting the Barcode Barcode Setting......................... 79
3.10 Configuration Details 10. CONFIG QR...................... 59
11. Customizing the QA Items Customized QA Item....... 81
3.11 Setting the Name Elements for DICOM Connection. ...... 60
12. Setting the Selectors Selector Setting....................... 83
3.12 Setting Up the DICOM Print Film Sorting Function. ........ 61

3.13 Patient Information Sharing Function Setup................... 64
3.14 MAC Address Manual Input. ......................................... 65
3.15 Log Information Sharing Function Setup........................ 66
4. Display Optimization LUT............................................ 68

5. Restoring/Backing Up the Configuration File
Configuration Restore/Backup.................................... 69
13. Collecting the Log and Configuration Files

Log/Configuration Files Acquisition Tool.................. 84
13.1 For Software Version V5.0 (B) or Earlier........................ 85
13.2 For Software Version V6.0 (B) or Later.......................... 86
14. Setting the DICOM MWM C-FIND Tags

DICOM MWM C-FIND Tag Setting................................ 88
6. Retrieving EDR Data Retrieve EDR Backup Data...... 70

010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
15. Setting the POCKET id Console

P-Console Setting......................................................... 89
15.1 Transferring the Configuration Data............................... 89
15.2 Registering the Device ID. ............................................ 90
15.3 Checking Version of
the POCKET id Console Application.............................. 91
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR: Function-specific Reference

Print Output Function................................................... 1-1
DICOM Tag Mapping Function................................... 2-1
1. Setup Necessary When Connecting the LP.................
1-2
Creating/Deleting Markers.......................................... 3-1
2. Setup Necessary When Editing the Film Annotation

Character Format...........................................................
1-4
Using the DICOM Log Mode....................................... 4-1
2.1 Setup Items Table.....................................................
1-4
2.2 Precautions of the Film Annotation Character Format... 1-28
Display Gradation Correction Setup.......................
5-1
3. Film Annotation Character Setup

(Direct Editing of FilmStrFmt)....................................... 1-29
1. LUT Bit Conversion Tool...............................................
5-3
1.1 Functions and Overview of the LUT Bit Conversion

Tool..........................................................................
5-3
1.2 Starting/Exiting the LUT Bit Conversion Tool...............
5-4
1.3 Bit Conversion of an LUT File. ...................................
5-4
DICOM Tag Editing Function (for Siemens).........
6-1
3.1 Procedure for Directly Editing the FilmStrFmt File. ...... 1-29
3.2 FilmStrFmt File Description Format. ........................... 1-30
3.3 Changing the Film Annotation Characters................... 1-32
3.4 Format Descriptors.................................................... 1-36
3.5 Attribute Descriptors.................................................. 1-41
3.6 Film Annotation Character Verification Procedure....... 1-46
4. Setting the DICOM Print Output Conditions................ 1-47
Setup of Log Output Items of the Exposure

Result Log Function...................................................... 7-1
Wake-on-LAN Setup. ..................................................... 8-1
GPR (Grid Pattern Removal Function) Setup......
9-1
Setup for Addition of Descriptive Characters

to Icons [Applicable only in Japan]......................... 10-1
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
10
Setup of Rules Applied for

Automatic Patient ID Issuance.................................. 11-1
Setup of Exposure Guidance
[Applicable only in Japan].......................................... 12-1
Setup of Auto Shuttering Processing..................... 13-1
Setup of LUT Reverse-conversion Processing. .. 14-1
Setup of CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 Icons
Accession Number Data Truncation Function.... 16-1
Installation of Standard Markers
Setup of Date and Time Display. .............................. 18-1
Setup of Characters Under the Windows XP and
Windows Vista Coexistent Environment
Adding and Setting the Serial Connector............. 20-1

1. Adding a Serial Connector............................................ 20-1
1.1 Mounting the PSI04A Board....................................... 20-2
1.2 Adding a Serial Connector from the Mother Board. ..... 20-5
1.3 Mounting the MOXA Board........................................ 20-8
1.3.1 Installing the MOXA Board Class Driver
(for Windows XP only)....................................... 20-9
1.3.2 Mounting the MOXA Board................................. 20-10
2. Installing the Driver........................................................ 20-11

2.1 Installing the PSI04A Board Driver. ............................ 20-11
2.2 Installing the MOXA Board Driver............................... 20-12
2.2.1 Installing the MOXA Board Driver
(For Windows XP)............................................. 20-12
(For Windows VIsta).......................................... 20-16
2.2.3 Confirming Installation of the MOXA Board Driver.... 20-19
3. Port and Service Utility Settings................................... 20-20

3.1 The Case Where the PC-standard Serial Connector
and an Add-in Serial Connector are Used................... 20-20
3.2 The Case Where a MOXA Board is Used................... 20-22
Setting the Exposure Index Function..................... 21-1

Accession Number Character String
Adding Function. ............................................................ 22-1
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
11
SP: Service Parts

1. Service Parts List..............................................................
1.1 How to Use Service Parts List.......................................
1.2 Service Parts List. ........................................................
1.3 Service Parts List

(NEC PC: Applicable only for overseas users). ..............
1.4 Service Parts List (HP PC: Applicable only in Japan)...... 10
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
12
PM: Preventive Maintenance

1. Preventive Maintenance Items.........................................
2. Checking for a Fatal Error................................................
2.1 Confirming the Event Log. ............................................
3. Safety.................................................................................
3.1 Service Voltage............................................................
3.2 Power Plug. .................................................................
4. Hardware Cleaning............................................................
4.1 PC Internal Cleaning. ...................................................
4.2 Keyboard and Mouse Cleaning.....................................
4.3 LCD Cleaning...............................................................
4.4 Optical Drive Cleaning..................................................
5. Executing the Error Analysis...........................................
5.1 Checking the Memory and Hard Disk. ...........................
6. Functional Checks............................................................
6.1 Confirmation of Image Input to Storage onto HDD..........
6.2 Image Output to Film....................................................
6.3 Image Transfer.............................................................
7. Backup of Setup Files and Verification of

Date and Time....................................................................
7.1 Backup of Setup Files and Log Files..............................
7.2 Verification of Date and Time........................................
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
13
IN-A: Installation Connection to One XG-1

RU or CR-IR355RU/356/357
5.1.2 OS Setups.......................................................... A18
1. CL Installation Conditions................................................ A1
1.1 Dimensions and Weight................................................ A1
1.2 Temperature and Humidity............................................ A1
1.3 Places of Installation..................................................... A1
1.4 Power Requirements.................................................... A1
1.5 Network Cable. ............................................................ A1
2. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility.................................. A2

3. Installation Procedure Overview..................................... A5
4. CL Hardware Setup........................................................... A6
4.1 Unloading and Unpacking............................................. A6
4.2 Checking the Component Items. ................................... A7
4.3 Installing the Accessories and Optional Items................ A9
4.3.1 PC Boards.......................................................... A10
4.3.2 Insulating Transformer (procedures required only
for units used in Japan)......................................... A12
4.3.3 Keyboard, Mouse, and Power Cable....................... A12
4.3.4 Monitor............................................................... A13
4.4 Making a Cable Connection to the RU........................... A15

4.5 Making a Cable Connection to the LP............................ A15
4.6 Connecting to the Other Equipment............................... A16
5.1.3 Touch Panel Driver Installation [Skip this procedure

if the 15" monitor with a touch panel is provided.]...... A19
5.1.4 Procedure for Avoiding a Password Input Prompt
When Exiting the Suspend Mode. .......................... A22
5.1.5 Setup of CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 Icons
[applicable only in Japan]...................................... A23
5.1.6 Option Key Installation.......................................... A23
5.1.7 AP Key Installation............................................... A24
5.1.8 CL Startup Verification.......................................... A25
5.2 CL Setup for RU Connection......................................... A25

5.2.1 Installing the RU M-Utility...................................... A26
5.2.2 Installing the RU-AP............................................. A27
5.3 Setup with Service Utility. ............................................. A30

5.3.1 Starting the Service Utility. .................................... A30
5.3.2 CL System Information Setup................................ A31
5.3.3 Setting the LP Information..................................... A34
5.3.4 Optimizing the Monitor Display............................... A35
5.3.5 Exiting the Service Utility....................................... A36
5.3.6 Changing the Menu Database
(for non-Japanese versions only). .......................... A37
5.4 Procedures for Changing the CL and RU IP Addresses. .. A40

5.5 Procedures for Changing the CL Host Name. ................ A40
5.6 CL Setup for Connection to Other Equipment. ............... A40
5.7 Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader Connection...... A40
5. Software Setup.................................................................. A17

5.1 CL-AP Startup.............................................................. A17
5.1.1 OS Startup.......................................................... A18
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
14
6. Checkout Procedures....................................................... A41

6.1 Checking the Connection between the CL and RU......... A41
6.2 Checking the Connection between the CL and Other
Equipment. .................................................................. A43
6.3 Checking the Output Image. ......................................... A43
7. Setup File Backup and RU Error Log

Verification/Deletion.......................................................... A46
7.1 Backing Up the CL Setup File. ...................................... A46
7.2 Backing Up the RU Setup File....................................... A47
7.3 Verifying and Deleting the RU Error Log........................ A49
7.3.1 Verifying the RU Error Log. ................................... A49
7.3.2 Deleting the RU Error Log..................................... A50
7.4 Turning OFF the CL and RU......................................... A50
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
15
IN-B: Installation Connection to Two or More RUs, 5000 plus and

CR-IR356/357/359/362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372
4.1.6 Option Key Installation.......................................... B27
1. CL Installation Conditions................................................ B1
2. Installation Workflow........................................................ B2
3. CL Hardware Setup........................................................... B6
3.1 Unloading and Unpacking............................................. B6
3.2 Checking the Component Items. ................................... B7
3.3 Installing the Accessories and Optional Items................ B10
3.3.1 PC Boards.......................................................... B11
3.3.2 Insulating Transformer (procedures required
only for units used in Japan).................................. B13
3.3.3 Keyboard, Mouse, and Power Cable....................... B13
3.3.4 Monitor............................................................... B14
3.3.5 Remote Power Control Box................................... B16
4.1.7 AP Key Installation............................................... B29

4.1.8 CL Startup Verification.......................................... B29
4.2 Setup for the CL with the Service Utility......................... B31

4.2.1 Starting the Service Utility. .................................... B31
4.2.2 CL System Information Setup................................ B32
4.2.3 Optimizing the Monitor Display............................... B34
4.2.4 Changing the Menu Database................................ B35
4.3 Configuration Settings for LP Connection. ..................... B40

4.4 CL Settings for Connection to Other Equipment............. B40
4.5 Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader Connection...... B41
4.6 Configuration Settings for IR (5000plus series)
Connection. ................................................................. B42
4.6.1 Starting CL Service Utility...................................... B42
3.4 Making a Cable Connection to Other Equipment............ B16
4.6.2 Setups Necessary for the CL................................. B42
3.5 Making a Cable Connection to the LP............................ B17
4.6.3 Setups Necessary for the IR.................................. B44
3.6 Mounting the Ferrite Core............................................. B17
4. CL Software Setup............................................................ B18

4.1 CL-AP Startup.............................................................. B19
4.1.1 OS Startup.......................................................... B20
4.1.2 OS Setups.......................................................... B21
if the 15 monitor with a touch panel is provided.]...... B22
4.6.4 Setups Necessary for Exchanging ID Information. .... B46

4.6.5 IDT CONNECTION (Patient Information Sharing
Function) Setup................................................... B47
4.6.6 Saving Configuration............................................ B47
4.6.7 Selector Setup (applicable only when a built-in
device is connected)............................................. B48
4.6.8 Settings for Transfer of Image Processing
Parameters (only for A02 and A03)......................... B50
4.6.9 Connection Verification and Setup File Backup. ....... B52
4.1.4 Procedure for Avoiding a Password Input Prompt

When Exiting the Suspend Mode. .......................... B25
4.7 Setup for RU (XG-1 RU) Connection............................. B53
4.1.5 Setup for Addition of Descriptive Characters to Icons

[applicable only in Japan]...................................... B26
4.7.2 Installing the RU M-Utility...................................... B56
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
4.7.1 Performing Setup with the Service Utility................. B54
16
4.7.3 Installing the RU-AP (for 1st unit). .......................... B58

4.7.4 Installing the RU-AP (for 2nd and 3rd units)............. B61
4.7.5 Changing the CL IP Address. ................................ B62
4.7.6 Setting Up IDT CONNECTION (patient information
sharing function).................................................. B62
4.7.7 Setting the Selector.............................................. B62
4.7.8 Settings Necessary for Connection of Two or
More CLs............................................................ B63
4.7.9 Checking Connections and Backing Up Setup Files.... B63
4.8 Setup for CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X Connection......... B64

4.8.1 Changing the CL IP Address. ................................ B64
4.8.2 Performing Setup with the Service Utility................. B64
4.8.3 IDT CONNECTION (patient information sharing
function) Setup.................................................... B67
4.8.4 Selector Setup..................................................... B67
More CLs............................................................ B69
4.8.6 CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X Setup......................... B69
4.8.7 Connection Verification and Setup File Backup. ....... B71
4.8.8 Wake-on-LAN Setup. ........................................... B71
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
17
IN-C: Installation Connection to

9000 Series Equipment
1. CL Installation Conditions
[Applicable only in Japan]................................................ C1
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
18
Appx IN: Installation Appendix

Appendix 1 Installing the Touch
Panel Driver.............................
Appendix 2 Setting the RU-Config.........
Appx IN1-1
Appx IN2-1
Appendix 3 Connecting the Barcode

Reader [Option].....................
Appx IN3-1
1. Connecting the Barcode Reader to

the CL...............................................................
Appx IN3-1
2. Performing Setup for IP Barcode Use...........
Appx IN3-1
3. Setup for Type B ID Online Operations.........
Appx IN3-1
4. DENSO Barcode Reader.................................
Appx IN3-3
5. OPTOELECTRONICS Barcode Reader..........
Appx IN3-4
Appendix 5 Procedures for Changing

the CL and RU IP Addresses....
Appx IN5-1
1. Incorporating into the Network......................
Appx IN5-1
2. Changing the Software Settings....................
Appx IN5-1
Appendix 6 Installing the Monitor

Rack [Option]. ........................
Appx IN6-1
Appendix 7 Attaching the Monitor

Wall-Mounting Bracket
[Option].....................................
Appx IN7-1
Appendix 8 Changing the RU Host

Name..........................................
Appx IN8-1
1. When Version 1.1 or Earlier Is Used..............
Appx IN8-1
Appendix 4 Setting Up the Magnetic

Card [Option]..........................
Appx IN4-1
2. When Version 1.2 or Later Is Used................
Appx IN8-5
1. Installing the Wall-Mounting Bracket............
Appx IN4-1
2. Connecting the CL to the Reader..................
Appx IN4-2
Appendix 9 Changing the CL IP

Address. ...................................
Appx IN9-1
3. Setting the Reader and Magnetic Card.........
Appx IN4-3
4. Hospital Card Data Format Setup

Example [Reference].......................................
Appx IN4-6
5. ID Card Data Format [Reference]...................
Appx IN4-10
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
19
Appendix 10 Connecting
a High-resolution Monitor....
1. Mounting a High-resolution Monitor
Board (When a 16001200 or 20481536
Resolution Monitor is Used)..........................
2. Installing a High-resolution Monitor
Driver (When a 16001200 or 20481536
Resolution Monitor is Used)..........................
Appx IN10-1
Appx IN10-1
4.3.2 Setting the monitor........................
Appx IN10-1
4. Reinstalling the Application and

Performing Necessary Settings.....................
Appx IN10-7
Appx IN11-1
1. Uninstalling the Video Driver.........................
Appx IN11-2
2. Connecting the Video Board..........................
Appx IN11-4
3. Installing the Monitor......................................
Appx IN11-5
4. Installing and Setting the Video Driver.........
Appx IN11-6
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN11-20
Appx IN11-23
4.4 When Using a FireGL V3600

for Windows Vista....................................... Appx IN11-25
4.4.1 Installing the video driver................
Appendix 11 Connecting the 2nd

Monitor......................................
Appx IN11-13
Appx IN11-15
4.3 When Using a VREngine/SMD5

for Windows Vista....................................... Appx IN11-20
Appx IN10-5

3. Changing to a High-resolution Monitor

(12801024, 16001200 or 20481536
monitor)............................................................
4.1 When Using a VREngine/SMD5

for Windows XP..........................................
4.2 When Using a FireGL V3600

for Windows XP.......................................... Appx IN11-13
Appx IN11-25
Appx IN11-29
4.5 When No Video Boards Are Added. ............ Appx IN11-33
4.5.1 Connecting the monitor..................
Appx IN11-33
Appx IN11-34
4.6 Adjusting Width and Height on the 2nd
Monitor (Common to VREngine/SMD5
and FireGL V3600)..................................... Appx IN11-36
5. Changing and Setting the 2nd Monitor......... Appx IN11-37

5.1 Changing the 2nd Monitor........................... Appx IN11-37
5.2 Settings Necessary for the 2nd Monitor to
Recognize the Linking Application............... Appx IN11-37
Appx IN11-6
Appx IN11-6
Appx IN11-9
20
OE: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment

CL+Local Printer (E-i/f Connection)........................
1-1
CL+HI-C/QA-WS/OD-F
(FINP: Image Input/Output)......................................... 2-1
1. Hardware Setup..............................................................
1-3
1. Hardware Setup..............................................................
2-3
1.1 Installing the PEI Board. ............................................
1-3
1.2 Connecting the Cable................................................
1-5
2. Software Setup...............................................................
2-4
2.1 FINP Image Input/Output Option Key Installation. .......
2-4
2. Software Setup...............................................................
1-6
2.2 AP Key Reinstallation................................................
2-5
2.1 CL Software Setup....................................................
1-6
1-6
1-7
1-8
2.3 Service Utility Startup. ...............................................
2-5
2.4 Setups Required for Outputting Images to Other

Connected Equipment...............................................
2-6
2.4.1 Setup of Information on Other Connected

Equipment (ALL OTHER NODES).......................
2-7
2.1.1 Installing the LP Option Key. ..............................

2.1.2 Reinstalling the AP Key. ....................................
2.1.3 Starting the Service Utility. .................................
2.1.4 Registering the Printer for Automatic Image
Printout When a Study is Completed
CONNECTING EQUIPMENT..............................
1-9
2.1.5 Setting the System Information for CL/LP

Connection. ..................................................... 1-10
2.1.6 Setting the Film Annotation Character Format....... 1-10
2.1.7 Exiting the Service Utility.................................... 1-11
2.4.2 Setup for Changing the Image Data Compression

Type Depending on the MPM Code
(FINP COMPRESSION TYPE). .......................... 2-10
2.4.3 Setup for Automatic Image Distribution
(DISTRIBUTION CODE).................................... 2-11
2.4.4 Setup for CONNECTING EQUIPMENT................ 2-12
2.2 Printer Main Unit Setup.............................................. 1-11
2.5 Setup for Inputting Images from Other Connected

Equipment. ............................................................... 2-13
3. Verifying the Connection............................................... 1-12
2.6 Service Utility Shutdown............................................ 2-14
3.1 Starting the CL-AP. ................................................... 1-12
2.7 Software Setup on Other Connected Equipment......... 2-14
3.2 Verifying the Film Annotation Character Format.......... 1-13
3. Connection Checkout.................................................... 2-15
4. Backing Up the Setup File............................................. 1-14
3.1 CL-AP Startup........................................................... 2-15

3.2 Image Input/output Checkout..................................... 2-15
4. Setup File Backup.......................................................... 2-16
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
21
CL+HI-C655/QA-WS/FCR VIEW
(DICOM CR Storage)...................................................... 3-1
CL+Other (DICOM CR Storage:

Transfer of Processed Images)................................. 4-1
1. Hardware Setup..............................................................
3-3
1. Hardware Setup..............................................................
4-3
2. Software Setup...............................................................
3-4
2. Software Setup...............................................................
4-4
4-4
2.1.3 Service Utility Startup. .......................................
3-4
3-4
3-5
3-5
2.1.4 Setup of Information on This Equipment for

the DICOM CR Storage Function. .......................
2.1.3 Starting the Service Utility. .................................
4-4
4-5
4-5
3-6
2.1.4 Setup of Information on This Equipment for

the DICOM CR Storage Function. .......................
4-6
3-9
3-13
3-13
3-14
3-16
3-16
2.1.5 Registration of Information on Other Connected

Equipment for the DICOM CR Storage Function....
4-9
2.1.1 Installation of DICOM CR Storage Option Key.......

2.1.2 AP Key Reinstallation........................................

Equipment for the DICOM CR Storage Function....
2.1.6 Settings of Automatic Image Distribution. .............
2.1.7 Setup for CONNECTING EQUIPMENT................
2.1.8 Settings for UID Issuance...................................
2.1.9 Changing the Name Elements. ...........................
2.1.10 Service Utility Shutdown. ...................................
2.1.1 Installing
the Processed Image Transmission Option Key.....
2.1.2 Reinstalling the AP Key. ....................................
2.1.6 Settings of Automatic Image Distribution

(DISTRIBUTION CODE).................................... 4-13
2.1.7 Setup for CONNECTING EQUIPMENT................ 4-14
2.1.8 Settings for UID Issuance................................... 4-15
2.1.9 Changing the Name Elements. ........................... 4-17
2.1.10 Service Utility Shutdown. ................................... 4-17
3.1 CL-AP Startup........................................................... 3-17
3.2 Image Transfer to Other Connected Equipment.......... 3-17
3.1 CL-AP Startup........................................................... 4-18
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
22
CL+FN-PS551/DRYPIX/FM-DP L (DICOM Print). ..
5-1
CL+FN-PS551 or 5000 Series

(FINP: Print Output)....................................................... 6-1
1. Hardware Setup..............................................................
5-2
1. Hardware Setup..............................................................
6-3
2. Software Setup...............................................................
5-3
2. Software Setup...............................................................
6-4
2.1 FINP Image Input/Output Option Key Installation. .......
6-4
6-5
2.1.3 Service Utility Startup. .......................................
5-3
5-3
5-4
5-4
6-5
2.1.4 Setup of Information on This Equipment

for the DICOM Print Function..............................
2.4 Printout Setup...........................................................
6-6
5-5

Equipment for the DICOM Print Function..............

Equipment (ALL OTHER NODES).......................
6-7
5-8
2.4.2 Setup for Changing the Image Data Compression

Type Depending on the MPM Code
(FINP COMPRESSION TYPE). .......................... 6-10
2.1.1 Installation of the DICOM Print Option Key. ..........

2.1.2 AP Key Reinstallation........................................
2.1.6 Registration of Printer That Automatically Outputs

Print Films Upon Completion of Checkout
CONNECTING EQUIPMENT.............................. 5-12
2.1.7 Film Annotation Character Format Setup.............. 5-13
2.1.8 Changes in Name Elements............................... 5-14
2.1.9 Setup for Film Sorting Function........................... 5-14
2.5 Registering the Printer for Automatic Image Printout

When a Study is Completed
CONNECTING EQUIPMENT..................................... 6-11
2.1.10 Service Utility Shutdown. ................................... 5-14
2.7 Software Setup for Other Connected Equipment......... 6-12
2.2 Software Setup for Other Connected Equipment......... 5-14
3.1 CL-AP Startup........................................................... 6-13
3.2 Printout Checkout...................................................... 6-13
3.2 Verifying the Film Annotation Character Format.......... 5-16
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
23
CL+RIS/IDC4 (ID Online).............................................. 7-1
CL+RIS (DICOM MWM/DICOM PPS)........................
8-1
1. Hardware Setup..............................................................
7-2
1. Hardware Setup..............................................................
8-3
1.1 Adding a Serial Connector

[Only when using the serial i/f]....................................
7-2
2. Software Setup...............................................................
8-4
1.2 Connecting the Cable................................................
7-3
2.1 DICOM MWM or DICOM PPS Option Key Installation. ..
8-4
2. CL Software Setup.........................................................
7-4
8-5
2.1 Patient Information Online Option Key Installation.......
7-4
2.3 Setup for the DICOM MWM Function. ........................
8-5
7-5
2.3 Driver Installation. .....................................................
7-5
7-6
2.5 Port and Service Utility Setup.....................................
7-7
2.6 Configuration Setup...................................................
2.3.1 Setup of CL Information for the DICOM MWM

Function. .........................................................
2.3.2 Registration of RIS Information. ..........................
2.3.3 Registration of RIS Used for MWM......................
8-5
8-8
8-9
2.4 Setup for the DICOM PPS Function. .......................... 8-10

2.4.1 Setup of CL Information for the DICOM PPS
Function. ......................................................... 8-10
7-7
2.6.1 Configuration Setup for RIS Connection............... 7-8
2.6.2 Configuration Setup IDC4 Connection.................. 7-10
2.4.2 Registration of RIS Information. .......................... 8-11
2.5 MWM/PPS Configuration Setup. ................................ 8-13
2.5.2 Setting the Method of Inquiring at the RIS............. 8-14

3.2 Patient Information Reception Checkout..................... 7-14
2.4.3 Registration of RIS Used with PPS...................... 8-12

2.5.1 General Settings for MWM/PPS.......................... 8-13
2.5.3 Setting Additional MWM Inquiry Items.................. 8-15
2.5.4 Setting the Compliance with the JJ1017
Guideline......................................................... 8-15
2.5.5 Setting the Additional PPS Items to be Returned
to the RIS. ....................................................... 8-16
2.5.6 Setup of Timing for Transmission of PPS Study
Termination Notice............................................ 8-16
2.5.7 Embedding the Exposure Information into a PPS
Standard Tag. .................................................. 8-17
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
24
2.5.8 Exposure Result Editing Setup............................ 8-17

2.5.9 Setting the MWM Code Meaning as
a Menu Name................................................... 8-18
2.5.10 Settings for Regenerating StudyInstanceUID for
a Study Acquired Using the MWM Function.......... 8-19
2.5.11 Setting the Compliance with JJ1017 V3................ 8-21
2.6 Changing Name Elements......................................... 8-23

2.7 Setup for Exposure Menu/Study Menu Mapping. ........ 8-23

3.2 Verifying MWM.......................................................... 8-25
3.3 Verifying PPS............................................................ 8-25
CL+Archiver (Storage Commitment Push)...........
9-1
1. Hardware Setup..............................................................
9-3
2. Software Setup...............................................................
9-4
2.1 Installing the DICOM CR Storage Option Keys............
9-4
2.2 Installing the DICOM Commitment Push Option Key....
9-5
2.3 Reinstalling the AP Key. ............................................
9-5
2.4 Performing DICOM CR Storage Setup........................
9-6
2.5 Setting Information on This Equipment for

the Commitment Push Function. ................................
9-6
2.6 Registering the Archiver Information for

the Commitment Push Function. ................................
9-8
2.7 Registering the SC AE Name..................................... 9-10
3. Verifying the Function................................................... 9-11

3.2 Transferring an Image to the Archiver......................... 9-11
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
25
CL+QA-WS
(Transfer of Energy Subtraction Images).............. 10-1
CL+F-RIS (Ordering)
1. Hardware Setup.............................................................. 10-3

2. Software Setup............................................................... 10-4
2.1 CL Software Setup.................................................... 10-4
2.1.1 Option Key Installation....................................... 10-4
2.1.2 AP Key Reinstallation........................................ 10-5
2.1.3 Setup of Information of This Equipment................ 10-5
2.1.4 Registration of QA-WS Information...................... 10-10
2.1.5 Selecting the Type of the Image to be
Transferred...................................................... 10-15
2.1.6 Setting the Automatic Image Distribution
Function. ......................................................... 10-15
2.1.7 Changing Name Elements.................................. 10-16
2.2 QA-WS Software Setup............................................. 10-16
3. Verifying the Function................................................... 10-17

3.1 CL-AP Startup........................................................... 10-17
3.2 Image Transfer to the QA-WS.................................... 10-17
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
26
CL+X-Ray Controller (Serial Connection)............. 12-1

1. Hardware Setup.............................................................. 12-2
1.1 Adding a Serial Connector......................................... 12-2
CL+RIS (Ordering - Serial Connection)

CL+Receipt Computer/Electronic Patient
Record System [Applicable only in Japan].......... 14-1
1.2 Connecting the Cable................................................ 12-3

1.3 Hardware Setup
[for Siemens mammography X-CON]. ........................ 12-3
2. Software Setup............................................................... 12-4

2.1 Installing the X-CON Control Function Option Key. ..... 12-4
2.2 Reinstalling the AP Key. ............................................ 12-5
2.3 Installing the Driver.................................................... 12-5
2.4 Setting the Port and the Service Utility........................ 12-5
2.5 Setting Configuration for the X-CON........................... 12-6
2.6 Setting the OS COM Ports
[for Siemens mammography X-CON]. ........................ 12-9
3. Verifying the Connection/Data Exchange.................... 12-10

3.1 Verifying the Serial Connection.................................. 12-10
3.2 Checking the Data Exchange..................................... 12-11

5. X-CON Specifications [Reference]............................... 12-13
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
27
CL+CL (Cluster Connection)...................................... 15-1
CL+Other (DICOM MG Storage:

Digital Mammogram Transfer)................................... 16-1
1. Hardware Setup.............................................................. 15-2
1. Hardware Setup.............................................................. 16-2
2. Software Setup............................................................... 15-3
2. CL Software Setup......................................................... 16-3
2.1 Software Setup for All CLs......................................... 15-3
2.1 Installing the Digital Mammography Exposure Menu. .. 16-3
2.1.1 Verifying the Host Name.................................... 15-3

2.1.2 Initializing the Output Queue and Image
Database......................................................... 15-4
2.2 Installing the Digital Mammogram Transmission

Option Keys.............................................................. 16-4
2.1.3 Equalizing the Configuration Settings................... 15-5

2.1.4 Equalizing the Menu/Environment/Table
Settings........................................................... 15-6
2.4 Setting Up on the CL for DICOM MG Storage

Function.................................................................... 16-5
2.1.5 Performing Setup for Drive Sharing. .................... 15-11

2.1.6 Performing NetBEUI Setup................................. 15-18
2.1.7 Performing Study Information Sharing Setup......... 15-20
2.1.8 Defining the Share Range.................................. 15-21
2.1.9 Backing Up/Restoring the Share Settings............. 15-22
2.2 Software Setup for Individual CLs. ............................. 15-25
2.5 Registering on the Other Connected Equipment

for DICOM MG Storage Function. .............................. 16-8
2.6 Setting Up the Automatic Image Distribution
Function (DISTRIBUTION CODE).............................. 16-12
2.7 Setting Up CONNECTING EQUIPMENT.................... 16-13
2.8 Setting Up the UID Issuance Method.......................... 16-13
2.2.1 Performing Integrated Output Processing Setup.... 15-25
2.9 Changing the Name Elements.................................... 16-14
2.2.2 Performing Centralized Patient Information

Management Setup........................................... 15-27
2.2.3 Performing Study List Setup............................... 15-28
3.1 CL-AP Startup........................................................... 16-15
3. Connection Verification................................................. 15-29

3.1 Study Registration..................................................... 15-29
3.2 Image Reading.......................................................... 15-30

3.3 Study Information and Image Display......................... 15-30

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
28
CL+Removable Media (DICOM Media Storage)... 17-1
CL+POCKET id Console
(Portable Exposure Function). .................................. 18-1
1. Hardware Setup.............................................................. 17-3
1. Hardware Setup.............................................................. 18-2

2.1 Installation of the Removable Media Driver................. 17-4
1.1 Unpacking and Charging the POCKET id Console...... 18-2

1.2 Adding the Serial Connector. ..................................... 18-2
2.2 Installation of the Media Storage Option Key............... 17-5
2.3 Reinstallation of the AP Key....................................... 17-5
2.1 Connecting the CL and the POCKET id Console......... 18-3
2.4 Setup of Removable Media Information on

the DICOM Media Storage Function........................... 17-6
2.2 Installing the Portable Option Key. ............................. 18-6
2.5 CONNECTING EQUIPMENT Settings........................ 17-10

2.6 Configuration Settings. .............................................. 17-11

3.1 CL-AP Startup........................................................... 17-12
3.2 Image Storage onto the Storage Media. ..................... 17-12
3.2.1 Formatting the Storage Media............................. 17-12
3.2.2 Recognizing the Removable Media...................... 17-12
3.2.3 Image Storage.................................................. 17-13

2.4 Setting Up the POCKET id Console. .......................... 18-7
2.4.1 Setting Date and Time....................................... 18-7
2.4.2 Setting the Device ID......................................... 18-8
2.4.3 Setting Screen Properties. ................................. 18-9
2.4.4 Setting the Connection Speed............................. 18-12
2.5 Registering the Device ID. ......................................... 18-13

2.6 Installing and Setting Up
the POCKET id Console Application........................... 18-14
2.6.1 Installing the POCKET id Console Application....... 18-14
2.6.2 Setting Up
the POCKET id Console Service Utility. ............... 18-16
2.6.3 Setting Configuration Items for
the POCKET id Console. ................................... 18-17
2.6.4 Starting the POCKET id Console Application and
Transferring the Configuration File....................... 18-18
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
29
3. Connection Verification................................................. 18-21
CL+Synapse Server (Web Query). ........................... 19-1

3.2 Transferring Study Reception Information
from the CL to the POCKET id Console...................... 18-21
3.3 Performing a Study and Reading a Barcode. .............. 18-22
1. Hardware Setup.............................................................. 19-2

2.1 Uninstalling the CL-AP............................................... 19-3
3.4 Receiving Study Reception Information Transmitted

from the POCKET id Console to the CL and
Checking the Result. ................................................. 18-23
2.2 Uninstalling NetMeeting (for Windows XP only)........... 19-3
2.4 Installing the CL-AP................................................... 19-4
2.3 Installing the Synapse Client Software........................ 19-4

2.5 Installing the Synapse Web Query Application............ 19-5
2.6 Setting System Environment Variables....................... 19-6
2.7 Web Query Related Configuration Settings................. 19-8
2.8 Setting the User Utility............................................... 19-9

3.1 CL-AP Startup........................................................... 19-10
3.2 Web Query Checkout. ............................................... 19-10
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
30
CL+DICOM Server (Image Reprint).......................... 20-1
CL+T-RIS (Ordering)
1. Hardware Setup.............................................................. 20-3

2. Software Setup............................................................... 20-4
2.1 CL Software Setup.................................................... 20-4
2.1.1 Installing the Image Search/Acquisition Option
Key................................................................. 20-4
2.1.2 Reinstalling the AP Key. .................................... 20-5
2.1.3 Setting the Information on This Equipment
for Image Search/Acquisition.............................. 20-5
2.1.4 Registering the Information on Other Connected
Equipment for Image Search/Acquisition.............. 20-8
2.1.5 Setting the Information on This Equipment
for the DICOM CR Storage Function.................... 20-12
2.1.6 Registering the Information on Other Connected
Equipment for the DICOM CR Storage Function.... 20-14
2.1.7 Setting CONNECTING EQUIPMENT................... 20-16
2.1.8 Setting CONFIG QR.......................................... 20-16
2.1.9 Exiting the Service Utility.................................... 20-18
3. Verification...................................................................... 20-19
3.2 Searching/Acquiring Images from the DICOM Server.... 20-20
3.3 Checking Film Output Images.................................... 20-20
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
31
CL+PDI (Portable Data for Imaging)........................ 22-1
CL+DAP (Dose-area Product Meter). ...................... 23-1
1. Hardware Setup.............................................................. 22-2
1. Hardware Setup............................................................. 23-2
2. Software Setup............................................................... 22-3
2. Software Setup............................................................... 23-3
2.1 Installing the PDI Application...................................... 22-3
2.1 Starting the Service Utility.......................................... 23-3
2.2 Installing the Option Key............................................ 22-4
2.2 Setting the Configuration Items.................................. 23-5
2.3 Exiting the Service Utility. .......................................... 23-7
2.4 Starting the Service Utility.......................................... 22-6

2.6 Exiting the Service Utility............................................. 22-9
2.7 Editing the Institution Information. .............................. 22-9
3. Verification...................................................................... 22-10
3.2 Writing Study Information Using the PDI Function....... 22-11
3.3 Verifying the Created CD-R. ...................................... 22-12
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
3. Verification...................................................................... 23-8
3.2 Verifying Connection to a DAP................................... 23-8
3.3 Verifying Reception of Dose-area Product
Information................................................................ 23-9
3.4 Verifying Transfer of Dose-area Product
Information................................................................ 23-10
3.4.1 When DICOM PPS Connection is Enabled........... 23-10
3.4.2 When DICOM Storage Connection is Enabled. ..... 23-10
3.4.3 When DICOM Print Connection is Enabled........... 23-10
32
Precise Enlargement Function.................................. 24-1
QA ROI Measurement. .................................................. 25-1
1. Software Setup............................................................... 24-2
1. Software Setup............................................................... 25-2
1.1 Installing the Precise Enlargement Function Software.... 24-3
1.1 Installing the QA ROI Measurement Software............. 25-2
1.1.1 For Software V7.1............................................. 24-3
1.2 Setting the Firewall.................................................... 25-5
1.1.2 For Software V8.0 or Later. ................................ 24-8
1.2 Setting the Firewall.................................................... 24-10

1.3 Installing the Precise Enlargement Function Option Key.... 24-11
1.5 Setting the System.................................................... 24-12
1.5.1 Setting the OS.................................................. 24-12
1.5.2 Setting the Service Utility. .................................. 24-12
1.5.3 Setting the User Utility....................................... 24-13
1.5.4 Setting the Overlay Item..................................... 24-14
2. Confirming the Settings................................................ 24-16

2.2 Confirming the Image Display. ................................... 24-16
3. Backup/Restore.............................................................. 24-17
3.1 For Software V7.1. .................................................... 24-17

1.5 Setting the System.................................................... 25-6
1.5.1 Setting the Service Utility. .................................. 25-6
1.5.2 Settings Necessary for the Discontinued Monitor.... 25-7
2. Creating an Exposure Menu for QA ROI

Measurement.................................................................. 25-9
3. Confirming the Settings................................................ 25-11
3.2 Confirming Image Display.......................................... 25-11
4. Backup/Restore.............................................................. 25-13
4.1 Backup. .................................................................... 25-13
4.2 Restore..................................................................... 25-15
3.2 For Software V8.0 or Later......................................... 24-17

3.2.1 Backup............................................................ 24-17
3.2.2 Restore. .......................................................... 24-19
4. Disabling the Precise Enlargement Function.............. 24-20

5. Enabling the Precise Enlargement Function............... 24-21
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
33
CL+Synapse RIS (Ordering)....................................... 26-1

1. Hardware Setup.............................................................. 26-2
2. Software Setup............................................................... 26-3
2.3 Creating and Setting the Shared Folder...................... 26-5
2.3.1 Creating and Setting the Shared Folder in
Windows XP..................................................... 26-5
Windows Vista.................................................. 26-6
3. Verification...................................................................... 26-13
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
34
PC: Performance Check

CR-IR346CL Performance Checklist Connection to
One XG-1 RU or CR-IR355RU/356/357 ........................
CR-IR348CL Performance Checklist Connection to

two or more RUs, 5000plus and CR-IR356/357/359/
362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372 ..........................
CR-IR348CL Performance Checklist

9000 Series Connection
[Applicable only in Japan]................................................
CR-IR346CL/348CL Config List..............................................
1.
IMAGE MODALITY.......................................................
2.
FINP SETUP................................................................
3.
QA FUNCTION. ...........................................................
4.
PRINTER.....................................................................
5.
CSL/IDT FUNCTION. ...................................................
7.
CONFIG OPTION......................................................... 10
8.
CONFIG QC. ............................................................... 10
9.
CONFIG PDA............................................................... 11
10. CONFIG QR. ............................................................... 11
CR-IR346CL/348CL System Configuration List.................... 12
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
35
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
36
Introduction
Introduction
Notes on the Use of the Service Manual
1.
This document is intended to be read by the service

personnel of FUJIFILM Corporation or authorized agent who
is commissioned by FUJIFILM Corporation to perform
servicing tasks.
Under these circumstances, no one is allowed to perform the
following actions without the prior written permission from
FUJIFILM Corporation.
Duplicating or reproducing this document in whole or in part

Disclosing this document, in whole or in part, to a person other than
the authorized service personnel
Lending or transferring this document, in whole or in part, to a third
party
2.
Due care must be exercised when handling this document

because it contains product internal structure descriptions
and other confidential information.
* When the contents of this document need be changed, the
information about such changes will be conveyed using Engineering
Change Notice (ECN).
The Engineering Change Notice (ECN) must also be handled
using the same care as for this document.
3.
4.
Due to a product development schedule, the product

specifications and available options/variations prevailing at
the time of the release of this document may differ from the
descriptions given in this document. In such an instance, a
Service Engineering Information will be issued as needed to
furnish latest information about inapplicable specifications
and components.
If you have any doubt about the contents of this document
or find errors, contact your local FUJIFILM representative.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Warning and Cautionary Information

Precautions during the service work are indicated by the following terms
and symbols.
WARNING
Serious injuries or death may result if this precaution is not
observed.
Damage of the unit and customer database may also occur.
CAUTION
Mild or moderate injuries may result if this precaution is not
observed.
Serious malfunction (which may be unrepairable or difficult to
repair) may also occur.
IMPORTANT
Abnormal equipment operations (easy to repair) may result if this
precaution is not observed.
NOTE
Indicates items which require particular attention during the necessary
work procedure.
REFERENCE
Explanation of related items and terms.
Screen Displays According to Different OSs

This manual uses either of the Windows 2000/XP/Vista screen displays.
When setting procedures to be performed are different between
Windows 2000, Windows XP and Windows Vista, follow the procedure
specific to the used OS to perform necessary settings.
37
Introduction
Servicing Instruments and Tools That Require

Inspection/Calibration
The machine should be installed and serviced by use of servicing

instruments and tools that have been regularly inspected and calibrated
as appropriate.
If the machine were serviced using servicing instruments and tools that
have not been inspected and calibrated, proper performance of the
machine could not be guaranteed.
Servicing instruments and tools that require inspection/calibration are
as listed below.
The inspection/calibration should be planned and performed in
accordance with the specifications and instruction manuals of the
applicable servicing instruments and tools.
CAUTIONS
The grounding wire must be connected.
To avoid damages to the parts/units due to static discharge, use
a wrist strap putting one end on your wrist and the other end on
the grounded section of the equipment, as illustrated below.
When doing so, make sure to unplug the power connector from
the socket to avoid electrical hazards.
Wrist strap
Instruments and tools that require inspection/calibration

Name
Inspection
Calibration
Digital multimeter
Precautionary Labels
To prevent danger to humans and serious accidents, observe the
following.
WARNINGS
Unless indicated otherwise, be sure to turn off the power switch
before maintenance work, and disconnect the power plug from
the outlet.
Even if the power switch is OFF, 100 to 240VAC (differs
according to machine specifications) will still be supplied to the
primary input terminal of the unit if the power cable is
connected, and this may result in possible electric hazards.
00010003.EPS
When performing settings for several software programs, ensure

that applications other than those of specified procedures must
have been shut down appropriately.
As neckties, scarves, and necklaces may get caught in the unit

during work, remove these items or take precautions against
such accidents.
Never modify the unit unless otherwise specified.
Modification of the safety unit (interlock, breaker, temperature
fuse, etc.) will cause serious problems as it is not only
dangerous but violates the related laws and regulations.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
38
Introduction
The unit is also pasted with precautionary labels. Follow the instructions
on the labels when carrying out work.
CR-IR 348CL (Mobile model)

Identification label
CR-IR 348CL (Lite) / CR-IR 348CL Plus

Year of manufacture label
CR-IR348CL (Mobile model)

CR-IR348CL (Lite)
CR-IR348CL Plus
00010014.EPS
CL01002.EPS
Year of Manufacture and EFUP (Environmentally Friendly

Use Period) label
2007
Sample year of manufacture
00010015.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
39
Introduction
NEC PC
NEC product label
WEEE label
CE label
Identification
label
00010011.EPS
Identification labels
CR-IR348CL (Lite)
CR-IR348CL Plus
00010012.EPS
CE labels
CR-IR348CL (Lite)
CR-IR348CL Plus
00010013.EPS
WEEE label
00010016.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
40
Safety Precautions
Safety Precautions
Safety Precautions (Control Unit)
Follow the precautions below when installing, using, and servicing the
control unit (PC).
See the Users Guide provided for details on the control unit.
Input voltage : 115V or 230V
Electric hazard prevention :
The power cord of the control unit and CRT
monitor uses a 3-pin plug. Connect it to a
properly grounded power outlet. When using
an extension cord, use a 3-line type with a
grounding pin.
Place of installation : Avoid places where dust and foreign particles
may enter inside through the computer opening.
Avoid installing near heaters and heat
sources.
Precautions when working on internal parts of the control unit :
(1) Turn off the power of the PC, CRT, and other peripheral devices.
(2) Disconnect the power cord from the outlet to prevent electric
hazard.
(3) Open the I/O panel on the rear of the PC, touch the metallic part
to fully discharge body static electricity before accessing.
(4) When removing the board and memory module, etc., hold them
without directly touching the connectors and pins and place them
in a static electricity prevention package.
Safety Precautions (CRT monitor)

WARNING
High voltage is applied inside the CRT monitor.
To prevent electric hazards and danger, the CRT internal parts
cannot be accessed.
The CRT monitor does not consist of parts serviceable by the
service engineer.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
41
Cautions Relating to Electromagnetic Compatibility
Cautions Relating to
Electromagnetic Compatibility
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
This equipment complies with the EMC standards applicable to medical
devices, in accordance with the requirements of IEC60601-1-2 :2001 +
A1 2004/EN60601-1-2:2001+A1:2006.
However, there is no guarantee that harmful electromagnetic
interference will not occur in any installation environment.
This equipment generates, and can radiate radio frequency energy. In a
particular environment, e.g., the equipment is not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions or any device that is not compliant with
the EMC Standard is used in a surrounding area, harmful interference
may result, causing the equipment or surrounding device to malfunction.
If this equipment causes harmful interference to other equipment or
receives harmful interference from other equipment, you are
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
This Service Manual contains the names of standards applied in IEC

60601-1-2.
The names of standards applied in EN 60601-1-2 are replaced as
follows.
IEC 60601-1-2
(Descriptions in this Service Manual)
Standards applied in
EN 60601-1-2
CISPR 11
EN 55011
IEC 61000-3-2
EN 61000-3-2
IEC 61000-3-3
EN 61000-3-3
IEC 61000-4-2
EN 61000-4-2
IEC 61000-4-3
EN 61000-4-3
IEC 61000-4-4
EN 61000-4-4
IEC 61000-4-5
EN 61000-4-5
IEC 61000-4-6
EN 61000-4-6
IEC 61000-4-8
EN 61000-4-8
IEC 61000-4-11
EN 61000-4-11
Reorient or relocate the equipment.

Increase the separation between the equipment and the affected
equipment.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the affected equipment is connected.
If the problem persists, discontinue the use of the equipment and
consult the manufacturer of the affected equipment or FUJIFILM
JAPAN.
WARNING
Do not place devices generating electromagnetic wave near this
equipment.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
42
Further information for IEC60601-1-2:2001

(1) Medical electrical equipment needs special precautions regarding
EMC and needs to be installed and put into service according to the
EMC information provided in the accompanying documents.
(2) Portable and mobile RF communications equipment can affect
medical electrical equipment.
(3) Information of all cables and their maximum lengths and accessories
that may affect EMC.
Name
Network cable
Specification
Cat5e or more, UTP-type straight cable
(4) The use of accessories, transducers and cables other than those
specified, with the exception of transducers and cables sold by
[FUJIFILM Corporation] as replacement parts for internal
components, may result in increased emissions or decreased
immunity of the [CR-IR346CL/348CL].
(5) The [CR-IR346CL/348CL] should not be used adjacent to or stacked
with other equipment.
If adjacent or stacked use is necessary, the [CR-IR346CL/348CL]
should be observed to verify normal operation in the configuration in
which it will be used.
(6) Test items (Tables 1 to 4)
Table 1
Guidance and manufacturers declaration - electromagnetic emissions
The CR-IR346CL/348CL is intended for use in the electromagnetic
environment specified below. The customer or the user of the CRIR346CL/348CL should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Emissions test Compliance Electromagnetic environment - guidance
The CR-IR346CL/348CL uses RF energy
only for its internal function. Therefore,
RF emissions
its RF emissions are very low and are
Group 1
CISPR 11
not likely to cause any interference in
nearby electronic equipment.
RF emissions
Class A
The CR-IR346CL/348CL is suitable for
CISPR 11
use in all establishments other than
Harmonic emissions
Class D
domestic and those directly connected to
IEC 61000-3-2
the public low-voltage power supply
Voltage fluctuations/
network that supplies buildings used for
Not
flicker emissions
domestic purposes.
complied.
IEC 61000-3-3
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
43
Table 2
Guidance and manufacturers declaration - electromagnetic immunity
The CR-IR346CL/348CL is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below.
The customer or the user of the CR-IR346CL/348CL should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Immunity test
IEC 60601 test level
Compliance level
Electromagnetic environment - guidance
6kV contact
2kV contact
4kV contact
6kV contact
Floors should be wood, concrete or ceramic tile. If floors are covered
Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
with synthetic material, the relative humidity should be at least 30%.
IEC61000-4-2
2kV air
8kV air
4kV air
8kV air
2kV for power supply lines 2kV for power supply lines
Electrical fast transient/burst
Mains power quality should be that of a typical commercial or hospital
IEC61000-4-4
environment.
1kV for input/output lines 1kV for input/output lines
0.5kV, 1kV differential
1kV differential mode
mode
Surge
IEC61000-4-5
environment.
2kV common mode
0.5kV, 1kV, 2kV
common mode
<5% UT
<5% UT
(>95% dip in UT)
(>95% dip in UT)
for 0.5 cycle
for 0.5 cycle
Voltage dips, short interruptions

and voltage variations of power
supply input lines
IEC61000-4-11
40% UT
(60% dip in UT)
for 5 cycles
40% UT
(60% dip in UT)
for 5 cycles
70% UT
(30% dip in UT)
for 25 cycles
70% UT
(30% dip in UT)
for 25 cycles
<5% UT
(>95% dip in UT)
for 5 s
<5% UT
(>95% dip in UT)
for 5 s
Power frequency (50/60Hz)

magnetic field
3 A/m
3 A/m
IEC61000-4-8
NOTE: UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817

environment. If the user of the CR-IR346CL/348CL requires continued
operation during power mains interruptions, it is recommended that the
CR-IR346CL/348CL be powered from an uninterruptible power supply or
a battery.
Power frequency magnetic fields should be at levels characteristic of a

typical location in a typical commercial or hospital environment.
44
Table 3
Guidance and manufacturers declaration - electromagnetic immunity
The CR-IR346CL/348CL is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below.
The customer or the user of the CR-IR346CL/348CL should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Immunity test
Conducted RF
IEC61000-4-6
IEC 60601 test level

3 Vrms
150 kHz to 80 MHz
Compliance level
3 Vrms
Electromagnetic environment - guidance

Portable and mobile RF communications equipment should be used no closer
to any part of the CR-IR346CL/348CL, including cables, than the
recommended separation distance calculated from the equation applicable to
the frequency of the transmitter.
Recommended separation distance
Radiated RF
IEC61000-4-3
3 V/m
80 MHz to 2.5 GHz
3 V/m
80 MHz to 800 MHz
800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
where P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W)
according to the transmitter manufacturer and d is the recommended
separation distance in metres (m).
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as determined by an
electromagnetic site survey,a should be less than the compliance level in each
frequency range.b
Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment marked with the following
symbol:
NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
a Field strength from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio
broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy.
To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in
the location in which the CR-IR346CL/348CL is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance, the CR-IR346CL/348CL should be observed to verify normal
operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as reorienting or relocating the CR-IR346CL/348CL.
b Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strength should be less than 3 V/m.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
45
Table 4
Recommended separation distances between
Portable and mobile RF communications equipment and the CR-IR346CL/348CL
The CR-IR346CL/348CL is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment in
which radiated RF disturbances are controlled.
The customer or the user of the CR-IR346CL/348CL can help prevent electromagnetic
interference by maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF
communications equipment (transmitters) and the CR-IR346CL/348CL as
recommended below, according to the maximum output power of the communications
equipment.
Rated maximum
output power of
transmitter
W
Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter

m
150 kHz to 80 MHz
80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
0.01
0.12
0.12
0.23
0.1
0.38
0.38
0.73
1.2
1.2
2.3
10
3.8
3.8
7.3
100
12
12
23
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended
separation distance d in metres (m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to
the frequency of the transmitter, where P is the maximum output power rating of the
transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency
range applies.
NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations.
Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and reflection from
structures, objects and people.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
46
Abbreviations Adopted in This Manual:
Abbreviations Adopted in
This Manual:
PC : Hardware (personal computer) used in the CR-IR346CL or
CR-IR348CL controller
CL : CR-IR346CL, CR-IR348CL
RU : CR-IR346RU
OS : Operating System (Windows 2000/XP/Vista)
AP : Application Software
Name of the Target Product of

This Manual:
Note that the target product name of this manual has been changed
from FCR XG1 to FCR XG-1. Read thus XG1 appearing in this
manual XG-1.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
47
Caution for Handling Personal Information
Caution for Handling Personal Information

Discarding the Equipment
When disposing of the CR-IR 346CL/348CL, be sure to completely
discard any private information stored on it.
When to Obtain and to Bring Out Personal Information

Follow the operating procedures under the Private Information
Protection Law and prescribed by your local FUJIFILM representative.
When you collect logs, use such as a security-ensured jig provided by
your local FUJIFILM representative, and handle the medium with
adequate care.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
48
CR-IR346/348CL Service Manual
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MD-I
Control Sheet
Issue date
Revision number
Reason
04/10/2001
05/30/2001
01
02
05/30/2001
08/30/2001
08/30/2001
03/20/2002
07/20/2002
11/30/2002
03/01/2003
03/01/2003
08/20/2003
08/20/2003
12/10/2003
12/10/2003
02/20/2004
02
03
03
04
05
06
07
07
08
08
09
09
10
07/30/2004
11/12/2004
11
12
11/12/2004
07/30/2005
12
14
New release (FM2951)

Revision for software version A02 and GX150
(FM3027)
Changes in pagination (FM3027)
Revision for software version A04 (FM3125)
Revision for software version B00 (FM4158)
A new production tool adopted and layout
design changed (FM4220)
Revision for software V2.0(B) (FM4254)
Revision for software V1.0(C), support
provided to NEC PC and corrections (FM4450)
07/30/2005
11/30/2005
07/30/2006
07/30/2006
07/20/2007
07/20/2007
05/09/2008
05/09/2008
10/31/2008
14
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19

10/31/2008
11/30/2009
19
20

11/30/2009
20
03/31/2010
21
03/31/2010
21
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Pages affected
All pages
I, II, 111, 14
12, 13, 15, 16
I, II, 18, 11, 14, 17, 18
9, 10, 12, 13, 15, 16
I, II, 7, 8, 10, 15, 16, 18
I, II, 13, 6-8, 10
I, II, 5, 712, 19-22
I, II, 18, 13, 15, 20, 26
912, 14, 1619, 2125
I, II, 1016, 21
1720, 2226
IIV, 1, 3, 4, 9, 1216, 28
10, 11, 1727
All pages
I, II, 2, 3, 1214, 17, 22
I, II, 14, 6, 7, 9, 10, 13, 14
11, 12, 1528
I, II, 1, 4, 7, 8, 1114, 1719,
2123, 28, 34
15, 16, 20, 2427, 2933
I, II, 16, 17, 22, 23
IIV, 1, 3, 4, 15, 16, 20, 28
1719, 2127, 2936
I, II, 1, 3, 4, 1719, 21, 22, 28, 29
20, 2327, 3040
I, II, 1, 4, 2022, 24, 25, 29, 31, 32
23, 2628, 30, 3342
IIV, 1, 3, 4, 7, 8, 10, 12-14, 16, 18,
19, 2123, 26, 27, 29, 32, 33, 44
24, 25, 28, 30, 31, 3443
I, II, 1, 3, 5, 17, 2628, 30, 33, 35,
37, 38
4, 6-16, 1825, 29, 31, 32, 34, 36,
3948
I, II, 13, 512, 1418, 20, 21,
2329, 3843, 5052
3037, 4449
MD-II
Control Sheet
Issue date
Revision number
12/10/2010
12/10/2010
22
22
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Reason
Pages affected
I, III, 1, 5, 30, 34, 40
31-33, 35-39, 41-50
MD-III
BLANK PAGE
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
MD-IV
1. System Configuration
1. System Configuration
This section shows the system configuration, which includes the
CR-IR346/348CL application, and the operating environment for the PC.
The application is to be installed on the following PCs. The PC to be
used varies with the image reader specification.
PC used for XG-1 (one RU+CL) connection
Dell OptiPlex GX110 (Pentium type), etc.
Dell OptiPlex GX150, 50, 60, 280, 620, 745 (Celeron type),
755 (Dual Core type) etc.
NEC Model N8368-B0045S01 BASIC UNIT
(Pentium type, for European use only):
Hereinafter referred to as NEC PC.*1
(Celeron type, for European use only):
For 5000MA connection

Dell OptiPlex GX260, 270 (Pentium type), etc.
Dell Precision WS330, 340 (Pentium type), etc.
Previously used CR Console
Dell OptiPlex GX150 (Pentium type), etc.
Mobile models
Dell Precision WS360, 370, 380 (Pentium RAID type), etc.
Dell Precision WS390 (Core 2 Duo type)
NEC N8368-B0045503 BASIC UNIT
(Pentium or RAID type - for European use only)
Dell Precision T3400 (Core 2 Duo type)
Dell OptiPlex 960, 780 (Core 2 Duo type)
*1
*2
The NEC PC is compatible with EMC: IEC60601-1-2: 2001.

9000 series connection is applicable only in Japan.
PC used for 5000 plus (5000 series + CL) or CL-RU N:N

connection and 9000 series connection*2
CR Console Plus
Dell OptiPlex GX260, 270, 280, 620 (Pentium type), etc.
Dell OptiPlex 745, 755, 760, 780 (Core 2 Duo type)
(Pentium type, for European use only):
CR Console Lite
Dell OptiPlex GX50, 60, 280, 620, 745 (Celeron type),
755, 760, 780 (Dual Core type) etc.
(Celeron type, for European use only):
For CR Console MINI (Applicable only in Japan)
Dell OptiPlex 745, 755 (Dual Core type)
HP Compaq dc7800 SF, dc7900 SF (Dual Core type)
HP Compaq 8000 Elite SF (Dual Core type)
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MD-1
1.1 PC Used for XG-1 (one RU+CL) Connection
1.1 PC Used for XG-1 (one RU+CL)

Connection
Operating environment
PC main unit
System configuration
Item
PC main unit
Mother board
(video terminal: onboard)
Video RAM
E-IDE
-i/f
Monitor
CR-IR346CL
application CD
System area/image area

(drive C)
Option key CD
Network i/f
LP connection i/f
(PEI01A board: optional)
X-CON/RIS connection i/f
(PSI04A board: optional)
USB
connector
Celeron
; clock frequency: 1.3 GHz or higher
System
memory
512MB or more
VRAM
4MB or more
HDD
IDE, 6.4GB or more, 5400 rpm or higher
FDD
3.5" 2-mode
CD-ROM drive
24-time-speed or faster (recommended)
Expansion
card slots
PCI bus slot 2 (half-size PCI board)
Network
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX compatible
OS
Windows 2000 Professional

Windows XP Professional
Other
RS-232C 1, USB 2
Monitor
Item
USB
connector
Accessories Barcode Magnetic

(keyboard
reader card reader
and mouse) (optional) (optional)
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Pentium III ; clock frequency: 500 MHz or higher
CPU
Video cable
Description
Description
Display resolution
1024 768 pixels or higher
Number of display
colors
24-bit True-Color (16,777,216 colors)
00000042.EPS
MD-2
1.2 PC Used for 5000 plus (FCR 5000 Series+CL) or CL-RU N:N Connection and 9000 Series Connection
1.2 PC Used for 5000 plus (FCR 5000

Series+CL) or CL-RU N:N Connection
and 9000 Series Connection
Item
CPU
PC main unit
Description
Celeron
; clock frequency: 1.3 GHz or higher
Core 2 Duo ; clock frequency: 1.86 GHz or higher (*4)
Mother board
(video terminal: onboard)
Video RAM
Video cable
Monitor
CR-IR348CL
application CD
System area/image area

(drive C)
Network i/f
Option key CD
LP connection i/f,
9000 series connection i/f*
(PEI01A board: optional)
X-CON/RIS connection i/f,
9000 series connection i/f*
(PSI04A board: optional)
USB
PC main unit
Pentium III ; clock frequency: 1 GHz or higher (*1)
System configuration
E-IDE
-i/f
Operating environment
USB
Removable
media
(DVD)
USB
USB
POCKET id
Console
(Applicable only
in Japan)
System memory 512MB or more (*5)

VRAM
4MB or more
HDD
IDE, 40GB or more, 7200 rpm or higher (*2)
FDD
3.5" 2-mode
CD-ROM drive
24-time-speed or faster (recommended)
Expansion
card slots
PCI bus slot 2 (half-size PCI board)
Network
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX compatible
OS
Windows 2000 Professional

Windows XP Professional
Windows Vista Business
Other
RS-232C 1, USB 3 (*3)
*1 : Pentium IV; clock frequency: 1.5GHz or higher when the

FCR 5000MA plus is connected.
*2 : SATA 160GBx2 (RAID1 type) for the mobile model.
(60GB or more for Windows Vista)
*3 : For the mobile model, one port is used for the external memory unit
(DVD).
*4 : Set up a single CPU by using BIOS.
(For software version V6.0 (B) or later, the operation is possible with
a Multi CPU.)
*5 : 1GB or more is required for software version V6.0(B) or later.
(A 2GB or more size is required for Windows Vista.)
Accessories Barcode Magnetic

Remote power
(keyboard
reader card reader
control switch box
and mouse) (optional) (optional) (only for 5000 plus connection)
MD000010.EPS
* 9000 series connection is applicable only in Japan.

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
MD-3
1.2 PC Used for 5000 plus (FCR 5000 Series+CL) or CL-RU N:N Connection and 9000 Series Connection
Monitor (15" LCD, 17" CRT)

Item
Description
Display resolution
1024 768 pixels or higher
Number of display
colors
24-bit True-Color (16,777,216 colors)
Monitor (SL-IC300)
See manuals provided with the SL-IC300.
Monitor (SL-IC200)
See manuals provided with the SL-IC200.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MD-4
2. Connectors and Slots
2. Connectors and Slots

This section shows the locations of the following PC connectors,
memory modules, and PC board mounting slots.
Dell OptiPlex GX110
Dell OptiPlex GX150, 50, 60
Dell OptiPlex GX260
Dell OptiPlex GX270
Dell Precision WS340
NEC PC
Dell OptiPlex GX280
Dell OptiPlex GX620
Dell OptiPlex 745
Dell OptiPlex 755
Dell Precision T3400
HP Compaq dc7800 SF
Dell OptiPlex 760
Dell OptiPlex 960
HP Compaq dc7900 SF
Dell OptiPlex 780
HP Compaq 8000 Elite SF
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MD-5
2.1 Dell OptiPlex GX110
Memory modules
The maximum amount of memory (512MB) is factory installed prior to
shipment. Therefore, no more memory can be added.
System board location
System board
System board
DIMM sockets
B A
Expansion card slots
00000264.EPS
Connectors (PC rear panel)

Memory slots
Serial port 2 connector

Video connector
Mouse connector
Parallel port connector
00000261.EPS

A total of two expansion card slots are used to accept the PEI01A board
(optional) for LP connection and PSI04A board (optional) for RIS
connection. These boards can be mounted in either of the two slots.

NIC connector
USB port (2-port)
Keyboard connector
: Indicates the connector used for the CR-IR346CL.
00000262.EPS
PCI2
PCI1
00000263.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
MD-6
2.2 Dell OptiPlex GX150, 50, 60
2.2 Dell OptiPlex GX150, 50, 60
Memory configuration
A 512MB memory is factory-installed prior to shipment.
System board
F
R
O
N
T
DIMM sockets
Memory slots
System board
A
B
MD000015.EPS
Connector configuration (PC rear panel)

MD000012.EPS

connection. These boards can be mounted in either of the two slots.
PCI2
PCI1
MD000014.EPS
Mouse connector
NIC connector
Video connector
GX150, 50
Mouse connector
Keyboard
connector
USB port (2-port)

NIC connector
GX60
Serial port connector
Video connector
Keyboard USB port (4-port)

connector
: Indicates the connector used for the CR-IR346/348CL.
MD000013.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
MD-7
System board
F
R
O
N
T
Memory slots
DIMM sockets
System board
A B
MD000098.EPS

MD000099.EPS
Mouse connector
NIC connector

connection. These boards can be mounted in any slots from PCI2 to
PCI4.
F
R
O
N
T
AGP
Video connector
PCI1
1
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Riser board
USB port (4-port)
PCI2
PCI3
PCI4
System board
Keyboard
connector
MD000101.EPS
MD000100.EPS
MD-8
2.4 Dell Precision WS340
System board
F
R
O
N
T
Memory slots
RIMM sockets
System board
3
4
1
2
MD000097.EPS
MD000104.EPS

connection. These boards can be mounted in any of slots from PCI2 to
PCI4.
F
R
O
N
T
AGP
(Video board)
PCI1
PCI2
PCI3
PCI4
System board
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Riser board

Mouse connector
NIC connector
Video connector

USB port (2-port)

Keyboard
connector
MD000103.EPS
MD000115.EPS
MD-9
FRONT
Memory slots
RIMM sockets
System board
MD000094.EPS

System board
Mouse connector
MD000092.EPS
NIC connector
Video connector

connection. These boards can be mounted in any of slots PCI2 to PCI5.
FRONT
AGP (Video board)

PCI1
PCI2
PCI3
PCI4
PCI5
USB port (4-port)

Keyboard connector
MD000095.EPS
MD000093.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
MD-10
System board
DIMM sockets
Memory slots
System board
F
R
O
N
T
MD000108.EPS

MD000106.EPS
Mouse connector
NIC connector
PCI4.
F
R
O
N
T
AGP
PCI1
PCI 2
PCI 3
PCI 4
System board
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)

Video connector
USB port (6-port)

Keyboard connector
MD000109.EPS
MD000107.EPS
MD-11
2.7 NEC PC
2.7 NEC PC
System board
DIMM sockets
Memory slots
System board
MD000112.EPS
MD000110.EPS
Mouse connector
Keyboard
connector

NIC connector

connection. These boards can be mounted in any of slots from PCI2 to
PCI4.
PCI 1
PCI 2
PCI 3
PCI 4
System board
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
USB port (2-port)

Video connector
MD000113.EPS
MD000111.EPS
MD-12
SDT
F
R
O
N
T

Memory slots
System board
PEG
PCI 2
System board
MD000201.EPS
SMT
F
R
O
N
T

(optional) for LP connection and the PSI04A board (optional) for RIS
connection.
The GX280 has two types, one is small desk top (SDT) and the other is
small mini tower (SMT), and locations of expansion card slots are
different with each other.
PEG
PCI 0
PCI 1
PCI 2
PE1
System board
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MD000202.EPS
MD000222.EPS
MD-13
SDT
SDT
System board
DIMM sockets
Serial connector
Parallel connector
NIC connector
F
R
O
N
T
Video connector
USB port (6-port)
MD000224.EPS
MD000203.EPS
SMT
SMT
System board
DIMM sockets
Serial connector
Parallel connector
NIC connector
F
R
O
N
T
Video connector
MD000223.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
USB port (6-port)
MD000204.EPS
MD-14
F
R
O
N
T
Memory slots
System board
System board
DIMM sockets

4
2
3
1
MD000207.EPS
MD000205.EPS

PCI4.
F
R
O
N
T
AGP
(Video board)
PCI1
1
PCI2
PCI3
PCI4
System board
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Riser board

PS/2 mouse connector
Parallel connector
NIC connector
Video connector

(COM1)
USB port (6-port)
(COM2) PS/2 keyboard connector
MD000208.EPS
MD000206.EPS
MD-15
F
R
O
N
T
Memory slots
System board
System board
DIMM sockets

4
2
3
1
MD000211.EPS
MD000209.EPS
Mouse connector

connection. These boards can be mounted in any slots of PCI2 and
PCI3.
F
R
O
N
T
PCI Express 16
Card slot
(Video board)
PCI1
Parallel connector
NIC connector
Video connector

Keyboard connector USB port (6-port)
PCI2
MD000212.EPS
PCI3
PCI Express 1
(Card slot)
System board
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
MD000210.EPS
MD-16
System board
System board
DIMM sockets
Memory slots
MD000254.EPS
MD000252.EPS
Parallel connector
NIC connector
connection. These boards can be mounted in any slots of PCI1 and
PCI2.
PCI Express 16
Video connector
PCI1
PCI2
PCI Express 1
System board
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
USB port (6-port)
MD000255.EPS
MD000253.EPS
MD-17
System board
System board
DIMM sockets
Memory slots
MD000258.EPS

Parallel connector
MD000256.EPS
Mouse connector
NIC connector
PCI3.
PCI Express 1
Card slot
PCI Express 16
Card slot
PCI1
Keyboard connector
USB port (5-port)
PCI Express 8
Card slot
MD000259.EPS
PCI2
System board
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
PCI3
MD000257.EPS
MD-18
2.13 Dell OptiPlex 745

connection.
Model 745 offers two types: a desktop (DT) and a mini tower (MT), each
of which has expansion card slot locations different from each other.

System board
Memory slots
DT
PCI Express 16
Card slot
PCI1
PCI2
MD000268.EPS
System board
MD000266.EPS
MT
PCI Express 16
Card slot
PCI1
PCI2
PCI Express 1
Card slot
System board
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MD000265.EPS
MD-19
DT
DT
Parallel connector
System board
NIC connector
DIMM sockets
USB port (6-port)
Video connector
MD000262.EPS
MD000264.EPS
MT
MT
Parallel connector
System board
NIC connector
DIMM sockets
Video connector
USB port (6-port)

MD000263.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
MD000267.EPS
MD-20
System board
System board
DIMM sockets
Memory slots
MD000271.EPS

Parallel connector
Mouse connector
MD000269.EPS
NIC connector

PCI3.
PCI Express 1
Card slot
PCI Express 16
Card slot
Keyboard connector
USB port (5-port)
PCI1
PCI Express 8
Card slot
MD000272.EPS
PCI2
System board
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
PCI3
MD000270.EPS
MD-21

connection.
Model 755 offers two types: a desktop (DT) and a mini tower (MT), each
of which has expansion card slot locations different from each other.

System board
Memory slots
DT
PCI Express 16
Card slot
PCI1
PCI2
System board
MD000273.EPS
MD000274.EPS
MT
PCI Express 16
Card slot
PCI1
PCI2
PCI Express 1
Card slot
System board
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MD000281.EPS
MD-22
DT
DT
Parallel connector
System board
NIC connector
DIMM sockets
USB port (6-port)
Video connector

MD000275.EPS
MT
Parallel connector
MT
System board
MD000276.EPS
NIC connector
DIMM sockets
Video connector
USB port (6-port)

MD000282.EPS
MD000283.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
MD-23
2.16 Dell Precision T3400
2.16 Dell Precision T3400
System board
System board
DIMM sockets
Memory slots
MD000279.EPS

MD000277.EPS
Parallel connector
Mouse connector
NIC connector
Keyboard connector
USB port (6-port)

PCI3.
PCI1
PCI Express 16
Card slot
PCI Express 8
Card slot
PCI Express 16
Card slot

MD000280.EPS
PCI2
System board
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
PCI3
MD000278.EPS
MD-24
2.17 HP Compaq dc7800 SF

Memory slots
System board
System board
DIMM sockets
MD000286.EPS

NIC connector
Parallel connector
MD000284.EPS
USB port
(6-port)
Video connector
Keyboard connector
Mouse connector
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
MD000287.EPS
MD-25
Windows XP : A 1024MB memory is factory-installed prior to shipment.
Windows Vista : A 2048MB memory is factory-installed prior to shipment.
System board
System board
Memory slots
DIMM sockets
AWS10008.ai
AWS10002.ai

When Windows XP is used for the OS, a total of two expansion card
slots are used to accept the PEI01A board (optional) for LP connection
and the PSI04A board (optional) for RIS connection.
For Windows Vista, the MOXA board (optional) is used for PCI Express 1.
PCI Express 16
Card slot
PCI1
PCI2
PCI Express 1
Card slot
System board
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Parallel connector
NIC connector
USB port (6-port)

Video connector

AWS10010.ai
AWS10007.ai
MD-26
System board
Memory slots System board
DIMM sockets
NAX010130.ai

Parallel connector
NAX010129.ai
NIC connector

When Windows Vista is used for the OS, the MOXA board (optional) is
used for PCI Express 1.
PCI Express 16
Card slot
PCI1
USB port (6-port)
PCI2
PCI Express 1
Card slot
System board
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Video connector
NAX010131.ai
NAX010128.ai
MD-27
System board
System board
DIMM sockets
Memory slots
MD000290.EPS

MD000289.EPS
NIC connector

Mouse connector
USB port
(6-port)
Video connector
Keyboard connector
MD000288.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
MD-28
System board
System board
DIMM sockets
Memory slots
DCL10018.ai
DCL10012.ai
Video connector
(For 2M monitor)
Parallel connector
NIC connector
PCI Express 16
Card slot
PCI1
PCI2
PCI Express 1
Card slot
System board
DCL10017.ai
USB port (6-port)
Video connector
(For touch panel monitor)
DCL10019.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
MD-29
2.22 HP Compaq 8000 Elite SF
2.22 HP Compaq 8000 Elite SF
DIMM sockets
System board
System board
Memory slots
MD000294.ai

MD000293.ai
NIC connector

Mouse connector
USB port
(6-port)
Video connector
Keyboard connector
MD000288.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MD-30
3. System Connection Examples

This section shows CR-IR346/348CL system connection examples.
Independent type [XG-1 system]

This example represents the most compact system connection, which
consists of the CR-IR346RU, CR-IR346CL, and printer.
ID information entry, local storage, and local film output functions can
be exercised by this system alone. In this connection example, film
output is enabled either via the E-i/f or using the DICOM Print function.
Network type
This example represents a system connection that is used with the
XG-1 system built into an existing hospital network, to which the IDT
function incorporated FCR5000 Series, IDT connection type FCR5000
Series, or similar equipment is connected.
Image output
(FINP or DICOM)
IDT
connection type
FCR 5000 Series
QA-WS/
HI-C655
Hospital network
FRUP
Connecting a printer via the E-i/f
IDT
XG-1 system
E-i/f
CR-IR346CL
Printer
CR-IR
346CL
CR-IR346RU
IDT function
incorporated
FCR5000 Series
Image output
(FINP)
XG-1 system
FRUP
IDT
MD000019.EPS
Illustrated below is an example of system connection with the 5000 plus

system incorporated into the configuration shown above. This system
configuration is available with software version A02 or later.
CR-IR346RU
MD000018.EPS
Connecting a printer using the DICOM Print function

FRUP
DICOM Print
Image output
(FINP)
Image output
(FINP or DICOM)
QA-WS/
HI-C655
IDT
connection type
FCR5000 Series
Hospital network
CR-IR346RU
CR-IR346CL
Printer
ID:FINP
Image:
DICOM
FRUP
MD000023.EPS
CR-IR
346RU
CR-IR
346CL
XG-1 system
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
5000 plus
IDT
CR-IR
348CL
5000 plus system
IDT
Image output
(FINP or DICOM)
MD000011.EPS
MD-31
Illustrated below is an example of system connection where the XG-1

(two or more RUs connected) and 5000 plus are used simultaneously.
This system configuration is available with software version A04 or later.
The following example shows a case of system configuration where the

CL is connected to the CR-IR355RU, 356, 357 or 359 or CR-IR362,
363, 364, 366, 367, 368 or 370, 371, 372 and connection can be
established properly with the CR-IR355RU/356/357/362/363/364/368
for software version V3.1(B) or later, with the CR-IR366/367/370 for
software version V4.0(B) or later and with the CR-IR359/371/372 for
software version V5.0(B).
The system configuration that includes the IDT-IV is available with

software version A07 or later.
QA-WS/
HI-C655
Image output
(FINP or DICOM)
Hospital network
FRUP
CR-IR
346RU
Hospital network
ID: FINP
FRUP
ID: FINP
FRUP
CR-IR
346RU
IDT-IV
CR-IR
35X, 36X or 37X*
Image: DICOM
CR-IR
348CL
5000
plus
DICOM Print
CR-IR348CL
* 35X : 355RU/356/357/359
36X : 362/363/364/366/367/368
37X : 370/371/372
5000
plus
Printer
MD000105.EPS
System connection where the XG-1 (two or more RUs connected)

and 5000 plus are used simultaneously.
MD000020.EPS
The following example shows a case where some CLs are clusterconnected (for shared study information). This system configuration is
available with software version A09 or later.
QA-WS/
HI-C655
Image output
(FINP or DICOM)
ID:FINP
Hospital network
FRUP
CR-IR
346RU
IDT-IV
ID:FINP
FRUP
CR-IR
346RU
Image:DICOM
CR-IR
348CL
5000plus 5000plus
CR-IR
348CL
Cluster connection (shared study information)
CR-IR
348CL
MD000024.EPS
For the cluster connection function, see 8. Cluster Connection

Function Overview.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MD-32
4. Software Function Overview
Equipment
External equipment connections
CR-IR364, 366 or
367 built-in type
Equipment
Description
The 348CL can be simultaneously connected to

the XG-1 RU, FCR5000 cassette type, and
FCR5000 built-in type. Software version A03
does not allow you to use the XG-1 RU and
FCR5000 built-in type simultaneously. The
346CL can only be connected to one unit of the
XG-1 RU.
Software version A11 supports connection to
the CR-IR362/363/364.
Software version V1.0(C) supports connection
Image Reader
to the 9000 series.
Software version V3.1(B) supports connection
to the CR-IR355RU, 356, 357 or 368.
Software Version V4.0(B) supports connection
to the CR-IR366, 367 or 370.
to the CR-IR359.
to the CR-IR371/372.
Up to eight units can be connected.
The connection protocol used is FRUP.
XG-1 RU
Uncompressed, nonstandardized, 12-bit images
are output to the CL.
Up to eight units can be connected.
The connection protocol used is Private
FCR5000 cassette
Unstandardized CR Storage. JPEGtype
compressed, nonstandardized, 11-bit images
Up to two units can be connected.
The connection protocol used is Private
FCR5000 built-in
Unstandardized CR Storage. JPEGtype
compressed, nonstandardized, 11-bit images
Up to eight units can be connected. (For the
CR-IR355RU, 356,
CR-IR 355RU, only one unit can be connected.)
357, 359, 362, 363
The connection protocol used is FRUP2.1.
or 368 cassette
Uncompressed, nonstandardized 12-bit images
type
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
CR-IR370, 371 or
372 built-in type
9000 series
[Applicable only in
Japan]
Local printer
Network printer
Description
Connection possible to CR-IR317/319/325/326/
327/329/332/335/336 and CR-MF125/126.
A maximum of two RUs, one cassette type
Image Reader or two built-in type Image
Readers, can be connected to one CL.
Connection protocol used is the CR image
transfer communication protocol (E-i/f) and ID
information used is the IDT/CSL-IR interface
(serial).
Standardized 10-bit images are output to the
CL.
One unit can be connected through the use of
the PEI board. The CR-LP414, FL-IM2636,
FL-IM3543, and FL-IM3543M cannot be
connected.
The double-density recording function is
supported (FM-DPL only).
Four film sizes (14"17", 14"14", 2636cm,
10"12" and 8"10") are supported.
The connection protocol used is DICOM BGP/
Printer SOP. The acceptable connection target
is the FN-PS551, DRYPIX, FM-DP L or other
specified device of a different manufacturer.
However, the network printer cannot be used
together with the local printer.
MD-33
Equipment
DICOM receiver
RIS
Description
This device can deliver its output to one filing
device and eight other devices. As the
connection protocol, FINP, DICOM CR Storage,
DICOM DX/MG Image Storage, or DICOM XR
Storage can be used. For the employed filing
device, DICOM Storage Commitment and
DICOM Query/Retrieve can be used. The
acceptable connection target is the HI-C655,
QA-WS771, HI-C654, OD-F614/624, CR-IR
355CL or other specified devices of different
manufacturers.
DICOM MWM or
DICOM PPS
compliant device
Network connection.
Host connection
device based on
Type A/B interface
Only one unit can be serially connected (via the

PSI04A board).
Synapse
Network connection.
Software version V8.1(B) or later.
Dose-area product meter
Only one unit can be serially connected (via

COM port on the PC).
Only VacuTECs VacuDAP can be connected.
X-CON
Only one X-CON unit can be connected serially

(with the PSI04A board).
For other than
mammography
(A04 or later)
Equipment
Description
POCKET id Console
(V4.0(B) or later)
A maximum of three POCKET id Consoles can

be connected to each CL.
Available for workflow used for exposure
operations at locations outside the X-ray
examination room.
Monitor
Only one unit can be connected.
1024768 color LCD The touch panel function is provided.

1024768 color CRT
12801024 color LCD The touch panel function is provided.
SL-IC 300
The dedicated video board is required.
SL-IC 200
16001200
Ikegami
monochrome
1k monitor
Magnetic card
reader
Only one unit can be connected via USB. The

JIS card and ISO card are supported. The
functions are the same as those of the IDT-IV.
Other Barcode reader
Only one unit can be connected via USB.
Full-size keyboard
Mouse
Toshiba, Shimadzu, Hitachi, Philips and

Siemens devices are supported.
For mammography
Toshiba and Planmed devices are supported.
(V2.0(B) or later)
For mammography Siemens device are supported.
(V4.0(B) or later)
(For serial connection, use COM port on the PC.)
The ID information collection and ID information
sharing functions are supported.
IDT
IDT-IV
Up to 16 units can be connected.
IDC-IV
Only one unit can be connected. Patient

information is acquired from the host via the
IDC-IV.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MD-34
Start of processing
Function
Study list display
Shared study information

(cluster connection)
User utility
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Exposure
Description
m Displaying the study list stored on the HDD
(local worklist)
m Displaying the DICOM worklist
m The following processes can be performed
with a study listing selected:
Exposure
QA
Lock
Deletion
Multi-frame forced output
This function enables multiple CLs to share
study information and can be set up in service
utility mode.
Function
Study registration
(reception)
m Patient information input methods

Magnetic card input
Keyboard input
Software keyboard input (B00 or later)
Automatic ID assignment function (V2.0(B)
or later)
ID assignment function used for screening
examination (V7.1(B) or later)
Patient information on-line function (Type A/B)
Local database search (300,000 items)
Acquisition from IDC-IV
m Exposure menu registration methods
Choosing from a displayed group of
exposure menus - (Two or more exposure
menus can be registered.)
Choosing from a study menu
m Registered study list management function
Displaying a list of registered studies
Deleting registered studies
Performing studies
m Monitor image display

Blackened images are displayed when the
automatic shuttering process is specified.
When an energy-subtracted image is
received, the low-energy, bone, or softtissue mode can be selected.
Six images can be displayed on the same
window in the list form. (B00 or later) [Not
available when RU and CL are connected
at the rate of 1:1.]
A precision image is displayed for image
confirmation purpose. For a PEM-specified
image, the PEM processing execution
window is displayed.
m Input image monitoring
Thumbnails of images input for a previous
study are displayed at the lower right corner
of the window allowing thus to check input
status constantly. (B00 or later)
m The QA function can be exercised with
images for study selected.
8. Cluster Connection Function

Overview
m Exposure menu information setup/
management
Image processing parameters
Exposure menu
Requesting department
Radiographer
Film annotation characters
Import of consumables database
m Environment setup
m Setup data backup/restore
m Patient database utility
m Acquisition and clearing of exposure result
log
m Customization of window display (B00 or
later)
m Transfer of image processing parameters to
FCR5000 series equipment
m Media reconstruction using removable media
mCustomization of POCKET id Console
window/transfer of radiographer information
Description
MD-35
Function
Performing studies
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
m Exposure list manipulation
New-exposure addition
Repeat
Duplication
Reexposure
Exposure menu change
Exposure menu parameter change
Exposure sequence change
Image change
Information change
(The patient information/exposure
information can be changed. The results
will not be fed to the RIS.)
S value/L value warning function
(for V3.0(B) or later)
Multiple studies performed at the same time
(for V3.0(B) or later)
m Automatic printing/delivery
The user can choose printing/delivering
exposed images successively or making
prints/delivery in compliance with the
instructions issued upon completion of a
study or printing/delivering according to user
operations.
m Study suspension (suspension/termination)
and initiation of a new study
When new patient information is entered via
the magnetic card or host-connected Type A
during study, a new study can be started.
In such an instance, the user can choose
between proceeding without changing the
exposure menu and removing the exposure
menu registration.
m Synapse Web Query (V2.0(B) or later)
Allowing the user to view images of the same
patient stored in the Synapse server
Function
Description
Starting an
exposure (study)
Showing the location of a menu selected in

one study/the count of all exposure menus
(V7.0(B) or later)
Choosing from the local worklist (list of
registered studies)
Choosing from the DICOM worklist
Making an entry from the RIS
Making an entry from an RIS component
Temporary study
suspension
An ongoing study can be temporarily

suspended.
Study interruption
An ongoing study can be interrupted.
Other Study termination
The study ends when all the registered

exposures are made.
The user can choose between forwarding the

Forwarding to QA/
studied items to QA and printing them without
printing without QA
forwarding them to QA.
Study result
management
Ordering and DICOM PPS are supported.
Setting of 2on1 or
4on1 on the study
window
2on1 or 4on1 format can be set up and image

position can be changed accordingly on the
study window. (B00 or later)
Authority (password) can be determined to

Support to the PAS
operate modification of image processing
security function
parameters (V7.0 or later).
MD-36
QA function (QA waiting study list/QA upon study )

Function
Description
Information display/
correction
The following items of information can be

handled:
Image information
Exposure menus
Image processing conditions
Film formats
Distribution destination selection for each study
Imaging failure setup
Output log
Image manipulation
The following image manipulation functions are

supported:
Shuttering process
Restandardization process
Image processing change
Rotation
Marker imbedding (setting for manual/
automatic imbedding)
Image composition (manual/automatic)
Trimming
Annotation
Operations
The following operations can be performed for

images:
The sequence of images within a study can
be changed.
The images within a study can be
interchanged.
Images can be moved from one study to another.
Images can be output.
The image erasure lock can be set.
Setup can be performed so as indicate the
completion of QA.
Images can be deleted.
The image can be magnified and the full
screen display is available.
Exposure menus can be additionally
registered to an already delivered study.
The following operation can be performed for
studies:
Multiple studies can be delivered. (Only studies
whose images have already been output.)
Other
Window customization function
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Image output
Function
Image
data
Output to printer
output
function
Description
One or two (B00 or later) printers can be
connected. Two-printer connection can be
registered only for the DICOM Print function.
A printer optimum for film output is seleceted
automatically according to the Image size
and Film format for the image to be output
on film.
The QA-WS771s DICOM print format is
complied with. The sorter function is the same
as for the FCR5000 Series. Printers
connectable with the following protocols are
supported:
Local connection (E-i/f connection)
DICOM Print
FINP
The following film sizes are available for film
output with software version B00.
14"17"
2636cm
14"14"
10"12"
8"10"
Life size (100% size) output of a long-view
combined image,
12 frame image (12on1) output on a 14"17"
film,
Multiple images of the same study assigned
on a film (1 to 4),
Magnification-ratio-specified image output
MD-37
Function
Description
Only one unit of the filing device can be

connected. When FINP is employed,
standardized, unprocessed images can only
be output. When DICOM is used,
nonstandardized images, standardized
images, and processed images can be output.
Output to networkFurther, DICOM Storage Commitment is
connected filing
supported (one unit only). The output of 20
device
lines/mm images can be generated only when
DICOM is used. Filing devices connectable
with the following protocols are supported:
FINP
DICOM CR Storage
DICOM XR Storage
Image search
Function
DICOM Query/
Retrieve
Description
Option key
Study information can be searched

for from the filing device (Query).
Based on the searched
information, images can be
CL DICOM QR
acquired from the filing device
(Retrieve).
Acquired images can be output to
the printer (Reprint).
Up to eight units can be connected. When

FINP is employed, standardized, unprocessed
images can only be output. When DICOM is
Image
used, nonstandardized images, standardized
data
images, and processed images can be output.
output
The output of 20 lines/mm images can be
function
generated only when DICOM is used.
Filing devices connectable with the following
protocols are supported:
Output to network- FINP
connected device DICOM CR Storage
DICOM XR Storage
Software version A09 supports DICOM Digital
Mammography. Following are supported
service classes.
DX Image Storage For Presentation
DX Image Storage For Processing
MG Image Storage For Presentation
MG Image Storage For Processing
Delayed image
delivery
Patient information log
function
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
A function that delivers images automatically if

no actions are taken for an image for a certain
period of time after it has been received.
Patient information is logged in text format.
Patient information used for exposures can be
viewed with Service Utility.
MD-38
Image processing
Function
Standardization
(automatic/manual)
Other
Description
Option key
Not applicable to image reoutputs that

Standard
are generated by an external device.
Gradation processing
Standard
Spatial frequency
processing
Standard
DRC
Standard*
TAS
Standard*
MFP
IR 346 MFP
IR 348 MFP
PEM
CL PEM
Blackening
Not applicable to image reoutputs

that are generated by an external
device.
CL SHUTTERPROC
Energy-subtraction
processing
Applicable when the XU-D1 is

connected.
CL ES
20 lines/mm image
support
Image composition
Standard
Composes multiple images into one CL IM
COMPOSITION
so that it is output on one film.
Grid Pattern Removal Removes grid moire patterns

(GPR) processing
without deteriorating image quality.
CL GPR
Flexible Noise Control

Improves image graininess.
(FNC) processing
Standard
Image up-and-down
positioning
Right-and-left mammography
images are automatically positioned Standard
up-and-down.
High-luminance view
box correction
processing
Correction processing necessary

when displaying high-luminance
view box image processing on the
ordinary view box (monitor).
Standard
* The DRC and TAS processing items are stored on the standard key
CD.
: XG-1 Standard key CD
XG-1 system
Two
or
more
RUs,
5000
plus
: Lite Standard key CD

Plus Standard key CD
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Function
Description
Option key
Retake Analysis
Exposure and mis-exposure image

information is stored and calculated
CL RETAKE
appropriately.
ANALYSIS
Calculated data is output in CSV
data.
IP use count
calculation
The number of how many times the

IP was used is calculated for each
Standard
IP barcode. The count can be reset
to 0.
Supported local
storage
Temporary storage
Simplified image storage
DICOM file storage
Standard
Removable media (DVD)
CL DICOM
MEDIA
STORAGE B
PDI creation
Stores study results onto a CD-R
CL DICOM
PDI
STORAGE
User interface
For hospitals
Standard
Patient information
protection
Authenticates a user at startup of

the application.
Automatic log-off processing
Limited items available for each
user
Entry of mis-exposure comment
when canceling a mis-exposure
that occurred
Re-entry of a password when
changing or modifying a
radiographer name
Standard
Date/time display
Displays the current date and time.
Standard
Logging in to the
Service Utility
Entry of password when logging in

to the Service Utility.
Standard
Image Reader QC
processing
Image Reader QC processing tool
FCR QC TEST
SOFT
Mammo QC
processing
Mammo QC processing tool
FCR QC TEST
SOFT M
Removable media
MD-39
Function
Precise enlargement
images
Description
Presents displayed images and
their additional information on a
capacity-enhanced monitor.
Option key
CR PRECISE
ENLARGEMENT
An ROI determined on an image

enables display of width and height
CR QA ROI
QA ROI measurement of the ROI, as well as its mean pixel
MEASUREMENT
value, median pixel value, standard
deviation and area.
Displays Exposure Index (EI) and
Deviation Index (DI) for an image.
Displaying Exposure
Index
FR21 Setting the Exposure Standard

Index Function under
FR: Function-specific
Reference
Japanese
English
French
German
Swedish
Italian
Spanish
Danish
Norwegian
Supported languages
Korean
Chinese (China)
Chinese (Taiwan)
Portuguese
Polish
Hungarian
Czech
Russian
Turkish
RAID status display
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Displays an icon to indicate the

RAID status.
Standard
Standard
MD-40
5.1 RU Software (AP/OS) and Data Flow
5. Relationship between RU and CL

This section explains about the data exchange operations that are
performed between the CL and RU (CR-IR346RU) when they are
connected.
RU-AP (solid-line arrow mark)

When the RU-AP is installed, the RU-AP, RU-Config, and RU
message file data are copied to the CL.
The RU-AP and RU-Config data are copied to the FLASH ROM via
the network.
NOTE
REFERENCE
The application, operating system, and RU Configuration are

abbreviated hereafter AP, OS, and RU-Config, respectively.
The RU message file stores a detailed record of RU error events.

Codes of the errors encountered in the RU are used as a key for
displaying error codes and detailed error information on the CL
monitor.

Data flow during installation process
CL
RU
RU-OS (broken-line arrow mark) and machine shipment control

data (chain-line arrow mark)
The RU-OS and machine shipment control data are copied to the
RUs FLASH ROM via the CLs FTP server.
FLASH ROM
RU-OS
RU message file
RU-AP
CD
RU-Config
FTP server
COMMON
RU-OS
RU-OS
CD
RU-AP
RU-Config
Machine shipment
control data
Machine
shipment
control data
FD
RU-AP
Machine shipment control data

Backup memory
Default RU-Config
settings
Cleared
Memory (SDRAM)
RU individual data
Data enclosed with broken lines are temporarily stored in the FTP
server for transfer to the RU.
Data enclosed with solid lines are constantly stored for comparison with
the contents of the RUs FLASH ROM.
00000508.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MD-41
Data flow during RU boot process
Data flow during normal process
RU
CL
FLASH ROM
(1)
(1)
RU-OS
RU-Config
RU-AP
Machine shipment
control data
Image data
(1)
(1)
COMMON
RU-AP
(2)
Memory (SDRAM)
Log data
RU-Config
RU-AP
Machine shipment
control data
Log data
Memory (SDRAM)
Image data
RU-Config
RU-OS
FLASH ROM
Backup memory
FTP server
Backup memory
Default RU-Config
setting data*
RU
RU individual data
*
Network setting items such
as default IP addresses of
the RU and CL.
00000509.EPS
When you boot the RU, the data in the FLASH ROM is copied to the
memory (SDRAM) (arrow mark (1)).
If the backup memory contains default RU-Config setting data, it
overwrites the RU-Config data in the memory (SDRAM) (arrow mark (2)).
REFERENCE
RU-Config
RU-OS
RU-Config
00000510.EPS
Image data
The image data obtained by IP scanning is saved in the SDRAM and
then transferred to the CL via the network.
Log data
The RU-AP copies the log data to the CLs FTP server as needed.
The default RU-Config setting data does not usually exist in the backup
memory. It is written into the backup memory only when any of the
following procedures is performed:
The <Erasure process> switch activation + RU power ON procedure is
performed.
See 3.1 CL/RU Connection Recovery Procedure to be
Performed upon RU Memory Initialization, under
MT: Machine Troubleshooting.
The Temporary Setting procedure for the backup memory is
performed with the RUs maintenance utility.
See MU: Maintenance Utility for the CR-IR346RU.
The RU-AP is installed from the CR-IR346RU MAINTENANCE TOOLS
CD.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MD-42
5.2 Mechanism of RU-AP/RU-Config AUTO UPDATE
Data flow during backup/restore process

The RU M-Utility is used to back up or restore the various RU data.
CL
RU
FLASH ROM
FTP server
COMMON
The AUTO UPDATE function will automatically have the RU download

RU data from the FTP server if there is a discrepancy between CL FTP
server data and RU FLASH ROM data (RU-AP and RU-Config).
Machine shipment
control data
The RU-AP and RU-Config are downloaded in the following sequence:
RU-Config
Machine shipment
control data
RU-Config
Backup
Media
When the CL-AP starts running, the FTP servers RU-AP and RUConfig are compared with the contents of the FLASH ROM. If they do
not match, the FTP server data overwrites the data in the FLASH ROM.
Backup memory
Log data
REFERENCE
Log data
RU individual data
AUTO UPDATE
(Currently this function is not used. Turn it OFF.)
The FTP (a network protocol for file exchange between terminals) is

used for data exchange between the RU and CL.
Memory (SDRAM)
00000518.EPS
Log data
A set of log data stored in the backup memory is backed up onto
media (FD, USB memory stick or the like) in the sequence indicated
above. Note that the log data cannot be restored.
The RU main unit is not equipped with input devices for directly
rewriting the RU internal data (RU-AP, RU-Config, etc.). Therefore, a
networked PC is used to rewrite the RU internal data. The CL-PC is
basically used when the CL-RU connection is established.
CL
RU
RU M-Utility
Comparison
RU-Config
FLASH ROM
RU-AP
RU-AP
RU-Config
The RU-Config data stored in the FTP server is backed up onto
media. In the restore process, the data on the media is copied to the
FTP server.
The machine shipment control data stored in the FLASH ROM is
backed up onto media in the sequence indicated above. In the
restore process, the data is copied to the FLASH ROM via the FTP
server.
FTP server
Comparison
RU-Config
If a file date conflict occurs

CL
RU
RU M-Utility
FTP server
Acquisition
FLASH ROM
RU-AP
RU-AP
RU-Config
RU-Config
Acquisition
00010139.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MD-43
NOTE
The comparison between the RU-AP and RU-Config is made by
checking the file date. It is thus well to remember that the FLASH ROM
data is updated even if a file in the FTP server is dated earlier than
FLASH ROM data.
NOTE
[Influence of RU-AP upgrade on RU-Config]
When you upgrade the RU-AP, the RU-Config file date may change for
the following reason:
If, for instance, the RU-AP version is upgraded from A00 to A01, the
resulting sequence is as indicated below:
The date changes:

When the contents of the RU-Config are changed before the
upgrade (including the contents of the RU-Config setup window
displayed at the time of RU-AP installation).
1.
The A01 version RU-AP is installed in the CLs FTP server.
The date remains unchanged:

When the contents of the RU-Config are not changed at all.
2.
Either the CL or the RU is restarted. At the restart, the data

in the FTP server and FLASH ROM are compared with each
other.
Since the A00 data and A01 data differ with each other, the RU
acquires the A01 version RU-AP from the FTP server and updates
the A00 data in the FLASH ROM with the A01 data.
On the other hand, the contents of the RU-Config remain
unchanged. Therefore, the RU-Config data does not overwrite the
FLASH ROM data even after a comparison is made.
CL
RU M-Utility
CD
When installing the RU-AP in the FTP server, use the RU M-Utility.
The RU M-Utility is a utility tool that is dedicated to the RU and used,
for instance, for RU-AP installation and RU-Config setup.
Since this tool is required for RU-AP installation and RU-Config setup,
it needs to be installed in advance. It is stored on the CD supplied with
the RU.
RU
FTP server
FLASH ROM
RU-AP (A01)
RU-AP (A00)
RU-Config
RU-Config
The CL or RU is restarted.
CL
RU M-Utility
REFERENCE
FTP server
Comparison
and
acquisition
RU-AP (A01)
RU
FLASH ROM
Support for daylight saving time/winter time

(AUTO UPDATE)
When the machine is operated in a region where the file time stamp
varies depending on whether daylight saving time or winter time is used,
it is necessary to turn OFF the AUTO UPDATE function. If daylight
saving time is superseded by winter time or vice versa while this
function is left ON, the RU downloads FTP server data, throwing the
user into confusion.
To avoid the above problem, it is necessary to turn OFF the AUTO
UPDATE function when the machine is installed or serviced in a region
where the file time stamp varies depending on whether daylight saving
time or winter time is used.
RU-AP (A01)
RU-Config
Comparison
only
RU-Config
00010036.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MD-44
6. RU-CL N:N Connection Function Overview
6. RU-CL N:N Connection

Function Overview
The RU-CL N:N connection function is furnished by software version
A04. This function enables one CL to control two or more RUs and
allows you to simultaneously operate two or more CLs (for permitting
the RU to transfer images to the CLs in which the associated barcodes
are registered). The equipment controlling the use of the above function
on a network is called the RU master IIP. The RU master IIP plays an
important role in establishing the N:N connections for the RU and CL.
This section mainly deals with the RU master IIP functionality,
summarizing the N:N connection function.
NOTE
The terms CR-IR346RU, application, and RU configuration are
abbreviated hereinafter to RU, AP, and RU-Config, respectively.
CLs serving as the RU master IIP and those not serving

as the RU master IIP
The CLs serving as the RU master IIP (hereinafter referred to as the RU
master IIP) manage the RUs. These CLs have an FTP server for
exchanging data with the RUs (the FTP server is detailed earlier). When
establishing the N:N connections for the RU and CL, the RU needs to
define a networked CL as the RU master IIP.
Up to eight units of the RU (up to three for software version A10 or
earlier) can be managed by one unit of the RU master IIP.
On the other hand, the CLs not serving as the RU master IIP do not
have the FTP server for exchanging data with the RU. They merely
receive images from the RU. Therefore, the FTP server setup
procedures (procedures for installing and setting up the IIS and RU
M-Utility) need not be performed for these CLs.
CL (other than
RU master IIP)
CL (RU master IIP)

FTP server
The RU data is
exchanged with the
RU master IIP only.
Images are
transmitted to
a unit in which
the associated
RU
RU
RU
barcode is
registered.
Flow of RU data (RU-AP, RU-Config,
error information, etc.)
Flow of ID information and image data
Not equipped
with the FTP
server.
MD000021.EPS
REFERENCE
The RU master IIP also incorporates the interface for displaying the RU
status and error information.
Handling of data whose ID registration is completed at IDT-IV

When the barcode of an IP is registered at an IDT-IV unit that shares
the patient information setup with the RU master IIP and that IP is read
by the RU, the image data is handled as explained below:
The image data is transferred to the RU master IIP that shares the
patient information setup with the IDT-IV.
The RU master IIP generates a new study in accordance with the ID
information registered at the IDT-IV, and stores an image in the area
of the newly generated study.
Only one image is to be stored per study. Even when the IDT-IV is set
to issue Study Instance UIDs in relation to the same study, one image
will be stored per study.
For details on patient information sharing setup, see 3.13 Patient
Information Sharing Function Setup under MU: Maintenance
Utility.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MD-45
7. Ordering Function Overview
7. Ordering Function Overview

When the ordering function is exercised, the patient information,
exposure menu, and X-ray information entered at the RIS are
transmitted to the CL and, after completion of an exposure process,
various items of information used for actual exposures (actual values)
are returned to the RIS.
The CL exercises the ordering function via either the serial interface or
F-RIS (in Japan only).
(1)
RIS
(3)
(2)
CL
RU/IR
(1)Various items of information (patient information,

exposure menu, and X-ray information) are transmitted to
the CL.
(2)Exposure
(3)The values actually used for exposure (patient
information, exposure menu, and X-ray information) are
received from the CL.
MD000022.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MD-46
8. Cluster Connection Function Overview
8. Cluster Connection Function

Overview
The cluster connection function enables network-connected CLs to
share study information.
When this function is exercised for cluster-connected CLs, the study
information and images registered with a connected CL can be
displayed on the display screen of a specific CL. This function also
makes it possible to collectively manage patient information and
perform an integrated output processing operation.
Function overview
Study information display
Various study lists (Local WL, QA, Queue, Delivered, All, Today) of a
specific CL can display the study information about the other CLs
within the shared range.
In this instance, the study information that is not possessed by the
specific CL can also be obtained from the other cluster-connected
CL and displayed.
Cluster-connected
NOTE
If the Japanese and English versions of the CLs are used together, they
cannot be cluster-connected.
Printer
1.
2.
A typical cluster connection is shown below.

Study list display
Cluster-connected
RU1
CL1
CL2
CL1
Patient information
database
An example of cluster connection
Printer
RU1
A
B
C
D
RU2
MD000089.EPS
Study information
database
A
B
Image display
A
Information
sharing
Study list display

A
B
C
D
Study information
database
C
D
Image display
Image files
RU2
CL2
Image files
C
MD000090.EPS
Image display
Study information can be selected from a study list to display the
associated image. In this instance, the CL having the study
information may not always be identical with the CL having the
associated image file.
If the CL having the associated image file is turned OFF in such a
situation, a file access error occurs so that a dummy image appears
on the display.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MD-47
Study registration and study execution

The study information registration and study execution processes
can be performed by a specific CL in the same manner as before.
In addition, these processes can be performed by different CLs as
well.
Registered study information can be shared by cluster-connected
CLs.
Study information registration
NOTE
If an error occurs, it is displayed and logged by a CL that has been
performing the affected process. Therefore, the error information
must be collected on an individual CL basis.
Example) Image reading error Displayed on a CL that has been
reading the affected image.
Study execution
E
F
E
F
Sorting, search, and filtering

Although the total number of studies to be displayed increases due
to cluster connection, you can perform a sorting/search/filtering
operation from a study list to narrow down the range of study
information to be displayed.
Printer
RU1
CL1
Patient information
database
1.
2.
Study list display
A
B
C
D
E
F
Study information
database
A
B
E
F
Image display
E
Information
sharing
Study information
database
A
B
C
D
E
F
C
D
Image files
C
Shared study information display setup

Various study list setup windows are available for defining the items
to be displayed and the maximum number of studies to be displayed
in each study list.
Share range setup
With Service Utility, you can define a share range to determine what
CLs can share study information.
After a share range is defined in this manner from Service Utility, it
can be narrowed down from a study list.
Study list display
Image display
Image files
RU2
CL2
Printer output error Displayed on an output

processing CL.
Shared patient information

When Service Utility is used to designate a certain CL as a patient
information database server, the patient information entered in a
centralized manner from a specific CL can be shared by the other
CLs.
MD000091.EPS
When images are read for executing a study, they are stored in a CL
that has executed the study.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MD-48
Studies enabled by cluster connection

When a cluster connection is established, the following studies can be
conducted.
Intensive QA (improved QA efficiency)
After study reception, X-ray exposure, and primary verification
procedures are performed by a designated radiographer at various
CLs, a senior radiographer can perform a secondary verification
procedure intensively at a separate CL.
Centralized study reservation (improved exposure efficiency)
While a study reservation procedure is performed intensively at a
specific CL, the other CLs can be used exclusively for X-ray
exposure operations. A study can be reserved or started by entering
nothing other than patient information from the study reception
window (without having to enter an exposure menu).
Integrated output processing (reduced output load)
A specific CL can be designated as an output processing unit so as
to carry out output processing in a centralized manner. In this
instance, the print option is required for the output processing CL
only.
Moving a study from one X-ray exposure room to another
A currently executed study can be suspended and then resumed at
another CL. If, for instance, a built-in type X-ray exposure is needed
for a study that was originally registered for a cassette exposure, the
study can be moved to another X-ray exposure room.
Restrictions on cluster connection

Configuration restrictions
Up to 12 units of the CL can be cluster-connected (for shared
study information).
When establishing a cluster connection, it is necessary to initialize
the image databases of the CLs within a share range. The CLs
cannot be cluster-connected while they retain their previously
saved data.
When CLs are to be added to or removed from an institution in
which a cluster connection is established, they are allowed to
retain their previously saved data. However, you must delete the
image files that are saved in the CLs to be removed.
When an MWM connection is used, each CL receives study
information from the RIS. Therefore, the MWM tab in a study list is
not to be shared.
Setting restrictions
The host name of a cluster-connected CL cannot exceed 10
characters in length. (When the 5000 is connected, the maximum
host name length is 10 characters due to the limitations on the
FINP character string length.)
Ensure that the cluster-connected CLs use the same CL software
version.
There are some User Utility/Service Utility configuration settings
that need to be the same for all CLs.
For details on User Utility configuration settings, see
2.1.4 Equalizing the Menu/Environment/Table Settings in
OE15: Cluster Connection.
For details on Service Utility configuration settings, see
3. Various Configuration Settings Setup Configuration Item
in MU: Maintenance Utility.
Each CL can designate only one output processing CL.

All the output CLs entitled to issue an output request must be
registered with the output processing CL.
If the number of studies to be displayed is set to limitless, a
considerable amount of time may be required for operation.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MD-49
Operational restrictions
A study currently used by a certain CL for exposure or QA
purposes cannot be selected from the other CLs (the All list
indicates that an exposure/QA process is in progress).
While a CL is running User Utility or Service Utility, the other CLs
can share the study information. However, image database
initialization, study-related information editing, and other similar
operations must be performed while all CLs are stopped.
Studies cannot be moved from one X-ray exposure room to
another if they are being used for exposure/QA at another CL,
registered without completing an image input, or in an output
process.
If the output processing CL receives a request for large-volume
output, the processing speed may decrease. To keep a high
output processing speed, perform setup in the same manner as
before so that each CL performs output operation.
When initializing the image database of a specific CL, ensure that
all the CLs within the predefined share range are turned ON (with
the CL application terminated). If the CLs containing any image
files are turned OFF, such image files will remain undeleted.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MD-50
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
MD-51
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
MD-52
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MT-I
Control Sheet
Issue date
Revision number
Reason
10/20/2000
12/10/2000
04/10/2001
00
00
01
05/30/2001
02
08/30/2001
03/20/2002
03
04

Revision (FM2950)
Previous Chapter C Error Information/Service Parts
divided and modified (FM2951)
Revision for software version A02 and GX150
(FM3027)
03/20/2002
04
07/20/2002
05
07/20/2002
05
11/30/2002
06
11/30/2002
06
03/01/2003
07
03/01/2003
08/20/2003
07
08

08/20/2003
08
12/10/2003
09
12/10/2003
09
02/20/2004
10

010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Pages affected
All pages
Pages I, II, 1, 6, 8, 10, 13, 15, 16
All pages
I, II, 5, 6, 12, 17, 21
I, II, 5, 18
I, II, 4, Appx MT A-1, A-34, A-50,
A-75, A-98, A-99, A-111, A-112
Appx MT A-3549, A-5174,
A-7697, A-100110
I, II, 4, 11, 19, 23-36,
A-43, A-46, A-51, A-52, A-58, A-66,
A-94, A-95, A-104, A-105, A-111
Appx MT A-3538, A-41, A-44,
Appx MT A-34, A-39, A-40, A-42,
A-45, A-4750, A-5357, A-5965,
A-6793, A-96103, A-106110,
A-112116
I-IV, Appx MT A-1, 18, 3133, 36,
4345 ,48, 49, 53, 78 , 105, 109
Appx MTA-1930, 34, 35, 3742,
46, 47, 5052, 5477, 79104,
106108, 110116
I, II, 5, 6, 23, 24, Appx MT A-1, 36,
103, 104
Appx MT A-3749, 105, 106
I, II, 17, Appx MT A-1, 38, 45, 50,
5254, 60, 78, 79, 90, 101, 105,
107114, 118120
Appx MT A-3944, 4649, 51,
5559, 6177, 8089, 91100,
102104, 106, 115117
I, II, 15, 16, Appx MT A-13, 57,
20, 38, 48, 6870, 81, 86, 88,
9098, 124
Appx MT A-4, 819, 2137, 3947,
4967, 7180, 8285, 87, 89,
99123, 125, 126
All pages
MT-II
Control Sheet
Issue date
Revision number
07/30/2004
11
07/30/2004
11
11/12/2004
12
07/30/2005
14
07/30/2005
14
11/30/2005
11/30/2005
07/30/2006
15
15
16
07/30/2006
16
07/20/2007
17
07/20/2007
17
05/09/2008
18
05/09/2008
18
10/31/2008
19
10/31/2008
19
Revision for software V1.0(C), support

provided to NEC PC and corrections (FM4450)
I, III, 4, 11, 20, 23, 40, 48,
Appx MT-1, 51, 58, 89, 90, 103,
104, 106, 107, 125128, 132134,
137139, 141154
Appx MT-5257, 5988, 91102,
105, 108124, 129131, 135, 136,
140
I, III, 4, Appx MT-1, 96
Appx MT-97153
I, III, 4, 43, 55, 56, Appx MT-1,
4042, 91, 98, 145
Appx MT-4390, 9297, 99144,
146156
I, III, 4, 6, 18, 19, 40, 41,
Appx MT-1, 22, 42, 11129,
139141, 146
Appx MT-2341, 43111, 130138,
142145, 147160
I, III, 4, Appx MT-1, 4, 54, 55, 61,
66, 93, 100, 112114, 137, 148,
153, 163, 164
Appx MT-553, 5660, 6265,
6792, 9499, 101111, 115136,
138147, 149152, 154162
I, III, 4, Appx MT-1, 43, 44, 65, 95,
103, 109, 168
Appx MT-4564, 6694, 96102,
104108, 110167
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Reason
Pages affected
I, III, 1, 4, 5, 11, 13, 18, 19, 23, 28,
3034, 40, Appx MT-1, 2, 4, 5, 40,
41, 49, 5159, 65, 88, 89, 105,
121124, 131, 132, 140
2022, 3539, Appx MT-3, 639,
4248, 50, 6064, 6687, 90104,
106120, 125130, 133139
I, III, 4, 23, 24, 4054
MT-III
Control Sheet
Issue date
Revision number
11/30/2009
20
11/30/2009
20
03/31/2010
21
03/31/2010
21
12/10/2010
22
12/10/2010
22
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Reason
Pages affected
I, IV, 1, 4, 5, 7, 11, 13, 14, 24, 25,
2934, 3739, 4145, 49, 50,
Appx1 MT All pages,
Appx2 MT All pages
810, 1523, 2628, 32, 35, 36, 40,
4648, 5164
I, IV, 4, 9, 19, 26, Appx1 MT-1, 62,
63, 104, 113, 120, 164, 166,
Appx2 MT-112, Appx3 MT-14,
Appx4 MT-14
Appx1 MT-64103, 105112,
114119, 121163, 165, 167, 168
I, IV, 36, 37, 39, 40,
Appx1 MT All pages
38, 4168
MT-IV
1.1 Referring to Error Messages
1. Error Code Table
Meaning of the event (error code)

A five-digit code displayed in the Event column implies the following.
For errors occurring while the CL-AP is being used, take appropriate
countermeasures following the error codes (and error messages) listed
herein.
A B C C C
A:
Error-detected process
1: Module used in common in the system
2: Main process
3: Input process
4: QA unit
5: Output process
6: FINP process
7: UTILITY process
B:
Error level (See the Table Error Levels.)
See 2. Using the Event Viewer.
NOTE
Windows 2000 screens are used herein, which are the same as those
displayed by Windows XP or Windows Vista.

Event (error code) and event source name
When an error occurs, use the event and event source name
information to separate the assumed causes.
The event and event source name are displayed in the Source and
Event columns of the Event Viewer main window shown below.
Source column
CCC: For error level 0 or 1, this section of the error

code is provided so that it is unique in the process.
For error level 2, 3 or 9, this section is unique in
the control.
00000071.EPS
Event column
00000072.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MT-1
Message
Table Error Levels

Error Level
Description
0: Fatal Error
An error that fully
disables system
operation.
A serious, fatal problem that absolutely disables the

systems stable operation.
DB acc ess error
System file access file error
1: Warning
An error that
enables the
systems operation
to be continued
after user
intervention.
Inevitably involves user notification and the system

operation can be continued by the user intervention.
Causes of this error type can be assumed as follows.
Data file access error
Disk full
Faulty LP board
No response from the target destination for connection
2: Warning
An error that
enables the
systems
continuous
operation.
A slight error that does not require user notification.

The system operation can be continued with no user
intervention. The following causes can be assumed.
Unspecified data entered from networks. (An error
implying that the system can be continued being
substituted by the default).
The message is for describing errors and is displayed in the Description

(D) column of the Event Viewers Properties window shown below.
Description (D) column
00000073.EPS
3: Information
Information that the system development section wishes to
Simple information keep.
9: Logical Error
An error presumably caused by defective program.
Defective program Basically, this error does not occur at users site. This error
type has been aborted by the RU previously. The following
causes can be assumed.
Unspecified value returned from the method
Failure in securing memory
Failure in acquiring Windows resources
Error returned from the Windows API
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
MT-2
Identifying the problem cause when two or more errors encountered

have the same error code
The same error code may appear on the display even when the error
cause varies. If you encounter such a situation, note both the error
code and error message to identify the error cause.
Event
Description
Event
Source
FFCustom MessageBox
MsgBox Dialog Show
13005
Error.
13005
13005
13005
13005
13005
13005
13005
13005
To identify the error cause, perform the following procedure:
1.
Start the Event Viewer.
2.
Open the Event Properties window.
3.
See both the error code and error message, and then locate
the associated error description in Appendix CL Error
Message Table.
Causes
A message box could not be

displayed. The problem is
attributable to resource
inadequacy or system instability
FFIdCon Recv
The connection to the RU was
nection
error(%1).%n[%2] closed or an error occurred in
Watch
the connection.
FFIdFilm It failed that [%1] The FfilmMarkDB key was not
Mark
gets the
found in Directory.ini.
connection string
of FilmMarkDB
FFId
[%1] failed in the The connection to the
Menu
liberating
displaygroup table was not
Change processing of the successfully closed.
display group
data acquisition
FFIdPat It failed that [%1] The LangStrDB key was not
InfoInput gets the SexMale found in Directory.ini or the ID
caption
30705 was not registered in the
character string data base.
FFId
Recv error[%1]
The connection to the RU was
RuMain
closed or an error occurred in
Control
the connection.
FFIdRu Magnetic card
The employed magnetic card
Main
variation
type was different than specified.
Control
error[%1]
FFIipInput It failed that [%1] The connection character string
connects to
was not properly registered for
STRDB
the LangStrDB key in Directory.
ini.
FFIpcInf [%1] It failed in_ Main thread creation was no
beginthread(%2). successful. The problem is
attributable to resource
inadequacy or system instability.
For details the procedure for opening the above window, see
2.4 Details of Events.
Error code
Error message
00000472.EPS
* There are two or more occurrences of the same error code

(event).
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
MT-3
1.2 Precautions
1.2 Precautions
An error such as incorrectly entered image processing parameters
will not be handled as an error.
An error code starting with 9 (e.g.: 9XXXX) is that generated by the
RU.
1.3 Error Message

For error messages of software version A00 to A11, V.(B),
see Appendix 1 CL Error Message Table (A00 to A11, V1.0(B) to
V8.1(B)).
The correlation between the error level (the second digit of an error
code number) of CL-generated errors and that assumed by Windows
(Event Viewer) is as follows.
Error level
Error level assumed by Windows
0 : Fatal Error
EVENTLOG_ERROR_TYPE
1 : Warning
EVENTLOG_WARNING_TYPE
2 : Warning
EVENTLOG_WARNING_TYPE
3 : Information
EVENTLOG_INFORMATION_TYPE
9 : Logical Error EVENTLOG_ERROR_TYPE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
MT-4
2.1 Overview of the Event Viewer
2. Using the Event Viewer
2.2 Starting the Event Viewer
The Windows 2000/XP/Vista Event Viewer is used for checking details

of errors occurring with Windows 2000/XP/Vista or the CL-AP.
How to use the Event Viewer is described herein, together with the
startup procedures.
1.
Start up the Service Utility mode.

For details of Service Utility mode startup, see
1. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility in MU: Maintenance
Utility.
The IIP Service Utility window opens.
NOTE
2.1 Overview of the Event Viewer

A variety of information items, such as resource information, system
operation status and application errors occurring with Windows 2000/
XP/Vista, are recorded (logged) to the Event Viewer.
Causes of errors that occur can be specified from the following logs.
Application Log
System Log
Security Log
The CL-AP error information is recorded to the Application Log.
To display the CL-AP error information, select the Application Log from
the tree menu of the Event Viewer main window shown below.
MT000008.EPS
00000371.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MT-5
2.2 Starting the Event Viewer
2.
Click
The Event Viewer main window opens.
REFERENCE
Use the following procedures if you cannot start up the Event
Viewer from the Service Utility mode.
1. From the Start menu at the lower left of the desktop window,
select Settings and then Control Panel to display the Control
Panel window.
2. Double-click Administrative Tool to display the Administrative
Tool window.
3. Double-click Event Viewer. The Event Viewer starts up.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MT-6
2.3 Configuration and How to View the Event Viewer
2.3 Configuration and How to View

the Event Viewer
For Windows Vista
Explained herein are the Event Viewers screen configuration (shown

below) and how to view it.
For Windows 2000/XP
E
00000375.ai
A Types:
A
Symbol
Error
Meaning
Error
Description
Warning
B Date
C Time
D Source
E Category
F Event
G User
Displayed to indicate that the system has started

Information normally being successful in startup of services or
remote access.
Displayed when a fatal error, such as failure in

device driver or service startup, or loss of data,
occurs while the system is running.
Displayed to indicate that the system has started

Information normally being successful in startup of services or
remote access.
Displayed to indicate that the Warning can be
attributable to the cause of the error that has
occurred.
Description
Displayed when a fatal error, such as failure in
device driver or service startup, or loss of data,
occurs while the system is running.
00000375.EPS
A Types:
Symbol
Meaning
Warning
B
C
D
E
Date and Time

Source
Event ID
Task Category
:
:
:
:
Displayed to indicate that the Warning can be

attributable to the cause of the error that has
occurred.
The date and time when an event occurs.

The source application that wrote an event.
Event ID
Event category
:
:
:
:
:
:
The date when an event occurs.

The time when an event occurs.
The source application that wrote an event.
Event category
Event ID
The user who has been logged in when an event
occurs. N/A will be displayed if software that does not
specify the users name is used.
H Computer : Computer name used when an event occurs.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MT-7
2.4 Details of Events
2.
2.4 Details of Events
Check detailed information of an event.
Described below are the procedures used for checking detailed event
information.
1.
On the Event Viewer main window, double-click the log you

wish to display.
Description (D)
column
Data (T)
column
00000376.EPS
The Event Properties window opens.
00000377.EPS
Description (D) : Displays detailed information of an event.

Data (T)
3.
Click
: Displays the location where an event occurs,

using the information based on the number of
bytes or words.
The system return to the Event Viewer window.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MT-8
2.5 Saving the Event Log
2.5 Saving the Event Log
3.
Select or enter the following.

I
How to save event logs is explained below.
NOTE
Be sure to have media, such as an FD, USB memory stick or the like,
ready to use for saving event logs.
1.
Insert media into the PC.
2.
From the Action menu of the Event Viewer main window,

select Save Log File As....
II
00000379.EPS
I. Select a media drive.

II. Enter the filename (e.g.: log).
00000378.EPS
REFERENCE
The Save Application Log (2) As window opens.
If Text (Tab Separation) is selected for Save as Type, event logs

can be saved as text files.
4.
Click
The system returns to the Event Viewer/Application Log window.
5.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Remove the media from the PC.
MT-9
2.6 Deleting the Event Log
2.6 Deleting the Event Log
2.7 Quitting the Event Viewer
How to delete event logs are explained below.
How to quit the Event Viewer is explained below.
1.
1.
From the Action menu of the Event Viewer window, select

Clear all Events.
Click
of the Event Viewer main window.
The system return to the desktop window.
00000380.EPS
A window opens prompting you to confirm the data to be saved.
2.
Click
The system returns to the Event Viewer/Application Log window,

deleting thus all event logs.
00000381.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MT-10
3.1 CL/RU Connection Recovery Procedure to be Performed upon RU Memory Initialization
3. Information Useful for Error

Recovery
CL/RU connection recovery procedure to be performed upon RU
memory initialization
This procedure is used to restore the RU IP address to its default
setting to recover the connection to the CL. Use this procedure
when, for instance, the RU is invisible to the network.
Typical procedure for achieving recovery from an LP (local printer)
printout generation failure
This section describes the troubleshooting procedure to be
performed in the event of an LP printing failure.
Messages displayed upon an RU-AP/RU-Config update (RU-AP of
version A06 or earlier)
When the RU-AP and RU-Config are written into the RUs FLASH
ROM, various messages appear on the CL monitor. Such messages
are detailed in this section.
Precautions to be observed during the use of output options
This section offers a troubleshooting guide that you should follow
when the error code 50001 (output option setup error) appears on
the display.
NOTE
3.1 CL/RU Connection Recovery Procedure to

be Performed upon RU Memory Initialization
This section explains about the procedure for recovering the connection
to the CL when the memory is initialized by performing the memory
initialization procedure (<Erasure process> switch activation + RU
power ON) at the RU.
See 5. Relationship between RU and CL in MD: Machine
Description.
This section explains about the recovery procedure to be performed in

situations where the CL and RU are in the following states:
(NETMASK 255.255.0.0)
IP address
200.150.100.50
RU
IP address
200.150.100.10
CL
SDRAM
RU IP address
200.150.100.50
CL IP address
200.150.100.10
NETMASK
255.255.0.0
Backup
memory
No data
FLASH ROM
FTP server
RU IP ADDR
CL IP ADDR
NETMASK
RU IP ADDR
CL IP ADDR
NETMASK
Same contents
RU-Config
RU IP address
200.150.100.50
CL IP address
200.150.100.10
NETMASK
255.255.0.0
RU-Config
00000089.EPS
REFERENCE
The SDRAM IP address is used as the IP address for the RU.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MT-11
Recovery sequence overview
Details of u Procedure 1
Procedure 2
Restore the CL-PC
main unit IP address
to the default*.
TCP/IP (NETMASK 255.255.0.0)

IP address
200.150.100.50
RU
CL
172.16.1.10
Results of procedure
1 execution
SDRAM
Results of
procedure
1 execution
Copy the
data to the
SDRAM when
rebooting
the RU.
RU IP address
172.16.1.10
CL IP address
172.16.1.20
NETMASK
255.255.0.0
FLASH ROM
* Default settings
RU IP ADDR
CL IP ADDR
NETMASK
RU IP address : 172.16.1.10
CL IPaddress : 172.16.1.20
NETMASK : 255.255.0.0
Copy the data

to the SDRAM
(after the
FLASH ROM).
Backup
memory
RU IP address
172.16.1.10
CL IP address
172.16.1.20
NETMASK
255.255.0.0
Hold down the RUs <Erasure process> switch, turn ON the

power switch.
You have to still hold down the <Erasure process> switch at

this stage.
IP address
200.150.100.10
172.16.1.20
Procedure 1
The RU is rebooted.
2.
When the memory

initialization procedure
is performed, the
contents of the backup
memory revert to the
default settings* and
the RU reboots.
When you start the CL-AP,

the system transfers the
RU-Config and at
the same time clears the
backup memory.
Procedure 4
1.
FTP Server
Verify that the primary erasure LED on the RU panel comes

on (in about 7 seconds).
NOTE
If the primary erasure LED does not come on, the initialization
process is not completed. In such an instance, perform steps 1.
and beyond again.
3.
Release the <Erasure process> switch.
RU P ADDR
CL P ADDR
NETMASK
Restore the RUConfig internal

settings to the
default values*.
Procedure 3
00000090.EPS
NOTES
The communication between the CL and RU can be restored to normal
by performing Procedures 1 and 2.
The RU-Config in the FLASH ROM can be restored to the default
settings by performing Procedures 3 and 4.
If the contents of the backup memory are cleared, the SDRAM will not
be overwritten on a reboot.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
MT-12
5.
Choose
For Windows 2000/XP
1.
and then click

.
Perform settings as follows.
The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window opens.
For Windows 2000

on the desktop.
Double-click
6.
Choose
7.
Perform the following setup steps:
The My Computer window opens.
Double-click
The Control Panel window opens.
II
For Windows XP
from the
Select
2.
Double-click
8.
Double-click
Click
You are returned to the Local Area Connection Properties

window.
The Network and Dial-up Connections window opens.
3.
I. Change this entry to the default CL IP address (176.16.1.20).

II. Change this entry to the default subnet mask (255.255.0.0).
menu.
00000430.EPS
9.
Click
You are returned to the desktop.
REFERENCE
When a dialog box opens to prompt for a restart, click [Yes].
This causes the OS to restart and automatically starts up the CL-AP.
The Local Area Connection window opens.
4.
Click
The Local Area Connection Properties window opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MT-13
For Windows Vista
1.
Select Control Panel from the
menu.
6.
Choose
7.
2.
Double-click
.
II
The Network and Sharing Center window opens.
3.
00000430.EPS
I. Change this entry to the default CL IP address (176.16.1.20).

II. Change this entry to the default subnet mask (255.255.0.0).
Click View status.
8.
Click

window.
9.
Click
The system returns to the Local Area Connection Status window.
10. Click [Close].

The system returns to the Network and Sharing Center window.
AWS80302.ai
11. Close the Network and Sharing Center window.
4.
Click
You are returned to the desktop.
5.
Choose
and then click
REFERENCE
When a dialog box opens to prompt for a restart, click [Yes].
This causes the OS to restart and automatically starts up the CL-AP.
.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MT-14
2.
1.
Start the RU M-Utility as directed below:
In the LIST OF EXITING RU field, click the host name of

the RU whose configuration file is going to be edited.
NOTE
Make sure that the CL-AP, Service Utility, or other AP or Explorer is
not running. If any such application is running, quit it.
RU host name
III. Specify the file.
00000446.EPS
The EDIT CONFIGURATION button text color changes from gray

to black.
3.
Use PING to verify the connection to the RU.

I
II
III
IV. Click here.
00000512.EPS
I. Enter the RU host name (ru0).

II. Enter the RU IP address (172.16.1.10).
III. Click
II. Click here.

I. Click here.
The RU M-Utility main menu opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
IV. Verify that the network connection is normal.

00000219.EPS
4.
Click
The READER UNIT SETTING window opens.
MT-15
5.

I
II
1.
Click
. Choose Programs, Fuji Film, FCR.
The CL-AP starts up in about two minutes.

Version A software
III
00000513.EPS
I. Verify that the RUs default IP address is entered (172.16.1.10).

II. Switch to the CLs default IP address (172.16.1.20).
III. Switch to the default net mask (255.255.0.0).
6.
Click
The system saves your setting entries and returns to the main
menu.
7.
Click the
mark at the upper right corner of the window.
The system returns to the desktop screen.

00000195.EPS
Version B software
MT000049.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MT-16
CAUTION
While the RU panel LEDs are illuminated, never turn OFF the RU
power because the RUs CPU board may become damaged.
After a while, all the LEDs on the RU panel come on.
A message appears on the CL monitor to indicate that the RUConfig is being updated. (While the update is in progress, the
system repeats a single-beep and two-successive-beep cycle.)
3.
Click
(or
).
A menu opens.
4.
Hold down the <SHIFT> key and click
The CL-AP exits.
l RU
!
All the LEDs on the RU panel glow.
00000196.EPS
l CL
A message appears to indicate that

the RU-Config is being updated.
0000517.EPS
The RU-Config update process ends.
2.
Click
on the CL monitor.
The RU restarts so that the updated RU-Config takes effect.

In several seconds, the Console Warning window appears on the
CL.
NOTE
Do not touch any operating controls for a while.
The Console Warning window automatically disappears.
The RU initialization message appears. In about one minute, the
RU becomes operative.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MT-17
7.
Editing NETWORK CONFIG
A window opens, prompting you to confirm the setup data to be

saved.
Change the RUs IP address that is entered from the CLs Service
Utility. If you do not change the RU IP address, an error (error code:
31382) occurs when an image is read.
8.
1.
Start the CLs Service Utility.
2.
Click [Setup Configuration Item].
From the Config (F) menu, choose Save.
Click
The system saves the setup data.
9.
From the Config (F) menu, choose Close.

The system returns to the IIP Service Utility window.
10. Click [Exit Service Utility].

MT000006.EPS
The Setup Configuration Item window opens.
3.
Click the
sign within
4.
Click the
choose
sign within
.
.
and then
The HostName window opens in the right-hand area of the

currently displayed window.
5.
Note the IP address indicated in the

field and change it to the RUs
IP address (172.16.1.10).
6.
Click
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MT-18
3.2 Typical Procedure for Achieving Recovery from an LP (Local Printer) Printout Generation Failure
3.2 Typical Procedure for Achieving

Recovery from an LP (Local Printer)
Printout Generation Failure
Checking the PEI01A board device driver
1.
For Windows 2000
This section explains about the procedures to be performed when the

Status field of the user window Wait for Output indicates the
occurrence of the error No Output Option (see the window shown
below).
on the desktop to select
Right-click
Properties.
The System Properties window opens.
For Windows XP
No Output Option
from the
Right-click
00000447.EPS
select Properties.
Preliminary checkout
First, conduct the following checks to verify the LP settings:
Check whether the LP option key is installed.
Check whether the PEI01A board is properly set and mounted.
Check for an improper cable connection between the PEI01A board
and printer.
menu to
2.
Click the
3.
Click
tab.
in the Device Manager area.
The Device Manager window opens.
Cause
If the No Output Option error is indicated when the above procedures
are properly completed, it is conceivable that the PEI01A board driver
may be improperly installed.
The PEI01A board driver is stored on the CL-APs CD. Installing the
CL-AP and starting the AP automatically installs the driver.
However, if a different incompatible driver is already installed, starting
the CL-AP does not automatically install the correct driver.
First of all, you should check whether the correct driver is installed as
directed below.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
MT-19
3.2 Typical Procedure for Achieving Recovery from an LP (Local Printer) Printout Generation Failure
4.
Deleting an invalid PCI device driver (marked ?)
Note the hardware information about the PCI port.
1.
In the Device Manager window, click the [+] mark to the

left of Other devices
PCI Device appears under Other devices.
2.
Click
menu.
and then choose Delete on the Action
No Good : Driver installation is Good : Driver installation is

not normally
normally completed.
completed.
00000448.EPS
NOTE
If the OS is installed with the PEI01A board mounted in the PC, the
driver installation will not be successful causing a status where
other improper drivers have been installed.
00000449.EPS
The invalid driver named PCI Device is then deleted.
3.
Exit the Device Manager and then restart the PC.

The CL-AP starts up in about one minute. When it starts up, the
PEI01A board driver (FUJIFILM Pei Device) is automatically
installed.
NOTE
For Windows XP, the installation wizard window opens after the PC
has been restarted. Install the PEI board driver following on-screen
instructions.
4.
Verify that the driver is properly installed.

See Checking the PEI01A board device driver.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MT-20
3.3 Messages Displayed upon an RU-AP/RU-Config Update (RU-AP of version A06 or earlier)
3.3 Messages Displayed upon an RU-AP/

RU-Config Update
(RU-AP of version A06 or earlier)
This section describes the sequence that is followed after RU-AP
installation or RU-Config editing and explains about the messages that
appear on the display.
For details on the data exchanged between the CL and RU, see
5. Relationship between RU and CL in MD: Machine
Description.
Install the RU-AP or edit the RU-Config.
RU-Config
installation
completed?
No
Yes
A message appears (code: 11025).
The RU-Config in the FLASH ROM
is updated.
The above message reports such an
update to the CL.
Click [Restart] that appears on the
CL monitor.
Start the CL-AP.
RU-AP changed?
No
An error dialog box opens

(code: 31116, 31117, 31118, or
other RU connection error code).
Yes
A message appears (code: 11024).
The RU-AP in the FLASH ROM is updated.
The above message reports such an update
to the CL.
Clicking [Restart] reboots the RU.

The network connection temporarily
closes on a reboot.*
The above error dialog box notifies
the CL of such a disconnection.
Click [Restart] that appears on the CL monitor.

An error dialog box opens
(code: 31116, 31117, 31118, or other RU
connection error code).
Clicking [Restart] reboots the RU.
The network connection temporarily closes on
a reboot.*
The above error dialog box notifies the CL of
such a disconnection.
* The error code to be displayed varies
with the disconnection timing.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
The RU becomes operative in about

one minute.
* The error code to be displayed varies
with the disconnection timing.
00000515.EPS
00000514.EPS
MT-21
3.3 Messages Displayed upon an RU-AP/RU-Config Update (RU-AP of version A06 or earlier)
Message window (code: 11024)
00000603.EPS
Message window (code: 11025)
00000602.EPS
Error dialog box (code: 31116, 31117, or 31118)
00000604.EPS
00000606.EPS
00000605.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MT-22
3.4 Precautions to be Observed During the Use of Output Options
3.4 Precautions to be Observed During

the Use of Output Options
IIf an error message of the error code 50001 appears at CL-AP startup,
check the settings for the following output options:
IR346 DICOM CR STORAGE
IR346 DICOM IM PROCESSED (processed image transmission)
IR346 DICOM PRINT
IR346 DMS NET-WORK IN-OUT
IR346 LOCAL PRINT
The checks to be performed are detailed below:
Option key
Check
Verify that the option key is installed, and then
check whether SCU setup is properly completed
for this equipment. The procedure is described
below:
IR346 DICOM
CR STORAGE
IR346 DICOM
IM PROCESSED
IR346 DICOM PRINT
1. With the Service Utility, open the Setup

Configuration Item window.
2. Open NETWORK CONFIGURATION and then
THIS HOST (IIP).
3. Check that an AE whose Role is SCU is
registered. If it is not registered, register it now.
For detailed registration procedure
descriptions, see OE: Connecting the CL
to Other Equipment.
IR346 DICOM CR STORAGE
IR346 DICOM IM PROCESSED
IR346 DICOM PRINT
IR346 DMS
NETWORK IN-OUT
OE3.
OE4.
OE6.
Verify that the option key is installed.

Verify that the option key is installed, and then
check whether the PEI01A board is installed in the
PC. Also, check that DIP switch setup is properly
completed.
IR346 LOCAL PRINT
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
For DIP switch settings and other

checkout procedures, see CL + Local
Printer (E-i/f Connection) in
OE: Connecting the CL to Other
Equipment.
MT-23
4. Troubleshooting (for DELL PC)

The table below summarizes various troubles that may arise with the
CL. In accordance with the encountered trouble, perform a procedure
indicated in the Check Method/Remedies column.
Symptom
Probable Causes
NOTE
Check Method/Remedies
The PC (Windows) does not It is conceivable that the PCs memory may be
defective.
start up.
Check the PCs memory. If it is defective, replace it.
The CL-AP (application)

does not start up.
Check the hard disk. If any error is revealed by the check, perform a
procedure for achieving error recovery or replace the hard disk.
It is conceivable that the data stored on the hard disk

may be partly damaged.
For the memory check procedure, see 4.1 Checking the Memory.
For the hard disk check procedure, see 4.2 Checking the Hard Disk.
Output system options are not installed or not properly
set up.
[Displayed error code: 50001 20110]
Install or properly set up output system options.
The dummy node is not set up.

Choose the Service Utilitys Setup Configuration Item, NETWORK

CONFIG, HIS HOST (IIP) to check for node setup. If no node is set up, set
DICOM Print SCU as a dummy node.
The DICOM Print option key need not be installed.
For details, see 3.4 Precautions to be Observed During the Use of

Output Options.
For the setup procedure, see 2.1.4 Setup of Information on this

Equipment for the DICOM Print Function in
OE5: CL+FN-PS551/DRYPIX/FM-DP L (DICOM Print).
The connection to the network is not established.
Connect the CL to the network.
The image database is not initialized.

[Displayed error code: 50001 20001 30107
30151 20110]
With the Service Utility, initialize the image database.
The MAC address is not acquired.

[Displayed error code: 20111 20110
(Error 20111 is recorded only in the applications event
log.)]
Reinstall the network driver and then update it.
For the initialization procedure, see 12. Initializing the Image

Database in RI: Reinstalling the Software.
For the reinstallation procedure, see 4.7 Reinstalling the Network
Driver.
For the software version update procedure, see 4.8 Installing the
3Com Network Driver (Ver. A10).
If the error recurs after the network driver is updated, replace the PCs
motherboard. Before motherboard replacement, acquire the MAC address
manually and start up the CL-AP.
(Continued to the next page)

010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
For the MAC address acquisition procedure, see 3.14 MAC

Address Manual Input in MU: Maintenance Utility.
MT-24
Symptom
does not start up.
Probable Causes
The selector resetup procedure is not completed.
[Displayed error code: 31099]
After the host name for the built-in type equipment is changed, use the
selector setup of the Service Utility to set the built-in type equipment host
name again.
For the setup procedure, see 12. Setting the Selectors Selector
Setting in MU: Maintenance Utility.
The LCD flickers.
The refresh frequency setting is improper.
Correct the refresh frequency setting.

For the refresh frequency setup procedure, see 4.4 Resetting the
Refresh Frequency.
The LCD touch panel does

not sound.
The screen contact position correction procedure was

performed twice in succession.
With the utility tool for the touch panel, perform the touch panel sound setup
procedure again.
For the setup procedure, see 4.5 Resetting the Touch Panel
Sound.
The barcode reader (BCR)/ The proper driver software is not installed.
With Windows Device Manager, switch to the proper driver software.
magnetic card reader
Reinstalling the OS with the BCR or MCR connected to
For the driver software change procedure, see 4.6 Changing the
(MCR) does not operate.
a USB port results in installation of improper driver
Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader Driver Software.
software.
The BCR/MCR does not
normally operate.
The BCR/MCR is connected to an improper USB port.
The local printer does not

generate a film output.
The proper driver software is not installed.

Reinstalling the OS with a PC board mounted in a PCI
slot results in installation of improper driver software.
Patient data cannot be

exchanged in the ID online
state.

The communication with the

RU or other equipment
cannot be established
(ping does not work).
It is conceivable that the network driver may be

defective.
[System event log: type, error; source, EL90Xbc; event
ID, 5001]
Update the network driver software version.

Before proceeding to perform an update, have on hand the FD labeled 3Com
3C905C Network Driver Ver. A10 Disc 1/1, which is distributed to the service
personnel.
Connect the BCR/MCR to a recommended USB port.

For the reconnection procedure, see 4.3 USB Ports Recommended
for Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader Mounting (for GX150
Only).
For details, see 3.2 Typical Procedure for Achieving Recovery
from an LP (Local Printer) Printout Generation Failure.
For the driver software change procedure, see under the preceding
symptom, which is entitled The local printer does not generate a
film output.
For the update procedure, see 4.8 Installing the 3Com Network
Driver (Ver. A10).
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MT-25
4.1 Checking the Memory
7.

For checking the memory, use the Dell Optiplex ResourceCD, which is
supplied with the PC. The Dell Optiplex ResourceCD is Dells CDROM that stores various drivers. The CD name slightly varies with the
PC model.
1.
2.
Verify that 1. Start computer to run Dell Diagnostics is

selected, and then press the <Enter> key.
Microsoft Windows 98 Startup Menu
Turn ON the monitor and PC power switches.
1. Start computer to run Dell Diagnostics.
The PC starts up.
2. Start computer with CD-ROM support and go to a command pronpt.

Enter a choice: 1
Time remaining: 09
When the upper right corner of the screen reads

F2 SETUP, press the <F2> key.
NOTE
If you do not press the <F2> key in time, the setup screen does not
open. In such an instance, restart the PC and then perform step 2.
F5=Safe made Shift+F5=Command pronpt Shift+F8=Step-by-step confirmation[N]
The setup screen opens.
3.
4.
MT000020.EPS
The Dell Diagnostics Menu screen opens.
Choose Boot Sequence and then press the <Enter> key.
8.
The boot drive selection dialog box opens.
Uncheck Diskette Drive and Hard-Disk Drive C: (by

removing their check marks ()).
1. Diskette Drive
Dell Diagnostics Menu

[1] Dell 32-bit Diagnostics for Resource CD
[2] Dell diagnostics
[3] EXIT
2. Hard-Disk Drive C:
3. IDE CD-ROM Device
SPACE to enable/disable
Press the <2> key.
Please Enter Selection...
+,- to move down/up
Uncheck Diskette Drive and Hard-Disk Drive C:.

Leave IDE CD-ROM Device checked.
MT000009.EPS
5.
Insert the Dell Optiplex ResourceCD into the PC.
6.
Save the settings and then restart the PC.

Microsoft Windows 98 Startup Menu opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
MT000021.EPS
The reading process for the modules starts (and it takes about two
minutes).
MT-26
9.
Choose Test One Device with the <> key, and then press
the <Enter> key.
Dell (www.dell.com)
Diagnostics Build: 1068 Service Tag: CT1621X
11. Press the <Enter> key again.
The test type selection screen opens.
12. Verify that Extended Tests is selected, and then press the
<Enter> key.
Diagnostics Menu
Dell (www.dell.com)
Test All Devices
Test One Device
Advancded Testing
Information and Results
Program Options
Device Configuration
Exit to MS-DOS
System Memory Device
Test for Highlighted Device
System Memory
Memory Address Line Test

Memory Data Line Test
Memory Bit Coupling Test
Extended Tests
Quick Tests
MT000022.EPS
The list of tests appears.
Press Enter to select the highlighted item.
10. Choose System Memory with the <> key, and then press
the <Enter> key.
System Borad Devides

Processor Cache
System Memory
System Management BIOS
VESA /VGA Interface
Universal Serial Bus Interface
PC-AT Compatible Keyboards
Pointing Devices
Serial Ports
Parallel Ports
Network Interfaces
Diskette
IDE Devices
Audio Controller
Cable Detection Summary
Press ESC for previous menu.

MT000024.EPS
The testing process starts (and it takes about 15 minutes when the
memory size is 512MB).
Dell (www.dell.com)
Device Groups
Press F1 for Help.
Device for Highlighted Group

System Memory
Press Enter to select the highlighted item.

Press F1 for Help.
Press ESC for previous menu.

MT000023.EPS
The right-hand area of the screen shows details of the System

Memory test.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MT-27
13. When the testing process ends, check for errors.
If any error occurs, its description appears on the screen. Perform an

appropriate error recovery procedure in accordance with the onscreen error description.
14. Press the <ESC> key a number of times until you are
brought back to the Dell Diagnostics Menu.
Dell (www.dell.com)
Dell (www.dell.com)
Maximum loops: 0001
Maximum errors: 0001
Loop count:
0001
Error count:
0000
Start time:
04/11/2002 15:05:29
Test status:
NONE
Diagnostics Menu
Pause flag: YES

Logging:
NONE
Elapsed time: 000:14:57
Device: System_Memory Test:Memory_Address_line_Test

Release: 1068 Mod
Your hardware performed optimally.
_
System Memory Mem Press and key to continue.
Status: Pass Sta
Device: System_Me
Release: 1068 Model
_
System Memory Memory Bit Coupling Test
Status: Pass Status Code: DOS DDG-D MEMORY 040 000
Device: System_Memory Test: Memory_Bit_Coupling_Test
Release: 1068 Model(s): Memory
Test All Devices

Test One Device
Advancded Testing
Information and Results
Program Options
Device Configuration
Exit to MS-DOS
: Pass
: Pass
MT000026.EPS
End testing: 04/11/2002 15:20:26 - 0 errors

MT000025.EPS
15. Choose Exit to MS-DOS with the <> key, and then press
the <Enter> key.
The Diagnostics Menu screen closes.
16. Remove the CD-ROM.

17. Use BIOS to restore the previous setup status (steps 2. to 4.)
before startup with the CD-ROM.
1. Diskette Drive
+,- to move down/up
Check these items.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MT000048.EPS
MT-28
4.2 Checking the Hard Disk
4.
4.2 Checking the Hard Disk
1.
Start up Windows 2000/XP/Vista and open Windows

Explorer.
2.
Right-click drive C (Local Disk C:) and then choose

Properties.
Verify that the check boxes in the Check disk options area
are unchecked, and then click
.
MT000012.EPS
The hard disk check starts (and it takes about 5 minutes when the
disk size is 40GB).
When the hard disk is normal, Phases up to 3 will be completed and a

dialog box will open to indicate the completion of the hard disk check.
If the hard disk is not normal, Phases up to 3 will not be completed and
a dialog box will open to indicate that the hard disk check is not
completed.
MT000010.EPS
3.
Choose the Tools tab. In the Error-checking area, click

.
MT000011.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MT-29
4.3 USB Ports Recommended for Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader Mounting (for GX150 Only)
4.3 USB Ports Recommended for Barcode

Reader/Magnetic Card Reader
Mounting (for GX150 Only)
If the barcode reader and magnetic card reader erratically operate from
time to time, reconnect their connectors as indicated below.
Connecting to the PC back panel
Magnetic card reader
4.4 Resetting the Refresh Frequency

If the screen flickers, it can be restored to normal by changing the
refresh frequency setting.
The refresh frequency change procedure is described below.
1.
Perform the following settings.
For Windows 2000/XP

Choose Properties from the right-click menu on the
desktop.
The Display Properties window opens.
Barcode reader
MT000014.EPS
MT000013.EPS
Connecting to the PC front panel

(as viewed with the front panel removed)
Click the Settings tab.

Click
Barcode reader

MT000045.EPS
MT000015.EPS
The Plug and Play Monitor on NVidia Riva TNT2 window

opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MT-30
4.4 Resetting the Refresh Frequency
For Windows Vista
NOTE
If the screen becomes disordered when a setting of 75 Hertz is
chosen, change the setting to 70 Hertz.
If the screen becomes disordered even when set to 70 Hertz,
change it to 60 Hertz.
Choose Personalization from the right-click menu on

the desktop.
The Personalization window opens.
Click Display Settings.
MT000015.ai
Click
MT000016.EPS
4.
Click
The confirmation window opens.
5.
Click
6.
Click
The screen area changes and the Monitor Setup window opens.
(When the OS used is Windows Vista, the Display Settings
window opens.)
MT000015.ai
The monitor properties window opens.
2.
Click the Monitor tab.
3.
From the Refresh Frequency pull-down menu, choose

75 Hertz.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
NOTE
If you do not click within 15 seconds, the system reverts the
previous setting. Therefore, click it without delay.
7.
Click
to close the Display Properties window.
MT-31
4.5 Resetting the Touch Panel Sound

If you perform the screen contact position correction procedure two or
more times in succession, the touch panel may fail to sound when you
touch it.
To recover the touch panel sound generation function, perform the
following procedure.
For Windows XP
1.
Double-click
on the desktop.
The TouchWare Properties window opens.
For Windows 2000
1.
From
IN000309.EPS
of Windows 2000, point to Settings and
then click Control Panel.
2.
Select the Touch Settings tab.
The Control Panel opens.
2.
3.
Choose Elo Touchscreen.
IN000310.EPS
The Elo Touchscreen Properties window opens.

Click the Sound tab and then click
. The touch
3.
Perform following settings.
panel should sound normally.

I.
II.
IN000311.EPS
I.
Touch
II. Touch
to set Touch Mode to [Click on touch].

to set Touch Sound to [System beep on
touchdown].
4.
Touch
to close the TouchWare Properties
window. The touch sound will then be restored.
MT000019.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MT-32
For Windows Vista
1.
Double-click
on the desktop.
The MT 7 Software Control Panel window opens.
2.
DCL70420.ai
3.
Perform following settings.
I.
II.
DCL70421.ai
I.
Touch
to set Touch Mode to [Click on touch with
drag].
II. Touch
4.
Touch
to set Touch Sound to [Beep on touchdown].
to close the MT7 Software Control Panel
window. The touch sound will then be restored.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MT-33
4.6 Changing the Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader Driver Software
4.6 Changing the Barcode Reader/

Magnetic Card Reader Driver Software
5.
Note the hardware information about the USB ports.

If USB drivers other than shown below are set up, perform the
following procedure to install proper USB drivers.
If any encountered problem is attributable to the recognition of wrong

driver software, use Windows 2000/XP/Vistas Device Manager to
check whether proper driver software is used. If improper driver
software is used, replace it with proper driver software.
The driver software check/change procedure is indicated below.
Normal installation of drivers

Upper: Barcode reader
Lower: Magnetic card reader
For Windows 2000
1.
Open the Windows 2000 desktop screen.
2.
From the
menu, point to Settings and then click
Control Panel.
MT000046.EPS
3.
4.
Double-click
6.
Choose the Hardware tab and then click

.
In the Device Manager window, click the mark of the

hardware information that is not for the correct USB drivers
installed as above.
The name of the currently installed USB driver appears.
7.
Select the item that appears at the click of the

the Action menu, choose Uninstall....
mark. From
The currently set USB driver is then deleted.
8.
If wrong driver software is set up for the other USB driver,

delete it as well.
9.
Close Device Manager and then restart the PC.

In about one minute, the CL-AP starts up so that the proper USB
drivers are automatically installed.
10. Open Device Manager again to verify that the proper USB
drivers are installed.
MT000047.EPS

010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MT-34
5.
For Windows XP
1.
Open the Windows XP desktop screen.
2.
In the Device Manager window, right-click Human

Interface Devices and then USB Human Interface Device
to select Update Drivers....
menu.
3.
Double-click
4.

.
MT0000053.EPS
The Hardware Update Wizard window opens.
6.
Select
and click
.
A window opens prompting you to select an installation option.

MT000047.EPS
7.
Select
and click
.
A window opens prompting you to select a driver.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MT-35
8.
Select a driver you wish to install and click
For the barcode reader
For the magnetic card reader

Select USB Card Reader.
m When a driver not supporting a BCR manufactured by

DataLogic was installed in CL V8.0 or before
Select USB Barcode Reader.
MT0000054.EPS
A window opens to indicate that installation processing has ended.
MT040022.ai
m In case of CL V8.1, or when a driver supporting

a BCR manufactured by DataLogic was installed
Select WinUSB BCR.
MT040021.ai
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MT-36
9.
Clck
10. Verify that the proper USB drivers are installed.
NOTE
A window may open to request a restart when the driver software
for the barcode reader is changed in the software version 8.1 or
later. In that case, perform the following procedures.
I. Remove the barcode reader from the PC and click [OK].
The PC restarts.
After restarting, the CL-AP starts running.
II. Start up the Service Utility mode.

For details on the Service Utility startup procedure, see 1.
Starting/Exiting the Service Utility in MU: Maintenance
Utility.
The main menu opens.
III. Click [Exit Service Utility].

Example of state that

the drivers installed normally
MT040023.ai
IV. Connect the barcode reader to the PC and perform the

following procedures.
When the software was upgraded to V8.1 or later
Perform step 2 through 9.
Restart the PC and proceed to step 10.
When the software V8.1 or later was newly installed
Proceed to step 10.
You are then returned to the Device Manager window.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MT-37
5.
For Windows Vista
1.
Open the Windows desktop screen.
2.
Select Browse my computer for driver software.
menu.
3.
Double-click
4.
MT000057.ai
In the Device Manager window, right-click Human

Interface Devices and then USB Human Interface Device
to select Update Driver Software....
The Browse for diver software on your computer window opens.
6.
Select Let me pick from a list of device drivers on my

computer.
MT000058.ai
MT0000053.ai
The Update Driver Software - USB Human Interface Device

window opens.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
The Select the device driver you want to install for this hardware
window opens.
MT-38
7.
Select a driver you wish to install and click
For the magnetic card reader

Select USB Card Reader.
For the barcode reader

m When a driver not supporting a BCR manufactured by
DataLogic was installed in CL V8.0 or before
Select USB Barcode Reader.
MT0000054.ai
The Windows Security window opens.
8.
Select Install this driver software anyway.
MT0000055.ai
m In case of CL V8.1, or when a driver supporting

a BCR manufactured by DataLogic was installed
Select WinUSB BCR.
MT000059.ai
A window opens to indicate that installation processing has ended.
MT040024.ai
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MT-39
9.
Click [Close].
10. Verify that the proper USB drivers are installed.
NOTE
A window may open to request a restart when the driver software
for the barcode reader is changed in the software version 8.1 or
later. In that case, perform the following procedures.
I. Remove the barcode reader from the PC and click [OK].
The PC restarts.
After restarting, the CL-AP starts running.
II. Start up the Service Utility mode.

For details on the Service Utility startup procedure, see 1.
Starting/Exiting the Service Utility in MU: Maintenance
Utility.
III. Click [Exit Service Utility].

Example of state that

the drivers installed normally
MT040025.ai
IV. Connect the barcode reader to the PC and perform the

following procedures.
When the software was upgraded to V8.1 or later
Perform step 2 through 9.
Restart the PC and proceed to step 10.
When the software V8.1 or later was newly installed
Proceed to step 10.
The system returns to the Device Manager window.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MT-40
4.7 Reinstalling the Network Driver
5.
For Windows 2000/XP
1.
Open the Windows 2000/XP desktop screen.
2.
From the
Click the mark for

click 3Com 3C920 Integrated Fast....
and then double-
Control Panel. (For Windows XP, select Control Panel

from the
menu.)
3.
Double-click
.
MT000036.EPS
4.
The 3Com 3C920 Integrated Fast... window opens.
6.

.
Choose the Driver tab and then click
MT000035.EPS

MT000037.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MT-41
9.
The Confirm Device Removal window opens.
Click
The following window opens.
MT000038.EPS
7.
Click
MT000041.EPS
10. Click
The network driver is then deleted.
8. Return to the Hardware tab on the System Properties

window, which was opened in step 3, and then click
After a while, a window like that shown below opens.
MT000042.EPS
MT000039.EPS
The Welcome to the Add/Remove Hardware Wizard window

opens.
11. Just Click
A window opens to indicate that driver installation is completed.
MT000040.EPS
MT000043.EPS
12. Click
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MT-42
13. After completion of network driver installation, perform the

following network driver setup steps from the driver
environment setup window.
Uncheck
Uncheck
).
).
To open the driver environment setup window, double-click 3Com

3C920 Integrated Fast... as explained in step 5. and then choose the
Power Management tab.
For Windows Vista
1.
Open the Windows desktop screen.
2.
menu.
3.
Double-click
4.
In the Device Manager window that opens, click to the

left of
and then double-click Intel(R)
82567LM-3 Gigabit Network Connection.
MT000044.EPS
14. Reinstalling the network driver deletes the IP address and

other relevant settings. Set the following network items
again.
IP address
Subnet mask
Default gateway (as needed)
MT040001.ai
The Intel(R) 82567LM-3 Gigabit Network Connection Properties

window opens.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MT-43
5.
Select the Driver tab and click
7.
Insert the DRIVERS AND UTILITIES disk (Supplied with the

PC) into the PC and double-click autoRcd.exe in the CD.
The Dell ResourceCD utility software will go up and running and
System Model, Operating System and Topic selected
automatically.
MT040004.ai
8.
MT040002.ai
The Confirm Device Uninstall window opens.
6.
Checkmark
Click Intel 825XX Gigabit Platform LAN Network Device

Rev:Axx.
A window like that shown below opens.
and click
MT040005.ai
MT040003.ai
The network driver is then uninstalled.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MT-44
9.
Scroll the display and click
10. Click
MT040008.ai
11. Click
MT040012.ai
12. Click
MT040006.ai
MT040009.ai
MT040007.ai
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MT-45
13. Click
16. Make sure that
is
checkmarked and then click
NOTE
If
sure to checkmark it.
is not checkmarked, be

MT040013.ai
14. Click
The License Agreement window opens.

MT040016.ai
17. Click
A window like that show below opens.

MT040014.ai
15. Select
and click
.
The Setup Options window opens.
MT040010.ai
18. Click
A window like that show below opens.
MT040015.ai
MT040017.ai
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MT-46
19. Click
20. After completing installation of the network driver, perform

the following network driver settings on the driver
environment setup screen.

Checkmark Reduce link speed during standby. (

)
Unchekmark Wake on Directed Packet. (

)
Unchekmark Wake on Magic Packet. (

)
Unchekmark Wake on Magic Packet from power off state.

)
(
Unchekmark Wake on Link. (

)
MT040011.ai
21. Reinstalling the network driver will cancel some setup
items, such as IP address and others. The following items

need to be set up anew.
IP address
Subnet mask
Default gateway (as necessary)
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MT-47
4.8 Installing the 3Com Network Driver (Ver. A10)
4.8 Installing the 3Com Network Driver

(Ver. A10)
1.
Open the Windows 2000 desktop screen.
2.
Insert the network driver FD (Ver. A10) into the FDD.
3.
From the
6.
Click the mark for

click 3Com 3C920 Integrated Fast....
and then double-
Control Panel.
4.
Double-click
5.
MT000028.EPS

.
The 3Com 3C920 Integrated Fast... window opens.
MT000027.EPS

010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MT-48
7.
Choose the Driver tab and then click
9.
Check
), and then click
MT000031.EPS
10. Check
), and then click
MT000029.EPS
The Upgrade Device Driver Wizard window opens.
MT000030.EPS
8.
Click
twice.
MT000032.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MT-49
11. Select the driver whose location field reads

a:\w9x90xbc.inf, and then click
MT000033.EPS
The Digital Signature Not Found window opens.
12. Click
A window opens to indicate that driver installation is completed.
13. Click
REFERENCE
Installation is completed normally when the 3Com 3C920
Integrated Fast... window opened in step 7. displays the following
information.
Driver Provider: 3Com
Driver Version: 4.8.0.0
MT000034.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MT-50
5. Troubleshooting (for NEC PC)

The table below summarizes various troubles that may arise with the
CL. In accordance with the encountered trouble, perform a procedure
indicated in the Check Method/Remedies column.
Symptom
Probable Causes
NOTE
Screens referred to herein are those of Windows XP. Note however that
contents displayed under Windows Vista are the same.
The PC (Windows) does not It is conceivable that the PCs memory may be
defective.
start up.
Check the PCs memory. If it is defective, replace it.

does not start up.
Check the hard disk. If any error is revealed by the check, perform a
procedure for achieving error recovery or replace the hard disk.
It is conceivable that the data stored on the hard disk

may be partly damaged.
For the memory check procedure, see 5.1.2 Device Test

Procedures.
For the hard disk check procedure, see 5.1.2 Device Test
Procedures.
Output system options are not installed or not properly
set up.
Install or properly set up output system options.
The dummy node is not set up.

Choose the Service Utilitys Setup Configuration Item, NETWORK

CONFIG, HIS HOST (IIP) to check for node setup. If no node is set up, set
DICOM Print SCU as a dummy node.
The DICOM Print option key need not be installed.
For details, see 3.4 Precautions to be Observed During the Use of

Output Options.
For the setup procedure, see 2.1.4 Setup of Information on this

Equipment for the DICOM Print Function in
OE5: CL+FN-PS551/DRYPIX/FM-DP L (DICOM Print).
The connection to the network is not established.
Connect the CL to the network.
The image database is not initialized.

[Displayed error code: 50001 20001 30107
30151 20110]
With the Service Utility, initialize the image database.
The MAC address is not acquired.

[Displayed error code: 20111 20110
(Error 20111 is recorded only in the applications event
log.)]
Reinstall the network driver and then update it.

If the error recurs after the network driver is updated, replace the PCs
motherboard. Before motherboard replacement, acquire the MAC address
manually and start up the CL-AP.
For the initialization procedure, see 12. Initializing the Image

Database in RI: Reinstalling the Software.
For the MAC address acquisition procedure, see 3.14 MAC

Address Manual Input in MU: Maintenance Utility.
(Continued to the next page)
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
For the motherboard replacement procedure, see

5.2.10 Motherboard.
MT-51
Symptom
does not start up.
Probable Causes
The selector resetup procedure is not completed.
[Displayed error code: 31099]
After the host name for the built-in type equipment is changed, use the
selector setup of the Service Utility to set the built-in type equipment host
name again.
For the setup procedure, see 12. Setting the Selectors Selector
Setting in MU: Maintenance Utility.
The LCD flickers.
The refresh frequency setting is improper.
Correct the refresh frequency setting.

For the refresh frequency setup procedure, see 4.4 Resetting the
Refresh Frequency.
The LCD touch panel does

not sound.
The screen contact position correction procedure was

performed twice in succession.
With the utility tool for the touch panel, perform the touch panel sound setup
procedure again.
For the setup procedure, see 4.5 Resetting the Touch Panel
Sound.
The barcode reader (BCR)/ The proper driver software is not installed.
magnetic card reader
Reinstalling the OS with the BCR or MCR connected to
For the driver software change procedure, see 4.6 Changing the
(MCR) does not operate.
a USB port results in installation of improper driver
Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader Driver Software.
software.
The local printer does not
generate a film output.

Patient data cannot be

exchanged in the ID online
state.


The driver switchover procedure to be used is the same as the above.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
For details, see 3.2 Typical Procedure for Achieving Recovery

from an LP (Local Printer) Printout Generation Failure.
MT-52
5.1 Error Analysis Tool (TeDoLi)

Using the error analysis tool (TeDoLi) enables you to perform the
following.
Displaying the test item list and implementing selected test items
Displaying and storing the list of devices connected to the PC
Displaying and saving log information
Reading and storing the test file
5.1.1 Error Analysis Tool (TeDoLi) Startup and

Shutdown Procedures
Procedures used to start up and shut down the error analysis tool
(TeDoLi) are explained below.
Shutdown procedure
1.
Select Exit on the error analysis tool (TeDoLi) Main Menu

and press the <Enter> key.
The Exit menu window opens.
2.
Performs the following settings.

When restarting the CL
: Select <RBT> Reboot.
When turning OFF the power to the CL : Select <DWN> Shutdown.
3.
Press the <O> key.

The CL will become as determined at step 2. above.
Startup procedure
1.
Turn ON the power to the CL.
2.
When NEC is displayed at the center of the window, press

the <F4> key.
After about one minute, the error analysis tool (TeDoLi) Main Menu
will open.
----------------+ Main Menu +--------------- +
|
|
| <Test execution>
|
|
|
| <Device List>
|
|
|
| <Log Info>
|
|
|
| <Option>
|
|
|
| <Exit>
|
+
MT000058.EPS
NOTE
The setup window will not open unless the <F4> key is pressed
with the timeliness.
In such an instance, restart the PC to repeat step 2.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MT-53
5.1.2 Device Test Procedures
REFERENCE
Use the <Space> key to turn ON/OFF the items marked with *.

For items marked with ->, use the <S> key to display detailed

setting items.
Executing the test will implement tests with all devices marked

with * at the same time.
As the default, the test implementation time is determined to be

eight minutes. The test implementation time can be set up
accordingly with the Test Execution Option (displayed at the
press of the <F9> key).
For details of each item, see the help function (displayed at the

press of the <F1> key) that the error analysis tool (TeDoLi)
provides.
Use the error analysis tool (TeDoLi) to test each of the devices.
1.
Start up the error analysis tool (TeDoLi).
2.
Select Test execution and press the <Enter> key.
3.
Select desired test items (mark with an asterisk *).
For details of the startup procedure, see 5.1.1 Error Analysis

Tool (TeDoLi) Startup and Shutdown Procedures.
The Test Select window opens.
NOTE
To conduct serial and network tests, connect a jig to the PC as
appropriate.
+---------------------------------------|
Test Select
|----------------------------------------+
|
|
| < > <SYS> System
|
-> |
|
[ ] <FD0> Floppy0
|
[ ] <KB> Keyboard
|
|
[ ] <MOUSE> Mouse
|
|
[ ] <SERIAL0> Serial0
> |
-> |
|
[ ] <SERIAL1> Serial1
-> |
|
[ ] <PARALLEL> Parallel
|
[ ] <VRAM> VRAM
|
-> |
|
[ ] <SPK> Speaker
-> |
|
[ ] <MEM> Memory
|
[ ] <CACHE> Cache
> |
-> |
|
[ ] <FAN> Fan Sensor
-> |
|
[ ] <TMP> Temperature Sensor
-> |
|
[ ] <VLT> Voltage Sensor
| <-> <IDE> IDE
|
|
<-> <IDE 0> 00:82801DB ICH4 IDE
|
-> |
|
[ ] <HDD_0:0> 00: HDS722580VLAT20
|
<-> <IDE 1> 00:82801DB ICH4 IDE
|
-> |
|
[ ] <CD-ROM_1:0> 00: FX48++M
| <-> <NET> NETWORK
|
|
[ ] <eth0> 00: 82551QM [Ethernet Pro 100]
> |
| <-> <MISC> MISC
|
-> |
|
[ ] <AUDIO> ICH - Intel 82801DB-ICH4
|
|
|
|
|
<Set(S)>
<Execution(X)>
<Cancel(ESC)>
|
|
|
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
For the RAID specification, 2 HDDs will be recognized.

4.
Press the <X> key.
5.
After conducting tests with the selected devices, check to

see that there are no error occurrences. If an error
occurrence is detected, take a necessary action as
appropriate.
6.
Press the <Esc> key some times to return to the Main Menu.
7.
After completing the tests, shut down the error analysis tool
(TeDoLi).
Tests will be conducted with the selected devices.
For details of the shutdown procedure, see 5.1.1 Error

Analysis Tool (TeDoLi) Startup and Shutdown Procedures.
MT000061.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MT-54
5.1.3 Log Save Procedure
7.
Use the error analysis tool (TeDoLi) to save logs as necessary.
1.
Start up the error analysis tool (TeDoLi).
2.
Insert the log save FD into the FD drive.
3.
Select Log Info and press the <Enter> key.
4.
5.
Enter a filename (default: <FIL>td.log) of the log you want to

save.
----------------|
|--------------- +
|
|
| Log Info
|
|
|
| Please input the filename.
|
|
|
| <FIL>td.log_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ |
|
|
|
<OK> <Cancel(ESC)>
|
+----- ---------------------------------------------+
+
For details of the startup procedure, see 5.1.1 Error Analysis

Tool (TeDoLi) Startup and Shutdown Procedures.
The Log Info window opens.
Save
Enter a log filename.
Press the <F> key.
MT000060.EPS
The Select Log window opens.
Select items you want to save logs (mark with an asterisk

*).
----------------| Select Log |--------------- +
|
|
| Select log type
|
|
|
|
[ ] <P/F> [Pass/Fail]
|
|
[ ] <SYS> [SYSTEM-INFO]
|
|
[ ] <DEV> [DEVICE LIST]
|
|
[ ] <MSG> [MESSAGE LOG] |
|
|
| <OK(O)> <Cancel(ESC)>
|
+---------------------------------------------------+
+
8.
Select <OK> and press the <Enter> key.
9.
Make sure that the FD drive access lamp is off and remove
the FD from the FD drive.
The selected log will then be saved onto the FD.
10. Press the <Esc> key.
The system then returns to the Main Menu window.
11. Shut down the error analysis tool (TeDoLi).
For details of the shutdown procedure, see 5.1.1 Error

Analysis Tool (TeDoLi) Startup and Shutdown Procedures.
MT000059.EPS
REFERENCE
Use the <Space> key to turn ON/OFF the items marked with *.
6.
Press the <O> key.

The Save window opens.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MT-55
5.2 Service Parts Replacement

Described herein are the procedures used to replace service parts.
5.2.1 Preparation for Parts Replacement
Dismounting procedure
NOTE
1.
When you are requesting a part to be replaced free of charge, use the
error analysis tool (TeDoLi) to attach error log for the part that caused
an error to occur.
Shut down Windows XP and then turn OFF the power to the
CL-PC.
2.
Disconnect the CL-PC power cord from the power supply.
NOTE
For details of the device test procedures, see 5.1.2 Device

Test Procedures.
Be sure to hold the plug to disconnect the power cord.

Disconnecting the power cord holding the cable may break it.
For details of the error log save procedure, see 5.1.3 Log
Save Procedure.
Reference
3.
Disconnect all cables from the rear of the CL-PC.
Preparation for parts replacement
5.2.1 Preparation for Parts

Replacement
4.
Covers
5.2.2 Covers
Secure a one- to two-meter space back-and-forth and rightand-left, and also on top of the CL-PC.
CPU fan
5.2.3 CPU Fan
Hard Disk
5.2.4 Hard Disk
CD-ROM drive
FDD drive
5.2.5 CD-ROM Drive and FD

Drive
CPU
5.2.6 CPU
Housing fan
5.2.7 Housing Fan
Power supply unit
5.2.8 Power Supply Unit
Memory
5.2.9 Memory
Motherboard
5.2.10 Motherboard
Target work
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Mounting procedure
Reverse the dismounting procedure to mount a part.
NOTE
After finishing the necessary work, check to see that the CL-PC starts
up normally.
MT-56
5.2.2 Covers
5.2.3 CPU Fan
1.
Make preparations for parts replacement.

For the parts replacement procedure, see 5.2.1 Preparation
for Parts Replacement.
2. Perform the following.

When dismounting the right-side and left-side covers:
Remove screws and dismount the cover while sliding it slightly to the
back of the CL-PC.
1.
Dismount the left-side cover.
2.
Tilt the CL-PC so that its left side faces up.
3.
Disconnect the CPU fan connector from the motherboard.
4.
Raise the CPU fan levers to unlock them accordingly.
For how to dismount the left-side cover, see 5.2.2 Covers.
Lever
When dismounting the front cover:

Insert a screwdriver in a hole located on top of the front cover to
unlock it to dismount.
Mounting procedure
Reverse the dismounting procedure to mount a cover.
MT000053.EPS
5.
Unlock the four claws to dismount the CPU fan.
#1
[Unlock]
Four claws
#2
[Dismount]
CPU fan
MT000054.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MT-57
5.2.4 Hard Disk
Mounting procedure
Reverse the dismounting procedure to mount the CPU fan.
NOTE
NOTE
Use only NEC-specified hard disks. If a hard disk of a third party is

used, an error may occur not only with it but also with the CL-PC main
unit. Repair of an error or damage caused by the use of a third partys
hard disk will be at your own cost even still under warranty.
Pay due attention to the direction where the CPU fan is to be mounted.
CPU fan
Cable
MT000055.EPS
1.
Dismount the front cover.
2.
Dismount the CPU fan.
3.
Disconnect cables from the hard disk.
For how to dismount the front cover, see 5.2.2 Covers.
For how to dismount the CPU fan, see 5.2.3 CPU Fan.
NOTE
Disconnect cables carefully. When doing so, exercise care not to
hit your hands against surrounding parts, which, otherwise, may
damage those parts incidentally.
4.
Remove the two screws from the front.
5.
Remove the hard disk bay while sliding it slightly to the

back of the CL-PC.
NOTE
Hold tight the hard disk bay, exercising due care so as not to touch
CPU or parts mounted on the motherboard.
6.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Remove the four screws from the hard disk bay to dismount
the hard disk.
MT-58
5.2.5 CD-ROM Drive and FD Drive
Mounting procedure
1.
Mount the hard disk on the hard disk bay.
NOTE
Make sure that the hard disk has been set to be the MASTER and
then mount it appropriately. Note, however, that you do not have to
check the settings when the NEC-PC (RAID specification) is used.
Rear of the hard disk
MT000050.EPS
2.
Remount the hard disk bay on the CL-PC.
3.
Connect the hard disk power cable and interface cable

appropriately.
4.
Mount the CPU fan.

For the CPU fan mounting procedure, see 5.2.3 CPU Fan.
1.
Dismount the front cover, right-side cover and left-side

cover.
For how to dismount the front cover, right-side cover and
left-side cover, see 5.2.2 Covers.
2.
Disconnect cables from the CD-ROM drive or FD drive.
3.
Remove screws to dismount the CD-ROM drive or FD drive.
REFERENCE
Screws to be removed are as follows.
CD-ROM drive Right side : Two screws

Left side : Two screws
Right side : One screw
FD drive

Left side : Two screws
Mounting procedure
NOTE
5.
Check hard disk power cable and interface cable connection

status.
Connect cables correctly, as illustrated below, paying attention to the

FDD interface cable polarity.
6.
Remount the front cover.
Motherboard
side
For how to mount the front cover, see 5.2.2 Covers.
Drive side
NOTE
If the CL-PC does not start running normally, check to see if the
cables are connected properly.
Cables are twisted.
MT000051.eps
Reverse the dismounting procedure to remount a drive.

After assembling the CL-PC properly, turn ON the power to the CL-PC
to make sure that no error messages appear during diagnosis for
initialization.
For details of error messages appearing during diagnosis for
initialization and actions to take, see 5.3 NEC PC Diagnosis
Messages During Initialization.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MT-59
5.2.6 CPU
CAUTION
Whenever dismounting/remounting the CPU, be sure to wear a
wrist strap to discharge the buildup of static electricity that is held
by the human body, otherwise, the CPU may be damaged due to
static electricity discharged from the human body.
Mounting procedure
NOTES
When a floppy disk used for BIOS upgrading is attached to the CPU
for replacement, upgrade BIOS accordingly after the CPU has been
replaced.
Exercise care not to mount the CPU in an incorrect direction.
1.
2.

For how to dismount the CPU fan, see 5.2.3 CPU Fan.
Raise the CPU socket levers to remove the CPU.
NOTE
Carefully handle the CPU as it can be damaged easily.
CPU
MT000056.EPS
Reverse the dismounting procedure to remount the CPU.

initialization.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MT-60
5.2.7 Housing Fan
5.2.8 Power Supply Unit
1.
2.
3.

For the CPU fan dismounting procedure, see 5.2.3 CPU Fan.
Disconnect the housing fan connector from the

motherboard.
While holding the housing fan with a hand, remove the two
screws to dismount it.
Mounting procedure
NOTE
1.

2.
Remove screws from the CD-ROM drive to slide it to the

front.
3.
While holding the CL-PC with both hands, tilt the CL-PC
gently so that its left side faces up.
4.
Remove the hard disk bay.
5.
Disconnect cables from the power supply unit.
6.
While holding the power supply unit with a hand, remove

the four screws to dismount it.
Pay attention to the housing fan mounting direction.

Cable
Label face
Rear of the CL
MT000052.EPS
Reverse the dismounting procedure to remount the housing fan.
Dismount the front cover, right-side cover and left-side

cover.
For how to remove the hard disk bay, see 5.2.4 Hard Disk.
For motherboard (main power supply/CPU power supply)

For hard disk
For CD-ROM drive
For FD drive
Mounting procedure
Reverse the dismounting procedure to remount the power supply unit.
initialization.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MT-61
5.2.9 Memory
Mounting procedure
1.
CAUTION
Whenever dismounting/remounting memory, be sure to wear a
wrist strap to discharge the buildup of static electricity that is held
by the human body, otherwise, the CPU may be damaged due to
static electricity discharged from the human body.
When the memory is pushed in the socket, levers located on both

the right-and-left sides will close automatically.
NOTE
Pay due attention to the memory mounting direction. A notch is
provided on the terminal side of the memory to prevent it from
being pushed in the socket mistakenly.
NOTE
Use only NEC-specified memories. If a memory of a third party is used,
an error may occur not only with it but also with the CL-PC main unit.
Repair of an error or damage caused by the use of a third partys
memory will be at your own cost even still under warranty.
1.
2.

Open levers on both the right-and-left sides of the memory

socket to remove the memory.
Set the memory in an upright position and push it in the

socket.
2.
Remount the hard disk bay.
3.
After assembling the CL-PC properly, turn ON the power to

the CL-PC to make sure that no error messages appear
during diagnosis for initialization.
For how to remount the hard disk bay, see 5.2.4 Hard Disk.
NOTE
If an error message is displayed, perform Error cancel
procedure.
Error cancel procedure
Lever
MT000057.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MT-62
Error cancel procedure
1.
2.
Turn the monitor and PC power switch ON.

The PC will start running.
CAUTION
When F2 SETUP appears at the upper left corner of the

window, press the <F2> key.
Whenever dismounting/remounting a motherboard, be sure to

wear a wrist strap to discharge the buildup of static electricity that
is held by the human body, otherwise, the motherboard may be
damaged due to static electricity discharged from the human body.
NOTE
NOTE
The setup window (PhoenixBIOS Setup Utility) then opens.
3.
5.2.10 Motherboard
Select the Advanced tab.
Users equipment-specific information or setup information is stored in

the memory (CMOS) on the motherboard. Prior to replacing a
motherboard, be sure to jot down such stored data properly.
1.
Dismount the front cover, right-side cover and left-side cover.
2.
3.
Dismount devices, such as memory and PCI board, from the

motherboard.
4.
Disconnect all connectors from the motherboard.
5.
Remove the seven screws to dismount the motherboard.
4. Perform the following.
Select Advanced Chipset Control and then press the <Enter> key.
S
elect
Memory Reconfiguration and then press the <Enter> key.

Select Clear DIMM Errors:[Enter] and then press the <Enter> key.
5.
Press the <Esc> key.

The Main Menu will open.
6.
Press the <Ecs> key.
7.
Make sure that Exit Saving Changes has been selected

The Exit menu will open.
The Setup Confirmation window opens.
8.
Make sure that Yes has been selected and press the
<Enter> key.
The PC restarts. Check to see then that the error has been
canceled properly.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817

Power cable (for main power supply/CPU power supply)

Speaker cable
Power switch cable
IDE cable (for CD-ROM drive/hard disk)
Sleep switch cable
FD drive cable
Housing fan cable
CD audio cable
Mounting procedure
Reverse the dismounting procedure to mount the motherboard.
MT-63
5.3 NEC PC Diagnosis Messages During Initialization
5.3 NEC PC Diagnosis Messages During

Initialization
No.
Error Message
1 Diskette drive A error
Error
Drive A FDD error
Causes
FDD failure, FDD cable
failure
Extended RAM Failed at address line:
Abnormal extended memory Extended DIMM error
System RAM Failed at offset:
Abnormal base memory
DIMM error
Shadow Ram Failed at offset:
Abnormal memory
DIMM error
Failure Fixed Disk
Abnormal disk
1. Setup failure
2. IDE device failure
3. Motherboard failure
Keyboard Controller Failed
Keyboard controller error
Keyboard error
Abnormal keyboard
controller
Abnormal keyboard
Real time clock error
Abnormal RTC
System battery is dead - Replace and run SETUP
Dead battery
10
System CMOS checksum bad - Default Configuration CMOS checksum error

used
11
12
13
System cache error - Cache disabled

System timer error
SMBIOS-SROM data checksumbad
Abnormal cache
Abnormal timer
SROM checksum error
14
SMBIOS-SROM data read error
SROM read error
15
Check date and time settings
Illegal date/time
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Actions to Take
* After cable connection
1. Replace FDD.
2. Replace FDD cable.
* For an error occurring after confirming
status of the mounted memory
Replace DIMM.
Replace DIMM.
Replace DIMM.
* After cable connection
1. Check setup.
2. Replace IDE device.
3. Replace IDE device cable.
Replace motherboard.
Keyboard error

connection to the keyboard
Replace keyboard.
RTC error
* For an error occurring after redetermining
the setup
End of battery lifespan, RTC Replace battery.
error
CMOS checksum error
the setup
CPU cache error
Replace CPU.
Timer error
Flash ROM write error
the setup
Flash ROM error
the setup
RTC error
the setup
MT-64
5.3 NEC PC Diagnosis Messages During Initialization
No.
Error Message
16 Fan Alarm occurred.
Error
Abnormal fan
Causes
Housing fan error
17
CPU Fan Alarm occurred.
Abnormal CPU fan
CPU fan error
18
System Temperature out of the range.
Abnormal temperature
Temperature error, MB
failure
19
System Voltage out of the range
Abnormal voltage
Power supply error, MB

failure
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Actions to Take
connection
1. Clean fan.
2. Replace fan.
connection and mounting
1. Clean fan.
2. Replace fan.
For an error occurring at normal
temperature
1. Setup
2. Replace motherboard.
the setup
1. Replace power supply.
2. Replace motherboard.
MT-65
5.4 Confirmation Required When Beeps Sound at PC Startup
5.4 Confirmation Required When Beeps

Sound at PC Startup
A series of beep sounds notify occurrence of an error, when display of
the relevant error message or the problem indication is disabled on the
monitor for the error thus detected during hardware initialization.
Example:
One beep + 3 consecutive beeps + 1 beep + 1 beep
(beep pattern: 1-3-1-1)
The beep sounds in this pattern indicate occurrence of a DRAM refresh
test error.
The beep sounds in different patterns depending on the detected error
or problem, as shown in the table below.
Beep pattern
Error
3-3 (repeated) ROM checksum error
Cause
Remedy
Flash Memory failure
DRAM refresh error
DIMM or motherboard failure
Confirm DIMM attaching condition.

If the failure still remains, replace DIMM or motherboard.
1-3-1-3
Keyboard controller test error
Keyboard Controller failure
Re-connect the keyboard.

If the failure still remains, replace keyboard or motherboard.
1-3-3-1
Error occurring during capacity

check, with no memory
1-3-4-1
DRAM address error
DIMM or motherboard failure
1-3-4-3
DRAM test Low Byte error
Confirm DIMM attaching condition.

If the failure still remains, replace DIMM or motherboard.
1-4-1-1
DRAM test High Byte error
2-1-2-3
BIOS ROM copyright test error
Flash Memory failure
2-2-3-1
Illegal interrupt test error
Motherboard failure
Option ROM initialization error
Confirm PCI board mounting condition if expansion of the option board is not
Failure of Flash Memory, Graphic displayed for the additionally extended PCI board.
Adapter or PCI Card
If the failure still remains, replace additionally extended PCI board or
motherboard.
1-2-2-3
ROM checksum error
1-3-1-1
1-2
Video initialization error

Option ROM checksum error
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MT-66
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MT-67
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MT-68
Appendix 1 CL Error Message Table (A00 to A11, V1.0(B) to V8.1(B))

Event
Event Source
Description
10773 OutImgPrcCFcImgConv FFTagCharDataAdd Error
<ImgConvAfterDicomSt>
10774 OutImgPrcCFcImgConv DICOM ReplaceVR/Push
Error
Error
Error
%1 : Registry Value
10900 IIPInputEz
Get/Set Error%n
[Key] %2%n
[Exp] %3%n
%4%n
%5
%1 : Database Connection
10901 IIPInputEz
Error%n
[DB] %2%n
[Exp] %3%n
%4%n
%5
%1 : Database Data
10902 IIPInputEz
Get/Set Error%n
[DB] %2%n
[Table] %3%n
[Field] %4%n
[Exp] %5
%1 : Dicom Data Object
10903 IIPInputEz
Get/Set Error%n
[Tag] %2%n
[Exp] %3%n
%4%n
%5
%1 : Other Error%n
10904 IIPInputEz
[Procedure] %2%n
[ErrorCode] %3%n
[Exp] %4%n
%5
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
Definition of TagCharDataAdd.ini is invalid. Check the TagCharDataAdd.ini.

Failed in setting Photometric Interpretation Restart.
(0028, 0004).
Failed in setting Pixel Intensity Relationship Restart.
Sign (0028, 1041).
Failed in setting Presentation LUT Shape
(2050, 0020).
Restart.
The acquisition/setup key or registration

information is abnormal.
Check the registry key.
This error is attributable to an abnormal

Check Directory.ini or database file name.
character string in Directory.ini, an incorrect
database file name, or a damaged
database.
database acquisition/setup key or
database.
Check the database table/field name.
The DDO acquisition/setup tag is

abnormal.
Check the DDO tag.
Unknown error.
Appx1MT-1
Event
Event Source
11900 IIPInputEz
11900 IIPPortable
11901 IIPInputEz
11901 IIPPortable
11902 IIPInputEz
11902 IIPPortable
11903 IIPInputEz
11903 IIPPortable
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
%1 : Registry Value
Get/Set Error%n
[Key] %2%n
[Exp] %3%n
%4%n
%5
%1 : Registry Value Get/
Set Error
[Key] %2
[Exp] %3
%4
%5
Error%n
[DB] %2%n
[Exp] %3%n
%4%n
%5
Error
[DB] %2
[Exp] %3
%4
%5
%1 : Database Data Get/
Set Error%n
[DB] %2%n
[Table] %3%n
[Field] %4%n
[Exp] %5
Set Error
[DB] %2
[Table]%3
[Field]%4
[Exp]%5
Get/Set Error%n
[Tag] %2%n
[Exp] %3%n
%4%n
%5
%1 : DDO Data Get/Set
Error
[Tag] %2
%3
%4
%5
Causes
Remedies

The registry was damaged.
Restart. If the same symptom recurs,

reinstall the system.
Remarks

database.
Failed in accessing the image database.

reinstall the system and perform
Initialization of image database. (Image
data will be fully deleted.)

acquisition/setup key or database.


abnormal.
Check the DDO tag.
The DDO file was damaged.

Appx1MT-2
Event
Event Source
11904 IIPInputEz
11904 IIPPortable
12001 FF32
Description
%1 : Other Error%n
[Procedure] %2%n
[ErrorCode] %3%n
[Exp] %4%n
%5
%1 : Other Error
[Procedure] %2
[Error Code]%3
[Exp]%4
%5
[%1]
It failed in CreateFile(%2).
%3
Causes
Remedies
Unknown error.
Program error or unstable system status.
Failed in reading a bitmap file.

It is conceivable that there was no such
file, free disk space was not sufficient or
the system was unstable.
Check POCKET id Console connection

status and restart. If the same symptom
recurs, reinstall the system and perform
Check to see if the filename is correct or
available hard disk space is sufficient.
Proceed with processing.
12002 FF32
[%1]
It failed in
CreateFileMapping(%2).
%3
Failed in creating a file map object.

It is conceivable that available resources
were insufficient or the system was
unstable.
12003 FF32
[%1]
It failed in
MapViewOfFile(%2).
%3
Failed in mapping a file. It is conceivable

that available resources were insufficient
or the system was unstable.
12004 FF32
[%1]
It failed in
CreateCompatibleDC.
[%2]
[%1]
It failed in
CreateDIBSection(%2).
%3
Failed in creating a device context.

unstable.
Failed in creating a DIB section.
unstable.
12006 FF32
[%1]
It failed in
OleCreatePictureIndirect(%2).
%3
Failed in creating a bitmap picture object.

unstable.
12008 FF32
[%1]
It failed in ExtractIon.
%2
Failed in reading an icon file.

It is conceivable that there was no such
file, free disk space was not sufficient or
Check to see if the filename is correct or

available hard disk space is sufficient.
12005 FF32
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
%1: Instance name

%2: Error code
%3: Bitmap file
name/Icon file
name
%1: Instance name
%2: Error code
%3: Bitmap file
name/Icon file
name
%1: Instance name
%2: Error code
%3: Bitmap file
name/Icon file
name
%1: Instance name
%2: Error code
%1: Instance name
%2: Error code
%3: Bitmap file
name/Icon file
name
%1: Instance name
%2: Error code
%3: Bitmap file
name/Icon file
name
%1: Instance name
%2: Error code
Appx1MT-3
Event
Event Source
Description
Causes
Remedies
12009 FF32
[%1]
It failed in
OleCreatePictureIndirect(%2).
%3
Failed in creating an picture object for an

icon. It is conceivable that available
resources were insufficient or the system
was unstable.
12011 FF32
The file path was illegal.
12012 FF32
[%1]
It is a filepath error. %2
[%1]
Memory allocation failed(%2).
%3
Check to see if the filename is correct.

Check to see if the filename is correct.
12014 FF32
[%1]
An invalid input value was specified.
12015 FF32
[%1]
%2
12016 FF32
[%1]
%2
%3
12900 IIPInputEz
%1 : Registry Value
Get/Set Error%n
[Key] %2%n
[Exp] %3%n
%4%n
%5
Set Error
[Key] %2
[Exp] %3
%4
%5
Error%n
[DB] %2%n
[Exp] %3%n
%4%n
%5

A registry was damaged.

reinstall the system.
12900 IIPPortable
12901 IIPInputEz
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Failed in acquiring memory.

unstable.
Remarks
%1: Instance name
%2: Error code
%3: Bitmap file
name/Icon file
name
%1: Instance name
%2: Error code
%1: Instance name
%2: Error code
%3: Bitmap file
name/Icon file
name
%1: Instance name
(function name),
occurred error,
error code
%1: Instance name
(function name),
occurred error,
error code
%1: Error details
%1: Instance name
(function name),
occurred error,
error code
%2: Error details (1/2)
%3: Error details (2/2)

database.
Appx1MT-4
Event
Event Source
12901 IIPPortable
12902 IIPInputEz
12902 IIPPortable
12903 IIPInputEz
12903 IIPPortable
12904 IIPInputEz
12904 IIPPortable
13000 FFIdDepartSelect
13000 FFIdFilmMark
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Error
[DB] %2
[Exp] %3
%4
%5
%1 : Database Data
Get/Set Error%n
[DB] %2%n
[Table] %3%n
[Field] %4%n
[Exp] %5
Set Error
[DB] %2
[Table]%3
[Field]%4
[Exp]%5
Get/Set Error%n
[Tag] %2%n
[Exp] %3%n
%4%n
%5
Error
[Tag] %2
%3
%4
%5
%1 : Unknown Error%n
[Procedure] %2%n
[ErrorCode] %3%n
[Exp] %4%n
%5
%1 : Other Error
[Procedure] %2
[Error Code]%3
[Exp]%4
%5
It failed that [%1] connects
departDB
It failed that [%1] gets the
FontName
Causes
Remedies


acquisition/setup key or database.


abnormal.
Check the DDO tag.

Unknown error.
Check the POCKET id Console connection

status.
A general-purpose information event log.
Check the POCKET id Console connection

status.
Remarks
The requesting department database was Reinstall.

not found in the path indicated by the
connection character string. The requesting
department table did not exist.
The Font key was not found in the
Reinstall the IIP because the displayed
registry.
characters can be corrupted.
Appx1MT-5
Event
Event Source
13000 FFIdMenuChange
13000 FFIdMenuItem
13000 FFIdParamedicSelect
Description
Causes
Remedies

FontName
FontName
paramedicDB

registry.
registry.
The technicians database was not found
in the pass indicated by the connection
character string or the technician's table
did not exist.
The LangStrDB key was not found in
Directory.ini or the ID 30700 was not
registered in the character string database.
The image database was not successfully
accessed (ADO error).
13000 FFIdPatInfoInput

ID# caption
13001 FF32LIB
Image Database Access

Failure.
ErrNo:%1 NativeErrNo:%2
SQLState:%3 Source:%4
Description:%5
MessageBox DataBase
The message database was not
Connection Error.
successfully connected. It is conceivable
that the database did not exist or that the
specified data source name was invalid.
MessageBox DataBase
The connection to the message database
Connection Error.
was not successfully established.
[%1]
The database did not exist or the specified
data source name was invalid.
It failed that [%1] gets the The LangStrDB key was not found in
DepartLabel caption
It failed that [%1] gets the The FontSizeSS/FontSizeS/
FontSize
FontSizeM/FontSizeL/FontSizeLL key
was not found in the registry.
FontSize
FontSize
ParamedicLabel caption
EXAM# caption
It failed that [%1] gets the The Font key was not found in the
FontName
registry.
13001 FFCustomMsgBox
13001 FFIdFilmMark
13001 FFIdMenuItem
13001 FFIipInput
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks

Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Restart.
Reinstall or check whether the message

database exists and the contents of
Directory.ini are correct.
Perform a reinstallation or check whether
the message database exists and the
contents of Directory.ini are correct.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Appx1MT-6
Event
Event Source
13001 FFImageDBCTL
13001 FFImageDBCTL
13001 FFIpcInf
Description
Error.
ErroNo:%1
Source:%2
Description:%3
Failure.
ErrNo:%1 NativeErrNo:%2
SQLState:%3 Source:%4
Description:%5
[%1]
It failed in CoInitialize(%2).
Causes
Remedies
The image database was not successfully Restart.


Initialization was unsuccessful.

Restart.
It is conceivable that the system was
unstable.
Log file creation was unsuccessful.
Check for a free disk space or restart.
The problem might have been caused, for
instance, by an invalid filename selection,
inadequate disk space, or system
instability.
Failed in accessing the database.
Restart.
13001 FFLogFile
[%1]
13001 FF32LIB
FF32lib Database Access

Failure.%nFunction:%1
Command:%2%nErrNo:%3
NativeErrNo:%4
SQLState:%5%n
Source:%6%n
Description:%7
MessageBox Data Get
The specified message was not databased.
Error.
It is conceivable that the message was not
registered in the message database or that
the specified ID was incorrect (program
defect).
It failed that [%1] gets the The Font key was not found in the
FontName
registry.
Clear Caption
Driver initialize error[%1]
The magnetic card was not connected.
13002 FFIdFilmMark
13002 FFIdMcrControl
13002 FFIdMenuItem
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817

multibyte flag
multibyte flag
FontName
PatNameSbcs caption
Remarks
The Multibyte key was not found in the

registry.
registry.
registry.
%1: Instance name

%2: Error code
%1: Instance name
%2: Error code
%3: File name/mutex
name
Perform a reinstallation or replace the

message database with the latest one.

Reinstall.
Connect the magnetic card reader.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Appx1MT-7
Event
Event Source
Description
13002 FFIdRuMainControl
Driver initialize error[%1]
13002 FFIipInput

FontSize
13002 FFImageDBCTL
[%1]
%2
Failure.
InstanceName[%1]%2
[%1]
It failed in
CoCreateInstance(%2).
LogFileCom create failure.
[%1]
It failed in
CreateFileMapping(%2).
Failure. InstanceName[%1]
%n%2%nFunction:%3
Command:%4
Failure.
InstanceName[%1]%2
%3
Same MessageBox
Existed.
[%1]
FontSize
13002 FFImageDBCTL
13002 FFIpcInf
13002 FFLogFile
13002 FF32LIB
13003 FF32LIB
13003 FFIdFilmMark
13003 FFIdMenuItem
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817

connection string of strDB
[%1] failed in the
initialization for the display
group data acquisition
Image Folder Path Get
Error
FontSize
PatNameDbcs caption
Causes
Remedies
The magnetic card reader was not

connected.
The FontSizeSS/FontSizeS/
accessed.
accessed.
A log save control was not successfully
created. The problem is attributable to
system instability or unregistered control.
Remarks
There are no operational problems.

Restart.
Restart.
perform a reinstallation.
File map object creation was unsuccessful. Restart.

The problem is attributable to resource
Restart.
%1: Instance name

%2: Error code
%1: Instance name
%2: Error code

accessed.
The specified message box is already
open.
Close the message box.
Directory.ini.
The DisplayDataDB key was not found in
Directory.ini or the connection character
string was not properly registered in the
display group table.
The Bitmap key was not found in
Directory.ini.

Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Appx1MT-8
Event
Event Source
13003 FFIipInput
13003 FFImageDBCTL
13003 FFImageDBCTL
13003 FFIpcInf
13003 FFLogFile
13003 FF32LIB
13004 FFIdFilmMark
Description
multibyte flag
[%1]
%2
%3
Failure.
InstanceName[%1]%2%3
[%1]
Memory allocation failed.
[%1]
It failed in
MapViewOfFile(%2).
Failure.
InstanceName[%1]%n%2
%n%3
MessageBox Dialog Create
Error.
[%1]
depart field list
to strDB
Magnetic card data
acquisition error[%1]
[%1] failed in the display
13004 FFIdMenuItem
[Miss]Image Get Error

paramedic field list
Sex caption
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Magnetic card data

acquisition error[%1]
Causes
Remedies
Remarks

Reinstall.
registry.
accessed.
accessed.
Memory allocation was not successfully
achieved for main thread creation.
File mapping was unsuccessful.
Restart.
%1: Instance name
Restart.
%1: Instance name

%2: Error code
Restart.
%1: Instance name

%2: Error code
The message box could not be created.

This error occurred due to insufficient
resources or system instability.
The FieldDepartList key was not found in
the system setup database.
The connection character string was not
properly registered for the LangStrDB key
in Directory.ini.
The magnetic card was found damaged.
Restart.

Id_MissExposure_I.bmp was not found in
the path to an image folder or the image
format was illegal.
The FieldParamedicList key was not
found in the system setup database.
The magnetic card is damaged.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Have a normal magnetic card be read.
Reinstall the IIP because the button cannot

be displayed normally.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Have a normal magnetic card be read.
Appx1MT-9
Event
Event Source
13004 FFIipInput
13004 FFIpcInf
13004 FFLogFile
13005 FFIdConnectionWatch
EX
13005 FFIdFilmMark
13005 FFldMcrControl
Description
13005 FFIpcInf
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Remedies

connection string of STR
DB
[%1] A pipe has already
been made(%2).
[%1] It failed in
CreateMutex(%2).
%3

Directory.ini.
Reinstall.
An attempt was made to duplicate a pipe.
Mutex creation was unsuccessful.

Restart.
MessageBox Dialog Show

Error.
[%1]
Recv Error
Message [%1] Error Code
[%2]
connection string of
FilmMarkDB
Magnetic card variation
error[%1]
[%1] failed in the liberating
processing of the display
SexMale caption
The message box could not be opened.

Restart.
The connection to the RU was closed or a Restore the RU connection to normal.
connection error occurred.

error[%1]
Recv error[%1]
13005 FFIdRUMainControlEx Recv Error

13005 FFIipInput
Causes
The FilmMarkDB key was not found in

Directory.ini.
Reinstall.
The magnetic card was not of the specified

type.
The connection to the display group table
was not successfully closed.
Have the specified type of magnetic card

be read.
reinstall.

The employed magnetic card type was
different than specified.
The connection to the RU was closed or
an error occurred in the connection.
The connection to the RU was closed or a
Reinstall.
Remarks
%1: Instance name

%2: Error code
%1: Instance name
%2: Error code
%3: file name/mutex
name
Have the specified type of magnetic card

be read.
Check the connection to the RU.
Restore the RU connection to normal.
Message [%1] Error Code

[%2]
It failed that [%1] connects The connection character string was not
Reinstall.
to STR DB
in Directory.ini.
[%1]
Main thread creation was not successful. Restart.
It failed in
_beginthread(%2).
List For Modeless
The modeless message box management Restart.
MessageBox Management table was not successfully created.
New Error.
%1: Instance name

%2: Error code
Appx1MT-10
Event
Event Source
13006 FFIdFilmMark
Description
Causes
List For Modeless

MessageBox Management
New Error.
[%1]
to FilmMarkDB
The modeless message box management

table was not successfully created.
properly registered for the FilmMarkDB
key in Directory.ini.
The card format was incorrect or an
attempt was made to read an unspecified
hospital card.
Directory.ini.

check error[%1]
[%1] Failed in the

initialization for the display
menu data acquisition
SexFemale caption

check error[%1]
13006 FFIipInput

connection string of SYS
DB
[%1] It failed in
WaitNamedPipe(%2).
13006 FFIpcInf
13007 FFIipInput
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Remedies
Remarks
Restart.
Reinstall.
Have the specified hospital card be read.
Reinstall.

Reinstall.
The card format was wrong or an attempt Have the specified hospital card be read.
was made to cause an unspecified hospital
card to be read.
The SysConfigDB key was not found in Reinstall.
Directory.ini.
The specified pipe was not successfully

connected. It is conceivable that the pipe
was not created or was unconnectable or
that the system was unstable.
connection string of strDB Directory.ini.
DataFormatDB access
McrDataFormatDB key was not found in
error[%1]
Directory.ini or McrDataFormat.mdb did not
exist in the specified path.
[%1] failed in the acquisition The connection character string was not
of number of records of
properly registered in the display group
display menu data
table.
connection string of strDB Directory.ini.
SexOther caption
DataFormatDB access
The McrDataFormatDB key was not
error[%1]
found in Directory.ini or McrDataFormat.
mdb did not exist in the path.
to SYS DB
properly registered for the SysConfigDB
Make a change so as to let the program

initiate a retransmission, or restart.
%1: Instance name

%2: Error code
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Appx1MT-11
Event
Event Source
Description
Causes
Remedies
13007 FFIpcInf
[%1]
13007 FFIpcInf
[%1]
[Send Msg:%3]
An exception error
occurred.
[%1]
%2
Message Send Error [%1] A connection error occurred.
Error Code [%2]
to strDB
in Directory.ini.
It failed that [%1] get the
folder path to Bitmap
Directory.ini.
[%1] failed in the display
Not properly registered to the display group
table.
to strDB
in Directory.ini.
DateOfBirth caption
DataFormatDB close
The database was faulty.
error[%1]
Message Send Error [%1] A connection error occurred.
WSAGetLastError = [%2]
It failed that [%1] calls the The message database did not exist or the
CUSTOM MESSAGE BOX program was faulty.
(%2)
[%1]
A message was not successfully
It failed in WriteFile(%2).
transmitted. It is conceivable that the pipe
was closed or that the system was
unstable.
[%1]
The message transmission was not
It failed in WriteFile(%2).
successfully completed. This error
[Send Msg:%3]
occurred due to a closed pipe or system
instability.
13008 FFIdConnectionWatch
Ex
13008 FFIdFilmMark
13008 FFIdRUMainControlEx
13008 FFIipInput
13008 FFIpcInf
13008 FFIpcInf
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
The specified pipe was not successfully

connected. It is conceivable that the pipe
was closed or that the system was
unstable.
The connection to the specified pipe was
not established. This error occurred
because the pipe was closed or the system
was unstable.
An exception occurred (the system was
unstable).
Remarks
The problem is attributable to the program. %1: Instance name

Check the program or restart.
%2: Error code
The problem is attributable to the program.
Restart.

Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
The problem is attributable to the program. %1: Instance name
%2: Error code
It is conceivable that the program may be
faulty. Check the program or restart.
Appx1MT-12
Event
Event Source
Description
Common function error

occurred.
[%1]
%2
13009 FFIdConnectionWatch LogFile Name Make
error(%1).%n[%2]
13009 FFIdConnectionWatchEx Log File Name Make
Error[%1]
Error Code [%2]
connection string of sysDB
13009 FFIdFilmMark
bitmap to Previous Page
13009 FFIpcInf
DataFormatDB close
error[%1]
[%1] Failed in the liberating
processing of the display
Is failed that [%1] gets the
connection string of sysDB
FontName
LogFile Name Make
error[%1]
Log File Name Make
Error[%1]
Error Code [%2]
[%1]
Memory allocation failed.
Causes
Remedies
The common function returned an error.
Restart.
The Log key was not found in Directory.

ini.
ini.
Reinstall.
The SysConfigDB key was not found in

Directory.ini.
Id_UpScroll_U.bmp/Id_UpScroll_D.bmp/
Id_UpScroll_X.bmp was not found in the
path to an image folder or the image format
was illegal.
Reinstall.
The connection to the display menu table

Restart. If the problem frequently occurs,

initialize the image database.

Directory.ini.
registry.
ini.
ini.
Reinstall.
Memory allocation was not successfully

achieved for reception thread creation.
13010 FFIdConnectionWatch DB Connect
error(%1).%n[%2]
Directory.ini or SysConfig.mdb did not exist
in the path.
SysConfigDB key was not found in
13010 FFIdConnectionWatchEx DB Connect Error [%1]
Error Code [%2]
in the specified path.
to sysDB
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
Register the Log key in Directory.ini.

Reinstall.

Reinstall.
Register the Log key in Directory.ini.
Restart.
%1: Instance name

%2: Error code
Reinstall.
Properly register the SysConfigDB key in
Directory.ini.
Reinstall.
Appx1MT-13
Event
Event Source
13010 FFIdFilmMark
13010
13010
13010
13010
13010
13010
13010
13010
13011
13011
13011
13011
Description
bitmap to Next Page
Causes
Remedies
Id_DownScroll_U.bmp/Id_DownScroll_D.
bmp/Id_DownScroll_X.bmp was not
found in the path to an image folder or the
image format was illegal.
The patient information contained in the
magnetic card was incorrect.
The connection to the display menu table

Patient info data error[%1]

%n(%2)
FFIdMenuChange
[%1] Failed in the
termination of the display
FFIdParamedicSelect It failed that [%1] connects The connection character string was not
to sysDB
FFIdPatInfoInput
FontSize
FFIdRuMainControl
DB Connect error[%1]
in the path.
FFIdRuMainControl
Patient info data error[%1] The patient information carried by the
magnetic card was incorrect.
FFIdRUMainControlEx DB Connect Error
SysConfigDB key was not found in
[%1] Error Code [%2]
in the specified path.
FFIpcInf
[%1]
Pipe creation was not successful.
It failed in
CreateNamedPipe(%2).
unstable.
FFIpcInf
[%1] It failed in
The pipe was not successfully created.
CreateNamedPipe(%2).
The system was unstable.
[Pipe:%3]
FFIdConnectionWatch DB Read
The EchoInterval, ComBreakTimeout1
error(%1).%n[%2]
PartFrupStatus, or EnableLog
FrupConnect key was not found in
SysConfig.mdb.
FFIdConnectionWatchEx DB Read error[%1]
The EchoInterval, ComBreakTimeout1
Error Code [%2]
PortFrupStatus, or
EnableLogFrupConnect key was not
found in SysConfig.mdb.
FFIdDepartSelect
It's failed that [%1] gets the DepartDB did not exist in Directory.ini.
departDB
FFIdFilmMark
Id_Clear_U.bmp/Id_Clear_D.bmp/
bitmap to Clear
Id_Clear_ X.bmp was not found in the
was illegal.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
Check the data contained in the magnetic

card.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Check the data stored in the magnetic
card.
Properly register the SysConfigDB key in
Directory.ini.
Restart.
%1: Instance name

%2: Error code
Restart.
Reinstall.
Ensure that the EchoInterval,

ComBreakTimeout1, PortFrupStatus,
and EnableLogFrupConnect keys are all
registered in SysConfig.mdb.
Reinstall.
Appx1MT-14
Event
Event Source
Description
paramedicDB
max length of ID#
DB Read error[%1]
13011 FFIdRUMainControlEx DB Read error[%1]

Error Code [%2]
13011 FFIipInput
13011 FFIpcInf
13011 FFIpcInf
13012 FFIpcInf
13012 FFIpcInf
13013 FFIpcInf
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817

window size
[%1]
It failed in
ConnectNamedPipe(%2).
[%1]
It failed in
ConnectNamedPipe(%2).
[Pipe:%3]
ActiveX Data Objects(ADO)
Error.
ErrorNo:%1
Source:%2
Description:%3
max length of EXAM#
[%1]
It failed in
_beginthread(%2).
[%1]
It failed in
_beginthread(%2).
[Pipe:%3]
folder path to Bitmap
padding type of ID#
Configration error[%1]
[%1]
It failed in ReadFile(%2).
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
ParamedicDB did not exist in Directory.ini. Reinstall.

The IdLength key was not found in the
system setup database.
The PortFrupMain, AckTimeout, or
EnableLogFrupMain key was not found in
SysConfig.mdb.
The PortFrupMain, AckTimeout, or
EnableLogFrupMain key was not found in
SysConfig.mdb.
The ScallHight/ScallWidth key was not
registered in the registry.
Pipe connection was not successfully
awaited. It is conceivable that the system
was unstable.
The pipe connection request was not
successfully enqueued. The system was
unstable.
An ADO error was detected.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Ensure that the PortFrupMain,
AckTimeout, and EnableLogFrupMain
keys are all registered in SysConfig.mdb.
Reinstall.
Restart.
%1: Instance name

%2: Error code
Restart.
Restart.
The ExaminationNoLength key was not Reinstall.

Reception thread creation was not
Restart.
successful. The problem is attributable to
resource inadequacy or system instability.
The reception thread was not successfully Restart.
created. This error occurred due to
insufficient resources or system instability.
Directory.ini.
The IdPadding key was not found in the
SysConfig.mdb was abnormal.
Reinstall.
Message reception was not successful.

unstable.
Restart.
%1: Instance name

%2: Error code
Reinstall.
%1: Instance name

%2: Error code
Appx1MT-15
Event
Event Source
Description
13013 FFIpcInf
[%1]
It failed in ReadFile(%2).
[Pipe:%3]
13014 FFIdConnectionWatch Ack Messeage Time
Out(%1).%n[%2]
13014 FFIdConnectionWatchEx Ack Message Time
Out[%1]
Error Code [%2]
bitmap to Previous Page
13014 FFIipInput
13014 FFIpcInf

padding type of EXAM#
Ack Messeage Time
Out[%1]
Ack Message Time
Out[%1]
[%1] No RU Used
[%1]
It is a parameter error.
bitmap to Next Page

multibyte flag
[%1]
13015 FFIpcInf
Exception Information.
%2
date format type
13017 FFIdConnectionWatchEx RU Host Unknown
Error[%1]
Error Code [%2]
connection string of strDB
13017 FFIdRUMainControlEx RU Host Unknown
Error[%1]
Error Code [%2]
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
The message reception was not

Restart.
successfully completed. The system was
unstable.
The connection to the RU was closed or a Restore the RU connection to normal.
Id_PrevPage_U.bmp/Id_PrevPage_
D.bmp/Id _PrevPage_X.bmp was not
The ExaminationNoPadding key was not
The connection to the RU was closed or a

Although the FRUP option was selected,

NetConfig did not have any RU connection
setting. There was a conflict between the
option setup and Config setup.
An illegal parameter was encountered
(program defect).
Id_NextPage_U.bmp/Id_NextPage_
D.bmp/Id _NextPage_X.bmp was not
registry.
An exception occurred (the system was
unstable).
Check the settings.
Reinstall.
%1: Instance name

Reinstall.
Restart.
The DateFormat key was not found in the Reinstall.

The RU was not properly set for the IIP.
Check the setup.
Directory.ini.
The RU was not properly set for the IIP.
Reinstall.
Check the setup.
Appx1MT-16
Event
Event Source
13020 FFIipInput
13021 FFIipInput
13022 FFIipInput
13023 FFIipInput
13024 FFIipInput
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Causes
Remedies
to strDB
in Directory.ini.
It failed that [%1] gets the The SysConfigDB key was not found in
connection string of sysDB Directory.ini.
to sysDB
RU Error DB Connect Error The connection character string was not
in [%1]
properly registered for the RuErrorDataDB
key in Directory.ini or the RU error
information database did not exist.
RU Error Data Get Error in The window number sent from the RU was
[%1]
not found in the RU error information
database.
It failed that [%1] gets
The system setup database was damaged.
System ID
RU Status DB Connection The connection character string was not
String Get Error in [%1]
properly registered for the
RuStatusDataDB key in Directory.ini.
%1 (%2) : Patient
The patient information contained illegal
Information Check Error%n information.
Item [%3]%n
Error [%4]
RU Status DB Connect
Error in [%1]
properly registered for the RuErrorDataDB
key in Directory.ini or the RU error
information database did not exist.
%1 (%2) : Bitmap Image
Id_LocalSearch_U.bmp,
Get Error%n
Id_LocalSearch_D.bmp, or
BMP File [%3]
Id_LocalSearch_X.bmp was not found in
the path to the folder in which images were
positioned.
RU Status Data Get Error The window number sent from the RU was
in [%1]
not found in the RU error information
database.
%1 (%2) : Patient Info Get The patient information database was
Error%n
damaged.
Error [%3]%n
RetCode [%4]
%1 (%2) : Patient Info Set The patient information to be registered
Error%n
contained illegal information or the patient
Error [%3]%n
information database was damaged.
RetCode [%4]
Remarks
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Ensure that the RU version agrees with the

RU error information database version.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Correct the patient information setup.
Reinstall.
Place Id_LocalSearch_U.bmp,
Id_LocalSearch_D.bmp, and
Id_LocalSearch_X.bmp in the path to the
folder in which images are positioned.
Ensure that the RU version agrees with the
RU error information database version.
Repair the patient information database.
Enter correct patient information or repair

the patient information database.
Appx1MT-17
Event
Event Source
13027 FFIipInput
13030 FFIipInput
13031 FFIipInput
13032 FFIipInput
13033 FFIipInput
13034 FFIipInput
13035 FFIipInput
13036 FFIipInput
13037 FFIipInput
13038 FFIipInput
13039 FFIipInput
13040 FFIipInput
13041 FFIipInput
13042 FFIipInput
13043 FFIipInput
13044 FFIipInput
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
%1 (%2) : Patient Info Not
Correspond%n
RetCode [%3]%n
%1%n%2%n%3%n%4%n
%5%n%6%n%7%0
%1%n%2%n%3%n%4%n
%5%n%6%n%7%0
Causes
Remedies
No matching patient information was

found.
Control information
No particular remedy needs be taken.

Reinstall.
properly registered for the
RuStatusDataDB key in Directory.ini.
The system setup database was damaged. Reinstall.
[%s] %s (%s): Log Output

Directory Get Error
[%s] %s (%s): MCR Control The card reader unit was not connected.
Initialize Error
[%s] %s (%s): LR button
cannot be concave set
[%s] %s (%s): TB button
[%s] %s (%s): TBLR button
[%s] %s (%s): Rotation
button cannot be concave
set
[%s] %s (%s): Message
Table Name Get Error
[%s] %s (%s): StrDB
Connection String Get
Error
[%s] %s (%s): StrDB
Connect Error
[%s] %s (%s): SysDB
Error
[%s] %s (%s): SysDB
Connect Error
[%s] %s (%s): ImageDB
Connection Character
String Get Error
[%s] %s (%s): Failed
ImageDB Connection
Remarks
The range was changed by the Service

Utility.
Utility.
Utility.
Utility.
There are no particular problems except

that the magnetic card reader is not
available.
The MsgTableName key was not found in Reinstall.

Reinstall.
Directory.ini.
Reinstall.
in Directory.ini.
The SysConfigDB key was not found in Reinstall.
Directory.ini.
The ImageDB key was not found in
Directory.ini.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.

Reinstall.
properly registered for the ImageDB key
in Directory.ini.
The image database was not successfully Reinstall.
ImageDB Open Recordset accessed.
Appx1MT-18
Event
Event Source
13045 FFIipInput
13046 FFIipInput
13047 FFIipInput
13048 FFIipInput
13049 FFIipInput
13050 FFIipInput
13051 FFIipInput
13052 FFIipInput
13053 FFIipInput
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Causes
Remedies
Remarks

The image database was not successfully Check whether the SQL service manager
ImageDB Close Recordset accessed.
is normally operating. If the same symptom
occurs while the SQL service manager is
normally operating, initialize the image
database (the entire image data is then
deleted).
Data Get Error
accessed.
deleted).
Data Set Error
accessed.
deleted).
Data Delete Error
accessed.
deleted).
ImageDBFlag Connection accessed.
deleted).
ImageDBFlag Close
accessed.
deleted).
[%s] %s (%s):
ImageDBFlag Data Set
accessed.
Error
deleted).
The initialization process for menu
Reinstall.
MenuDB Initialize
database access was not successfully
performed.
[%s] %s (%s): Menu Data Menu information was not successfully
Reinstall.
in ImageDB Get Error
acquired from the menu database.
Appx1MT-19
Event
Event Source
13054 FFIipInput
13055 FFIipInput
13056 FFIipInput
13057 FFIipInput
13058 FFIipInput
13059 FFIipInput
13060 FFIipInput
13061 FFIipInput
13062 FFIipInput
13063 FFIipInput
13064 FFIipInput
13065 FFIipInput
13066 FFIipInput
13067 FFIipInput
13068 FFIipInput
13069 FFIipInput
13070 FFIipInput
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
[%s] %s (%s): Menu
Parameter Data in
ImageDB Get Error
MenuDB Termination
[%s] %s (%s): NetDB
Connection Character
String Get Error
NetDB Connection
Causes
Remedies
Menu parameter information was not

successfully acquired from the menu
database.
The termination process for menu
database access was not successfully
performed.
The NetConfigDB key was not found in
Directory.ini.
Remarks
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.

Reinstall.
properly registered for the NetConfigDB
[%s] %s (%s): NetDB Data The network setup database was damaged. Reinstall.
Get Error
New DICOM data was not successfully
Create New DICOM Data created.
[%s] %s (%s): DICOM Data DICOM data was not successfully
Get Error
acquired.
[%s] %s (%s): DICOM Data DICOM data was not successfully set up. Restart. If the problem frequently occurs,
Set Error
[%s] %s (%s): DICOM Data DICOM data was not successfully deleted. Restart. If the problem frequently occurs,
Delete Error
[%s] %s (%s): DICOM Data DICOM data was not successfully loaded. Restart. If the problem frequently occurs,
Load Error
[%s] %s (%s): DICOM Data DICOM data was not successfully saved. Restart. If the problem frequently occurs,
Save Error
[%s] %s (%s): DICOM Data DICOM data was not successfully freed.
Free Error
[%s] %s (%s): Failed in
The IdPadding key was not found in the Reinstall.
Padding Acquisition[Id#]
The ExaminationNoPadding key was not Reinstall.
Padding
Acquisition[Exam#]
The DateFormat key was not found in the Reinstall.
Format Acquisition[Date Of system setup database.
Birth]
[%s] %s (%s): Cannot
The requesting department database was Reinstall.
Access Data
not found in the path indicated by the
Base[Departmdb]
connection character string. The requesting
department table did not exist.
[%s] %s (%s): Displayed
The FieldDepartList key was not found in Reinstall.
Item Is Not
Understood[Depart List]
Appx1MT-20
Event
Event Source
13072 FFIipInput
13073 FFIipInput
13074 FFIipInput
13076 FFIipInput
13077 FFIipInput
13078 FFIipInput
13079 FFIipInput
13080 FFIipInput
13081 FFIipInput
13082 FFIipInput
13083 FFIipInput
13084 FFIipInput
13085 FFIipInput
13086 FFIipInput
13087 FFIipInput
13088 FFIipInput
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Connected String
Acquisition[Depart]
[%s] %s (%s): Cannot
Access Data
Base[Paramedicmdb]
[%s] %s (%s): Displayed
Item Is Not
Understood[Paramedic List]
Connected String
Acquisition[Paramedic]
Window Size Acquisition
ExposureList Erase
[%s] %s (%s): Config
Directory Character String
Get Error
[%s] %s (%s):
ImageDBFlag Data Get
Error
[%s] %s (%s): StrDB

Message String Get Error
[%s] %s (%s): IPAddress(RU) Get Error
[%s] %s (%s): Initialize
Timeout <InImg>
[%s] %s (%s): Terminate
Error <InImg>
[%s] %s (%s): Terminate
Timeout <InImg>
[%s] %s (%s): Input
Method Error <InImg>
[%s] %s (%s): Original
Image Input Failure
<InImg>
[%s] %s (%s): Image
Processing Trouble
<InImg>
Causes
Remedies
The DepartDB key was not found in

Directory.ini.
Remarks
Reinstall.
The technicians database was not found Reinstall.

in the path indicated by the connection
character string. The technicians table did
not exist.
The FieldParamedicList key was not
Reinstall.
The ParamedicDB key was not found in
Directory.ini.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
The ExposureListErase key was not

The Config key was not found in
Directory.ini.
Reinstall.
The image database was damaged.
Reinstall.
Check whether the SQL service manager
deleted).
Reinstall.
The character string database was

damaged.
The network setup database was damaged. Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Appx1MT-21
Event
Event Source
13089 FFIipInput
13090 FFIdIndividualSelect
13094 FFIipInput
13096 FFIipInput
13098 FF32LIB
13098 FFIipInput
13098 FFNetDB
13099 FFIipInput
13099 FF32LIB
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
[%s] %s (%s): Menu Read
Error <IdExposureList>
%1 (%2) : Invalid Depart
Code%n
Code [%3]
%1 (%2) : Invalid
Paramedic Code%n
Code [%3]
%1 (%2) : Invalid
Depart/Paramedic Code%n
Code [%3]
%1 (%2) : Invalid Depart
Name (SBCS)%n
Name (SBCS) [%3]
%1 (%2) : Invalid
Paramedic Name
(SBCS)%n
Name (SBCS) [%3]
%1 (%2) : Invalid
Depart/Paramedic
Name (SBCS)%n
Name (SBCS) [%3]
[%s] %s (%s): Message
Send Error <IpcInfCom>
[%s] %s (%s): Request
Command Not Executed
<RU>
FF32lib A WIN32 system
library error occurred.
[%1]%n%2
[%s] %s (%s): Reconnect
Error <RU>
%1 (%2) : %n
[%3]%n
%4%n
%5
FFNetDB A WIN32 system
library error occurred.
[%1]%n%2
[%s] %s (%s): Disconnect
Error <RU>
FF32lib An unknown error
occurred. [%1]%n%2
Causes
Remedies
The image database/information file was

damaged.
Directory.ini was damaged.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Repair Directory.ini.
The database was damaged.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Repair the database.
Restart.
Remarks
Reinstall.
It is conceivable that there was a problem Check the RU status.

on the RU side. (Although a command was
requested, it was not executed.)
An error occurred when calling up the
Restart.
WIN32 API.
The line was abnormal.
Check the line.
A general-use message for the input of

patient information (serves as an error
message and also as information).
If it is referring to an error, follow the

custom message box that opens.
An error occurred when calling up the

WIN32 API.
Restart.
Check the line.
An exception error occurred.
Restart.
Appx1MT-22
Event
Event Source
13099 FFNetDB
Description
13100 FFIipInput
FFNetDB An unknown error

occurred. [%1]%n%2
Display Group
Acquisition[Initialize]
13101 FFIipInput

Display Group Acquisition
13101 IdMassOrder
[%s] %s (%s) : Failed in

Display Group Acquisition
13103 FFIipInput

Display Menu
Acquisition[Initialize]
Display Menu
Acquisition[Record]
[%s] %s (%s) : Failed in
Display Menu
Acquisition[Record]
Exposure Menu Acquisition
[%s] %s (%s): Next Set
Number Data Get Error
Number Data Set Error
[%s] %s (%s): System ID
Data Get Error
[%s] %s (%s): Auto
Distribution Data Get Error
[%s] %s (%s): Enable
Selector Data Get Error
[%s] %s (%s): Auto Menu
Select Data Get Error
Number Min Data Get Error
Number Max Data Get
Error
Getting ID-Online Port#
frmMassOrder
frmMassOrderConfig
13104 FFIipInput
13104 IdMassOrder
frmMassOrder
frmMassOrderConfig
13108 FFIipInput
13109 FFIipInput
13110 FFIipInput
13111 FFIipInput
13112 FFIipInput
13113 FFIipInput
13114 FFIipInput
13115 FFIipInput
13116 FFIipInput
13120 FFIipInput
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Causes
Remedies
Restart.

Directory.ini.
Reinstall.
Remarks
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
The menu database was damaged.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.

The database was not found or the
associated key did not exist.
Reinstall.
Appx1MT-23
Event
Event Source
13121 FFIipInput
13122 FFIipInput
13123 FFIipInput
13124 FFIipInput
13125 FFIipInput
13126 FFIipInput
13128 FFIipInput
13131 FFIipInput
13132 FFIipInput
13134 FFIipInput
13135 FFIipInput
13136 FFIipInput
13137 FFIipInput
13138 FFIipInput
13157 FFIipInput
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
[%s] %s (%s): Failed in IDOnline Device Name
[%s] %s (%s): RU Status
DB Connection String Get
Error
selectable direction
Causes
The database was not found or the
associated key did not exist.
Remedies
Remarks
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
The SelectableDirection key was not

Reinstall.
found in the system setup database or its
value was incorrect.
The SelectableFormat key was not found Reinstall.
Selectable Image Format
in the system setup database or its value
Acquisition
was incorrect.
[%s] %s (%s): FilmMarkDB The FilmMarkDB key was not found in
Reinstall.
Directory.ini.
Error
[%s] %s (%s): FilmMarkDB The connection character string was not
Reinstall.
Connect Error
properly registered for the FilmMarkDB
The LimitFilmCopy key was not found in Reinstall.
Limit Film Copy Acquisition the system setup database or its value was
incorrect.
The SelectableEdrMode key was not
Reinstall.
Selectable EDR Mode
Acquisition
The SelectableFunction key was not
Reinstall.
Selectable Function
Acquisition
The SelectableFilingMode key was not
Reinstall.
Selectable EDR Mode
Acquisition
[%s] %s (%s): NetDB Data The connection character string for the
Reinstall.
Get Error
network setup database was not
successfully acquired or the network setup
database did not exist.
The EnableDistributionCode key was not Reinstall.
Enable DistributionCode
Acquisition
The EnableFileString key was not found Reinstall.
Enable FileString
in the system setup database or its value
Acquisition
was incorrect.
The EnableFunction key was not found in Reinstall.
Enable Function Acquisition the system setup database or its value was
incorrect.
[%s] %s (%s): Finish Mode The system setup database was damaged. Reinstall.
Get Error
Appx1MT-24
Event
Event Source
13158 FFIipInput
13159 FFIipInput
13160 FFIipInput
13161 FFIipInput
13162 FFIipInput
13165 FFIipInput
13166 FFIipInput
13167 FFIipInput
13168 FFIipInput
13177 FFIipInput
13178 FFIipInput
13179 FFIipInput
13180 FFIipInput
13181 FFIipInput
13182 FFIipInput
13183 FFIipInput
13184 FFIipInput
13185 FFIipInput
13186 FFIipInput
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
[%s] %s (%s): RU Error DB
Error
[%s] %s (%s): RU Error DB
Table Name Get Error
[%s] %s (%s): Call Error
[RU Error CUSTOM
MESSAGE BOX]
Display Thumbnail Image
[%s] %s (%s): Ip Size Unit
(Inch/Metric) Get Error
[%s] %s (%s): Image Size
Code Specify Error
[%s] %s (%s): Pantomo
Setting Get Error
[%s] %s (%s): RU Error
Info Get Error
[%s] %s (%s): RU Status
Info Get Error
[%s] %s (%s): Default
Menu Code Get Error
[%s] %s (%s): Next Multi
Frame Pair Code Data Get
Error
[%s] %s (%s): Next Multi
Frame Pair Code Data Set
Error
[%s] %s (%s): Series
Generation Type Data Get
Error
[%s] %s (%s): Multi Frame
UID Information Get Error
Getting XCON Port#
XCON Device Name
[%s] %s (%s): MCR Type
Get Error
[%s] %s (%s): MCR
Variation Get Error
[%s] %s (%s): Custom
Card Use Get Error
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
The RuErrorDataDB key was not found in Reinstall.

Directory.ini.
The MsgTableName key was not found in
The specified ID was not registered in
RuErrorDataDB or the custom message
box was not successfully called.
The program was faulty or the image file
was damaged.
The system setup database was damaged.
Reinstall.
RU-dependent symptom.
Check the RU status.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
The system setup database was damaged. Repair the system setup database.
The RU error database was damaged.
Reinstall the RU software.
The RU status information database was Reinstall the RU software.

damaged.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.

The database did not exist or the
Reinstall.
associated key was not found.
The database did not exist or the
Reinstall.
associated key was not found.
Appx1MT-25
Event
Event Source
13187 FFIipInput
13188 FFIipInput
13189 FFIipInput
13190 FFIipInput
Description
[%s] %s (%s): Font Name
Get Error
[%s] %s (%s): Font Size
Get Error
[%s] %s (%s): Multibyte
Flag Get Error
Caption Acquisition[Id#]
13191 FFIipInput

Caption Acquisition[Exam#]
13192 FFIipInput

Caption Acquisition[SBCS
Patient Name]
Caption Acquisition[DBCS
Patient Name]
Caption Acquisition[Sex]
13193 FFIipInput
13194 FFIipInput
13195 FFIipInput

Caption Acquisition[Sex M]
13196 FFIipInput

Caption Acquisition[Sex F]
13197 FFIipInput

Caption Acquisition[Sex O]
13198 FFIipInput

Caption Acquisition[Date Of
Birth]
Limitation No
Acquisition[Id#]
Limitation No
Acquisition[Exam#]
Caption Acquisition[Depart]
13199 FFIipInput
13200 FFIipInput
13201 FFIipInput
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Causes
Remedies

registry.
registry.
The IdLength key was not found in the
The ExaminationNoLength key was not
Remarks

Displayed characters can be corrupted.
Reinstall the IIP as necessary.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.

Reinstall.
Appx1MT-26
Event
Event Source
13202 FFIipInput
13203 FFIipInput
13204 FFIipInput
13205 FFIipInput
13206 FFIipInput
13207 FFIipInput
13208 FFIipInput
13209 FFIipInput
13210 FFIipInput
13211 FFIipInput
13212 FFIipInput
13213 FFIipInput
13214 FFIipInput
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Caption
Acquisition[Paramedic]
[%s] %s (%s): Image
Folder Path Get Error
[%s] %s (%s):
[Clear]Button Image Get
Error
Causes
Remedies

Directory.ini.
Id_Clear_U.bmp/Id_Clear_D.bmp/
Id_Clear_ X.bmp was not found in the
was illegal.
[%s] %s (%s):
Id_Ok_U.bmp/Id_Ok_D.bmp/Id_Ok_X.
[Ok]Button Image Get Error bmp was not found in the path to an
image folder or the image format was
illegal.
[%s] %s (%s):
Id_Cancel_U.bmp/Id_Cancel_D.bmp/
[Cancel]Button Image Get Id_Cancel_X.bmp was not found in the
Error
was illegal.
[%s] %s (%s):
Id_Plus_U.bmp/Id_Plus_D.bmp/Id_Plus_
[Plus]Button Image Get
X.bmp was not found in the path to an
Error
illegal.
[%s] %s (%s):
Id_Minus_U.bmp/Id_Minus_D.bmp/
[Minus]Button Image Get
Id_Minus_ X.bmp was not found in the
Error
was illegal.
[%s] %s (%s):
Id_NextPage_U.bmp/Id_NextPage_
[Next Page]Button Image
D.bmp/Id _NextPage_X.bmp was not
Get Error
[%s] %s (%s):
Id_PrevPage_U.bmp/Id_PrevPage_
[Previous Page]Button
D.bmp/Id _PrevPage_X.bmp was not
Image Get Error
[%s] %s (%s): RU Watch
Connection Disconnected
[%s] %s (%s): No ACK
Returned in RU Watch
Connection
[%s] %s (%s): RU Control The line was abnormal.
[%s] %s (%s): No ACK
Returned in RU Control
Connection
Remarks
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
The program was faulty.
Appx1MT-27
Event
Event Source
13217 FFIipInput
13218 FFIipInput
13219 FFIipInput
13220 FFIipInput
13221 FFIipInput
13222 FFIipInput
13223 FFIipInput
13224 FFIipInput
13225 FFIipInput
13226 FFIipInput
13227 FFIipInput
13228 FFIipInput
13229 FFIipInput
13230 FFIipInput
13231 FFIipInput
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Caption
Acquisition[Complete]
Caption Acquisition[QA
Unfinished]
Caption
Acquisition[Interrupt]
Caption Acquisition[Cancel]
Causes
Remedies

Caption Acquisition[New
Study]
Caption
Acquisition[Registered]
Caption Acquisition[QA
Waiting]
Caption Acquisition[Output Directory.ini or the ID 30503 was not
Waiting]
Caption
Acquisition[Outputted]
Caption Acquisition[All]
Caption Acquisition[Today] Directory.ini or the ID 30506 was not
Image Acquisition[System] Directory.ini or the ID 30507 was not
Caption
Acquisition[StudyReseve] registered in the character string database.
Caption
Acquisition[StudyStart]
The bmp file path/bmp file was abnormal.
Image Acquisition[Priority]
Remarks
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Appx1MT-28
Event
Event Source
13232 FFIipInput
13233 FFIipInput
13234 FFIipInput
13235 FFIipInput
13236 FFIipInput
13237 FFIipInput
13238 FFIipInput
13239 FFIipInput
13240 FFIipInput
13241 FFIipInput
13242 FFIipInput
13243 FFIipInput
13244 FFIipInput
13245 FFIipInput
13246 FFIipInput
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Image Acquisition[End]
Image Acquisition[Change]
[%s] %s (%s):
[New]Button Image Get
Error
[%s] %s (%s):
[Repeat]Button Image Get
Error
[%s] %s (%s):
[Again]Button Image Get
Error
[%s] %s (%s):
[Add]Button Image Get
Error
[%s] %s (%s):
[Delete]Button Image Get
Error
[%s] %s (%s):
[Prev]Button Image Get
Error
[%s] %s (%s):
[Next]Button Image Get
Error
[%s] %s (%s):
[Monitor Mode]Button
Image Get Error
[%s] %s (%s):
[QA]Button Image Get Error
[%s] %s (%s):
[Change]Button Image Get
Error
[%s] %s (%s):
[AP/PA]Button Image Get
Error
[%s] %s (%s):
[EDR Mode]Button Image
Get Error
[%s] %s (%s):
[Film Format]Button Image
Get Error
Causes
Remedies
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Remarks
Appx1MT-29
Event
Event Source
13247 FFIipInput
13248 FFIipInput
13249 FFIipInput
13250 FFIipInput
13251 FFIipInput
13252 FFIipInput
13253 FFIipInput
13254 FFIipInput
13255 FFIipInput
13256 FFIipInput
13257 FFIipInput
13258 FFIipInput
13259 FFIipInput
13260 FFIipInput
13261 FFIipInput
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
[%s] %s (%s):
[Detail]Button Image Get
Error
[%s] %s (%s):
[New]Button ToolTipText
Get Error
[%s] %s (%s):
[Repeat]Button ToolTipText
Get Error
[%s] %s (%s):
[Again]Button ToolTipText
Get Error
[%s] %s (%s):
[Add]Button ToolTipText
Get Error
[%s] %s (%s):
[Delete]Button ToolTipText
Get Error
[%s] %s (%s):
[Prev]Button ToolTipText
Get Error
[%s] %s (%s):
[Next]Button ToolTipText
Get Error
[%s] %s (%s):
[Monitor Mode]Button
ToolTipText Get Error
[%s] %s (%s):
[QA]Button ToolTipText Get
Error
[%s] %s (%s):
[Change]Button ToolTipText
Get Error
[%s] %s (%s):
[AP/PA]Button ToolTipText
Get Error
[%s] %s (%s):
[EDR Mode]Button
[%s] %s (%s):
[Film Format]Button
[%s] %s (%s):
[Detail]Button ToolTipText
Get Error
Causes
Remedies
Reinstall.

damaged.
Reinstall.

damaged.
Reinstall.

damaged.
Reinstall.

damaged.
Reinstall.

damaged.
Reinstall.

damaged.
Reinstall.

damaged.
Reinstall.

damaged.
Reinstall.

damaged.
Reinstall.

damaged.
Reinstall.

damaged.
Reinstall.

damaged.
Reinstall.

damaged.
Reinstall.

damaged.
Reinstall.
Remarks
Appx1MT-30
Event
Event Source
13262 FFIipInput
13263 FFIipInput
13264 FFIipInput
13265 FFIipInput
13266 FFIipInput
13267 FFIipInput
13268 FFIipInput
13269 FFIipInput
13270 FFIipInput
13271 FFIipInput
13272 FFIipInput
13273 FFIipInput
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Image Acquisition[New]
Image Acquisition[Normal]
Causes
Remedies
Id_NormalImage_U.bmp/
Id_NormalImage_ D.bmp/
Id_NormalImage_X.bmp was not found in
format was illegal.
Id_LR_Reverse_U.bmp/Id_LR_Reverse_
Image Acquisition[LR]
D.bmp/Id_LR_Reverse_X.bmp was not
Id_TB_Reverse_U.bmp/Id_TB_Reverse_
Image Acquisition[TB]
D.bmp/Id_TB_Reverse_X.bmp was not
Id_Rotation180_U.bmp/
Image Acquisition[TB LR] Id_Rotation180_D.bmp/
Id_Rotation180_X.bmp was not found in
format was illegal.
Id_Rotation90_U.bmp/Id_Rotation90_D.
Image Acquisition[Rotation] bmp/ Id_Rotation90_X.bmp was not
Id_Single_U.bmp/Id_Single_D.bmp/Id_
Image Acquisition[Single]
Single_X.bmp was not found in the path
to an image folder or the image format was
illegal.
Id_Twin_U.bmp/Id_Twin_D.bmp/
Image Acquisition[Twin]
Id_Twin_ X.bmp was not found in the
was illegal.
[%s] %s (%s): An Illegal
The film mark database was damaged.
Film Mark Character Was
Detected
Caption Acquisition[FIX]
Caption Acquisition[Skfix] Directory.ini or the ID 33503 was not
Caption Acquisition[SEMI- Directory.ini or the ID 33504 was not
X]
Remarks
Reinstall.


Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Appx1MT-31
Event
Event Source
13274 FFIipInput
13275 FFIipInput
13276 FFIipInput
13277 FFIipInput
13278 FFIipInput
13279 FFIipInput
13280 FFIipInput
13281 FFIipInput
13282 FFIipInput
13283 FFIipInput
13284 FFIipInput
13285 FFIipInput
13286 FFIipInput
13287 FFIipInput
13288 FFIipInput
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Caption Acquisition
[DensityAverage]
[%s] %s (%s):
[Utility]Button Image Get
Error
Caption Acquisition[Alarm
Stop]
Caption Acquisition[Exit]
Caption Acquisition[User
Utility]
Caption Acquisition[List
Setting]
Caption
Acquisition[Version]
Caption
Acquisition[CANCEL]
[%s] %s (%s):
[Clear]Button Image Get
Error
[%s] %s (%s):
[Clear]Button ToolTipText
Get Error
Caption
Acquisition[CANCEL]
Caption Acquisition[DUST]
Causes
Remedies

Id_Utility_U.bmp/Id_Utility_D.bmp/
Id_Utility_ X.bmp was not found in the
was illegal.
damaged.
damaged.
Reinstall.
be displayed nor
mally.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.

damaged.
Reinstall.

damaged.
Reinstall.

damaged.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.

damaged.
Reinstall.

damaged.
damaged.
Reinstall.
[%s] %s (%s): Tooltip Text

Get Error
Caption
Acquisition[TitleBar]
Caption Acquisition[Option] damaged.
Remarks
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Appx1MT-32
Event
Event Source
13289 FFIipInput
13290 FFIipInput
13291 FFIipInput
13292 FFIipInput
13293 FFIipInput
13294 FFIipInput
13295 FFIipInput
13296 FFIipInput
13297 FFIipInput
13298 FFIipInput
13299 FFIipInput
13300 FFIipInput
13301 FFIipInput
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
[%s] %s (%s): Version Info
Get Error
[%s] %s (%s): Option List
Get Error
[%s] %s (%s):
[Cassette Acceptable]
Image Get Error
[%s] %s (%s):
[Cassette Unacceptable]
Image Get Error
[%s] %s (%s):
[Miss]Image Get Error
[%s] %s (%s):
[Image Style]Button Image
Get Error
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Id_RuProcess_I.bmp was not found in the

was illegal.
Id_RuProcessN_I.bmp was not found in
format was illegal.

Id_ApPa_U.bmp/Id_ApPa_D.bmp/
Id_ ApPa_ X.bmp was not found in the
was illegal.
[%s] %s (%s):
Id_Edr_U.bmp/Id_Edr_D.bmp/
[EDR]Button Image Get
Id_Edr_ X.bmp was not found in the path
Error
to an image folder or the image format was
illegal.
[%s] %s (%s):
Id_Edr_U.bmp/Id_Edr_D.bmp/Id_Edr_X.
[Function]Button Image Get bmp was not found in the path to an
Error
illegal.
[%s] %s (%s):
Id_FilmCount_U.bmp/Id_FilmCount_
[Film Count]Button Image D.bmp/Id_FilmCount_X.bmp was not
Get Error
[%s] %s (%s):
Id_IpSize_U.bmp/Id_IpSize_D.bmp/
[Ip Size]Button Image Get Id_ IpSize_X.bmp was not found in the
Error
was illegal.
[%s] %s (%s):
Id_FilmFormat_U.bmp/Id_FilmFormat_
[Image Format]Button
D.bmp/Id_FilmFormat_X.bmp was not
Image Get Error
[%s] %s (%s):
Id_FilingMode_U.bmp/Id_FilingMode_
[Filing]Button Image Get
D.bmp/Id_FilingMode_X.bmp was not
Error
[%s] %s (%s):
Id_FilmMark_U.bmp/Id_FilmMark_D.bmp
[Film Mark]Button Image
/Id_ FilmMark_X.bmp was not found in
Get Error
format was illegal.


Reinstall.

Appx1MT-33
Event
Event Source
Description
13302 FFIipInput
[%s] %s (%s):
[Distribution Code]Button
Image Get Error
13303 FFIipInput
[%s] %s (%s):
[CSSS]Button Image Get
Error
13304 FFIipInput
[%s] %s (%s): Image Data

Patient Information
%1 (%2) : Database Data
Get Error%n
Database [%3]%n
Table [%4]%n
Key [%5]
Get Error%n
Database [%3]%n
Table [%4]%n
Key [%5]
IdMcrControl
(threadMcrRead) :
Database Data Get Error
Get Error%n
Database [%3]%n
Table [%4]%n
Key [%5]
Get Error%n
Database [%3]%n
Table [%4]%n
Key [%5]
Get Error%n
Database [%3]%n
Table [%4]%n
Key [%5]
Get Error%n
Database [%3]%n
Table [%4]%n
Key [%5]
13309 FFIipInput
13345 FFIdFilmMark
13345 FFIipInput
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
Id_DistributionCode_U.bmp/
Id_DistributionCode_D.bmp/
Id_DistributionCode_ X.bmp was not
Id_CsCs_U.bmp/Id_CsCs_D.bmp/
Id_CsCs_ X.bmp was not found in the
was illegal.


Check the line.
The patient information contained an illegal Ensure that the patient information does
character string.
not contain any illegal character string.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Appx1MT-34
Event
Event Source
13345 IdMassOrder
frmMassOrder
frmMassOrderConfig
13346 FFIipInput
13346 IdMassOrder
frmMassOrder
frmMassOrderConfig
13347 FFIipInput
13347 IdMassOrder
frmMassOrder
frmMassOrderConfig
13348 FFIdFilmMark
13348 FFIipInput
13348 IdMassOrder
frmMassOrder
frmMassOrderConfig
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Get Error%n
Database [%3]%n
Table [%4]%n
Key [%5]
%1 (%2) : Patient
Information Check Error%n
Item [%3]%n
Error [%4]
%1 (%2) : Patient
Information Check Error%n
Item [%3]%n
Error [%4]
%1 (%2) : Caption Get
Error%n
CaptionId [%3]
%1 (%2) : Caption Get
Error%n
CaptionId [%3]
%1 (%2) : Registry Data
Get Error%n
Value [%3]
Get Error%n
Value [%3]
Get Error%n
Value [%3]
Get Error%n
Value [%3]
Get Error%n
Value [%3]
Get Error%n
Value [%3]
Get Error%n
%1 (%2) : Registry
Data Get Error%n
Value [%3]
%1 (%2) : INI File Data Get
Error%n
Key [%3]
Causes
Remedies
Reinstall.

information.

information.

damaged.
Reinstall.

damaged.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Repair the registry.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Remarks
Appx1MT-35
Event
Event Source
13349 FFIdFilmMark
13349 FFIipInput
13349 IdMassOrder
frmMassOrder
frmMassOrderConfig
13350 FFIdFilmMark
13350 FFIipInput
13350 IdMassOrder
frmMassOrder
frmMassOrderConfig
13352 FFIipInput
13353 FFIipInput
13362 FFIipInput
13370 FFIipInput
13371 FFIipInput
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Error%n
Key [%3]
Error%n
Key [%3]
Error%n
Key [%3]
Error%n
Key [%3]
Error%n
Key [%3]
Error%n
Key [%3]
%1 (%2) : INI File
Data Get Error%n
Key [%3]
Get Error%n
BMP File [%3]
Get Error%n
BMP File [%3]
Get Error%n
BMP File [%3]
%1 (%2) : Bitmap
Image Get Error%n
BMP File [%3]
%1 (%2) : Dicom MWM &
PPS Option Not Install
%1 (%2) : Dicom MWM
Option Not Install
%1 (%2) : Not Entry Host
Name
%1 (%2) : PPS Request
Failure [IN PROGRESS]
Failure [COMPLETED]
Causes
Remedies
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Repair Directory.ini.
Reinstall.
The bmp file path or bmp file was

abnormal.
Reinstall.

abnormal.
Reinstall.

abnormal.
Reinstall.

abnormal.
Reinstall.
Remarks
The DICOM MWM & PPS option was not Install the DICOM MWM & PPS option.
installed.
The DICOM MWM option was not installed. Install the DICOM MWM option.
The host name for the local enclosure was
not successfully acquired.
The equipment connection was faulty or
the remote equipment power was OFF.
With the service utility, register the host

information about the PPS local enclosure.
Retry.
Retry.
Appx1MT-36
Event
Event Source
13372 FFIipInput
13382 FFIipInput
13386 FFIipInput
13389 FFIdFilmMark
13389 FFIipInput
13392 FFIipInput
13420 FFIipInput
13421 FFIipInput
13423 FFIipInput
13424 FFIipInput
13425 FFIipInput
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Failure [DISCONTINUED]
%1 (%2) : Study List
Refresh Exception%nError
[%3]
%1 (%2) : Failed in data
reception%n[Online Time
Out]
%1 (%2) : Database
Connection Error%n
Database [%3]%n
%1 (%2) : Database
Connection Error%n
Database [%3]%n
%1 (%2) : Database
Connection Error%n
Database [%3]%n
%1 (%2) : Database
Connection Error%n
Database [%3]%n
%1 (%2) : Database
Connection Error%n
Database [%3]%
%1 (%2) : Database
Connection Error%n
Database [%3]%n
%1 (%2) : BCR Control
Initialize Error
%1 (%2) : Failed in Menu
Clear.%nInternal Error in
Builtin [%3]
%1 (%2) : Menu Clear
Command Time out [%3]
Causes
Remedies

Remarks
Retry.
Retry.
The serial cable was broken or the

connected equipment did not respond.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
Reinstall.
The barcode reader was not connected.
Connect the barcode reader.
A problem occurred in the 550X unit when Check the 550X unit.
a cleared menu was reported.
A timeout occurred because the 550X unit

did not respond to a report about a cleared
menu.
%1 (%2) : Failed in Ip
A problem occurred in the 550X unit during
Shelter.%nFatal Error [%3] the IP evacuation sequence.
Shelter.%nIntervention
the IP evacuation sequence.
Error in Builtin [%3]
Shelter.%nInternal Error in the IP evacuation sequence.
Builtin [%3]
Check the 550X unit (power supply, cable,

etc.).
Check the 550X unit.
Check the 550X unit. Solve the problem
with a UTL or the like.
Appx1MT-37
Event
Event Source
Description
13426 FFIipInput
%1 (%2) : Ip Shelter
13428 FFIipInput

Fixed.%nConnection Error
to Builtin [%3]
Fixed.%nInternal Error in
Builtin [%3]
%1 (%2) : Menu Fixed
13429 FFIipInput
13430 FFIipInput
13432 FFIipInput
13435 FFIipInput
13436 FFIipInput
13438 FFIipInput
13439 FFIipInput
13440 FFIipInput
13441 FFIipInput
13442 FFIipInput
13443 FFIipInput
13444 FFIipInput
13447 FFIipInput
13448 FFIipInput
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Size%nConnection Error to
Builtin [%3]
Size.%nInternal Error in
Builtin [%3]
%1 (%2) : Ip Size
Causes
Remedies
A timeout occurred because the 550X unit Check the 550X unit (power supply, cable,
did not respond to an IP evacuation
etc.).
request.
A line abnormality was encountered.
Check the line.
a finalized menu was reported.
A timeout occurred because the 550X unit Check the 550X unit (power supply, cable,
did not respond to a report about a
etc.).
finalized menu.
A line abnormality was encountered.
Check the line.
a size notification request was issued.

did not respond to a size notification
request.
Set.%nFatal Error [%3]
the IP setup sequence.
Set.%nIntervention Error in the IP setup sequence.
Builtin [%3]
Set.%nInternal Error in
the IP setup sequence.
Builtin [%3]
%1 (%2) : Ip Set Command A timeout occurred because the 550X unit
Time out [%3]
did not respond to an IP setup request.
%1 (%2) : Ip Delete
did not issue an IP deletion request.
%1 (%2) : Cannot Change An attempt was made to change the
Patient Info
patient information during an image input
EditMode [%3]
sequence (patient information change
button: inactive).
%1 (%2) : Cannot End
An attempt was made to terminate a study
Examination
during an image input sequence (study
ExamEndMode [%3]
end button: inactive).
%1 : IipInput.exe [Starts]
IipInput.exe is started (information).
%1 : IipInput.exe [Normal
Termination]
Remarks

etc.).
Check the 550X unit. Solve the problem
with a UTL or the like.
etc.).
etc.).
Change the information after completion of
image input.
Terminate the study after completion of
image input.
IipInput.exe is terminated (information).
Appx1MT-38
Event
Event Source
13449 FFIipInput
13451 FFIipInput
13452 FFIipInput
13457 FFIipInput
13458 FFIipInput
13459 FFIipInput
13462 FFIipInput
13470 FFIipInput
13471 FFIipInput
13472 FFIipInput
13473 FFIipInput
13474 FFIipInput
13475 FFIipInput
13477 FFIipInput
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
%1 : IipInput.exe [Forced
Termination]
%1 (%2) : Failed in Get Ip
Information
Response.%nConnection
Error to Builtin [%3]
%1 (%2) : Get Ip
Information Response Time
out [%3]
%1 (%2) : Image
Processing Information
<InImg>
%1 (%2) : Failed in
Connection Between
Reader and
Console.%nIIP[%3]%nRU
[-%4]
%1 (%2) : Wait Timeout for
X-Cont Shot Result
%1 (%2) : Ordering
Exposure Menu Not Entry
[%3]
%1 (%2) : Exposure Menu
Register Error.
%1 (%2) : All Exposure
Menu Register Error.
%1 (%2) : Selected Menu
is Done.
XCON Result Information is
annulled. [%3]
%1 (%2) : Menu is not
Selected.
XCON Result Information is
annulled. [%3]
%1 (%2) : Exceeded the
Limitation Value of XCON
Exposure Data. [%3 = %4]
%1 (%2) : Failed in
Ordering Data.[RIS]
%1 (%2) : Exposure Menu
Register Error.
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
IipInput.exe is terminated (information).

Line error.

etc.).
A timeout occurred when an attempt was

made to respond to an ID information
request from the 550X unit.
This error occurs if the image processing
parameter file does not exist.

etc.).
Setup error.
Change IIP's SysConfig setup or RU's

connection style.
The XCON shot result reception timeout

value for built-in type exposures was found
improper.
The exposure menu received as the
ordering information was not registered.
Review the XCON shot result reception

timeout value for built-in type exposures.

The exposure process for the selected
exposure menu was already performed.
The result data received from the XCON
will be discarded.
No exposure menu was selected. The
result data received from the XCON will be
discarded.
Register the exposure menu with the user

utility.
utility.
Select a menu for which an exposure
process has not been performed.

utility.
Select a menu for which an exposure

process has not been performed.
The XCON parameter was improperly set. Reregister the XCON parameter with the
user utility.
The patient exposure order information
sent from the RIS was abnormal.
The exposure menu specified by the
received ordering information was not
registered.

utility.
Appx1MT-39
Event
Event Source
Description
13478 FFIipInput
%1 (%2) : All Exposure

Menu Register Error.
13479 FFIipInput
%1 (%2) : Failed in
Examination End
Command.[Ris]
%1 (%2) : Failed in
Communication with RIS.
[%3]%n[%4]
%1 (%2) : Menu is not
Selected.
Failed in Getting ID
Information
%1 (%2) : Failed in the
System Start.
[Error: OpDcmStandardDx
or MenuData.mdb]
%1 (%2) : Patient Info Set
Error%n
Error [%3]%n
RetCode [%4]
%1 (%2) : UserName
Check Error%n
Item [%3]%n
Error [%4]
User Login [UserName:%1]
13480 FFIipInput
13483 FFIipInput
13484 FFIipInput
13489 FFIipInput
13490 FFIipInput
13491 FFIipInput
13492 FFIipInput
13493 FFIipInput
13494 FFIipInput
13495 FFIipInput
13496 FFIipInput
13497 FFIipInput
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Causes
Remedies
The exposure menu specified by the

received ordering information was not
registered.
The order exposure study termination
signal was received from the RIS although
an order exposure was not received.
The problem is attributable to a
disconnected line or invalid parameter.

utility.
An ID acquisition request was received

from built-in type equipment although no
exposure menu was selected.
Make a menu selection and then press the

OK button on the built-in type Console.
Inappropriate installation.
Reinstall the system to secure matching

between DX option and menu database.
Remarks
Check the RIS settings.

Check the equipment and cables.
Patient information to be registered

Enter correct patient information or repair
included illegal information items or patient patient information database.
information database was damaged.
Illegal information was input as the
username.
Call upon the user to input a correct

username.
The user logged in the system.
User Logout
The user logged off the system.
[UserName:%1
%1 (%2) : MCR-Data Send Failed in transferring magnetic card
Error.[RIS]
information to the FRIS.
Repeat the same operation. If the symptom

remains uncorrected, check the barcode
information.
%1 (%2) : BCR-Data Send Failed in transferring barcode information Repeat the same operation. If the symptom
Error.[RIS]
to the FRIS.
information.
[%1] Failed in setting MCR Failed in setting magnetic card information. Repeat the same operation. If the symptom
data [%2]
remains uncorrected, check the magnetic
card information.
[%1] Failed in setting BCR Failed in setting barcode information.
Repeat the same operation. If the symptom
data [%2]
information.
%1 (%2) : Failed in deleting Program error.
multibyte data
Appx1MT-40
Event
Event Source
13901 IIPInputEz
13902 IIPInputEz
13903 IIPInputEz
13903 IIPInputEz
13904 IIPInputEz
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
%1 : Registry Value
Get/Set Error%n
[Key] %2%n
[Exp] %3%n
%4%n
%5
Error%n
[DB] %2%n
[Exp] %3%n
%4%n
%5
%1 : Database Data
Get/Set Error%n
[DB] %2%n
[Table] %3%n
[Field] %4%n
[Exp] %5
Get/Set Error%n
[Tag] %2%n
[Exp] %3%n
%4%n
%5
%1 : Other Error%n
[Procedure] %2%n
[ErrorCode] %3%n
[Exp] %4%n
%5
%1 (%2) : [%3]
SendToCommPort, COMM
Port Send Error
m_hQUEMutex, Create
Mutex Error
CommOpen, COMM Port
Open Error
CommOpen, COMM Port
Param Set Error
tControlMain,
_beginthreadex Create
Error
End_ControlProc, COMM
Port Close Error
Causes
Remedies

information was abnormal.
Remarks

database.
The acquisition/setup key or database was Check the database table/field name.
abnormal.
The DDO acquisition/setup tag was

abnormal.
Check the DDO tag.
Unknown error.
General information event log.

The data transmission port is defective.
Check connection and settings of the port.
An exclusive processing error occurred.
Restart.
A failure resulted in an attempt to establish Check connection and settings of the port.
connection to the data transmission port.
Settings of the data transmission port are Check settings for connection to the port.
defective.
A failure occurred in an attempt to start the Restart.
main thread.
A failure occurred in an attempt to close
the port.
No particular remedial measures need to

be taken as the CR Console is in process
of shutdown.
Appx1MT-41
Event
Event Source
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
MakeSendMessage,
Message Code Convert
Error
lFocus,
DicomDataFormatError
lTubeVoltage,
lExposureTime,
lmAs,
csGrid,
lGlandulardose,
csFilterMaterial,
BodyPartThickness,
csActualStereoAngle,
csTubeHeadAngle,
lmAsActualValue,
SetAllMammoXcon,
DicomDataCreateError
SaveResExpParamData,
DicomFile Save Error
SaveResExpParamData,
Not Use Dicom Directory
Causes
Remedies
The received data is defective.
Remarks
Check the connected cable and device.
The Focus data received is defective.
Check the equipment targeted for

connection or restart it.
The Tube Voltage data received is
defective.
The Exposure Time data received is
defective.
The mAs data received is defective.
The Grid data received is defective.
The Glandular Dose data received is
defective.
The Filter Material data received is
defective.
The Body Part Thickness data received Check the equipment targeted for
is defective.
The Actual Stereo Angle data received is Check the equipment targeted for
defective.
The Tube Head Angle data received is
defective.
The Actual Value data received is
defective.
An attempt to generate a DICOM file
Restart the CR Console.
resulted in a failure.
An attempt to store a DICOM file resulted Restart.
in a failure.
An attempt to obtain information on the
Restart.
folder targeted for storing a DICOM file
tComRecvMain, Sub Tread A attempt to create a data reception thread Restart.
Create Error
MainTH_MainPrc,
An attempt to obtain an area resulted in a Restart.
Received from Port [Alloc failure.
Error]
MainTH_MainPrc,
Received Buffer Claer
RespOperation, QUE Break The received data is defective.
by Interrupt Data from
XCON
Appx1MT-42
Event
Event Source
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
RespOperation, response
data Format error
RespOperation, response
data Checksum error
RespOperation, Alloc Error
for Dicom Data
RespOperation, Alloc Error
for XConError
RespOperation, XConError
data Iregular Format
ACKOperation, No Target
[ACK] Receive
SendToCommPort, Send
Error
RetryOperation, Retry Send
Error
RetryOperation, Comm
Send Retry Over
RetryOperation, Response
Timeout
RespOperation,
Compression Force data
Format error
RespOperation,
Compression Force data
Checksum error
RespOperation, Delete
Dicom File Error
RetryOperation, Delete
Dicom File Error
RespOperation, Send
AskParam Error
FFGetPASSecurityFuncIDList
Error nCount=%1
ConfigData Is Illegal
[DAPDataBit]
DAPDataBit Nothing
[DAPStopBit]
DAPStopBit Nothing
Causes
Remedies

A checksum error was found in the
received data.
An attempt to obtain an area resulted in a
failure.
An attempt to obtain an area resulted in a
failure.
Illegal ACK data was received.
Remarks

Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Nothing particular.
Data transmission resulted in a failure.

Data retransmission processing resulted in Check the equipment targeted for
a failure.
An attempt to retransmit data resulted in a Check the equipment targeted for
failure.
A timeout error occurred while in wait of
data reception.
The compression force data was abnormal. Nothing particular.
A compression force data checksum error
occurred.
Nothing particular.
Deletion of a stored DicomFile resulted in

a failure.
Deletion of a stored DicomFile resulted in
a failure.
AskParam command transmission failed.
Restart.
Restart.
The PAS security function ID list is empty.

Restart
Illegal IdVacDap configuration settings and

DAPDataBit value.
undetermined DAPDataBit value.
DAPStopBit value.
undetermined DAPStopBit value.
Set the DAPDataBit value to 0:7bit or

1:8bit.
Set the DAPDataBit value to 0:7bit or
1:8bit.
Set the DAPStopBit value to 0:1bit or
1:1.5bit or 2:2bit.
Set the DAPStopBit value to 0:1bit or
1:1.5bit or 2:2bit.
Appx1MT-43
Event
Event Source
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
Description
[DAPParity]
DAPParity Nothing
[DAPBaudrate]
DAPBaudrate Nothing
[DAPWaitTime]
DAPWaitTime Nothing
[DAPTrialCount]
DAPTrialCount Nothing
Causes
Remedies

DAPParity value.
undetermined DAPParity value.
DAPBaudrate value.
undetermined DAPBaudrate value.
DAPWaitTime value.
undetermined DAPWaitTime value.
DAPTrialCount value.
undetermined DAPTrialCount value.
A communication port transmission error.
Set the DAPParity value to 0:none or 1:odd

or 2:even.
Set the DAPParity value to 0:none or 1:odd
or 2:even.
Set the DAPBaudrate value to 0:1200 or
1:2400 or 2:4800.
Set the DAPBaudrate value to 0:1200 or
1:2400 or 2:4800.
Set 1<=DAPWaitTime>=30.
Check ConfigDB.
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
COMM Port Send Error
13998 FFIipInput
Not Found INI Key
13998 FFIipInput
DAPComPort Nothing
13998 FFIipInput
Not Fonud INI Key
13998 FFIipInput
Bad DSN
13998 FFIipInput
ComPortNo Error
13998 FFIipInput
DAPAddress Nothing
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
[DAPAddress]
Not Read MDB Data
13998 FFIipInput
Create Mutex Error
Failure to acquire ConfigDB due to the

reason said at left.
A mutex error occurred.
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
COMM Port Open Error
Failure to open a communication port.
COMM Port Param Set

Error
_beginthreadex Create
Failed
Failure to set up communication port

parameters.
Failure to create a thread.
13998 FFIipInput
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Bad Directory
Remarks
Set 1<=DAPWaitTime>=30.
Set 1<=DAPTrialCount>=255.
Set 1<=DAPTrialCount>=255.
Check status of connected devices.
Check ConfigDB.
Check ConfigDB.
Check ConfigDB.
Check ConfigDB.
Check ConfigDB.
Check ConfigDB.
Check ConfigDB.
Check ConfigDB.
Check to see if the system is up and
running double.
Check the machine load.
Appx1MT-44
Event
13998
13998
13998
13998
Event Source
Description
Causes
Remedies
FFIipInput
COMM Port Close Error
Failure to close a communication port.
FFIipInput
Sub Thead Create Failed
Failure to create a sub-thread.
Check the machine load.
FFIipInput
Memory Alloc Error
Memory allocation failure.
Check the memory condition.
FFIipInput
Read Buffer Over Flow
A read buffer overflow error.
13998 FFIipInput
Received UnKnown Code

from CommPort
An unknown code was received from the

communication port.
13998 FFIipInput
13998 FFIipInput
Response Timeout
A response timeout.
Restart. If the same error recurs even after

restarting the system, check the PCs
specification.
specification.
CreateError
Failure to create a timer.
13998 FFIipInput
Database Data Get Error

Failed in acquiring the system setup.
Database [%1]
Table [%2]
Key [%3]
TemporaryFolderPath error The folder for created files containing
information of the actual result as well as
for operating them did not exist.
IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks

specification.
Restart.
Check the system setup.

SYSCONFIG
5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION
No100 ReceptComputer Info
File Temporal Folder
Restart.
GetSharedFolderPath error Failed in acquiring the folder for created

mis-exposure images.
"GetString() : %1 %2
Failed in acquiring the character strings to Restart.
connect to the database.
ImageDBCOM.Connect() : Failed in accessing the image database.
Restart. If the same symptom frequently
%1 %2
occurs, perform a reinstallation and then
FFFlagDBConnect() : %1 Failed in accessing the image database
%2
flag table.
ConnectRisConnectDb() : Failed in accessing the ReceptConnectDB. Restart.
%1
OpenXMLTagInfo() : %1
Failed in accessing the ResultXMLTagInfo Restart.
table.
GetCompName() : %1
Failed in acquiring a host name of the PC. Restart.
GetNowTime() : %1
Failed in acquiring the time setting of a PC. Check the PC setup and then restart.
Appx1MT-45
Event
Event Source
Description
Causes
Remedies
13998 FFIipInput
ExposureResultConvert() : Failed in acquiring the information of the

%1
actual result to be sent to the RIS.
13998 FFIipInput
Nothing StudyInstanceUID The information necessary to send to the

RIS was not found.
SetCandelResult() error :
Failed in acquiring the information of the
RetCode = %1
Nothing ProcUID
The information necessary to send to the
RIS was not found.
GetExposureResult error
MoveResultFile() : %1
Failed in outputting the information of the
actual result to the RIS.
IdSRISConvert
13998
13998
13998
13998
IdSRISConvert
FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert
FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert
FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert
FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput
MoveResultFile() : Not
Move Files
CheckPatientData error
13998 FFIipInput
CreateResultXmlFile error
13998 FFIipInput
GetInfoFileURL() Error :
%1
FcDicomOperation.
LoadDicomObject() Error :
%1
GetExposureData() Error :
%1
IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert
IdSRISConvert
IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
The information of the actual result output

to the RIS did not exist.
An error occurred while the information of
the actual result to be output to the RIS is
created.
created.

actual result (exposure information) to be
sent to the RIS.
GetSeriesData() Error : %1 Failed in acquiring the information of the
actual result (image information) to be sent
to the RIS.
GetStudyData() Error : %1 Failed in acquiring the information of the
actual result (study information) to be sent
to the RIS.
GetPatientData() Error : %1 Failed in acquiring the information of the
actual result (patient information) to be
sent to the RIS.
Remarks

Check the information of the actual result.
Check the information of the actual result
and then restart.
and then restart.
and then restart.
Check the system setup and then restart.
SYSCONFIG
5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION
No100 ReceptComputer Info
File Temporal Folder
No.307 Simplified Ordeing Report Share
Folder
and then restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Appx1MT-46
Event
Event Source
Description
Causes
Remedies
13998 FFIipInput
ImageDBCOM.
OpenRecordset() Error :%1
sql=%2
13998 FFIipInput
ImageDBCOM.
CloseRecordset() Error :%1
13998 FFIipInput
GetRadiationData() Error : Failed in acquiring the information of the

%1
actual result (information of the actual
exposure result) to be sent to the RIS.
FcDicomOperation.%1
Error :%2
GetImageData() Error : %1 Failed in acquiring the information of the
actual result (image information) to be sent
to the RIS.
CheckData Error: %1
created.
Check Error[%1]
Failed in accessing the ResultXMLTagInfo
GetXMLTagInfo Error
table.
Check Error[%1] : [%2]
The information of the actual result
contained information that cannot be sent
to the RIS.
CreateResultDOMTree
error
created.
CreateNodePatient() Error An error occurred while the information of
created.
IdSRISConvert
IdSRISConvert
IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput
CreateNodeStudy() Error

created.
13998 FFIipInput
CreateNode() Error

created.
IdSRISConvert
IdSRISConvert
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks

deleted).
deleted).
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
* If XMLTag : %1 TagType = 1 Not Elemnt
Valu is recorded in the event log, check
the information of the actual result without
restarting.
Restart.
restarting.
Restart.
restarting.
Appx1MT-47
Event
Event Source
13998 FFIipInput
Description
Causes
Remedies
XMLTag : %1 TagType = 1
Not Elemnt Valu
CreateNodeMenu() Error
The information necessary to send to the

RIS was not found.
created.
13998 FFIipInput
CreateNodeImage() Error

created.
13998 FFIipInput
CreateNodeRadiation()
Error

created.
13998 FFIipInput
FFNetDBConnect() :%1
13998
FFNetDBClose() :%1
Not FileExists : %1
Unable to connect to the database for

network setup.
Unable to connect to the database for
network setup.
The file did not exist.
Not FolderExists : %1
The folder did not exist.
GetAccessionNumberErr
Restart and perform a new study.
IdSRISConvert
13998 FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert
IdSRISConvert
IdSRISConvert
13998
13998
13998
13998
IdSRISConvert
FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert
FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert
FFIipInput
IdSRISConvert
IdExposerList
GetAccesionNumber()
IdOrderingReserve
13998 IdOrderingReserve
CreateOneStudyInfo()
SortStudyNumber()
SortMenuNumber()
SetOrderInfo()
SetOrderInfo()
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817

Restart.
restarting.
Restart.
restarting.
Restart.
restarting.
Check the NetConfig.mdb and then restart.
Check the NetConfig.mdb and then restart.
CheckStudyCount.%4
The number of ordered studies which are

received exceeded the upper limit.
SortStudyAndMenuNumber Failed in arranging the study sequence or
error
exposure sequence.
Sort Study Number Error.
nLoopCountA:%1
nLooppCountB:%2
Sort Menu Number Error.
nLoopCountA:%1
nLoopCountB:%2
FcDicomOperation.
SetStrData(&H20000D)
Error : %1
FcDicomOperation.
SetStrData(&H7F158) Error
: %1
Remarks
Failed in arranging the study sequence in

A and B order.
Reduce the number of studies to be started

at once.
Check the setting for study/exposure
sequence on the ordering equipment (RIS)
side.
Check the setting for study sequence in
study A and B.
Failed in arranging the menu sequence in

A and B order.
Check the setting for menu sequence in

menu A and B.
Failed in setting the order information to

the database.

the database.
Appx1MT-48
Event
Event Source
SetOrderInfo()
SetOrderInfo()
SetOrderInfo()
SetOrderInfo()
13998
13998
13998
13998
13998
13998
13999
14000
14001
14002
14003
14004
SortStudyAndMenu
Number()
IdOrderingReserve
AddInsert()
IdOrderingReserve
AddInsert()
IdOrderingReserve
CheckStudyCount()
IdOrderingReserve
CheckStudyCount()
IIPInput.exe
m_ctlHome_
OnSelectedTab
IIPInput.exe
m_ctlIdInputRecept_
OnErrorOccurred()
FFIipInput
Description
Causes
Remedies
FcDicomOperation.
SetStrData(&H181401)
Error : %1
FcDicomOperation.
SetStrData(&H7F222) Error
: %1
FcDicomOperation.
SetStrData(&201110A0)
Error : %1
FcDicomOperation.
SetStrData(&H20100050)
Error : %1
SortStudyAndMenu
Number_Unknown_Error

the database.

the database.

the database.

the database.
An unknown error has occurred.
Restart.
UnKnown_Error
Restart.
wrong value is specified
The order information was invalid.
Study Count Max Over :

Study Count = %1
Study Count Max Over :
Not Multiple Study
m_ctlTRISControl.
SendMessage_M08_RQ()
error%1
Study Count Over Error

Failed in communicating with the Toshiba
RIS.

at once.
at once.


at once.
SetWSExposureDistance-010 Failure to set up a value to DDO.
Restart.
FFIipInput
GetWSExposureDistance-010 Failure to acquire a value from DDO.
Restart.
FFIipInput
SetCasetteThickness-010
Failure to set up a value to DDO.
Restart.
FFIipInput
GetCasetteThickness-010
Failure to acquire a value from DDO.
Restart.
FFIipInput
ProcImageCombine-600
Failure to acquire a value from DDO.
Restart.
FFIipInput
Initialize-22-04
Failure to initialize the authentication

dialog.
Failure to close the authentication dialog.
Restart.
14006 FFIipInput
14900 IIPInputEz
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
UserControl_Terminate-1
%1 : Registry Value Get/Set An acquisition/setup key error. A registry

information error.
Error%n
[Key] %2%n
[Exp] %3%n
%4%n
%5
Restart.
Appx1MT-49
Event
Event Source
14900 IIPPortable
14901 IIPInputEz
14901 IIPPortable
14902 IIPInputEz
14902 IIPPortable
14903 IIPInputEz
14903 IIPPortable
14904 IIPInputEz
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Set Error
[Key] %2
[Exp] %3
%4
%5
Error%n
[DB] %2%n
[Exp] %3%n
%4%n
%5
Error
[DB] %2
[Exp] %3
%4
%5
%1 : Database Data
Get/Set Error%n
[DB] %2%n
[Table] %3%n
[Field] %4%n
[Exp] %5
Set Error
[DB] %2
[Table]%3
[Field]%4
[Exp]%5
Error%n
[Tag] %2%n
%3%n
%4%n
%5
Error
[Tag] %2
%3
%4
%5
%1 : Other Error%n
[Procedure] %2%n
[ErrorCode] %3%n
[Exp] %4%n
%5
Causes
Remedies
A registry was damaged.
Remarks
There is no particular problem with

operations.
Incorrect Directory.ini file character strings. Check the Directory.ini file. Also check the
An incorrect database filename. Damaged database filename.
database.

operations.
An acquisition/setup key error. A database Check the database table/filed name.

error.

operations.
A DDO acquisition/setup tag error.
Check the DDO tag.

operations.
Other error.
Appx1MT-50
Event
Event Source
14904 IIPPortable
19001 FFDICOMCommit SCU

19001 FFDICOMEchoSCU
19001 FFDICOMMPPSSCU
19001 FFDICOMMWLSCU
19001 FFDICOMMWLSCU
19001 FFDICOMPrintSCU
19001 FFDICOMStoreSCP
19001 FFDICOMStoreSCU
Description
%1: Other Error
[Procedure] %2
[Error Code]%3
[Exp]%4
%5
Initialization failed.
[DPM Invoke fail]
[DPC Invoke fail]
[Insufficient memory]
[DPM Invoke fail]
[DPM Invoke fail]
[DPM Invoke fail]
[DPM Invoke fail]
[DPM Invoke fail]
[DPC Invoke fail]
[DPM Invoke fail]
Method Invoke failed.
[PushPrc]
19002 FFDICOMCommit SCU Method Invoke failed.

[DiscontinueRequest]
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Causes
Remedies
A general-purpose information event log.

operations.
DPM thread generation was unsuccessful.

DPC thread generation was unsuccessful.
Instance generation was unsuccessful.
DPC thread generation was unsuccessful.
transmitted.
transmitted.
Restart.
Remarks
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Appx1MT-51
Event
Event Source
Description

[EchoPrc]

[CreatePrc]

[SetPrc]
19002 FFDICOMMWLSCU

[FindPrc]
19002 FFDICOMMWLSCU

[CancelPrc]

[PrintPrc]

[GetPrc]

[DiscontinueRequest]
19002 FFDICOMQRSCU
Method lnvoke failed.

[FindPrc]
19002 FFDICOMQRSCU

[MovePrc]
19002 FFDICOMQRSCU

[CancelPrc]
19002 FFDICOMQRSCU

[FreePrc]

[StorePrc]
19003 FFDICOMCommit SCU File I/O failed.

010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
[Communication log file

name]
File I/O failed.
name]
Causes
Remedies

transmitted.
transmitted.
transmitted.
transmitted.
transmitted.
transmitted.
transmitted.
transmitted.
transmitted.
transmitted.
transmitted.
transmitted.
transmitted.
A communication log file was not
successfully opened.
Restart.

Although the communication log cannot be

obtained, execution is possible.
Remarks
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Appx1MT-52
Event
Event Source
19003 FFDICOMMWLSCU
19900 IIPInputEz
19901 IIPInputEz
19902 IIPInputEz
19903 IIPInputEz
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
File I/O failed.
name]
File I/O failed.
name]
File I/O failed.
name]
File I/O failed.
name]
File I/O failed.
name]
File I/O failed.
name]
File I/O failed.
name]
%1 : Registry Value
Get/Set Error%n
[Key] %2%n
[Exp] %3%n
%4%n
%5
Error%n
[DB] %2%n
[Exp] %3%n
%4%n
%5
%1 : Database Data
Get/Set Error%n
[DB] %2%n
[Table] %3%n
[Field] %4%n
[Exp] %5
Get/Set Error%n
[Tag] %2%n
[Exp] %3%n
%4%n
%5
Causes
Remedies






Remarks
An adequate disk space was not available. Check the available disk space.
An image-related file was not successfully
accessed. The problem is attributable to a
disk.

occurs, replace the disk.



information was abnormal.


database.
The acquisition/setup key or database was Check the database table/field name.
abnormal.
The DDO acquisition/setup tag was

abnormal.
Check the DDO tag.
Appx1MT-53
Event
Event Source
19904 IIPInputEz
20001 FFCtrlProc
20002 FFCtrlProc
20003 FFCtrlProc
20004 FFCtrlProc
20005 FFCtrlProc
20006 FFCtrlProc
20007 FFCtrlProc
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
%1 : Other Error%n
[Procedure] %2%n
[ErrorCode] %3%n
[Exp] %4%n
%5
It failed in CreateProcess.
It has the possibility that an
executive file doesnt exist.
The start treatment cant be
continued. /CtrlProc:
RunProc()
%1
Process start information is
unusual. The start
treatment cant be
continued. /CtrlProc:
RunProc()
It failed in the completion
message preparation
treatment. The treatment
cant be continued. /
CtrlProc:EndProc()
It failed in the completion
message transmitting
CtrlProc:EndProc()
It failed in the switching
message preparation
CtrlProc:ChangeProc()
It failed in the switching
message transmitting
CtrlProc:ChangeProc()
It failed in CreateProcess.
It has the possibility that an
executive file doesnt exist.
The start treatment cant be
continued.
/CtrlProc:SetInitProcEnd()
[20102] Setup not
completed.
[20104] Failed in securing
system settings.
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
Unknown error.
A subprocess was not successfully started Restart. If the same symptom occurs after A subsystem name is
up. The system was unstable or a
a restart, reinstall.
placed in the %1
necessary executable file was not found.
position.
An illegal parameter was used for process Restart. If the same symptom occurs after
startup. It is conceivable that the contents a restart, reinstall.
of the process information database were
wrong.
A process end request message was not Restart.
successfully created. It is conceivable that
the available resource was not adequate
or that the system was unstable.
A process end request message was not Restart.
successfully transmitted. It is conceivable
that the transmission destination process
was down or that the transmission
destination was wrong.
A window show/hide message was not
Restart.
successfully created. It is conceivable that
the available resource was not adequate
or that the system was unstable.
Restart. If the same symptom occurs after


It is conceivable that the application key

Install the application key.
Main
was not installed.
It is conceivable that the file was damaged Restart. If the same symptom occurs after Main
or deleted.
Appx1MT-54
Event
Event Source
20104 FFIIPMAIN
20105 FFIIPMAIN
20106 FFIIPMAIN
20108 FFIIPMAIN
20110 FFIIPMAIN
20111
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Causes
It failed in the acquisition of

the configuration information.
The initialization treatment
MainProcess:Main()
[20105] Failed in accessing
the process control
database.
the process information
data base. The initialization
treatment cant be
continued. /MainProcess:
Main()
the message distribution
control database.
It failed in opening of the
message data base.
MainProcess:Main()
[20108] Failed in process
activation.
It failed in the start of the
sub-process.
MainProcess:Main()
[20110] Failed in
initialization processing.
The configuration information was not

successfully acquired. This error occurred
due to an improper installation or system
instability.

sub-process.
cant be continued.
/MainProcess:
m_ProcessControl_
OnRunProcComplete()

termination.
Remedies
Remarks

or deleted.
Data was not successfully acquired from
the process information database.
This error occurred due to an improper
installation or system instability.

or deleted.
successfully opened. This error occurred
due to an improper installation or system
instability.

A subprocess was not successfully started

up for some reason.
The subprocess was not successfully
started. This error occurred due to an
improper installation or system instability.
View the event logs around to examine the Main

cause.

started. It is conceivable that the system
was unstable. This error may also occur as
a consequence of the occurrence of
another error.
started. This error occurred due to an
improper installation or system instability.
Check for error messages and warnings

issued before the occurrence of this error
and then take a remedial action.
Or, restart. If the same symptom recurs,
The MAC address could not be acquired.
Reinstall the network driver (delete it and

then reinstall). Or, manually acquire the
MAC address with the Service Utilitys
MAC address acquisition function.
An error occurred for some reason during

subprocess end processing.
Main
Main
Appx1MT-55
Event
Event Source
20118 FFIIPMAIN
20124 FFIIPMAIN
Description
It failed in the completion of
the sub-process.
/MainProcess:
ProcessEndRequirement()
switchover.
It failed in switching of the
process. /MainProcess:
xxxxx
Causes
Remedies

terminated. The system was unstable.
Restart.
A subprocess was not successfully

controlled for some reason.
A subprocess changeover was not
successfully effected. The target
subprocess was not active or the system
was unstable.
The problem is attributable, for instance, to
an inactive SQL service manager or
uninitialized image database.
View the event logs around to examine the Main

cause.
Restart.
[21001] Failed in
connecting to the image
database.
[21002] Failed in accessing The problem is attributable, for instance, to

the image database.
[21003] Failed in obtaining The problem is attributable, for instance, to

information from the image an inactive SQL service manager or
database.
[21004] Failed in accessing The problem is attributable, for instance, to

the image database.
[21005] Failed in setting

information to the image
database.

[21006] Failed in deleting

the study information.

010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks

is normally operating. If the symptom
deleted).
deleted).
deleted).
deleted).
deleted).
deleted).
List
List
List
List
List
List
Appx1MT-56
Event
Event Source
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
[21007] Failed in
connecting to the system
setting database.
the system setting
database.
[21009] Failed in obtaining
information from the system
setting database.
[21010] Failed in
connecting to the character
database.
the character database.
information from the
character database.
the definition file.
[21014] Failed in opening
the registry information.
[21015] Failed in retrieving
[21016] Failed in writing the
registry information.
[21017] Failed in closing
[21018] Failed in receiving
message.
[21019] Failed in canceling
the output processing.
[21020] Failed in output.
[21021] Failed in receiving
the message.
[21022] Failed in initializing
process for message
communication.
[21023] Failed in
terminating process for
message communication.
information from the host
setting database.
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
damaged or deleted.
List
damaged or deleted.
List
damaged or deleted.
List
damaged or deleted.
List
It is conceivable that the database file was

damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.

List
It is conceivable that the file was damaged

or deleted.
It is conceivable that the registry
information was damaged or deleted.

No particular response is required.
List
List
List

List

List
damaged or deleted.
List
The selected image was being output or

already deleted.
The selected image was being output or
already deleted.
List
List
List
List
List
List
List
Appx1MT-57
Event
Event Source
Description
[21025] Failed in editing the
host setting database.
[21030] Failed in study
start.
[21031] Failed in QA start.
Causes
Remedies
21052 FFMWMHelper
Connection equipment was not operative

or the network was unstable.
re-start.
[21033] Failed in obtaining Connection equipment was not operative
study information from host or the network was unstable.
%s.
[21034] Failed in locking
the study.
completion processing.
[21036] The target study
exists but is not displayed or the network was unstable.
on the list.
[21037] The target study
The specified study may have been
could not be found.
deleted.
[21038] The input format
The input format was incorrect.
for date is wrong.
[21039] The input format
The input format was incorrect.
for time is wrong.
[21040] Searched word is The input word was incorrect.
illegal.
[21041] Multiple target
Two or more relevant studies existed.
studies exist. The study
cannot be started.
[21051] An unknown study - Software version A06 or earlier was used
was received from the RIS. for MWM connection.
- Illegal data was contained in the study
information received from the RIS.
[MWMHelper]%1
This is an information log.
21053 FFMWMHelper
[MWMHelper]%1
21054 FFMWMHelper
[MWMHelper]%1
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
A warning condition is encountered.

For details, refer to the contents of the
event log.
An error occurred.
Remarks

Check the connected equipment or
network.
network.
network.
network.
List
List
List
List
List

network.
network.
network.
List
No particular measures need to be taken.
List
List
List
List
List
List
List
- Upgrade the software to version A07 or

later.
- Check the RIS side setup information and
the like.
operations.
operations.
Restart.
A study received by means of MWM didnt
include StudyInstanceUID (0020,000D).
Request the MWM Server to send
StudyInstanceUID.
Appx1MT-58
Event
Event Source
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
[21101] An error of
unknown cause occurred.
study information.
[21103] Unable to specify a
target destination for move.
[21104] Unable to specify a
target destination for move.
[21105] Unable to move an
image.
[21106] A study information
display error occurred.
[21129] The hard disk was
full.
[21201] An error of
[21202] Initialization has
not been completed.
[21203] Radiographer
information database is
abnormal.
registry values.
[21206] Failed in clearing a
displayed image.
[21207] Failed in
connecting to the database.
[21208] Failed in
connecting to the database.
[21209] Failed in setting the
study information sharing
host.
the study information from
the database.
Causes
Remedies

A specified study has already been
deleted.
Destination for move was specified
incorrectly.
incorrectly.
incorrectly.
The study information included illegal data.
Remarks

List
List
List
List
Check study data setting.
List
List
- The free hard disk space was insufficient. - Delete unnecessary images. If any
- The shuttering process was used with
images are left without being output,
software version A07 or earlier. Or, a
output them.
forced termination procedure was
performed during a startup or freeze
later and then initialize the image
(when version A07 or earlier was used).
database.
damaged or deleted.
Main
List


Check other connected equipment or
network.
Check other connected equipment or
network.
damaged or deleted.
List
List
List
List
List
List
List
List
List
Appx1MT-59
Event
Event Source
22100 FFIIPListMoveImage
22103 FFIIPMAIN
22128 FFIIPMAIN
22201 FFPDIWizardCom
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
[21211] An error of
unknown cause occurred in
obtaining radiographer
information.
[21212] An error of
[21213] An error of
Study information cannot
be obtained.
[21214] Failed in starting
remote search/acquisition
processing.
Warning.
%1
the configuration information.
MainProcess:Main()
An error occurred in logfile
backup treatment. /
MainProcess:xxxxx
Error.
%1
Initialize Error.
%1
%1%n%2%n
Failed in obtaining the
FFGetString Error.
%1
%1%n%2%n
Failed in reading of the
configuration file (Directory.
ini).
DB Connect Error.
%1
%1%n%2%n
Failed in accessing the
system setting database.
DB Get Error.
%
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
damaged or deleted.
List

List

List
A warning was issued. For details, see the

contents of the event log.
The version information was not
successfully acquired. It is conceivable that
the Version.env file did not exist in the
specified directory or that the contents of
the file were damaged.
A log file backup was not successfully
made. It is conceivable that the specified
pathname was incorrect.
An error occurred. For details, see the
contents of the event log.

operations.
Reinstall.
The initialization process failed.
List
Reinstall. (Although there are no

operational problems, various
communication logs cannot be saved.)
Since the process was aborted due to an
error occurrence, it is conceivable that a
data inconsistency may exist. Verify the
data consistency.
Restart.
An attempt to obtain the registry

information failed.
Restart.
The FFGetString function returned an

error.
An attempt to read the Directory.ini file
failed.
Restart.
The database connection was not

successfully established.
The SysConfig.mdb file may have been
damaged.
Restart.
Data could not be acquired from the

database.
Restart.
Make sure that the Directory.ini file is

correct and restart.
Check the SysConfig.mdb file.
Appx1MT-60
Event
Event Source
23000 FFMWMStudyList
23000 FFStudyList,
FFOutputList
Description
%1%n%2%n
character database.
SetDB Error.
%1
%1%n%2%n
image database.
Dicom Data Object Get
Error.
%1
%1%n%2%n
An error occurred in an
imageprocessing server.
Dicom Data Object Set
Error.
%1
%1%n%2%n
An error occurred in a
PDIcontrol library.
Dicom Data Object Set
Error.
%1
%1%n%2%n
An error occurred in the
DicomDataObject.
%1%n%2%n
An error occurred in the
called function.
%1%n
An exception error
occurred.
RegCreatekey() returned
with Error at %1.
[%2]
with Error at %1.%n[%2]
23000 FFIIPListCustomize
23000 FFIIPListSearch
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Causes
Remedies
The LangStr.mdb file may have been

damaged.
Remarks
Check the LangStr.mdb file.
Data could not be set up for the database. Restart.

The SQL server service manager has not Make sure that the SQL server has been
been started, because, for example, a
started.
necessary file was not installed.
Data could not be acquired from the Dicom Restart.
Data Object.
An error occurred in the image processing Restart.
server.
Data could not be set up for the Dicom
Data Object.
Restart.
An error occurred in the PDI control library. Restart.

Restart.
A error occurred in the DICOM object.
Restart.
An error occurred in a function that was

called up.
Restart.
An exceptional error occurred.
Restart.
The RegCreateKey function returned an

error.
Restart.
The user authority may not have been

granted or installation may have been
ended abnormally.
ended abnormally.
ended abnormally.
Use the normal startup procedure or

perform reinstallation.
Appx1MT-61
Event
Event Source
23001 FFStudyList,
FFOutputList
23001 FFMediaList
23002 FFStudyList,
FFOutputList
23002 FFMediaList
23003 FFStudyList,
FFOutputList
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Information.
%1
Study couldnt be started
automatically. %1.
[%2]
RegOpenkey() returned
with Error at %1.
[%2]
Causes
Remedies
Information log.
Failed in starting a study automatically for

any reason.
The RegOpenKey function returned an

error.
Restart.

ended abnormally.
ended abnormally.
ended abnormally.
Failed in opening the registry (an error
with Error at %1.
occurred with the program or the system
[%2]
was unstable).
RegOpenKey()returnedwith The RegOpenKey function returned an
Error at %1.
error.
[%2]
RegClosekey() returned
with Error at %1.
error.
[%2]
granted.
granted.
granted.
Failed in closing the registry (an error
with Error at %1.
occurred with the program or the system
[%2]
was unstable).
RegCloseKey() returned
The RegCloseKey function returned an
withError at %1.
error.
[%2]
RegQueryNumericValue() The RegOpenKey function returned an
returned with Error at %1. error.
[%2]
RegQueryNumericValue() The user authority may not have been
returned with Error at
granted.
%1.%n[%2]
Remarks

Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Use the normal startup procedure.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Appx1MT-62
Event
Event Source
23003 FFMediaList
23004 FFStudyList,
FFOutputList
23004 FFMediaList
23005 FFStudyList,
FFOutputList
23005 FFMediaList
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
RegQueryNumericValue()
%1.%n[%2]
%1.%n[%2]
returned with Error at %1.
[%2]
RegQueryNumericValue()r
eturned with Error at %1.
[%2]
RegSetNumericValue()
[%2]
%1.%n[%2]
%1.%n[%2]
%1.%n[%2]
[%2]
RegSetNumericValue()retu
rned with Error at %1.
[%2]
FFGetString() returned with
Error at %1.%n[%2]
Error at %1.%n[%2]
Error at %1. [%2]
Error at %1.
[%2]
Error at %1.%n[%2]
Error at %1.
[%2]
Causes
Remedies

granted.

granted.
Remarks
Failed in acquiring data from the registry or Restart.

the program may not have been installed
properly.
The RegQueryNumericValue function
Restart.
returned an error.
error.
Restart.

granted.

granted.

granted.
Failed in writing data in the registry (an

error occurred with the program or the
system was unstable).
The RegSetNumericValue function
returned an error.
Restart.
The problem is attributable to a damaged

Directory.ini file.
Directory.ini file.
error.
The FFGetString function failed.
This problem is attributable to an improper
installation.
Directory.ini file.
error.
Ensure that the Directory.ini file is normal,

and then restart.
and then restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Perform a reinstallation or restart.

and then restart.
Restart.
Appx1MT-63
Event
Event Source
23006 FFStudyList,
FFOutputList
23006 FFMediaList
23007 FFStudyList,
FFOutputList
23007 FFMediaList
23008 FFStudyList,
FFOutputList
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Causes
Remedies
FFStrDBConnect() returned The problem is attributable to a damaged

Directory.ini file or missing LangStr.mdb
file.
file.
FFStrDBConnect() returned The FFStrDBConnect function failed.
with Error at %1. [%2]
The problem is due to an improper
installation or system instability.
FFStrDBConnect() returned The FFStrDBConnect function returned an
with Error at %1.
error.
[%2]
file.
FFStrDBConnect() returned The FFStrDBConnect function returned an
with Error at %1.
error.
[%2]
FFStrDBClose() returned
The LangStr.mdb file was damaged.
The FFStrDBClose function failed.
with Error at %1.
[%2]
The FFStrDBClose function returned an
with Error at %1.
error.
[%2]
FFStrDBReadString()
%1.%n[%2]
FFStrDBReadString()
%1.%n[%2]
FFStrDBReadString()
The FFStrDBReadString function returned
returned with Error at %1. an error.
[%2]
FFStrDBReadString()
The FFStrDBReadString function failed.
returned with Error at %1. The problem is attributable to an improper
[%2]
installation.
FFStrDBReadString()
%1.%n[%2]
Remarks

and then restart. Or, check the LangStr.
mdb file.
mdb file.
Perform a reinstallation or restart.
Restart.
mdb file.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Perform a reinstall or restart.
Appx1MT-64
Event
Event Source
23008 FFMediaList
23009 FFStudyList,
FFOutputList
23009 FFMediaList
2300A FFMWMStudyList
23010 FFStudyList,
FFOutputList
23010 FFMediaList
23011 FFStudyList,
FFOutputList
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
FFStrDBReadString()
[%2]
FFRegGetKeySZ() returned
with Error at %1.
[%2]
with Error at %1.
[%2]
with Error at %1.
[%2]
FFRegGetKeyDWORD()
[%2]
FFRegGetKeyDWORD()
%1.%n[%2]
FFRegGetKeyDWORD()
%1.%n[%2]
FFRegGetKeyDWORD()
[%2]
FFRegGetKeyDWORD()
%1.%n[%2]
FFRegGetKeyDWORD()
[%2]
FFSysDBConnect()
%1.%n[%2]
FFHostDBInitialize()
%1.%n[%2]
%1. [%2]
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
The FFStrDBReadString function returned Restart.

an error.
The problem is attributable to an
unprivileged user.
unprivileged user.
The FFRegGetKeySZ function returned an Restart.
error.
The FFRegGetKeySZ function failed.
Perform a reinstall or restart.
This error is attributable to an improper
installation.
unprivileged user.
The FFRegGetKeySZ function returned an Restart.
error.
The FFRegGetKeyDWORD function failed. Perform a reinstallation or restart.
This error is attributable to an improper IIP
installation.
unprivileged user.
unprivileged user.
The FFRegGetKeyDWORD function

returned an error.
Restart.

unprivileged user.
The FFRegGetKeyDWORD function

returned an error.
Restart.
It is conceivable that the Directory.ini file

was damaged or the Hosts.mdb file did not
exist.
It is conceivable that the Directory.ini file
was damaged or the Hosts.mdb file did not
exist.
FFHostDBInitialize() sent back an error.

and then restart. Or, check the SysConfig.
mdb file.
Ensure that the Directory.ini file is correct,
and then restart the system or check the
SysConfig.mdb file.
Restart the system.
Appx1MT-65
Event
Event Source
23011 FFMediaList
23012 FFStudyList,
FFOutputList
23012 FFMediaList
23013 FFStudyList,
FFOutputList
23013 FFMediaList
23014 FFStudyList,
FFOutputList
23014 FFMediaList
23015 FFStudyList,
FFOutputList
23015 FFMediaList
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
[%2]
FFSysDBClose() returned
FFHostDBGetQueryHost()
%1.%n[%2]
%1. [%2]
[%2]
FFSysDBReadszValue()
%1.%n[%2]
FFHostDBSetQueryHost()
%1.%n[%2]
%1. [%2]
[%2]
FFSysDBReadnValue()
%1.%n[%2]
FFSysDBReadnValue()
%1.%n
[%2]
Failed WorkListDB Open
Recordset at %1.%n
[%2]
Failed ImageDB
Connection at %1.%n[%2]
Failed ImageDB
Connection at %1.%n
[%2]
Failed WorkListDB Close
Recordset at %1.%n
[%2]
Causes
Remedies
FFHostDBInitialize() returned an error.
Restart.
This error is attributable to a damaged

Directory.ini file.
It is conceivable that the Hosts.mdb file
was damaged.
FFHostDBGetQueryHost() sent back an

error.
Restart the system.
FFHostDBGetQueryHost() returned an
error.
Restart.

Directory.ini file.
It is conceivable that the Hosts.mdb file

was damaged.
Check the Hosts.mdb file.
FFHostDBSetQueryHost() sent back an

error.
Restart the system.
FFHostDBSetQueryHost() returned an
error.
Restart.

Directory.ini file.
It is conceivable that the SysConfig.mdb

file was damaged.
It is conceivable that the SQL Server

Service Manager is not running or
necessary files are not installed.
The SQL Server Service Manager starts
running or necessary files are not installed.
Ensure that the SQL Sever is running.
Remarks
Ensure that the SQL Server is running.

Appx1MT-66
Event
Event Source
23016 FFStudyList,
FFOutputList
23017 FFStudyList,
Description
Failed ImageDB
Disconnection at
%1.%n[%2]
Failed ReleasePossession
at %1.%n
[%2]
Failed ImageDB Open
Recordset at %1.%n[%2]
Failed ImageDB Update
Failed ImageDB Close
Failed Get HostName as
%1.%n[%2]
Causes
Remedies

Release of the possessive right failed.

23022 FFStudyList
Failed GetPossession at
%1.%n
[%2]
23023 FFMediaList
23023 FFStudyList
Error Occurred.%n

Failed in acquiring a host name.
The network may have been set up
incorrectly.
Failed in acquiring a host name.
The network may have been set up
incorrectly.
Failed in acquiring data from the Hosts.
mdb file. The database may have been
damaged.
Failed in acquiring data from the Hosts.
mdb file. The database may have been
damaged.
Failed in acquiring property.
It is conceivable that any other equipment
has already acquired property, network
disconnected or power not turned ON.
Failed in acquiring property.
It is conceivable that any other equipment
has already acquired property, network
disconnected or power not turned ON.
An error occurred for any reason.
Failed
DDOChangeOrDelivery at
%1.%n[%2]
Failed DicomQ/R at
%1.%n[%2]
FFNetDBConnect()
%1.%n [%2]
Failed DicomQ/R Initialize
at %1.%n[%2]
A failure occurred in file change or delivery

processing at film division/extension
(12on1) output.
A failure occurred when performing DICOM
Q/R processing.
An attempt to establish connection to the
network setup database resulted in a
failure.
A failure occurred in initialization of DICOM
Q/R processing.
FFOutputList
23018 FFStudyList,
FFOutputList
23019 FFStudyList,
FFOutputList
23020 FFStudyList
23020 FFMediaList
Failed Get HostName as

%1.%n[%2]
23021 FFStudyList
Failed HostDB Data at

%1.%n[%2]
23021 FFMediaList
Failed HostDB Data at

%1.%n
[%2]
Failed GetPossession at
%1.%n[%2]
23022 FFStudyList
23024 FFStudyList
23025 FFStudyList
23026 FFStudyList
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks

Check the network/network settings.
Check the network/network settings.
Check the network/equipment.
Check the network/equipment.
Restart.
Restart the system.
Check the network/network settings, and
then restart the system as necessary.
Check NetConfig.mdb and restart the
system.
Restart the system.
Appx1MT-67
Event
Event Source
23027 FFStudyList
23028 FFStudyList
23029 FFStudyList
23031 FFStudyList
23099 FFStudyList,
FFOutputList
23099 FFMediaList
23108 FFIIPMAIN
23118 FFIIPMAIN
23124 FFIIPMAIN
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Failed
MultiPrintDDOUpdate at
%1.%n[%2]
Failed MultiPrintDelivery
%1.%n[%2]
Failed FFNetDBGet
%1.%n[%2]
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
A failure occurred in file change processing Restart the system.

at film division/extension (12on1) output.
A failure occurred in delivery processing at

film division/extension (12on1) output.
An attempt to acquire data from the
network setup database resulted in a
failure.
ctl_ListPatient_ExecutePDI A PDI processing error occurred.
()() returned with Error at
%1.%n
An unknown error
An unknown error occurred.
occurred.%n[%1]
An unknown error
occurred.%n[%1]
An unknown error occurred. An exception error occurred.
[%1]
An unknown error occurred. An unknown error occurred. This error is
[%1]
attributable to system instability.
An unknown error
occurred.%n[%1]
An unknown error occurred. An exception error occurred.
[%1]
A subprocess was not successfully started
sub-process.
up. It is conceivable that installation was
The initialization treatment not properly completed or that the system
was unstable.
MainProcess:Main()
It failed in the completion of A subprocess was not successfully ended.
the sub-process.
/MainProcess:
unstable.
ProcessEndRequirement()
It failed in switching of the Subprocess switching was not successfully
process. /MainProcess:
performed. It is conceivable that the target
xxxxx
subprocess was not running or that the
system was unstable.
[24001] Selected study
This dialog box opens for confirmation
information will be fully
only.
deleted.
[24002] No items displayed. There were no items to be displayed in the
list.
[24003] The item width is
The maximum display width was exceeded
too large.
by the specified value.
Restart the system.

Check NetConfig.mdb and restart the
system.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
List
Select at least one display item.
List
Enter a smaller value.
List
Appx1MT-68
Event
Event Source
Description
[24004] Cancels the
selected output request.
[24005] The search target
string %S was not found.
[24057 ] Unable to receive
information from the RIS
trigger transmitter.
[24062] Failed in changing
the host setting.
[25001] Failed in
connecting to the media
database.
Causes
Remedies

only.
No data matched the entered search
criteria.
Worklist
The database file is possible to be

defective or has been deleted.

Check to see if the SQL service manager
is running properly. If this symptom occurs
although it is running properly, reinstall the
software because the database is highly
possible to be defective.
Restart the system. If the same symptom
recurs, reinstall.
recurs, reinstall.


recurs, reinstall.
Media list
Registry information is possible to be

The file is possible to be defective or has
been deleted.
Due to the fact, for example, that the SQL
server service manager has not yet been
started or the image database not
initialized appropriately.

recurs, reinstall.
recurs, reinstall.
recurs, reinstall.
recurs, reinstall.
although it is running properly, initialize the
image database (in such cases, image
Media list

started.
[25003] Failed in obtaining Due to the fact, for example, that the SQL
information from media.
started.

the network setup
database.
the character string
database.
[25007] Failed in reading
[25008] Failed in writing
[25009] Failed in closing
[25011] Failed in connecting
to the image database.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
List
List
[25002] Failed in accessing Due to the fact, for example, that the SQL
the media database.
started.
List

Remarks
Media list
Media list
Media list
Media list
Media list
Media list
Media list
Media list
Media list
Appx1MT-69
Event
Event Source
Description
Causes
Remedies
[25012] Failed in accessing Due to the fact, for example, that the SQL
the image database.
[25013] Failed in obtaining Due to the fact, for example, that the SQL
information from the image server service manager has not yet been
database.

information on the image
database.
25016
25017
25018
25019
25020
25021
25022
25026
29001
29002
29010
29011
[25015] Failed in mounting

media.
FFCustomMsgBox
[25016] Failed in
unmounting media.
FFCustomMsgBox
[25017] Failed in formatting
media.
FFCustomMsgBox
[25018] Failed in performing
QA processing.
FFCustomMsgBox
a study from media.
FFCustomMsgBox
[25020] Failed in image
delivery processing.
FFCustomMsgBox
[25021] Some of the
studies cannot be
performed.
FFCustomMsgBox
a study from media.
FFCustomMsgBox
[25026] Output of some
studies was disabled.
FFCustomMsgBox
[30507] A communication
error with Ascent View
occurred.
FFCustomMsgBox
occurred.
FFIIPEvtMonitoringCtrl [54625] Power interruption
was detected.
FFIIPEvtMonitoringCtrl [54626] No media
management files exist.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817

Due to the fact, for example, that the media
is not ready.
is not ready.
is not ready.
data is damaged.
data is damaged.
data is damaged.
data is damaged.
data is damaged.
data is damaged.
It is highly probable that the program was
faulty.
Remarks

Check to see if the media is inserted or
undamaged.
undamaged.
undamaged.
undamaged.
undamaged.
undamaged.
undamaged.
Media list

undamaged.
undamaged.
Media list
Media list
Media list
Media list
Media list
Media list
Media list
Media list
Media list
Media list
Media list
List

faulty.
List
The Win32 API function returned an error.
Restart.
Restart.
Worklist
Appx1MT-70
Event
Event Source
29107 FFIIPMAIN
29112 FFIIPMAIN
29114 FFIIPMAIN
29115 FFIIPMAIN
29116 FFIIPMAIN
29117 FFIIPMAIN
29119 FFIIPMAIN
29122 FFIIPMAIN
29123 FFIIPMAIN
29125 FFIIPMAIN
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Causes
It failed in the preparation

of the pipe. The treatment
MainProcess:Main()
It failed in the indication of
the routine mode transition.
/MainProcess:
m_ProcessControl
_OnRunProcComplete()
An unusual message was
received. This message is
ignored.
/MainProcess:
m_ProcessComControl
_OnRecvNotification()
An unusual send cause
was received. This send
cause is ignored.
/MainProcess:
m_ProcessComControl
_OnRecvNotification()
The form of the place of the
transmission isnt right.
/MainProcess:
SendMessage()
The pipe for inter-process communication

was not successfully created.
unstable.
The routine transition instruction message
was not successfully issued.
It is conceivable that the subprocess was
not running or that the pipe was not
created.
The received message was unusual.
It is conceivable that the message was not
registered in the message information
database or that the system was unstable.
It failed in the message

delivery.
/MainProcess:
SendMessage()
It failed in the process
completion notice.
/MainProcess:ProcessEndAnswerMessage()
It failed in the unusual
occurrence notice.
/MainProcess:
ErrorNoticeMessage()
It failed in the pipe close.
/MainProcess:
EndMainProcess()
It failed in close of the
message data base. /
MainProcess:xxxxx
Remedies
Remarks
Restart.


A message was received from an unknown Restart. If the same symptom occurs after
source. It is conceivable that the
transmission source was not registered in
the message information database or that
a wrong transmission source was selected.
An unknown transmission destination was
specified for the received message.
It is conceivable that the transmission
destination was not registered in the
message information database or that a
wrong transmission destination was
selected.
A message delivery was not successful.
It is conceivable that the subprocess at the
transmission destination was not running.

An end notice was not successfully sent to

the subprocess. It is conceivable that the
subprocess was not running or that the
An error notice was not successfully sent
to the subprocess. It is conceivable that
the subprocess was not running or that the
An inter-process communication pipe was
not successfully closed. It is conceivable
that the system was unstable.
successfully closed. It is conceivable that
Restart.

Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Appx1MT-71
Event
Event Source
29126 FFIIPMAIN
29127 FFIIPMAIN
29128 FFIIPMAIN
29129 FFIIPMAIN
30027
FFCustomMsgBox
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
It failed in reading of the
registry information. /
MainProcess:xxxxx
It failed in writing of the
registry information. /
MainProcess:xxxxx
Trash Folder is not found.
Tempolary file(s) could not
delete.
[29130] The system is now
starting up.
Causes
Data was not successfully acquired from
the registry. It is conceivable that
installation was not properly completed.
Data was not successfully written into the
registry. It is conceivable that the system
was unstable.
%IipApplication%\Trash cannot be found.
Remedies
Remarks

restarting the system, reinstall it.
restarting the system, reinstall it.
The Trash folder could

not be found.
The Trash folder could
not be deleted.
Reinstall.
Restart.
Folder file included in %IipApplication%\

Trash cannot be deleted.
only. It appears when the system returns
from a user utility to an application.
[30001] Failed in obtaining It is conceivable that the file was damaged Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
the connection characters or deleted.
to the character database.
[30002] Failed in
connecting to the character damaged or deleted.
database.
to the system setting
database.
[30004] Failed in
damaged or deleted.
setting database.
to the image database.
[30013] Failed in saving
It is conceivable that the file was damaged Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
listed (worklist) display
or deleted.
settings.
[30019] Failed in obtaining It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
the connection characters damaged or deleted.
to the network setting
database.
[30027] Failed in initializing It is conceivable that the registry
the list (worklist).
obtained.
[30045] IP address on the It is conceivable that the database file was Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
Image Reader not obtained. damaged or improperly set.
[30057] Failed in receiving The system was unstable.
the message.
Appx1MT-72
Event
Event Source
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
the connection characters
to the Image Reader status
information database.
[30105] Failed in list
initialization (waiting for
study).
QA).
output).
initialization (already
output).
initialization (all).
initialization (today).
[30117] Failed in updating
list (worklist) display.
to the Image Reader
the Image Reader
the system setting
information (IP size series).
the system setting
information
(Pantomography
processing).
the system setting
information (Magnetic card
type).
the system setting
information (Magnetic card
type).
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
or deleted.





or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
Appx1MT-73
Event
Event Source
30153
FFCustomMsgBox
Description
the system setting
information (Hospital card
used).
the system setting
database.
[30151] Failed in
Causes
damaged or deleted.
- The connection to the network was not

established.
- Node setup was not completed for THIS
HOST (IIP) under Network Config.
- The system was unstable.
[30152] Failed in obtaining It is conceivable that the file was damaged
the pass information (image or deleted.
data folder).
[30153] The shutdown
process resulted in a
failure.
or deleted.
study).
[30157] Database access The problem is attributable, for instance, to
was unsuccessful.
[30200] Failed in RIS

activation.
There may be a problem with the RIS

module or RIS setup.
error with RIS occurred.


[30204] Because of
Failed in installation.
improperly performed
installation processing, the
system cannot be started.
[30205] Failed in search
processing.
[30206] Failed in initializing The system was unstable.
patient-incidental
information.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
damaged or deleted.
Remedies
- Connect to the network.

- Set a dummy node for THIS HOST (IIP)
(e.g., DICOM Print).
- Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
deleted).
Verify the settings and then restart.
If the same symptom recurs, perform a
reinstallation.
reinstallation.
reinstallation.
Reinstall.

Appx1MT-74
Event
Event Source
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
[30213] Failed in displaying
the preview screen.
occurred.
the registry information
(font name).
(font size).
(multi-byte language
information).
the used language in
system setting.
to the character database.
[31006] Failed in
connecting to the character
database.
to the system setting
database.
[31008] Failed in
setting database.
[31010] Failed in
connecting to the image
database.
Causes
Remedies

An error occurred in the communication
with Ascent View.
Remarks

Restart.






ID input section
Communication error
with the linkage
application
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
The problem is attributable, for instance, to Check whether the SQL service manager
deleted).
[31011] Failed in acquiring - The problem is attributable, for instance, - Check whether the SQL service manager
information from the image to an inactive SQL service manager or
database.
- Software version A07 or earlier was used. normally operating, initialize the image
deleted).
later.
Appx1MT-75
Event
Event Source
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
[31012] Failed in accessing The problem is attributable, for instance, to Check whether the SQL service manager
the image database.
deleted).
[31013] Failed in obtaining The problem is attributable, for instance, to Check whether the SQL service manager
the information from the
image database.
deleted).
information to the image
database.
deleted).
image database.
deleted).
[31016] Failed in
connecting to the flag
database.
deleted).
[31017] Failed in accessing The problem is attributable, for instance, to Check whether the SQL service manager
the flag database.
deleted).
information to the flag
database.
deleted).
[31019] Failed in
initialization process for
damaged or deleted.
menu setting database.
Appx1MT-76
Event
Event Source
Description
the menu information from
the menu setting database.
the menu parameter
information from the menu
setting database.
[31022] Failed in
terminating the menu
setting database.
to the network setting
database.
[31024] Failed in
connecting to the network
setting database.
network setting database.
[31026] Failed in issuing
the image information.

image information.
the image information file.
[31031] Failed in writing the

image information file.
[31032] Failed in releasing

the caption information
(ID#).
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.

Use the DICOM MWM C-FIND Tag Setting
of CL Service Utility to see if Distribution
Code (ID:141) is checked or not.
If checked, uncheck it.
An image-related file was not successfully Restart. If the same symptom frequently
accessed. The problem is attributable to a occurs, replace the disk.
disk.
An image-related file was not successfully Restart. If the same symptom frequently
accessed. The problem is attributable to a occurs, replace the disk.
disk.
damaged or deleted.
Appx1MT-77
Event
Event Source
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
(study#).
(patient name).
(Kanji-patient name).
(sex).
(sex: M).
(sex: F).
(sex: O).
(data of birth).
the system setting
information (ID# input
character limitation).
the system setting
information (Study # input
character limitation).
the system setting
information (ID # padding
format).
the system setting
information (Study #
padding format).
the system setting
information (date of birth
format).
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
Appx1MT-78
Event
Event Source
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Causes
Remedies
[31051] Invalid character is

input in ID #.
input in Study #.
input in patient name.
input in kanji-patient name.
input in sex.
[31056] Invalid format for
date of birth is input.
the requesting department
database.
(requesting dep.).
the item information for
displaying in the requesting
dep. Selection list.
information.
to the requesting
department database.
the technician information
database.
[31063] Failed in caption
information (technician).
the item information for
displaying in the technician
selection list.
the technician information.
to the technician database.
A 2-byte character, @, or other

unacceptable character was contained.
A 1-byte character or other unacceptable
character was contained.
A character other than M, F, and O
was contained.
The entry did not agree with a preselected
birth date format.
damaged or deleted.
Remarks
Make a proper entry.

damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.

Appx1MT-79
Event
Event Source
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
(window size).
[31068] No patient
information is input.
the system setting
information (succeeded
from exposure menu
reservation list).
[31070] Multiple studies
cannot be executed.
Causes
Remedies


Nothing was entered in the patient

Enter at least the patients sex.
information input field.
damaged or deleted.
An attempt was made to start an

examination process with more than one
examination item selected from an
examination waiting list.
[31071] No list is selected. An attempt was made to start execution
with no examination item selected.
[31072] Invalid character is An unacceptable character was contained.
input for film annotation.
[31074] Failed in obtaining The problem is attributable, for instance, to
flag database.

the button image (Clear
button).
the button image (OK
button).
the button image (Cancel
button).
the button image (increment
button).
the button image
(decrement button).
the button image (Next
page button).
the button image (previous
page button).
Remarks
Start an examination process with one

examination item selected.
Select at least one examination item.
It is conceivable that the bitmap file was

damaged or deleted.

deleted).

damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.

Appx1MT-80
Event
Event Source
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
character database.
[31099] An error of
[31100] The image display
process resulted in a failure
while operating in the
image input subsystem.
the pass information (log
saving folder).
[31103] Failed in calling up
the patient information.
[31105] Failed in
terminating the image input
subsystem.
[31106] Failed in
terminating the image input
subsystem.
inputting process in the
image input sub-system.
[31110] Failed in calling up
the exposure menu.
terminating process.
inputting process.
inputting process.
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
damaged or deleted.
faulty.
It is conceivable that the image data or
image information file was damaged.

or deleted.






- Software version A07 or earlier was used. - Upgrade the software to version A08 or
later.
[31114] Failed in specifying The system was unstable.
the urgent processing.
Appx1MT-81
Event
Event Source
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
[31116] Communication line
for monitoring the
connection status with the
Image Reader(%s) has
broken.
[31117] No connection
monitoring response from
the Image Reader(%s).
[31118] Control line with the
Image Reader(%s) has
broken.
[31119] No command
response from the Image
Reader(%s).
[31120] Failed in Image
Reader status control.
[31121] Command
requested to the Image
Reader has not been
executed.
the information (status)
from the Image Reader.
the information (machine
code) from the Image
Reader.
the information (FRUP
version) from the Image
Reader.
[31125] Failed in reconnecting with the Image
Reader.
[31126] Failed in breaking
connection with the Image
Reader.
(Study with QA completed).
the caption (only exposure
competed).
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
It is highly probable that the RU or line was Check the RU and line.
faulty.
faulty.
faulty.
faulty.
faulty.
faulty.
faulty.
faulty.
faulty.
faulty.
faulty.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
Appx1MT-82
Event
Event Source
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
(Study interrupt button).
(Cancel button).
(Study reception tab).
(waiting for study tab).
(waiting for QA tab).
(Waiting for output tab).
(Already output tab).
(All tab).
(Today tab).
the button image (System
button).
(Study reservation button).
(Study start button).
[31141] Patient information
is illegal.
the display group data.
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.

damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
An unacceptable character was contained. Make a proper entry.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.

Appx1MT-83
Event
Event Source
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Causes
Remedies

the exposure menu
information.
the button image (Urgent
button).
the button image (Study
completed button).
the button image (Update
button).
the button image (New
button).
the button image (Repeat
button).
the button image (Re-shoot
button).
the button image (Add
button).
the button image (Delete
button).
the button image (Before
scroll button).
the button image (After
Scroll button).

damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.

Remarks
Appx1MT-84
Event
Event Source
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
the button image (Monitor
mode button).
the button image (QA
button).
the button image (Change
button).
the button image (Rotation/
Inversion button).
the button image (EDR
mode button).
the button image (Image
format button).
the button image (Change
menu parameter button).
the tool tip (New button).
the tool tip (Repeat button).
the tool tip (Re-shoot
button).
the tool tip (Add button).
the tool tip (Delete button).
the tool tip (Before scroll
button).
the tool tip (After scroll
button).
the tool tip (Monitor mode
button).
the tool tip (QA button ).
Causes
Remedies

damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.

Remarks
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
Appx1MT-85
Event
Event Source
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Causes
Remedies

the tool tip (Change button).
the tool tip (Rotation/
Inversion button).
the tool tip (EDR mode
button).
the tool tip (Image format
button).
the tool tip (Change menu
parameter button).
the registry information (Set
No.).
tool tip (Before scroll
button).
the system setting
information (System ID).
the system setting
information (Autodistribution instruction
information).
the system setting
information (Selector
auto-switchover
information).
the system setting
information (Menu
auto-sequence
information).
the system setting
information (Set No.
minimum value
information).

damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
Remarks

damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.



damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
Appx1MT-86
Event
Event Source
31201 FFIIPInImgCtrl
Description
the system setting
information (Set No.
maximum value
information).
the system setting
information (Series
information issuing
method).
[31197] No matching work
ID exists.
[31198] Failed in distribution
process.
Data error. [Detailed error
information 31201 2 items]
Image sizecode error.
InImgReadProc method
parameter error.
31201 FFInImgMonitorCtrl
Data error.%n[%1]

the system setting
information (Patient
information online serial
port No.).
Initialize error. [Detailed
error information 31202 14
items]
Create Instance error.
Directory path get error.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
The contents of the image file did not

agree with those of the image database.
Initialize the image database.

Abnormal data was entered from the RU or Check the RU and the 5000 Series
the 5000 Series equipment.
equipment. Perform an image input
process again or restart.
Illegal image size code when a request
Check the RU and the 5000 Series
was issued for image input.
Illegal image input request method
Check the RU and the 5000 Series
parameters.
Input data was incorrect.
Restart the system.
It is conceivable that the database file was Check the RU and the 5000 Series
damaged or deleted.
An abnormality occurred in the initialization Restart the system. If the same symptom
process. The common probable causes
occurs after a restart, perform a
are as follows:
reinstallation and initialize the image
database.
Installation was not normally ended.
The parameter file was incorrect.
Failed in creating Control Instance.
database.
Failed in acquiring each directory path
name.
database.
Appx1MT-87
Event
Event Source
Description
Causes
Remedies
Thread make error.(Read)
Failed in creating image input thread.
Thread make error.(Disp)
Failed in creating image display thread.
EDR parameter file load

error.
Failed in memory loading of the EDR

processing parameter file.
Image parameter file load

error.
Failed in memory loading of the image

processing parameter file.
GetMessage(THREAD_
END) error.
Failed in acquiring the image input/display

thread startup completion event.
DICOM SCP control run

error.
Failed in DICOM SCP control startup.
GetMessage(DICOM_
RUN_COMPLETE) error.
Failed in acquiring the DICOM SCP control

startup completion event.
PostThreadMessage(IMG_ Failed in requesting for terminating image

END_REQ) error.
input thread.
PostThreadMessage(DISP Failed in requesting for terminating image

_END_REQ) error.
display thread.
GetMessage(THREAD_
COMPLETE) error.
GetMessage(DICOM_END Failed in acquiring the DICOM SCP control

_COMPLETE) error.
termination completion event.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Failed in acquiring the image input/display

thread termination completion event.
Remarks

database.
database.
database.
database.
database.
database.
database.
database.
database.
database.
database.
Appx1MT-88
Event
Event Source
Description
DICOM SCP control

(EndPrc method) error.
Initialize error.%n[%1]

the system setting
information (Patient
information online device
name.).
31203 FFInImgMonitorDispCtrl Method process error.%n
[%1]
31204 FFInImgMonitorDispCtrl Windows API access error.
%n[%1]
31205 FFInImgMonitorDispCtrl Parameter error.%n[%1]
31206 FFInImgMonitorDispCtrl Memory access error.
%n[%1]
31207 FFInImgMonitorDispCtrl Function error.%n[%1]
Causes
Remedies
Failed in requesting for terminating DICOM Restart the system. If the same symptom
SCP control.
database.
Failed in initialization processing.
Restart the system.
damaged or deleted.
An error was detected during method

processing.
Restart the system.

Restart the system.
An abnormal parameter was detected.
Restart the system.
System memory was insufficient.
Restart the system.
An error was detected during internal

processing.
[31207] Failed in setting the The system was unstable.
Image Reader machine
code.
[31208] Failed in obtaining It is conceivable that the bitmap file was
the button image (New
damaged or deleted.
button).
31208 FFInImgMonitorDispCtrl File access error.%n[%1] The system was unstable.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817

the system setting
information (Image rotation/
inversion selectable range).
the button image (frontal
image button).
the button image (Left-right
invert button).
the button image (Up-sidedown invert button).
the button image (180
degree rotation button).
Remarks
Restart the system.

Restart the system.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.

Appx1MT-89
Event
Event Source
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
the button image
(90 degree rotation button).
the system setting
information (Image format
selectable range).
the button image (SINGLE
button).
the button image (TWIN
button).
to the film annotation
database.
[31226] Failed in
connecting characters to
the film annotation
database.
film annotation database.
the system setting
information (upper limit of
No. of output film).
(CS).
(SS).
[31241] Failed in creating
thumbnail images with the
image input subsystem.
[31242] Failed in
processing in image input
subsystem.
[31243] Image format
information is illegal.
Causes
Remedies

damaged or deleted.
Remarks

damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.

or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
- Software version A06 or earlier was used - Upgrade the software to version A07 or
to enter an image from the 5000 plus
later.
Series.
A value in the image file conflicted with a
system setting.
Since a standard setting will be used as a

substitute to continue with the process, no
particular response is required.
Appx1MT-90
Event
Event Source
Description
Causes
Remedies
[31244] Annotation

system setting.
[31245] No. of output film


system setting.
[31246] Distribution code


system setting.
[31247] Image reading

sensitivity is illegal.

system setting.
[31248] Average output

density is illegal.

system setting.
[31249] EDR mode is

illegal.

system setting.
[31250] Image filing mode

is illegal.

system setting.
[31251] Function mode is

illegal.

system setting.
[31252] IP logical size


system setting.
[31253] Contrast shift is

illegal.

system setting.
[31254] Sensitivity shift


system setting.
[31255] There is a
discrepancy between
system setting and image
information.
[31256] There is a
discrepancy between
information.
[31257] There is a
discrepancy between
information.

system setting.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks


system setting.


system setting.

Appx1MT-91
Event
Event Source
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
[31258] There is a
discrepancy between
information.
the image invert/rotate
information.
image format information.
Causes
Remedies

system setting.
Remarks

It is conceivable that the image information Delete the associated examination.

was damaged.
If the same symptom frequently recurs,
system setting.
[31261]Failed in obtaining It is conceivable that the image information Delete the associated examination.
the image format
was damaged.
If the same symptom frequently recurs,
information.
[31262] Film annotation is The registered film mark contained an
Correct the film mark setup with a user
illegal.
unacceptable character.
utility.
damaged or deleted.
(FIX).
damaged or deleted.
(S value).
damaged or deleted.
(SEMI-X).
damaged or deleted.
(Density Ave)
damaged or deleted.
(Density Average).
[31270] Input value is
The entered value contained an
illegal.
unacceptable character or was out of
range or otherwise abnormal.
the system setting
damaged or deleted.
information (Function
selectable range).
function information.
No. of output film.
contrast shift.
Appx1MT-92
Event
Event Source
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
sensitivity shift.
EDR mode information.
FIX mode S value.
SEMI-X mode average
output density.
[31282] Failed in QA
starting process.
the system setting
information (Filing mode
selectable range).
image filing information.
the distribution destination
information.
IP logical size information.
the system setting
information (Distribution
code change).
the system setting
information (Film annotation
change).
the system setting
information (Function
change).
[31294] Failed in
[31295] Failed in
the list display.
[31303] No list (Waiting for
study) is selected.
QA) is selected.
Causes
Remedies
Remarks



damaged or deleted.



damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.


faulty.
faulty.
Appx1MT-93
Event
Event Source
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
output) is selected.
[31306] No list (Already
output) is selected.
[31307] No list (All) is
selected.
[31308] No list (Today) is
selected.
the list (Waiting for study)
display.
the list (Waiting for QA)
display.
the list (Waiting for output)
display.
the list (Already output)
display.
the list (All) display.
the list (Today) display.
[31315] No. of selected
study is illegal. Study
cannot be started.
starting process.
[31317] No. of selected
studies is illegal. QA cannot
be started.
starting process.
starting process.
the system setting
information (Operational
mode after studying).
the button image (Utility
button).
Causes
Remedies

faulty.
faulty.
faulty.
faulty.





Remarks

faulty.


faulty.

damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.

Appx1MT-94
Event
Event Source
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
the patient information.
[31323] Date of birth could
not be converted to the
displaying format.
(Stop alarm button).
[31329] Message from the
Image Reader could not be
displayed.
[31330] Failed in the
obtaining the caption
information (System
Terminating button).
(User Utility button).
(Study list setting button).
(Version displaying button).
(Cancel button).
the button image (Clear
button).
the tool tip information
(Clear button).
the thumbnail images.
[31339] Failed in executing
the dust removing process
starting method of the
Image Reader.
(Cancel button).
Causes
Remedies
Remarks

Illegal birth date information was set.
Delete the associated examination. If the
same symptom recurs after deletion,
damaged or deleted.
The RU software version conflicted with
the message file version on the IIP side or
the RU message file was damaged or
otherwise abnormal.
damaged or deleted.
Confirm software version and setups on

the RU side.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.

damaged or deleted.
The thumbnail image file was damaged,
deleted, or otherwise abnormal.
The RU is not ready for performing the
method.
There are no processing problems except

for the inability to display thumbnail
images. If the same symptom frequently
occurs, initialize the image database.
Check the RU.
damaged or deleted.
Appx1MT-95
Event
Event Source
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
(Cancel button).
[31343] Failed in inputting
images.
[31344] Image size could
not be detected.
the Image Reader error
information.
Causes
Remedies
damaged or deleted.
It is conceivable that there was a problem

with the RU or line.
It is conceivable that there was a problem
with the RU.
The RU software version conflicted with
otherwise abnormal.
[31347] Failed in obtaining The RU software version conflicted with
the Image Reader status
information.
otherwise abnormal.
[31348] Failed in thumbnail The thumbnail image file was damaged,
image creation process.
deleted, or otherwise abnormal.
the list (Waiting for study).
the list (Waiting for QA).
the list (Waiting for output).
the list (Already output).
the list (All).
the list (Today).
[31355] Failed in
customizing the list display.
the system setting
information (Default menu
code).
the tool tip text.
(Title bar).
Remarks
Check the RU and line.

Check the RU.
Check the software version and setup on
the RU side.
Check the software version and setup on
the RU side.
There are no processing problems except

for the inability to display thumbnail
images. If the same symptom frequently
occurs, initialize the image database.
If the same symptom recurs after a restart,
unstable or that the program was faulty.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.

Appx1MT-96
Event
Event Source
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
(Option label).
the version information.
[31362] Option list could
not be obtained.
(Next multiple frame set
No.).
registry information (Next
multi-frame set No.).
the system setting
information (Series issuing
type).
the multi-frame UID
information.
the cassette insertion
enabled image.
the cassette insertion
disabled image.
the image icon (Misexposure).
the button image (Image
style button).
the button image (EDR
button).
the button image (Function
button).
the button image (No. of
output film button).
the button image (IP size
button).
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
damaged or deleted.
or deleted.



damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.

Appx1MT-97
Event
Event Source
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
the button image (Film
format button).
the button image (Filing
button).
the button image (Film
annotation button).
the button image
(Distribution code button).
the button image (CS/SS
button).
the system setting
information (Serial port No.
for connecting to XCON).
the XCON device name.
[31382] Image data line to
the Image Reader(%s) has
broken.
the caption information.
the bit-map file.
the font information.
[31390] The information
about a requesting
department was illegal.
[31391] The information
about a paramedic was
illegal.
[31392] A patient
information search was
unsuccessful.
[31393] Failed in setting up
connection status with the
RIS.
[31394] The line connected
to the RIS was faulty.
Causes
Remedies

damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.

Remarks
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
Check the line.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
The entered information or its format was
in error.

The entered information or its format was

in error.
Nothing matched the entered patient
information.
Check the patient information.
This error is attributable to an RIS problem Check RIS-side status or RIS setup.
or RIS setup problem.
This error is attributable to an RIS problem Check the RIS status and RIS setup.
Appx1MT-98
Event
Event Source
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
[31400]The selected menu
did not exist.
[31401] Path information
(image data folder)
acquisition was not
successful.
[31402] Parameter icon
image acquisition was not
successful.
[31403] Caption information
acquisition was not
successful.
[31404] Failed in
communicating with other
connected device.
[31405] Failed in
evacuating the IP.
IP.
exposure size.
reference position for
exposure.
[31409] No response
comes from other
connected device.
[31410] There is no answer
from the device that ID
information is shared.
[31411] A Study cant
register because the
exposure menu registerd in
IDT isn't registered in IIP.
[31412] An image data line
with the reader is cut off.
[31413] There are some
inconsistency in the IIP-RU
connection setting of the
system configuration.
the caption information (RIS
tab).
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
This error is attributable to an RIS problem Check the RIS status and RIS setup.
or deleted.
damaged or deleted.

damaged or deleted.
This error is attributable to a problem with
the connected equipment or connection
setup.
The connected equipment may be faulty.
Check the connected equipment,

connection setup, and others.
Check the connected equipment.
This error is attributable to an improperly

registered menu.
Check the menu registration information.
The connection setup may be improper.
Check the connection setup.
The database file may be damaged or

deleted.

Appx1MT-99
Event
Event Source
Description
[31416] Some exposure
menus couldnt be
registered.
[31417] An exposure menu
couldnt be registered.
[31418] Failed in the
reference of the reader
device.
[31419] The exposure
condition values to be sent
to the X-ray apparatus was
over the limit.
[31420] A failure occurred
in the communication with
the RIS.
[31422] Failed in registering
the study to the patient
stitching processing.
Causes
Remedies
Remarks

Check the settings.
set menu parameter or other setup failure.
Check the settings.
set menu parameter or other setup failure.
The connection setup may be faulty.
Check the connection setup.
The XCON settings (limit values) were
inconsistent with the exposure condition
preset values for the menus.
There is no practical problem because the

limit values are transferred to the XCON.
It is conceivable that the connected

equipment may be faulty.
The patient information database operation Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
was wrong.

Ensure that only period is used as a
symbol representing a decimal point for
values to be set in OS Settings - Regional
Options. If any symbol other than a period
is used, correct it appropriately.
For details of how to perform settings, see
the section concerned in RI: Reinstalling
the Software.
For Windows 2000
Defining the character to be
used as a decimal point in
2.1.3 Setting the OS
For Windows XP
Defining the character to be
used as a decimal point in
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
[31424] Failed in saving the The system was unstable.

exposure result information.
For Windows Vista

Confirmation of decimal
symbol and digit grouping
symbol (other than Japanese) in
2.3.4 Setting the OS.
Appx1MT-100
Event
Event Source
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
actual exposure result
value.
Causes
Remedies
Invalid characters were used for the

performed procedure step description,
protocol name, or filter type. The radiation
source-to-detector distance or radiation
time did not consist of numerals only.
The film output count or film size ID was
out of range.
[31426] Failed in acquiring Settings may have been corrupted.
coloring information.
distribution processing.
[31428] Failed in displaying The system was unstable.
the study information list.
patient information.
[31430] Failed in acquiring The system was unstable.
[31431] Failed in acquiring The bitmap file may have been damaged
image (background).
or deleted.
[31441] Failed in acquiring It is conceivable that the file was damaged
parameters used for
or deleted. It is also conceivable that the
displaying mammography database file was damaged or deleted.
images.
[31444] Illegal information Polling to the shared folder with the receipt
received from the outside. computer resulted in a failure.
Remarks
No remedial action is needed because the

process will be continuously performed
with the invalid settings replaced with the
standard ones.

recurs, perform a reinstallation.
It is conceivable that the content of the

study received from the receipt computer
does not match the CR Console setting.
Check the connection setting and the
system setting.
[31445] Illegal information The patient cannot be registered because Check to see that characters prohibited to
received from the outside. of a format error that occurred with the text use on the CR Console are not included in
received from the Fujitsu receipt computer. the transmitted information. Retransmit
then the study from the receipt computer,
as necessary.
[31446] An error occurred A study transmitted from the receipt
Check to see that characters prohibited to
for connection with the
computer cannot be registered.
use on the CR Console are not included in
equipment.
the transmitted information. Retransmit
then the study from the receipt computer,
as necessary.
[31456] Failed in obtaining The database file may have been damaged Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
ID input section
or deleted.
(Preview confirmation
message).
[31457] Failed in obtaining The database file may have been damaged Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
ID input section
the first page of the
or deleted.
exposure guidance.
Appx1MT-101
Event
Event Source
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
[31458] Failed in starting
up the exposure guidance.
[31459] Failed in initializing
the exposure guidance.
[31460] Failed in
initialization of dose-area
product meter.
[31461] Failed in
initialization of dose-area
product meter.
[31462] Failed in dose
acquisition from dose-area
product meter.
[31850] Failed in
communicating with X-ray
equipment.
[31851] Failed in registering
a reserved study.
[31852] Failed in starting a
reserved study.
[31853] An error occurred
with connection to the
equipment.
[31854] Failed in searching
a reserved study.
[31855] Received illegal
outside.
[31856] Received illegal
outside.
[32001] The card type is
not acceptable.
Causes
Remedies
The file may have been damaged or

deleted.
A connected device may have a problem.
Remarks

Check status of the connected device.
ID input section
ID input section
ID input section
Check status of the connected device, and ID input section

press the Retry button as required.
Check status of the connected device.

equipment may have a problem or the
network may be unstable.
The system is unstable.
Check status of the connected equipment.
ID input section

recurs, reinstall the system.

equipment may have transmitted illegal
information.
equipment may have transmitted illegal
information.
The employed card type did not agree with
the card type defined by the system setup
data.

Check information transmitted from the
connected equipment.
Check information transmitted from the
Check both the system settings and
employed card type.
Appx1MT-102
Event
Event Source
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
Initialize warning. [Detailed A warning-level error occurred in an image Check whether the SQL service manager
error information 32001 35 database initialization process. The
items]
common probable causes are as follows: occurs while the SQL service manager is
An abnormality occurred when the image database (the entire image data is then
database was accessed.
deleted).
An abnormality occurred when an
information file was accessed.
An abnormality occurred when an image
file was created or referenced for image
file recovery.
The contents of the image database or
information file were illegal.
An unrecoverable image file was
encountered.
DICOM SCP was Not found DICOM SCP is not defined in the
in NetConfigDB.
NetConfigDB.
deleted).
DICOM SCP control status Failed in starting the DICOM SCP control. Check whether the SQL service manager
error.
deleted).
DDO file load error.
Failed in reading the information file (DDO). Check whether the SQL service manager
deleted).
DDO file save error.
Failed in storing the information file. (DDO). Check whether the SQL service manager
deleted).
Size code was not found in There is no size code in the information file Check whether the SQL service manager
DDO.
(DDO).
deleted).
Appx1MT-103
Event
Event Source
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
RecordID was not found in There is no record ID in the information file Check whether the SQL service manager
DDO.
(DDO).
deleted).
HQ file was not found in
There is no HQ image file in the information Check whether the SQL service manager
DDO.
file (DDO).
deleted).
Std file was not found in
There is no standard image file name in
DDO.
the information file (DDO).
deleted).
Image size was not found There is no image size in the information Check whether the SQL service manager
in DDO.
file (DDO).
deleted).
Illegal image size cede.
deleted).
Std file make error.
Standard image generation processing
error.
deleted).
Thumb file make error.
Thumbnail image generation processing
error.
deleted).
FoeEDR file make error.
Reduced image generation processing
error.
deleted).
Appx1MT-104
Event
Event Source
Description
Causes
Remedies
Moire control error.
Standard image generation processing

error.
Thumb control error.
Thumbnail image generation processing

error.
ForEDR control error.
Reduced image generation processing

error.
EDR process error.
EDR processing error.
Jpeg control error.
JPEG processing error.
InfoFileURL was not found The InfoFileURL field cannot be found in

in ImageDB.
the image DB.
InfoFile was EMPTY in

ImageDB.
The InfoFileURL field in the image DB is

EMPTY.
StdImageFileURL was not

found in ImageDB.
The StdImageFileURL field cannot be

found in the image DB.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks

deleted).
deleted).
deleted).
deleted).
deleted).
deleted).
deleted).
deleted).
Appx1MT-105
Event
Event Source
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
ThmImageFileURL was not The ThmImageFileURL field cannot be

found in ImageDB.

deleted).
MaskImageFileURL was
The MaskImageFileURL field cannot be
not found in ImageDB.
deleted).
EDRBackupFileURL was
The EDRBackupFileURL field cannot be
not found in ImageDB.
deleted).
StdImageFileURL set error Failed in registering the standard image
in ImageDB.
file name in the image DB.
deleted).
ThmImageFileURL set error Failed in registering the thumbnail image Check whether the SQL service manager
in ImageDB.
file name in the image DB.
deleted).
MaskImageFileURL set
Failed in registering the reduced image file Check whether the SQL service manager
error in ImageDB.
name in the image DB.
deleted).
ImageDB
Image DB access error.
access(get_Fields) error.
deleted).
ImageDB access error.
deleted).
Appx1MT-106
Event
Event Source
Description
Causes
Remedies
UpdateCloseRec error.
Create file error.
Failed in creating a file.
File open error.
Failed in opening a file.
File close error.
Failed in closing a file.
File read error.
Failed in reading a file.
File write error.
Failed in writing a file.
Initialize warning.%n[%1]
A warning-level error occurred during

A simple read error occurred or the
problem might have been caused by
damaged contents of a card or a broken
magnetic card reader.
A warning-level error was found in
information file data.
32001 FFInImgMonitorDispCtrl Initialize warning.%n[%1]


the card.
Data not found.(warning)

[Detailed error information
32002 1 item]
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks

deleted).
deleted).
deleted).
deleted).
deleted).
deleted).
Nothing particular. (Processing was
continued.)
Nothing particular. (Processing was
continued.)
Read the card again. If the same symptom
recurs, check the contents of the card and
the magnetic card reader.
Nothing in particular. (The data found
abnormal was replaced by the default
value to continue with the process.)
Appx1MT-107
Event
Event Source
Description
Causes
Remedies
Data not found.
There is no data in the information file

(DDO).
Data not found.(warning)

%n[%1]
A warning-level error was detected in the

32002 FFInImgMonitorDispCtrl Data not found.(warning)
A warning-level error was detected in the

A process request was issued while an

initialization or termination process was
being performed.
Image display request method execution
timing error after ID information was
changed.
method processing.
%n[%1]
Status warning. [Detailed

item]
Status error.(IDInfoChange
method)
Status warning.%n[%1]
32003 FFInImgMonitorDispCtrl Status warning.%n[%1]

010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
[32012] Illegal information

has been detected in the
the IP#.
[32040] The number of
studies exceeds the
maximum number of
transmissions. Unable to
transmit.
[32041] Information in
received study is invalid.
Unable to receive the study
result.
[32042] Failed in calculating
EI or DI.
Remarks
Nothing in particular. (The data found

abnormal was replaced by the default
value to continue with the process.)
Nothing particular. (The error data was
replaced by the default value and
processing was continued.)
Nothing in particular. (The process request
was rejected.)
Nothing in particular. (Processing
requested was rejected.)

method processing.
The problem was caused, for instance, by Check the contents of the card.
an invalid character contained in the
contents of the card.
The problem was caused, for instance, by Check the contents of the barcode.
an incompatible barcode format.
The number of studies to be sent to the
Decrease the number of studies to be sent
PDA exceeded the maximum limit.
to the PDA.
Actual results of studies already subjected Check both the PDA and CL studies.
to exposure were received from the PDA.
The input parameter (DDO file) is invalid.

The ExposureIndex.prm file is illegal
(reading error or correction error).
[34001] The same patient The card read was about the patient whose
information has been input. examination was being conducted.
[34002] A certain
The last examination was ended abruptly
examination finished before during an image read process (due, for
the completion of an image instance, to a power failure).
read.
Reperform exposure.
Correct the ExposureIndex.prm file.
This dialog box merely opens to attract the
users attention. No particular response is
required.
Check information sent by the connected
device.
Appx1MT-108
Event
Event Source
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Causes
Remedies
[34084] Illegal information

was transmitted from the
RIS.
Illegal information was received from the

RIS.
Information of the started study includes
the one that is not allowed for the CR
Console.
[34085] Communication
A connected device may have a problem
with the RIS was disabled. or the network can be unstable.
[34091] An unknown error An error of unknown cause occurred with
occurred in an attempt to
the connection to the Toshiba RIS.
connect to the RIS.
[34092] A failure occurred The system was unstable.
when starting the ordered
study.
[34094] A failure occurred An attempt to inform the RIS of the
when notifying the RIS of
changed technologist resulted in a failure.
the changed technologist.
[34095] A failure occurred Communication with the RIS at startup of
in communication with the an ordered study resulted in a failure.
RIS at startup of a study.
[34096] A failure occurred Communication with the RIS at the end of
in communication with the an order study resulted in a failure.
RIS when finishing a study.
[34097] A failure occurred

when changing the RIS
user.
[34098] Failed in
communicating with other
connected device.
[34107] Do you wish to
delete markers and execute
the operation?

Display of RIS view screen was disabled.
When rotating a marker-specified image,
determine whether or not to delete the
markers.
Remarks
Correct the information properly and then

restart the study from the RIS.
Reconnect. If the same symptom recurs,

check status of the connected device.
Restart.
Restart.
Determine the same technologist both for
the RIS and the CR Console.
Stop the study exposure started via the
Toshiba RIS and then restart it.
Confirm the actual exposure result. If
information of the actual exposure result is
not reflected appropriately on the data,
input it on the RIS screen.
If the same symptom remains, restart the
relevant system.
Match technologist registration information
of this equipment with that of the
connected device.
Restart the relevant system. If the same
symptom remains, check settings for
connection of the connected device.
When the [Yes] button is pressed, the
ID input section
markers are deleted and the image with no
markers is rotated. When the [No] button is
pressed, the image is rotated without
deleting the markers.
Re-perform image stitching.
ID input section
[34109] Images were input This error message is issued if the 3rd
during the preview display. image is input while 2 stitched images are
being previewed.
[34112] One of the target
Image stitching was performed while 1 of Re-perform image stitching after the
ID input section
menus for stitching is in
the 2 menus targeted for stitching
completion of image input in the menu that
progress.
processing was being processed.
is in process.
Appx1MT-109
Event
Event Source
Description
Causes
Remedies
[34310] Patient information Patient information of the same patient ID

of the same patient ID
number has been changed.
number has been changed.
[34842] Incorrect password. Input password data is incorrect.
Memory allocate error.

[E1027]
Socket recv buffer.
Pantomo work buffer.
ImgReadProcess memory
allocate error.
Memory Exception error.
Disp Qeue param.
Read qeue param.
ReadThread main param.
JpegThread main param.
Image Data area.
Image Time area.
DICOMDataObj set data

area.
EDR data.
EDR out data.
Disp image data.
GammaTable(LUT) area.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
SkGp Image area.
Pressing the YES button will overwrite

the patient information to continue
necessary processing. Press the NO
button to continue processing without
overwriting the patient information. To
suspend processing, press the Cancel
button.
Input a correct password.
Sufficient memory was not available to the

system.
Failed in acquiring the socket reception
buffer.
Failed in acquiring the pantomography
reading buffer.
Failed in memory acquisition.
Restart.
Failed in memory acquisition.
Restart.
An exception generated when acquiring

memory.
Failed in acquiring an image display
queue.
Failed in acquiring an image reading
queue.
Failed in acquiring image input thread
parameters.
Failed in acquiring JPEG compression
thread parameters.
Failed in acquiring image reading date
area.
Failed in acquiring image reading time
area.
Failed in acquiring information file (DDO)
setup memory area.
Failed in acquiring EDR image separation
processing area.
Failed in acquiring EDR image separation
processing area.
Image display area.
Restart.
Failed in acquiring image area after

normalization processing.
Failed in acquiring the processing table.
Restart.
Remarks
ID input section
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Appx1MT-110
Event
Event Source
39001 FFRUInpImgMgr
39002 FFRUInpImgMgr
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Beta param area.
Causes
Remedies
Failed in acquiring the processing

parameter area.
DRC param area.
Failed in acquiring the DRC processing
parameter area.
MFP-DRC param area.
Failed in acquiring the MFP-DRC
processing parameter area.
MFP-USM param area.
Failed in acquiring the MFP-USM
processing parameter area.
Initialization failed. %n[%1] The initialization process was not
successfully performed.
System memory was insufficient.
%n[%1]
Message post/get error.
39002 5 items]
PostThreadMessage (%s) Failed in (%s) message transmission while
error.
in image input processing.
PostMessage error.
Failed in message transmission while in
image input processing.
GetMessage (%s) error.
Failed in (%s) message reception while in
image input processing.
GetMessage error.
Failed in message reception while in image
input processing.
Post/Get Message error.
Failed in message transmission/reception
while in image input processing.
Finalize Failed. %n[%1]
The finalization process was not
successfully performed.
Message post/get error.
%n[%1]
IIPInImg control error.
An abnormality was found in the IIP input
[Detailed error information image process.
39003 19 items ]
Get DispatchID error.
Failed in setting DICOM SCP control
Property = %s
properties (%s).
Invoke error. Property = %s Failed in setting DICOM SCP control
properties (%s).
Failed in viewing DICOM SCP control
Property = %s
properties (%s).
Invoke error. Property = %s Failed in viewing DICOM SCP control
properties (%s).
Failed in performing the DICOM SCP
Method = %s
control method (%s).
Remarks
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Appx1MT-111
Event
Event Source
Description
Remedies
Invoke error. Method = %s Failed in performing the DICOM SCP

control method (%s).
DispQeue was full.
Failed in registering an image display
queue.
DispQeue status error.
Failed in registering an image display
queue (illegal status).
Thumbnail image disp
Failed in displaying a pre-reading image.
error.
EDR/ID image disp error.
Failed in displaying a processed image.
Data not found.
Image File Path get error.
File name set error.(%s)
JPEG Thread error.
Image process error(%s).
Input image control error.
File type error.
Img type error.
Exception error.
39003 FFRUInpImgMgr
Invalid Status. %n[%1]
Disp control(%s Method)

error.
EDR control (%s) error.
Causes
CR-Image control error.

39004 13 items]
The relevant menu code cannot be found

in the image processing parameters.
Failed in acquiring the directory path name
of the image file.
Failed in setting the (%s) file name in the
information file (DDO).
Failed in creating a JPEG compression
thread.
Failed in starting the image processing
control.
Internal discrepancy found during input
image processing.
image processing.
image processing.
An exception found during input image
processing.
The status was invalid.
An abnormal end was found in an image
file creation process or image display
process.
The problem is attributable to a disk.
Image display processing error (method
name: %s).
Error occurred during EDR processing
(processing ID:%s).
Error occurred during EDR processing.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
EDR process error.
HQ file create error.(%s)
Error occurred during reduced image

Restart.
creation processing.
Failed in creating an HQ image file (file ID). Restart.
Image Jpeg-compress
error.
Error occurred during JPEG compression

processing.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
ForEDR control error.
Remarks
Restart.
Restart.
Appx1MT-112
Event
Event Source
Description
Image process error.(%s)
ImageDB/DDO access
error.(%s)
Jpeg control (%s) error.
Miore control error.
SkGp control (%s) error.
Thumbnail control error.
39004 FFRUInpImgMgr
Thread Invoke failed.

%n[%1]
CR-Image control error.
%n[%1]
Pipe error. [Detailed error
information 39005 1 item ]
Pipe create error.(%s)
39005 FFRUInpImgMgr
39006
39006
39006
39006
Socket Access Failed.

%n[%1]
Pipe error. %n[%1]
Causes
Remedies
Failed in starting the image processing

control. (Internal processing name: %s)
Illegal image size code.
Restart.
Error occurred in access to the image DB

or information file (DDO).
Error occurred during JPEG processing
(processing ID: %s).
Error occurred during standard image
creating processing.
Error occurred during normalization
processing. (Processing ID:%s)
Error occurred during thumbnail image
creating processing.
Thread creation was not successfully
completed.
An error was detected during image
processing.
The system remains unstable.
Restart.
Restart.
Failed in creating a pipe. (Pipe type: %s)
Restart.
A socket communication error occurred.
Check the network status and then restart

the system.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
File error. [Detailed error

The system remains unstable.
information 39006 7 items]
File error.
Failed in accessing the file.
Restart.
File error(%s).
Restart.
Restart.
FFIIPInImgCtrl
Create file error.
Failed in accessing the file. (Processing

type.)
Failed in file creation processing.
FFIIPInImgCtrl
CreateFileMapping error.
Failed in file mapping processing.
Restart.
FFIIPInImgCtrl
MapViewOfFile error.
Restart.
FFIIPInImgCtrl
EDRImageFile mapping
error.
File mapping error.
Failed in mapping the reduced image file

before EDR processing.
Restart.
System Function Call

Failed. %n[%1]
File error.%n[%1]
An error was returned by a system call

(Win32 API, etc.).
Restart.
Data not found.(error)

39007 3 items]
The data in the image database or

information file was abnormal.
39006 FFRUInpImgMgr
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Make an exposure again. If the error
recurs, initialize the image database (the
entire image data is then deleted).
Appx1MT-113
Event
Event Source
Description
Causes
Remedies
Data not found. / DDO Data The relevant VR cannot be found in the
not found.
Data not found.(%s) / DDO The relevant data cannot be found in the
Data not found.(%s)
%s GetVR error.
Failed in acquiring VR shown by %s.
39007 FFRUInpImgMgr
Invalid data was received from the RU.
Invalid Receive Data.

%n[%1]
Data not found.(error)
%n[%1]
DB access error. [Detailed
items]
ImageDB key get error.
Image DB key name acquisition error.
ImageDB connect error.
Image DB connection error.
Image DB open error.
ImageDB OpenRecordset
error.
ImageDB get_Fields error.
ImageDB get_Item error.
Image DB viewing error.
ImageDB get_Value error.
ImageDB put_Value error.

Data:%s
ImageDB SetValue
error.(%s)
ImageDB (%s) set error.
Image DB setup error.
DICOM&ImageDB data set

error.
ImageDB UpdateRecordset
error.
ImageDB CloseRecordset
error.
ImageDB close error.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks

There is an error in the image database/

Restart.
An abnormality occurred when a database Restart. If the same symptom frequently
was accessed.
occurs, perform a reinstallation.

Image DB update error.

Image DB close error.
Image DB close error.

Appx1MT-114
Event
Event Source
Description
Causes
ImageDB: ReceiveFlag set ReceiveFlag setup error.

error.
ImageDB access error.
ImageDB access(%s) error. Image DB access error.
ImageDB access error.(%s) Image DB access error.
SysConfig DB access error. SysConfig DB access error.
Net Config DB access

error.
Insufficient memory.
%n[%1]
DB access error.%n[%1]
39008 FFIIPInImgMgr
39009 FFIIPInImgMgr
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Socket access error.

39009 5 items]
Socket error.
Remedies
NetConfig DB access error.

The available memory was insufficient.
Remarks

Restart.
An error occurred with accessing to several Restart.

databases.
The problem is attributable to a
disconnected RU or the like.
Error occurred during socket generation

termination processing.
Socket connect error.
Error occurred during socket connection
processing.
Socket close error.
Error occurred during socket disconnection
processing.
Socket recv error.
Error occurred while receiving data from
the socket.
Socket recv time out.
Timeout detected while receiving data from
the socket.
Create Dicom Data Object Data object creation was not successfully
Failed. %n[%1]
completed.
DICOMDataObj data area. An exception occurred when accessing to
the information file (DDO).
Exception error.
Exception handling was done.
39010 5 items]
Exception error. Property = An exception occurred when setting
%s
DICOM SCP control properties (%s).
Exception error. Method = An exception occurred when performing
%s
the DICOM SCP control method (%s).
Exception error. / Exception An exception occurred. (Processing type.)
error.(%s)

Restart.
Appx1MT-115
Event
Event Source
Description
Memory Exception error.
39010 FFIIPInImgMgr
Input Image Operation is

Busy. %n[%1]
Exception error.%n[%1]
39010 FFInImgMonitorDispCtrl Exception error.%n[%1]
[39035] Unable to obtain
39901 FFInitializingStudy
39902 FFInitializingStudy
40200 FFQAMsgBox
40201 FFQAMsgBox
40202 FFQAMsgBox
40203 FFQAMsgBox
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
study UID from the list

(worklist).
[39044] No list has been
selected.
input processing.
[%1]
An exception error
occurred(%2).
[%1]
%2.
[40001] An error of
occurred.
Process Communication
Control Error.
[File Name] [Function Name]
[Error Code]
Journal Proc Failure.
[Error Code]
CustomMessageCtrl
Access Failure.
[Error Code]
Image DB Access Control
Error.
[Error Code]
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
An exception occurred while acquiring

memory.
The disk was full or the connection limit
was exceeded by the input request (busy
state).

This is not an operating error. Wait a while
and then input again.
Restart.
Information coming from the RIS may not

include study UID.
Include study UID in the information that

comes from the RIS.
Restart.
There may be a problem on the connection Check the connection device status.
device side.
A failure occurred in an attempt to acquire Restart the system. If the same failure
an image from the Image Reader.
recurs, restart both the Image Reader and
the system.
Restarting the Image Reader disables
image retransmission from it to the system.
If the same error recurs even after
restarting the Image Reader, contact our
maintenance personnel.
Restart.
An error occurred.
Restart.

Restart.

with Ascent View.
Communication error
with the linkage
application
Restart.
The method return value for the interprocess communication control resulted in
an error.
The method return value for the log save
control resulted in an error.
Restart.
The return value for the custom message

box control resulted in an error.
Restart.
The method return value for the image

database access control resulted in an
error.
Restart.
Appx1MT-116
Event
Event Source
40204 FFQAMsgBox
40205 FFQAMsgBox
40206 FFQAMsgBox
40207 FFQAMsgBox
40208 FFQAMsgBox
40209 FFQAMsgBox
40210 FFQAMsgBox
40211 FFQAMsgBox
Description
Media DB Access Control
Error.
[Error Code]
API Error.
[Error Code]
SysConfig DB Access
Error.
[Error Code]
LangStr DB Access Error.
[Error Code]
LangMsgBox DB Access
Error.
[Error Code]
Flag DB Access Error.
[Error Code]
Return value of a
ImgDeliveryCom makes an
error.
[Error Code]
NetConfig DB Access Error.
[Error Code]
[41001] The device is not

ready.
[41002] Remaining capacity
is insufficient.
[41003] Destination for file
copy is illegal.
[41004] E-mail program
cannot be started.
[41005] No data cannot be
written on the disk.
[41106] Hard Disk Full.
41107 FFCustomMsgBo
[41107] Hard Disk Full.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Causes
Remedies
The method return value for the media

database access control resulted in an
error.
Remarks
Restart.
The method return value for the interRestart.

process communication API resulted in an
error.
An error occurred with connection/
disconnection/value acquisition/value
setup for the system setup database
access API.
disconnection of the character string
database access API.
disconnection of the message box
database access API.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
An error occurred with connection/value

Restart.
acquisition/value setup/disconnection of
the flag database access.
Restart.
distribution instruction component resulted
in an error.
disconnection/value acquisition/value
setup for the network setup database
(irreplaceable).
No media was set in position.
Restart.
The file to be copied was too large to fit

onto the media at the receiving end.
An invalid pathname was specified as the
file copy destination.
Outlook was not properly set up.
Set media that is appropriate for the

device.
Switch to larger-capacity media.
Check the system setup.
Exit IIP and then complete Outlook setup.
The disk was write-protected or damaged. Check the disk.

The hard disk was full.
Exit QA, delete unnecessary images from

the list, and retry the distribution.
Exit QA, delete unnecessary images from
the list, and retry the distribution.
Appx1MT-117
Event
Event Source
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
the LUT file for JPEG
Image.
[41109] A menu of a
different modality has been
selected.
[41110] Failed in access to
the image database.
the image database.
the image database.
the image file.
[41114] Failed in saving the
information.
the image file.
information.
information.
output processing.
[41119] Failed in QA startup
processing.
the image file.
[41130] Failed in replacing
an image.
[41131] Study information
cannot be modified.
[41140] The function cannot
be implemented.
[41141] An error occurred.
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
No JPEG image gradation correction file is Check the correction file.

available or the format is illegal.
A menu of a different modality was
selected.
Select a menu of the same modality.

Check targets involved in the shared host.
It is conceivable that the shared host has

not been started.
It is conceivable that QA processing was
performed on other equipment.
not been started.
not been started.
not been started.
not been started.
not been started.
not been started.
Check other equipment or perform another

study.

not been started.
No extension menus have been registered. Check menu registration information.
It is conceivable that system settings for

Check the settings.
the study # and ID # have been changed.
A function that was called up did not match Check the customized settings.
the optional system settings.
Reinstall the program if the same symptom
recurs after restarting the equipment.
[41150] Failed in file output A failure occurred in accessing the
processing.
transmission file. The system may have
been unstable.
[41151] There is no free
Exit QA processing, delete unnecessary
space on the hard disk.
images from the list, and retry output
processing.
Appx1MT-118
Event
Event Source
41200 FFQAMsgBox
41201 FFQAMsgBox
41202 FFQAMsgBox
41203 FFQAMsgBox
41210 FFQAMsgBox
42200 FFQAMsgBox
42201 FFQAMsgBox
42202 FFQAMsgBox
42203 FFQAMsgBox
42204 FFQAMsgBox
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
[41152] Free space is
insufficient on the
destination for output.
HDD FULL.
[Error Code]
The specified path does not
exist.
[Error Code]
Media are not ready.
[Error Code]
The capacity of copy place
media is insufficient.
[Error Code]
Return value of a
ImgDeliveryCom makes an
error.
[Error Code]
Cant Get Bitmap
(Processing continuation).
[Error Code]
CustomMessageCtrl
Access Failure(Processing
continuation).
[Error Code]
SysConfig DB Access
Failure(Processing
continuation).
[Error Code]
LangStr DB Access
Failure(Processing
continuation).
[Error Code]
LangMsgBox DB Access
Failure(Processing
continuation).
[Error Code]
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
Exit QA processing, delete unnecessary

images from the list, and retry output
processing.
Increase the free hard disk space and then
retry operation.

The specified path was not found.
Check path settings.
No media was ready.
Check the media status.
The capacity of the media targeted for

copy was insufficient.
Replace the media for anyone of larger

capacity.

Check the destination for image distribution
distribution instruction component resulted and then retry.
in an error. (Processing other than image
distribution can be continued.)
Failed in acquiring a bitmap (replaceable). Reinstall the program.
The return value for the custom message

box control resulted in an error.
Reinstall the program.
An error occurred when obtaining a system Reinstall the program.

setup database access API value or the
obtained value was illegal (replaceable).
An error occurred when obtaining a
character string database access API
value (replaceable).
The return value for the message box

database access API resulted in an error.
Appx1MT-119
Event
Event Source
42205 FFQAMsgBox
42206 FFQAMsgBox
42207 FFQAMsgBox
42209 FFQAMsgBox
42210 FFQAMsgBox
42211 FFQAMsgBox
42212 FFQAMsgBox
42214 FFQAMsgBox
42299 FFQAMsgBox
43000 FFQAManagerCom
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Causes
Remedies
FF32 Access Failure

The return value for the FF32 library (FF32.
(Probably acquisition of
dll) resulted in an error.
Registry goes wrong.)
[File Name] [Function Name] * When acquiring an optional key registry,
[Error Code]
no error will be registered even if no key
is available.
Tag Information Access
No tag information was set up though it
Failure(Processing
must have been set up beforehand
continuation).
(replaceable).
[Error Code]
NetConfig DB Access
An error occurred when obtaining a
Failure(Processing
network setup database value or obtained
continuation).
value was not correct (replaceable).
[Error Code]
FF32 Access Failure
Failed in obtaining/setting an FF32 library
(Processing continuation). value (replaceable).
[Error Code]
Invalid function ID Number. An illegal function ID (disregard).
[Error Code]
Data is not found in
No custom setup database registered
CustomScreenDB.
(processing can be continued).
[Error Code]
LogFile Access Failure.
Failed in accessing the log file.
[Error Code]
The amount of adjustments The amount of position adjustment is set to
is 0.
0 (zero).
[Error Code]
Data resource access error. A clustering resource access error
[File Name] [Function Name] (processing can be continued).
[Error Code]
%S
Information for development personnel.
Cant Get FontSize

Information.
Cant Get FontSize
Information.

The font size was not registered in the

registry.
The font size was not registered in the
registry.
Remarks
Use default information for processing.

There is no operational problem.
There is no operational problem.
Register custom setup database using the

customization setting displayed on the
User Utility window.
Manually adjust the positioning amount
from the trimming dialog.
Check network connection status.
There are operational problems.
A character string is
placed in the %S
position.
Appx1MT-120
Event
Event Source
43201 FFIIPQACtrl
44200 FFQAMsgBox
44201 FFQAMsgBox
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Cant Get Caption
Information.
[Control: %1,
Function: %2 , Code: %3]
[Control: %1,
[Control: %1,
[Control: %1,
[Control: %1,
Cant Access Local
Configuration Data.
Focus Set Failure.
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
The character string database did not exist

or was damaged.
or was damaged.
or was damaged.
or was damaged.
or was damaged.
or was damaged.
The language setup data was not obtained.

The focus cannot be determined properly. There is no particular problem with
operations. (The focus cannot be
determined properly because the
annotation character input dialog has been
inactivated.) After shutting the
magnification function, input of annotation
characters becomes possible.
[Control: %1,
The screen size was not obtained.
[Control: %1,
The language setup data was not obtained. Reinstall the IIP because the displayed
The method return value for the log
Restart the system.
[File Name] [Function Name] storage control resulted in an error.
[Error Code]
An unexpected Method
An unexpected method call (called up at
Restart the system.
call.
an impossible timing, being possible
[File Name] [Function Name] though to continue processing).
[Error Code]
[44262] The maximum
Automatic marker setting was attempted
Delete unnecessary markers so that there QA section
settable number of
on an image where the number of
are 4 or less, and reperform the setting.
automatic markers
automatic markers allowed for one
exceeded.
exposure menu was exceeded.
[44263] Do you wish to
The image was rotated/flipped with
Press the [Yes] button to delete the
QA section
delete markers and execute markers determined on it.
markers so that the image is rotated/flipped
the operation?
appropriately. Press the [No] button to
rotate/flip the image without deleting the
markers.
Appx1MT-121
Event
Event Source
Description
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
[44266] Markers are not

being selected.
Press the [Yes] button to determine image

makers for the exposure menu as the
automatic markers. Press the [No] button
not to perform the setting of automatic
markers.
[44268] Automatic markers The setting of automatic markers was
Press the [Yes] button to delete already
will be registered.
performed for an exposure menu for which registered automatic markers and
automatic markers have already been
determine image markers as the automatic
determined.
markers. Press the [No] button not to make
any changes in the setting of the automatic
markers.
[44269] Automatic markers Automatic marker setting was performed
Perform automatic marker setting on
cannot be set up.
on an image retrieved from media.
images input from the Image Reader.
[44270] Automatic markers Automatic marker setting was performed
Perform automatic marker setting on
cannot be set up.
on an image retrieved from external
images input from the Image Reader.
device.
[44354] Invalid character
The entered data was abnormal due, for
has been input in ID #.
instance, to the inclusion of an
has been input in Study #. instance, to the inclusion of an
has been input in patient
name.
has been input in kanjiinstance, to the inclusion of an
patient name.
has been input in the sex
(gender).
[44359] Format of date of The entry did not agree with the date
birth is not applicable.
format defined by system setup.
[44360] The same study
An attempt was made to enter an
Enter another number.
No. already exists.
examination number that was already
used.
[44361] Anatomical region An anatomical region name was not
has not been input.
entered.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
The setting of automatic markers was

attempted on an image with an exposure
menu where automatic markers are
already-registered, though no markers
have been determined on the same image.
[44267] Automatic markers The setting of automatic markers was
will be registered.
performed for an exposure menu for which
no automatic markers have been
determined.
Press the [Yes] button to delete the already QA section

registered automatic markers. Press the
[No] button not to make any changes in the
setting of the automatic markers.
QA section
QA section
QA section
QA section
Appx1MT-122
Event
Event Source
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
has been input in the
anatomical region.
has been input in the kanjianatomical region.
[44364] No menu name
has been input.
has been input in the menu
name.
has been input in the kanjimenu name.
has been input in the film
annotation characters.
[44368] No patient
information has been input.
[44369] The Study ID
contained an invalid
character.
[44392]The maximum
number of View Modifiers
settable exceeded.
[44393] View modifier code
sequence items cannot be
changed.
Causes
Remedies

A menu name was not entered.

The patient information was not entered.

The 5th View Modifier was selected.
Remarks


Select View Modifiers so that the total

number is 4 or less.
It is not allowed to set up view code

modifier for an image with no view code
information.
QA section
Change system configuration of the

exposure menu so that view code
information can be set up appropriately
and then re-input an image.
[44394] Information that
System configuration of the view code
Press [OK] to cancel inconsistent
contradicts with the system modifier set up for the image was changed. information and to display the view code
configuration exists in the
modifier change window.
View Modifier Code
Press [Cancel] not to change the view
Sequences specified on
code modifier.
images.
[44551] Film format will be This window opens for confirmation only.
changed.
[44603] Failed in automatic An error occurred while in automatic image Check order and orientation of images.
linkage of stitching images. stitching processing.
[44604] Automatic stitching The automatic image stitching button was Press [OK] to perform automatic image
will be performed and the pressed.
stitching processing. When doing so,
data will be stored.
results of fine adjustment processing will
be discarded.
Press [Cancel] to return to the current
dialog box.
QA section
QA section
QA section
QA section
Appx1MT-123
Event
Event Source
49200 FFQAMsgBox
49201 FFQAMsgBox
49202 FFQAMsgBox
49203 FFQAMsgBox
49204 FFQAMsgBox
49298 FFQAMsgBox
49299 FFQAMsgBox
50000 FFFinpSend
50000 FFOutImgPrc
Description
Causes
Remedies
[44732] Failed in calculating The input parameter (DDO file) is invalid.

EI or DI.
The ExposureIndex.prm file is illegal
(reading error or correction error).
FF32 Error.
The return value for the FF32 library (FF32.
[File Name] [Function Name] dll) resulted in an error (irreplaceable).
[Error Code]
Method Argument Error.
A method argument type error (for
[File Name] [Function Name] instance, there were no objects).
[Error Code]
Cant get Tag Information. No tag information was set up though it
[File Name] [Function Name] must have been set up beforehand
[Error Code]
(irreplaceable).
Memory or Resource
Failed in acquiring memory/handle
cannot be gained.
resources.
[Error Code]
Windows API error
Windows API return value resulted in an
occurred.
error.
[Error Code]
Secondary detection code An error occurred with the return value of
Error.
the secondary detection code.
[Error Code]
Exception Error occurred. An exceptional error (an error detected
[File Name] [Function Name] with Try/Catch, OnErrorGoto).
[Error Code]
Memory Error.%n%1
The system was abnormal (memory
allocation was not accomplished).
Initialize Error.%n%1
An abnormality was encountered during
initialization.
50000 FFOutImgPrc2
Initialize Error.%n%1
An error occurred during initialization

processing.
[50001] Failed in
initialization process.
Output option setup was not completed.

50001 FFFinpSend
Dicom Data Object Load

Error.%n%1
Initialize Error.%n[%1]
The DicomDataObject file for output was

not found.
Initialization process error.
50001 FFIIPOUTPUT
Output control was not exercised.

The error check method was not
successfully called.
A certain other program error occurred.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
Reperform exposure.
Correct the ExposureIndex.prm file.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.

Restart.
Perform output option setup.
Perform a reinstallation.
Appx1MT-124
Event
Event Source
Description
50001 FFOutImgPrc
DB Connect Error.%n%1
50001 Spooler
Initialize Error.%n[%1]
50001 FFOutImgPrc2
DB Connect Error.%n%1
[50002] Failed in output

process.
File Open Error.%n%1
50002 FFFinpSend
50002 FFIIPOUTPUT
State Change
Error.%n[%1]
Causes
Remedies
An abnormality occurred in the connection Check whether the SQL service manager
to a database.
deleted).
Output section
container.
No output control was exercised.
An error check method call was
unsuccessful.
Other program error.
An abnormality occurred in the connection Check whether the SQL service manager
to a database.
deleted).
Restart. If the same symptom recurs after
a restart, perform a reinstallation.
There is no output raw data file.
Reinstall.
State transition notification process error.
50002 FFOutImgPrc
The output destination was not

successfully reregistered.
The state transition notification call was
not successful.
An unknown program error occurred.
DB Information Error.%n%1 The database information was abnormal.
50002 Spooler
State Change Error.%n[%1] State change notification process error.
50002 FFOutImgPrc2
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
Restart.

Restart.
An output destination was not

successfully registered.
A state change notification call was not
successful.
Line establishment message transmission
error [not used].
Line abnormality message transmission
error [not used].
DB Infomation Error.%n%1 The database information was abnormal. Restart. If the same symptom frequently
process.
Output section
container.
Appx1MT-125
Event
Event Source
50003 FFFinpSend
50003 FFIIPOUTPUT
Description
Causes
Remedies
File Read Error.%n%1
The output raw data file is abnormal.
Reinstall.
Routine Change
Error.%n[%1]
Routine change process error.
Restart.
50003 FFOutImgPrc
System Error.%n%1
50003 Spooler
Routine Change
Error.%n[%1]
The resumption request was not

successfully made.
The system was abnormal.
Routine change process error.
A resumption request was not
successfully made.
The system was abnormal.

Restart.
50003 FFOutImgPrc2
System Error.%n%1

process.
50004 FFFinpSend
FinpSend Error.%n%1
50004 FFIIPOUTPUT
Spool Error.%n[%1]
Spool process error.
I/F Timing Error.%n%1
The spool request call was not

successfully made.
The reoutput request was not
successfully made.
The study termination notification was not
successfully made.
The spool request response status was
invalid.
An interface abnormality was encountered. Restart.
Spool Error.%n[%1]
I/F Timing Error.%n%1
A spool request call was not successfully

made.
A reoutput request was not successfully
made.
An examination end notification was not
successful.
The spool request response state was
illegal.
An interface abnormality was encountered. Restart.
50004 FFOutImgPrc
50004 Spooler
50004 FFOutImgPrc2
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
- An exposure menu name with an

apostrophe was used with software
version A07 or earlier.
An abnormality occurred in the output
sequence.
Remarks
Output section
container.

later.
Restart.
Restart.
Output section
container.
Appx1MT-126
Event
Event Source
50005 FFIIPOUTPUT
50005 FFOutImgPrc
50005 Spooler
50005 FFOutImgPrc2
50006 FFIIPOUTPUT
50006 FFOutImgPrc
50006 FFOutImgPrc2
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
process.
ExeOutput Error.%n[%1]
CreateFileMapping
Error.%n%1
ExeOutput Error.%n[%1]
CreateFileMapping
Error.%n%1
process.
Image Proc Error.%n[%1]
Causes
Remedies
Remarks

Restart.
Forced-output process error.
The spool forced output request call was

not successfully made.
The queue forced output response
message was not successfully
transmitted.
File mapping was unachievable.
Restart.
Forced output process error.
Restart.
Output section
container.
A spool forced output request was not

A queue forced output response message
was not successfully transmitted.
File mapping was unachievable.
Restart.
Image processing error.

Restart.
The image processing request call was

The image processing setup completion
call was not successfully made.
The image processing completion
notification call was not successfully
made.
The image processing job acquisition
request was not successfully made.
The file could not be opened.
Check the file.
The file could not be opened.
Check the file.
[50007] Failed in

Appx1MT-127
Event
Event Source
50007 FFIIPOUTPUT
Description
Causes
Remedies
Output Proc Error.%n[%1]
Output processing error.
50007 FFOutImgPrc
File Read/Write
Error.%n%1
The output destination information was

not successfully acquired.
The output request call was not
successfully made.
The output completion notification was
A file write/read was unsuccessful.
50007 Spooler
Terminate Error.%n[%1]
Termination process error.
50007 FFOutImgPrc2
File Read/Write
Error.%n%1

A file write/read was unsuccessful.

processing for output.
Commit Proc Error.%n[%1] Commitment processing error.
50008 FFIIPOUTPUT
50008 FFOutImgPrc
50008 Spooler
50008 FFOutImgPrc2
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
CreateDispatch
Error.%n%1
Image Proc Error.%n[%1]
CreateDispatch
Error.%n%1
process.
Remarks
Restart.
If the problem frequently occurs, replace

the disk or take some other remedial
action.
Restart.
Output section
container.
If the problem frequently occurs, replace

the disk or take some other remedial
action.
Restart.
The commitment destination information

was not successfully acquired.
The commitment request call was not
successfully made.
The commitment completion notification
was not successfully made.
The control was not successfully initialized. Check that the control is registered.
Image process error.
Restart.
Output section
container.
An image process request was not

An image process setup completion call
An image process completion notification
was not successfully called.
An image process job acquisition request
The control was not successfully initialized. Check that the control is registered.

Appx1MT-128
Event
Event Source
50009 FFIIPOUTPUT
Description
Queue Resume
Error.%n[%1]
50009 FFOutImgPrc
Memory Get Error.%n%1
50009 Spooler
Output Proc Error.%n[%1]
50009 FFOutImgPrc2
Memory Get Error.%n%1
50010 FFIIPOUTPUT
Queue Delete
Error.%n[%1]
50010 FFOutImgPrc
50010 Spooler
50010 FFOutImgPrc2
50011 FFIIPOUTPUT
Memory(DDO) Get
Error.%n%1
Queue Resume
Error.%n[%1]
Memory(DDO) Get
Error.%n%1
Unit Suspend
Error.%n[%1]
Causes
Remedies
Queue resumption process error.
Remarks
Restart.
The queue resumption request call was

The queue resumption response
transmitted.
allocation was not achieved).
Output process error.
Restart.
Restart.
Output destination information was not

successfully acquired.
An output request was not successfully
called.
An output completion notification was not
successful.
Restart.
Queue deletion process error.
Restart.
The queue deletion request was not
successfully made.
The queue deletion response message
Queue resumption process error.
A queue resumption request was not
A queue resumption response message
Equipment output suspension process
error.
Output section
container.
Restart.
Restart.
Output section
container.
Restart.
Restart.
The equipment output suspension

request call was not successfully made.
The equipment output suspension
response message was not successfully
transmitted.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Appx1MT-129
Event
Event Source
50011 FFOutImgPrc
50011 Spooler
50011 FFOutImgPrc2
50012 FFIIPOUTPUT
50012 FFOutImgPrc
50012 Spooler
50012 FFOutImgPrc2
50013 FFOutImgPrc
50013 Spooler
50013 FFOutImgPrc2
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Memory(VR) Get
Error.%n%1
Queue Delete
Error.%n[%1]
Causes
Queue deletion process error.
Remedies
Restart.
Restart.
A queue deletion request was not

successfully issued.
A queue deletion response message was
not successfully transmitted.
Memory(VR) Get
Restart.
Error.%n%1
Unit Resume Error.%n[%1] Equipment output resumption error.
Restart.
The equipment output resumption
request call was not successfully made.
The equipment output resumption
response message was not successfully
transmitted.
Dicom Data Object
Dicom Data Object was abnormal.
Error.%n%1
Unit Suspend Error.%n[%1] Unit output suspension process error.
Restart.
A unit output suspension request was not
A unit output suspension response
transmitted.
Dicom Data Object
Dicom Data Object was abnormal.
Error.%n%1
Dicom Data Object No
Dicom Data Object did not contain any
Data.%n%1
data.
Unit Resume Error.%n[%1] Unit output resumption process error.
Restart.
Dicom Data Object No

Data.%n%1
Remarks
A unit output resumption request was not

A unit output resumption response
transmitted.
Dicom Data Object did not contain any
data.
Output section
container.
Output section
container.
Output section
container.
Appx1MT-130
Event
Event Source
50015 FFIIPOUTPUT
Description
Causes
Remedies
Terminate Error.%n[%1]
Termination process error.
50020 FFOutImgPrc
Data Error.%n%1

A data abnormality was encountered.
50020 FFOutImgPrc2
Data Error.%n%1
A data abnormality was encountered.
50021 FFOutImgPrc
Output Job DB Error.%n%1 The output database was abnormal.
50021 FFOutImgPrc2
Output Job DB Error.%n%1 The output database was abnormal.
50022 FFOutImgPrc
Memory Over.%n%1
50022 FFOutImgPrc2
Memory Over.%n%1
50030 FFOutImgPrc
50030 FFOutImgPrc2
50100 FFOutImgPrc
OutImgPrc Error.%n%1
A memory area abnormality was

encountered.
A memory area abnormality was
encountered.
An abnormality occurred.
OutImgPrc Error.%n%1
An abnormality occurred.
Restart.
IFormatCom Error.%n%1
The format calculation object was

abnormal.

010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Appx1MT-131
Event
Event Source
50100 Spooler
Description
Spooler Error.%n%1
Causes
Remedies
Common error message.

Queue information class related
message.
An output job file was not successfully
accessed.
Output job information was not
successfully accessed.
Film information was not successfully
acquired. Information was not
The job status was not successfully
acquired (program error).
Job information was not successfully
freed.

Remarks
Spooler
Unit information class related message.

Unit information was not successfully
freed.
Spooler class related message.
The film count was not successfully
checked.
The image count/image information area
Unit information was not successfully
acquired.
50100 FFOutImgPrc2
IFormatCom Error.%n%1
Other program error

The format calculation object was
abnormal.
50101 FFOutImgPrc
IRawMakeCom
Error.%n%1
The raw data creation object was

abnormal.
50101 Spooler
RunProc Error.%n%1
50101 FFOutImgPrc2
IRawMakeCom
Error.%n%1
The spooler control state was abnormal.

A spool start process was in error.
A database connection was not
successfully closed.
The raw data creation object was
abnormal.
50102 FFOutImgPrc
FFNetDB Error.%n%1
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
An abnormality occurred at the time of

network setup data acquisition.
(It is conceivable that the network setup
database was abnormal.)

Spooler

Appx1MT-132
Event
Event Source
50102 Spooler
Description
OutputRegisterProc
Error.%n%1
50102 FFOutImgPrc2
FFNetDB Error.%n%1
50103 FFOutImgPrc
IImgJpegCtrl Error.%n%1
50103 Spooler
StateChangeProc
Error.%n%1
50103 FFOutImgPrc2
IImgJpegCtrl Error.%n%1
50104 FFOutImgPrc
IFMImgSkGpCtrl
Error.%n%1
50104 Spooler
ErrorCheckProc
Error.%n%1
50104 FFOutImgPrc2
IFMImgSkGpCtrl
Error.%n%1
50105 FFOutImgPrc
IFMImgVRSCtrl
Error.%n%1
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Causes
Remedies
Output destination registration process

error.


An illegal parameter was encountered.
An output destination registration request
message was not successfully issued.
An output destination was not
successfully registered.
An abnormality occurred at the time of
network setup data acquisition.
(It is conceivable that the network setup
database was abnormal.)
The decompression object was abnormal. Restart. If the same symptom frequently
Local printer/Dicom printer state change
notification process error.
A printer state change notification
The unit status was not successfully
acquired.
The decompression object was abnormal. Restart. If the same symptom frequently
The normalization process object was
abnormal.
Data integrity check process error.
The spooler control state was abnormal. initialize the image database.
A data integrity check request message
The normalization process object was
abnormal.
The zoom object (VRS method) was
abnormal.
Remarks
Spooler
Spooler
Spooler
Appx1MT-133
Event
Event Source
50105 Spooler
Description
Causes
Remedies
RestoreJob Error.%n%1
Job restoration error.
50105 FFOutImgPrc2
IFMImgVRSCtrl
Error.%n%1

An unprocessed job restoration request
The zoom object (VRS method) was
abnormal.
50106 FFOutImgPrc
IRotateCom Error.%n%1
The rotation object was abnormal.
50106 Spooler
SpoolProc Error.%n%1
50106 FFOutImgPrc2
50107 FFOutImgPrc
50107 Spooler
50107 FFOutImgPrc2
50108 FFOutImgPrc
50108 Spooler
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817



A parameter error occurred.
A spool request message was not
DDO file information was not successfully
acquired.
IRotateCom Error.%n%1
The rotation object was abnormal.
IFMImgParamCtrl
The image process management
Error.%n%1
parameter object was abnormal.
ReoutputProc Error.%n%1 Reoutput start process error.
A reoutput start message was not
IFMImgParamCtrl
The image process management
Error.%n%1
parameter object was abnormal.
IFMImgHandCtrl
The CR image process object was
Error.%n%1
abnormal.
StudyReqEndProc
Study termination request processing error. Restart. If the same symptom frequently
Error.%n%1
Spooler control status error.
Illegal parameters.
Failed in issuing study termination
request message.
Other program errors.
Remarks
Spooler
Spooler
Spooler
Spooler
Appx1MT-134
Event
Event Source
Description
50108 FFOutImgPrc2
IFMImgHandCtrl
Error.%n%1
50109 FFOutImgPrc
IFMImgFCmpCtrl
Error.%n%1
50109 Spooler
Causes
Remedies
The CR image process object was

abnormal.
FCR compression (compression/

decompression (Fujis unique method))
was abnormal.
ExeOutputJob Error.%n%1 Forced output request process error.
50109 FFOutImgPrc2
IFMImgFCmpCtrl
Error.%n%1
50110 FFOutImgPrc
IDataToPrintCom
Error.%n%1

A forced output request message was not
The requested output image data did not
exist.
FCR compression (compression/
decompression (Fujis unique method))
was abnormal.
Data conversion (for DICOM) was
abnormal.
50110 Spooler
GetImageProcJob
Error.%n%1
Image processing job acquisition process

error.
50110 FFOutImgPrc2
IDataToPrintCom
Error.%n%1

An image processing job acquisition
request message was not successfully
issued.
Data was not databased.
Data conversion (for DICOM) was
abnormal.
50111 FFOutImgPrc
IDataToStorageCom
Error.%n%1
50111 Spooler
SetImageProcComplete
Error.%n%1
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817



Data conversion (for DICOM Storage) was Restart. If the same symptom frequently
abnormal.
Image processing completion notification Restart. If the same symptom frequently
process error.
An image processing completion
notification message was not successfully
issued.
Remarks
Spooler
Spooler
Spooler
Appx1MT-135
Event
Event Source
Description
50111 FFOutImgPrc2
IDataToStorageCom
Error.%n%1
50112 FFOutImgPrc
IFMImgMoireCtrl
Error.%n%1
50112 FFQCMsgBox
Custom DB Access Error.

[File Name]
[Function Name]
[50112]
GetOutputProcJob
Error.%n%1
50112 Spooler
Causes
Remedies
Data conversion (for DICOM Storage) was Restart. If the same symptom frequently
abnormal.
Moire elimination was abnormal.
Access error to ReaderQC.mdb.
Restart.
Output job acquisition response process

error.
An output job acquisition response
Moire elimination was abnormal.
50112 FFOutImgPrc2
IFMImgMoireCtrl
Error.%n%1
50113 FFOutImgPrc
IFilmCharMakeCom
Error.%n%1
The film annotation character generation

object was abnormal.
50113 Spooler
SetOutputProcComplete
Error.%n%1
Output completion notification process

error.
50113 FFOutImgPrc2
IFilmCharMakeCom
Error.%n%1

An output completion notification
The film annotation character generation
object was abnormal.
50114 FFOutImgPrc
MaskProcExec Error.%n%1 The blackening process was abnormal.
50114 Spooler
GetCommitProcJob
Error.%n%1
Commitment job acquisition response

process error.
The spooler control status was abnormal.
The commitment jog acquisition response
The data was not found in the database.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks


Spooler
Spooler

Appx1MT-136
Event
Event Source
Description
Causes
Remedies
50114 FFOutImgPrc2
MaskProcExec Error.%n%1 The blackening process was abnormal.
50115 FFOutImgPrc
RecognizeProcExec
Error.%n%1
50115 Spooler
QueueResume
Error.%n%1
50115 Spooler
SetCommitProcComplete
Error.%n%1
50115 FFOutImgPrc2
RecognizeProcExec
Error.%n%1
50116 FFOutImgPrc
ExecMarker Error.%n%1
50116 Spooler
QueueDelete Error.%n%1
50116 FFOutImgPrc2
ExecMarker Error.%n%1
50117 FFOutImgPrc
ExecMarker
Warning.%n%1
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817

The blackening automatic recognition
process was abnormal.
Queue output resumption request process Restart. If the same symptom frequently
error.
A queue output resumption request
Commitment completion notification
process error.
The commitment completion notification
The queue was not found.
The data was not found in the database.
The blackening automatic recognition
process was abnormal.
The marker imbedding process was
abnormal.
Queue deletion request process error.
A queue deletion request message was
not successfully issued.
Output job file information was not
Queue deletion was not successful.
Database access was not successful.
The marker imbedding process was
abnormal.
Information for software development
There is no problem with operations.
personnel.
Remarks
Output image process
control
Spooler
Output image process

control
Spooler
Appx1MT-137
Event
Event Source
Description
50117 FFOutImgPrc
LUTProcExec Error.%n%
50117 Spooler
QueueResume
Error.%n%1
50117 Spooler
UnitSuspend Error.%n%1
50117 FFOutImgPrc2
LUTProcExec Error.%n%
50118 FFOutImgPrc
50118 FFOutImgPrc
ExecMarker
Information.%n%1
MPMCode Error.%n%1
50118 Spooler
QueueDelete Error.%n%1
50118 Spooler
UnitResume Error.%n%1
50118 FFOutImgPrc2
MPMCode Error.%n%1
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Causes
Remedies

Queue output resumption request process Restart. If the same symptom frequently
error.
The queue output resumption request
Unit suspension request process error.
A unit suspension request message was
An error occurred in a display gradation
correction process.
Information for software development
personnel.
An error occurred in an output information Restart. If the same symptom frequently
conversion process.
Queue deletion request process error.
The spooler control status was abnormal. initialize the image database.
Failed in issuing a queue deletion request
message.
Failed in accessing the output job file
information.
Failed in deleting the queue.
Unit resumption request process error.
A unit resumption request message was
An error occurred in an output information Restart. If the same symptom frequently
conversion process.
Remarks
An error occurred in a display gradation

correction process.
Spooler
Spooler
Appx1MT-138
Event
Event Source
50119 Spooler
50119 Spooler
Description
SuspendProc Error.%n%1
UnitSuspend Error.%n%1
50119 FFOutlmgPrc
Trimming Error.%n%1
50119 FFOutlmgPrc2
Trimming Error.%n%1
50120 Spooler
ResumeProc Error.%n%1
50120 Spooler
UnitResume Error.%n%1
50120 FFOutlmgPrc
AnnotationProc
Error.%n%1
50120 FFOutlmgPrc2
AnnotationProc
Error.%n%1
50121 Spooler
EndProc Error.%n%1
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Causes
Remedies
Suspension request process error.

A suspension request message was not
Equipment suspension request process
error.

Remarks
Spooler


The equipment suspension request
An error occurred while in trimming
processing.
An error occurred while in trimming
processing.
Resumption request process error.
A resumption request message was not
Equipment resumption request process
error.
The equipment resumption request
An error occurred while in annotation
information embedding processing.
intialize the image database.
An error occurred while in annotation
information embedding processing.
intialize the image database.
End request process error.
An end request message was not
Spooler
Spooler
Appx1MT-139
Event
Event Source
Description
Causes
Remedies
50121 Spooler
SuspendProc Error.%n%1
50121 FFOutlmgPrc
FNCProc Error.%n%1
50121 FFOutlmgPrc2
FNCProc Error.%n%1
50122 Spooler
ResumeProc Error.%n%1
50122 FFOutlmgPrc
50123 Spooler
MaskProcExec
Warning.%n%1
MaskProcExec
Warning.%n%1
EndProc Error.%n%1
50123 FFOutlmgPrc
IIPHand Error.%n%1
50123 FFOutlmgPrc2
IIPHand Error.%n%1
50400 FFQCAutoCalcCom
FFIipMedia
File %1, Spot %2,

Code %3.
File %1, Spot %2,
Fatal Error (exceptional error)
Code %3.
Logical Program Error. %n Program error.
Restart.
FFIipMedia
Catch Exception Error. %n An unexpected exception error occurred.
Restart.
FFIipMedia
Out Of Memory Error. %n
Failed in securing necessary memory.
Restart.
FFIipMedia
Data Base Error. %n
An error occurred in the database.
Restart.
FFIipMedia
Not Initialize. %n
Initialization not performed.
Restart.
50122 FFOutlmgPrc2
50500 FFQCAutoCalcCom
50600
50601
50602
50603
50604
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
Suspension request process error.

The suspension request message was
An error occurred during FNC processing. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
perform reinstallation and initialize the
image database.
An error occurred during FNC processing. Restart. If the same symptom recurs,
perform reinstallation and initialize the
image database.
Resumption request process error.
The resumption request message was
Sk and Gp values do not exist for Auto
Although there is no problem with
blackening process.
operations, check the data appropriately.
Sk and Gp values do not exist for Auto
Although there is no problem with
blackening process.
operations, check the data appropriately.
Termination request process error.
The termination request message was
Processing of output image failed.
Processing of output image failed.
Fatal Error (exceptional error)
Appx1MT-140
Event
Event Source
Description
50605 FFIipMedia
File I/O Error. %n
50606 FFIipMedia
Create Instance Error. %n
50607 FFIipMedia
50608 FFIipMedia
50609 FFIipMedia
50610 FFIipMedia
50611 FFIipMedia
50612 FFIipMedia
50613 FFIipMedia
50614 FFIipMedia
50615 FFIipMedia
50616 FFIipMedia
50617 FFIipMedia
50618 FFIipMedia
50619 FFIipMedia
50620 FFIipMedia
50621 FFIipMedia
50622 FFIipMedia
50623 FFIipMedia
50624 FFIipMedia
50625 FFIipMedia
50626 FFIipMedia
50627 FFIipMedia
50628 FFIipMedia
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Causes
Remedies
Restart.
Pipe Create Error. %n
An error occurred while in file read

processing.
Failed in creating COM component
instance.
Failed in creating a pipe.
Pipe Create Error. %n
Failed in closing a pipe.
Restart.
Remarks
Check to see if the image file is correct.
Restart.
The Demand Is Already

Performing. %n
The relevant request cannot be accepted

because it is now being implemented or
other request is now being implemented.
Send Message Error. %n
Failed in transmitting a message (Send
message failure).
Unjust Event Reception.
An illegal event, such as inconsistency in
%n
AE name, was received.
Not FCR Image. %n
The selected study couldnt be acquired
because it didnt include FCR images.
AEMedia no entry. %n
No media that is for the determined AE is
registered.
Resource Access Error. %n A resource access error.
Wait for a while and then re-implement as

there is a process that is being now
implemented.
Restart.
Media Process End. %n
The media control process ended.
Nothing particular.
UPSEvent Pipe Create

Failure. %n
Attribute Error. %n
Failed in creating a named pipe for

detection of power rupture.
The attribute caused an error to occur.
Restart.
Picture storage demand

start failure. %n
Picture get demand start
failure. %n
Send Message Error. %n
Failed in starting a request for image

storage.
Failed in starting a request for image
acquisition.
Message transmission error.
Get Host Name Error. %n
An error occurred when acquiring a host

name.
Failed in operating a registry.
Resistry Error. %n
Make sure that the network setting is

correct.
Make sure that the image file is correct.
correct.
Restart.

correct.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
DVDform.exe not exist. %n The DVDForm.exe file did not exist.
Check the format function system setting.
DVDform.exe Start Error.

%n
DVDform.exe. Operation
Error. %n
Format end Error. %n
Failed in starting the DVDForm.exe file.
An error occurred while operating the

DVDForm.exe file.
A format end detection error.
Media Format Error. %n
A media format failure.
Nothing particular.
Media Drive Type Error. %n The media drive type was not correct.

correct.
Appx1MT-141
Event
Event Source
50629 FFIipMedia
50630 FFIipMedia
Description
Causes
Remedies
BatFile not exist. %n
The bat file did not exist.
Restart.
50632 FFIipMedia
Message Box Error. %n
50633 FFIipMedia
50634 FFIipMedia
File Format Error. %n
An error occurred while in bat restore

processing.
An error occurred while in bat store
processing.
An error occurred in the custom message
box.
The file format is not correct.
Restart.
50631 FFIipMedia
MediaDB Restore Error.

%n
MediaDB Store Error. %n
50637
50638
50639
50640
50641
50642
Restart.
Nothing particular.
Nothing particular.
Cant Terminate by Storrtrv The Terminate process was disabled

busy. %n
because the thread was in operation or in
process of finishing.
DDOFile Invalid. %n
An illegal image information file.
Wait for a while and then re-implement

because there is a process in operation.
Nothing particular.
FFIipMedia
Reconstruction is Error. %n An error occurred during data

reconstruction processing.
Program Error. %n
Program error.
Restart.
FFIipMedia
File I/O Error. %n
File I/O error.
Restart.
FFIipMedia
Memory not allocated. %n
Memory securing error.
Restart.
FFIipMedia
Other Error. %n
Other errors.
Restart.
FFIipMedia
ddo error. %n
Failed in image information processing.
Nothing particular.
FFIipMedia
Drive not Exist. %n
The specified drive did not exist.
50635 FFIipMedia
50636 FFIipMedia
Nothing particular.
50643 FFIipMedia
Disk not Exist. %n
50644 FFIipMedia
Not Removable. %n
50645
50646
50647
50648
50649
50650
50651
50652
FFIipMedia
Eject FALSE. %n

correct.
There was no disk in the specified drive.
correct.
The specified drive was not for removable Make sure that the network setting is
media.
correct.
Media ejection failed.
Nothing particular.
FFIipMedia
Lock FALSE. %n
Media lock failed.
Nothing particular.
FFIipMedia
Unlock FALSE. %n
Media unlock failed.
Nothing particular.
FFIipMedia
Cannot get Freespace. %n Failed in securing free space.
Nothing particular.
FFIipMedia
SaveDCMFile FALSE. %n
Failed in creating a DICOM format file.
Nothing particular.
FFIipMedia
SaveDDOFile FALSE. %n
Failed in creating an image information file. Nothing particular.
FFIipMedia
Set invalid value. %n
No parameter values have been set up.
Restart.
FFIipMedia
Cannot make DICOMDIR.

%n
Cannot create file. %n
Failed in creating DICOMDIR.
Replace the media.
CreateFile method error.
Restart.
Cannot mapping file. %n
CreateFileMapping method error.
Restart.
50653 FFIipMedia
50654 FFIipMedia
50655 FFIipMedia
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Cannot mapview of file. %n MapViewOfFile method error.
Remarks
Restart.
Appx1MT-142
Event
Event Source
Description
Causes
Remedies
50656 FFIipMedia
50657 FFIipMedia
Cannot flushview of file. %n MapViewOfFile method error.
Restart.
Not Found consistflag. %n
50658 FFIipMedia
50659 FFIipMedia
50660 FFIipMedia
Drive not Ready. %n
The file consistency flag was not found in

DICOMDIR.
The drive was not ready for use.
File not Found. %n
The file did not exist.
Nothing particular.
Failed in reading the media management

file.
Failed in initialization processing.
FFIipMedia
Load DICOMDIR no use.

%n
Initialize failed. %n
FFIipMedia
Data not found. %n
No data available.
FFIipMedia
DeleteFile failed. %n
Failed in deleting the file.
FFIipMedia
Memory not allocated. %n
Failed in securing memory.
Restart.
FFIipMedia
File I/O Error. %n
Restart.
Buffer Error. %n
A failure occurred in file reading

processing.
Failed in securing buffer.
Get filesize failed. %n
Failed in acquiring the file size.
Restart.
Not set path. %n
No paths have been set.

correct.
50661
50662
50663
50664
50665
50666 FFIipMedia
50667 FFIipMedia
50668 FFIipMedia
50669 FFIipMedia
50670 FFIipMedia
50671 FFIipMedia
50672 FFIipMedia
50673 FFIipMedia
50674 FFIipMedia
50675 FFIipMedia
50676 FFIipMedia
50677 FFIipMedia
50678 FFIipMedia
50679 FFIipMedia
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
Nothing particular.
Restart.
Restart.
Incorrect image information. Image information was not correct.

%n
FFGetString failed. %n
A failure occurred with the FFGetString
function.
DB COM create failed. %
A failure occurred in creation of a database
instance.
DB COM connect failed.
A failure occurred in connection of the
%n
database.
DB COM close failed. %n A failure occurred when releasing the
database.
ADO queryinterface failed. A failure occurred in acquisition of the ADO
%n
interface.
DB COM openrecordset
Failed in acquiring a record set.
failed. %n
DB COM updaterecordset Failed in updating the record.
failed. %n
DB COM closerecordset
Failed in releasing the record set.
failed. %n
DB COM deleterecordset
Failed in deleting the record.
failed. %n
ADO setrecord failed. %n Failed in setting up the ADO interface
record.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Restart.
Appx1MT-143
Event
Event Source
50680 FFIipMedia
50681 FFIipMedia
50700 FFIIPDicomQR
50701 FFIIPDicomQR
50702 FFIIPDicomQR
50703 FFIIPDicomQR
50704 FFIIPDicomQR
50705 FFIIPDicomQR
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
FFDicom2Internal failed.
%n
FFInternal2Output failed.
%n
Unknown Error. %n[Module]
%1%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode]%3
%n[Ret]%4
%n[Description]%5
[50700] An unknown error
occurred.
Logical Program Error.
Exception has Occurred.
%n[Module] %1
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%n[Ret]%4 %n[Description]
%5
[50701] Failed in
Logical Program Error. Not
Supported Case.
%n[Module] %1
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
Initialization Error.
%n[Module] %1
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
UnInitialization Error.
%n[Module] %1
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
System Configuration
Information Acquisition
Error.
%n[Module] %1
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
Causes
Remedies
A failure occurred with the

FFDicom2Internal function.
A failure occurred with the
FFInternal2Output function.
An error of unknown cause occurred.
Remarks
Restart.
Restart.
Restart the system.

An exceptional error occurred. It is difficult Restart the system.
to continue processing because it is a
serious error.

The error that occurred is unsupported
though it is within the supposed range.
Processing cannot be continued because it
is a serious error.

Restart the system.
An initialization processing error.
Restart the system.
A shutdown processing error.
Restart the system.
A system setup acquisition error.
Shut down the system to make sure that

system settings are correct.
Appx1MT-144
Event
Event Source
50706 FFIIPDicomQR
50707 FFIIPDicomQR
50708 FFIIPDicomQR
50709 FFIIPDicomQR
50710 FFIIPDicomQR
50711 FFIIPDicomQR
50720 FFIIPDicomQR
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Network Configuration
Information Acquisition
Error.
%n[Module] %1
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
Resource (Message/String/
Bitmap etc.) Acquisition
Error.
%n[Module] %1
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
Registry Information
Acquisition
Error. %n[Module] %1
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
InterProcess Message
Communication Error.
%n[Module] %1
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
Database Access Error.
%n[Module] %1
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
DDO Access Error.
%n[Module]
%1 %n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
Query Processing Error.
%n[Module] %1
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
Causes
Remedies
A network setting acquisition error.
Shut down the system to make sure that

system settings are correct.
A resource (message, character string,

BMP, etc.) acquisition error.
Restart the system.
A registry setting acquisition error.
Restart the system.
An error occurred during an inter-process

message communication.
Restart the system.
A database access error.
Restart the system.
A DDO file access error.
Restart the system.
Remarks
A search processing error occurred.

Restart the system.
is a serious error.
Appx1MT-145
Event
Event Source
50721 FFIIPDicomQR
Description
50900 FFIIPImgProcServer
Queried Information Display

%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
Retrieve Processing Error.
%n[Module] %1
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
Retrieved Image Display
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
n[Ret]%4 %n[Description]
%5
Retrieved Image Output
Error.
%n[Module] %1
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
[50809] An unknown
anomaly was encountered.
Error.%n%1
51001 FFIIPOUTPUT
Initialize Warning.%n[%1]
50740 FFIIPDicomQR
50741 FFIIPDicomQR
50742 FFIIPDicomQR
51001 Spooler
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Initialize Warning.%n[%1]
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
A search result display error occurred.

Restart the system.
is a serious error.
An acquisition processing error. Processing Restart the system.

cannot be continued because it is a serious
error.
An acquired image display error occurred. Restart the system.

is a serious error.
An image delivery processing error

Restart the system.
occurred. Processing cannot be continued
because it is a serious error.

An error occurred while creating a PDI
image.
Initialization process warning.

Restart.
Image processing
server
Check the network settings. If any setting

is incorrect, perform a reinstallation.
The output equipment execution was not

successfully started.
The output equipment name (AE name/
host name) was not successfully acquired
(there was an inconsistency between the
option and network settings).
The FFNET database was not
An output device execution was not
successfully started.
An output device name (AE name/host
name) was not successfully acquired.
FFNETDB access was unsuccessful.
Output section
container.
Appx1MT-146
Event
Event Source
51002 FFIIPOUTPUT
51002 Spooler
51007 Spooler
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
State Change
Warning.%n[%1]
State Change
Warning.%n[%1]
Causes
State transition notification process
warning.
Remedies
Restart.
The response to an acquisition request

State change notification process warning. Restart.
An acquisition request was not

successfully answered.
Terminate Warning.%n[%1] Termination process warning.
Remarks
Restart.
A process status flag was not successfully

set.
A process termination response message
An abnormality occurrence notification
transmitted.
A message box was not successfully
displayed.
A spooler termination request was not
A spooler control end request was not
The spooler control end response state
was abnormal.
An image process control end request
An output device control end request was
The output device control end response
state was abnormal.
[51010] Specified device
The setup data was incorrect or the
Reset the data or check the equipment.
does not exist.
equipment not started.
[51011] Failed in reading of The setup file format was incorrect or the Check settings.
the configuration file
file could not be read.
(TagLookup.ini).
[51012] Failed in reading of The setup file format was incorrect or the Check settings.
the gray level correction
file.
process.
Output section
container.
Output section
container.
Appx1MT-147
Event
Event Source
51015 FFIIPOUTPUT
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Causes
Terminate Warning.%n[%1] Termination process warning.
Remedies
Remarks
Restart.
The process status flag was not

successfully set.
The process termination response
transmitted.
The abnormality occurrence notification
transmitted.
The message box was not successfully
opened.
The spooler termination request call was
The spooler control termination request
call was not successfully made.
The spooler control termination response
status was abnormal.
The image processing control termination
The output equipment control termination
The output equipment control termination
response status was abnormal.
[51300] The measurement The measurement process could not be
Make sure that the images are entered.
process cannot be
performed because there was no image.
performed.
[51301] The hard disk is
The remaining free space is insufficient.
Increase the free space and then perform
full.
the output process again.
[51302] Failed in the image The image output process could not be
Start up the host at the output destination
output process.
performed because the host at the output and then perform the output process again.
destination was not running.
[51303] The measurement The measurement process could not be
To perform the measurement process, use
process cannot be
performed because images derived from
images that are derived from the same
performed.
different image readers are contained in a image reader.
single study.
[51304] The measurement All the images necessary for measurement Make sure that the images are entered.
process cannot be
process execution were not entered.
performed.
[51305] The measurement The measurement process can be
Check the 1-Shot Phantom image size and
process cannot be
performed only when the 1-Shot Phantom make an exposure again.
performed.
image size is 2430cm or larger.
[51306] The entered value The entered monitor dosage value was out Enter another value.
is illegal.
of range.
[51307] The entered value The artifact setting was out of range.
Enter another value.
is illegal.
Appx1MT-148
Event
Event Source
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
[51308] The entered value
is illegal.
is illegal.
[51310] The data save
process cannot be
performed.
[51311] The measurement
process cannot be
performed.
[51312] Failed in the image
output process.
is illegal.
is illegal.
is illegal.
is illegal.
is illegal.
is illegal.
is illegal.
the image file.
the database. [ReaderQC]
[51322] Failed in the data
save process.
[51323] An error of
[51324] The measurement
process cannot be
performed.
[51325] The image is
illegal.
Causes
Remedies
The burger phantom setting was out of

range.
The wire mesh setting was out of range.
Remarks

The save process could not be performed

because there was no image.
The phantom position was invalid.

The selected image was not found.
Ensure that the phantom is properly

positioned for the IP, and then make an
exposure again.
Select an image that can be output.
The S-value setting was out of range.
The shading setting was out of range.
The image noise setting was out of range. Enter another value.
The sharpness setting was out of range.
The jitter setting was out of range.
The linearity setting was out of range.
The setting for accuracy of measurement

was out of range.
The image file was not found.
The database could not be accessed.
Restart.
The output file was not successfully

created.
Perform the log output process again.

The measurement process could not be
Check the menu for a mixture of high- and
performed because images differing in
standard-pixel density images, and then
reading pixel density coexisted.
make an exposure again.
The 1-Shot Phantom image was invalid.
Ensure that the phantom is properly
positioned for the IP, and then make an
exposure again.
[51326] The measurement The image reader name was not set for the Ensure that the name is properly set.
process cannot be
image file.
performed.
Appx1MT-149
Event
Event Source
51701 FFIIPDicomQR
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Causes
Remedies
[51501] Failed in
[51502] Descrepancy in
settings.
Failed in Query Processing.
%n[Module] %1
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
the study information list.
[51710] Input information
includes illegal characters.
[51711] Input information
exceeds the limit number of
characters.
[51712] The hit rate of
searching for studies
exceeded the limit value.
Search processing is
suspended.
[51713] Failed in searching
study information.
[51714] A network error
occurred while in search of
study information.
[51715] A timeout error
occurred while in search of
study information. No
responses come from
equipment targeted for
search.
[51717] Information of
search cannot be found.
Network settings may not
be correct.
error occurred while in
search of study information.
An abnormality occurred during the

initialization of the FINP input subsystem.
The PRINT attribute output destination was
not specified.
Necessary processing failed.
Processes other than FINP input can be

performed.
Specify the PRINT attribute output
destination.
Continue processing. If the same error still Change of an existing
occurs, restart the system.
log
The search result includes illegal data.

Input information includes illegal data.
Stop acquiring studies that include illegal

information.
Input correct data.
Input correct data.
The number of hit studies is many.
Narrow down the search conditions

accordingly.

Check settings of network and other
The network settings were inappropriate.




Remarks
Appx1MT-150
Event
Event Source
51720 FFIIPDicomQR
51721 FFIIPDicomQR
51722 FFIIPDicomQR
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
%n[Module] %1
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
[51721] Failed in
processing to acquire
studies.
[51722] Failed in
studies. Free hard disk
space is not sufficient.
Failed in Query Processing.
%n[Module] %1
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
[51723] Failed in
studies. Studies include
images that cannot be
displayed.
[51725] Information of
image acquisition cannot
be found. Network settings
may not be correct.
error occurred in an attempt
to acquire studies.
[51727] A timeout error
occurred while in process
of study acquisition. No
responses come from the
study acquisition.
[51729] Input information is
not correct.
Causes
Remedies

Processing can be continued after the
error is notified to the user as it is
insignificant.
If the same error still recurs, restart the

system.

insignificant.

system.

Remarks
Free space on the hard disk is insufficient. Increase free space on the hard disk
appropriately.
A query processing error occurred.
insignificant.

recurs, restart the system.
log
An acquired study includes illegal data.

information.
Network settings were inappropriate.



Input correct information.
Appx1MT-151
Event
Event Source
51740 FFIIPDicomQR
51741 FFIIPDicomQR
51742 FFIIPDicomQR
51743 FFIIPDicomQR
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
[51730] An attempt is made
to acquire a study
generated by an unknown
modality.
[51731] A study generated
by an unknown modality
was acquired.
[51732] The hit rate of
searching for studies
exceeded the listed limit
value.
%n[Module] %1
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
Failed in Retrieve
Processing.
%n[Module] %1
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
display processing. Some
images cannot be
displayed.
distribution processing.
[51810] Information on the
device targeted for image
printout was not found.
Network settings may
possibly be incorrect.
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
Acquired study information includes illegal Stop acquiring studies that include illegal
data.
information.
Acquired information includes illegal data.

information.
The number of hit studies is many.
Narrow down the search conditions

accordingly.
A study acquisition error occurred.

insignificant.

system.
An error occurred when displaying

acquired images. Processing can be
continued after the error is notified to the
user as it is insignificant.

system.
A delivery processing error occurred.

insignificant.

system.
An acquisition error occurred. Processing

can be continued after the error is notified
to the user as it is insignificant.

recurs, restart the system.
log
Acquired studies include illegal data.

information.
Acquired studies include illegal data.

information.
Appx1MT-152
Event
Event Source
Description
Causes
Remedies
52000 FFFinpSend
52000 FFOutImgPrc
52002 FFEifPrinter
Warning.%n%1
Warning.%n%1
SMCU Driver error.

[%1]
Restart.
52003 FFEifPrinter
EIFIMG Driver error.

[%1]
Received unexpected
command.
[%1]
File Error.
[%1]
Custom DB Access Error.
[File Name]
[Function Name] [50112]
Spooler Warning.%n%1
An error occurred in the SMCU driver.

The problem might have been caused, for
instance, by data incompleteness or
system instability.
An error occurred in the EIFIMG driver. It is
conceivable that the system was unstable.
An unknown command was received from
the printer.
52004 FFEifPrinter
52006 FFEifPrinter
52100 FFQCMsgBox
52100 Spooler
52101 Spooler
52102 FFQCMsgBox
52103 FFQCMsgBox
52103 Spooler
RunProc Warning.%n%1
SysConfig DB Access
Failure (Processing
continuation).
[File Name]
LangStr DB Access Failure
[File Name]
StateChangeProc
Warning.%n%1
Restart.
Check the log of communications with the
connected printer or restart the printer/IIP.
The raw data file for output was not found. Since the problem is attributable to a
program error, try performing a reinstall.
The bitmap was not successfully acquired. Check that the bitmap file is installed.
Common warning message.
Queue information class related
message. Image information
(SOPInstanceUID) was not successfully
acquired. The job status was not
Spooler class related message.
A database connection was not
successfully closed.
Illegal image display format data.
A character string database connection
was not successfully opened.
An error/invalid value was encountered
when an attempt was made to acquire a
system setup database access API value.

Spooler

Spooler
Restart.
An error occurred when an attempt was

made to acquire a character string
database access API value.
Restart.
Local printer/Dicom printer state change

notification process warning.

A unit state character string was not

010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
Spooler
Appx1MT-153
Event
Event Source
52105 FFQCMsgBox
Description
Causes
Remedies
52105 Spooler
FF32 Access Failure

(Probably acquisition of
Registry goes wrong)
[File Name]
RestoreJob Warning.%n%1
52106 Spooler
An output job file was not successfully

accessed.
SpoolProc Warning.%n%1 Spool process warning.
52108 FFQCMsgBox
52108 Spooler
52109 FFQCMsgBox
52109 Spooler
52110 FFQCMsgBox
52110 Spooler
The FF32 library (FF32dll) return value

was in error.
* For option key registry acquisition, no
error occurs even if the key is missing.
Job restoration warning.
Unit information acquisition was not

successful.
File deletion was not successful.
Queue cancellation was not successful.
Data was not successfully written into a
log file.
Custom DB Access Failure An attempt to set/acquire a value from
(Processing continuation) ReaderQC.mdb failed.
[File Name]
StudyReqEndProc
Examination end request process warning.
Warning.%n%1
A database was not successfully
accessed.
acquired.
FF32 DB Access Failure
Registry setup/acquisition failed
(Processing continuation) (replaceable).
[File Name]
ExeOutputJob
Forced output request process warning.
Warning.%n%1
acquired.
FF32 DB Access Failure
An image file access error occurred.
(Processing continuation)
[File Name]
GetImageProcJob
Image processing job acquisition process
Warning.%n%1
warning.
An output unit type parameter error
occurred.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
It is probable that the installation was not

properly completed. Perform a
reinstallation.
Spooler

Spooler
Restart.

Spooler
It is probable that the registry information

was not properly installed. Perform a
reinstallation.
Spooler
Since the image is valid, make an

exposure again.
Spooler
Appx1MT-154
Event
Event Source
52112 Spooler
52114 Spooler
Description
Remedies
GetOutputProcJob
Warning.%n%1
Output job acquisition response process

warning.
GetCommitProcJob
Warning.%n%1
An output unit type parameter error was

encountered.
Commitment job acquisition response
process warning.
52116 Spooler
QueueDelete
Warning.%n%1
52117 Spooler
UnitSuspend
Warning.%n%1
52118 Spooler
QueueDelete
Warning.%n%1
52118 Spooler
UnitResume
Warning.%n%1
52119 Spooler
UnitSuspend
Warning.%n%1
52120 Spooler
UnitResume
Warning.%n%1
52400 FFQCAAutocalccom
File %1, Spot %2, Code

%3.
52500 FFQCAAutocalccom
File %1, Spot %2, Code

%3.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Causes

Remarks
Spooler

A commitment equipment type parameter

error occurred.
Queue deletion request process warning. Restart. If the same symptom frequently
An image database flag was not
successfully set.
The DDO file was not successfully
deleted.
Unit suspension request process warning. Restart. If the same symptom frequently
A unit status character string was not
Queue deletion request process warning. Restart. If the same symptom frequently
The image database flag was not
successfully set.
The DDO file was not successfully
deleted.
Unit resumption request process warning. Restart. If the same symptom frequently
A unit status acquisition error occurred.
Equipment suspension request process
warning.
The equipment status character string
Equipment resumption request process
warning.
An equipment status acquisition error
occurred.
Warning information.
Perform reexposure and then
measurement processing because the
image is illegal.
Fatal error (exceptional error).
Spooler
Spooler
Spooler
Appx1MT-155
Event
Event Source
52720 FFIIPDicomQR
52721 FFIIPDicomQR
52740 FFIIPDicomQR
52741 FFIIPDicomQR
52742 FFIIPDicomQR
52750 FFIIPDicomQR
52751 FFIIPDicomQR
52760 FFTsSearchCondition
52770 FFMaSearchCOM
52771 FFMaSearchCOM
52772 FFMaSearchCOM
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
%n[Module] %1
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
%n[Module] %1
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
%nNetwork Warning
(Timeout). %n%1 %n %2
Causes
Remedies
Remarks

Processing can be continued as it is
insignificant.

system.

insignificant.

system.
A study acquisition error occurred.

insignificant.

system.
An error occurred when displaying an

acquired study. Processing can be
continued as it is insignificant.

system.
A delivery processing error occurred.

insignificant.

system.
A timeout error occurred.
Shut down the system to ensure that

network settings are correct. Make sure
that other connected equipment is
operating properly.
Suspend search processing. Narrow down
the search conditions to retry search
processing.
Restart the system.
Network Warning(Over
The number for hit results exceeded the
Number Of Result). %n%1 upper limit.
%n %2
Disk Full Error. %n
The hard disk is full.
DB Operation Status
Warning. %n
Disk Full Error. %n
A warning given when the database

operation result status is illegal.
Restart the system.
Network Error. %n
A network error occurred.
Restart the system.
Network Error. %n
The number for hit results exceeded the

upper limit.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Appx1MT-156
Event
Event Source
Description
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
52800 FFIIPDicomQR
Network Warning(Timeout). A timeout error occurred.

%n%1 %n %2
52801 FFIIPDicomQR
Network Warning(DiskFull). The hard disk is full.

%n%1 %n %2
52802 FFIIPDicomQR
FFTsImgRetInd
Warning(Retrieve Image
Nothing). %n%1 %n %2
Disk Full Error. %n
The acquired study does not include

images.
Shut down the system to ensure that

network settings are correct. Make sure
that other connected equipment is
operating properly.
Suspend acquisition of studies. Increase
free space on the hard disk and then retry
acquisition.
Make sure that other connected equipment
retains correct study information.
Restart the system.
FFMaRetrieve
Disk Full Error. %n
Restart the system.
FFMaRetrieve
Storage SCP not found. %n No Storage SCP is set up.
FFMaRetrieve
Cannot Get NetWork

Setting. %n
Integration Warning in
DataBase. %n
DICOM Data Waring. %n
Necessary network settings cannot be

Restart the system.
acquired.
There is a problem with consistency of the Restart the system.
database.
A DICOM data-related warning.
Restart the system.
Local Retrieve Warning.

%n
Input Image Warning
(DensityCode = SH). %n
Disk Full Error. %n
A warning given when images cannot be

acquired locally.
A warning given when an SH image is
input.
Debug Log OutPut. %n
Restart the system.
52810
52820
52821
52822
52823 FFMaRetrieve
52824 FFMaRetrieve
52825 FFMaRetrieve
52826 FFMaRetrieve
52850 FFMaCommon
52851 FFMaCommon
Restart the system.
Restart the system.

Restart the system.
Restart the system.
FFMaCommon
Disk Full Error. %n
Event log output number for debugging

purposes.
FFMaCommonImage
Disk Full Error. %n
Restart the system.
FFTsCommon
Disk Full Error. %n
Restart the system.
FFTsCommon
Catch DB exception. %n
An exceptional access to the database.
Restart the system.
FFIIPImgProcServer
Warning.%n%1
There is a defect in the specified data.
Dicom Data Object

Error.%n%1
JOB Error.%n%1
I/F Error.%n%1
53106 Spooler
SpoolProc
Infomation.%n%1
Image information processing failed while

creating a PDI image.
An attempt to create JOB information
resulted in a failure while creating a PDI
image.
An error occurred when a request was
issued to create a PDI image.
Information in a spool process.
Check to see that the system configuration Image processing

is correct.
server
Restart.
Image processing
server
Restart.
Image processing
server
52852
52860
52870
52871
52900
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Unit type mismatch notification.
Restart the system.
Restart.
Image processing
server
Spooler
Appx1MT-157
Event
Event Source
53820 FFMaRetrieve
53821 FFMaRetrieve
53823 FFMaRetrieve
Description
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
Retrieve Process Start. %n Process startup.
Restart the system.
Retrieve Process End. %n
Process shutdown.
Restart the system.
Image is Already Exists in

ImageDB. %n
12Bits Image Cannot
Retrieve.
This Image Is Deleted.
Retry is success. %n
Information given when the same image is Restart the system.

input.
Discard the retrieved image as no 12-bit
image can be acquired.
Select another image that is not 12-bit.
Database retry information.
Restart the system.
Writing error.
Check to see the media has not been

prohibited for writing.
54600 FFIipMedia

[File Name]
HDD Disk Full Error. %n
54601 FFIipMedia
Network Error. %n
54602 FFIipMedia
Not Mount. %n
54603 FFIipMedia
Media Ctrl(Format or
Mount or Unmount)Run.
%n
Media Read Only. %n
Secure sufficient HDD space by, for

example, deleting unnecessary images.
An error occurred on the network.
correct.
No destination has been mounted for data Mount the drive.
storage.
Media control (either of formatting,
Retry after a while because either of
mounting and unmounting) was in process. formatting, mounting and unmounting is in
process.
The media was for read only.
Nothing particular.
Media Unformat. %n
The media was not formatted.
Media Storage Is
Operating. %n
Message reception from
other cases. %n
ReceptionMessage is
Abnormal. %n
Next Transaction by
Timeout. %n
Media Is Already Mount.
%n
Set Default by acquisition
failure. %n
Media White Protect. %n
Media storage was in process.
53827 FFMaRetrieve
53870 FFTsCommon
54100 FFQCMsgBox
54604 FFIipMedia
54605 FFIipMedia
54606 FFIipMedia
54607 FFIipMedia
54608 FFIipMedia
54609 FFIipMedia
54610 FFIipMedia
54611 FFIipMedia
54612 FFIipMedia
54613 FFIipMedia
54614 FFIipMedia
54615 FFIipMedia
54616 FFIipMedia
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
The HDD disk was full.
Nothing particular.
Retry after a while because there is a

process in operation.
A message received from other equipment Nothing particular.
units.
The received message was not normal.
Restart.
The next processing started as a timeout
occurred.
The media has already been mounted.
Nothing particular.
Nothing particular.
Default was set because a failure occurred Nothing particular.

during data acquisition from Directory.ini.
The media was write-protected.
Nothing particular.
DICOMDIR Read Only. %n The DICOMDIR file was for read only.
Nothing particular.
Cant Format by
Formatting was not possible because there Nothing particular.
DICOMDIRfile. %n
was the DICOMDIR file.
Not Browseable Media. %n It was not browseable media.
Nothing particular.
Not Writeable Media. %n
It was not writable media.
Nothing particular.
Appx1MT-158
Event
Event Source
54617 FFIipMedia
54618 FFIipMedia
54619 FFIipMedia
54620 FFIipMedia
54621 FFIipMedia
54622 FFIipMedia
54623 FFIipMedia
54624 FFIipMedia
54625 FFIipMedia
54626 FFIipMedia
54627 FFIipMedia
54628 FFIipMedia
54629 FFIipMedia
54630 FFIipMedia
Causes
Remedies
No DICOMDIR Other Exist.

%n
DICOMDIR is mismatching.
%n
Media no exist. %n
There was no DICOMDIR file but were

other files.
The DICOM DIR file was mismatching.
Nothing particular.
No media existed.
Nothing particular.
Mount User Cancel. %n
The user canceled mounting processing.
Nothing particular.
Version is Different. %n
Nothing particular.
Media Diskfull. %n
The database version was different from

that of the version file.
The media disk was full.
Image not exist in media.

%n
Image cant get Exist by
Error. %n
Allcancel by Electric Power
Stop. %n
[54625] Power interruption
was detected.
DICOMDIR not Exist. %n
Images for the requested study did not

exist in the media.
Images that couldnt be acquired due to an
error existed in the acquired study.
Processing discontinued due to power
rupture.
Processing discontinued due to power
rupture.
The DICOMDIR file did not exist.
Nothing particular.
Restart.
[54626] No media
management files exist.
DICOMDIR is protected.
%n
Unsuitable right format. %n
The DICOMDIR file did not exist.
Cancellation demand. %n
Replace the media.
Nothing particular.
Check the power cable and then restart.

The management file was for read only or Nothing particular.

write-protected.
The media was unformatted or improperly Nothing particular.
formatted.
Processing canceled as it was requested. Nothing particular.
Nothing particular.
FFIipMedia
FFIipMedia
Auto Mount Finished. %n
Auto mounting finished.
Nothing particular.
FFIipMedia
Other Information. %n,
Other information.
Nothing particular.
FFEifPrinter
System call has failed. [%1] An error returned upon a WIN32 API
function call. It is conceivable that the
54632 FFIipMedia
54633 FFIipMedia
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
Reconstruct the media.
Reconstruction is not need. The management file needs not to be

%n
reconstructed.
Disk Limit. %n
The free disk space available was not
sufficient.
Other File Exists (May I
Files other than DICOMDIR existed. (Are
format?). %n
you sure to format?)
Push the O.K. button after Insert the media and press the OK button.
inserting media. %n
Finish Reconstruct. %n
Reconstruction finished.
54631 FFIipMedia
54634
54635
54640
59001
Description
Secure sufficient HDD space by, for

example, deleting unnecessary images.
Nothing particular.
Nothing particular.
Nothing particular.
Restart.
Appx1MT-159
Event
Event Source
59005 FFEifPrinter
59100 FFQCMsgBox
59102 FFQCMshBox
59103 FFQCMsgBox
59198 FFQCMsgBox
59701 FFIIPDicomQR
59702 FFIIPDicomQR
59751 FFIIPDicomQR
59771 FFMaSearchCOM
59772 FFMaSearchCOM
59773 FFMaSearchCOM
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Unable to setup timers.
[%1]
FF32 Error.
[File Name]
Cant get Tag Information.
[File Name]
Memory or Resource
cannot be gained.
[File Name]
Secondary detection code
Error.
[File Name]
Exception has Occurred.
%n[Module] %1
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
Logical Program Error. Not
Supported Case.
%n[Module] %1
%n[Function] %2
%n[SpotCode] %3
%5
Catch Exception Error.
%n%1 %n %2
Catch Exception Error. %n
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
An unknown timer event occurred. It is

Restart.
conceivable that the system was unstable.
An FF32 library (FF32.dll) return value
It is possible that the registry information
error (irreplaceable).
has not been installed correctly. Perform a
reinstallation.
No value is set up for the tag information
Perform reexposure because the image is
even though it must have been set up
illegal.
accordingly (irreplaceable).
Failed in obtaining memory/handle
Increase available resources and then
resource.
retry.
A secondary detection code return value
error.
An exceptional error occurred. Processing If the same error still recurs, restart the
can be continued because it is insignificant. system.
The error that occurred is unsupported

though it is within the supposed range.
system.
is insignificant.
An exceptional error occurred

unexpectedly.
unexpectedly.
Out Of Memory Error. %n An error occurred, which disabled the
memory to be secured appropriately.
Free Memory Error. %n
An error occurred, which disabled the
memory to be released appropriately.
Catch Exception Error. %n An unexceptional error occurred
unexpectedly.
Restart the system.

Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Appx1MT-160
Event
Event Source
Description
59774 FFMaSearchCOM
Data Base Error. %n
59801 FFIIPDicomQR
Catch Exception Error.

%n%1 %n %2
Invalid Propaty Error.
%n%1 %n %2
Catch Exception Error. %n
59802 FFIIPDicomQR
59811 FFTsImgRetInd
59812 FFTsImgRetInd
59813 FFTsImgRetInd
59821 FFMaRetrieve
59822 FFMaRetrieve
59823 FFMaRetrieve
59824 FFMaRetrieve
59825 FFMaRetrieve
59826 FFMaRetrieve
59827 FFMaRetrieve
59828 FFMaRetrieve
59829 FFMaRetrieve
59830 FFMaRetrieve
59831 FFMaRetrieve
59832 FFMaRetrieve
59851 FFMaCommon
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Causes
Remedies
A database error occurred.

unexpectedly.
Illegal properties (AddIndicationMethod
only).
unexpectedly.
Catch Exception Error. %n An exceptional error occurred
unexpectedly.
Error. %n
control.
Retrieve Process Exists.
A process was started double.
%n
Image is Already Exists in Image input is disabled because the same
ImageDB. %n
image already exists in the image
database.
File Error. %n
A file error occurred.
NetWork Error. %n
The association was disconnected due to

a network error.
Cannot Get NetWork
Necessary network settings cannot be
Setting. %n
acquired.
DICOM Retrieve Timeout. A timeout error occurred in an attempt to
%n
acquire a study.
DICOM Retrieve is Not
DICOM acquisition processing is not
Able to Use Now. %n
available at present.
Processing Image is
Processing is disabled because the image
Deleted. %n
was deleted.
unexpectedly.
Remarks
Restart the system if the relevant

processing has been completed.
If the relevant processing remains
unprocessed, there may be an illegal study
in the server targeted for search of data. In
this case, no particular remedial measures
need to be taken.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Appx1MT-161
Event
Event Source
59852 FFMaCommon
59853 FFMaCommon
59855 FFMaCommon
59856 FFMaCommon
59857 FFMaCommon
59861 FFMaCommonImage
59871 FFTsCommon
59872 FFTsCommon
59873 FFTsCommon
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Causes
Remedies
Out Of Memory Error. %n

unexpectedly.
unexpectedly.
unexpectedly.
Exception Error.%n%1
Remarks
Restart the system.

Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Reinstall the system.
[60000] Failed in accessing An apostrophe was used for exposure

the database.
menu name setup with the user utility
when the employed software version was
A07 or earlier.
It is conceivable that the database file is
damaged or deleted.
[60002] User Utility will be There is no alternative but to exit the
terminated.
program due to the occurrence of an
abnormality.
[60050] Failed in accessing It is conceivable that the database file was
the character string
damaged or deleted.
database.
[60051] Failed in accessing It is conceivable that the database file was
the system setting
damaged or deleted.
database.
[60052] Failed in obtaining It is conceivable that the registry
[60053] Value of registry
Image processing
server
Upgrade the software to version A08 or

later.
Appx1MT-162
Event
Event Source
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
character string database.
system setting file.
information to the system
setting file.
the display group
information.
the menu information.
the MPM code.
the XCON parameter.
database.
database.
the film annotation
database.
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
The setup file format was incorrect or the
Check settings.
The setup file format was incorrect or the

Check settings.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.

damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
Appx1MT-163
Event
Event Source
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
the film annotation
database.
[60251] Image processing
parameter data is
abnormal.
[60260] System has not
been rebooted.
[60300] The option and the
database do not agree with
each other.
[60301] Data storage
image data.
[61060] Wrong password
has been input.
[61082] No menu has been
selected.
[61083] Already registered
for displaying and cannot
be deleted.
[61084] Already registered
to the study menu and
cannot be deleted.
[61085] No menu was
registered for a certain
display group.
display group name.
[61093] Display group will
be deleted.
[61094] Display group
name is illegal.
[61103] Same extension
menu code already exists.
[61106] Same ANK
exposure menu name
already exists.
[61109] Same kanjiexposure menu name
already exists.
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
damaged or deleted.
The image processing parameter data is
abnormal.
Check the image processing parameters.
It is conceivable that the IIP executable file Reinstall.

was damaged or deleted.
The menu data and the option do not
Install a menu that is suited to the option.
agree with each other.
The database file may have been damaged
or deleted.
or deleted.
An incorrect password was entered.

Reinstall. If the same symptom recurs,
The password is fixed at 1111.
An attempt was made to start an editing or

like operation without selecting any menu.
The menu could not be deleted because it
was registered for display.
Complete a menu selection before initiating

an editing or like operation.
Clear the registration for display and then
delete the menu.
The menu could not be deleted because it Remove the target menu from the
was registered for the examination menu. examination menu in advance.
A certain display group was empty because No empty display group is allowed to exist.
no menu was registered for it.
Register one or more menus for the display
group or delete the display group.
This window opens for confirmation only.
instance, to its excessive length or the
inclusion of an unacceptable character.
The entered data value was already
registered or otherwise unacceptable.


Appx1MT-164
Event
Event Source
Description
[61110] Extension menu

code is illegal.
[61111] ANK exposure

menu name is illegal.
[61112] Kanji-exposure
menu name is illegal.
[61122] MPM code is

illegal.
[61125] Same film

annotation already exists.
[61130] Device code is
illegal.
Causes
Remedies

An attempt was made to start an editing or
like operation without selecting any menu.
The maximum permissible number of
menu registrations was exceeded.
[61131] Film-related code is

illegal.
[61132] Auto-exposure
mechanism is illegal.
[61142] Same study menu

code already exists.
[61145] Same ANK study
menu name already exists.
[61148] Same kanji-study
menu name already exists.
[61149] No exposure menu
has been selected.
[61151] Exposure menu
cannot be registered.
[61152] Same exposure
menu has already been
registered.
[61153] Study menu code The entered data was abnormal due, for
is illegal.
[61154] ANK study menu
code is illegal.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks

Complete a menu selection before initiating
an editing or like operation.
Delete any unnecessary menu.
Appx1MT-165
Event
Event Source
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
[61155] Kanji-study menu
code is illegal.
Causes
Remedies

[61171] No technician code An attempt was made to register data with
has been input.
an input field left blank.
[61172] Technician code is The entered data was abnormal due, for
illegal.
An unacceptable character was contained.
technician code.
[61174] Same technician
code already exists.
[61175] No ANK technician An attempt was made to register data with
name has been input.
[61176] ANK technician
The entered data was too long.
name is too long.
has been input in the ANK
technician name.
[61178] Same ANK
technician name already
exists.
[61179] No kanji-technician An attempt was made to register data with
name has been input.
[61180] Kanji-technician
name is too long.
has been input in the kanjitechnician name.
[61182] Same kanjiThe entered data value was already
technician name already
exists.
[61191] No requesting
An attempt was made to register data with
department code has been an input field left blank.
input.
[61192] Requesting
department code is too
long.
requesting department
code.
Remarks

Enter a value.
Enter a value.
Enter a value.
Enter a value.
Appx1MT-166
Event
Event Source
Causes
Remedies


No media was inserted into the drive.
FFCustomMsgBox
[61194] Same requesting

department code already
exists.
[61195] No ANK requesting
department name has been
input.
[61196] ANK requesting
department name is too
long.
has been input in the ANK
name.
[61198] Same ANK
name already exists.
[61199] No kanji-requesting
department name has been
input.
[61200] Kanji-requesting
department name is too
long.
has been input in the Kanjirequesting department
name.
[61202] Same kanjirequesting department
name already exists.
[61211] No film annotation
characters have been input.
[61212] Film annotation
characters are too long.
has been input in the film
[61214] Same film
annotation already exists.
[61224] Drive is not ready.
FFCustomMsgBox
[61234] Drive is not ready.
No media was inserted into the drive.
Insert media.
FFCustomMsgBox
[61235] Wrong disk
A wrong media was inserted into the drive. Insert correct media.
FFCustomMsgBox
[61236] Wrong disk
A wrong media was inserted into the drive. Insert correct media.
61224
61234
61235
61236
Description
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Remarks
An attempt was made to register data with Enter a value.






Insert media.
Appx1MT-167
Event
Event Source
Description
Causes
[61300] Backup processing

[61301] Restore processing
[61302] An error of
[61303] Failed in importing
the consumables database.
[61340] A file backed up
with another application
cannot be restored.

or deleted.
or deleted.
FFCustomMsgBox
[64230] Restoring is
interrupted.
[64231] Restoring is
completed.
[64232] Being restored.
FFCustomMsgBox
[64233] Insert FD.
FFCustomMsgBox
[64237] Insert FD.
FFCustomMsgBox
[64250] Parameter Batch

Updating
system configuration of the
target destination for image
data transfer.
system configuration.
64232
64233
64237
64250
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Remedies
Remarks

The problem is attributable, for instance, to Prepare a consumables database again.
a damaged file.
An attempt was made to restore a backup To restore to the IIP, use a backup file
made by the Viewer for use with the IIP or generated by the IIP. To restore to the
to restore a backup made by the IIP for
Viewer, use a backup file generated by the
use with the Viewer.
Viewer.
[61341] This is not a
A file other than Supply.mdb was selected Select a Supply.mdb file.
contrast medium database for an import.
file.
[61342] No backup files
Specified drive or folder can be incorrect. Specify a correct destination for data
exist.
backup.
[64220] Backup is
interrupted.
[64221] Backup is
completed.
[64222] Backup is being
prepared.
[64223] Insert FD.

The setup file format is not correct or

cannot be read.
Check settings.
The setup file format is not correct or

cannot be read.
Check settings.
Appx1MT-168
Event
Event Source
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
[64460] File extension is

not possible because the
MPM code has reached its
limit for extension.
[64595] Failed in launching
Ascent View setting
window.
[70000] Failed in
conversion of mis-exposure
image log information.
[70001] Failed in deletion of
log files.
The MPM code has reached its limit.
Allot existing MPM code or use extended

MPM code.
The linking application is not installed

correctly.
Reinstall the linking application.
It is possible that the RetakeAnalyisData.

mdb file is write-protected.

[70005] Connection to the
system setting database
resulted unsuccessful.
[70006] Failed in acquiring
information from the system
setting database.
character string database
character string database.
technologist information.
classifications of misexposure images.
comments on mis-exposure
images.
log information database
It is possible that the file is damaged or

deleted.
It is possible that the database file is
damaged or deleted.
Open the RetakeAnalysisData.mdb file

properties to check to see if it is writeprotected.
Open the RetakeAnalysisData.mdb file
properties to check to see if it is writeprotected.

damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.

It is possible that the registry information is

damaged or deleted.
It is possible that the registry information is
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.

It is possible that the RetakeAnalyisData.

mdb file is write-protected.
Appx1MT-169
Event
Event Source
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
information for setup of
mis-exposure image
analysis.
image files.
images.
[70019] Failed in
conversion of date format.
[70020] Failed in storage of
the mis-exposure image log
list.
the calculation result.
[70022] An error occurred
while an image is being
displayed.
[70023] An unknown error
occurred.
database of regions to be
exposed resulted
unsuccessful.
database of causes of
mis-exposure images
[70026] Failed in calculation
of the mis-exposure image
log.
calculation result of the
mis-exposure image log.
network setting database
necessary data from the
network setting database.
the list.
Causes
damaged or deleted.
Remedies
Remarks

It is possible that the image file is damaged Although the image file in question is not
or deleted.
displayed, there are no problems with
other operations.
An error occurred while in image
processing.
The date display format may have been
Input in a correct format.
input incorrectly.
This error is displayed when a failure
Retry data store. If the same symptom
occurred in data storage.
recurs, change the destination for storage
accordingly.
This error is displayed when a failure
Retry data storage. If the same symptom
occurred in data storage.
recurs, change the destination for storage
accordingly.
It is possible that the image display control Restart the system. If the same symptom
or image file has a problem.
damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.




damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.


Appx1MT-170
Event
Event Source
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Description
[70031] Free hard disk
space for writing data is
insufficient.
the mis-exposure image
log.
the exposure result log.
an image file.
image data in the system
setting database.
image data in the display
setting database.
[70037] Failed in relocating
the tree structure.
[70038] Failed in reducing
the tree structure.
[70039] Transition to the
main window resulted
unsuccessful.
the menu database.
the log information
database.
image data.
Causes
Remedies
Remarks
The size of the file copied is too large to be Replace for media of large capacity, if
accommodated in the media.
available.
deleted.


deleted.
deleted.
damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.



damaged or deleted.
damaged or deleted.


damaged or deleted.
deleted. It is also possible that the target
media for file storage has problems.

Retry file storage. If the same symptom
[94001] The scanner

cleaning process was
completed.
[94002] The scanner
Dust removal was unaccomplished due to Check the RU status.
cleaning process could not a problem on the RU side.
be performed.
Appx1MT-171
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Appx1MT-172
Appendix 2 Cooper Application Error Message Table

ID
Message
00005
Cooper applications ID is not specified.
00005
Application configuration error.
00005
00005
Application configuration error. Create WCF client

failed.
Initialize WCF communication failed.
00015
Application configuration error. Start service failed.
00240
Initialize WCF failed.
00240
Send message failed.
00345
10000
Given file [Path] contains data that not valid/suitable

for binding into application.
Another application instance is running.
10005
Create WCF client failed.
10005
10010
No service is running on specified endpoint. Create

WCF client failed.
WCF channel failed.
Communication error.
10015
Start service failed.
10015
A communication error occurs. Start service failed.
10035
A communication error occurs. Send message failed.
10050
Invalid operation. Create WCF client failed.
10050

WCF client failed.
DDO file path is null or empty
Image file is not found
10010
10070
10071
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Causes
Remedies
The config file does not exist or is damaged.
Reinstall all the linking applications and Cooper which

have been installed.
Another CooperManager instance is running. (The Restart the system.
system can only perform one instance at one
time.)
The DDO file does not exist.
Restart the system.
The DDO file is damaged.
Restart the system.
Appx2MT-1
ID
Message
Causes
Remedies
10071
10071
10071
10071
10071
10072
10075
10180
Image file path is empty

Cannot get image width
Cannot get image height
Cannot get image depth
DDO object of DDO file {0} is null
Load images buffer fail
Dont enough free memory
Start CooperManager failed.

Not enough memory to be used.
10205
Create proces for {0} application failed.
10205
Color code in appconfig is incorrected
The config file is damaged.
10210
10210
10215
Input string was not in a correct format.

Value was either too large or too small for an Int32.
Start Cooper applications process failed.

10220
Can not load autolayout file.
10221
10225
Can not start hook key for application switching

function.
Can not unset hook key for application switching
function.
Invalid number of screen.
10230
Config TargetView is invalid.
10230
Can not create switch listener form.
10230
Send command active app false.
10230
Send command deactive current app false.
10230
Send command failed.
10235
Create named pipe object failed.
10235
Send message failed.
10235
Close named pipe object failed.
10221
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)

Restart the system.

Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Appx2MT-2
ID
Message
Causes
Remedies
10240
Initialize IPCHandler failed.
10240
Initialize WMHandler failed.
10240
Initialize WCF failed.
10240
Value of timeout start Cooper application (in

SystemConfig.xml) is invalid.
SystemConfig.xml) is invalid. Value cannot be null.
SystemConfig.xml) is invalid. Input string was not in a
correct format.
SystemConfig.xml) is invalid. Value was either too large
or too small for an Int32.
Start CooperApp failed.
10295
The config for Config folder is not found in the file

DirectoryDef.xml
Unauthorized Access to the folder:[Folder Name]
10295
Path of this folder is too long: [Path]
10295
The Config folder: [Folder name] is not found.
10295
10301
File: [Config file]: The Config element with Key=[Key] is The config file does not exist or is damaged.
invalid.
Error in load multi language.
10302
10302
Error when apply auto layout
10302
Error when get size of config folder.
The config file does not exist.
10302
Error when delete temporary folder.
The Temp file does not exist or the authority may

not have been granted.
10302
Not permission in destination folder.
No access authority to the destination folder.
10302
Unknow error while copying file.
10240
10240
10240
10240
10295
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)




Confrim the authority to the folder C:\Program Files\
Fujifilm\Cooper\Data\Temp.
If the problem continues to occur, restart the system.
Allot authority to the storage folder for backup files.
If failed again, restart the system.
Appx2MT-3
ID
Message
Causes
Remedies
10302
Unknow error occured.
10302
10302
Config folder not found. Check value in DirectoryDef.

xml
Error when load value in DirectoryDef.xml
10302
10302
Config folder has not any files

Version file in system folder not found.
10302
Error occur when create temporary folder.

The version.xml file does not exist in the Cooper/
System folder.
No access authority to the temporary folder.
10302
Time out when extract or compress config folder.
10303
Error when apply auto layout
10303
Not permission in destination folder.
10303
Unknow error while copying file.
10303
Unknow error occured.
10303
Version file in system folder not found.
10303
Version file not found.
10303
Load version file in backup folder error
10303
Load version file in system folder error.
10303
Error in read value in config file.
10303
10303
Config folder not found. Check value in DirectoryDef.

xml
Error when load value in DirectoryDef.xml.
10303
Error occur when create temporary folder.
10303
Time out when extract or compress config folder.
10303
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)

Reinstall the application.
Reinstall the application.
Allot authority of the Cooper/Data folder.
Restart the application.
Appx2MT-4
ID
Message
Causes
Remedies
10304
Error when show message dialog.
10320
Error occurred. Message: {0}. StackTrace: {1}.
10320
10320
The directory {0} is not found. Message: {1}.

StackTrace: {2}.
Empty data (should be loading error) or cannot retrieve
data from {NetSetting file}
Cannot locate specified file: {Path}. Message: {1}.
StackTrace: {2}.
Cant load xml node into entity
10320
Cant load file {0} to XmlDocument
10320
Cant load protocol info from xml node
10320
Error occurred while trying to operate with specified

File/Folder {NetSetting.xml} (probably invalid location
or permission error). Message: {1}. StackTrace: {2}.
Cannot operate with file {NetSettingPath} due to
permission problem occurred. Message: {1}.
StackTrace: {2}.
Cant save an object to xml node
Cannot open XML file {0}. Message: {1}. StackTrace:

{2}.
Cannot open XML file {NetSetting.xml}. Message: {1}.
StackTrace: {2}.
The AdjustLayout function of AutoLayout class: Control
input is null
Config TargetView is invalid.
Given key AppScreenFolderKey does not exist for

lookup from Config file.
Directory definition not found for key :
AppScreenFolderKey.
data from [Auto layout file name]
Given key [Mode type] does not exist for lookup from
Collection.
Cannot locate specified file: [Image file].
10320
10320
10320
10320
10320
10320
10345
10345
10345
10345
10345
10345
10345
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)






Appx2MT-5
ID
10345
Message
Causes
Remedies
10365
Given file [screen layout file] contains data that not

valid/suitable for binding into application.
Not enough argument to format a text string
10365
Format of input string is invalid format
10365
Content of exception
10375
Given key [Message id] does not exist for lookup from The config file does not exist or is damaged.
[MessageBoxDef.xml file].
Parameter is null
10380
10385
10385
10385
10385
10385
10385
10410
10410
10410
10410
10410
10410
10410
10410
Given key AppScreenFolderKey does not exist for

lookup from Config file.
The directory [Directory key] is not found.
Cannot operate with directory [Directory path] due to

permission problem occurred.
The directory [Directory path] is not found.

File/Folder [File path] (probably invalid location or
permission error).
Error occurred while try saving data to specified file.
Cannot operate with directory [Directory path] due to

permission problem occurred.
The directory [Directory path] is not found.
Required parameter LoadXMLConfigFile is null or

empty
Error occurred while trying to perform: Failed while
trying to load XML Config file to entities
Required parameter xmlFile is null or empty

Given key [Config file name] does not exist for lookup The config file does not exist or is damaged.
from ConfigData (ConfigAccessor).
Empty data (should be loading error) or cannot retrieve The config file does not exist or is damaged.
data from ConfigData (ConfigAccessor)
Given key [Keyword] does not exist for lookup from
ConfigData (ConfigAccessor).
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)

Appx2MT-6
ID
Message
Causes
Remedies
10430
Required parameter itemKey is null or empty
10430
Given key [Keyword] does not exist for lookup from

Directories (DirectoryAccessor).
data from Directories (DirectoryAccessor)
Given key AppName does not exist for lookup from
Config file.
Another item has the same key with [message id] is
already existed.
Given key TargetView does not exist for lookup from
Config file.
Given key monitorType does not exist for lookup from
Monitors (MonitorAccesor).
data from Monitors (MonitorAccesor)
data from AllNoteInfoItem (NoteInfoAccessor>GetNoteInfoEntity).
Given key [Key] does not exist for lookup from
AllNoteInfoItem (NoteInfoAccessor>GetNoteInfoEntity).
data from ListItemAtCorner (NoteInfoAccessor).
Given key Corner does not exist for lookup from
ListItemAtCorner (NoteInfoAccessor>GetListItemAtCorner).
CornerItemSetting (NoteInfoAccessor->Save).
NoteItemList (NoteInfoAccessor>BindPrivateProperty).
data from dicVersions (AppVersionInfoAccessor).
Given key [Key] does not exist for lookup from
dicVersions (AppVersionInfoAccessor)
File/Folder [Path] (probably invalid location or
permission error).
Another item has the same key with [AttributeName] is
already existed.
Fail to validate XML structure for specified file: [Path].
10430
10435
10435
10450
10450
10450
10465
10465
10465
10465
10465
10465
10465
10465
10565
10565
10565
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)






Appx2MT-7
ID
10565
Message
Causes
Remedies
10565
Method [Method name]: Required parameter [List

parameters] is null or empty
Error occurred while try saving data to specified file:
[Path].
The directory [Path] is not found.
10565
Cannot locate specified file: [Path].
10565
Cannot open XML file [Path].
10565
10605
Cannot operate with file [Path] due to permission

problem occurred.
Value of Pixel pitch space must be greater than 0
10605
Value of Pixel pitch monitor must be greater than 0
10605
Error code + Error message
10605
10615
10615
10615
10615
10615
10615
Number of images is invalid

Cant get image width.
Cant get image height
Cant get image bitstored.
Cant get image depth
Cant get image density
Dont support this output type.

The DDO file does not exist or is damaged.
10615
Cant get SQ for image processing parameters.
10615
Images depth is invalid.
10615
Error in ProcRun method of IPHandle object.
10565
10615
10615
10615
10635

The image processing parameter file of the CL

application is damaged.
Error in Initialize method of IPHandle object.
Cant get Param path.
Error in ConvertParamToXML method of FMImgParam The image processing parameter file of the CL
object.
Note config file reading error
The NoteInfoDef.xml file does not exist or is
damaged.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)

Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Reinstall the CL application.
Appx2MT-8
ID
10640
Message
Causes
Remedies
10640
10640
Item \[Item name] dont have DDO tag in Note config The config file is damaged.
file
[Value] is not appropriate number format.
[Value] is not appropriate hexadecimal format.
10640
10640
Value[Tag value] is overflow double type

[Tag value] is not appropriate date time format.
10640
Number of DDO tag differ from value of Num attribute The config file is damaged.
10640
[Tag value 1], [Tag value 2] are not appropriate

number format.
[String tag] is not appropriate tag format.
10680
10680
[Tags value 1] or [Tags value 2] is not appropriate

date time format.
Given key TargetView does not exist for lookup from
Config file
Given key AppShortName does not exist for lookup
from Config file
Cant make {0} ({1:X8}) tag.
Call FFCutMultibyte method is fail.
10680
Call FFConvertCNStoUTF8 method is fail.
10680
Call FFConvertGB2312toGB18030 method is fail.
10680
Wrong characterset.

The necessary component for image display is
damaged.
damaged.
damaged.
10685
Exception content.
10685
Can not process searching while key search is empty.
10685
Search process is failed.
10685
Get PACS infor error.
10685
Can not create DDO key search.
10685
Search process can only perform when DicomQuerys

status is Idle.
Not enough memory to start retrieve
10640
10640
10675
10675
10715
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)

Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.



Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Appx2MT-9
ID
10715
10715
10715
10720
10720
10720
10720
10720
10720
10720
10720
10720
10720
10720
10725
10725
10725
10730
10730
10730
10740
10740
10740
10740
10740
Message
Retrieve data time out
Causes
Remedies

Cant delete old images file at folder: {0}.
have been installed. If the problem continues to occur,
restart the system.
Cant get AE: [AEName] in DicomQRNetSetting.xml file Incorrect settings of PACS server.
Confirm the PACS settings of S-UTL. After setting
normally, restart the system.
Cant append ddo tag: {0:x}.
Restart the system.
Cant append ddo tag: {0:x} or {1:x}.
Restart the system.
index: {0} of pixel spacing is out of range
Restart the system.
Get value of tag: {0:x} failure.
Restart the system.
Invalid direction scan {0}
Restart the system.
Cant copy value of tag: {0:x} to tag: {1:x}.
Restart the system.
Cant delete ddo tag: {0:x}
Restart the system.
Read density is empty.
Restart the system.
Read density is not double type.
Restart the system.
Cannot set value for Kanji Patient name tag.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Cannot set value for Patient name tag.
Retrieved image folder: {0} dont exist.
Cant load DDO file:
Restart the system.
Cant rename retrieved file.
Restart the system.
ImgProcCtrl.dll does not exist.
Restart the system.
Process image failure
Incorrect image information of DDO file.
Reinstall the linking appication for which reinstllation is
supported.
DLL for processing image not found.
ImgProcCtrl.dl does not exist.
Restart the system.
supported.
Access COM component fail.
An error occurs when accessing to the function of Restart the system.
ImgProcCtrl.dll.
supported.
Cant load DDO file: {0}
The DDO file does not exist.
Restart the system.
The DDO file format is not the standard format
of DICOM.
Cant read image file path at tag {0}
The tag which specifies path to the DDO file does Restart the system.
not exist.
Image file: {0} dont exist
The image file does not exist.
Confirm the file path again.
If the error continues to occur, restart the system.
Not enough memory to read image file {0}
Restart the system.
Open Image file: {0} error
The image file does not exist.
Confirm the file path again.
The path of the image file is too long.
If the error continues to occur, restart the system.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx2MT-10
ID
Message
10740
10740
10740
Allocate memory for image buffer failure

Not enough memory to save image file {0}
Cant save buffer to image with path: {0}
10740
10740
10740
10745
Not enough memory to retrieve image to client

Not enough memory to process image during retrieval
period
Cant delete original image that retrieved from server.
Store image thead has unknow error
20005
Causes
Remedies

Not enough memory in HDD to retrieve images.
Not enough memory in HDD to retrieve image.
The file path is too long.
The storage folder of file does not exist.
No authority to write in files.
Restart the system.

Delete unnecessary studies from the CL application.
Delete unnecessary studies from the CL application.
Confirm the authority to write in files and the existance of
storage folder.
Confirm the authority to delete files in the folder.

Application configuration error.
No authority to delete files.

damaged.
20005
The operation is timeout. Create WCF channel failed.
20005
The operation is timeout. Stop service failed.
20010
The operation is timeout. Send message failed.
20050
Start service [Service name] failed.
20175
Create process for [AppName] application failed.
20205
Start Cooper applications failed. Time out occurs.
20205
20205
The file on path [Path] is not exist or maybe it is already The config file is damaged.
running.
Create process for {0} application failed.
20215
20235
(EventHandler) handler is null

This TypeCode [TypeCode] is not supported.
Retrieve an event without the delegate function.

20350
Application ID [AppID] is duplicated.
20350
The message string appended with the string

representation of the invalid argument value.
Cant get tag number.
DDO file is not found.
Load DDO file is error.
Cant get TypeCode of tag [Tag]

Restart the system.
Restart the system.

Restart the system.

Restart the system.
Restart the system.
Restart the system.
20350
20350
20350
20350
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Restart the system.

Restart the system.
Appx2MT-11
ID
Message
Causes
Remedies
20350
20350
20350
Cant get Length of tag [Tag].

Length of tag [Tag] equal 0.
[DLL] specified in a DLL import cannot be found

The Dll file does not exist or is damaged.
20615
Close SysConfigDB error.
The config file is damaged or the DB file is

damaged.
20615
Cant connect to SysConfigDB.

damaged.
20615
Cant get SysConfigDB path.

damaged.
20615
Cant get GA offset from DB.

damaged.
20615
Cant get GS offset from DB.

damaged.
20715
Port: [PortNo] is not available.
20720
Cannot get value of Patient name tag.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Restart the system.

Restart the system.
If the problem continues to occur, reinstall the CL
application.
application.
application.
application.
application.
Restart the system.
Appx2MT-12
Appendix 3 Precise Enlargement Function Error Message Table

NOTE
ECHO represents Precise Enlargement Function.
ID
01001
01005
01010
01010
01015
Message
01145
Unknown error
Not found config file: Echo.Config.exe
Saving data error
Content of exception
UserUtility: The config with Key={0} is not found in the
config file of application
VersionInformation: The Application element with
ID={0} in the version file cant be load.
Unknown error
01145
01145
Cant Load ImageError file :

Cant get PEM value
01145
Cant connect to database
01145
Not found Monitor LUT file
01165
The string with Id=[LanguageID] is not found in the

language file
Not found AppName key
DDO file is not found
Save Font information to application config file error.
Value of Loupe Zoom Ratio is invalid
Value of Loupe Zoom Ratio must be greater than 0
Image buffers size is invalid
Error occurred by ImgProcCtrl::Execute(Path=[DDO
file path],ProcFlag=[pem process],ProcImgType=
[Image type],FuncID=[Function ID],ErrID=[Error id],
ErrDetailID=[Error detail])
Image file is not found
[ArgumentException]
Not found resource file
01025
01390
10000
11005
11010
11155
11155
11375
11380
11380
21175
21390
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Causes
Remedies

Restart the system or reinstall ECHO.

Reinstall ECHO.
Reinstall ECHO.
Reinstall ECHO.
Reinstall ECHO.


damaged.
The resource file does not exist or is damaged.
application is damaged or the PEM value itself
does not exist.
The database of the CL application does not exist
or is damaged.
The monitor LUT file does not exist or is
damaged.
Reinstall ECHO.
Verify the setting of the CL application.
ConfigQA->PEM Processing in the case of Magnify
Display
Reinstall ECHO.

There is a running ECHO process.
Not enough memory.
The DDO file does not exist or is damaged. Or the
image processing parameter file of the CL
Reinstall ECHO.
Restart the system.
Exposure again.
Reinstall ECHO.
Reinstall ECHO.
Reinstall ECHO.
Restart the system.
Exposure again. If the problem continues to occur, reinstall
the CL application.
Failure in generation of image data by Console.
Restart the system.
The resource file does not exist or is damaged.
Reinstall ECHO.
Appx3MT-1
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx3MT-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx3MT-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx3MT-4
Appendix 4 QA ROI Measurement Error Message Table

NOTE
ROI represents QA ROI Measurement.
ID
Message
01001
01010
Unknown Error!
Not found config file: {0}
01045
01390
VersionInformation: The string with Id={0} in the

language file cant be load.
VersionInformation: The Application element with
ID={0} in the version file cant be load.
Unknown Error!
10000
11005

Cannot get information about monitor.
11005
Monitor LUT file not exist.
11015
11015
11015
11020
11025
11025
Could not found DDO file!

Get image type failed!
Load image information failed!
Bad input parameters!
Can not load DDO file!
High quality image file does not exist!
11025
Standard image file does not exist!
11025
11025
11025
11025
11025
11025
11025
11025
11025
Can not get high quality images URL!

Can not get standard images URL!
Can not get images depth!
Can not get images height!
Can not get images width!
Can not get images pixel spacing X!
Can not get images pixel spacing Y!
Can not get images density!
Can not get device processing description!
01045
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Causes
Remedies

The ROI.exe.config file does not exist. Or the file
is deleted or renamed by user mistakenly.
An unknown error has occurred when error
message dialog box appears.
There is a running ROI process.
The monitor information file is damaged.
The monitor LUT file does not exist or is
damaged.
The high resolution image file does not exist.
The standard-pixel density image file does not
exist.
Restart the system or reinstall ROI.

Reinstall ROI.
Restart the system or reinstall ROI.
Restart the system.
Set the 1st monitor again at the Change Monitor from
ROI installer.
Open the QA window again.
Reinstall ROI.
Reinstall ROI.
After storing the high resolution images to the console,
press the ROI measurement button again.
If the problem continues to occur, restart the system.
Open the QA window again or exposure again.
Appx4MT-1
ID
11025
11025
11030
11035
11040
21005
21005
21030
31010
31010
31010
Message
Can not get images sensitivity!
Can not get images rotate/invert state!
Read configuration information failed!
Bad parameters!
Bad parameters!
Can not apply layout for screen.
Can not set string definition for screen items.
Invalid XML file format!
Roi started OK!
Receive command: {0}
Receive message: {0}
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Causes
Remedies

-

Reinstall ROI.
Reinstall ROI.
Reinstall ROI.
Reinstall ROI.
Reinstall ROI.
Reinstall ROI.
-
Appx4MT-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx4MT-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx4MT-4
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
RI-I
Control Sheet
Issue date
Revision number
10/20/2000
12/10/2000
00
00

Revision (FM2950)
04/10/2001
01
05/30/2001
02
Previous Chapter D Reinstalling the Software

modified (FM2951)
Revision for software version A02
08/30/2001
03
08/30/2001
03
03/20/2002
04
03/20/2002
07/20/2002
04
05

07/20/2002
05
11/30/2002
06
11/30/2002
03/01/2003
06
07

03/01/2003
08/20/2003
07
08

12/10/2003
09
12/10/2003
09
02/20/2004
10

010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Reason
Pages affected
All pages
I, II, 5, 7, 8, 9, 1315, 22, 23, 27,
28, 33, 35, 39, 40
All pages
I, II, 1, 35, 8, 9, 11, 13-16, 1842,
Appx A-18, Appx B-14,
Appx C-1, 2, Appx D-16,
I, II, 1, 3, 4, 7, 1217, 21, 22,
2429,31, 32, 34, 35, 37, 38, 41
Appx A-1, 4, 7, Appx C-3, 4,
Appx D-1, 3, 4, 6-8
1820, 23, 30, 33, 36, 39, 40,
4246
I, II, 15, 34, 41, Appx A-7,
Appx B-13, Appx D-1, 4
Appx D-2, 3, 5, 6-8
I, II, 13-16, 1924, 26, 28, 29, 31,
32, 38, 39, 41, 4548, 54, Appx A-1,
7, Appx D-1, 2, 47, Appx E-14,
Appx F-14
12, 17, 18, 25, 27, 30, 3337, 40,
4244, 4953, Appx D-810
I, II, 3, 4, 9, 22, 24, 26, 28, 3133,
38, Appx D-1, 2, 49, 11,
Appx F-5, 6
Appx D-10, 12
I, II, 20, 22, 26, 3234, 39,
Appx C-24, Appx D-1, 7
40-54
I, II, 1, 3, 14, 15, 20, 22, 24, 2628,
3145, 4858, Appx C-2, Appx D-1
IIV, 22, 25, 29, 38, 41, Appx A-7,
Appx C-2, Appx D-1, Appx D-2
2628, 3037, 39, 40, 4258,
Appx D-314
All pages
RI-II
Control Sheet
Issue date
Revision number
07/30/2004
11
07/30/2004
11
11/12/2004
12
07/30/2005
14
07/30/2005
11/30/2005
14
15
11/30/2005
07/30/2006
15
16
07/30/2006
16
07/20/2007
17
07/20/2007
05/09/2008
17
18
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
Reason
Pages affected
I, III, 1, 340, 4648, 52, 57, 58, 60,

62, 63, 66, 67, 75, 76, 78,
Appx A-16, 816, Appx B-1, 2,
Appx D-1, 2, 58, 10, 14,
Appx E-1, 2, Appx F-1
4145, 4951, 5356, 59, 61, 64,
65, 6874, 77, 79, 80, Appx A-7,
Appx B-3, 4, Appx D-1113
Revision for software version V1.0(C), support I, III, 1, 3, 41, 43, 45, 46, 50, 55, 57,
provided to NEC PC and corrections (FM4450) 59, 60, 6264, 67, 75, 78,
Appx C-14, Appx G-112
I, III, 1, 3, 4, 43, 47, 57, 58, 61, 64,
65, 67, 75, 8186, Appx A-2,
Appx D-2, 10, Appex G-1, 2, 12
44
I, III, 1, 45, 47, 53, 55, 57, 64, 66,
74, 83, Appx G-1, 11, 12,
Appx H-14
46
I, III, 5, 23, 44, 46, 49-53, 66, 73,
Appx RI A-1317, Appx RI D-2, 3, 7,
11, 14, Appx RI G-1012, 16
Appex RI I-16
613, 2443, 45, 47, 48, 5465,
6772, 7490, Appx RI A-18,
Appx RI G-1315
I, III, 13, 10, 11, 26, 4248, 51, 53,
5658, 6063, 6567, 69, 71, 77,
78, 81, 84, Appx RI A-10,
Appx RI C-24, 68, Appx RI D-2, 9,
1518, Appx RI G-1, 2, 1316,
Appx RI H-1, Appx RI I-7, 8
Appx RI C-5, Appx RI D-1014
I, III, 1, 3, 42, 44, 46, 53, 5658,
6063, 65, 66, 6769, 71, 77, 78,
81, 84, Appx RI C-4, Appx RI D-2,
17, Appx RI G-1, 2, 13, 14, 16,
Appx RI H-1
RI-III
Control Sheet
Issue date
Revision number
10/31/2008
19
10/31/2008
19
11/30/2009
20
11/30/2009
20
03/31/2010
21
03/31/2010
21
12/10/2010
22
12/10/2010
22
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Reason
Pages affected
I, IV, 1, 3, 42, 44, 4649, 51, 54,
5759, 61, 63, 64, 6668, 70, 72,
78, 79, 82, 85, 92, Appx RI A-2, 8,
10, 20, D-2, 3, 911, 16, 17, G-1, 2,
13, 14, 16, H-1, J-14
50, 52, 53, 55, 56, 60, 62, 65, 69,
71, 7377, 80, 81, 83, 84, 8691,
Appx RI A-1119
I, IV, 14, 22, 4281, 83, 8596,
98101, 103, 105109, 111, 114,
115, 123, 126129, 136144,
Appx A-15, 1013, 2124, B-13,
6, C-4, D-15, 10, 1214, 17, 18,
E-1, 46, G-1, 2, 14, 17, 18, I-712
82, 84, 97, 102, 104, 110, 112, 113,
116122, 124, 125, 130135,
Appx A-69, 1420, B-4, 5, D-69,
11, 15, 16, 19, 20, E-2, G-313, 15,
16
I, IV, 24, 43, 45, 61, 62, 84, 85, 87,
90, 93, 94, 96, 97, 99, 100,
102104, 107, 108, 112116, 121,
131, 143, 144, 147, 148, Appx A-1,
2, 7, 8, 2325, 27, 28, D-13, 911,
14, 15, 18, 19, 2124, D-1, H-1, I-4,
7, 8
6383, 86, 88, 89, 91, 92, 95, 98,
101, 105, 106, 109111, 117120,
122130, 132142, 145, 146,
Appx A-26, D-12, 13, 16, 17, 20
I, IV, 45, 84, 107, 111, 112, 133,
145, Appx D-2, 14, 22,
Appx I-1316
Appx B-7, 8, Appx C-7, 8,
Appx E-7, 8, Appx G-19, 20
RI-IV
1. Installation Flowchart (DELL PC)

Presented below is the procedure used for installing the CL-AP from the
OS. Follow the flowchart on the next page to install the CL-AP.
For how to install the CL-AP from the OS to an NEC PC, see
Appendix G Reinstalling the Software (NEC PC).
For how to install the CL-AP from the OS to an HP PC, see
Appendix J Reinstalling the Software (HP PC).
NOTES
To facilitate you to understand installation workflow in this edition, the

following icons are shown to the right of the title in each chapter.
XG-1 RU
5000plus
9000
355RU
356
357
359
362
363
364
366
367
368
370
371
372
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
XG-1 RU
FCR5000, etc.
9000 series
CR-IR 355RU
CR-IR 356
CR-IR 357
CR-IR 359
CR-IR 362
CR-IR 363
CR-IR 364
CR-IR 366
CR-IR 367
CR-IR 368
CR-IR 370
CR-IR 371
CR-IR 372
Windows 2000 screens are used herein, whose contents are the same
as those displayed by Windows XP or Windows Vista.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
RI-1
Installation workflow
CL-Config and RU-Config(*1) backup
2.
Installing and Setting Up the OS
See Chapter 5 under

MU: Maintenance
Utility.
15. Creating the FTP Server

(Windows 2000/XP only)
16. CR-IR346RU Settings
For RU-CL 1:1 connection:

Essential
For RU-CL N:N connection:

Only for RU master IIP
17. CR-IR35X/36X/37X Settings

3.
4.
Setting Up the Monitor

18. Setting Up NetMeeting [Reference]
Installing MSDE/Database Management

System and Its Service Pack
Only when remote

maintenance mode is used.
19. IIS Network Virus Protection
5.1 Installing the CL-AP

Windows XP Service Pack 2
5.2 Replacing the Menu Database
21. Checking the Virtual Memory Size

6.
Installing the Screen Saver

22. Setting the Event Log
7.
8.
9.
Installing the CL Components

Installing the Standard Key
****BLANK****
10. Option Key Installation
When one XG-1 RU or multiple

XG-1 RUs or 356/357/359/36X/
37X are connected.
When one XG-1 RU or one
35X or multiple XG-1 RUs or
5000plus or 356/357/359/36X/
37X are connected.
23. Canceling AutoPlay Mode

(Windows Vista only)
24. Firewall Settings (Windows Vista only)
*1 For the 5000 plus series or CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X, see the individual
Service Manual to save Config backup.
For details of the RU master IIP see 6. RU-CL N:N Connection
Function Overview under MD: Machine Description.
11. AP Key Installation

12. Initializing the Image Database
13. Display Optimization (LUT file settings)
14. Restoring the CL-Config
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
RI-2
2. Installing and Setting Up the OS

Monitor settings
XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
NOTES
Before installing the OS, note down the CL host name, IP address,
subnet mask, and other relevant information. These items of
information will be called for during OS installation.
The 5000 plus is abbreviated hereinafter simply IR.
OS installation drive
Partition/format
Name
Organization
Product key
Computer name
and password
Computer name
Password
Protocol used
IP address
Network settings
OS installation and setting procedures are different between Windows

2000, Windows XP and Windows Vista. Follow the procedures specific
to the used OS.
For Windows 2000
See 2.1 Installing and Setting Windows 2000.
For Windows XP
See 2.2 Installing and Setting Windows XP.
u Property sheet
Regional settings
Display color
True Color (24 or 32bits)
Display area
1024768 (15inch LCD/17inch CRT)
MS-IME setting
(Japanese version The toolbar is stored in the task bar.
only)
Subnet mask
Domain or
work group
C:\
C drive only (no other partitions will
be created.) /NTFS
FUJIFILM Corporation
Indicated on the right-hand side of
the PC main unit cover.
The default settings when shipped
from factory
CR-IR346CL
: CLXXXXXXXX
CR-IR346CL (Lite) : CRXXXXXXXX
CR-IR348CL (Plus) : CPXXXXXXXX
(XXXXXXXX : manufacture No.)
Take notes accordingly if changed.
fcr-iip
TCP/IP
172.16.1.20 when shipped from
factory.
* Take notes accordingly if changed.
factory.
* Take notes accordingly if changed.
Used by the work group.
(The group name remains the
default.)
For Windows Vista

See 2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista.
This computers Automatically logged

Administrator
on user name
user settings
(auto logon settings) Password
fcr-iip
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
RI-3
2.1 Installing and Setting Windows 2000

2.1.1 Installing Windows 2000
This section explains about the Windows 2000 installation procedure.
The OS is to be installed in the following situations:
After HDD replacement
After an error occurrence in the OS
Items to be readied for OS installation:
Windows 2000 installation CD
(Dell Product Recovery CD (Windows 2000) contained in the PC
box.)
Dell Resource CD
(A CD that stores various drivers.)
Product key
(Indicated on the right-hand side cover of the PC main unit.)
NOTES
OS installation procedures are described herein using a DELL
OptiPlex GX110 PC and a GX150 PC models.
If other PC models are used, see the user manual that comes with the PC.
If the PC is not connected via the network, the network setup windows
will not be displayed while the OS is being installed. To establish
network settings, be sure to connect the PC to the network (connection
to the RU) before installation work.
When the HDD has been replaced, check setup details ahead of time
because the HDD cannot be operated unless the PCs BIOS settings
are changed accordingly.
Driver software installation can be required while Windows 2000 is
being installed. In such a case, install it using the Dell Resource CD.
Removing the board and peripheral devices
1.
IMPORTANT
Before formatting the HDD, back up necessary data other than image
data as required by the user.
Back up config data (CL-Config, RU-Config) that stores various CL
and RU settings, ahead of time.
Use the User Utility function to back up user setup information items
(check all the items).
Remove the PEI or PSI board if it is mounted on the PCI

slots.
For board removal procedures, see Appendix C Removing/
Reinstalling the Board (PEI/PSI).
2.
Disconnect all peripheral devices, such as the barcode

reader and magnetic card reader, from the USB ports.
NOTES
When the OS was installed with the PEI/PSI board mounted on the
PCI slots, be sure to delete the
file from the Device
Manager upon completion of OS installation.
Checking the PEI01A board device driver in 3.2 Typical
Procedure for Achieving Recovery from an LP (Local Printer)
Printout Generation Failure under MT: Machine
Troubleshooting.
If you perform the OS installation procedure while the peripheral
devices are connected to the USB ports, improper drivers will be
installed as is the case with the PEI and PSI boards.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
RI-4
Network connection between the CL and the RU/IR

Unless the PC is connected properly via the network, the network setup
windows will not be displayed while the OS is being installed, depending
on the Windows 2000 installer specifications.
1.
Use a crossing cable to connect the CL to the RU/IR or use a

network cable to connect the CL to the HUB for network
connection via the HUB.
2.
Turn ON the power to the RU/IR.

For network connection via the HUB, the power can be left
turned OFF.
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
RAID-related settings
When a RAID-based PC is used, perform RAID-related settings as
appropriate.
For details of RAID-related settings, see Appendix I RAID-related
Settings.
RI-5
Collecting the computer-related information
1.
6.
After a while, the message Press any key to boot from CD..
appears at the upper left corner of the window.

The PC starts up.
2.
Save the setup data and restart the PC.
Press the <F2> key when the message F2 SETUP appears

at the upper right of the window.
NOTE
If the <F2> key is not pressed with the timeliness, the setup window
will not open.
In such a case, restart the PC to perform step 2. again.
00000346.EPS
7.
NOTE
The setup window opens.
3.
If you do not press the <Enter> key within a period of about

3 seconds after the message Press any key to boot from CD..
appears at the upper left corner of the screen, the installation CD
cannot be recognized.
Select Boot Sequence and press the <Enter> key.

The startup drive selection dialog opens.
4.
If such a failure occurs, restart the PC to perform step 7. again.
Deselect both Diskette Drive and Hard-Disk Drive C:

(uncheck the mark.)
The Windows 2000 Professional Setup window opens in about

two minutes.
8.
Uncheck both Diskette Drive and

Hard-Disk Drive C:.
Leave IDE CD-ROM Device as is.
5.
Press the <Enter> key within a 3-second period.
Press the <Enter> key.
00000325.EPS
Insert the installation CD into the CD-ROM drive of the PC.

00000302.EPS
The Windows 2000 License Agreement window opens.
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
RI-6
9.
Deleting/formatting a partition
Press the <F8> key.
1.
Select C: NTFS (or make sure that C: NTFS is selected)

and then press the <D> key.
NOTE
Before deleting a partition, back up important image data and other
necessary data that are stored on the HDD.
If a partition is deleted, the entire data in that partition is lost.
00000303.EPS
A screen about Windows 2000 repairs opens in several seconds.
00000307.EPS
NOTE
10. Press the <Esc> key.
If Unknown partition exists on the window above, press the <L>

and then <Enter> keys to delete the partition.
The partition deletion confirmation screen opens.
00000304.EPS
A window opens, where partitions are to be deleted or set up.
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
RI-7
2.
4.
NOTE
Select Unpartitioned space (or make sure that

Unpartitioned space is selected) and then press the
<Enter> key.
This screen does not open when an attempt is made to format a

partition in which no OS is installed.
NOTE
The <C> key needs not be pressed because only the C drive will
be used on the CL.
Note, however, that creation of partition is not required for software
version A10 or later.
00000308.EPS
The partition deletion confirmation screen opens again.
3.
00000310.EPS
Press the <L> key.
The format selection screen opens.
00000309.EPS
After the completion of partition deletion, the partition creation

screen opens.
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
RI-8
5.
Verify that the Format the partition using the NTFS file
system option is selected, and then press the <Enter> key.
8.
Check (
C:.
) both 1. Diskette Drive and 2. Hard-Disk Drive
Check ( ) both 1. and 2.
00000311.EPS
After formatting the HDD that takes about eight to 20 minutes

depending on the HDD capacity, files will be copied from the CDROM to the HDD (this takes about five minutes).
The PC restarts.
6.
Save the setup data and start the PC.
10. After the installation data has been read from the HDD (this
when
takes about three minutes), click
Windows 2000 setup wizard startup window opens.
When the message F2 SETUP appears at the upper right

corner of the window, press the <F2> key.
REFERENCE
NOTE
switches to the Regional Settings window.
If you fail to press the <F2> key, restart the PC, wait until the
message F2 SETUP appears at the upper right corner of the
screen, and press the <F2> key.
7.
9.
00000511.EPS
If you do not click
, the system automatically
Device driver setup processing starts, which takes about four

minutes.
After the completion of device driver setup processing, the
Regional Settings window opens.

The startup drive selection dialog opens.
00000315.EPS
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
RI-9
Performing setup in accordance with the setup wizard
1.
From the Regional Settings window, click
5.
Enter the following settings:

Enter a computer name (host name) in the
field.
The Software Personal Setup window opens.
2.
The default settings are as follows.
Enter FUJIFILM Corporation in the
CR-IR346CL : CLXXXXXXXX
(use upper-case characters to enter the CL.
XXXXXXXX are for the CL serial number.)
field. ( represents a space.)

CR-IR348CL : CRXXXXXXXX (Lite)

(use upper-case characters to enter the CR.
XXXXXXXX are for the CR serial number.)
3.
Click
CR-IR348CL : CPXXXXXXXX (Plus)

(use upper-case characters to enter the CP.
The product key input window opens.
NOTES
Enter the host name that was noted down before the start of OS
installation.
Even if you enter lower-case characters, their upper-case
00000318.EPS
4.
Enter the product key in the

click
equivalents appear in the
field and then
field.
Note, however, that the entered lower-case characters will be

internally handled as lower-case character data.
REFERENCE
The product key is indicated on the right-hand side cover of the PC
main unit.
A window opens to prompt for computer name and password
input.
Enter fcr-iip in the
field.
field.
REFERENCE
The character string entries in the [Administrator Password:] and
[Confirm Password:] fields appear as asterisks (*).
00000319.EPS
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
RI-10
6.
7.
Click
Setting the network information
The date/time setup window opens.
NOTE
Verify the date, time, and time zone, and then click
If the PC is not connected to the network, the network setup window

does not open.
If any wrong setting is encountered, correct it and then click
1.
.
Verify the date.
Verify the time.
When a network setup option selection window appears,

prompting you to choose between Standard and Custom,
(by changing to ), and then
choose
click
The Network Component Setup window opens.
Verify the time zone.
2.
Make sure that

is checked.
If it is not checked, put a check mark on it (by changing
to ).
3.
Select
then click
00000320.EPS
(by highlighting it), and

.
The Internet protocol (TCP/IP) properties window opens.
The Network Setup window opens in several minutes.
4.
Choose
(so that
changes to
).
IP Address and Subnet Mask then appear.
REFERENCE
The IP Address and Subnet Mask fields are now ready to accept
your numerical value input.
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
RI-11
5.
8.
Verify that the
radio
Enter an IP address (e.g., 172.16.1.20) in the
button is selected (set to
field.
), and then click
Enter a subnet mask (e.g., 255.255.0.0) in the

field.
NOTE
Enter the IP address and subnet mask that were noted down
before the start of OS installation.
6.
Click
The system returns then to the Network Component Setup

window.
7.
Click
00000345.EPS
REFERENCE
. It takes a few seconds to display the
Do not let the CL become a domain member.
following window (computer domain setup window).

After a while, the computer domain setup window opens.
The Completing the Windows 2000 Setup Wizard window opens

in about five minutes.
9.
Remove the CD from the CD-ROM drive.
10. Click
The PC restarts and the Network Identification Wizard Start

window opens.
00000314.EPS
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
RI-12
Setting the user to be logged on automatically
1.
5.
From the Network Identification Wizard Start window, click
Click
After a while, the Getting Started with Windows 2000 window

opens.
.
A computer user setup window opens.
00000336.EPS
2.
Make sure that the

button is turned ON.
3.
radio
Click the downward arrow mark
within the
field to change to
.
00000323.EPS
6.
Deselect
to
field.
field.
7.
(so that
changes
).
Click the

OS installation is now completed.
REFERENCE
The character string entries in the [Password:] and [Confirm
Password:] fields appear as asterisks (*).
4.
Click
The Network Identification Wizard ends and the desktop screen

appears on the display.
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
RI-13
2.1.2 Installing the Driver Software
A new window opens to indicate that the installation wizard is

started.
For driver software installation, use the utility software on Dell

ResourceCD. To do this, you must first install the utility software on the
PC for the CL.
REFERENCE
To determine what driver software needs to be installed, you can use
Device Manager. To open Device Manager, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click the [My Computer] icon from the [Start] menu. From the
pop-up menu that opens, choose [Properties].
The [System Properties] window opens.
00000366.EPS
3.
Click
2. Click the [Hardware] tab.
The installation processing starts.
3. Click [Device Manager].

Device Manager opens.
The software for items marked ? in Device Manager is not installed.

Install the driver software for such items.
4.
After a while, a window opens to indicate that setup is completed.
Verify that
then click
is chosen, and
.
The PC restarts.
Installing the Dell ResourceCD utility software
1.
Insert Dell ResourceCD, which is supplied with the PC, into

the CD-ROM drive.
2.
When the following window automatically opens, click

.
REFERENCE
Depending on the version of the Dell ResourceCD utility software,
the PC needs not to be restarted.
00000365.EPS
010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
RI-14
3.
Installing the driver software
WinZip Self-Extractor appears.
For the GX150, install the following driver software.

: Intel815
Video driver
: Intel CHIP SET
System driver
Audio
driver
: ADI1885

IDE ATA/ATAPI controller : Intel ATA Storage
4.
Since the drivers to be installed vary with the employed PC model and
utility CD-ROM version, confirm the correct drivers by calling Dell
Technical Support or visiting associated home page.
Click
Click
to decompress files.
Dell Computer Self-Extracting Driver Installation appears.
NOTE
1.
In the Video area, click INTEL 815.
5.
Click
, point to Programs and Dell Accessories,
and then click Dell ResourceCD.

The Dell ResourceCD utility software starts up.
2.
When the following window opens, perform setup for the

Search Criteria area under the following conditions.
System Model = OptiPlex GX150
Operating System = Windows 2000
Device Type = All

Topic = My Drivers
RI000064.EPS
A window opens to indicate that unzipping is completed.
6.
Click
Internet Explorer starts up.
RI000063.EPS
010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
RI-15
7.
Scroll the screen downward until you reach its bottom, and
then click
.
8.
Choose Run this program from its current location and

then click
.
The Security Warning window opens.
9.
Click
RI000066.EPS
The driver software installer starts running.
10. Follow the installers on-screen instructions to install the

driver software.
11. Install the other driver software (Intel CHIP SET, ADI1885
and Intel ATA Storage) by performing the same procedure as

indicated in steps 3. through 10.
The File Download window opens.
010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
RI000065.EPS
RI-16
4.
Perform the following OS-related settings.
The number of colors (Colors) and monitor resolution (Screen

area)
Refresh frequency
Modification of the OS selection menu
Procedure for avoiding a password input prompt when exiting the
suspend mode (as necessary)
Defining the character to be used as a decimal point
Setting the monitor
1.
Click
Right-click a blank space on the desktop, and then choose

Properties from the pop-up menu.
5.
Click
The screen area changes and the monitor setting window opens.
6.
Click
NOTE
Click
immediately. If it is not clicked in 15 seconds,
the window returns to the previous status.
00000108.EPS
2.
3.
Complete monitor setup as directed below.
II
00000109.EPS
I. Colors
: Choose True Color (24- or 32-bit).
II. Screen area : Choose 1024 768 pixels.
010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
RI-17
5.
Setting the refresh frequency
1.
The Plug-and-Play Monitor and ... Properties window opens.
2.
3.
From the Refresh Frequency pull-down menu, choose

75 Hertz.
6.
Click
NOTE
If you do not click
within 15 seconds, the system
reverts the previous setting. Therefore, click it without delay.
7.
NOTE
The screen area changes and the Monitor Setup window opens.
In the Settings tab of the Display Properties window,

click
Click
Click

RI000041.EPS
4.
Click
010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
RI-18
4.
Hiding the OS selection menu
Uncheck
When the OS is installed newly, the OS selection menu opens at OS

startup. Therefore, perform the following procedure so that the OS
selection menu does not open:
1.
Click
, point to Settings, and click Control
Panel.
2.
Double-click
00000125.EPS
5.
3.
Click
You are returned to the System Properties window.
Click the Advanced tab and then click

.
6.
Click
00000124.EPS
010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
RI-19
Procedure for avoiding a password input prompt when

exiting the suspend mode
By default, the PC prompts for password input when you attempt to exit
the suspend mode. Since it is conceivable that the user may
inadvertently press the Suspend button on the keyboard, perform the
following procedure as needed.
1.
From the

Select . (period) as the character to be used as a decimal point.
If anything other than a period is selected, an error occurs when you
select an image distribution destination with the QA function.
1.
Control Panel.
2.
Double-click
2.
Double-click
The Regional Options window opens.
3.
The Power Options Properties window opens.
3.
menu, point to Settings, and then click
Control Panel.
From the
Click the Advanced tab.
Click the Numbers tab and then select . (period) for the
Decimal symbol field.
If, as a result of the above selection, the same symbol is selected for
the Digit grouping symbol field and Decimal symbol field, change
the symbol for the Digit grouping symbol field.
RI000084.EPS
4.
Uncheck
(
).
RI000083.EPS
5.
Click
and then close the Control Panel.

010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
RI000101.EPS
4.
Click
RI-20
Setting the taskbar

Change the setting so that the Windows taskbar is hidden automatically.
1.
Right-click the mouse on the taskbar to select Properties.

The Taskbar and Start Menu Properties window opens.
2.
Place a checkmark to
).
RI0000362.EPS
3.
Click
and close the Taskbar and Start Menu
Properties window.
010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
RI-21
2.2 Installing and Setting Windows XP

2.2.1 Installing and Setting Windows XP
This section describes how to install Windows XP.
Items to be readied for OS installation
Windows XP installation CD
(Dell Product Recovery CD (Windows XP) contained in the PC box.)
Dell Resource CD
(A CD that stores various drivers.)
Product key
(Indicated on the right-hand side cover of the PC main unit.)
IMPORTANT
Before formatting the HDD, make backup copy of data other than
image data, if any, as required by the user.
NOTES
OS installation procedures are described herein using a Dell Optiplex
GX60 PC model.
If other PC models are actually used, see the User Manual that comes
with the PC.
will not be displayed while the OS is being installed. To perform
network settings, be sure to connect the PC to the network (connection
to the RU) accordingly before installation work.
When HDD of a recommended PC model is replaced, check setup
details ahead of time because the HDD may not be operated unless
the PCs BIOS settings are changed accordingly.
Driver software installation may be required while Windows XP is
being installed. In such an instance, use the Dell Resource CD to
install it.
Removing the boards and peripheral devices
1.
For how to remove the board, see Appendix C Removing/

Make backup copy of config data (CL-Config, RU-Config) that stores

various CL and RU settings, ahead of time.
(place checkmarks to all items).
Remove the PEI or PSI board if it is mounted on the PCI

slots.
2.
Disconnect all peripheral devices, such as barcode reader

and magnetic card reader, from the USB ports.
NOTES
When the OS was installed with the PEI/PSI board mounted on the
PCI slots, make sure to delete the
file using Device
Manager upon completion of OS installation.
Troubleshooting
If you perform the OS installation procedure while the peripheral
devices are connected to the USB ports, improper drivers will be
installed as is the case with the PEI or PSI board.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
RI-22
Network connection between the CL and the RU/IR

Unless the PC is network-connected properly in advance, the network
setup windows will not be displayed while the OS is being installed,
depending on the Windows XP installer specifications.
1.
Use a crossing cable to connect the CL to the RU/IR or use a

network cable to connect the CL to the HUB for network
connection via the HUB.
2.
Turn ON the power to the RU/IR.

For network connection via the HUB, the power can be left
turned OFF.
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
When a RAID-based PC is used, perform RAID-related settings as
appropriate.
For details of RAID-related settings, see Appendix I RAID-related
Settings.
RI-23
6.
Collecting the computer-related information
1.
After a while, the Press any key to boot from CD message

appears at the upper left corner of the window.

The PC starts running.
2.
press any key to boot from CD
Press the <F2> key when F2 SETUP appears at the upper

right corner of the window.
NOTE
RI000211.EPS
will not open.
In such an instance, restart the PC to perform step 2. above again.
7.
NOTE
3.
If you do not press the <Enter> key within about three seconds
after the Press any key to boot from the CD message appears at
the upper left corner of the window, the installation CD will not be
recognized accordingly.

A dialog opens prompting you to select a startup drive.
4.
Remove checkmarks from Diskette Drive and Hard-Disk

Drive C:. (Uncheck the marks.)
1. Diskette Drive
In about two minutes, the Window XP Professional Setup

window opens.
8.

The Windows XP License Agreement window opens.
+,- to move down/up
Remove checkmarks from Diskette Drive

and Hard-Disk Drive C:.
Leave IDE CD-ROM Device checked as is.
5.
Press the <Enter> key within three seconds.
9.
Press the <F8> key.

A window opens, where partitions are to be deleted or set up.
RI000210.EPS
Insert the installation CD into the PC.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-24
5.
Deleting/formatting a partition
1.
Select C: NTFS (or make sure that C: NTFS is selected)

and then press the <D> key.
After formatting the HDD that takes about eight to 20 minutes

depending on the HDD capacity, files will be copied from the CDROM to the HDD (this takes about five minutes).
NOTE
Before deleting a partition, make backup copy of necessary image
data stored on the HDD.
If a partition is deleted, the entire data in that partition will be lost.
XXXX MB Disk 0 Id 0 on bus 0 atapi [MBR]
C: partition1: NTFS
D: partition2: NTFS
The PC restarts.
6.
If you fail to press the <F2> key, restart the PC, wait until the
message F2 SETUP appears at the upper right corner of the
window, and the press the <F2> key.
RI000212.EPS
NOTE
7.
8.
NOTE
The partition deletion confirmation window opens again.
4.
Press the <L> key.

After the completion of partition deletion, the partition creation
window opens.
Select Unpartitioned space (or make sure that

Unpartitioned space is selected) and then press the
<Enter> key.
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
Place checkmarks to both Diskette Drive and Hard-Disk

Drive C:.
1. Diskette Drive
This window does not open when an attempt is made to format a

partition in which no OS is installed.
3.

A dialog opens prompting you to select a startup drive.
The partition deletion confirmation window opens.
2.
Press the <F2> key when F2 SETUP appears at the upper

right corner of the window.
NOTE
xxxx MB(xxxx MB free)

xxxx MB(xxxx MB free)
If Unknown partition exists on the window above, press the <L>

and then <Enter> keys to delete the partition as well.
Verify that the Format the partition using the NTFS file
system option is selected, and then press the <Enter> key.
Check (
9.
+,- to move down/up
) both 1. and 2.
RI000213.EPS

After the installation data has been read from the HDD (this takes
about five minutes), Regional and Language Options window
opens.
RI-25
Performing setup in accordance with the setup wizard
1.
From the Regional and Language Options window, click
5.

Enter a computer name (host name) in the
field.
2.
The Software Personal Setup window opens.
The default settings are as follows.
Make entries as follows.
(use upper-case characters to enter the CL.
XXXXXXXX are for the CL serial number.)


(use upper-case characters to enter the CR.

3.
Click

(use upper-case characters to enter the CP.
The product key input window opens.
4.
Enter the product key in the

click
NOTES
field and then
REFERENCE
The product key is indicated on the right-hand side cover of the PC
main unit.
A window opens to prompt for computer name and password
input.
Enter the host name that was noted down before the start of OS
installation.
Even if you enter lower-case characters, their upper-case
equivalents appear in the
field.
Note, however, that the entered lower-case characters will be

internally handled as lower-case character data.
field.
field.
REFERENCE
The character string entries in the [Administrator Password:] and
[Confirm Password:] fields appear as asterisks (*).
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
RI-26
6.
7.
Click
Setting the network information
The date/time setup window opens.
NOTES
Verify the date, time, and time zone, and then click
If the PC is not connected to the network, the network setup window

does not open.
If the network driver is not installed properly, the network setup window
will not be displayed. In such a case, install the network driver and
then perform network settings accordingly.
.
If any wrong setting is encountered, correct it and then click
.
Verify the date.
1.
Verify the time.
When a network setup option selection window appears,

prompting you to choose between Standard and Custom,
(by changing to ), and then
choose
click
The Network Component Setup window opens.
Verify the time zone.
00000320.EPS
2.
Make sure that

is checked.
If it is not checked, put a check mark on it (by changing
to ).
3.
Select
then click
The Network Setup window opens in several minutes.
(by highlighting it), and

.
The Internet protocol (TCP/IP) properties window opens.
4.
Choose
(so that
changes to
).
IP Address and Subnet Mask then appear.
REFERENCE
The IP Address and Subnet Mask fields are now ready to accept
your numerical value input.
5.

Enter an IP address (e.g., 172.16.1.20) in the
field.
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
RI-27
Setting the user account
Enter a subnet mask (e.g., 255.255.0.0) in the

field.
1.
A window opens where how to establish connection to the internet

is to be specified.
NOTE
Enter the IP address and subnet mask that were noted down
before the start of OS installation.
6.
Click
2.
Click
3.
4.
. It takes a few seconds to display the
5.
Verify that the
Click [Finish].
After a while, the Windows desktop opens.
radio
), and then click
Enter any user name other than Administrator (iip, for

instance), and click [Next].
A window opens to indicate completion of setup processing.
After a while, the computer domain setup window opens.
button is selected (set to
Select No and click [Next].

A window opens where the computer user is to be determined.
following window (computer domain setup window).
8.
Click Skip.
A window opens where user registration to Microsoft is to be
made.
The system returns then to the Network Component Setup

window.
7.
Click [Next] on the Welcome to Windows screen that opens.
6.
menu.
7.
Select
The User Accounts window opens.
8.
Select
A window opens where the logon or logoff option is to be selected.
9.
Remove the checkmark from

) and click
.
00000345.EPS
REFERENCE
Do not let the CL become a domain member.
The Welcome to Windows window opens in about 15 minutes.
RI0000381.EPS
The system returns to the User Accounts window.

010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
RI-28
10. Select iip from the user account names.

The user account setup change window opens.
11.
Select Create Password.

The password creation window opens.
12. Perform the following entries:

: Enter fcr-iip.
: Enter fcr-iip.
REFERENCE
The character string entries in the [Type a new password:] and
[Type the new password again to confirm:] fields appear as .
13. Click
A window for file and/or folder settings will open.
14. Click
The system returns to the User Accounts window.
15. Close both the User Accounts and Control Panel

windows.
16. Select Logoff from the
menu and then click
Logoff on the window that will open.

The iip account logs off, showing then the logon window.
17. Enter Administrator as the user name and fcr-iip as the

password. Click then
The Window desktop opens.
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
RI-29

For driver software installation, use the utility software on Dell
ResourceCD. To do this, you must first install the utility software on the
PC for the CL.
REFERENCE
Installing the Dell Resource CD utility software
1.
Insert Dell ResourceCD, which is supplied with the PC, into

the CD-ROM drive.
2.
When the following window automatically opens, click

.

1. Right-click My Computer from the
menu and select
Properties from the pull-down menu that opens.
2. Click the [Hardware] tab.
3. Click [Device Manager].
The software for items marked ? in Device Manager is not installed.
RI000214.EPS

started.
R 000215.EPS
3.
Click

After a while, the InstallShield Wizard Complete window opens..
4.
Click
A utility program starts to display the initial screen.
5.
Place checkmark to Click here to prevent this information

from being displayed again ( ) and close the
window.
REFERENCE
Depending on the version of the Dell Resource CD utility software,
the PC needs not to be restarted.
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
RI-30
2.

Install software for the following drivers.
However, do not install the network driver during this procedure and do
it during Installing the network driver software.
Video driver
System driver
Network driver
Audio driver
WinZip Self-Extractor appears.
3.
A driver-related window opens.
4.
NOTE
1.
In the Video area, click name of a driver to be used.
Click
A window opens to prompt you to confirm a destination targeted

for decompressing the video driver.
5.
Click
From the [Start] menu, sequentially select [Programs], [Dell

Accessories] and then [Dell Resource CD].
The Dell Resource CD utility software starts running, selecting
automatically System Model, Operating System and then
Topic.
RI000217.EPS
A window opens to prompt you to confirm the folder where the file
is to be decompressed.
6.
Click
A window opens to indicate that decompressing processing is

completed.
7.
Click
The Readme file opens.

RI000216.EPS
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
RI-31
8.
Scroll the screen downward until you reach its bottom, and
then click
.
14. Enter Administrator as the user name and fcr-iip as the

password. Click then
The Window desktop opens.
15. Install other driver software programs using the same

procedure described in steps 1. through 14.
RI000218.EPS
9.
Click
The Setup window opens.
10. Click
The Software License Agreement window opens.
11. Click
The Readme information window opens.
12. Click
The installation wizard completion window opens.
13. Select Yes, I want to restart my computer now. and click

.
The PC restarts.
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
RI-32
Installing the network driver software

Install the network driver as follows.
Described herein is the procedure used to install Intel 10/100 LOM in
the network driver.
4.
Click
NOTE
1.
From the [Start] menu, sequentially select [Programs], [Dell

Accessories] and then [Dell Resource CD].
RI0000372.EPS
A window opens to prompt you to confirm the folder where the file
is to be decompressed.
5.
The Dell Resource CD utility software starts running, selecting

automatically System Model, Operating System and then
Topic.
Click
A window opens to indicate that decompressing processing is

completed.
6.
Click
The Readme file opens.
7.
Close the Readme file.
8.
Right-click My Computer from the
menu to
select Properties.
RI000216.EPS
2.
In the Network (NIC) Drivers area, click name of a driver to

be used.
A driver-related window opens.
3.
Click
A window opens to prompt you to confirm a destination targeted

for decompressing the network driver.
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
RI-33
9.
11. Click the Driver tab and then
Click the Hardware tab and then the

tab.
RI0000375.EPS
RI0000373.EPS
10. Right-click Ethernet Controller from Other devices to

select Properties
The Hardware Update Wizard window opens.
12. Select Install from a list or specific location [Advanced]

and click
RI0000376.EPS
A window opens where search and installation options are to be

selected.
RI0000374.EPS
The Network Adapters Properties window opens.

010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
RI-34
13. Select Dont search. I wil choose the driver to install. and
click
16. Click Browse and select C:\DELL\drivers\R56484\WinXP.
RI0000379.EPS
17. Click
The network adapter selection window opens.
18. Click
RI0000377.EPS
A hardware type selection window opens.
14. Select Network adapters and click
A window opens to indicate completion of the Hardware Update

Wizard.
19. Click
The Intel(R) PRO/100 M Network Connection Properties window

opens.
20. Click
21. Make sure that the network driver has been installed
properly and close the Device Manager window.
RI0000378.EPS
The network adapter selection window opens.
15. Click
The Install From Disk window opens.
RI0000380.EPS
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
RI-35
Setting the refresh frequency
1.

The number of colors (Colors) and monitor resolution (Screen area)
Refresh frequency
Modification of the OS selection menu
Procedure for avoiding a password input prompt when exiting the
suspend mode (as necessary)
Setting the monitor
1.
Right-click a blank space on the desktop, and then choose

2.
In the Settings tab of the Display Properties window,

click
The Plug-and-Play Monitor and ... Properties window opens.
2.
3.
From the Screen refresh rate pull-down menu, choose

75 Hertz.
NOTE
RI0000354.EPS
3.
Complete monitor setup as directed below.
I.
II.
RI0000355.EPS
I. Screen area : Choose 1024 768 pixels.

II. Colors
: Choose True Color (24- or 32-bit).
4.
Click
RI000221.EPS
The screen area changes and the monitor setting window opens.
5.
Click
NOTE
Click immediately. If it is not clicked in 15 seconds, the window
returns to the previous status.
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
RI-36
4.
Click
Hiding the OS selection menu
The screen area changes and the Monitor Settings window

opens.
5.
Click
1.
NOTE
Click immediately. If it is not clicked in 15 seconds, the window
returns to the previous status.
6.
Click
When the OS is installed newly, the OS selection menu opens at OS

startup. Therefore, perform the following procedure so that the OS
selection menu does not open:
Click
to select Control Panel.
2.
Select
3.
Doubl-click
4.
Click the Advanced tab and then click
RI0000357.EPS
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
RI-37
5.
Uncheck
).
Procedure for avoiding a password input prompt when

exiting the suspend mode
RI000223.EPS
6.
Click
Click
2.
The system returns to the Control Panel.
8.
Close control panel.

The system returns to the desktop.
From the
menu, click Control Panel to select it.
The system returns to the System Properties window.
7.
1.
Double-click
3.
Select Never for System standby.
RI0000363.EPS
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
RI-38
4.
5.

Uncheck
).
Select . (period) as the character to be used as a decimal point.

1.
menu.
2.
Double-click the
icon.
R 000225.EPS
6.
Click
7.
The Regional and Language Options window opens.
Close the Control Panel.
3.
Make sure that the Regional and Language Options tab is

selected and click
.
RI000228.EPS
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
RI-39
4.
Click the Numbers tab and change the number appearing

in the Decimal symbol field to the . (period).
If, as a result of the above selection, the same symbol is selected for
the Digit grouping symbol and Decimal symbol fields, change the
symbol for the Digit grouping symbol field.
Canceling settings for automatic OS update

Cancel settings for automatic OS (Windows XP) update as follows.
1.
menu.
2.
Double-click
3.
Click Automatic Updates tab.
4.
Remove checkmark from [Keep my computer up to date.]

( ).
RI000226.EPS
5.
Click
6.

R 0000365.EPS
5.
Click
6.

010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
RI-40
Setting display properties

Use the procedure below to change display properties from Windows
XP to Windows Classic.
1.
Right-click a menu on the desktop to select Properties.

2.
Select Windows Classic from the Themes pull-down

menu.
Setting the taskbar

Change the Windows taskbar display setting as follows.
1.
Right-click a position on the taskbar to select Properties.

2.
Perform the following taskbar-related settings.

).
RI00000356.EPS
R 0000361.EPS
3.
Click
Remove the checkmark from
).
The display properties change to Classic.
4.
Click
window.
and close the Display Properties
RI0000364.EPS
3.
Click
and close the Taskbar and Start Menu
Properties window.
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
RI-41
2.3 Installing and Setting Windows Vista

2.3.1 Installing and Setting Windows Vista
Removing the peripheral devices
1.
Disconnect all peripheral devices, such as barcode reader,

magnetic card reader and touch panel, from the USB ports.
This section describes how to install Windows Vista.

Items to be readied for OS installation
OPERATING SYSTEM Disk
DRIVERS AND UTILITIES Disk
IMPORTANT
Before formatting the HDD, make backup copy of data other than
image data, if any, using Explorer or the like.
Make backup copy of config data that stores various CL and RU
settings, ahead of time.
(place checkmarks to all items).
NOTE
will not be displayed while the OS is being installed. To perform network
settings, be sure to connect the PC to the network (HUB) accordingly
before installation work.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
RI-42
Network connection to the CL

Unless the PC is network-connected properly in advance, the network
setup windows will not be displayed while the OS is being installed,
depending on the Windows Vista installer specifications.
1.
Use a network cable to connect the CL to the HUB.
2.
Turn ON the power to the HUB.
When a RAID-type PC is used, RAID-related settings must be
performed accordingly.
For details of the RAID-related settings, see Appendix I RAIDrelated Setting.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Changing boot sequence of the computer (for DELL PCs)

In here Boot Sequence is changed so that PC starts from CD by the
BIOS menu of a PC.
1.

2.
Press the <F2> key when the DELL logo appears at the
center of the window.
NOTE
If the <F2> key is not pressed with the timeliness, the setup
window will not open.
In such an instance, restart the PC to perform step 2. above again.
RI-43
3.
Select System Configuration USB Controller and

select Enable.
5.
Select Performance Multi Core Support and place a

checkmark to Enable Multi Core Support.
AWV32124A.ai
AWV32126.ai
4.
Select Security CPU XD Support and remove the

checkmark from Enable CPU XD Support.
6.
Select Intel SpeedStep and remove the checkmark from

Enable Intel SpeedStep.
AWV32127.ai
7.
AWV32125.ai
Select General in the Boot Sequence area and set so

that Onboard or USB CD-ROM Drive comes to the very
top.
AWV32149.ai
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
RI-44
8.
Select Remote Wake Up in the Power Management area

and then select Disable.
Re-installing the OS
1.
Select My language is English.
DCL32001.ai
AWV32002.ai
9.
The language sellection window opens.
Insert the OPERATING SYSTEM disk into the PC.
10. Click
at the lower right corner of the window.
2.
Make the following settings.
A confirmation window opens.
11. Click [Yes].

A while after restarting, the message Press any key to boot from
CD or DVD.. appears at the upper left corner of the window.
12. Press the <Enter> key within three seconds.

After a while, the Windows Vista setup window opens.
NOTE
If you do not press the <Enter> key within about three seconds
after the Press any key to boot from the CD or DVD message
appears at the upper left corner of the window, the installation CD
will not be recognized accordingly.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
AWV32003.ai
Language to install : English

Time and currency format : English (United States)
Keyboard or input method : US
RI-45
3.
6.
Click [Next].
Select Custom (advanced).
AWV32006.ai
AWV32004.ai
4.
Click Install now.

The Please read the license terms window opens.
5.
The Where do you want to install Windows? window opens.
7.
Select Drive options (advanced).
Place a checkmark to I accept the license terms and click

[Next].
AWV32007.ai
AWV32005.ai
The Which type of installation do you want? window opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
RI-46
8.
10. Select New.
Select Delete.
AWV32008.ai
9.
AWV32010.ai
11. Click [Apply].
Click [OK].
AWV32009.ai
The system returns to the Where do you want to install

Windows? window.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
AWV32011.ai
RI-47
12. Select Format.
Windows setup
1.
AWV32012.ai
AWV32014.ai
Type a user name (for example, John) : iip

Type a password (recommended)
: fcr-iip
Retype your password
: fcr-iip
Type a password hint
: Enter a one-byte space
13. Click [OK].
NOTES
The character string entries in the Type a password
(recommended): and Retype your password: fields appear as
.
When a character has been entered into the column Type a
password hint, it becomes possible to click
.
AWV32013.ai
The system returns to the Where do you want to install

Windows? window.
14. Click [Next].
2.
Click
A window opens to prompt for computer name.
The OS installation processing starts.

Upon completion of installation, the Choose a user name and
picture window opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
RI-48
3.
Enter a computer name (host name) in the field provided for

such purpose.
The defaults are as follws.
(CL represents capitals and XXXXXXXX, a product name.)
(CR represents capitals and XXXXXXXX, a product name.)
(CP represents capitals and XXXXXXXX, a product name.)
6.
Verify the Date, Time, and Time zone and click

.
If the date time and time zone are incorrect, correct then
.
accordinary and then click
AWV32017.ai
AWV32145.ai
4.
Click
NOTE
The Help protect Windows automatically window opens.
5.
If a dialog box like that shown below opens, select Public location.
Select Ask me later.
AWV32018.ai
AWV32016.ai
The Review your time and date settings window opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
RI-49
Setting the user account
1.
menu.
AWV32019.ai
7.
Click
After a while, a login window opens.
8.
9.
Remove the OPERATING SYSTEM disk from the PC.

Enter fcr-iip and click
AWV32021.ai
2.
Select System and Maintenance.
AWV32020.ai
NOTE
The entered password is displayed as .
The desktop screen opens.
REFERENCE
AWV32028.ai
The System and Maintenance window opens.
If the Welcome Center window has been displayed, close the

Welcome Center window.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
RI-50
3.
5.
Select Administrative Tools.
Click
AWV32031.ai
The Computer Management window opens.
6.
Select Local Users and Groups Users.
AWV32029.ai
The Administrative Tools window opens.
4.
Double-click Computer Management.

AWV32032.ai
7.
Right-click Administrator and select Properties.
AWV32030.ai
The User Account Control window opens.
AWV32033.ai
The Administrator Propeties window opens.

010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
RI-51
8.
Remove the checkmark from Account is disabled and

click
11. Make the following settings and click
AWV32036.ai
New password
: fcr-iip
Confirm password : fcr-iip
NOTE
AWV32034.ai
The system returns to the Computer Management window.
9.
Right-click Administrator and select Set Password....

AWV32037.ai
12. Click
AWV32035.ai
The Set Password for Administrator window opens.
10. Click
AWV32148.ai
The Set password for Administrator window opens.

010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
RI-52
13. Right-click iip and select Properties.
Setting the User Account Control

Turn off and disable User Account Control from prompting for
credentials to install applications, and changing the elevation prompt
behavior.
1.
menu.
AWV32038.ai
The iip Properties window opens.
14. Place a checkmark to Account is disabled and click

.
AWV32021.ai
2.
Select User Accounts.
AWV32040.ai
AWV32039.ai
15. Close the Computer Management window.

The system returns to the Administrative Tools window.
16. Close the Administrative Tools window.

The system returns to the System and Maintenance window.
17. Close the System and Maintenance window.

010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
RI-53
3.
5.
Select User Accounts.
Click
AWV32041.ai
AWV32043.ai
The Make changes to your user account window opens.
4.
Select Turn User Account Control on or off.
The Turn User Account Control On or Off window opens.
6.
Remove the checkmark from Use User Account Control

(UAC) to help protect your computer and click
AWV32044.ai
The Microsoft Windows window opens.

AWV32042.ai
The User Account Control window opens.
AWV32045.ai
7.
Click
After the PC restarted, a login window opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
RI-54
8.

Use the DRIVERS AND UTILITIES disk supplied with the PC to install
the following driver software items.
REFERENCE
AWV32020.ai
NOTE
REFERENCE
If the Welcome Center window has been displayed, close the
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)

I. Right-click My Computer from the
menu and select Properties
from the pull-down menu that opens.
II. Click [Device Manager].
The software for items marked ! in Device Manager is not installed.
RI-55
4.
Installing the Dell Resource CD utility software
1.
Click
The Ready to Install the Program window opens.
Insert the DRIVERS AND UTILITIES disk into the PC.

The AutoPlay window opens.
2.
Select Run autoRcd.exe.
AWV32050.ai
5.
Click
The installation processing starts. After a while, the InstallShield

Wizard Completed window opens.
AWV32128.ai
The ResourceCD Installation window opens.
3.
Cliclk
AWV32051.ai
6.
Click
The utility program starts and the initial window is displayed.
7.
Checkmark Click here to prevent this infomation from

being displayed again. and close the window.
AWV32048.ai

started.
AWV32049.ai
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
RI-56
Installing the Driver Software

Installing the software for the following drivers.
1.
For example, installation procedure of video device driver is described

as follows.
Controller Drivers
Intel Chipset Software Installation Utility Rev:Axx
2.
REFERENCE
1.
Video Drivers
The Dell ResourceCD utility software starts and System model,

Operating system, and Topic are selected automatically.
Intel Q43/Q45/G43/G45 (Eaglelake) Graphics Controller Rev:Axx
3.
Reinsert the DRIVER AND UTILITIES... disk to have

AutoPlay mode be activated.
Audio Drivers
Analog Device ADI 198X Integrated HD Audio Rev:Axx
4.
Network (NIC) Drivers

Intel 825XX Gigabit Platform LAN Network Device Rev:Axx
5.
OS Tools
Dell OS Tools Rev:Axx
Dell System Software:Rev:Axx
NOTE
Since the drivers to be installed vary with the employed PC model
and utility CD-ROM version, confirm the correct drivers by calling
Dell Technical Support or visiting associated home page.
AWV32054.ai
2.
In the Video area, click name of a driver to be used.

AWV32139.ai
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
RI-57
3.
4.
Click
AWV32057.ai
5.
Click
AWV32055.ai

AWV32058.ai
6.
Click

AWV32056.ai
AWV32059.ai
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
RI-58
7.
Click
11. Click [Next].
A window opens to indicate the completion of installation.
12. Select No, I will restart this computer later. and click
[Finish].
The system returns to the driver extraction window.

AWV32060.ai
8.
13. Click
Click [Next].
AWV32065.ai
AWV32061.ai
9.
Click [Yes].
The system returns to the driver selection window.

Refer to Device Manager and install the corresponding driver.
Installation has been completed when the Device Manager
window shows no more exclamation marks ! .
AWV32062.ai
10. Click [Next].

Upon completion of installtion, the following winidow opens.
AWV32063.ai
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
RI-59
Restarting and Setting the PC
6.
1.
Restart the PC.
2.
Press the <F2> key when the DELL logo appears at the
NOTE
will not open.In such an instance, restart the PC to perform step 2.
above again.
3.
AWV32020.ai
7.
Remove the checkmark from Run at startup and close the

Select System Configuration USB Controller and

select No Boot.
AWV32124.ai
4.
Click
at the lower right corner of the window.

AWV32144.ai
5.
Click [Yes].
After the PC restarted, a login window opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
RI-60
2.3.3 Installing Windows Vista SP2
1.
Insert Vista SP2 OS Update DVD V1.0 (114Y5085053A00)

into the PC.
The Welcome to Windows Vista Service Pack 2 window opens.
2.
Click [Next].
The Please read the license terms window opens.
3.
Checkmark I accept the license terms and click [Next].

The Install Windows Vista Service Pack 2 window opens.
4.
Ensure that Automatically restart the computer is

checkmarked and then click [Install].
Installation processing will start.
After the PC has restarted, the login window opens.
5.
Type in fcr-iip on the window that opens and click
The Windows Vista Service Pack 2 is now installed window

opens.
6.
Click [Close].
7.
Remove the DVD from the PC.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-61

Setting the Control Panel
Setting the IP address
Setting the taskbar
Setting the Security Center
Setting the automatic OS update
Setting the monitor size
Setting the visual effects
Setting the screen properties
Setting the Power Options
Setting the Internet Time
Canceling settings for simplified file sharing
Addition of components
Setting the Service
Setting the Windows Sidebar
Setting the Windows Defender
Setting the Defragmentation
Confirmation of decimal symbol and digit grouping symbol
(other than Japanese)
Setting the Control Panel

Change display of the Control Panel to the classic view.
1.
menu.
AWV32021.ai
2.
Select Classic View.
AWV32067.ai
The Control Panel changes to classic view.
3.
Close the Control Panel window.

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-62
4.
Double-click Local Area Connection.
Setting the IP address.
1.
menu.
AWV32146.ai
The Local Area Connection Status window opens.
5.
Click
AWV32021.ai
2.
Double-click
3.
Select Manage network connection.
AWV32073.ai
AWV32147.ai
The Network Connection window opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-63
6.
Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and click

.
8.
Click
The system returns to the Local Area Connection Properties

window.
9.
Click
10. Click
The system returns to the Network Connection window.
11. Close both the Network Connection and Network and
AWV32074.ai
The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window

opens.
7.
Sharing Center windows.
Select Use the following IP address and make the

following settings.
I
II
AWV32077.ai
I. Enter the IP address. (ex. : 172.16.1.20)

II. Enter the Subnet mask. (ex. : 255.255.255.0)
NOTE
Enter the IP address and subnet mask that were noted downbefore
the start of OS installation.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-64
4.
Setting the taskbar

Change the windows taskbar display setting as follows.
1.
Select Notification Area tab and remove the checkmark

from Hide inactive icons.
menu.
AWV32082.ai
5.
Click
The system returns to the Control Panel window.

AWV32021.ai
6.

2.
Double-click
3.

Place a checkmark to Auto-hide the taskbar.
Remove the checkmark from Show Quick Launch.
AWV32081.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-65
4.
Setting the Security Center

Hiding security alarm notifications as follows.
1.
Select Dont notify me and dont display the icon (not

recommended).
menu.
AWV32085.ai
The system returns to the Windows Security Center window.
5.
AWV32021.ai
2.
Double-click
Close the Windows Security Center window.

6.

The Windows Security Center window opens.
3.
Select Change the way Security Center alerts me.
AWV32084.ai
A notification window opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-66
Setting the automatic OS update
4.
Select Never check for update and click
Cancel settings for automatic OS (Windows Vista) update as follows.
1.
menu.
AWV32088.ai
The system returns to the Windows Update window.

AWV32021.ai
Double-click
Close the Windows Update window.

2.
5.
The Windows Update window opens.
3.
Select View advanced options.
AWV32087.ai
The Change settings window opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-67
3.
Setting the Monitor Size
Select Advanced Settings....
Change the monitor size to 12801024 as follows.
1.
Select Personalization from the right-click menu on the

desktop.
2.
Select Display Settings.
AWV32091.ai
The monitor properties window opens.
4.
Select List All Modes....
AWV32090.ai
The Display Settings window opens.
AWV32092.ai
The List All Modes window opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-68
5.
Select 1280 by 1024, True Color (32 bit), 60 Hertz and click
Setting the Visual Effects

Hiding the windows contents while dragging.
1.
menu.
AWV32093.ai
The system returns to the monitor properties window.
6.
AWV32021.ai
Click
The system returns to the Display Settings window.
NOTE
If a window like that shown below opens, click
seconds.
in 15
2.
Double-click
The Performance Infomation and Tools window opens.
3.
Select Adjust visual effects.
AWV32094.ai
7.
Click
The system returns to the Personalization window.
8.
AWV32098.ai
The Performance Options window opens.
Close the Personalization window.

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-69
4.
Remove the checkmark from Show window contents while

dragging and click
Setting the Screen Properties

Change the properties settings screen from Windows Vista to
Windows Classic.
1.

desktop.
2.
Select Theme.
AWV32099.ai
The system returns to the Performance Infomation and Tools

window.
5.
Close the Performance Infomation and Tools window.

AWV32153.ai
The Theme Settings window opens.
3.
Select Windows Classic from the pull-down menu offered

by the Theme option.
AWV32152.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-70
4.
5.
Click
Setting the Power Options
The properties settings screen changes to classic view.
Changing the power options for PC and HD drives.
Click
1.
menu.
The system returns to the Personalization window.
6.
Close the Personalization window.

AWV32150.ai
2.
Double-click
The Power Options window opens.
3.
Select High performance and click Change plan

settings.
AWV32101.ai
The Edit Plan Settings window opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-71
4.
6.
Select Change advanced power settings.
Select Power buttons and lid and Power button action,

and then select Shut down.
AWV32136.ai
The advanced setting window opens.
5.
Select Hard disk - Turn off hard disk after and select
Never.
AWV32154.ai
7.
Select Power buttons and lid and Start menu power

button, and then select Shut down.
AWV32137.ai
AWV32155.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-72
8.
9.
Click
Setting the Internet Time
The system returns to the Change plan settings window.
Disabling synchronization with an Internet time server.
Close the Change plan settings window.
1.
menu.
AWV32150.ai
2.
Double-click
The Date and Time window opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-73
3.
Canceling settings for simplified file sharing
Select the Internet Time tab and click
Disabling use of the sharing wizard.
1.
menu.
AWV32150.ai

AWV32103.ai
The Internet Time Settings window opens.
4.
2.
Remove checkmark from Synchronize with an Internet time

server and click
Double-click
The Folder Options window opens.
3.
Select the View tab.
AWV32104.ai
The system returns to the Date and Time window.
5.
Click
AWV32106.ai
6.

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-74
4.
Remove the checkmark from Use Sharing Wizard and

click
Addition of components
Installing additional Windows components.
1.
menu.
AWV32150.ai
2.
Double-click
AWV32107.ai
5.

The Uninstall or change a program window opens.
3.
Select Turn Windows features on or off.
AWV32109.ai
The Windows Features window opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-75
4.
Place a checkmark to the following items.

FTP Publishing Service
IIS 6 Management Comptibility
Telnet Client
Setting the Service
1.
menu.
AWV32150.ai
2.
Double-click
3.
Double-click Services.
AWV32110.ai
REFERENCE
indicates an item to be installed.
indicates installation of some items of the lower level.
When a check box is checked, all items in lower levels are
selected at the same time.
5.
Click

Upon completion of installation, the sysytem returns to the
Windows Features window.
6.
AWV32130.ai
The Services window opens.
Close the Uninstall or change a program window.

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-76
4.
Right-click FTP Publishing Service and select Properties.

The FTP Publishing Service Properties (Local Computer) window
opens.
5.
Select Automatic from the Startup type pull-down menu

and click
Setting the Windows Sidebar

Hiding the Windows sidebar.
1.
menu.
AWV32150.ai

AWV32131.ai
The system returns to the Services window.
6.
Close the Services window.
2.
Double-click
7.
Close the Administrative Tools window.

The Windows Sidebar Properties window opens.
3.
Remove the checkmark from Start Sidebar when Windows

starts and select
AWV32112.ai
4.

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-77
4.
Setting the Windows Defender

Changing the settings for Windows Defender.
1.
Remove the checkmark from Use Windows Defender and

click
menu.
AWV32150.ai
2.
Double-click
.
AWV32115.ai
The Windows Defender window opens.
3.
Select Tools and select Options.
AWV32151.ai
5.
Click
The system returns to the Windows Defender window.

AWV32114.ai
The Options window opens.
6.
Close the Windows Defender window.
7.

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-78
Setting the Defragmentation
3.
Select the Tools tab and select
Disabling the setting for automatic defragmentation.
1.
Select Computer from the
menu.
AWV32121.ai
The Disk Defragmenter window opens.
4.
AWV32119.ai
(recommended) and click
The Computer window opens.
2.
Remove the checkmark from Run on a schedule

.
Right-click Local Disk (C:) and select Properties.
AWV32122.ai
The system returns to the Local Disk (C:) / Properties window.
5.
Click
The system returns to the Computer window.

AWV32120.ai
The Local Disk (C:) Properties window opens.

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
6.
Close the Computer window.

RI-79
Confirmation of decimal symbol and digit grouping

symbol (other than Japanese)
3.
Confirm that a language other than Japanese has been

selected and click Customize this format.
If the Current format has been changed to a language other than

Japanese in Regional and Language Options, confirm the decimal
symbol and the digit grouping symbol.
: . ( period )
Decimal Symbol
Digit grouping Symbo : , ( comma )
1.
menu.
AWV32141.ai
The Customize Regional Options window opens.
AWV32150.ai
2.
Double-click
4.
Confirm the following settings.

: . (period)
Decimal Symbol
Digit grouping Symbol : , (comma)
AWV32143.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-80
5.
Click
The system returns to the Regional and Language Options

window.
6.
Click
7.
Close the Computer window.

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-81
3.1 Monitor with Touch Panel
3. Setting Up the Monitor

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
Adjusting the contrast and brightness

Adjust the display contrast and brightness as follows:
371
372
The setup procedure varies with the connected monitor.
3.1 Monitor with Touch Panel

Perform the following procedures to install the touch panel driver and
adjust the touch panel and monitor.
Installing the touch panel driver and adjusting the touch

panel
For details on the procedures for setting up a touch-panelattached monitor, see Appendix 1 Installing the Touch Panel
Driver in Appx IN: Appendix to Installation.
Adjusting the monitor

Adjust the monitor if it has a problem with the following performance
characteristics.
Width
Horizontal position
Height
Vertical position
Pincushion distortion
Screen rotation
For details on the adjustment procedures, refer to the
documentation supplied with the monitor.
Model 9416TD15/H2
Contrast : 127
(Press the Menu switch on the right-hand side of
the monitor to adjust the contrast with Page1.)
Brightness : 255
(Press the or button on the right-hand side of
the monitor while the Main Menu is not displayed
on the screen.)
Model 9416TD15/H2-1
Contrast : 65%
Brightness : 100%
on the screen.)
Model L350P-TS
Contrast : 80%
Brightness : 80%
(Press the Enter switch on the front of the monitor
to adjust the brightness by selecting <Picture
Adjustment>, then <Contrast/Brightness>.)
Model L351P-TS
Contrast : 90%
Brightness : 90%
Adjustment>, then <Contrast/Brightness>.)
Model L362T
Contrast : Default (not determined)

Brightness : 90%
Model L560T-C

Brightness : 100%
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-82
3.2 17" CRT Monitor
3.2 17" CRT Monitor

Adjust the monitor as needed. No other setup procedures need be
performed.
Adjusting the monitor
3.5 Ikegami 1k Landscape Monitor

Install the video board driver and perform setups for adjustments of
width and height on the monitor.
For the procedure of video board driver installation, see
Appendix F Installing the Video Board Driver of this chapter.
Adjust the monitor if it has a problem with the following performance

characteristics.
Width
Horizontal position
Height
Vertical position
Pincushion distortion
Screen rotation
Brightness
Contrast
For details on the adjustment procedures, refer to the
documentation supplied with the monitor.
3.3 Super Resolution LCD Monitor SL-IC300

Install the video board driver and perform monitor setups.
For detailed setup procedure of the Super Resolution LCD Monitor
SL-IC300, see manuals provided with the SL-IC300.
3.4 LCD Monitor SL-IC200

Install the video board driver and perform monitor setups.
For detailed setup procedure of the LCD Monitor SL-IC200,
see manuals provided with the SL-IC200.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-83
4.1 For Windows 2000/XP
4. Installing MSDE/Database
Management System and Its
Service Pack
XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
1.
Insert the CL-AP CD (1 of 2) into the PC.

The IIP Setup Tool main menu automatically opens.
NOTE
In case the installation start window does not open automatically,
double-click the execution file (Setup.bat) in the CD.
372

CAUTION
When Windows XP SP2 was installed in 2. Installing and Setting
Up the OS, make sure to create the FTP server before you install
MSDE and its service pack.
For how to create the FTP server, see 15. Creating the FTP Server
(Windows 2000/XP only).
RI0000470.ai
REFERENCE
Perform the following procedure to install MSDE (SQL7) and MSDE

(SQL7SP*) and its service pack.
IIP Setup Tool is a utility tool that performs CL-AP installation and
other tasks. This tool is stored on the CD (product name:
Application software; Part No. 114Y5342001A) that is supplied with
the CL as a standard accessory.
MSDE is a database that manages the images and patient information

handled by the CL. If MSDE is not installed, the CL does not operate.
REFERENCE
The service pack is a modification program that corrects various
problems with MSDE.
For the OS of V7.0(B) or earlier, one CL-AP CD contains all the
programs. Therefore, read CL-AP CD (1 of 2) or CL-AP CD (2 of 2)
for CL-AP CD as necessary.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
2.
Enter 1 and then press the <Enter> key.

The installation menu for MSDE and its service pack opens.
RI-84
3.
To install the Japanese version, enter 1. To install the

Korean version, enter 2 and 5 for the English version.
Finalize your number entry by pressing the <Enter> key.
4.
When the Press any key to continue... message appears,

press the <Enter> key.
The system returns to the IIP Setup Tool main menu window.
5.
Restart the CL to activate MSDE.

After the CL has been started up, MSDE will be activated
automatically. (The
icon appears in the task tray at the lower
right.)
R 000098.EPS
6.
If you wish to proceed to CL-AP installation processing, skip

over the following steps 7. and 8. to go to the next page.
7.

The system exits IIP Setup Tool and returns to the desktop
screen.
As indicated in the following window illustration, the MSDE/service

pack installation process progresses.

MSDE and service pack installations end in about ten minutes in

total.
8.
Remove the CD from the PC.
RI000099.EPS
REFERENCE
When you choose 6) Version Check, you can view the version
information about MSDE and service pack.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-85
4.2 For Windows Vista
3.

Install the Database Management System (SQL Server).
SQL Server is a database that manages the images and patient
information handled by the CL. If SQL Server is not installed, the CL
does not operate.
1.
To install the Japanese version, enter 1. To install the

English version, enter 5. Finalize your number entry by
pressing the <Enter> key.

RI000098.ai
As indicated in the following window illustration, the SQL Server

installation process progresses.
SQL Server installation processing completes in about ten
minutes.
NOTE
RI000099.ai
REFERENCE
Choosing 6) Version Check enables you to view the version
information about SQL Server and service pack.
RI0000470.ai
2.

The installation menu opens.
4.
When the Press any key to continue... message appears,

The command prompt will close.
5. Enter 0 and then press the <Enter> key.

screen.
6. Remove the CD from the PC.

7. Restart the CL to activate SQL Server.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-86
5. Installing the CL-AP

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368

359
370
1.
371

372
NOTE
Install the CL-AP and replace the menu database.

Installing the CL-AP will automatically set up the wallpaper.

NOTE
To use the Synapse servers Web Query function with software version
V7.1(B) or earlier, perform the procedure below.
I. When the Synapse Client software is installed, uninstall it.
12. Synapse Client Software (Synapse Workstation) in
Appendix A Uninstalling the APs under RI: Reinstalling the
Software
II. Install the Synapse Client software.
CL+Synapse Server (Web Query) in OE19: Connecting the
CL to Other Equipment
RI000097.EPS
REFERENCE
For the OS of V7.0(B) or earlier, one CL-AP CD contains all the
programs. Therefore, read CL-AP CD (1 of 2) or CL-AP CD (2 of 2)
for CL-AP CD as necessary.
2.

The installer starts running and opens the IIP - InstallShield
Wizard / Welcome to the ... window.
00000178.EPS
3.
Click
The IIP - InstallShield Wizard / Setup Type window opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-87
4.
5.
Select the monitor type to be used, and then click

.
Click
In a few minutes, a window like that shown below opens.
When the 15" monitor with the touch panel or the 17" CRT monitor
is to be used, choose Color (1024 768).
When the 17 monitor with the touch panel is to be used, choose
Color (1280 1024).
When the color Super Resolution LCD SL-IC300 is to be used,
select Color (2048 1536).
RI000026.EPS
When the Ikegami 1k landscape monitor is to be used, select Black/

White (1600 1200).
u NOTE u
Although a message saying that Image Database does not exist.
can appear for software versions A04 or later, the CL-AP
installation processing will not be affected.
When the monochrome Super Resolution LCD SL-IC300 is used,

select Black/White (2048 1536).
When the monochrome LCD Monitor SL-IC200 is used, select
Black/White (1600 1200).
RI000032.EPS
6.

In a few seconds, a window like that shown below opens.
Select the monitor

type to be used.
RI000027.EPS
RI000100.EPS
The IIP - InstallShield Wizard / Ready to Install the Program

window opens.
u NOTE u
Although a message saying that Patient Database does not exist.
00000180.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-88
7.
9.

u NOTE u
For the software of version V2.0 (B) or later or V1.0 (C), the
following two windows will be displayed. Press the <Enter> key.
Make sure that installation processing has ended, and then
proceed to step 10.
RI000227.EPS
RI0000468.AI
RI000105.EPS
Upon completion of installation, the IIP - InstallShield Wizard /

InstallShield Wizard Completed window opens.
RI0000469.AI
8.
00000181.EPS

RI000028.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-89
10. Click
12. Select the SetStudyAutoDeleteReg.bat file that is located
in the directory below on the CL-AP CD (2 of 2 when

V7.1(B) or later is used), and then click
.
The system returns to the IIP Setup Tool main menu.
NOTES
D:\Tools\StudyAutoDelete\SetStudyAutoDeleteReg.bat
For software version V7.0(B) or later, perform all the steps from
11 through 16.
For software version V6.0(B) or earlier, it is not necessary to
perform steps 11 through 14.
NOTE
Specify for the underlined section a name of the drive where the
CL-AP CD has been installed.
11. Perform the following settings.

For Windows 2000/XP
Select Run... from the
menu and click
.
RI0000489.ai
For Windows Vista
The DiskUsageLimitSize Setting Tool window opens.
Select All Programs - Accessories - Run... from the

menu and click
RI0000490.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-90
13. When Windows XP is used for the OS, enter 1 and press 2
when Windows Vista is used for the OS. Press 3 when a
RAID-based PC is used for the CL. Press then the <Enter>
key to determine the entry.
NOTE
For software version V7.0(B), the 2) Set DiskUsageLimitSize for
60GB option does not appear.

Exposure menus that can be installed will differ depending on the
language of the OS on which the CL-AP is installed.
To change an exposure menu or image processing parameter, the
menu database must be changed following individual procedures.
u NOTE u
Note that exposure menu settings will revert to the default if a menu
database is replaced.
For the Japanese OS:

5.2.1 Replacing the Menu Database (for the Japanese OS)
RI0000476.ai
14. Press the <Enter> key.
For an OS other than Japanese:

5.2.2 Replacing the Menu Database (for an OS other than
Japanese)
15. Turn the PC power OFF and mount the PEI or PSI board on
the PC.
Appendix C Removing/Reinstalling the Board (PEI/PSI)
u NOTE u
If the OS was being installed with the PEI/PSI board mounted on
the PCI slots, use Device Manager to delete the
file
at this step.
Troubleshooting.
5.2.1 Replacing the Menu Database (for the Japanese OS)
For V7.0 or earlier
1.
Enter 3 on the IIP Setup Tool main menu and press the
<Enter> key.
16. Re-connect the USB peripheral devices (barcode reader,

magnetic card reader, etc.) that have been disconnected
before OS installation.
00000301.EPS
u NOTE u
For Windows XP, you must perform driver software settings after
USB peripheral devices are connected.
For the driver software setup procedure, see
4.6 Changing the Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader
Driver Software under MT: Machine Troubleshooting.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-91
2.
When you use DICOM MG Storage (Digital Mammography

option), enter 2. If not, enter 1. Finalize your selection
entry by pressing the <Enter> key.
A menu opens to display the languages that can be installed.
4.
Enter 1 when you wish to use hospital menus, enter 2

for general practitioner menus, and 3 for veterinary
menus. Press then the <Enter> key.
NOTE
When you have selected hospital menus, a window opens where
whether or not to use the FNC (Flexible Noise Control processing)
parameters is specified. Enter an item number that is for the menu
to be used at the institution and then press the <Enter> key.
RI0000382.EPS
3.
Enter 1 and press the <Enter> key.

RI0000384.EPS
The message saying Menu Database Installation Completed will

be displayed to indicate that the menu database change is
completed.
RI0000383.EPS
NOTE
When you have selected For Digital X-ray (DX Storage Option) at
step 2 above, a window opens where whether or not to use the
FNC (Flexible Noise Control processing) parameters is specified.
Enter an item number that is for the menu to be used at the
institution and then press the <Enter> key.
R 0000384.EPS
The message saying Menu Database Installation Completed

will be displayed to indicate that the menu database change is
completed.
Skip step 4 and proceed to step 5.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-92
5.
Set up the following, as necessary.

Addition of descriptive characters to icons
To enable addition of descriptive characters below the icons
displayed on the main window of the hospital CL-AP, install the
descriptive characters appropriately.
For V7.1 or later
1.
<Enter> key.
For details of the descriptive character installation

procedure, see FR10 Setup for Addition of Descriptive
Characters to Icons [Applicable only in Japan] under
FR: Function-specific Reference.
Display of CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 icons

To display the CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 icons on the main
window of the general practitioner CL-AP, install the icons
appropriately.
00000301.EPS
2.
For details of the CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 icon installation

procedure, see FR15 Setup of CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000
Icons [Applicable only in Japan] under FR: Functionspecific Reference.

option), enter 2. If not, enter 1. Finalize your selection
Addition of date and time display

To display the current date and time on the main window of the
CL-AP, perform settings necessary for enabling addition of the
date and time display function.
For details of the procedure used to perform date and time
display settings, see FR18 Setup of Date and Time
Display under FR: Function-specific Reference.
6.
RI0000382.EPS
3.

If you wish to continue to install various components, skip

subsequent steps 7 and 8, and proceed to 7. Installing the
CL Components.
7. Installing the CL Components.
7.
8.
RI0000471.ai
NOTE
step 2 above, a window where the item number for a desired image
processing parameter (for film/for monitor) is to be entered will
open. In such cases, skip step 4 to proceed to step 5.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-93
4.
7.

Addition of descriptive characters to icons

To enable addition of descriptive characters below the icons
displayed on the main window of the hospital CL-AP, install the
descriptive characters appropriately.
For details of the descriptive character installation
procedure, see FR10 Setup for Addition of Descriptive
Characters to Icons [Applicable only in Japan] under
RI0000472.ai
5.
Set up the following, as necessary.
Enter the item number for a desired image processing

parameter (for film/for monitor) and press the <Enter> key.
Display of CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 icons

To display the CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 icons on the main
window of the general practitioner CL-AP, install the icons
appropriately.
For details of the CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 icon installation

procedure, see FR15 Setup of CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000
Icons [Applicable only in Japan] under FR: Functionspecific Reference.
Addition of date and time display

To display the current date and time on the main window of the
CL-AP, perform settings necessary for enabling addition of the
date and time display function.
R 0000384.EPS
6.
Enter the item number for the FNC parameter (Flexible Noise
Control processing) that is to be used in the hospital and
be displayed to indicate that the menu database change is
completed.
For details of the procedure used to perform date and time

display settings, see FR18 Setup of Date and Time
Display under FR: Function-specific Reference.
8.

subsequent steps 9 and 10, and proceed to 7. Installing the
CL Components.
7. Installing the CL Components.
9.

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-94
5.2.2 Replacing the Menu Database (for an OS other

than Japanese)
Enter the item number of the language you wish to install

A window opens where an Image Reader type for connection is to
be selected.
For V7.0 or earlier
1.
3.
<Enter> key.
RI0000385.EPS
NOTE
00000301.EPS
2.

option), enter 2. If not, enter 1. Finalize you r selection
step 2 above, a window opens where whether or not to use the
FNC (Flexible Noise Control processing) parameters is specified.
Enter an item number that is for the menu to be used at the
institution and then press the <Enter> key.
When English (U.S.) was selected as the language to be
installed:
RI0000386.EPS
When a language other than English (U.S.) was selected:
RI0000384.EPS
RI0000427.EPS
NOTE
Do not select 20) Slovene because software version V7.0 (B)
does not provide support to it.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
The message saying Menu Database Installation Completed

will be displayed to indicate that the menu database change is
completed.
Skip steps 4 and 5, and proceed to step 6.
RI-95
4.
Enter an item number that is for the connected equipment

A window opens where whether or not to use the FNC (Flexible
Noise Control processing) parameters is selected.
For V7.1 or later
1.
<Enter> key.

installed:
00000301.EPS
RI0000386.EPS
2.

option), enter 2. If not, enter 1. Finalize you r selection
RI0000384.EPS
5.
Enter an item number for the FNC parameter to be used and

be displayed to indicate that menu database replacement is
completed.
6.

subsequent steps 7 and 8 and then proceed as directed on
the next page.
7.
RI0000427.EPS
8.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-96
3.
Enter the item number of the language you wish to install

5.
A window opens where an Image Reader type for connection is to

be selected.
Enter the item number for a desired image processing

parameter (for film/for monitor) and press the <Enter> key.
Noise Control processing) parameter is selected.

installed:
RI0000385.EPS
NOTE
RI0000386.EPS
step 2 above, a window where the item number for a desired image
processing parameter (for film/for monitor) is to be entered will
open. In such cases, skip step 4 to proceed to step 5.
4.
Enter an item number that is for the connected equipment

A window opens where an image processing parameter is to be
selected (for film/for monitor).
RI0000384.EPS
6.
Enter an item number for the FNC parameter to be used and

be displayed to indicate that menu database change is completed.
RI0000472.ai
7.

subsequent steps 8 and 9 and then proceed as directed on
the next page.
8.

9.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-97
6. Installing the Screen Saver
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-98
7.1 Built_inConsole (A02 or later)
7. Installing the CL Components

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
3.
Click
4. Click
.
.
Install as follows the components (files) that are necessary for activating
the CL.
7.1 Built_inConsole (A02 or later)

For installing the console software Built_inConsole, use the IIP Setup
Tool on the CL-AP installation CD (2 of 2).
u NOTE u
Built_inConsole must be installed even when only the RU or 5000
cassette-type Image Reader is installed. If it is not installed, an error
occurs when the CL-AP starts running.
1.
RI000031.EPS
When the installation process ends, a message appears to

indicate the completion of installation.

NOTE
RI000029.EPS

5.
Click
A dialog box appears, prompting you to restart the PC.
6.
Click
RI000030.EPS
The PC restarts.
RI000097.EPS
2.
Type in the number 4 and then press the <Enter> key.

The Built_inConsole Setup window opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
7.
Click
when the 20102 error code window is
displayed after the PC has been restarted.
RI-99
7.2 FRIS Modules (A04 or later)
3.
For the FRIS Modules, use IIP Setup Tool on the CL-AP installation
CD (2 of 2).
Click
A window opens, prompting you to start the installation.
u NOTE u
Even if the F-RIS function is not used, install the FRIS Modules. If they
are not installed, an error occurs when the CL-AP starts.
RI000043.EPS
1.
4.
NOTE
Click
The Risiip - Choose Program Group window opens.

RI000044.EPS
5.
Click
The following warning window opens.

RI0000473.ai
2.

The Risiip Setup window opens.
RI000045.EPS
RI000042.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-100
6.
Click
9.
Click
A message appears to indicate that the installation is completed.
RI000049.EPS
R 000046.EPS
7.
Click
10. Click
The installation process for the FRIS Modules is thus completed.
11. Turn OFF the power to the PC.
RI000047.EPS
8.
Click
RI000048.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-101
8.1 Installing the XG-1 Standard Key
8. Installing the Standard Key

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
REFERENCE
372
2.
8.1 Installing the XG-1 Standard Key

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
This error screen opens when the AP key is not installed.

This error screen does not imply any anomalies because the AP
key will be installed later in 11. AP Key Installation.
3.
371
Click
372
Insert the XG-1 Standard Key CD into the PC.

The RU connection key installation start window automatically
opens.
This on-screen portion varies with the key to be installed.
Install the XG-1 Standard Key that is supplied with the CL, as directed
below.
If the CD supplied with the CL is the Standard Key, proceed to
8.3 Installing the Standard Key.
REFERENCE
00000337.EPS
When the XG-1 Standard Key (A01) is installed, the following functions
are available.
4.
Click
RU connection (FRUP)
HQ image transfer (image transfer from the RU only)
DRC image processing
TAS image processing
Image magnification or full screen display on the QA window
LUT adjustment function for connection to other competing PACS
These displayed portions vary with the key to be installed.
REFERENCE
00000338.EPS
The XG-1 Standard Key will be supplied only for a shipment when a
single RU is to be connected. When two or more RUs or a single 5000
plus are to be connected, install the 5000 Standard Key as well.
5.
1.
6.
In the same manner as indicated in steps 4. and 5. above,

consecutively install the HQ image transfer key, DRC image
processing key, TAS image processing key, image
magnification or full screen display key on the QA window,
and other competing PACS connection key.
7.
Turn ON the PC power.

An error screen like that shown below opens immediately after CLAP startup.
00000332.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Click
The HQ image transfer key installation start window automatically

opens.
RI-102
8.2 Installing the 5000 Standard Key
3.
8.2 Installing the 5000 Standard Key

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
Insert the 5000 Standard Key CD into the PC.

The installation start window for the 5000 series key automatically
opens.
372
These on-screen portions

vary with the key to be installed.
When a single 5000 plus are connected, install the 5000 Standard Key.
The 5000 Standard Key is stored on the CD that is supplied with the
CL.
REFERENCE
When the 5000 Standard Key is installed, the following functions are
available.
5000 plus connection
LUT adjustment function for connection to other competing PACSs
1.
RI000002.EPS
4.
Click
5.
Click
.
These on-screen portions
vary with the key to be installed.
Turn ON the PC.

The following error window opens immediately after CL-AP
startup.
00000332.EPS
REFERENCE
RI000003.EPS
The above error window opens when the AP key is not installed.
2.
Click
The installation start window for the DRC image transfer key
opens.
6.

consecutively install the DRC image processing key, TAS
image processing key, image magnification or full screen
display on the QA window key and other competing PACS
connection key.
7.
You are returned to the desktop screen.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-103
8.3 Installing the Standard Key
8.3 Installing the Standard Key

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
2.
371
372
3.
Install the Standard Key supplied with the CL, as directed below.
The Standard Key released after A09 includes the two types, Lite and
Plus, and their available functions are different with each other.
Insert the Standard Key CD into the PC.
The installation start window for the RU connection key

automatically opens.

double-click the execution file (extension: exe) in the CD.
When the Standard Key is installed, the following functions are

available.
1.
u NOTE u
REFERENCE
RU connection (FRUP)
HQ image transfer (only images from RUs)
5000 plus connection
FNC processing (A01 or later for Lite and A02 or later for Plus)
[not available for Lite.]
LUT adjustment function for connection to other competing PACSs
[not available for Lite.]
Film annotation characters [not available for Lite.]
Delux QA [not available for Lite.]
Click
This on-screen portion varies with the key to be installed.
00000337.EPS
4.
Click
These displayed portions vary with the key to be installed.
Turn ON the PC.

The following error window opens immediately after CL-AP
startup.
00000332.EPS
00000338.EPS
5.
6.
REFERENCE
The above error window opens when the AP key is not installed.
7.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Click
The HQ image transfer key installation start window automatically

opens.

consecutively install the HQ image transfer key, 5000 plus
connection key, DRC image processing key, TAS image
processing key, FNC image processing key, image
magnification or full screen display on the QA window key
(not available for Lite), other competing PACS connection
key (not available for Lite) and Delux QA key (not available
for Lite).
RI-104
9. ****BLANK****
9. ****BLANK****
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-105

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
Function
371
Product Code
CL DICOM MAMMO S
CR Digital Mammography
function. Image processing
parameters will not be provided.
CL DICOM MAMMO P
function. Image processing
parameters will be provided.*1
372
Install the same option keys that were used immediately before OS
reinstallation.
Unless the option keys have been deleted by newly installing the OS or
deleting the option key registry, option key reinstallation is not required.
Description
Image input/
output (contd) CL DICOM MEDIA
STORAGE B
Removable media image storage

function
u NOTE u
CL DICOM QR
After option key installation, be sure to install the AP key. The reason is
that installing the option keys disables the AP key that has been enabled.
Function for study query/image

retrieval to/from filing devices.
CL DICOM PDI
STORAGE
Function that writes exposed

images onto a CD-R.
CL DICOM
COMMITMENT
Function assuring that an image

has surely been stored in the
archiver unit.*2
IR 346 DELUX-QA
QA function addition*3
Function
Print output
Product Code
IR346 LOCAL PRINT
LP (local printer) connection
IR346 DICOM PRINT
DICOM Print function
IR346 DICOM CR
STORAGE
DICOM-based image
transmission functions available
(Also include a function to
transmit unstandardized images
to the QA-WS.) Options installed
are as follows.
CR Storage SCU (Standard)
CR Storage SCU (Private)
(Private Unstandardized CR
Storage is included in
Private.)
Image input/
output
IR346 DICOM IM
PROCESSED
IR346 DMS NET-WORK

IN-OUT
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Description
Functions available for

processed-image transmission
with DICOM Options installed are
as follows.
Processed image generation
Function for image transfer (input/
output) with FINP Options
installed are as follows.
FINP output
FINP input (Supports only the
reprint function.)
Image
storage
assurance
QA function
CL TILE-IM QA FOR PLUS QA batch processing

IR 346 MFP
IR 348 MFP
Image
processing
MFP image processing
CL SHUTTER-PROC
Shuttering processing
CL PEM
PEM image processing
CL IM COMPOSITION
Image composition
CL IM-MAGNIFY FOR
LITE
Image magnification (for Lite

Standard Key)
CL LUT-ADJUSTMENT
FOR LITE
LUT adjustment for connection to

other competing PACS (for Lite
Standard Key)
CL ANNOTATION
FOR LITE
Annotation function
(for Lite Standard Key)
*1 To use this option, the CL DICOM MAMMO S option key must have
been installed.
*2 To use this option, the IR346 DICOM CR STORAGE option key
must have been installed.
*3 When IR346 DELUX-QA is installed, all the QA functions are made
available. If it is not installed, only a limited number of QA functions
available.
RI-106
Function
Image
processing
(contd)
Product Code
Description
CL GPR
Grid Pattern Removal (GPR)

function
Each option key is supplied on one dedicated CD for each product.
FCR QC TEST SOFT
Image Reader QC function
FCR QC TEST SOFT M
Mammo QC function
The installation procedure is described below.

The same installation procedure applies to all the option keys.
CL ID ONLINE
ID Online function
CL DICOM ORDER MWM DICOM worklist function

CL DICOM ID MWM
DICOM worklist function

(acquiring only patient
information)
CL DICOM MPPS
DICOM PPS function*1

Basically, installed together with
MWM.
DX CL SYNAPSE RIS
CONNECT
Ordering function (Synapse RIS)
Energy
subtraction
processing
CL ES
Energy subtraction function

Make sure to install this function
when XU-D1 is connected.
X-ray
controller
CL X ONLINE
X-CON control function
P-Console
CL SOFT FOR POCKET

ID CL*2
Study reception information

transfer/reception function
Acquisition
of patient
information
Display of
CR PRECISE
precise
enlargement ENLARGEMENT
images
Function to present displayed

images and their additional
information on the 2nd monitor.
QA ROI
CR QA ROI
measurement MEASUREMENT
Function to determine an ROI on

an image and display its width
and height, as well as the mean
pixel value, median pixel value,
standard deviation and area.
Other
u NOTE u
CL RETAKE ANALYSIS
1.
The installation start window automatically opens in several

seconds.
u NOTE u
2.
Click
The indication varies

with the option key
for installation.
00000455.EPS
3.
Click
Function for storage/calculation

of exposure/mis-exposure image
information.
u NOTE u
Depending on the option for installation, the installation start
window will be displayed some times.
*1 Use this option together with the CL DICOM ORDER MWM or

CL DICOM ID MWM option.
*2 Install ActiveSync (Windows Mobile device center when the OS used is
Windows Vista) prior to installation of the POCKET id Console option key.
Perform steps 2. and 3. as well.
4.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Insert an option key CD into the PC.
RI-107

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
Install the AP key as follows:
359
370
1.
371
Insert the AP key CD into the PC.

After a while, the installation start window automatically opens.
372
u NOTE u
u NOTE u

Before AP key installation, be sure to install a standard key and option

keys.
2.
REFERENCE
The CL is designed so that the CL-AP can be started up when registry
information is generated to define the encryption key. The associated
registry information is generated when the AP key is installed.
Click
Version A software
00000456.EPS
3.
Click

RI000007.EPS
Version B software
4.
RI0000104.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-108

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
3.
Click [Data Base Utility].

The ImageDB Initialization window opens.
372
u NOTES u
After initial installation of the OS, be sure to initialize the image
database. Starting up the CL-AP without initializing the image
database will cause errors to be indicated (error codes: 50001, 20001,
30107, 30151, 20110, etc).
[For Windows 2000/XP]
Database can be initialized only when MSDE has been running.
If MSDE is running, the
icon will be displayed in the task tray at the
lower right corner of the window. If it is not displayed, restart the PC.
00000130.EPS
4.
Click
[For Windows Vista]

Database can be initialized only when SQL Server has been running.
If the SQL Server has not been running, restart the PC.
If images are accumulated on the image output queue, database
cannot be initialized. It is thus necessary to delete images
accumulated on the image output queue.
For the procedure to be used to delete images accumulated
on the image output queue, see 8.2 Clearing the Contents of
the Image Output Queue under MU: Maintenance Utility.
1.
DCL44011.ai
5.
Click
The command prompt window opens. After several seconds, the

following message appears.
Turn ON the CL-PC power.

Windows starts up. After about one minute, the CL-AP starts
running.
2.
00000184.EPS
Start the Service Utility.

For details on the Service Utility startup procedure, see
Utility.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-109
6.

After about 20 seconds, the system completes image database
initialization.
u NOTES u
If the following message appears, images included in the image
database have not been initialized accordingly.
It failed in initialized DB.
Make sure that MSDE has been running and images are not
accumulated on the image output queue.
To start up MSDE
Restart the PC and make sure that the
the task tray.
icon is displayed in
[For Windows Vista]

To start up SQL Server
I. Restart the PC.
II. Select Control Panel from the
menu and double-click
Administrative Tools.
III. Double-click Computer Management.
IV. Select Computer Management Service and Application
SQL Server configuration Manager SQL Server 2005
Service.
V. Confirm that SQL Server (MSSQLSERVER) is running.
When images are accumulated on the image output queue
Delete images accumulated on the output queue.
8.2 Clearing the Contents of the Image Output Queue
under MU: Maintenance Utility
7.
The same message as that appears in step 4. above (Press

any key to continue...) will reappear here. Press the <Enter>
key.
The system returns to the ImageDB Initialization window.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-110
13. Display Optimization (LUT file settings)
13. Display Optimization

(LUT file settings)
XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
nanao L362T
359
370
371
372
With [LUT] of the Service Utility, install an LUT file that matches the
display characteristics.
: EIZO 15" LCD monitor with a touch

panel (model L362T)
: Linear (straight line) LUT
Linear LUT
nanao Radiforce GS310-CLG : LCD monitor SL-IC300
(monochrome monitor)
: LCD monitor SL-IC300
nanao Radiforce R31
(color monitor)
: 17" color LCD monitor (model L568)
nanao L568M
nanao L560T-C
panel (model L560T-C)
nanao Radiforce G22-CL
: LCD monitor
(2M monochrome monitor)
: LCD monitor
nanao Radiforce GS220
nanao Radiforce GS310-ECN : LCD monitor
: LCD monitor
nanao Radiforce RX320
(3M color monitor)
For details, see 4. Display Optimization - LUT in
MU: Maintenance Utility.
RI000106.EPS
TPS 9415 TD15

TPS 9416 TD15
TPS 9416TD15_2
PRESTO! (B/W)
PRESTO! (Color)
ikegami MDM2130
nanao L350P
nanao L351P
nanao SL-IC200
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
: 15" LCD monitor with a touch panel

(model TPS9415TD15/G2)
(model TPS9416TD15/H2)
(model TPS 9416TD15/H2-1)
: Super Resolution LCD Monitor
SL-IC300 (monochrome)
SL-IC500 (color)
: Ikegami monitor (1k landscape
type)
panel (model L350P-TS)
panel (model L351P-TS)
: LCD Monitor SL-IC200
RI-111

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
The following 24 data files are to be restored in the CL:
Configuration Restore/Backup (IV. on the Service Utility

main menu window)
Backs up or restores CLs setup data.
Files to be backed up or restored are as follows.
SysConfig.mdb file (A00 or later)
System settings
Local printer settings
CSL settings
FINP settings
FRUP settings
QA process settings
NetConfig.mdb file (A00 or later)
Connected equipment information table
Connection destination setup table
DicomPrint sort destination setup table
FINP compression ratio setting
Distribution code setting
PN.mdb file (A00 or later)
PN (Person Name) settings
McrDataFormat.mdb file (A00 or later)
Magnetic card format setting
TagReplace.ini file (A02 or later)
Setup for DICOM tag replacement
QACustom.mdb file (A02 to V5.0(B))
Setup of display items on the QA window
Selector.mdb file (A02 or later)
Selector setup
TagLookup.ini file (A09 or later)
DICOM tag editing (for Siemens)
FilmStrFmt.env file (A09 or later)
Film character definition
BcrDataFormat.mdb file (A10 or later)
Barcode format setting
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
372
ExposureResultLog.mdb file (A10 or later)

Setup for exposure result log output items
MWMTagSetting.mdb file (A11 or later)
DICOM MWM C-FIND tag and internal data mapping setup
information
PConsoleSer.mdb file (V2.0(B) or later)
Settings for PDA connection
RejectComment.mdb file (V2.0(B) or later)
Setting for comments on mis-exposed images
CODEDSTB file (V1.0(C) or later)
Setting a distribution code for connection to the 9000 series
equipment
UMB_ATLAS1u.prm, UMB_ATLAS1t.prm,
UMB_ATLAS2u.prm, UMB_ATLAS2t.prm (V4.0(B) or later)
Setup of image unevenness removal processing for the CR-IR364
(type U/type T), CR-IR366 and CR-IR367.
UMB_ATLAS1a.prm (V5.0(B) or later)
Setup of image unevenness removal processing for the CR-IR371.
TagCharDataCut.ini (V5.0(B) or later)
Setup for output of truncated data
IDMassHistory.mdb (V7.1(B) or later)
Patient ID history
MassOrder.mdb (V7.1(B) or later)
Setup of order issuance function for screening examination
UMB_BASE1a.prm (V7.1(B) or later)
Setup of unevenness removal processing for the Image Reader
(reserved)
ExposureIndex.prm (V8.0(B) or later)
Setup of ExposureIndex function
TagCharDataAdd.ini (V8.1(B) or later)
Setup of character string adding function for DICOM tag
IssuanceIdMassOrder.dat (V8.1(B) or later)
Setup of issuance function for diagnostic orders
IMPORTANT
Data files to be restored must be of the same software versions.
Restoring data files of different software versions will disable the
software to be operated correctly. Note, however, that the following can
be restored correctly.
Restoring the A02 version data to A03
Restoring the A04 or A05 version data to A06
RI-112
u NOTES u
If no backup data is available, restore the configuration settings as
follows.
Restoring the RU (one RU connection) configuration (NETWORK
CONFIG
ALL OTHER NODES and CONNECTING EUIPMENT)
Host name : ru0 (default)
IP address : 172.16.1.10
(default)
Add Node : FRUP
Attribute
: CASSETTE
Function : READER
Device#1 : ru0 (default)
Restoring configuration for connection to other equipment

(available common to XG-1 RU/5000 plus/CR-IR35X/36X/37X/
9000series)
2. Software Setup in OE: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment
Restoring the barcode reader and magnetic card reader

configuration (available common to XG-1 RU/5000 plus/
CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X/9000 series)
Appendix 3 Connecting the Barcode Reader [Option] and

Appendix 4 Setting Up the Magnetic Card [Option] in
Setting dummy nodes (available common to XG-1 RU/5000 plus/

CR-IR35X/36X/37X/9000 series)
1.
Insert media (FD, USB memory stick or the like) that stores
a CL-Config backup into the PC.
2.
Start the Service Utility mode.
00000512.EPS
Restoring configuration for connection to the XG-1 RU (two or

more RUs connected)
4.7 Setup for RU (XG-1 RU) Connection under IN-B: Installation

Connection to Two or More RUs, 5000 plus and CR-IR356/357/
359/362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372
3.
Click
The Configuration Restore/Backup window opens.
Restoring configuration for connection to the 5000 plus
4.6 Configuration Setting for IR (5000plus series) Connection

under IN-B: Installation Connection to Two or More RUs, 5000
plus and CR-IR356/357/359/362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372
For details on the Service Utility mode startup procedure, see

Utility.
The main menu appears.
4.
Click
in the Configuration Restore area.
Restoring configuration for connection to the CR-IR356/357/

359/36X/37X
4.8 Setup for CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X Connection under

IN-B: Installation - Connection to Tow or More RUs, 5000 plus and
CR-IR356/357/359/362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372
Restoring the CL system configuration (available common to

XG-1 RU/5000 plus/CR-IR35X/36X/37X/9000 series)
5.3 Setup with Service Utility in IN-A: Installation Connection to

One XG-1 RU or CR-IR 355RU/356/357/359
00000349.EPS
The Specified Directory window opens.
4.2 Setup for the CL with the Service Utility under

IN-B: Connection to Two of More RUs, 5000 plus and CR-IR356/
357/359/362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
00000350.EPS
RI-113
5.
within
, and then choose the
media drive.
6.
Click
You are then returned to the Configuration Restore/Backup

window.
7.
Click
u NOTES u
Even when the restore process ends, no message appears to
indicate it. While the restore process is being performed, the
mouse cursor is replaced by the mark. When the mark
changes back to the mouse cursor, it means that the restore
process is ended.
Note, however, that the
mark appears only when the mouse
cursor is positioned within the Configuration Restore/Backup

window.
When there are three backup FDs, change first the 1st FD to the
2nd FD. Perform then steps 3 through 7 to restore data of the 2nd
FD and change it to the 3rd FD. Follow steps 3 through 7 to
restore data of the 3rd FD in a similar manner.
Before removing the media (FD, USB memory stick or the like),
check to see that the drive access lamp is distinguished.
8.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-114
15. Creating the FTP Server (Windows 2000/XP only)

(Windows 2000/XP only)
XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
1.
Insert the Windows 2000/XP reinstallation CD into the PC.
REFERENCE
When the Dell OptiPlex GX110 is employed as the PC, use the
Dell Product Recovery CD.
371
372
Perform the following procedures to prepare on the CLs HDD the FTP
server to be viewed by the XG-1 RU and CR-IR35X/36X.
The Microsoft Windows 2000/XP CD window opens.
Windows 2000
The FTP server can be created by installing the IIS manager.
u NOTES u
When the OS used is Windows Vista, the work operation directed
herein needs not be done.
For RU-CL N:N connection (when two or more CLs are connected),
create the FTP server only for the CL that will serve as the RU masterIIP.
REFERENCE
The IIS manager is a program used for creating an FTP server and
comes with the OS (Windows 2000/XP).
00000140.EPS
Windows XP
RI0000358.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-115
15. Creating the FTP Server (Windows 2000/XP only)
2.
For Windows XP
For Windows 2000

Click
) and click
The Internet Information Service (IIS) window opens.
For Windows XP
Click
The Windows Components Wizard window opens.
) and click
The system returns to the Windows Components Wizard

window.
Click

After a few minutes, a message appears to indicate that
installation processing has been completed.
4.
Click
The system returns to the Microsoft Windows 2000 CD/XP

window.
00000141.EPS
3.
5.
6.
) and click
For Windows 2000

(
Click

CAUTION
When the FTP server was created following the procedure
described in this chapter before performing 4. Installing MSDE/
Database Management System and Its Service Pack, with
Windows XP SP2 installed as directed in 2. Installing and Setting
Up the OS, return to 4. Installing MSDE/Database Management
System and Its Service Pack to reinstall the software.
Return to 4. Installing MSDE/Database Management System and
Its Service Pack.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-116
16.1 Installing the RU M-Utility

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370

371
372
To perform CR-IR346RU (XG-1 RU) software settings, be sure to

observe the procedures shown in the flow below.
u NOTE u
The RU M-Utility is a utility (also referred to as the FCR TOOL) that

exercises RU-AP installation, RU-Config setup, data backup, and other
functions.
For the operations of the CL and RU, it is necessary that the RU
M-Utility be installed in the CL.
For the RU M-Utility installation procedure, see 5.2.1 Installing
the RU M-Utility in IN-A: Installation One RU Connection.
perform CR-IR346RU-related settings only for the CL that will serve as
the XG-1 RU master-IIP.
16.2 Setting Up the FTP Server
16.3 Installing the RU-AP and Restoring
the RU-Config
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-117
4.
From the Action menu, choose Properties.
To set up the FTP server, use the IIS manager to specify the location
(directory) where the RU saves configuration and other data.
Communications between the CL and the RU will not be enabled if the
location for saving the data is not specified on the directory.
1.
In the Control Panel window, double-click
2.
Double-click
.
00000460.EPS
The Internet Information Services window opens.
3.
Click the
select
sign to the left of the CLs host name and then

.
The Default FTP Site Properties window opens.
5.
Click the Home Directory tab.
00000152.EPS
00000151.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-118
6.
9.
Enter settings as directed below:
Type in ftp 127.0.0.1 and then press the <Enter> key.

A message appears to prompt for user name input.
--------------------------------------------------Connected to 127.0.0.1.
220 iip-1 microsoft FTP Service (Version 5.0).
User(127.0.0.1:(none)):_
---------------------------------------------------
10. Type in cr-ir346 and then press the <Enter> key.

A message appears to prompt for password input.
II
I
00000153.EPS
I.
Click
11. Type in cr-ir346 and then press the <Enter> key.
to select directory of
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\CR-IR346.
II. Check
7.
Click
(so that
changes to
and then click
u NOTE u
Even when you enter the password, nothing appears on the
display.
).
The system returns to the Internet Information Services window.
8.
The next step is to check whether the FTP server is

operating normally.
From the Start menu, choose Programs, Accessories,
and then Command Prompt.
The Command Prompt window opens.
--------------------------------------------------331 Password required for cr-ir346.

Password:_
---------------------------------------------------
The following message appears when you successfully log into

the FTP server:
--------------------------------------------------230 User cr-ir346 logged in.
ftp>_
---------------------------------------------------
u NOTE u
If the above message does not appear, it means that the FTP
server is not properly set up. In such an instance, perform steps
12. and 13. and then repeat the whole FTP server setup procedure
beginning with step 1.
12. Type in bye and then press the <Enter> key.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-119
16.3 Installing the RU-AP and Restoring the RU-Config
13.
Close the Command Prompt window.
REFERENCE
[registration of the FTP user (user name: cr-ir346)]
For the RU to access the FTP, both the login name and the
password are required. For the CL operation, no such settings are
required because both the login name and the password are set up
automatically.
Use the procedure below to check the setup data.
1. Click the Users and Passwords icon in the Control Panel.
The Users and Passwords window opens.
2. Make sure that the cr-ir346 user name has been registered to
the Administrators group.
16.3 Installing the RU-AP and Restoring the

RU-Config
First, install the RU-AP in the CL, and then restore the RU-Config. To do
this, use the RU M-Utility and perform the procedures set forth in this
section.
IMPORTANT
If the CLs IP address written in the RU-Config backup is other than
172.16.1.20, you must pay due attention to the procedure that you
perform immediately after RU-AP installation.
Be sure to restore the RU-Config immediately after RU-AP installation.
Before restoring it, never restart the CL-AP or PC.
The FTP servers RU-Config data reverts to the default values when the
RU-AP is installed. Since the RU-Config in the RUs FLASH ROM is
updated to the default data if the CL-AP is started up with the FTP
server RU-Config reverted to the default, the RU will result in losing
track of the CL.
Confirm.
u NOTE u
Before installing the RU-AP, turn ON the RU power.
00000461.EPS
Installing the RU-AP (procedure applicable to RU-AP

version A07 or later)
For the RU-AP installation procedure, see 5.2.2 Installing the RUAP in IN-A: Installation One RU Connection.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-120
Restoring the RU-Config
l Main menu window
Perform the procedure set forth below to restore the RU configuration

file.
REFERENCE
The scanner data, which was backed up at the time of installation, need
not be restored unless the FLASH ROM of the RU main unit becomes
defective.
1.
Have on hand media (FD, USB memory stick or the like) on

which the RU-Config was backed up. Insert this media into
the PC.
2.
Start the RU M-Utility as directed below.

00000215.EPS
3.
In the LIST OF EXISTING RU area, click the host name of

the RU to be restored.
RU host name
IV. Click.
00000434.EPS
The pull-down menu for the

field and the
II. Click.
EXECUTE button change their color from gray to black.
I. Click.
00000219.EPS

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-121
4.
Note the
field to
verify that
7.
8.
is
selected, and then click
Click the
From the
menu, select sequentially Programs,
FujiFilm and FCR.
The CL-AP starts up.

The RU fetches the RU-Config in the FTP server to overwrite the
RU-Config in the FLASH ROM.
REFERENCE
00000351.EPS
5.
Click
The RU-Config is then restored in the FTP server. A window opens

to indicate the end of the restore process.
No problem arises even when the RU-Config in the FLASH ROM is

overwritten in the above manner.
As far as the FTP server data is the same as the data in the RUs
FLASH ROM, the latter data is not overwritten. However, when the
RU-Config is restored, its date is updated. That is why the contents
of the FLASH ROM are updated. The RU-Config setup data used
to overwrite the FLASH ROM is identical with the data that was
backed up.
00000352.EPS
6.
Click
The system returns to the RU M-Utility main menu.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-122

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
This section describes the software setup procedures for the CR-IR35X/
36X/37X.
u NOTE u
When two or more CLs are connected, perform the following procedures
for only the CL unit that serves as the RU master IIP.
Installing the RU PC-TOOL

Install the CR-IR35X/36X/37Xs RU PC-TOOL on the CL PC.
For the installation procedure, see IN: Installation in the Service
Manual of the CR-IR35X/36X/37X.
Setting the RU PC-TOOL

With the RU PC-TOOL, perform the application installation and
configuration setup procedures for the CR-IR35X/36X/37X.
For the installation and configuration setup procedures, see
IN: Installation in the Service Manual of the CR-IR35X/36X/37X.
REFERENCE
You do not have to perform an FTP server setup procedure for the
CR-IR35X/36X, because FTP server setup is automatically completed
when you install the RU PC-TOOL. (However, the FTP server setup
procedure must be performed for the XG-1 RU.)
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-123

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
3.
Enter settings as directed below.
372
I
II
To perform a remote maintenance of the CL, set up NetMeeting by

performing the procedures set forth below.
A client who is using the Synpase Web Query function on the CL with
Windows XP must not install NetMeeting.
(This is because multiple images appear being overlapped with each
other in the viewing dialog.)
III
NOTE
00000356.EPS
I.
When the OS used is Windows Vista, the work operation directed

herein needs not be done.
Installing NetMeeting
1.
Enter FCR in the
field.
II. Enter CSL in the
field.
III. Enter FCR-CSL in the
4.
For Windows 2000

From the [Start] menu, sequentially select Programs,
Accessories, Communication and then NetMeeting.
The NetMeeting window opens.
Click
field.
A window opens to prompt for director server setup.
5.
For Windows XP
From the [Start] menu, select Run....
The Run... window opens.
Enter conf.exe in
and click
II
00000357.EPS
00000355.EPS
2.
Click
I. Deselect (so that

changes to ).
II. Check (so that
changes to ).
A window opens, prompting you to enter user information.

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-124
6.
Click
13. Click
A window opens, prompting you to specify the network connection

speed.
7.
Click
A window opens to indicate that audio setup is completed.
A window opens for shortcut creation.
8.

00000360.EPS
14. Click
I
II
NetMeeting starts up in about 15 seconds.
For Windows 2000
00000358.EPS
I. Deselect (so that

II. Deselect (so that
9.
Click
changes to
changes to
).
).
The Audio Tuning Wizard window opens.
00000361.EPS
For Windows XP
00000359.EPS
10. Click
A volume setup window opens.
11. Click
A microphone setup window opens.
12. Click
RI0000353.EPS
A message appears to indicate that no microphone is connected.

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-125
Setting remote desktop sharing
1.
From the Tools menu, choose Remote Desktop Sharing.

The Remote Desktop Sharing Wizard window opens.
00000362.EPS
2.
Click
A window opens to explain about the access rights to Remote

Desktop Sharing.
3.
Click
A screen saver setup window opens.
4.
Turn ON the
(so that
and then click
changes to
),
A window opens to indicate the end of setup.
00000363.EPS
5.
Click
The system returns to the NetMeeting window.
6.
From the Call menu, choose Exit and Activate Remote

Desktop Sharing.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-126

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
3.
Double-click the service listing named World Wide Web

Publishing Service.
372
To provide network virus protection, complete the following setup

procedures for IIS.
Suspending the Web service and SMTP server
Disabling unnecessary accounts that can access the FTP service
Suspending the Web service and SMTP server

(only Windows 2000/XP)
1.
Click
, point to Settings, and then click Control
Panel.

RI000068.EPS
(For Windows XP, select Control Panel from the
The World Wide Web Publishing Service Properties (Local

Computer) window opens.
menu.)
2.
Double-click
and then
4.
From the Startup type pull-down menu, choose Disabled.
The Services window opens.
Choose "Disabled".
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI000069.EPS
RI-127
5.
Click
The selection for the Startup type field changes from Automatic
to Disabled.
Disabling unnecessary accounts that can access the

FTP service
For Windows 2000/XP
1.

then
and
2.
Click on the host name in the left-hand pane and then click
on Default FTP Site in the right-hand pane.
RI000070.EPS
6.
In the same manner as indicated in steps 3. through 5,

disable Simple Mail Transport Protocol (SMTP) as well.
RI000072.EPS
3.

4.
Disable this service.
Choose the Security Accounts tab and then uncheck

Allow Anonymous Connections ( ).
R 000071.EPS
RI000073.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-128
5.
When the confirmation dialog box opens, choose
For Windows Vista
1.
then
and
2.
In the left-hand side pane, click on the Host Name - FTP

Site - Default FTP Site.
RI000074.EPS
6.
Click
You are then returned to the Internet Information Services

window.
7.
Close the Internet Information Services window and

Control Panel window.
8.
Restart the PC.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI0000478.ai
3.

RI-129
4.
Choose the Security Accounts tab and then uncheck

Allow anonymous connections ( ).
7.
Close the Internet Information Service window and the

8.
Restart the PC.
RI0000479.ai
5.
When the confirmation dialog box opens, choose
RI0000480.ai
6.
Click
The system returns to the Internet Information Services window.

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-130
20. Settings Necessary for Installation of Windows XP Service Pack 2
20. Settings Necessary for

Installation of Windows XP
Service Pack 2
XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
Windows XP SP2 installation
1.
The Windows XP Service Pack 2 Setup Wizard window opens.
2.
371
CL-AP shutdown
Windows XP SP2 installation
Firewall settings
3.
4.
Within a period of three seconds after the CL initial window

opens, sequentially click the upper left corner and then the
upper right corner of the window.
The Service Utility starts and then the Service Utility window
opens.
3.
) and click
Click
Installation of Windows XP SP2 starts.

The Completing the Windows XP Service Pack 2 Setup Wizard
window opens in about 22 minutes.
5.
Click
The computer restarts and then the Help protect your PC window
opens.
6.
Windows starts running. The CL-AP starts running too in about

one minute, displaying then the CL initial window.
2.
Place a checkmark to [I agree] (
The Select Options window opens.
CL-AP shutdown
NOTE
Installation of Windows XP SP2 is performed provided that the CL has
already been installed appropriately. If Windows XP SP2 was reinstalled
for reason of a CL failure, for example, be sure to reinstall the CL and
then install Windows XP SP2.
Click
The software license agreement window opens.
372
To protect the CL from the threat of network viruses and illegal access,
Windows XP Service Pack 2 (hereinafter referred to as SP2) should
be installed. Follow the steps below to perform settings necessary for
installation of Windows XP SP2.
1.
Insert the Windows XP SP2 CD into the PC.
Place a checkmark to [Not rigth now] (
) and click
.
The CL-AP starts.
7.
Shut down the CL-AP.

For how to shut down the CL-AP, see steps 2 and 3 of
CL-AP shutdown.
Click [Exit Service Utility] at the lower right of the window.

The Service Utility will then shut down.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-131
Firewall settings
The two types of settings, exceptional settings and communication
protocol ICMP settings, are performed on the Firewall window.
3.
Click
The Add a Program window opens.
Exceptional settings
1.
menu, and double-
click Windows Firewall.

The Windows Firewall window opens.
200000001.EPS
2.
Select the Exceptions tab.
20000003.EPS
4.
Click
The Browse window opens.
200000002.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
20000004.EPS
RI-132
5.
The Add a Program window then opens again.
If the Browse window includes any of the execution files

(programs) listed below, select one of them and click
.
Table Execution file list
Execution file name

C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IipInput.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IipInputEz.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IipMain.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IipFinp.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IipOutput.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\SSDecision.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\SSIpServer.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\SSFinp.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\SSXfer.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\DicomStoreSCP.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IipMedia.exe
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\ML_UPSEvent.exe
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\IIPUserUtility.exe
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\IIPServiceUtility.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\FCR\TOOL\BmpServer\
BmpServer.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\FCR\TOOL\InfoHostServer\
InfoHostServer.exe
C:\Program Files\Microsoft ActiveSync\wcescomm.exe
Remarks
20000005.EPS
6.
For installing
the RU PC-TOOL.
For installing
the FCR-TOOL.
When the POCKET id
Console is used.
Click
with the program to be added being
selected appropriately.
The system returns to the Windows Firewall window.
7.
Make sure that a checkmark is placed to the left of the

added execution file displayed in the Programs and Services
field.
C:\Program Files\NetMeeting\conf.exe
C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM32\FTP.exe
C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM32\mnmsrvc.exe
C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM32\INETSRV\inetinfo.exe
For installing
the client RU PC-TOOL.
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\WOL\FF-WakeOnLAN.exe
When WakeOnLAN is used.
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\WOL\FF-WakeOnLAN Utility.exe When WakeOnLAN is used.
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\Retrieve.exe
For version V3.0 or later
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\
IIPRetakeAnalysisTool.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IIPTRISScreen.exe For version V3.1 or later
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IdLoginExe.exe
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\
IIPSynapseRISScreen.exe
20000006.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
RI-133
8.
Repeat steps 3 through 7 for the number for programs to be

added.
9.
Click
12. Make sure that a checkmark is placed to the left of the
added port name displayed in the Programs and Services

filed.
The Add a Port window opens.
10. Add ports as instructed below.
I
II
III
20000008.EPS
20000007.EPS
I.
Enter a port name in
II. Enter a port number in

III.
Table Port setup information list

Port name
FTP_port
SQLServer_port
SQLMonitor_port
11. Click
Port number
21
1433
1434
Protocol type
TCP
TCP
UDP
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-134
ICMP settings
1.
Select the Advanced tab on the Windows Firewall window

and click
of ICMP.
The ICMP Settings window opens.
3.
Click
4.
Click
on the Windows Firewall window.
The Windows Firewall window will then close.
20000009.EPS
2.
Place a checkmark to the Allow incoming echo request

setup item ( ).
20000010.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-135
Balloon Tips display settings

The Windows Security Center may display an alert, or Balloon Tips, in
the notification area (to the right of the taskbar). To suppress such an
alert, follow the procedure below.
1.
2.
menu.
4.
On the Alert Settings window that opens, remove

checkmarks from Firewall, Automatic Updates and
Virus Protection ( ).
5.
Click
NOTE
Double-click Security Center.
Following the procedure shown below, you can ensure that Windows
XP SP2 has been installed successfully.
1. Right-click My Computer from the
menu.
The My Computer pop-up menu window opens.

2. Select Properties.
3. Select the General tab.
Windows XP SP2 has been installed successfully if Service Pack
2 is displayed in the System.
20000011.EPS
3.
Click Change the way Security Center alerts me that is on

the left-side pane.
20000012.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-136

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
1.
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
2.
Select Advanced tab and click
in
Performance.
372

For Windows 2000/XP
menu, and doubleclick
AWS35012.ai
The Performance Options window opens.

The System window opens.
3.
For Windows Vista

doubleclick
Select Advanced tab and click
in Virtual
memory.
menu, and
Click Advanced system settings.
AWS35013.ai
AWS35040.ai
The Virtual Memory window opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-137
4.
Confirm the following settings.

: 1536 MB
Initial size
Maximum size : 2048 MB
AWS35014.ai
5.
Click
The system returns to the Performance Options window.
6.
Click
7.
Close the System Properties window.

The system returns to the System window.
8.
Close the System window.

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-138

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
4.
357
368
359
370
371
372
For Windows 2000/XP
1.
menu, and
doubleclick [Administrative Tools].

2.
Double-click Event Viewer.
II
The Event Viewer window opens.
3.
Right-click a Application and then choose Properties

from the pop-up menu.
RI0000482.ai
I. Check that the maximum log size is 512KB.
NOTE
If the maximum log size is set to a value other than the one
shown above, change it to 512 KB.
II. Select Overwrite event as needed.
5.
Click
The system returns to the Event Viewer window.
6.
Right-click a System and then choose Properties from

the pop-up menu.
The the System Properties window opens.
RI0000481.ai
The Application Properties window opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
7.
8.
9.
Perform the same procedure as in steps 4 and 5.

Close the Event Viewer window.
RI-139
4.
For Windows Vista
1.
menu, and
doubleclick [Administrative Tools].

2.
Double-click Event Viewer.

The Event Viewer window opens.
3.
Right-click Application and then choose Properties from

the pop-up menu.
I
II
AWS35011.ai
I. Check that the maximum log size is 20480KB.
NOTE
AWS35039.ai
If the maximum log size is set to a value other than the one
shown above, change it to 20480 KB.
The Log Properties - Application window opens.
II. Select Overwrite events as needed.
5.
Click
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
6.
Right-click a System and then choose Properties from

the pop-up menu.
7.
Perform the same procedure as in steps 4 and 5.
RI-140
8.
Select Customize... from the View menu.
20000012.ai
The Customize View window opens.
9.
Remove the checkmark from the Action pane.
AWS35011.ai
10. Click
11. Close the Event Viewer window.

12. Close the Administrative Tools window.

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-141
23. Canceling AutoPlay Mode (Windows Vista only)
23. Canceling AutoPlay Mode

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
1.
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
menu.
2.
Double-click
3.
Remove the checkmark from Use AutoPlay for all media

and devices.
AWS35021.ai
4.
Click [Save].
5.

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-142
24. Firewall Settings

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
NOTE
Firewall settings are performed provided that the CL has already been
installed appropriately.
AP shutdown
1.

Windows starts running. The CL-AP starts running too in about
one minute, displaying then the CL initial window.
2.
Within a period of three seconds after the CL initial window

opens, sequentially click the upper left corner and then the
upper right corner of the window.
The Enter Password window opens.
DXL41001.ai
3.
Click
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-143
Setting the Firewall / ICMP
When the AP-CD is used
When the FD is used
1.
Insert the 114Y5085953A00 FD into the FD drive.
2.
Select All Programs Accessories Run... from the

menu.
Insert the CL-AP CD into the PC.
2.
Select All Programs Accessories Run... from the

menu.
3.
3.
1.
Enter D:\Tools\FirewallSetting.bat and click [OK].

The command prompt window opens.
After a while, the following window opens.
Enter A:\FirewallSetting.bat and click [OK].

20000011.ai
4.

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI0000496.ai
4.

RI-144
Checking the Firewall Settings
1.

doubleclick
2.
REFERENCE
Execution file list
menu and
The Windows Firewall window opens.
Click Allow a program through Windows Firewall.
AWS35015.ai
3.
The Windows Firewall Settings window opens.
Select the Exceptions tab and check to see that the

following items are checkmarked appropriately.

BmpServer.exe
DicomStoreSCP.exe
FF-WakeOnLAN.exe
IdLoginExe.exe
IipInput.exe
IipMain.exe
IipOutput.exe
IIPServiceUtility.exe
IIPTRISScreen.exe
inetinfo.exe
ML_UPSEvent.exe
Retrieve.exe
SSFinp.exe
SSXfer.exe
conf.exe
FF-WakeOnLAN Utility.exe
FTP.exe
IipFinp.exe
IipInputEz.exe
IipMedia.exe
IIPRetakeAnalysisTool.exe
IIPSynapseRISScreen.exe
IIPUserUtility.exe
InfoHostServer.exe
mnmsrvc.exe
SSDecision.exe
SSIpServer.exe
Execution file name

C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IipInput.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IipInputEz.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IipMain.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IipFinp.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IipOutput.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\SSDecision.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\SSIpServer.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\SSFinp.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\SSXfer.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\DicomStoreSCP.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IipMedia.exe
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\ML_UPSEvent.exe
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\IIPUserUtility.exe
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\IIPServiceUtility.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\FCR\TOOL\BmpServer\
BmpServer.exe
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\FCR\TOOL\InfoHostServer\
InfoHostServer.exe
C:\Program Files\NetMeeting\conf.exe
C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM32\FTP.exe
C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM32\mnmsrvc.exe
C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM32\INETSRV\inetinfo.exe
Remarks
RU PC-TOOL
installed
FCR-TOOL
installed
Client PC tool
installed
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\WOL\FF-WakeOnLAN.exe
WakeOnLAN
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\WOL\FF-WakeOnLAN Utility.exe
WakeOnLAN
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\Retrieve.exe
For V3.0 or later
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IIPRetakeAnalysisTool.exe For V3.0 or later
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IIPTRISScreen.exe
For V3.1 or later
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IdLoginExe.exe
For V3.1 or later
C:\Program Files\fujifilm\IIP\System\IIPSynapseRISScreen.exe For V8.1 or later
Port setup information list

Port name
FTP_port
SQLServer_port
SQLMonitor_port
Port number
21
1433
1434
Protocol type
TCP
TCP
UDP
RI240001.ai
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
RI-145
3.
Checking the ICMP Settings
1.
menu and
doubleclick [Administrative Tools] .
The Adoministrator Tools window opens.
2.
Select Windows Firewall with Advanced Security on Local

Computer Monitoring Firewall and confirm that the
following items have been added.
Double-click Windows Firewall with Advanced Security.
Networking - Address Mask Request (ICMPv4-In)

Networking - Destination Unreachable (ICMPv4-Out)
Networking - Echo Request (ICMPv4-In)
Networking - Parameter Problem (ICMPv4-Out)
Networking - Redirect (ICMPv4-In)
Networking - Redirect (ICMPv4-Out)
Networking - Router Solicitation (ICMPv4-In)
Networking - Source Quench (ICMPv4-Out)
Networking - Time Exceeded (ICMPv4-Out)
Networking - Timestamp Request (ICMPv4-In)
AWS35021.ai
The Windows Firewall with Advanced Security window opens.
RI0000483.ai
4.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Close both the Windows Firewall with Advanced Security

and Administrative Tools windows.
RI-146
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-147
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
RI-148
Appendix A Uninstalling the APs

This appendix describes the procedures for uninstalling the following
APs:
CL-AP
MSDE (SQL SP included) / SQL Server
RU-AP
RU M-UTILITY
Option keys
Touch panel driver
Console software (Built_inConsole)
FRIS Modules
Synapse Client (Synapse Workstation)
*1
Precise enlargement software
QA ROI measurement software
CAUTION
*1: Uninstall this software only when reinstalling or upgrading a
linking application. No support is provided to only
uninstallation of any linking application.
u NOTE u
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx RI A-1
1. CL-AP
5.
Click
Use the IIP Setup Tool on the CL-AP CD (2 of 2) to uninstall the CL-AP.
u NOTE u
u NOTE u
The message Prepare Installation appears here.

Note that the uninstallation process then starts, and not the
installation process as the message indicates.
When uninstalling CL-AP of software version V7.0 (B) or later, have the
date/time display application (IIPDisDateTime) exit beforehand the task
manager (by calling up at the press of the <Ctrl>+<shift>+<Esc> keys).
1.
In about one minute, the uninstall process ends.
6.
Close the Add/Remove Programs window.

You are then returned to the IIP Setup Tool menu.
u NOTE u
NOTES

When the Synapse Client software is installed on the CL, uninstall first
the CL-AP and then the Synapse Client software.
For how to uninstall the Synapse Client software, see
Appendix A Uninstalling the APs under
RI: Reinstalling the Software.
RI000097.EPS
2.

The Add/Remove Programs window opens.
3.
Select the CL-AP (IIP in the window).

The selected item is then highlighted.
4.
Click

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx RI A-2
2. MSDE (SQL SP Included) / SQL Server
4.
For Windows 2000
1.
Double-click
Right-click
in the task tray at the lower right corner of the
desktop, and then click MS SQL Server-Stop.
on the desktop.
Double-click
For Windows XP
Select
from the
menu.
00000473.EPS
The SQL Server Service Manager window opens.
2.
Click
3.
Right-click
5.
Double-click
in the task tray again, and then click Exit.
6.
Select MSDE and then click
The Confirm File Deletion window opens.
00000474.EPS
The
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
icon disappears from the task tray.
Appx RI A-3
7.
Click
The installation shield starts running to initiate an MSDE

uninstallation.
After a while, the Remove Shared File? window opens.
1.
menu.
2.
Double-Click
3.
Double-Click
4.
00000475.EPS
8.
Click
5.
9.
Click
Within the tree in the left-hand area of the window, select
Within the tree in the right-hand area of the window, rightclick

, select Stop.
Uninstallation ends in 10 seconds.
10. Click
The system returns to the Add/Remove Programs window.
11. Close the Add/Remove Programs window and Control

Panel.
00000485.ai
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI A-4
6.
Close the Computer Management window.

7.
Click
10. Select MSSQLSERVER: Database Engine and then click

.
in the upper left-hand area of the Administrative
Tools window.
8.
Double-Click
The Programs and Features window opens.
9.
Select Microsoft SQL Server 2005 and then click

.
The Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Uninstall window opens.
00000486.ai
11. Click Finish.

The installation shield starts running to initiate an SQL Server
uninstallation. After a while,Uninstallation ends. The system then
returns to the Programs and Features window.
12. Close the Programs and Features window and then the
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI A-5
2.
3. RU-AP
Click [UNINSTALL].
To uninstall the RU-AP, use the RU M-Utility.
u NOTE u
1.
All the RU-APs displayed in the LIST OF EXISTING RU area are

uninstalled.

IV. Click.
II. Click.
00000477.EPS
A confirmation window (the message Completed) appears on the

display.
I. Click.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
00000476.EPS
3.
Click
The system then returns to the main menu.
Appx RI A-6
4. RU M-Utility
u NOTES u
Although the window says Welcome to the FCR TOOL Setup
Wizard, the setup process does not start.
u NOTE u
Use the RU-CD to uninstall the RU M-Utility. Do not uninstall the RU
M-Utility from Add/Remove Programs in Control Panel because an
improper uninstallation results.
1.
FCR TOOL is another name for RU M-Utility.
3.
Click
The FCR TOOL Setup/Remove the Program window opens.
Insert the RU-CD into the PC.

After a while, the CR-IR346RU MAINTENANCE TOOLS window
opens.
00000479.EPS
4.
Click
The FCR TOOL Setup/Completing the FCR TOOL Setup Wizard

window opens. Uninstallation is now completed.
5.
Click
The system then returns to the initial window (which automatically

opened when the CD was set in position).
00000214.EPS
2.
Click
After a while, the FCR TOOL Setup window opens.

00000480.EPS
6.
Click [EXIT].
7.
00000478.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx RI A-7
4.
5. Option Keys
The option key CD is required for uninstalling an option key.
D:\option keys executable file name (xxxxxx.exe)/u
u NOTE u
u NOTE u
When uninstalling an option key, be sure to perform the following

procedure. If, for instance, you directly remove an option key with
Registry Editor or the like, the option name may remain in a user
window although the option function is removed.
1.
2.
3.
Enter the media drive name for the underlined portion.
REFERENCE
To confirm the executable file name of an option key, you should
directly view the contents of the CD from Explorer or the like.
Insert into the PC the CD for the option key you wish to
uninstall.
Example: Executable file names for IR346 DICOM CR STORAGE

option
The installation window opens. Press the

button to close this window.
Select Run... box from the
Enter the uninstallation command in the Open (O) box and

click
.
OptionDcmStandardCR.exe
OptionDcmPrivateCR.exe
button to select the executable file
You can click the
for the option key to be uninstalled.
menu.
The Run... box opens.
A window opens to indicate that uninstallation is completed.
5.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Click
Appx RI A-8
6. Touch Panel Driver
4.
Click
The uninstallation start window opens.
The touch panel driver uninstallation procedure differs whether it is

L362T, L560T-C or other than those models.
Uninstall the driver accordingly following the proper procedure.
Monitor other than L362T and L560T-C
1.
RI000008.EPS
For Windows 2000

Double-click
5.
on the desktop.
Click
When uninstallation process ends, the PC restarts.
Double-click
For Windows XP
Select
from the
menu.
2.
Double-click
3.
Select the touch panel driver (MonitorMouse for Windows

2000) and click
.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI A-9
L362T monitor
4.
u NOTE u
The Reminder window opens.
When the OS used is Windows Vista, the procedure to be performed is

different.
See L362T/L560T-C under Windows Vista.
For the procedure to be performed under Windows Vista, see
L362T/L560T-C under Windows Vista.
1.
Click
5.
6.
When uninstallation process ends, click
For Windows 2000

on the desktop.
Double-click
Uninstallation process starts.
Double-click
Click
7.
Click
8.
9.
Restart the PC.
For Windows XP
Select
from the
menu.
2.
Double-click
3.
Select TouchWare 5.64 SR1, and click
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI A-10
L560T-C monitor
4.
u NOTE u
When the OS used is Windows Vista, the procedure to be performed is
different.
See L362T/L560T-C under Windows Vista.
For the procedure to be performed under Windows Vista, see
L362T/L560T-C under Windows Vista.
1.
Click
Uninstallation process starts, and the USB Driver Removal

window opens within a few seconds.
5.
Click

For Windows 2000
Double-click
on the desktop.
RI0000466.AI
Double-click
6.
Click
For Windows XP
Select
from the
menu.
RI0000467.AI
2.
Double-click
7.
Click
8.
When uninstallation process ends, click
.
.

3.
Select TouchWare 5.64 SR1, and click

010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
9.
.
10. Restart the PC.
Appx RI A-11
L362T/L560T-C under Windows Vista
1.
menu.
2.
Double-click
3.
Right-click MT 7.12(build) for Windows and select

Uninstall/Change from the menu that opens.
4.
Click
Uninstallation processing starts.
5.
6.
At the completion of uninstallation processing, click

.
7.

Restart the PC.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI A-12
7. Console Software (Built_inConsole)
3.
For Windows 2000/XP
u NOTE u
Select Built_inConsole and click
After the console software is uninstalled, be sure to reinstall the console

software. The CL-AP does not start running when the console software
is uninstalled.
1.

.
The Application Removal window opens.
For Windows Vista

The IIP Setup Tool main menu opens automatically.
4.
NOTE
Click
The install shield starts running and begins to uninstall the MSDE.
After a while, the Shared Component window opens.

RI000009.EPS
5.
Click
NOTE
When
below may open. In such cases, click

the next step.
RI000097.EPS
2.
is clicked, a window like that shown

to proceed to

The Add/Remove Programs window or the Programs and
Features window opens.
RI0000428.EPS
The uninstallation process ends and the confirmation window opens.
6.
Click
The system then returns to the Add/Remove Programs window.
7.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Close the Add/Remove Programs window and then the

main menu.
Appx RI A-13
8. FRIS Modules
[Applicable only in Japan]
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI A-14
9. DVD-RAM Driver
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI A-15
10. POCKET id Console-AP

1.
2.
From the
menu on the POCKET id Console,
select Settings and then tap on the
Soft-reset the PDA terminal (POCKET id Console).
tab.
REFERENCE
While holding down either of the right and left scan trigger buttons
on the POCKET id Console, press the Enter key and the Function
key at the same time, and then release these keys.
Scan trigger
Function key
(
button)
Enter key
(
button)
Scan trigger
RI000102E.EPS
RI0000366.EPS
The screen is reset, and the desktop opens in a few seconds.
3.
Double-click
The Remove Programs window opens.
RI000101E.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI A-16
4.
Select FujiFilm POCKET id Console and tap on

.
5.
Tap
When the uninstallation completes, the system returns to the

Remove Programs window.
RI000103E.EPS
The Remove Program window opens.
RI000105E.EPS
6.
Close the Remove Programs window.
NOTES
If the following window opens, perform steps 7 and onward to
remove specific files.
Until you have performed step 7, be careful not to touch the PDA
screen. Touching the screen will cause the current screen to
disappear.
RI000104E.EPS
RI000106E.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI A-17
7.
Take a note of the folders or file paths that are listed on the
screen as shown below.
11. Press and hold with the stylus pen one of the folders or files
that you have noted down at step 7, and then tap Delete
from the menu that appears.
RI000109E.EPS
A dialog opens asking you to confirm deletion of the folder or file.

RI000107E.EPS
8.
12. Tap on
Tap on anywhere on the screen.

The system returns to the System window.
9.
Tap on the
mark in the upper-right corner of the screen.
10. From the
menu on the POCKET id Console,
select Programs and then File Explorer.
RI000110E.EPS
The specified folder or file is deleted, and then the system returns
to the File Explorer screen.
13. If there are two or more folders/files to delete, repeat steps

11 and 12 until all of them are deleted.
RI000108E.EPS
The File Explorer window opens.

010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI A-18
14. If there are any Study information file(s) and/or Screen

customization setting file(s), repeat steps 11 and 12 to
delete all of them.
NOTE
Study information file(s) and Screen customization setting file(s)
are stored under the folders that are set for the following paths,
respectively.
Study information file(s)
No.3, StudyFilePath under SYSTEM CONFIG - CONFIG
PDA
Screen customization setting file(s)
No.4, CustomFilePath under SYSTEM CONFIG - CONFIG
PDA
15. Tap on the
mark in the upper-right corner of the screen.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI A-19
11. ActiveSync
6.
The desktop opens.
NOTE
When ActiveSync has been removed, the POCKET id Console option
key needs to be reinstalled for reinstallation of the ActiveSync function.
1.
Click
7.
Restart the PC.

For Windows 2000
on the desktop.
Double-click
Double-click
For Windows XP
Select
from the
menu.
2.
Double-click
3.
Select Microsoft ActiveSync 3.7 and click
A window opens prompting for confirmation of file removal.
4.
Click
The uninstallation window opens.
5.
Click
Uninstallation processing will start. After a while, a window opens

to indicate that uninstallation processing has been completed.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI A-20
12. Synapse Client Software (Synapse

Workstation)
1.
For Windows 2000

on the desktop.
9.
Double-click
Click the
symbol at the upper right-corner of the window
to close the Downloaded Program Files window.
7.
8.
Double-click
6.
Restart the PC.

If the CL-AP starts up after the PC restart, click the upperright and -left corners of the window once each to have the
Service Utility be displayed. Then shut down the Service
Utility.
Open the following folders.
Windows 2000 : C:\WINNT\Download Program Files
Windows XP : C:\WINDOWS\Download Program Files
10. Right-click Synapse Medical Imaging Workstation and

select Remove.
For Windows XP/Vista

Select
from the
menu.
2.
Double-click
in Control Panel.
3.
Select Synapse and click
The WARNING window opens.
4.
Click
RI000229.EPS
11. Click
The same window opens again.
5.
Click
After a while, the Downloaded Program Files window opens

automatically.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
RI000230.EPS
12. Close the Downloaded Program Files.

Appx RI A-21
13. Exposure Guidance

010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI A-22
14. Precise Enlargement Software

This section describes the procedure used to uninstall the Precise
Enlargement software.
CAUTION
Uninstall the Precise Enlargement software only when
reinstalling or upgrading this application software.
Uninstallation processing can be performed only from a CD of
the same version of software that has already been installed.
Described below are the procedure on how to confirm the
Precise Enlargement software version and the CDs that are for
the available version.
I. Click C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Cooper\System\Version.xml.
II. Confirm <SoftwareVersion> shown in <Application ID=
Name=ECHO>.
III. Depending on the version confirmed of the Precise
Enlargement software, use either of the following CDs.
For <SoftwareVersion>1.0:
Precise Enlargement software installation CD
(Precise enlargement function (114Y5342318A00))
For <SoftwareVersion>2.1:
Precise Enlargement software installation CD
(Precise enlargement function (114Y5342318A01))
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx RI A-23
For the V1.0 Precise Enlargment software
4.
1.
Insert the Precise Enlargement software installation CD

(Precise enlargement function (114Y5342318A00)) into the
PC.
2.
Use Explorer to double-click Setup.exe.
Select Remove Echo and click
The Install Echo application screen window opens.
3.
Click
AWS807003.ai
The Installation Complete window opens.
AWS807004.ai
AWS807002.ai
The Welcome to the Echo Setup Wizard window opens.
5.
Click
6.
Uninstall the option key.
For details of the uninstallation procedure, see 5. Option Keys.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx RI A-24
For the V2.1 Precise Enlargment software
4.
1.
Insert the Precise Enlargement software installation CD

(Precise enlargement function (114Y5342318A01)) into the
PC.
2.
Click
The Install Precise enlargement function screen window opens.

AWS807009.ai
3.
Click
The Uninstallation Complete window opens.
AWS807010.ai
AWS807008.ai
The Welcome to the Precise enlargement function Setup Wizard

window opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
5.
Click
6.
For details of the uninstallation procedure, see 5. Option

Keys.
Appx RI A-25
15. Windows Mobile Device Center

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx RI A-26
16. QA ROI Measurement Software
4.
Click
This section describes the procedure used to uninstall the QA ROI

Measurement software.
CAUTION
Uninstall the QA ROI Measurement software only when
reinstalling or upgrading this application software.
AWS807012.ai
Uninstallation processing can be performed only from a CD of

the same version of software that has already been installed.
The Uninstallation Complete window opens.
For the V2.0 QA ROI Measurement software
1.
Insert the QA ROI measurement software installation CD (QA

ROI measurement (114Y5342319A00)) into the PC.
2.
3.
AWS807013.ai
The Install QA ROI Measurement screen window opens.
5.
Click
Click
6.
For details of the uninstallation procedure, see 5. Option

Keys.
AWS807011.ai
The Welcome to QA ROI Measurement Setup Wizard window

opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx RI A-27
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx RI A-28
Appendix B Changing the CL Host Name
Appendix B Changing the CL

Host Name
u NOTE u
When changing the CLs host name, be sure to follow the sequence
indicated below.
If you do not use the correct procedure to change the host name, the
CL-AP may become inoperative.
Uninstalling the MSDE/SQL Server

For the procedure for uninstalling the MSDE/SQL Server,
see Appendix A Uninstalling the APs.
Changing the CL-PC host name
1.

For Windows 2000
Double-click
Uninstalling the MSDE/SQL

Server
Changing the CL-PC host name
Installing the MSDE/SQL Server
Rebuilding the image database
Setting the Service Utility
on the desktop.
Double-click
Double-click
For Windows XP
Initializing the image database ... Use this procedure only when
you wish to remove images from
the HDD.
* If you wish to retain images, do
not perform this procedure.
u NOTE u
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Select
from the
menu.
Double-click
Appx RI B-1
For Windows Vista

For Windows XP/Vista

Click the Computer Name tab.
menu.
Double-click
R 0000359.EPS
Click
The Computer Name Changes window opens.
Click
Change the host name of the Computer name field.
2.
Change.
For Windows 2000

Click the Network Identification tab.
RI0000360.EPS
3.
00000482.EPS
Click
The Identification Changes window opens.
Change the host name entry in the Computer name field.
Click
For Windows 2000/XP

The Network Identification window opens. (Although a
message appears prompting you to restart the PC, you must
restart it in step 6.)
For Windows Vista
Change.
00000483.EPS
RI0000361.ai
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI B-2
4.
Click
Installing the MSDE/SQL Server
The system then returns to the System Properties window.
5.
Click
. (For Windows Vista, click
For the MSDE/SQL Server installation procedure, see 4. Installing

MSDE/Database Management System and Its Service Pack in
.)
u NOTE u
A windows opens to prompt for a restart.
6.
Click
. (For Windows Vista, click
.)
The PC restarts.
7.
When a certain period of time elapses after PC startup, error

windows open. Close all such windows.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
When MSDE/SQL Server and service pack are installed, the PC is

forced to restart. After a restart, the CL-AP automatically starts up;
however, an error occurs because the image database is not
rebuilt.
In this instance, just click [OK] to close the error window.
The system recovers from this error when you rebuild the image
database.
Appx RI B-3
Rebuilding the image database
1.
Select
from the
Setting the Service Utility

menu. Use then the
key to select necessary files located in the

directories below:
A00 version:
When you change the CLs host name, the Service Utilitys network
setup for this equipment changes to that for other connected equipment.
Therefore, you have to restore the original network setup as directed
below:
1.
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Temp\
ImageDB\SQL\Attach.bat
A02 version or later: C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Temp\

AttachAll.bat
Start the Service Utility and then click [Setup Configuration

Item].
2.
Within the tree in the left-hand area of the window, click the
mark to the left of
, and then click
the mark to the left of
.
Do not execute the above command from the MS-DOS prompt.
3.
Choose
The MS-DOS prompt window then opens, displaying the message

Press any key to continue ....
4.
Change the
u NOTE u
(CLs previous host name).

entry in the upper right
corner of the window to a new host name.
5.
Click
6.
From the Config menu, choose Save.

saved.
00000484.EPS
2.

The MS-DOS prompt window closes. The image database is thus
completely rebuilt.

This makes it possible to use again HDD images that have been
available before CL host name change.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
7.
Click
The original network setup is then restored.
Appx RI B-4
Initializing the image database [as required]

u NOTE u
If you wish to retain images stored in the HDD, do not initialize the
image database.
Initializing the image database deletes all images from the HDD.
1.
Initialize the image database with the Service Utility.

For the image database initialization procedure, see
12. Initializing the Image Database in RI: Reinstalling the
Software.
The CL host name change procedure is now completed.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI B-5
BLANK PAGE
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI B-6
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Appx RI B-7
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Appx RI B-8
Appendix C Removing/Reinstalling
the Board (PEI/PSI)
Removing the board (for GX110)
1.
After shutting down the CL-AP, make sure that the power to
the CL-PC has been turned OFF.
2.
Disconnect the CL-PC power cord from the power source.
3.
Remove the CL-PC cover.
4.
When the card cage is mounted, its PC board interferes with

a cable behind the hard disk. A workaround is to slightly pull
the disk unit on the front of the CL-PC before mounting the
card cage.
#1 [Push]
5.
Raise the lever in the direction of the arrow.
6.
Remove the card cage from the CL-PC.
7.
Remove the PEI or PSI board from the PCI slot in the card
cage.
5. Lever
7. PEI or PSI board

PCI slot
6. Card cage
T
ON
FR
Disk unit
CL-PC
#2 [Pull]
O
FR
00000353.EPS
NT
#1 [Push]
Hard disk rear cable
CL-PC
00000202.EPS
8.
Mount the card cage in the CL-PC.
9.
Return the lever to its original position.
10. Restore the disk unit.

11. Connect the CL-PC power cord to the power source.
12. Mount the CL-PC cover.
010-054-12
11.12.2004 FM4450 (ITC)
Appx RI C-1
Removing the board (for GX150, 50, 60, 280 SDT)
1.
Removing the board (for GX260, 270, 280 SMT, 620 and
Precision WS340, 330, 360, 370)
1.
2.
3.
Open the CL-PC cover.
2.
4.
Hold the card cage handle and remove the card cage.
3.
Dismount the CL-PC cover.
5.
Remove the PEI or PSI board from a PCI slot within the card
cage.
4.
Remove the support arm (GX260, 270, 280 SMT, WS340, 360,
370) or screw (WS330, 620) that fastens the PEI or PSI board
bracket.
Handle
u NOTE u
4. Card cage
Keep the screw thus removed because it may be necessary at later

steps.
5. PEI or PSI board
AGP slot
PEI or PSI board

slot connector
ON
FR
CL-PC
RI000022.EPS
6.
Mount the card cage in the CL-PC.
7.
Close the CL-PC cover.
8.
Connect the CL-PC power cord to the power source.
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
Appx RI C-2
5.
6.
Remove the PEI or PSI board from a PCI slot.

Bracket
Support arm
Mount a feeler bracket (a metal plate inserted into an empty

expansion card slot.)
Feeler bracket
PEI or PSI board

GX260,270,280 SMT
WS340,360,370
PEI or PSI
board slot
R 000202.EPS
PCI slot
Bracket
Screw
PEI or PSI board
PEI or PSI
board slot
7.
Use a support arm or screw to fasten the feeler bracket.
8.
Mount the CL-PC cover.
9.
WS330
PCI slot
Screw
PEI or PSI
board slot
PCI slot
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
Bracket
PEI or PSI board
WS620
RI000430.EPS
Appx RI C-3
Removing the board (for 745 DT, 745 MT, 755 DT, 755 MT,
760, Precision WS380, 390, T3400)
1.
2.
3.
Dismount the CL-PC cover.
4.
Unlatch the fixing latch (for 745 DT, 745 MT, 755 DT, 755 MT,
760, 780) or open the fixing door (for WS380, 390, T3400)
that secures the PEI or PSI board bracket.
5.

Bracket
Fixing latch or
fixing door
6.

expansion card slot).
Feeler bracket
RI000432.EPS
7.
With a fixing latch or fixing door, fasten the feeler bracket.
8.
Mount the CL-PC cover.
9.
PEI or PSI board

PEI or PSI
board slot
WS380, 390, T3400

745 MT, 755 MT, 760
PCI slot
Bracket
PEI or PSI
board slot
Fixing latch
PEI or PSI board
745 DT, 755 DT
PCI slot
RI000431.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI C-4
Removing the board (for NEC PC)
1.
2.
3.
Open the CL-PC left-side cover.
4.
Hold the card cage handle and remove the card cage.
u NOTE u
7.
Use a screw to fasten the feeler bracket.
8.
Mount the CL-PC left-side cover.
9.
Reinstalling the board (common to all models)

Reinstall the board by reversing the removal procedure.
Keep the screw thus removed because it may be necessary at later

steps.
5.

Screw
PEI or PSI board
Bracket
PEI or PSI
board slot
PCI slot
6.
00000513.EPS

expansion card slot.)
Feeler bracket
RI000202.EPS
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
Appx RI C-5
BLANK PAGE
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
Appx RI C-6
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Appx RI C-7
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Appx RI C-8
Appendix D Upgrading the AP

This appendix describes the CL-AP upgrade procedures.
IMPORTANT
NOTE
Before upgrading the AP, verify that there are no patients reserved for
exposure (no patients are registered in the examination queue window).
Also, check that no image is left in the QA queue or output queue.
Procedures (version upgrade to A11)

Upgrade the CL-AP to version A11 by performing the following steps:
Description
Step (correlating to the subsequent
titles prefixed by the mark)
Upgrade type
A00/01A11
A02/03
A11
A04 to A08
A11
A09
A11
A10
A11
Uninstalling the CL-AP
Uninstalling the old PEI board
(Only when the LP is used)

driver
Uninstalling the Built_in

Console software
Uninstalling FRIS Modules
Upgrading the MSDE Service

Pack (SQL7SP3) software
version
Installing the CL-AP
Installing the Built_in Console

software
*1, *3
Installing FRIS Modules
Installing the new PEI board

driver
10
Setting dummy nodes
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
(Only when the LP is used)
*2
*2
*1 Pay due attention to the versions of the Built_in

Console software and built-in type machine
(550xplus) software.
Built_in Console software version A07 is stored on
the CD for CL version A02/A03, and Built_in Console
software version A08 is stored on the CD for CL
version A04 to A08. A09 is stored on the CD for CL
version A09 and A10. A10 is stored on the CD for CL
version A11.
The built-in type machine software versions
compatible with Built_in Console version A10 are
indicated below. If necessary, upgrade the built-in
type main unit software.
5501: A13 5502D: A09 5501D: A09 XU-D1:
A07
*2 When version A04 is used, an error (error code:
30151 or 20110) occurs at CL startup if no node is
set for [NETWORK CONFIG] - [THIS HOST (IIP)].
If no node is set, be sure to set a dummy node.
If at least one node is already set, there is no need
to perform step 10.
*3 To use the CL with its software version A07 or later,
the Built_in Console software of version A08 or later
is required. Otherwise, an automation error will
occur.
Appx RI D-1
Procedures (version upgrade to V8.1(B))

NOTE
WARNING
When upgrading version A0010 to V8.1(B), follow Procedures

(version upgrade to A11) to upgrade the software version to A1118
and upgrade now the version to V4.0(B) or later. Then upgrade it finally
to V8.1(B).
Never change the software version from A or V.(B) to V1.0(C).

A new installation from the OS is also prohibited.
Procedures (version upgrade to A11)
Upgrade the CL-AP to version V8.1(B) by performing the following steps:

Upgrade type
Description
Step (correlating to the subsequent V1.0(B), V2.0(B) A11-18, V3.0(B), V5.0(B) V5.0(B), V6.0(B) V4.0(B) to V7.0(B) V4.0(B) to V7.0(B) V4.0(B) to V8.0(B)
titles prefixed by the mark)
V4.0(B)V5.0(B)*2 V6.0(B)
V3.0(B)*2
V7.0(B)
V7.1(B)*2
V8.0(B)*2
V8.1(B)*2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

Uninstalling
the old PEI board driver
Uninstalling the Built_in
Console software
*1

Upgrading the MSDE
Service Pack (SQL7SP4)
software version
Installing the Windows 2000
SP4 update program rollup
Installing the Built_in
Console software
*7
*7
*1
Adding Mammo QC menus

Setting 16bitLUT files
Uninstalling
the linking application
Installing
the linking application
Resetting
the USB device (BCR)
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
*2 The AP version is upgraded sequentially as follows:

A00 - A11 V1.0(B) V2.0(B) V3.0(B)
V4.0(B) V5.0(B) V6.0(B) V7.0(B)
V7.1(B) V8.0(B) V8.1(B)
*3 Make sure to upgrade the AP version only for
the equipment actually in use.
*4 Add Mammo QC menus to equipment units
where such menus are used.
*5 Use the DICOM Query/Retrieve function to
perform necessary settings on a location
where the reverse-conversion LUT is applied.

Installing the new PEI
board driver
Setting dummy nodes
Upgrading the POCKET
id Console-AP version
*1 Pay due attention to the versions of the

Built_in Console software and built-in type
machine (550xplus) software.
Built_in Console software version A08 is
stored on the CD for CL version A08. A09 is
stored on the CD for CL version A09 and
A10. A10 is stored on the CD for CL version
A11, V1.0(B) - V8.1(B).
The built-in type machine software versions
compatible with Built_in Console version A10
are indicated below. If necessary, upgrade
the built-in type main unit software.
5501:A13 5501D:A09, 5502D:A09 XU-D1:A07
*3
*4
*5
*4, *6
*5
*4
*5
*4
*5
*8
*8
*8
*8
*6 For an institution where Mammo QC menus

are newly added at the time when the
software version is upgraded to V7.1(B), if
the institution wishes to use the existing
menus continuously as they are, install first
the Mammo QC menus under V7.0(B)
environment and then upgrade it to V7.1(B).
(Upgrade the software version to V7.1(B)
and then add the Mammo QC menus again
with the use of the V7.1(B) CL-AP CD.)
*7 For the CL-AP of V7.1(B) or earlier installed
under the Windows 2000 environment, this
procedure must always be performed before
installing the CL-AP of V8.0(B) or later.
*8 Be sure to perform this procedure when the
Precise Enlargement software has been
installed with the V7.1(B) CL-AP.
Appx RI D-2
1.

Use the IIP Setup Tool on the CL-AP CD (2 of 2) to uninstall the CL-AP.
u NOTE u
u NOTE u

When uninstalling CL-AP of software version V7.0 (B) or later, have the
date/time display application (IIPDisDateTime) exit beforehand the task
manager (by calling up at the press of the <Ctrl>+<shift>+<Esc> keys).
NOTE
When installing the FSTD2009 Parameters, initialize the image
database from Service Utility mode and delete past study information
completely.
Installing the FSTD2009 Parameters will cancel the existing menu
information, causing then an inconsistency (in MPM codes or in menu
codes) to result with regard to the past study menu information
accumulated on the hard disk. This may disable the past studies to be
opened.
RI000097.EPS
NOTE
2.
For an institution where the actual exposure result data file output
function and/or mis-exposure comment input function is used, complete
the following steps and then perform uninstallation processing.
3.
Select the CL-AP (IIP in the window).

The selected item is then highlighted.
1. Start up the CL-AP.

2. Select User Utility from the
menu.
User Utility mode starts running.

3. Use the exposure result log storage function to save mis-exposure
log or exposure result log.
4. Shut down User Utility mode while holding down the <Shift> key.
4.
Click
5.
Click
u NOTE u
The message Prepare Installation appears here.
Note that the uninstallation process then starts, and not the
installation process as the message indicates.
In about one minute, the uninstall process ends.
6.
Close the Add/Remove Programs window.

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx RI D-3
Uninstalling the old PEI board driver
3.
Complete the following steps only when the LP is used:
1.
Choose
From the IIP Setup Tool menu window, type in the number
6 and then press the <Enter> key.
and then click

.
RI000097.EPS
RI000013.EPS
The Add/Remove Hardware Wizard window opens.
The Choose a Removal Task window opens.
4.
RI000012.EPS
2.
Click
Verify that
click
is chosen, and then

.
The Choose a Hardware Task window opens.
RI000014.EPS
The Installed Devices on Your Computer window opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI D-4
5.
Choose
and then click
7.
Click
RI000015.EPS
The Uninstall a Device window opens.
6.
Choose
and then click

.
RI000016.EPS
The Completing the Add/Remove Hardware Wizard window

opens.
RI000017.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI D-5
Uninstalling the Built_in Console software
1.
u NOTE u
After the console software is uninstalled, be sure to reinstall it.
If it is left uninstalled, the CL-AP does not start up.
1.
The Add/Remove Application window opens.
Enter 5 from the IIP Setup Tool menu and then press the
<Enter> key.
2.
2.
Select Risiip.
Risiip will be displayed in reverse video.
3.
Use the IIP Setup Tool menu to input 5 and press the
<Enter> key.
Click
3.
Click
InstallShield then opens to start uninstalling MSDE.

After a while, the Shared Component window opens.
RI000075.EPS
4.
Click
After about one minute, a window opens asking you to confirm

completion of removal processing.
RI000009.EPS
4.
Click
u NOTE u
If the Shared Component window (that asks if you wish to delete
the Shared File) is displayed during the uninstallation process, click
The uninstallation process ends and then a confirmation window

opens.
5.
Click
on the confirmation
window.
The system returns to the Add/Remove Programs window.
6.
, and then
Close the Add/Remove Programs window and then

Control Panel.
5.
Click
The system returns to the Add/Remove Application window.
6.
Exit the Add/Remove Application window.

The system then returns to the IIP Setup Tool menu.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI D-6
Upgrading the MSDE service pack (SQL7SP4) software

version
1.
4.

For Windows 2000
Right-click
in the task tray at the lower right corner of the
desktop, and then click MS SQL Server-Stop.
Double-click
on the desktop.
Double-click
For Windows XP
Select
from the
menu.
00000473.EPS
The SQL Server Service Manager window opens.
2.
Click
3.
Right-click
5.
.
in the task tray again, and then click Exit.
Double-click
6.
Select MSDE and then click
The Confirm File Deletion window opens.
00000474.EPS
The
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
icon disappears from the task tray.
Appx RI D-7
7.
Click
12. From the IIP Setup Tool menu window, type in 1 and
The installation shield starts running to initiate an MSDE

uninstallation.
After a while, the Remove Shared File? window opens.
then press the <Enter> key.
RI000097.EPS
The MSDE and service pack installation window opens.
00000475.EPS
8.
Click
9.
Click
Uninstallation ends in ten seconds.
10. Click
The system then returns to the Add/Remove Programs window.
11. Close the Add/Remove Programs window and Control

Panel.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI D-8
13. Enter 5 and press the <Enter> key.
The IIP Setup Tool menu ends.
15. Remove the CL-AP CD from the PC.

16. Restart the CL to implement the upgraded MSDE.
17. The username and login window will appear while the CL is
being restarted. Enter the password in one-byte characters.
R 000098.EPS
The service pack installation process will start. The MSDE

installation process will end in about ten minutes. (It takes 20 to 30
minutes depending on the number of images stored on the HD.)
Username : Administrator
Password : fcr-iip
RI000200.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx RI D-9
Installing the Windows 2000 SP4 update program rollup
1.
2.
Select [Run] from the
menu.
The Run window opens.
3.
Depending on the desired OS language, enter an execution

file name of the table below and then click
.
OS
languages
Japanese
English
Chinese
Simplified
Korean
Execution file names

D:\RollupKB\Japanese\KB891861-v2-x86-JPN.EXE
D:\RollupKB\English\KB891861-v2-x86-ENU.EXE
D:\RollupKB\ChineseSimplified\KB891861-v2-x86-CHS.EXE
D:\RollupKB\Korean\KB891861-v2-x86-KOR.EXE
Chinese
D:\RollupKB\ChineseTraditional\KB891861-v2-x86-CHT.EXE
Traditional
NOTE
Specify the media drive name for the underlined portion.
The installation window opens.
4.
Click [Next].
5.
Select [I Agree] and click [Next].

Installation processing starts and will complete in a few minutes.
6.
Restart the PC.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx RI D-10
NOTE
NOTE
For the CL-AP of V7.1(B) or earlier installed under the Windows 2000
environment, be sure to perform the procedure set forth in Installing
the Windows 2000 SP4 update program rollup and then install the
CL-AP of V8.0(B) or later.
1.
When upgrading a software version, choose the currently used

monitor resolution, otherwise a display error may result.
From the IIP Setup Tool main menu, type in 2 and then
The installer starts running and the IIP - InstallShield Wizard /
Welcome to the ... window opens.
00000178.EPS
2.
Click
The IIP Setup/Setup Type window opens.
3.
Select the monitor

type to be used.
RI000100.EPS
The IIP - InstallShield Wizard / Ready to Install the Program

window opens.
Select the monitor type to be used, and then click

.
When a 15" monitor with a touch panel or a 17" CRT monitor is used,
choose Color (1024 768).
When a 17 monitor with a touch panel is used, choose Color (1280
1024).
When the color Super Resolution LCD Monitor SL-IC300 is used,
choose Color (2048 1536).
When the Ikegami 1k landscape monitor is to be used, select Black/
White (1600 1200).
When the monochrome Super Resolution LCD Monitor SL-IC 300 is
used, choose Black/White (2048 1536).
When the monochrome LCD Monitor SL-IC 200 is used, choose Black/
White (1600 1200).
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
00000180.EPS
Appx RI D-11
4.
Click
6.
Press <Enter>.
The following window opens in several seconds.
The following window opens in several minutes (five to 30

minutes).
RI000026.EPS
u NOTE u
Although a message saying that Image Database does not exist.
RI0000468.AI
RI000032.EPS
5.
Press <Enter>.
RI0000469.AI
RI000027.EPS
u NOTE u
7.
Press <Enter>.
Although a message saying that Patient Database does not exist.

RI000028.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx RI D-12
8.
NOTES
u NOTE u
For software version V7.0(B) or later, perform all the steps from
10 through 17.
For software version V6.0(B) or earlier, it is not necessary to
perform steps 10 through 13. Proceed to step 14.
When the software version used is V2.0 (B) or later, the two windows
like those shown below open. Press the <Enter> key and ensure
that installation processing has ended. Proceed then to step 9.

For Windows 2000/XP
menu and click
For Windows Vista

Select All Programs - Accessories - Run... from the
RI000227.EPS
menu and click
RI000105.EPS
Installation processing completes showing then the

IIP - InstallShield Wizard / InstallShield Wizard Completed
window.
00000181.EPS
9.
Click
The system then returns to the IIP Setup Tool menu.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx RI D-13
11. Select the SetStudyAutoDeleteReg.bat file that is located

in the directory below on the CL-AP CD (2 of 2 when
V7.1(B) or later is used), and then click
.
D:\Tools\StudyAutoDelete\SetStudyAutoDeleteReg.bat

14. To use the Synapse servers Web Query function, perform
the procedure below.
NOTES
NOTE
Specify the media drive name for the underlined section.
RI0000489.ai
The DiskUsageLimitSize Setting Tool window opens.
When the CL-AP was installed after the Synapse Client software
had been installed, skip steps I. and II. below.
Skip steps I. and II. below when installing the CL-AP of V8.0(B) or
later.
I. When the Synapse Client software is installed, uninstall it.
Software
II. Install the Synapse Client software.
CL + Synapse Server (Web Query) in OE19: Connecting
the CL to Other Equipment
15. To use the standard markers (applicable only in Japan),

perform the procedure below.
For how to install the standard markers (applicable only in

Japan), see Installation of Standard Markers [Applicable only
in Japan] under FR17: Function-specific Reference.
RI0000490.ai
12. When Windows XP is used for the OS, enter 1 and press 2
when Windows Vista is used for the OS. Press 3 when a
RAID-based PC is used for the CL. Press then the <Enter>
key to determine the entry.
NOTE
For software version V7.0(B), the 2) Set DiskUsageLimitSize for
60GB option does not appear.
16. To install the FSTD2009 Parameters, perform the procedure

below.
For how to install the FSTD2009 Parameters, see

5.2 Replacing the Menu Database under RI: Reinstalling
the Software.
17. When the PDI option is already installed, change the version
of the Application Used to Create This Disk (included in
the README.TXT file stored on the CD-R) to 8.01.0000.
For how to edit the README.TXT file, see 2.7 Editing the
Institution Information in CL+PDI (Portable Data for
Imaging) under OE22: Connecting the CL to Other
Equipment.
RI0000476.ai
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Appx RI D-14
Installing the Built_in Console software
1.
When the installation procedure ends, a message appears to

indicate the completion of installation.
From the IIP Setup Tool menu, type in 4 and then press
the <Enter> key.
RI000029.EPS
4.
Click
A dialog box opens, prompting you to restart the PC.
5.
6.
Click
RI000097.EPS
The Built_in Console Setup window opens.
2.
Click
.
RI000030.EPS
3.
Click
The PC restarts.
RI000031.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx RI D-15
1.
4.
Click
The following warning window opens:
Start IIP Setup Tool and then choose 10) Install FRIS
Modules.
The [Risiip Setup] window opens.
RI000045.EPS
RI000042.EPS
2.
5.
Click
Click
A window opens, prompting you to start the installation.
RI000046.EPS
RI000043.EPS
3.
6.
Click
Click
The [Risiip - Choose Program Group] window opens.
RI000047.EPS
RI000044.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx RI D-16
7.
Click
RI000048.EPS
8.
Click
9.
If the Version Conflict window opens again, click
.
If the same window still opens again, click
repeatedly
until a message appears to indicate the installation is completed.
10. Click
on the window that opens at step 9.
above.
RI000049.EPS
The installation process for the FRIS Modules is thus completed.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx RI D-17
Upgrading the POCKET id Console-AP
Installing the new PEI board driver

The new PEI board driver is automatically installed after the PC is
restarted.
1.
The CL-AP starts up in about two minutes after a PC restart.

While the CL-AP startup process in progress, verify that the
new PEI board driver is installed (the following window
opens and remain displayed for several seconds during the
startup process).
The POCKET id Console-AP can be upgraded by uninstalling the

POCKET id Console-AP and then installing it again.
1.
Uninstall the POCKET id Console-AP.

For the procedure for uninstalling the POCKET id ConsoleAP, see 10. POCKET id Console-AP in Appendix A
Uninstalling the APs under RI: Reinstalling the Software.
2.
Install the POCKET id Console-AP.

For the procedure for installing the POCKET id Console-AP,
see 2.6 Installing and Setting Up the POCKET id Console
Application under OE18: Connecting the CL to Other
Equipment.
Adding a Mammo QC menu

RI000025.EPS
2.
Deliver a film output signal to the LP and verify that the LP

generates a proper film output.
If the LP does not generate a film output, see 3.2 Typical
Troubleshooting.
Setting dummy nodes

If no nodes have been set up for Setup Configuration Item
NETWORK CONFIG THIS HOST(IIP) in the Service Utility mode,
the DICOM Print SCU needs to be set up as the dummy node.
It is not necessary to install the DICOM Print option key.
For the setup procedure, see 2.1.4 Setup of Information on This
Equipment for the DICOM Print Function under OE5: Connecting
the CL to Other Equipment.
When the software version was upgraded to V5.0(B) or V7.1(B) or later,

use the CL-AP CD (2 of 2) to add a Mammo QC menu properly to a
device where the Mammo QC menus are to be used.
NOTE
To newly apply the Mammo QC function based on the existing menus
after the software version was upgraded to V7.1(B) or later, add the
Mammo QC menus with the use of the V7.0(B) CL-AP CD and then
follow the steps below.
1.

NOTE
RI0000429.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx RI D-18
2.
4.
Type in 7 and press the <Enter> key.

Input the item number of a language you want to install and

u NOTE u
A dialog box like that shown below may appear. In such cases,
click [OK] to proceed to the subsequent step.
00000301.EPS
3.
To use DICOM MG Storage (digital mammography option),

type in 2 and 1 for other cases. Press then the <Enter>
key.
The menu of languages that can be installed appears.
RI0000475.ai
Scrolling up on the installation main menu, appearing after the

above dialog box was closed, will display the Installation Failed.
message. This poses no problem and you can proceed to the next
step.
A window opens prompting you to select whether or not to use the
FNC (Flexible Noise Control processing) parameter.
u NOTE u
When new Mammo QC menus are to be added from V7.1(B) or
later at an institution where the FSTD2009 Parameters were
adopted, installation processing completes without displaying the
FNC parameter selection window. (FNC parameter installation
processing is not performed.)
RI0000427.EPS
u NOTE u
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx RI D-19
When English (U.S.) was selected for the language to be installed
Setting up a 16bitLUT file

A 10bitLUT file became now unavailable with software version V5.0 (B)
or later. For this reason, you have to set up a 16bitLUT file using either
of the following procedures.
When using a file to be installed with V5.0 (B) or later
RI0000386.EPS
When a language other than English (U.S.) was selected
Newly installing V5.0 (B) or later or upgrading a previous version to

V5.0 (B) or later will cause the following files to be installed on the CL.
Folder location : C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\CrtLut folder
Files
: mono_PL300_LL_16.lut (for 300 candelas of
maximum monitor luminace)
mono_PL400_LL_16.lut (for 400 candelas of
maximum monitor luminace
Rename the installed files as follows.
Filename
: SCP AE name + .lut
R 0000384.EPS
5.
Input the item number for an FNC parameter you want to

use and press the <Enter> key.
The system returns then to the IIP Setup Tool main menu. This
completes addition of a Mammo QC exposure menu.
When converting a previously used LUT file to a 16bit file

To convert a previously used 10bitLUT file to a 16bitLUT file, use the
LUT bit conversion tool.
For details of the LUT bit conversion tool, see 1. LUT Bit
Conversion Tool in Display Gradation Correction Setup under
FR5: Function-specific Reference.
When a reverse-conversion LUT is used for the DICOM

Query/Retrieve function
With software version V7.0 (B) or later, the previously used 10bitLUT
file cannot be used for ReverseLUT. For this reason, use CreateLUT.
exe to create a 16bitLUT file so that it is set up for ReverseLUT.
For details of creation of a 16bitLUT file, see Setup of LUT
Reverse-conversion Processing under FR14: Function-specific
Reference.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx RI D-20
Uninstalling the linking application

u NOTE u
When the Precise Enlargement application software has been
installed with the V7.1(B) CL-AP, make sure to upgrade the software
version as follows.
Precise Enlargement application software: From V1.0 to V2.1
Installing the linking application

Perform version upgrade installation processing for the targeted linking
application.
Precise Enlargement application software

For details of the installation procedure, see Precise Enlargement
Function under OE24: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment.
Uninstall the linking application only when reinstalling or upgrading this

application software. No support is provided to only uninstallation of
any linking application.
For details of the uninstallation procedure, see 14. Precise
Enlargement Software in Appendix A Uninstalling the APs
under RI: Reinstalling the Software.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx RI D-21
Resetting the USB device (BCR)

When upgrading the CL from V8.0(B) or before to V8.1(B) or later, the
driver settings for the barcode reader needs to be configured again.
For the detailed resetting porocedures,
see 4.6 Changing the Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader
Driver Software under MT: Machine Troubleshooting.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Appx RI D-22
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx RI D-23
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx RI D-24
Appendix E Setup for Security Enhancement
Appendix E Setup for Security

Enhancement
Replacing the default password with a new password
1.
To provide CL security enhancement, complete the following three

setup procedures.
Windows security
Microsoft
Windows 2000

Changing the setup so that the computer prompts for password input
at logon
Defining the minimum character count for the password
Professional
Logon Information
You are logged on as xxxxx\xxxxxxxx.
Logon Date:
xx/xx/xx xx:xx:xx
1. For Windows 2000/XP
Use the Task Manager to close an application that is not responding.
NOTE
as those displayed by Windows XP.
Windows 2000 and Windows XP, follow the procedure specific to the
used OS to perform necessary settings.
Settings performed for password change and prompt for password
input at login will not start up the CL automatically. To have it start up
automatically, it is necessary to input the user name and the password
on the Windows initial screen.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Simultaneously press the [Ctrl], [Alt], and [Delete] keys.
Lock Computer
Log Off...
Shut Down
Change Password...
Task Manager
Cancel
RI000078.EPS
2.
Click the [Change Password...] button.

The Change Password window opens.
Appx RI E-1
3.
From the Change Password window, perform the following

setup steps.
Change Password
Changing the setup so that the computer prompts for

password input at logon
1.
Microsoft
Windows 2000
For Windows 2000
Professional
User name:
Administrator
Log on to:
clxxxxxxxx
Click
, point to Settings, and then click Control
Panel.
Old Password:
For Windows XP
II
New Password:
Select
III
Confirm New Password:
from the
menu.

OK
Cancel
RI000079.EPS
I. Enter the currently used password (fcr-iip by default).

II. Enter a new password consisting of no more than seven
characters.
III. Enter the new password again for confirmation.
4.
Click
2.
Double-click
The Users and Passwords window opens.
3.
Check Users must enter a user name and password to use

this computer. ( ).
A window opens for password change confirmation.
5.
Click
You are then returned to the Windows Security window.
6.
Click
RI000080.EPS
4.
Click
The system then returns to the Control Panel.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI E-2
Defining the minimum character count for the password
1.
4.
Set the number of password characters to 7.
Open Control Panel.

Double-click
and then
The Local Security Settings window opens.
RI000082.EPS
5.
Click the
mark for
.
and then click
The right-hand pane shows the password policy settings.
3.
Double-click
You are then returned to the Local Security Settings window.
RI000081.EPS
2.
Click
6.
Close the Local Security Settings window.
7.
The Local Security Policy Setting window opens.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Appx RI E-3
2. For Windows Vista
3.
NOTE
From the Change Password window that opens, perform

the following setup steps.
Settings performed for password change and prompt for password input
at login will not start up the CL automatically. To have it start up
automatically, it is necessary to input the user name and the password
on the Windows initial screen.
I
II
III
1.
Simultaneously press the [Ctrl], [Alt], and [Delete] keys.
2.
Click the [Change Password...] button.
DCL8A005.ai
I. Enter the currently used password (fcr-iip by default).

II. Enter a new password consisting of no more than seven
characters.
III. Enter the new password again for confirmation.
4.
Click
Your password has been changed. is displayed.
5.
DCL8A008.ai
Click [OK].
The Change Password window opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI E-4
Prompting the user for password input at logon
1.
From the
menu, input control userpasswords2 in
the search box and press the <Enter> key.
DCL8A006.ai
2.
Checkmark User must enter a user name and password to

use this computer. (
)
DCL8A007.ai
3.
Click
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI E-5
Limiting the length of input password to be more than a

certain number of characters
1.
Sequentially double-click Control Panel,
then
4.
Set the number of characters used for password input to 7.
and
The Local Security Policy window opens.
DCL8A004.ai
5.
Click
The system returns to the Local Security Policy window.
6.
Close the Local Security Policy window.
7.
DCL8A003.ai
2.
Click
mark to the left of

.
and then
Several setup items related to the password policy appear in the

right-hand side pane of the window.
3.
Double-click
The Minimum password length Properties window opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI E-6
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Appx RI E-7
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Appx RI E-8
Appendix F Installing the Video Board Driver
Appendix F Installing the Video

Board Driver
The installation steps for the Matrox Millennium G450 video board driver
(hereinafter abbreviated to the G450 video driver) are described below:
Connecting the jig monitor
Installing the video driver
1.
Insert the Matrox Millennium G450 CD-ROM into the CDROM drive.
2.
Double-click
, and
in
order named.
The setup program starts running.
Installing the video driver
3.
Select a language and then click
Setting the resolution
u NOTES u
The G450 video driver can be installed only when the PC for the

employed CR CL MA (mammography CL) accepts the G450 video
board.

Connecting the jig monitor

Since the Ikegami MDM2130 monitor does not support the VGA mode,
no screen indication can be obtained during video driver installation.
Therefore, the multiscan VGA monitor (having a display resolution of
1600 1200 or 1280 1024 and a refresh frequency provided by a
horizontal frequency of 75 Hz and a vertical frequency of 93 kHz) is
furnished as a jig. Connect this jig to the video board connector to which
the Ikegami monitor is currently connected.
RI000085.EPS
A window opens to display the information about a supported

device.
RI000093.EPS
010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
Appx RI F-1
4.
Click
Setting the resolution
twice.
The installation process starts.

Upon completion of installation, a window opens to indicate the
end of installation.
1.
Right-click the desktop. When the right-clicked menu

opens, choose Properties.
2.
Choose the Settings tab and then click
RI000094.EPS
5.
Click
A window opens, prompting you to restart the PC.
6.
Remove the video board driver CD-ROM from the CD-ROM

drive.
7.
Click
The PC restarts.
When the PC is restarted, the Log On to Windows window
opens.
8.
Enter fcr-iip in the password field and then click

.
u NOTE u
The User name field reads Administrator by default. Leave this
user name entry unchanged because you have to log onto
Windows 2000 as Administrator.
RI000095.EPS
The Matrox G450 monitor setup window (main window) opens.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Appx RI F-2
3.
Choose the Monitor Settings tab and then click
7.
Click
You are then returned to the previous window.
8.
Click
The Matrox Monitor Wizard - Save Changes window opens.
9.
Turn ON the
radio button (
and then click
),
RI000087.EPS
The Matrox Monitor Wizard - Monitor List window opens.
4.
Click the
5.
Choose
6.
Choose 1600 1200 32-bit 75 Hz and then click

.
mark for
.
and then click
The Matrox Power Desk window opens.

010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
RI000096.EPS
You are then returned to the main window.
10. Click
You are then returned to the Display Properties window.
RI000089.EPS
Appx RI F-3
11. Perform the following monitor setup steps and then click
.
15. If the Ikegami monitor is not connected, disconnect the jig

monitor and then connect the Ikegami monitor.
16. If the screen area setting is not 1600 1200, open the
Display Properties window and change the setting to

1600 1200.
u NOTE u
(Colors: True Color (32-bit))
If a screen area setting of 1280 1024 pixels is selected in an

earlier step in accordance with the jig monitor specifications, be
sure to change the setting to 1600 1200 pixels after Ikegami
monitor connection.
The Ikegami monitor is capable of displaying 1280 1024 pixels;
however, it is presumed that the application software displays
1600 1200 pixels.
(Screen area: 1280 1024 or 1600 1200 pixels)
u NOTE u
As the screen area, choose either 1280 1024 pixels or
1600 1200 pixels depending on the maximum resolution of the jig
monitor. If the screen area setting exceeds the maximum resolution
of the jig monitor, the jig monitor displays nothing. If such a
situation occurs, disconnect the jig monitor and connect a monitor
that supports the selected screen area setting.
You are returned to the Display Properties window.
12. Click
The Monitor Settings window opens.
13. Click
You are returned to the Display Properties window.
14. Click
You are then returned to the desktop screen.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Appx RI F-4
Appendix G Reinstalling the Software (NEC PC)
Appendix G Reinstalling the

Software (NEC PC)
1. Installation Flow
Described herein are the procedures used to install the CL-AP from the
OS. When doing so, observe the installation flow shown at the right.
NOTE
XG-1 RU
5000plus
356
357
359
362
363
364
366
367
368
370
371
372
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
XG-1 RU
FCR5000, etc.
CR-IR 356
CR-IR 357
CR-IR 359
CR-IR 362
CR-IR 363
CR-IR 364
CR-IR 366
CR-IR 367
CR-IR 368
CR-IR 370
CR-IR 371
CR-IR 372
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI G-1
Installation flow
CL-Config and RU-Config(*1) backup
2.
Installing and Setting Up the OS
3.
Setting Up the Monitor
4.

See Chapter 5 under
MU: Maintenance
Utility.
7.
Installing the CL Components
8.
Installing the Standard Key
9.
****BLANK****
10. Installing the Option Key

Installing the Screen Saver
21. Setting the Virtual Memory Size
Installing MSDE and Its Service Pack
6.
Only when remote maintenance

mode is used.
*1 For the 5000 plus series and CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X, see the individual
Service Manual to save Config backup.
For details of the RU master IIP, see 6. RU-CL N:N Connection
Function Overview under MD: Machine Description.
When multiple XG-1 RUs or

5000plus or 356/357/359/36X/
37X are connected.
11. Installing the AP Key and Setting the

User Interface
13. Optimizing the Screen Display (Setting
the LUT file)
17. CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X Settings
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
For RU-CL 1:1 connection:

Essential
For RU-CL N:N connection:
Only for RU master IIP
Appx RI G-2

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
The Windows XP installation procedure is explained as follows.
372
NOTES
Before installing the OS, jot down the CL host name, IP address,
subnet mask, and other relevant information. These items of
information will be called for during OS installation.
The 5000 plus is abbreviated hereinafter simply IR.
u Property sheet
OS installation drive
Partition/format
Regional settings
Name
Organization
Product key
Computer name
and password
Computer name
Password
Protocol used
IP address
Network settings
Subnet mask
Domain or
workgroup
This computers Automatically logged

user settings (auto on user name
logon settings)
Password
Display color
Display area
Monitor settings
MS-IME setting
(Japanese version only)
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
C:\
C drive only (no other partitions will
be created)/NTFS
Indicated on the right-hand side of
the PC main unit cover.
The default settings when shipped
from factory.
CR-IR346CL
: CLXXXXXXXX
CR-IR346CL (Lite) : CRXXXXXXXX
CR-IR348CL (Plus) : CPXXXXXXXX
(XXXXXXXX: Manufacture No.)
*Take notes accordingly if changed.
fcr-iip
TCP/IP
factory.
factory.
Used by the workgroup.
(The group name remains the
default.)
Administrator
fcr-iip
True Color (24 or 32bits)
1024768 (15inch LCD/17inch CRT)
Install the OS in the following cases:

When the HDD is replaced.
When an error occurs with the OS.
Have the following ready for use when installing the OS.
NEC Recovery CD-ROM (WinXP Professional Reinstalling DISK#1#3
(3 CDs) included in the PC package)
IMPORTANT
Before formatting the HDD, make backup copies of image data, if
there are any, as required by the user.
Make backup copies of the config data (CL-Config and RU-Config)
that store various settings of the CL and RU, ahead of time.
User the User Utility function to make backup copies of user setting
information (by placing checkmarks to all items).
Removing the board and peripheral devices
1.
Remove the PEI or PSI board from the PCI slots, if it is

mounted.
For the board removal procedure, see Appendix C Removing/
2.
Remove all peripheral devices, such as Barcode Reader,

Magnetic Card Reader and others, from the USB port.
NOTES
If OS installation processing is performed with the PEI or PSI board
left mounted on the PCI slots, use the Device Manager to delete the
Other Devices file after the OS has been installed accordingly.
Checking the PEI01 board device driver in 3.2 Typical
Troubleshooting
If OS installation processing is performed with the peripheral devices
left connected to the USB port, a different driver will be installed, same
as the case with the PEI or PSI board.
The toolbar is stored in the taskbar.
Appx RI G-3
8.
Installing the OS
1.
Turn the monitor and PC power switch ON.
The PC restarts. DISK#1 installation processing will then start and

a window like that shown below will open after about five minutes.
The PC will start running.
2.
Make sure that Yes has been selected and press the
<Enter> key.
When F2 SETUP appears at the upper left corner of the

window, press the <F2> key.
Span Volume [1] Done

Insert next media and press enter to continue...
NOTE
The setup window (PhenixBIOS Setup Utility) opens.
3.
Select the Boot tab.
4.
Move CD-ROM Drive to the top.
CD-ROM Drive
+Removable Devices
+Hard Drive
IBA 4.1.06 Slot 0200
OK
9.
Insert Recovery CD DISK#2 into the CD-ROM drive and

DISK#2 installation processing will then start and a window like
that shown below will open after about five minutes.
Span Volume [2] Done
Insert next media and press enter to continue...
5.
Insert the Recovery CD DISK#1 into the CD-ROM drive.
6.
Press the <Esc> key.
OK
Cancel
FileName?
RI000235.EPS
10. Insert Recovery CD DISK#3 into the CD-ROM drive and

The Exit menu will open.
Check to see that Exit Saving Changes has been selected

The Setup Confirmation window opens.
Setup Confirmation
DISK#3 installation processing will then start and a window like

that shown below will open after about two minutes.
finish to load MCF.GHO .

D:\>
RI000236.EPS
Save configuration changes and exit now?

[Yes]
FileName?
RI000234.EPS
RI000231.EPS
7.
Cancel
[No]
11. Remove Recovery CD DISK#3 and turn the PC power switch

OFF.
RI000232.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI G-4
12. Turn then the PC power switch ON.
The Windows XP Professional Setup window will open.
13. Select I accept this agreement (
) and click
Uninstalling the launcher
1.
Click
at the upper right corner of the desktop.
The Launcher Maintenance Screen window opens.
OS installation processing will finish, starting then Windows XP.
RI000237.EPS
2.
Click
An uninstallation confirmation window opens.
RI000238.EPS
3.
Click
Launcher uninstallation processing will finish and the system then

returns to the desktop.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI G-5
5.
Setting the computer name
1.
Enter a computer name (host name).
menu.
2.
Click
3. Double-click
The System Proterties window opens.
4.
RI000242.EPS
Click the Computer Name tab and then
Default settings are as follows.
(CL is in uppercase. XXXXXXXX represents the
product number.)
(CR is in uppercase. XXXXXXXX represents the
product number.)
(CP is in uppercase. XXXXXXXX represents the
product number.)
6.
Click
7.
Click

RI000249.EPS
The Computer Name Changes window opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI G-6
6.
1.
menu.
Select
following settings.
) and perform the
2.
Double-click
The Network Connections window opens.
3.
Double-click
II

RI000243.EPS
4.
Click
I. Enter an IP address (e.g.: 172.16.1.20).

II. Enter a subnet mask (e.g.: 255.255.0.0).
5.
Select
, and click
7.
Click
8.
Click
9.
Click
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI G-7
Setting the network speed
1.
Setting the date and time

menu.
1.
Click
2.
3.
Click the Speed tab and select

(
Double-click
The Date and Time Properties window opens.
The Intel PROSet window opens.
3.
menu.
2.
Confirm the date and time.

Confirm the date.
).
NOTE
The CR-IR346RU (XG-1 RU) supports only 100Mbps half duplex.
Be sure to 100Mbps half duplex.
Confirm the time.
4.
RI000244.EPS
Select the Time Zone tab and confirm the time zone.
RI000239.EPS
4.
Click
Confirm the time zone.
RI000245.EPS
5.

5.
Click
to close the Control Panel.

010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI G-8
Avoiding a password input prompt when exiting from

the suspend mode
5.
following procedure as required.
1.
Uncheck
).
menu.

RI000250.EPS
2.
Double-click
6.
7.
Set System Standby to Never.
The Power Option Properties window opens.
3.
Click

RI000246.EPS
4.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI G-9
Determining a character to be used as a decimal point
4.
Specify . (period) as the character to be used as a decimal point.

If anything other than a period is specified for that, an error occurs when
you select an image distribution destination with the QA operation.
1.
Change what is entered in the Decimal symbol field to a

period.
If, as a result of the above change, what is entered in the Digit
grouping symbol field is the same as that in the Digital symbol field,
change it in the Digit grouping symbol field accordingly.
menu.
2.
Double-click
3.
Make sure that the Regional Options tab has been

selected and click
.
RI000248.EPS
RI000247.EPS
5.
Click
6.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)

Appx RI G-10
Settings for automatic synchronization (to be made on

RAID PC only)
3.
Settings may be made so that synchronization is automatically

performed on a regular basis.
1.
From the
I
II
menu, select Promise Array
RI000397.EPS
Management and then Local PAM.
I. Enter administrator.
II. Enter fcr-iip.
The Promise Array Management window opens.
4.
Click
You are logged in to Promise Array Management.
5.
Drag the scroll bar on the right side of the window down to
the bottom.
RI000395.EPS
2.
Right-click CLXXXXXXXX (XXXXXXXX represents a

product number), and select Login.
RI000396.EPS
The login dialog opens.
RI000398.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI G-11
6.
Performing synchronization (on RAID PC only)

I
II
III
When you have reinstalled the OS, it is necessary to perform

synchronization manually for the first time only.
1.
On the menu tree, double-click CRXXXXXXXX FASTTRAK - Controller in this order, and then select
Ary1.
RI000399.EPS
I. Checkmark Enabled.
II. Set the time at which automatic synchronization should take
place, according to the demand of the hospital.
III. If you have changed the set time at which automatic
synchronization is to be performed from the default value to
some other value, click Change.
RI000400.EPS
2.
Click the [Start] button under Synchronization.
RI000401.EPS
A confirmation dialog opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI G-12
3.
Click
Synchronization starts.
REFERENCES
During the synchronization process, the progress status of
synchronization is displayed on the tree menu.
RI000402.EPS
If the PC shuts down while synchronization is in progress, the

synchronization will resume once the PC has restarted.
A synchronization process will take 1 to 2 hours if the PC is not being
used, and 5 to 6 hours if the PC is in use.
4.
When the synchronization process completes, click

close the Promise Array Management window.
to
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI G-13
3. Setting Up the Monitor

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
7. Installing the CL Components

359
370
371
372
For details of monitor settings, see 3. Setting Up the Monitor

4. Installing MSDE and Its Service Pack

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
For how to install MSDE and its Service Pack, see 4. Installing
MSDE/Database Management System and Its Service Pack under
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
For how to install various CL components, see 7. Installing the

CL Components under RI: Reinstalling the Software.
8. Installing the Standard Key

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
For how to install Standard Key, see 8. Installing the Standard

Key under RI:Reinstalling the Software.
9. ****BLANK****
5. Installing the CL-AP

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
357
368
359
370
371
372

For the CL-AP installation procedure, see 5.1 Installing the
CL-AP under RI: Reinstalling the Software.
10. Installing the Option Key

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
For the Option Key installation procedure, see 10. Option Key
Installation under RI: Reinstalling the Software.

For how to replace the menu database, see 5.2 Replacing the
Menu Database under RI: Reinstalling the Software.
11. Installing the AP Key and Setting the

User Interface
XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
For details of AP Key installation and user interface settings, see

11. AP Key Installation under RI: Reinstalling the Software.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI G-14

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370

371
372
For initialization of the image database, see 12. Initializing the

Image Database under RI: Reinstalling the Software.
13. Optimizing the Screen Display (Setting

the LUT file)
XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
For optimization of the screen display (setting the LUT file), see
13. Display Optimization (LUT file setting) under

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
For how to restore the CL-Config, see 14. Restoring the

CL-Config under RI: Restoring the Software.
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
Perform the following procedure to prepare on the CLs HDD the FTP
server to be viewed by the XG-1 RU and CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X.
The FTP server can be created by installing the IIS Manager.
u NOTE u
perform necessary settings here only for the CL that will serve as the
RU Master IIP.
REFERENCE
The IIS Manager is a program used for creating an FTP server and
comes with the OS (Window XP).
1.
371
9000
364
menu.
372
2.
Double-click
The Add or Remove Program window opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI G-15
3.
7.
Click Add/Remove Windows Components.
Click
The screen returns to the Control Panel.
8.

RI000240.EPS
The Windows Components Wizard window opens.
RI000241 .EPS
4.
Check
) and click
.
The Internet Information Service (IIS) window opens.
5.
Check
) and click
.
The system returns to the Windows Components Wizard window.
6.
Click
IIS Manager installation processing will start.

010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI G-16

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370

371
372
For CR-IR346RU settings, see 16. CR-IR346RU Settings under

17. CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X Settings

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
For CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X settings, see 17. CR-IR35X/36X/37X

Settings under RI: Reinstalling the Software.
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
For details of settings necessary for installation of Windows XP

Service Pack2, see 20. Settings Necessary for Installation of
Windows XP Service Pack2 under RI: Reinstalling the Software.
21. Setting the Virtual Memory Size

For how to set up the virtual memory size, see 21. Checking the
Virtual Memory Size under RI: Reinstalling the Software.

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
For how to set up the event log, see 22. Setting the Event Log
371
372
For details of NetMeeting, see 18. Setting Up NetMeeting

[Reference] under RI: Reinstalling the Software.

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
For details of IIS network virus protection, see 19. IIS Network
Virus Protection under RI: Reinstalling the Software.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI G-17
BLANK PAGE
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI G-18
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Appx RI G-19
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Appx RI G-20
Appendix H Installing CL-AP V3.1

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
Service pack installation
1.
Insert the V3.1 CD into the PC.

The Main/Option Menu window opens.
371
372
NOTE
Install CL-AP software version V3SP1 (hereinafter referred to as V3.1)
as a service pack for version V3.0.
Installing V3.1 will make it possible for you to use on the CL additional
functions, such as supports provided to Portuguese, GPR processing in
RU 1:1 configuration and others.
Described herein is the V3.1 installation procedure.
Preparations for installation (exiting the CL-AP)
21000001.EPS
Prior to installing V3.1, exit the CL-AP by following the steps below.
1.
2.
Turn ON the power to the PC.
After completion of installation, the system returns to the Main/

Option Menu window.
Windows will be up and running. The CL-AP will also be up and

running in about one minute, and the CLs initial window opens.
2.
After the CLs initial window has opened, check that no

study is left in WL, QA and Queue tabs. If there is any study
remaining unprocessed, perform the following.
Finish or delete a study in the Local WL tab.
Finish a study in the QA tab.
Output or delete a study in the Queue tab.
3.
When the exit window opens at the click of

click
3.
To install various functions offered by V3.1, see

Installation of functions described on the next page.
To quit, type in 0 and press the <Enter> key.
4.
while holding down the <Shift> key.
The CL-AP exits and the system returns to the desktop.
REFERENCE
If you click [OK] without holding down the <Shift> key, both the
CL-AP and Windows exit.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx RI H-1
4.
Installation of functions
For functions such as support provided to Portuguese, install only
necessary functions to suit installation sites, after V3.1 has been
installed accordingly.
Type in a number for the Imager Reader to be used and

The Select Image Processing Parameter Type window opens.
For installation of environment settings for Portuguese
1.
Type in 10 on the Main/Option Menu window and click the

<Enter> key.
The Menu Database Installation Menu (Select Variation) window
opens.
21000002.EPS
2.

The Menu Database Installation Menu (Select Locale) window
opens.
21000003.EPS
3.

The Image Reader Type Menu window opens.
21000005.EPS
5.
When FNC parameters (for optionally available Flexible

Noise Control processing) are not to be used, type in 1,
and 2 when they are to be used. Press then the <Enter>
key.
After completion of installation, the system returns to the Main/
Option Menu window.
When using the Toshiba RIS connection function (applicable

only in Japan)
For details of the Toshiba RIS connection function, see
OE21 CL+T-RIS (Ordering) under OE: Connecting the CL to
Other Equipment.
When using the function to display information specific to

veterinary clinics (applicable only in Japan)
NOTE
Whenever an optionally available function has been installed as above,
restart your PC.
21000004.EPS
010-054-15
11.30.2005 FM4760 (ITC)
Appx RI H-2
Verification necessary after completion of installation

processing
After completion of installation processing, perform the following
procedure to make sure that CL-AP V3.1 has been installed
appropriately.
Select Programs from the Start menu to make sure that the CL
version is V3.1.
Restart your PC to make sure that the software version displayed at
the lower right corner of the CLs initial window is V3.1.
010-054-15
11.30.2005 FM4760 (ITC)
Appx RI H-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-15
11.30.2005 FM4760 (ITC)
Appx RI H-4
Appendix I RAID-related Settings
Appendix I
RAID-related Settings
1. Setting to Enable the RAID Mode
1.
Turn ON the monitor display and the PC.
2.
When the F2 SETUP indication appears in the upper-right

corner of the window, press the <F2> key.
The PC starts up.
5.
Select RAID On and press the <Enter> key.
ystem
rives
skette Drive
rive 0 SATA-0
rive 1 SATA-1
rive 2 SATA-2
rive 3 SATA-3
rive 4 SATA-4
rive 5 SATA-5
ATA Operation
SATA Operation
RAID Autodetect / AHCI
RAID Autodetect / ATA
NOTE
6.
Press the <ESC> key.
If the <F2> key is pressed too late, the setup window fails to open.
In such a case, restart the PC and perform step 2 again.
7.
Select Save/Exit and press the <Enter> key.
Select Drives and press the <Enter> key.

System
Drives
Onboard Devices
Video
Performance
Combination
RI0000405.EPS
Exit
3.
RAID On
Remain in Setup
Save/Exit
Discard/Exit
RI0000406.EPS
The PC restarts.
RI0000403.EPS
4.
Select SATA Operation and press the <Enter> key.

System
Drives
Diskette Drive
Drive 0 SATA-0
Drive 1 SATA-1
Drive 2 SATA-2
Drive 3 SATA-3
Drive 4 SATA-4
Drive 5 SATA-5
SATA Operation
SMART Beporting
RI0000404.EPS
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
Appx RI I-1
2. Creating a RAID Level-1 Configuration
1.
4.
Select RAID1 (Mirror) and press the <Enter> key.

[ CREATE VOLUME MENU ]
When the following message appears, press the <Ctrl> + <I>

key combination.
Name:
RAID Level:
Disks:
Strip Size:
Capacity:
Press <CTRL-I> to enter Configuration Utility...
RAID_Volume0
RAID1(Mirror)
Select Disks
N/A
149.0 GB
RI0000407.EPS
2.
Create Volume
Select Create RAID Volume and press the <Enter> key.

[ MAIN MENU ]
1.
2.
3.
4.
RI0000410.EPS
5.
Create RAID Volume

Delete RAID Volume
Reset Disks to Non-RAID
Exit

Name:
RAID Level:
Disks:
Strip Size:
Capacity:
RI0000408.EPS
3.
Make sure that the capacity is set to the default value

(maximum allowable size), and press the <Enter> key.
Make sure that RAID_Volume0 is being selected, and

Create Volume

Name:
RAID Level:
Disks:
Strip Size:
Capacity:
RAID_Volume0
RAID1(Mirror)
Select Disks
N/A
149.0 GB
RI0000411.EPS
RAID_Volume0
RAID0(Stripe)
Select Disks
128KB
298.0 GB
6.
Make sure that Create Volume is selected, and press the

<Enter> key.
Create Volume
RI0000409.EPS
Name:
RAID Level:
Disks:
Strip Size:
Capacity:
RAID_Volume0
RAID1(Mirror)
Select Disks
N/A
149.0 GB
Create Volume
RI0000412.EPS
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
Appx RI I-2
7.
When the following message appears, press the <Y> key.

WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISKS WILL BE LOST.
Are you sure you want to create this volume? (Y/N) ;

RI0000413.EPS
8.
Select Exit and press the <Enter> key.

[ MAIN MENU ]
1.
2.
3.
4.
Create RAID Volume

Delete RAID Volume
Reset Disks to Non-RAID
Exit
RI0000426.EPS
9.
When the following message appears, press the <Y> key.

[ CONFIRM EXIT ]
Are you sure you want to exit? (Y/N) ;
RI0000414.EPS
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
Appx RI I-3
3. Creating an Intel SATA Driver FD and

Installing the RAID Driver
5.
Microsoft Windows 98 CD-ROM Startup Menu
CAUTION
1. Boot from Main Disk

2. Boot from CD-ROM
If the reinstallation CD that came with the PC contains Windows

XPSP1 or earlier, create an FD of SATA driver and perform
installation of the RAD driver by following the procedure below.
1.
Insert the Dell Resource CD that came with the PC into the
PC.
2.
Restart the PC.
3.
When F12=Boot Menu appears in the upper-right corner of

the window, press the <F12> key.
NOTE
If the <F12> key is pressed too late, the setup window fails to open.
In such a case, restart the PC and perform step 3 again.
4.
When the following window opens, enter 2.
Enter your choice: _

RI0000419.EPS
6.
Enter 5.
Dell Precision Workstation Resource CD
Please select an option from the list below.
1.)
2.)
3.)
4.)
5.)
6.)
Run MIC Diagnostics/Configuration

Run Dell Diagnostics
Go to Video Diagnostics Menu
Run SCSI Mard Drive Diagnostics
Copy Hard Drive Controller Drivers to Diskette
Exit to DOS
Select * Onboard or USB CD-ROM Drive and press the

<Enter> key.
RI0000416.EPS
Boot Device Menu

* Onboard or USB Floppy Drive
* Intel RAID_Volume0
* Onboard or USB CD-ROM Drive
* System Setup
* Hard Drive Diagnostics
* Boot to Utility Partition
Please Up/Down arrows to highlight desired item.
Please Enter to select highlighted item.
RI0000415.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx RI I-4
7.
Make sure of the PC model name, interface type (SATA), and

driver type (RAID), and select the driver number of the
appropriate machine model.
REFERENCE
The following screen shows an example where the drive for the
Precision 370 is selected.
Model name : Precision 370
Interface
: SATA
Driver type : RAID
When the following message appears, press the <N> key.

The Driver Files have been Copied.
Do you need to copy another driver to Diskette ?
Y/N
RI0000420.EPS
10. When the following message appears, remove the FD from

the FDD, and affix a label bearing the title Intel SATA
Drivers to the disk.
Please Select the Drive you wish to transfer to Floppy.

* Latest drivers can be downloaded at Dell .com *
You can now reboot to your Operatiog System CD to start the install.
*Don't forget to hit F6, when the system is inspecting your computer
Conf iguration if you need to install SCSI or Raid drivers*
C:\>
1.) Precision 670/470/370 Adaptec U320 SCSI RAID onboard or add-in controller
drivers for Windows XP and 2000
2.) Precision 670/470 Adaptec SATA HostRAID controller Drivers for Windows XP
and Windows 2000
3.) Precision 370 SATA AHCI/RAID storage drivers for Windows XP and 2000
4.) Precision 650/450 LSI Onboard SCSI or LSI Add in Controller drivers
for Windows 2000
RI0000421.EPS
11. Shut down the PC.

12. Turn ON the PC.
RI0000417.EPS
8.
9.
The PC starts up.
When the following message appears, insert an FD into the

FDD, and press the <Y> key.
Insert a floppy into the Floppy disk drive, and data on the Disk WILL BE ERASED.
.
Continue?
Y/N
RI0000418.EPS
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
Appx RI I-5
13. When the following message appears, press the <F6> key.
NOTE
The following message appears for 5 seconds on the screen after
the PC has been turned ON. Press the <F6> key immediately after
the screen turns blue.
15. When the following window opens, insert the FD labeled
Intel SATA Drivers into the FDD, and press the <Enter>
key.
Please insert the disk labeled
Manufacturer-supplied hardware support disk
into Drive A:
Windows Setup
=============
* Press ENTER when ready.

RI0000424.EPS
16. Select Intel(R) 82801FR SATA RAID Controller and press

the <Enter> key.
Press F6 if you need to install a third party SCSI or RAID driver...
Intel(R) 82801FR SATA RAID Controller (Desktop ICH6R)

Intel(R) 82801FR SATA AHCI Controller (Desktop ICH6R)
RI0000422.EPS
You will see no change on the screen immediately after the press
of the <F6> key. After a while as the setup process proceeds as
usual, the Specify Additional Device window opens.
14. When the following message appears, press the <S> key.
RI0000425.EPS
17. When the following window opens, remove the FD from the
FDD and press the <Enter> key.
Windows Setup
=============
Windows Setup
=============
S=Specify Additional Device

S=Specify Additional Device
ENTER=Continue
F3=Exit
RI0000423.EPS
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
ENTER=Continue
F3=Exit
RI0000423.EPS
The system returns to the setup window.
Appx RI I-6
4. RAID Structure Confirmation

(only for DELL OptiPlex 960MT/780MT)
1.
2.
Press the <F2> key when logotype of DELL appears at the

4.
Check whether or not the [RAID Volumes] [Level] has

been set for the [RAID1(Mirror)] in the [DISK/VOLUME
INFORMATION].
NOTE
If the <F2> key is not pressed with the timeliness, the Interl(R)
Matrix Storage Manager window will not open. In that case, restart
the PC to perform Step 2. again.
RI0000486.ai
5.
The Intel(R) Matrix Storage Manager window opens.
Check whether or not the [RAID Volumes] [Status] has

been set for the [Normal] in the [DISK/VOLUME
INFORMATION].
RI0000487.ai
NOTE
If the Status is other than Normal, HDD may be defective, so
replace the HDD.
RI0000484.ai
3.
Press <Ctrl> + <I> immediately.

NOTE
If the <Ctrl> + <I> key is not pressed with the timeliness, the main
menu window will not open. In that case, press <Ctrl> + <Alt> +
<Delete> key and perform Step 2. and Step 3. again.
The main menu window opens.
For details about replacement procedure of HDD, see

5. Replacement Procedure of Damaged RAID Configuration
HDD (only for Dell OptiPlex 960MT/780MT) below.
6.
Press the <ESC> key.

RI0000488.ai
RI0000485.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
7.
Press the <Y> key.
Appx RI I-7
5. Replacement Procedure of Damaged

RAID Configuration HDD (only for DELL
OptiPlex 960MT/780MT)
3.
Within a period of 3 seconds after the initial window opens,

sequentially click the upper left and upper right corners of
the window.
Click the upper left corner and then the upper right corner.
Replacement procedure in case one of two RAID configuration HDDs is

damaged.
5.1 Confirmimg which HDD is damaged
1.
Turn On the PC power.

MU000031.EPS
The following window opens, and startup process is suspended.
NOTE
When the following window is displayed, enter the login password
(fieldengineer) for Service Utility and click
AWS301001.ai
2.
MU000035.EPS
The Service Utility starts. The IIP Service Utility window opens.
Enter the <F1> key.

Windows starts up.
After about one minute, the CL-AP starts running.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
4.
Click [Exit Service Utility].

Appx RI I-8
5.
Select All Programs Intel Matrix Storage Manager

menu.
Intel Matrix Storage Console from the
7.
Confirm on the screen which of the HDDs is damaged.
AWS301002.ai
REFERENCE
AWS301008.ai
The Intel Matrix Storage Console window opens.
6.
The HDD marked with

some troubles.
under the RAID Hard Drives has
Select Advanced Mode from the View menu.
AWS301007.ai
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI I-9
5.2 Replacing HDD
1.
Turn the power to the PC OFF and disconnect the power

cable.
2.
Open the cover of the PC main unit, and replace the

damaged HDD with a new HDD.
NOTE
5.3 Rebuilding RAID
1.
2.

the window.
For the new HDD, use the one with same capacity as the damaged
HDD.
3.
Windows starts up.

After about 1 minute, the CL-AP starts running.
Close the cover of the PC main unit, and reconnect the

power cable.
MU000031.EPS
NOTE
MU000035.EPS
3.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)

Appx RI I-10
4.

menu.
6.
Click
AWS301008.ai
5.
Right-click the HDD under Non-RAID Hard Drives, and

then choose Rebuild to this Hard Drive.
AWS301004.ai
The Select Hard Drive window opens.
7.
Confirm that the newly added HDD is registered in the

Selected column, and then click
.
AWS301003.ai
The Welcome to the Rebuild RAID Volume Wizard window

opens.
AWS301005.ai
The Completing the Rebuild RAID Volume Wizard window

opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI I-11
8.
Click
5.4 Verification
1.

menu.
AWS301009.ai
AWS301008.ai
Rebuilding of RAID starts.
REFERENCE
In the Intel Matrix Storage Console window, selecting basic
mode from the View menu to change the display mode will
enable you to check the progress of RAID reconstruction.
2.
Confirm that the RAID Hard Drive construction is working

properly.
AWS301010.ai
AWS301006.ai
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx RI I-12
6. Setting the RAID Status Display Tool

(Windows XP / Vista only)
Enter D:\Tools\RAIDStatusDisplay\Setup.exe and

click
.
The Welcome to the IIPDispRaidStatus Setup Wizard window opens.
6.1 Installing the RAID Status Display Tool
1.
For Windows Vista

Click
The start menu opens.
Enter D:\Tools\RAIDStatusDisplay\Setup.exe in
NOTE
proceed to step 3.
The Welcome to the IIPDispRaidStatus Setup Wizard window opens.
4.
Click
The Select Installation Folder window opens.
FR0J0002.ai
2.
3.
screen.
RI0000502.ai
For Windows XP
Select Run from the
menu.
RI0I0001.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Appx RI I-13
5.
Click
The Confirm Installation window opens.
RI0000503.ai
6.
Click
RI0000504.ai
7.
Click
8.
9.
Restart the PC.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Appx RI I-14
6.2 Setting the operation of RAID Status Display Tool

Operation of the RAID status display tool are controlled by the values
of registry. Operation can be changed by changing the values of the
registry.
The registry value of icon display position is updated along with the
position where icon is dragged.
If the registry does not exist when the RAID status display tool is
started, system operates in the default setting.
NOTE
If the monitor is changed to a smaller one, icons may not be displayed
properly. In that case, directly delete HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\
SOFTWARE\FujiFilm\IIPDispRaidStatus and restart the PC.
Registry Key
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\FujiFilm\IIPDispRaidStatus
Value of Registry Key

The following items can be set.
Items
Icon display position
Icon size
Display/hide the text
Name of Value
REG_DWORD
DisplayPositionX
REG_DWORD
DisplayPositionY
REG_DWORD IconWidth
REG_DWORD IconHeight
REG_DWORD DisplayText
Default
32
1
REG_DWORD TextColorR
Font color for texts
REG_DWORD TextColorG
Contents
Set up the icon display position coordinate (pixel coordinate on the upper left corner of icon area) of the RAID status
display tool.
* If the setup value does not exist, the icon displays on the lower right corner of the 1st monitor and the position will be
recorded.
Set up the icon display size of the RAID status display tool. Specify the width and height by pixel.
* The minimum setting value is 16. The value under 16 is recognized as 16.
Set up to display/hide the text with "0: Hide" and "1: Display".
Set up the font color for texts. Specify each of the RGB color space from 0 to 255.
255
REG_DWORD TextColorB
* Black (0, 0, 0) is used for transparent color so it cannot be specified.

* The font-related settings other than colors and sizes will be the same as for the system font.
Set up the font size (height of character cell) for texts by pixel.
Font size for texts
Module name list
REG_DWORD TextFontSize
REG_SZ Module1
IAAnotif.exe
REG_SZ Module2
IAStorIcon.exe
REG_SZ Gui1
C:\Program Files\Intel\
Intel Matrix Storage
Manager\Shell.exe
REG_SZ Gui2
C:\Program Files\Intel\
Intel(R) Rapid Storage
Technology\IAStorUI.exe
GUI program list
Updating cycle
REG_DWORD RefreshTime
Minimum travel
distance
REG_DWORD
MoveMinDistance
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
1000
5
* If the setup value does not exist, the size of the system font is used. (The value will not be saved)
* The font-related settings other than colors and sizes will be the same as for the system font.
[For internal processing]
* Modules can be registered up to Module8.
[For internal processing]
* GUI can be registered up to Gui8.
* To prevent GUI for management (Matrix Storage Console) from starting up when the icon is clicked, create the registry
of Gui1 and Gui2, and then delete the value (make the columns empty).
The updating cycle of the display . Set up by 1/1000 seconds (ms).

The minimum travel distance of icon. Set up by pixel equivalent value.
Appx RI I-15
6.3 Settings Necessary for Dell Precision WS370

(Intel Application Accelerator)
6.4 Disabling RAID Status Display Tool
1.
Right-click the taskbar, and select Task Manager.
2.
Select IIPDispRaidStatus (Main) from the Applications

tab, and then click [End Task].
Target registry
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\FujiFilm\IIPDispRaidStatus
3.
Added character strings

REG_SZ Gui3 = C:\Program Files\Intel\
Intel Application Accelerator\Shell.exe
Select All Programs Accessories from

the
menu.
4.
Right-click IIPDispRaidStatus and select Delete.
5.
Restart the PC.
On the PC to which Intel Application Accelerator is installed, the

following settings may be necessary.
When GUI for management does not start

Add the following descriptions to the registries below.
When the irrelevant character string is displayed on the text

area of the tool
The Windows Task Manager window opens.
Add the following descriptions to the registries below.

Target registry
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Intel\Intel Application Accelerator
Added character strings
RAIDNotificationIcon = dword:00000003
When RAID management software does not start up properly

even if management GUI icon is clicked
Open the property window for IIPDispRaidStatus in the startup folder
and specify C:\Program Files\Intel\Intel Application Accelerator for
Start in.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Appx RI I-16
Appendix J Reinstalling the Software (HP PC) [Applicable only in Japan]
Appendix J Reinstalling the

Software (HP PC)
[Applicable only in
Japan]
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Appx RI J-1
BLANK PAGE
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Appx RI J-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Appx RI J-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Appx RI J-4
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MU-I
Control Sheet
Issue date
Revision number
05/30/2001
08/30/2001
01
03

08/30/2001
03/20/2002
03
04

03/20/2002
07/20/2002
04
05

07/20/2002
05
11/30/2002
11/30/2002
03/01/2003
03/01/2003
08/20/2003
06
06
07
07
08

08/20/2003
12/10/2003
08
09

12/10/2003
09
02/20/2004
10
07/30/2004
11

07/30/2004
11
11/12/2004
12
07/30/2005
14
07/30/2005
11/30/2005
11/30/2005
07/30/2006
14
15
15
16
07/30/2006
16
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
Reason
Pages affected
All pages
I, II, III, IV, 3, 5-7, 13, 14, 1624,
28-30, 35, 36, 39, 44
15, 2527, 3134, 37, 38, 4043
I, II, 6, 7, 12-14, 1, 23, 25, 26, 30,
31,35, 44
24, 2729, 3234, 3642
I, II, 1, 15, 17, 22, 2528, 30, 31,
33, 34, 46, 48
16, 1821, 23, 24, 29, 32, 3545,
47
I, II, 25, 1016, 1830, 3335, 38
17, 31, 32, 36, 37, 3952
I, II, 19, 17, 19, 31, 3340, 5056
1016, 18, 2030, 32, 4149
I, II, 3, 4, 69, 15, 17, 18, 20,
3033, 3543, 59, 60
19, 2129, 34, 4458
I, II, 1, 3, 5, 12, 13, 20, 21, 30, 35,
37, 45, 5154 , 62
2229, 3134, 36, 3844, 4650,
5561
All pages
I, II, III, IV, 3, 4, 69, 15, 1719, 22,

23, 27, 30, 32, 33, 3740, 4250,
68
20, 21, 2426, 28, 29, 31, 3436,
41, 5167
Revision for software V1.0(C) and corrections I, II, 3, 4, 69, 24, 67
(FM4450)
I, II, 4-8, 13, 16-19, 23, 33, 3942,
44, 45, 4754, 56, 66, 74
43, 46, 55, 5765, 6773
IIV, 12, 37, 4345
4676
I, II, 4, 14, 15, 20, 3546, 49, 74,
75, 7780
2134, 47, 48, 5073, 76
MU-II
Control Sheet
Issue date
Revision number
07/20/2007
17
07/20/2007
05/09/2008
17
18

05/09/2008
18
10/13/2008
19
10/13/2008
11/30/2009
19
20

11/30/2009
20
03/31/2010
12/10/2010
21
22

12/10/2010
22
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Reason
Pages affected
I, III, 1, 4, 1116, 19, 20, 2229,
3546, 4850, 74, 75
5173, 7680
I, III, 1, 2, 5, 13, 15, 25, 47, 61,
7780
3, 4, 612, 14, 1624, 2646,
4860, 6276, 8184
I, III, 1, 2, 1321, 2548, 52, 68, 87,
88
50, 51, 5367, 6986
I, III, 5, 13, 15, 16, 19, 21, 22, 24,
27, 31, 50, 52, 55, 56, 66, 73, 74,
86
23, 25, 26, 2830, 3249, 51, 53,
54, 5765, 6772, 7585, 8792
I, III, 57, 22, 24, 38, 56, 68, 83
I, III, 5, 31, 33, 42, 43, 53, 58, 68,
88
5457, 5967, 6987, 8991
MU-III
BLANK PAGE
010-054-15
11.30.2005 FM4760 (ITC)
MU-IV
1. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility

This section explains about the procedures for starting/exiting the
Service Utility, which is used as a service utility tool during CL
installation and servicing.
2.
Perform the procedure described below.

Version A software
When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper left and
upper right corners within a period of 3 seconds.
Starting the Service Utility

The procedure for starting the Service Utility varies depending on
whether the CL-PC power is ON or OFF.
MU000032.EPS
When the PC power is OFF
1.
The Service Utility starts and then the IIP Service Utility
window opens.

Windows 2000 starts up. After about one minute, the CL-AP starts.
NOTE
A window like that shown below opens in case the date and time
displayed on the PC are older than those when it was started last
time.
Click [OK] on the window that opens, and set correct date and time
on the Date/Time Properties window.
Version B software
MU000031.EPS
The password entry window opens.

CLP401002.EPS
If this window opens, the PC battery is possible to be dead. Use

the procedure below to check.
1. Set the current date/time.
2. Turn the power to the PC OFF and disconnect the power cable
from the outlet.
3. After a few minutes, re-connect the power cable and turn the
power to the PC ON again.
4. Check to see that the set date/time are correct. If the date/time
values revert back to those before settings, have the battery be
changed.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
MU000035.EPS
Enter fieldengineer and click
The Service Utility mode starts and then the IIP Service
Utility window opens.
NOTE
The password entry window opens with software version V7.0 (B)
or later. For software version V6.0 (B) or earlier, the Service Utility
mode starts without opening this window.
MU-1
3.
When the PC power is ON
1.
Clicking Shut Down in the
(or
menu while the CL-AP is running will display the exit

window. Click
while holding down the <Shift>
Perform the procedure described below.

Version A software
key.
2.
From the
menu, sequentially choose Programs,
Fuji Film, and FCR.

The CL-AP starts in about one minute.
MU000032.EPS
The Service Utility starts and then the IIP Service Utility
window opens.
Version B software
MU000031.EPS
MU000035.EPS
The Service Utility mode starts and then the IIP Service
Utility window opens.
NOTE
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
MU-2
Exiting the Service Utility
1.
Click [Exit Service Utility] on the IIP Service Utility window.
00000056.EPS
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
MU-3
2. Overview of Service Utility Functions
2. Overview of Service Utility

Functions
When the Service Utility starts running, the following window (hereinafter referred to as the main menu) opens.
I
II
XI ( Not displayed for

the B version)
XII
III
XIII
IV
XIV
V
XV
VI
XVI (Displayed only when the
relevant option key is installed.
VII
Applicable only in Japan.)
XVII (Displayed for only V1.0(C)
version: for Japanese
VIII
version only)
IX
X
XVIII
00000061.EPS
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
MU-4
I. Setup Study Sharing

This menu item is used for setup of study information sharing.
For details of the setup procedure, see CL+CL (Cluster

Connection) under OE15: CL + CL (Cluster Connection).
II. Setup Configuration Item

This menu item is used for CL system information setup, network
setup, LP setup, FINP/DICOM setup, automatic distribution code
setup, and other setup purposes.
This is the most frequently used menu item for installation.
For details of this window, see 3. Various Configuration
Settings - Setup Configuration Item.
REFERENCE
Automatic distribution code setup is performed with the Service

Utility. However, attribute distribution setup is performed with a user
utility. Attribute distribution setup is basically performed by the user.
III. LUT
This menu item is used for setup of LUT file information (a file that
optimizes the window display) for the display that the CL supports.
4. Display Optimization LUT
IV. Configuration Restore/Backup

This menu item is used to back up or restore CL setup data.
The following files are backed up or restored.
m SysConfig.mdb file (A00 or later)
System setup item
PRINTER setup item
CSL setup item
FINP setup item
QA process setup item
m NetConfig.mdb file (A00 or later)
Connection device information table
Connection destination setup table
DicomPrint sorting destination setup table
FINP compression ratio setup
Distribution code setup
m PN.mdb file (A00 or later)
PN setup item
m McrDataFormat.mdb file (A00 or later)
Magnetic card format setup
m TagReplace.ini file (A02 or later)
Setup for DICOM tag replacement
m QACustom.mdb file (A02 to V5.0(B))
Setup of display items on the QA window
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
m Selector.mdb file (A02 or later)

Selector setup
m TagLookup.ini file (A09 or later)
DICOM tag editing (for Siemens)
m FilmStrFmt.env file (A09 or later)
Definition of film annotation characters
m BcrDataFormat.mdb file (A10 or later)
Barcode format setup
m ExposureResultLog.mdb file (A10 or later)
Setup for exposure result log output items
m MWMTagSetting.mdb file (A11 or later)
DICOM MWM C-FIND tag and internal data mapping setup
information
m PConsole Ser.mdb file (V2.0(B) or later)
Setup of PDA connection
m RejectComment.mdb file (V2.0(B) or later)
Setup of comment on mis-exposed images
m CODEDSTB file (V1.0(C) or later)
Setup of a distribution code for connection to the 9000 series
equipment
m UMB_ATLAS1u.prm, UMB_ATLAS1t.prm,
UMB_ATLAS2u.prm, UMB_ATLAS2t.prm (V4.0(B) or later)
Setup of image unevenness removal processing for the
CR-IR 364 (type U/type T), CR-IR 366 and CR-IR 367.
m UMB_ATLAS1a.prm (V5.0(B) or later)
Setup of image unevenness removal processing for the CR-IR371.
m TagCharDataCut.ini (V5.0(B) or later)
Setup for output of truncated DICOM tag data
m IDMassHistory.mdb (V7.1(B) or later)
Patient ID history
m MassOrder.mdb (V7.1(B) or later)
Setup of order issuance function for screening examination
m UMB_BASE1a.prm (V7.1(B) or later)
Setup of unevenness removal processing for the Image Reader
(reserved)
m ExposureIndex.prm (V8.0(B) or later)
Setup of ExposureIndex function
m TagCharDataAdd.ini (V8.1(B) or later)
Setup of character string adding function for DICOM tag
m IssuanceIdMassOrder.dat (V8.1(B) or later)
Setup of issuance function for diagnostic orders
For the backup procedure, see 5. Restoring/Backing Up the
Configuration File Configuration Restore/Backup.
For the restore procedure, see 14. Restoring the CL-Config
MU-5
V. Retrieve EDR Backup Data

This menu item is used to retrieve EDR image data stored in the CL
and save it on media, such as FD, USB memory stick or the like.
For the EDR data retrieval procedure, see 6. Retrieving EDR
Data Retrieve EDR Backup Data.
REFERENCE
The EDR data refers to data halfway through a calculation task while
EDR processing is being performed. This data is used to analyze
later how EDR processing was performed actually.
VI. Verify Connection
This menu item is used to verify the connection to the RU or other
connected equipment. The CL offers the following connection
verification functions:
Using the PING (connected equipment host name or IP address
input required) to verify the network connection to other connected
equipment.
Using connected equipments AE name (Application Entity Name)
to verify the connection to DICOM connected equipment
For details of the procedure for verifying connection to other
equipment, see 7. Verifying the Connection to Other
Connected Equipment Verify Connection.
VII. Edit/View Film String

This menu item is used to directly edit the file named FilmStrFmt.
env file, which defines the film annotation character format. The tool
named View Film String can also be used to confirm on-screen film
u NOTE u
The contents of the FilmStrFmt.env file are written in Unicode.
Therefore, use NotePad or other Unicode-compliant text editor for
editing purposes.
VIII. DataBase Utility

This menu item is used to initialize image database, delete (clearing
off the image output queue) accumulated images from output queue
and initialize patient database.
For details of the operation procedure, see 8. Management of
Various Databases DataBase Utility.
IX. Magnetic Card Setting

This menu item is used to set the data format for magnetic cards
(hospital cards) and define ISO card read character code.
For details of the data format, see Appendix 4. Setting Up the
Magnetic Card [Option] under Appx IN: Installation
Appendix.
For details of the ISO card definition, see 9. Setting the
Magnetic Card Magnetic Card Setting.
X. Barcode Setting
This menu item is used for barcode setup.
For details of the format, see 10. Setting the Barcode
Barcode Setting.
XI. Customized QA Item (Not displayed for the B version)

This menu item is used to customize information, such as kanji
patient name, patient ID, date of birth, etc., relevant to patient image
displayed on the QA window.
For details of the setup procedure, see 11. Customizing the
QA Items Customized QA Item.
XII. Selector Setting

This menu item is used for selector setup necessary when
connecting a built-in IR. This function is same as that of IDT-IV
selector setup.
For details of the setup procedure, see 12. Setting the
Selectors Selector Setting.
For details of FilmStrFmt.env file editing and View Film String

usage, see 3. Film Annotation Character Setup (Direct Editing
of FilmStrFmt) in Print Output Function under
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
MU-6
XIII. View Event Log

This menu item is used to launch the Event Viewer of Windos 2000.
The Event Viewer allows you to confirm errors occurring in the OS or
CL-AP.
For details of how to use the Event Viewer, see 2. Using the
Event Viewer under MT: Machine Troubleshooting.
XIV. Log/Configuration Files Acquisition Tool

This menu item is used to compress CL log files or several setup
files at a time and back them up on media, such as FD, USB
memory stick or the like. This function is useful for looking into
causes of errors that occur.
For details of how to collect log files or various setup files, see
13. Collecting the Log and Configuration Files Log/
Configuration Files Acquisition Tool.
XV. DICOM MWM C-FIND Tag Setting

This menu item is used to perform internal data mapping for the tags
to be set up for the information about the CLs inquiries addressed to
the RIS (C-FIND-RQ) and the tags received in the form of a
response from the RIS to the CL (C-FIND-RSP).
For details on tag mapping, see 14. Setting the DICOM MWM
C-FIND Tags DICOM MWM C-FIND Tag Setting.
XVI. P-Console Setting (Applicable only in Japan.)

This menu item is used to transfer configuration data to the POCKET
id Console or register device id of the POCKET id Console to be
handled on the CL.
For details of how to use the POCKET id Console, see
15. Setting the POCKET id Console P-Console Setting.
XVII. Distribution Code for FCR9000 Series Connection

(Displayed for only V1.0(C) version: for Japanese version only)
This menu item is used to describe distribution code for E-i/fconnected 9000 series IR.
XVIII. Exit Service Utility
This menu item is used for exiting the Service Utility mode.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
MU-7
3.1 Meanings of Individual Tree Items
3. Various Configuration Settings

Setup Configuration Item
When you click [Setup Configuration Item] on the main menu, the
following window opens.
Various items are listed in a tree form (these items are hereinafter
referred to as tree items) under CONFIG. When you click these items,
you can open windows to set detailed information for specific tree items.

In the individual tree items, the following items can be set up.
SYSTEM CONFIG
This tree item is used to set the basic information about the CL.
Clicking the + sign to the left of SYSTEM CONFIG displays the
SYSTEM CONFIG tree items.
The displayed items allow you to set the CL system information (I in
the window illustration below), FINP basic information (II), QA
functionality (III), Printout functionality (IV), IDT or Console
functionality (V), trimming functionality (VI), Image Reader QC
functionality (VII), POCKET id Console functionality (VIII), 9000
connection functionality (IX), and DICOM Query/Retrieve
functionality (X).
I
II
III
Items listed in
a tree form
(tree items)
IV
V
VI
VII
00000060.EPS
VIII(*1)
IX(*2)
X(*3) 00000062.EPS
The individual tree items are detailed in the following subsection.
(*1) 9.CONFIG PDA is displayed only when the option key for the
POCKET id Console is installed. (Applicable only in Japan.)
(*2) 10. CONFIG 9000 is displayed only for V1.0 (C).
(*3) 10. CONFIG QR is displayed only for V3.0 (B) or later.
For details of 1. IMAGE MODALITY, see 3.4 Configuration
Details 1. IMAGE MODALITY.
For details of 3. QA FUNCTION, see 3.5 Configuration
Details 3. QA FUNCTION.
For details of 4. PRINTER, see 2. Setup Necessary When
Editing the Film Annotation Character Format under
For details of 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION, see 3.6 Configuration
Details 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION.
For details of 7. CONFIG OPTION, see 3.7 Configuration
Details 7. CONFIG OPTION.
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
MU-8
For details of 8. CONFIG QC, see 3.8 Configuration Details

8. CONFIG QC.
For details of 9. CONFIG PDA (*1), see 3.9 Configuration
Details 9. CONFIG PDA.
For details of 10. CONFIG9000 (*2), see IN-C: Installation
Connection of 9000 Series Equipment.
For details of 10. CONFIG QR (*3), see 3.10 Configuration
Details 10. CONFIG QR.
PERSON NAME
This tree item is used to define the sequence of patient name
elements and characters that delimit names.
Clicking the + sign to the left of PERSON NAME displays the
items for defining the details of PERSON NAME.
For details on the PERSON NAME, see 3.11 Setting the Name
Elements for DICOM Connection.
NETWORK CONFIG
This tree item is used to set the CL/connected equipment network
information and perform FINP/DICOM setup.
Clicking the + sign to the left of NETWORK CONFIG displays the
NETWORK CONFIG tree items.
The displayed items allow you to set the CL main unit information
(I in the window illustration below) and connected equipment
information (II).
I
II
00000063.EPS
FILM SORTING
This tree item is used to define the film sorting conditions for DICOM
prints.
For details of the FILM SORTING tree item, see 3.12 Setting
Up the DICOM Print Film Sorting Function.
FINP COMPRESSION TYPE

This tree item is used to formulate an image compression definition
of each MPM code for use in image output generation with the FINP.
Before the use of this feature, however, the image compression
setting for each MPM code needs to be turned ON from NETWORK
CONFIG.
IDT CONNECTING
This tree item is used to make patient information available being
shared with the CR Console (CL) and IDT-IV that are on the same
network.
See 3.13 Patient Information Sharing Function Setup.
MAC ADDRESS
This tree item is used to prevent error occurrence that disables Mac
Address to be acquired at CL-AP startup.
See 3.14 Mac Address Manual Input.
LOG SHARE
This tree item is used to register the target CLs host name and IP
address when using the Retake Analysis function and the IP use
count calculation function.
See 3.15 Log Information Sharing Function Setup.
DISTRIBUTION CODE
This tree item is used to perform automatic distribution code setup
so that images can be distributed automatically to a device of HD_
FILE attribute.
CONNECTING EQUIPMENT
This tree item is used to define the connected equipment that is
connected to the CL.
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
MU-9
3.2 Editing the Listed Configuration Items
3.2 Editing the Listed Configuration Items
1.
When you click a tree item in the left-hand area of the Setup
Configuration Item window, a list of setup items appears in the righthand area of the window (this list is hereinafter referred to as a
configuration list).
Double-click the Value column to the right of a configuration

item name.
This section explains about the procedure for editing the setup items in
a configuration list.
REFERENCE
Value column
A configuration list appears when you click the following tree items:
A maximum of nine tree items under SYSTEM CONFIG
(Display items are different depending on the used software version
and options.)
PERSON NAME
2.
00000065.EPS
Edit a configuration item.

When the column you double-clicked changes to a direct input
field (e.g.,
I. With the mouse, select the text to be edited, and then key in
new text.
When the column you double-clicked changes to a pull-down
menu (e.g.,
I. Click the downward arrow mark (

(e.g.,
) for the pull-down menu
), and then choose a target item
from the pull-down menu.

When the column you double-clicked changes to a field with
upward and downward arrow marks (e.g.,
00000064.EPS
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
I. Click the upward arrow mark (

) or downward arrow mark
) to change the value as desired.
(
MU-10
3.3 Saving the Configuration Data
3.3 Saving the Configuration Data

To save the configuration data, perform either of the following
procedures with the mouse or keyboard:
Saving with the mouse
1.
From the Config (F) menu, click Save (V).

2.
Click [YES].
The system saves the edited configuration data.
Saving with the keyboard
1.
Hold down the Alt key and press the F key.

A pull-down menu opens.
2.
Press the V key.

3.
Press the Return key.

The system saves the edited configuration data.
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
MU-11
3.4 Configuration Details 1. IMAGE MODALITY

IMAGE MODALITY setup items (1 to 5)
No.
1
Name
System Common
Date Format
Selection
0 : Japanese date (S62.10.07)
1 : ANSI long date (1987.OCT.07)
2 : ANSI short date (1987.10.07)
3 : American long date (OCT.07.1987)
4 : American short date (0.07.1987)
5 : European long date (07.OCT.1987)
6 : European short date (07.10.1987)
Alert MSG Display

Yes
When Deleting Image
After selecting [Delete], the confirmation screen forimage
deletion will be displayed. Pressing [OK] willdelete the
specified item.
No
After selecting [Delete], the confirmation screen forimage
deletion will not be displayed and the specifieditem deleted
immediately.
Meaning
Specifying the date format to be used in medica linstitutions.
* The date format is applicable in common to entry ofthe date
of birth, monitor display, film output, and allother date-related
representations.
* The default English setting at shipment from factory is
2:ANSI short date (1987.10.07).
For cluster
connection
Agreement
required.
Specifying whether or not to display the confirmation screen

for image deletion before actually deleting animage.
Agreement
required.
Activate Error
Recovery Retrial
Specifying whether or not to activate retrial processing after

Yes
The system continues retrial processing until the connected the error occurrence.
devices are recovered. Once recovered, itautomatically
continues output (including printout) of image accumulated
on the output queue.
No
The system does not output (print) images in standby
status unless it manually outputs (includingprintout) such
images.
Agreement
required.
Institute/Site Name
Strings
A maximum of 60 one-byte character.

( FUJIFILM HOSPITAL)
Agreement
required.
IP Size by inch or
Metric
Specifying the IP size.

Agreement
0:Inch
Displays 14"14" and 14"17" images in the inch system.
required.
* Specify the IP size considering the cassette size available on
1:Metric
Displays 14"14" and 14"17" images in the metric system.
the RU side.
Setting the medical institution name (in 1-byte characters).

* For language setup of one-byte characters, a hospital name
specified here will be printed on film.
* Be sure to use 1-byte characters for entering medical
institution name as they are used in the DMS system.
* Make sure to enter 1-byte characters on the keyboard.
* The default number of characters printed on film is 20 at a
maximum.
: Default setting, *: Note

010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
MU-12

No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
For cluster
connection
Two independent
Yes
Mask Sizes
Sets independent RN for the right and left images.
Applicable to Left and
(Hipmnrl.prm is used.)
Right images
No
Sets the same RN for the right and left images.
(Hipmenu.prm is used.)
Specifying whether or not to set up frequency processing RN

independently for the right and left images on the doubleimage output.
Agreement
required.
Language Setup for

Screen Message
Specifying the language used.
Agreement
required.
0 : Japanese
1 : English
2 : German
3 : French
4 : Spanish
5 : Italian
6 : Swedish
7 : Finnish
8 : Danish
9 : Norwegian
10 : Korean
11 : ChineseSimplified
12 : ChineseTraditional
13 : Portuguese
14 : Polish
15 : Hungarian
16 : Czech
17 : Russian
18 : Slovene
19 : Turkish
* There is no need to change in the Japanese version. Change

the setting as necessary for the languages other than
Japanese.
* The default setting on the CL-AP CD is 1:English.
1:English.
* Software version V7.0 (B) does not provide support to
18: Slovene.
Insitute/Site Name in A maximum of 15 two-byte characters.

Two-Byte Characters (
)
Specifying the kanji medical institution name.
UID Issuance after

Modifying ID
Information
Specifying whether or not to issue new image UID and SOP

Instance UID when modifying the patient, study, series or
image information.
Yes
Issues new image UID and SOP Instance UID.
No
Does not issue new image UID and SOP Instance UID.
10 UID Issuance after

Yes
Modifying Normalized
Parameter
No
* Be sure to enter two-byte characters on the keyboard.

/
(Using the <Alt>+<
> keys, the character entry mode
can be made available for entering two byte characters.)
* The default number of characters printed on film is 15 at a
maximum.
* For language setup of two-byte characters, a hospital name
specified here will be printed on film.
Agreement
required.
Agreement
required.
* Select Yes if you wish to identify images for each

modification.
Agreement
Instance UID when modifying the conditions for normalization. required.
modification.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MU-13

No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
For cluster
connection

Modifying Image
Processing
Parameter
Yes
No

Instance UID when modifying image processing parameters.
12 UID Issuance Before

Sending Processed
Data
Yes
No
Specifying whether or not to output SOP Instance UID as a

processed CR image UID when outputting processed images.
13 DICOM Series
Generation Logic
Specifying the series generation logic.

0 : 1 Study - N series and 1 Series - 1 image
Issues a number so that it has multiple series for one study
Detailed explanations
and only one image for one series.
1 : 1 Study - N series and 1 Series - M image
Issues a number so that it has multiple series for one study
and multiple images for one series.
2 : 1 Study - 1 series and 1 Series - N image
Issues a number so that it has only one series for one study
and multiple images for one series.
Agreement
required.
14 System Recognition
ID (A to Z)
A_Z ( A)
Be sure to
assign a
unique ID
for each CL.
15 User Utility Password 0 : No Password Required

Required or Not
Password entry is not required.
1 : Default Password
As the default, 1111 is entered for the password.
Entering 111111 will enable you to use the group update
menu of exposure menu parameters (for services).
2 : Password Required
Hides the default password (1111).
Entering 111111 will enable you to use the group update
menu of exposure menu parameters.
Agreement
required.

modification.
Setting the system ID.

* Reflected on the image attributes and used for automatic
study number generation.
* Assign a unique ID individually for each equipment unit.
* Be sure to enter one-byte characters on the keyboard.
* The system ID set up on the RU configuration (referred to as
the image ID on the RU) will be printed on film.
Specifying if password entry is required when entering the
user utility mode.
Agreement
required.
Agreement
required.
* The default setting at shipment from factory of the CR

Console MINI is 1: Default Password.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
MU-14

No.
Name
16 SOP Class UID for

PPS When No FILE
Attribute Output
Selection
1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.1.1.1
1.2.392.200036.9125.1.1.2
Meaning
Specifying an SOP Class UID that is sent back to PPS when
no other connected hosts are set up as the destinations for
FILE attribute image output (for example, when a QA-WS is
connected as a connected host).
For cluster
connection
Agreement
required.
* Use the same UID as that used by the HI-C655 for FILE
attribute output.
17 Protocol Name for
PPS
0 : Function Code
Sets up a Code (function codes such as RT, TS, ES, etc).
1 : ANK Menu Name
Sets up a Menu Name (exposure menu) in alphanumerics.
Specifying a value used for setup of the Protocol Name for

PPS.
Agreement
required.
18 Display Performed
Procedure on
Worklist Tab
Yes
No
Specifying whether or not to display an already performed

study in the CL work list. For a study already performed,
specifying NO will hide it even if its related information is sent
from MWM. Basically, specify NO when the PPS function is
not available.
Agreement
required.
19 Kind of Output Image 0 : L, H, B, S

(Energy Subtraction) 1 : L, B, S
2 : L, S
3 : L, B
4 : L, H
20 Send 3 on 1 Format
to External Device
21 Connection Between
Reader and Console
L : Low-energy image
H : High-energy image
B : Bone image
S : Soft tissue image
Specifying the combination of kinds of images to be transferred Agreement

to other connected host.
required.
0 : Yes
Transmits Images.
1 : No
Does not transmit images.
Specifying whether or not to transfer 3on1-format images to an Agreement

externally connected image storage device.
required.
0 : 1-1
1-to-1 connection
1: N-N
N-to-N connection
2: N-N (Not Use IP Barcode)
N-to-N connection (IP barcode is not to be used.)
Specifying whether the 1-to-1 or N-to-N connection is to be

established for the CL and RU.
* Specify Yes only when the target storage device can

receive ES 3on1-format images.
* This setup item is not for film output.
Agreement
required.
* The default setting at shipment from factory is 1:N-N for the

CR Console Lite/Plus.
* The default setting at shipment from factory is 2: N-N (Not
Use IP Barcode) for the CR Console MINI.
* If 2:N-N (Not Use IP Barcode) is specified here, No must
be specified for No. 80 Enable Auto Menu Creation in
CSL/IDT FUNCTION.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MU-15

No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
For cluster
connection
22 Long Type Character Yes

Format
Decreases the font sizes to increase the number of
displayable characters.
No
Does not increase the number of displayable characters.
Specifying the font sizes of the ID number and other items for
CRT display and film annotation character printing.
23 Tag Mapped on
0040, 0100>0040, 0007
Study Menu at MWM
Use
DICOM-defined tag numbers to be mapped onto a study menu Agreement

for MWM use.
required.
24 Perform Mapping to
Exposure Menu at
MWM Use
Specifying whether or not to perform mapping for study and

Agreement
exposure menus during MWM use. If No is selected, only the required.
patient information will be used to initiate a study process (the
exposure menu or other data will not be transmitted).
Yes
Performs mapping.
No
Does not perform mapping.
Agreement
required.
* Note that the item to be specified for actually increasing the

number of characters is separately available.
25 Display Dialog When Yes

Failed in Mapping to
Opens a warning window.
Menu at MWM Use
No
Does not open a warning window.
Specifying whether or not to open a warning window when

Agreement
mapping is not successfully performed for a CL study menu or required.
exposure menu during MWM use.
26 Use Study
InstanceUID from
RIS
Yes
Uses the Study Instance UID sent from the RIS.
No
Does not use the Study Instance UID sent from the RIS.
Specifying whether or not to use the Study Instance UID that

is transmitted from the F-RIS.
27 StudyInstanceUID
Generation Logic
Type1
<company name>.2.1.<Accession number>
Type2
<company name>.2.2<study date><modality>.<Accession number>
Type3
<company name>.2.3.<study date><modality>.<patient ID>
Type4
<company name>.2.4.<study date>.<patient ID>.
<requesting department>
Type5
<company name>.2.5.<order number>
Type6
<company name>.2.6.<study date>.<order number>
Type7
<company name>.2.<MAC address>.<TimeStamp>.
<machine-dependent ID number>
Study Instance UID number issue type for CL internal number

issuance.
Agreement
required.
* To enable the MWM Order function, the StudyInstanceUID

must be received unfailingly from the RIS. Unless otherwise,
no studies can be started.
Agreement
required.
* If the order number does not exist or the Study Instance UID
is longer than specified, the system automatically uses
Type7.
* Do not specify anything other than Type7 unless otherwise
requested by the user.
When anything other than Type7 was specified at the request
of the user, have the user understand that the same
components determined double will make the
StudyInstanceUID to be determined double as well, resulting
then in causing a problem to occur on the DICOM Server
side.

010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MU-16

No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
28 Dicom Storage
Output Connection
Number
1 to 4 ( 3)
29 Image Number
Generation Logic
0 : System ID+Serial Number

Attaches a machine shipment control number.
1 : Serial Number
Does not attach a machine shipment control number.
Specifying whether or not to attach a machine shipment

control number to the beginning of the Image Number.
This number is printed on film as well.
30 Display Pixel Size
264
Monitor pixel size. To be changed in accordance with the

monitor type.
Number of connections simultaneously available for Dicom

Storage output generation.
For cluster
connection
Agreement
required.
* Item to be specified for the LF-C2.

Agreement
required.
15" touch panel LCD monitor : 297

17" CRT monitor
: 316 (recommended value :
resolution 1024 768)
(V7.0 or later)
SL-IC300
: 207
Ikegami CRT monitor
: 255 (recommended value)
(1k landscape-type)
SL-IC200
: 255
* This setting represents a constant for 100%-size image
display by the QA function.
* Since the CRT monitor can vary its pixel size through screen
size adjustments, calculate the pixel size value as indicated
below and use it as the setting.
Screen width (mm) number of pixels 1000 = pixel size
Example : 360 mm 1600 pixels 1000
= 225
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
MU-17

No.
Name
32 Kind of Print Image

(Image Combining
Process)
Selection
0 : Original
Original image only.
1 : Original+Combined
Original image and combined image (reduced to 35 43cm
image).
2 : Combined
Combined image only (reduced to 35 43cm image).
3 : Combined (Lifesize)
Combined image (life size)
4 : Combined (Lifesize)+Combined
Combined image (life size) + combined image (reduced to
35 43cm image).
Meaning
For cluster
connection
Specifying image type of the film output that is generated upon Agreement
image combination.
required.
When you are specifying 3 or 4 (life-size image output) for the
setup value, also confirm setup values for Nos. 75 and 76 of
PRINTER setup items.
* This setting can also be changed from User Utility. The latest
setting takes effect no matter which utility is used.
33 Kind of Transfer
Image (Image
Combining Process)
Specifying image type of the network output that is generated Agreement

0 : Original
Original image only.
upon image combination.
required.
1 : Original+Combined
Original image and combined image (reduced to 35 43cm * This setting can also be changed from User Utility. The latest
image).
setting takes effect no matter which utility is used.
2 : Combined
Combined image only (reduced to 35 43cm image).
3 : Combined (Lifesize)
Combined image (life size)
4 : Combined (Lifesize)+Combined
Combined image (life size) + combined image (reduced to
35 43cm image).
34 Enable Statistical
Info. Output
Yes
Enables the exposure result data file output function.
No
Disables the exposure result data file output function.
Specifying whether or not to output an exposure result data

file.
Agreement
required.
Exposure result data : Patient ID, patient name, study date,

study time, anatomical region, exposure
menu, etc.
* Select Yes when using the Retake Analysis function.
Console MINI is Yes.
35 Modality of
Mammography
Image
MG
Handles as MG.
DX
Handles as DX.
Specifying whether MG or DX is to be used for mammogram

DICOM output.
Agreement
required.
* Version A09 provides MG support only.

* It is necessary that option key installation be completed.

010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
MU-18

No.
Name
36 Administrator
Password
Selection
Up to 20 one-byte characters.
( fcr-iip)
For cluster
connection
Meaning
Specifying administrator privilege password for the user
authentication function.
* Be sure to enter a 1-byte character string from the keyboard.
37 Enable Security
Function
Yes
Uses the user authentication function.
No
Does not use the user authentication function.
Specifying whether or not to use the user authentication

function.
38 Link User Account to

Operators Name
Specifying whether the technologist name field should display

Yes
Displays the login user name in the technologist name field. the name of a user who logs in with the user authentication
function.
No
Does not display the login user name in the technologist
name field.
39 UID Issuance about a Yes

function (except
Issues a new image UID/SOP Instance UID number.
Image Processing) to No
change to the image
Does not issue a new image UID/SOP Instance UID
themselves
number.
Specifying whether or not to issue a new image UID/

SOPInstance UID number when an image data editing process
(other than image processing) was performed.
40 Rotate the 2nd

Stitching Image
Specifying whether or not to rotate

the second image 180 degrees for
long-view menu (function: WS)
automatic generation.
Yes
Rotates the second image 180 degrees.
No
Does not rotate.
* When an image obtained after editing is to be differentiated

from the original one, choose Yes.
* This image data editing process involves shuttening
processing, marker processing, annotation, ES processing
and image composition.
* When a Fuji Films long-view

cassette is used, it is necessary
to rotate the second image 180
degrees.
41 Rotate the 3rd
Stitching Image
Yes
Rotates the third image 180 degrees.
No
Does not rotate.
Specifying whether or not to rotate

the third image 180 degrees for
long-view menu (function: WS)
automatic generation.
At an institution where
double and triple longview cassettes are used
mixed, set both of 40.
and 41. to Yes.
For a double cassette,
rotate the second image
by 180 and for a triple
cassette, rotate the third
image by 180.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MU-19

No.
Name
42 Enable Stitching
Edge Adjustment
Selection
Meaning
For cluster
connection
Yes
Enables the stitching edge adjustment function.
No
Disables the stitching edge adjustment function.
Specifying whether or not to enable the stitching edge

adjustment function for images generated with the long-view
menu (function: WS).
Yes
Cuts the IP edge.
No
Does not cut the IP edge.
Specifying whether or not to cut the IP edge when combining

images that are generated with the long-view menu (function:
WS).
44 Use Series
Identification
From F-RIS
Yes
Uses series ID number.
No
Does not use series ID number.
Specifying whether or not to use an ID number (new tag) when Agreement

the F-RIS is connected.
required.

Modifying Trimming
Parameter
Yes
Issues a new number.
No
Does not issue new number.
Specifying whether or not to issue a new image UID or SOP

Instance UID as trimming information is modified.
Agreement
required.

Modifying
FNC Parameter
Yes
Issues a new number.
No
Does not issue a new number.
Specifying whether or not to issue a new image UID/

SOPInstance UID number when FNC parameters are
changed.
Agreement
required.
47 Quantity which paints 0-200 (0)

inside the recognition
Specifies a quantity that is variable in 0.01 mm increments
result of the chest
from 0.00 to 2.00 mm.
wall [ 0.01mm]
* In actual processing, values smaller than pixel size of the
standard-pixel density will be discarded.
Specifying the paint area for the mammographic chest wall

shuttering process.
Agreement
required.
48 Apply GS Filter To
8 10 / 1824 Image
Yes
Perform GS conversion.
No
Does not perform GS conversion.
Specifying whether or not to subject 8" 10"/18 24 cm

standard-pixel density images to GS conversion.
0 : Thm image file

Uses half the standard-pixel density image size.
1 : Std image file
Uses the standard-pixel density image size.
Specifying the image type to be used for image display.
43 Cut IP Edge for

Stitching
49 Kind of the image

used for the
displaying
* You should basically choose Yes
* You should basically choose No.
* To set Yes, make sure ahead of time that the F-RIS server
version is compatible with this option.
* The chest wall shuttering process exercises a blackening

function to automatically paint out the chest walls transparent
portion that may result from a bend or other inadequacy
during IP reading.
Agreement
required.
* If No is chosen, a moire pattern may appear in a film output

and the like.
Agreement
required.

010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
MU-20
IMAGE MODALITY setup item (50 to 53 and 55 to 57)

No.
Name
Selection
50 Portable Finish Mode 0 : Finish Study
Meaning
For cluster
connection
Specifying how to finish a study whose IP has been registered

on the POCKET id Console.
* This setting can be determined also by the User Utility
function and the setting determined later will be enabled.
51 Use Reject Comment Yes

Enables the entry.
No
Disables the entry.
Specifying whether to enable or disable entry of comment on

mis-exposed images.
52 Time Until Auto Log

Off
Specifying the time (represented in minutes) until when auto

logoff takes place.
0-60 (0)
* Select Yes when using the Retake Analysis function.
* Note that if 0 is set, no auto logoff will take place.

53 Horizontal UMB
Processing for
VELOCITY &
PRELIO
0 : ALL OFF
No image unevenness removal processing is applied.
1 : ON Table Type Only
Image unevenness removal processing is applied only to
the table type (CR-IR 364T, CR-IR 367 and CR-IR 370)
equipment.
2 : ON Upright Type Only
Image unevenness removal processing is applied only to
the upright type (CR-IR 364U and CR-IR 366) equipment.
3 : ALL ON
Image unevenness removal processing is applied to all
equipment models.
0-1000 (13)
55 Gradients(x10) of
LUT used for Preview
Image
Specifying whether or not to apply image unevenness removal

processing to the table type (CR-IR 364T, CR-IR 367 and
CR-IR 370) and upright type (CR-IR 364U and CR-IR 366)
Image Readers.
* Specify ON only for newly installed mobile models or
equipment on which an image unevenness problem arose as
it was subjected to undue vibrations. Specify OFF for newly
installed equipment or already-installed equipment at a
hospital.
Specifying a gradient of the linear gradation LUT used for
display of a quick-view image.
(Specify a x10 value.)
Agreement
required.
* Do not change the preset default value because this is a

reserve item.
56 Use Password
Security
Yes
Enables the PAS security function.
No
Disables the PAS security function.
Specifying whether to enable or disable the PAS security

function.
Agreement
required.
57 Password for PAS

Security
A maximum of 16 one-byte characters are allowed to use.

( 19750225)
Specifying a password for authentication of the PAS security

function.
Agreement
required.
* Be sure to enter a 1-byte character string from the keyboard.

010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MU-21
IMAGE MODALITY setup item (67 and 72)

No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
For cluster
connection
67 Use Service Utility

Password
Yes
Enables the Service Utility password function.
No
Disables the Service Utility password function.
Specifying whether to enable or disable the Service Utility

password function.
Agreement
required.
72 Enable Exposure
Index Function
Yes
Enables the Exposure Index function.
No
Disables the Exposure Index function.
Specifying whether to enable or disable the Exposure Index

function.
Agreement
required.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
MU-22
13. DICOM Series Generation Logic
In relation to the DICOM Series Generation Logic, the following
supplements explain the logic of series numbering subsequent to
image a cquisition from the RU.
2: 1 Study-1 series and 1 series-N Image

Performs numbering in such a manner that each study has only
one series and that each series has two or more images.
1 Study
1 : 1
1 series
1 : N
0: 1 Study-N series and 1 series-1 Image

Performs numbering in such a manner that each study has more
than one series and that each series has only one image.
1 Study
1 : N
1 series
1 series
N series
1 : 1
1 : 1
1 : 1
1 Image
1 Image
N Image
1 Image
00000466.EPS
1 Image
1 Image
00000464.EPS
1: 1 Study-N series and 1 series-M Image

Performs numbering in such a manner that each study has more
than one series and that each series has two or more images.
1 Study
1 : N
1 series
1 : M
1 Image
1 Image
M Image
1 series
N series
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
00000465.EPS
MU-23
3.5 Configuration Details 3. QA FUNCTION

QA FUNCTION setup items (1 to 7)
No.
Name
Enable Image Proc.

Pram Update Flag
Selection
Meaning
For cluster
connection
Enabling updated image processing parameter flag.
Agreement
required.
Enable E-mail Button Yes

Used.
No
Not used.
Specifying whether or not to use the image transfer function

via E-mail and the simplified image storage function.
Agreement
required.
Use Dialog for

Choosing Folder to
Save Jpeg Image
No
Does not open.
Yes
Opens.
Specifying whether or not to open a dialog box for specifying

the destination directory when you save an image with the
simplified image storage function.
Destination Path of
JPEG File
E : \
Specifying the simplified image storage destination.
Filename Format of
JPEG Information
0 : Image Number
Image number+serial number.txt
1 : Type 1
Host name+date+serial number.txt
2 : Type 2
Paitent ID No+_+dominical year+_+study anatomical
region+_+serial number+_+host name.txt
Yes
Reflects updated image processing parameters upon flag.
No
Does not reflect updated image processing parameters
upon flag.
* Specify No.
* Be sure to enter 1-byte characters via the keyboard.

* The default value for V7.1(B) or earlier is A:\.
Filename generation rule applied to simplified image storage.
* Patient ID number

: A maximum of 16 characters,
Tag (0010, 0020).
Dominical year
: Fixed at six characters.
Study anatomical region : A maximum of 16 characters,
Tag (0018, 0015).
Serial number
: Fixed at four characters
(starting from 0000).
Host name
: A maximum of ten characters.
Delimitation
: _ (underscore).
Agreement
required.
JPEG Image
Processing Use
CrtLut
None
(Example)
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Config\CrtLut1.env
Specifying whether or not to provide perceptual linear

gradation correction at the time of JPEG image storage.
This selection takes effect when you specify the names of the
directory and file in which the setup file is stored.
Agreement
required.
Alert MSG Display

When Output
Yes
Opens.
No
Does not open.
Specifying whether or not display the confirmation dialog when Agreement

the reprint button/study distributino button is pressed.
required.

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
MU-24

No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
Display Save Button
No
Not displayed.
Yes
Displayed.
Specifying whether or not to display the Save button.
Alert MSG Display

When Save
No
Not displayed.
Yes
Displayed.
Specifying whether or not to display the Save confirmation

dialog when shifting from the previous study or image or at the
completion of QA processing.
10 Alert MSG Display

When Image
Changed
No
Not displayed.
Yes
Displayed.
Specifying whether or not to display the Save confirmation

dialog when energy subtraction or shuttering processing is
performed, or menu or image is changed, or images are
composed together.
11 Enable Dicom
File Storage
Yes
Used.
No
Not used.
Specifying whether or not to use the DICOM file storage

function.
12 Tranfer Syntax
Used When Using
Dicom File Storage
0 : Implicit VR Little Endian

1 : Explicit VR Little Endian
2 : Jpeg Lossless
Specifying the DICOM file storage transfer syntax.
13 Save Multibyte Code

When Using Dicom
File Storage
Yes
Multi-byte characters are saved.
No
Multi-byte characters are not saved.
Specifying whether or not to save multi-byte characters at

DICOM file storage.
14 Save Annotation
Information When
Using Dicom File
Storage
Yes
Annotation information is saved.
No
Annotation information is not saved.
Specifying whether or not to save annotation information at

DICOM file storage.
For cluster
connection
Agreement
required.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MU-25

No.
Name
15 DCM File Image

Processing Use
CrtLut
Selection
None
(Example)
Storage-scp
(Software version V5.1 (B) or earlier)
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\CrtLut\Storage-scp.lut
(Software version V6.0 (B) or later)
Meaning
For cluster
connection
Specifying an LUT file when performing LUT processing for

DICOM file storage.
Do not describe .lut (extension) for software version V5.1(B)
or earlier.
The folder used is fixed to C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\
CrtLut and include specified LUT files in this folder.
For software version V6.0 (B) or later, use an absolute path
(including extension) to describe necessary settings.
Ex. C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\CrtLut\Storage-scp.lut
* A maximum of 64 alphanumerics can be used to specify
necessary data.
* If no data is specified, CrtLut processing will not be
performed.
* If no specified file exists, an error will occur.
16 Change Modality
When Using Dicom
File Storage
(MG CR)
Yes
MG is saved as CR.
No
MG is not saved as CR.
Specifying whether or not to save MG as CR at the DICOM file

storage.
17 Enable Change
ImageDate and
ImageTime
No
Disabled.
Yes
Enabled.
Specifying whether or not to enable to edit the date and time

of image generation.
18 Image File Type For

Magnify Display
0 : Std image file

1 : Hq image file
Specifying whether to use a standard image or high-density

image to display a magnified image.
* Select No in Japan.
* Also confirm the setup value of No. 19.

* For setup of the type of an image displayed when no image
magnification processing is applied, confirm setup value for
No. 49 of IMAGE MODALITY setup items.
19 PEM Processing in
the case of Magnify
Display
Yes
PEM processing is performed.
No
No PEM processing is performed.
Specifying whether or not to perform PEM processing on an

ultra-high density image when it is magnified and displayed.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MU-26
QA FUNCTION setup items (20)

No.
Name
20 Alert MSG Type

When Patient
Information will be
Modified
Selection
0 : Connect with RIS
RIS connection (hospital layer)
1 : Without RIS
Non-RIS connection (general practitioner layer)
2 : Non-Display
Not displayed.
Meaning
For cluster
connection
Specifying a message type to be displayed when changing the

010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MU-27
3.6 Configuration Details 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION

CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items (1 to 6)
No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
AutoMenuSelect
Specifying whether or not to automatically move onto the next

No
From exposure list menus of unread images, manually
exposure menu item (at the bottom on the screen) when
selects exposure menus of the image to be read the next.
multiple exposure menus are registered.
Yes
When an image is received from the RU, automatically
moves onto the next exposure menu item (at the bottom on
the screen).
Default Menu Code

for Unregistered
Image
A maximum of 16 one-byte characters.

( FCR0908-0000)
Enable Distribution
Code
No
The distribution code is not used.
Yes
The distribution code is used.
Specifying if the distribution code is used when changing

exposure menu parameters.
For cluster
connection
Setting the extension menu code of the exposure menu to be

used as the default when it is unregistered.
* This item can also be set up using the User Utility function.
The item set up the last will be valid.
* Make sure to enter one-byte characters on the keyboard.
* The default setting on the CL-AP CD is FCR0909-0000.
Agreement
required.

Enable Film String
No
The film mark is not used.
Yes
The film mark is used.
Specifying if the film annotation characters are used when

changing exposure menu parameters.
Agreement
required.
Enable Function
Setup
No
The function setup is not used.
Yes
The function setup is used.
Specifying if the function setup is used when changing

Agreement
required.
No
The pantomography is not used.
Yes
Image isolation processing is performed if the target image
is a pantomography menu (MPMcode20 4) in 10" 12"
size.
Specifying whether or not to use the pantomography (to isolate Agreement

a 15 30cm image from a 10" 12" size image).
required.
Enable
Pantomography
Processing
* The default setting at shipment from factory is Yes for the

010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MU-28

Selection
Meaning
For cluster
connection
No.
Name
Enable Performance
Data (RIS)
No
The performance data is disabled.
Yes
The performance data is enabled.
Specifying whether the result information (film size and split

exposure count) can be defined from the CL menu parameter
edit dialog box at the time of ordering from the RIS.
Enable Automatic
Selector Switching
No
Not used.
Yes
Used.
Specifying if the automatic selector changeover function is

used.
Enable Requesting
Dept. Name Field
No
The requesting department name field is not displayed.
Yes
The requesting department name field is displayed.
Specifying if the requesting department name field is displayed Agreement

on the patient information entry screen.
required.
10 Enable Technologist
Name Field
No
The technologist name field is not displayed.
Yes
The technologist name field is displayed.
Specifying if the technologist name field is displayed on the

patient information entry screen.
Agreement
required.
11 Image Rotation/
Reversal Range
0 : L-R reversal
1 : T-B reversal
2 : L-R,T-B reversal
3 : L-R reversal / 90-deg,Rotation
4 : L-R,T-B reversal / 90-deg,Rotation
Specifying the range available for selection of image rotation

and reversal when changing exposure menu parameters.
Agreement
required.
Agreement
required.

Console MINI is 4: L-R,T-B reversal / 90-deg, Rotation.
Selects a combination of L-R, T-B, 90-deg or Rotation

L-R
: Right and left rotation,
T-B
: Top and bottom rotation,
90-deg, Rotation : 90 reversal
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MU-29

No.
Name
12 EDR Mode Setup
Selection
0 : AUTO/SEMI/FIX
1 : AUTO/SEMI/FIX/SEMI-X
2 : AUTO/SEMI/FIX/MANUAL
3 : AUTO/SEMI/FIX/SEMI-X/MANUAL
Meaning
Specifying the range available for selection of EDR mode
when changing exposure menu parameters.
For cluster
connection
Agreement
required.
* The default setting on the CL-AP CD is 0:AUTO/SEMI/FIX.
Selects a combination of AUTO, SEMI, FIX, SEMI-X or

MANUAL from 0 to 3.
AUTO
: Automatically calculates both the S and L values

based on the image.
SEMI : The L value is fixed. Automatically calculates the S
value as per determined process.
FIX : The L value is fixed. The S value is the default or
manually entered.
SEMI-X : The L value is fixed. Automatically calculates the S
value as per determined process. Manually enters
area for calculation and output density.
MANUAL : For manual entry of both the S and L values.
13 Image Data Filing
Mode Setup
Specifying the range available for selection of filing mode

when changing exposure menu parameters.
Agreement
required.
RT,TS,ES,WS,PS,TM
( RT,PS,TM,WS)
Specifying functions that can be selected when changing

Agreement
required.
RT : Routine processing (routine exposure)

TS : Temporal subtraction processing
ES : Energy subtraction processing
WS : Whole spine processing
PS : IVP processing
TM : Tomographic processing
* Enumerate functions demarcating them using one-byte

0 : OFF/ON
1 : OFF/ON/ON*
Selects a combination of OFF, ON or ON* from 0 and 1.
OFF : Not to filing to the OD device.
ON : Filing to the OD device.
ON* : Filing of an HQ image to the OD device after converting
it to a normal density image.
14 Function Setup
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MU-30

No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
15 Examination No.
Length
1 to 16 ( 10)
16 Examination No.
Padding Method
0 : Pad with space to the head ( 1234567)

Right-padded with spaces to the head.
1 : Pad with zero to the head (0001234567)
Right-padded with zeros to the head.
2 : Pad with space to the tail (1234567 )
Left-padded with spaces to the tail.
3 : Pad with zero to the tail (1234567000)
Left-padded with zeros to the tail.
Specifying the Accession No. padding method.
17 Patient ID Length
1 to 64 ( 10)
Setting the patient ID length.
Setting the Accession No. length (1 to 16).

* Set 6 or larger when 1 is set for 29. Study Number Issuance
Logic Setup and 14 or larger when 2 is set
* This function also specifies the number of characters printed
on film.
* If using the Accession Number character string adding
function, input the character string as
(Number to be set up) 16 - (Number of characters to be added).
* This function also specifies right/left justification of character

strings printed on film.
* If using Synapse RIS, select either 0 : Pad with space to the
head ( 1234567) or 2 : Pad with space to the tail (1234567 ).

* This function also specifies the number of characters printed
on film. To specify the number of characters that exceeds 11,
set Yes for No. 22 Long Type Character Format of IMAGE
MODALITY.
* To include the institution identification code in the patient ID
to be issued automatically, specify 64 for the maximum
patient ID length.
* If using the Accession Number character string adding
function, input the character string as
(Number to be set up) 64 - (Number of characters to be added).
18 Patient ID Padding
Method

Specifying the patient ID padding method.

* This function also specifies right/left justification of character
* If using Synapse RIS, select either 0 : Pad with space to the
head ( 1234567) or 2 : Pad with space to the tail (1234567 ).
For cluster
connection
Agreement
required.
Agreement
required.
Agreement
required.
Agreement
required.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MU-31

No.
Name
Selection
19 Reception No. Length 1 to 16 ( 5)
Meaning
Setting the reception No. length.
* Use this setting for Type B ID Online connection.
For cluster
connection
Agreement
required.
20 Reception No.
Padding Method

Specifying the reception No. padding method.
21 Exposure List
Erasure Setup
No
Does not erase.
Yes
Erases.
Specifying whether or not to erase the preset exposure list

Agreement
when entering new patient information on the examination and required.
examination reservation screens.
* Use this setting for Type B ID Online connection.
Agreement
required.
* This item can also be set up using the User Utility function.
The item set up the last will be valid.
22 Requesting Dept.
Name Field Setup
Setting the content of the menu to be displayed in the

0 : Code
Displays the requesting department code.
requesting department name field.
1 : NameSbcs
Displays the requesting department name in alphanumerics.
2 : NameDbcs
Displays the requesting department name in kanji.
Agreement
required.
23 Technicians Name
Field Setup
0 : Code
Displays the technicians code.
1: NameSbcs
Displays the technicians name in alphanumerics.
2 : NameDbcs
Displays the technicians name in kanji.
Setting the content of the menu to be displayed in the

technicians name field.
Agreement
required.
24 Min.Set Number
1 to ZZ ( 1)
Setting the minimum value for the function processing setup

No.
* Enter a value smaller than that specified in 25. Max. Set
Number below.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MU-32

No.
Name
25 Max.Set Number
Selection
1 to ZZ ( 9Z)
Meaning
For cluster
connection
Setting the maximum value for the function processing setup

No.
* Enter a value larger than that specified in 24. Min. Set
Numberabove.
26 MCR Customized
Card
No
The hospital card is not used.
Yes
The hospital card is used.
Specifying whether or not to use the hospital card.
27 MCR Card Type

(JIS/ISO)
0 : JIS
1 : ISO
Specifying the magnetic card type.
28 MCR Card Format

Setup
0 : FUJI (JIS type, ISO type)

1 : FJ01 (JIS type)
2 : FJ02 (JIS type)
3 : FJ03 (JIS type)
4 : FJ04 (JIS type)
5 : FJ05 (JIS type)
6 : FJ51 (ISO type)
Specifying the magnetic card format setup type.
29 Study Number
0 : OFF
Issuance Logic Setup 1 : <System Id+Auto Increment>
2 : <Date+System Id+Auto Increment>

1:ISO.
For details of setup, see Installation Appendix 4
Setting Up the Magnetic Card [Option] under
Appx IN: Appendix to Installation.
Agreement
required.
Agreement
required.
Specifying the logic available for automatic Accession number Agreement

(0008, 0050) issuance mode.
required.
System ID
Date
* Verify the setting made in 15. Examination No. length.

Make sure that 6 or larger is set when 1 has been selected
and 14 or larger, when 2 has been selected.
* (0008, 0050) are the Accession number tag.
1 to 2 ( 2)
Setting the technicians code length.
: Converts A to 1, ........ and Z to 26.

: Converts in the form of yyyymmdd (year,
month, day).
Auto Increment : Starts with the initial value counted to be
0001 and the count is reset to the initial
value if it extends over the two consecutive
years.
30 Technician's Code
Length

Agreement
required.
Agreement
required.

010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MU-33

No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
31 ID Online Acquisition
Info. Code Setup
0 : CP850 (DOS Latin 1)

1 : CP1252 (Win Latin 1)
Specifying the code set for use in ID Online connection.
32 ID Online Serial Port

No.
Enter a numerical value in accordance with the PSI board

channel.
(If you do not use the ID online serial port, enter 0.) ( 0)
Specifying the ID Online serial port.
33 ID Online Interface
Format
Specifying the ID Online interface format.

0 : Short
1 : Long (to be selected when an extended format is in use)
34 ID Online/Offline
Switching Timeout
Enter a numerical value (use the default setting under normal

conditions). (10)
For detailed code set descriptions, see Detailed

explanations.
Specifying the online/offline switching timeout value.
For cluster
connection
Agreement
required.
Agreement
required.
Agreement
required.
Agreement
required.
35 ID Online Requesting Enter a numerical value (use the default setting under normal
Timeout
conditions). (30)
Specifying the timeout value for information inquiry at the RIS. Agreement
required.
36 ID Online Search Key 0 : ID#

1 : ID#&RECEPT#
2 : ID#&EXAM#
3 : ID#&RECEPT#&EXAM#
Specifying the type of ID Online search key.
Agreement
required.
A combination of patient ID number, reception number, and

examination number is to be used as a search key.
ID#
: Patient ID number
RECEPT# : Reception number
EXAM# : Examination number
37 ID Online Type
0 : Type-A
The RIS transmits information.
1 : Type-B
2 : Type-IDC4
The CL uses a search key to make inquiries at the RIS for
the purpose of acquiring patient information.
Specifying the ID Online interface type.
Agreement
required.
38 Host Name of RIS

Server (Type-IDC4)
One-byte character ( idc4)
IDC4 host name when using the ID Online function for IDC4.
Agreement
required.
39 IP Address of RIS
Server (Type-IDC4)
172.16.1.1

* Use a maximum of 16 alphanumerics to specify the host
name.
IDC4 IP address when using the ID Online function for IDC4.
Agreement
required.

010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MU-34

No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
For cluster
connection
40 Port Number for RIS

Server (Type-IDC4)
Enter a numerical value in accordance with the RIS port

number.
(13001)
IDC4 port number when using the ID Online function for IDC4. Agreement
required.
41 RIS Type Setup
1 : S1 (NEC-Type1)
NEC (for TYPE-I)
2 : S2 (NEC-Type2)
NEC (for TYPE II)
3 : S3 (Fujitsu/Hitachi)
For Fujitsu/Hitachi
RIS type when ordering (serial connection only) is intended.
42 Wait Time for

Performed Exposure
Info. from Xcon
1 to 30 (Basically not changed.) ( 3)
Specifying the wait time (in seconds) between the instant at

which the ID information acquisition request is received from
the built-in type machine and the instant at which the XCON
exposure result information is received in situations where
exposures are made by the built-in type machine with the
XCON connection established.
43 Xcon Status Display

Strings
XCON
Image display caption when the XCON is connected.
44 Xcon Serial_TX
Control Port
Enter a numerical value in accordance with the PSI board

channel.
(Enter the value 0 if the control port is not used.) ( 0)
* Serially connected ordering is available only for version A04

or later.
* Version A07 supports only 2: S2 (NEC-Type2).
Agreement
required.
* Use a maximum of five alphanumerics to specify the caption.

Performing XCON control serial port setup.
45 Xcon Performed Info. No

Reception
Does not receive operating conditions.
Yes
Receives operating conditions.
Specifying whether or not to receive operating condition data.
46 Xcon Exposure Info.

Transfer
No
Does not transfer exposure conditions.
Yes
Transfers exposure conditions.
Specifying whether or not to transfer exposure condition data.

Limit Value
(Minimum KVP [kv])
28
Minimum tube voltage.

Limit Value
(Maximum KVP [kv])
110
Maximum tube voltage.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MU-35

No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
49 Xcon Exposure Info. 9

Limit Value
(Minimum X-ray Tube
Current [mA])
Minimum tube current.

Limit Value
(Maximum X-ray
Tube Current [mA])
400
Maximum tube current.

Limit Value
(Minimum Exposure
Time [msec])
10
Minimum irradiation time.

Limit Value
(Maximum Exposure
Time [msec])
5400
Maximum irradiation time.
53 Xcon Exposure Info. 0 to 9999 ( 0)

Limit Value
(Minimum Reserve 1)
For cluster
connection
Minimum Reserve Code 1 value to be sent to the X-CON.

Limit Value
(Maximum Reserve
1)
0 to 9999 ( 8000)
Maximum Reserve Code 1 value to be sent to the X-CON.
55 Distribution Code for

FCR5000 Series
Connection
5000-IIP
Distribution code used for receiving images from the FCR5000

series.
56 Enable Patient Info.

DB Function
No
Does not use the patient database function.
Yes
Uses the patient database function.
Specifying whether or not to use the patient database function. Agreement

required.
57 Max. Number of
Patient Info.
0 to 300000 ( 5000)
Maximum number of patients that can be recorded to the

patient database.
* Be sure to enter a maximum of eight one-byte characters on

the keyboard.
Agreement
required.

Console MINI is 300000.

010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MU-36

No.
Name
58 Patients Name
Format
Selection
0: Sbcs (one-byte code)
1: Dbcs (two-byte code)
2: Sbcs+Dbcs (both one- and two-byte codes are used.)
Meaning
For cluster
connection
Patient name format available for Japanese domestic market

only.
59 Enable Customize
No
Function of Study List Yes
and Patient Info.
ListDB Function
Performing setup concerning the specifications for industrialAgreement

use materials.
required.
Selecting No disables the study list customization and patient
database list customization functions.
60 IP Info. Request
Timeout
(Reader:CSL=N:N)
1 to 60 (basically not changed.) ( 60)
Timeout value that prevails in the CL when the RU conducts

an IP information search while the RU-CL N:N connections
established.
61 Replace ALL IP Size

When Receive Size
Change Request
from Builtin
No
Does not change.
Yes
Changes.
Specifying whether the CL applies a specified image size

Agreement
change to unexposed menu items in the study list upon receipt required.
of an exposure image size change notification from the built-in
type machine in situations where the RIS is connected.
62 RIS Status Display

String
RIS
Window display caption when the RIS is connected.
Agreement
required.
* Specify by entering a maximum of five alphanumerics.

63 RIS Serial-TX Control Enter figures in accordance with the PSI board CH.
Port
(Enter 0 if this function is not used.) ( 0)
Specifying the RIS control serial port.
64 MWM RIS Trigger

Port
5001 (Basically not changed.)
RIS trigger reception port number for MWM use.

Enter a numerical value in accordance with the RIS trigger
reception port.
65 MWM RIS Trigger

Timeout
1 to 1000. (Basically not changed.) (10)
RIS trigger reception timeout value (sec) for MWM use.
Agreement
required.
Specifying the study start method for MWM use.

Select an appropriate method in accordance with the RIS
specifications and actual hospital operations.
Agreement
required.
66 MWM Execute Study 0 : Manual

Type
Manual start.
1 : Trigger
Trigger-driven start.
2 : Auto
Automatic execution upon study reception.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MU-37

No.
Name
67 MWM Request
Exposure Dose
Status
Selection
Yes
Makes an inquiry.
No
Makes no inquiry
Meaning
The configuration function for this inquiry item is disabled.
This inquiry item will be validated when you add it as one of
the inquiries to be addressed to the RIS by exercising the
DICOM MWM C-FIND tag setup function.
For cluster
connection
Agreement
required.
14. Setting the DICOM MWM C-FIND Tags DICOM

MWM C-FIND Tag Setting in MU: Maintenance
Utility.
68 MWM Exposure
Menu Code
Treatment
0 : Normal
1 : JJ1017
2 : JJ1017(Ver3)
Exposure menu code system for MWM use.

Make an appropriate selection in accordance with the RIS
specifications.
69 Recept Computer
Hostname
ReceptComp
Receptor computer host name for receptor computer use.
70 Recept Computer IP
Address
172.16.1.50
71 Recept Computer
Port Number
6000
Receptor computer port number for receptor computer use.

Enter a numerical value in accordance with the receptor
computer port number.
72 Recept Computer
Patient Info. Format
0 : A01
1 : A51
Patient information format to be acquired from the receptor

computer.
Select a setting in accordance with the receptor computer.
73 Recept Computer
Request Timeout
1 to 60. (Basically not changed.) (15)
Timeout value (sec) for the response from the receptor

computer.
74 Search Order of
Patient Info.
0 : Recept Comp. Local DB

Receptor computer local patient database
1 : Local DB Recept Comp.
Local patient database receptor computer
2 : Recept Comp. Only
Receptor computer only
3 : Local DB Only
Local patient database only
Patient information search sequence during receptor computer

use.
The setting can also be changed with the user utility.
Agreement
required.
* Enter a name of consisting of no more than 16 alphanumeric

characters.
* Be sure to enter one-byte characters via the keyboard.
Receptor computer IP address for receptor computer use.
* Be sure to enter one-byte characters via the keyboard.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
MU-38

No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
For cluster
connection
75 Patient ID# is Unique Yes

Patient ID numbers must be unique.
No
Duplicate patient ID numbers can be used.
Specifying whether the patient ID numbers to be registered in

the local patient database should be unique.
When you register the information about a patient ID number
in the patient database with Yes chosen, it overwrites the
information having the same patient ID number.
76 PPS Exposure Status 0 : No

Sequence
Does not output.
1 : Status Only
Outputs only exposure status.
2 : Status + Other Results
Outputs exposure status along with other actual results.
Specifying whether the PPS should return the exposure status Agreement
(such as repeat/reject of exposures) with a Private tag.
required.
77 IME Mode for Kana

Patients Name
IME mode setup upon startup (kana patient name).
0 : None
No IME control
1 : ON
IME ON
2 : OFF
IME OFF
3 : OFF-Fix
IME OFF
4 : Dbcs-Hiragana
2-byte hiragana characters
5 : Dbcs-Katakana
2-byte katakana characters
6 : Sbcs-Katakana
7 : Dbcs-A&
2-byte alphanumeric characters
8 : Sbcs-A&N
* Specify 0: Output Default Condition for 120 Xcon No-Data

Default Output.
* If 3: OFF-Fix is selected, IME cannot be started.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MU-39

No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
78 IME Mode for Kanji

Patients
0 : None
No IME control
1 : ON
IME ON
2 : OFF
IME OFF
3 : OFF-Fix
IME OFF
4 : Dbcs-Hiragana
2-byte hiragana characters
5 : Dbcs-Katakana
6 : Sbcs-Katakana
7 : Dbcs-A&N
8 : Sbcs-A&N
IME mode setup upon startup (kanji patient name).
79 RIS Type Setup

(NEC)
0 : NEC-Type2-Normal
Specifying whether or not to use the expansion format when

serial ordering connection is established with NEC Type2.
80 Enable Auto Menu

Creation
1 : NEC-Type2-Expand
Yes
Enables the automatic creation function.
No
Shows a warning.
For cluster
connection
* If 3: OFF-Fix is selected, IME cannot be started.
* Select 2 for 41 RIS Type Setup.

This setting relates to a situation where the cassette is set in
position without registering an exposure menu. Specify
whether you want to automatically complete default exposure
menu registration or display a warning for prompting the user
to register an exposure menu.
* Select No here when 2: N-N (Not Use IP Barcode) is
specified for IMAGE MODALITY No. 21.
* The default setting at shipment from factory is No for the
CR Console MINI (for software version V7.0 (B) or later).
81 Enable Continuous
Barcode Read
Yes
Enables the continuous barcode read function.
No
Disables the continuous barcode read function.
Specifying whether or not to permit the same barcode to be

continuously registered.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MU-40

No.
Name
82 Selection Type of
Requesting Service
Selection
Meaning
For cluster
connection
0 : Linked
Links.
1 : Separated
Does not link.
Specifying whether or not to establish a link between one-byte Agreement

requesting department names and kanji requesting department required.
names.
83 Default Requesting
Service
Requesting department code consisting of up to 16 one-byte

characters.
No options.
Requesting department name to be displayed by default.
84 Barcode Type for

Search on List
0 : Accession Number
Accession number
1 : Patient ID
Patient ID.
Search key used for barcode-based searches.
85 Default Value for

Underfined Pixel
Density
0 : ST
Standard pixel density
1 : HQ
High pixel density
Image reading pixel density to be used for processing at CL

Agreement
side when the image reading pixel density setting registered at required.
the IDT741 is outside the acceptable range.
86 Image Adjust Mode
0 : Type 1 (GP)
Only processing is displayed.
1 : Type 2 (All)
Full screen display.
Image adjustment mode with the general practitioners

specifications.
87 PPS Edit Billing

Supplies
Yes
Edits consumables.
No
Does not edit consumables.
Specifying whether or not to edit the information about

Agreement
requested consumables in the exposure result editing process. required.
Yes
Edits the exposure results.
No
Does not edit the exposure results.
Specifying whether or not to edit the exposure results at the

end of study.
Yes
Handles as an exposure menu name.
No
Does not handle as an exposure menu name.
Specifying whether the Code Meaning

(0040,0100>0040,0008>0008,0104) acquired as the
information about a response from the RIS should be handled
as an exposure menu name.
88 PPS Edit Exposure

Result
89 MWM Menu Name

Mapping
* If 1: Separated is chosen, you can key in a requesting

department name from the study reception window.
* The default setting at shipment from factory is 1:Separated
for the CR Console Lite/Plus (for Japanese users).
* Be sure to key in a one-byte character string.

* Be sure to enter a requesting department code.
Agreement
required.
* This selection takes effect only when Yes is chosen for item
No. 88.
Agreement
required.
* This selection takes effect only when the DICOM PPS

connection is established.
Agreement
required.

010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MU-41

No.
Name
Selection
90 PPS Exposure Status 0040, 0260 > 0080, 0104

Mapping Tag
Tag for exposure information mapping.
Meaning
Specifying the tag for exposure information mapping at the
PPS.
For cluster
connection
Agreement
required.
* If this field is left blank, exposure information mapping does

not take place. The tag VR may be limited depending on the
setting for item No. 91.
Specifying the information to be set for exposure information
91 PPS Exposure Status 0 : None
Mapping Kind
Performs no mapping.
mapping for the standard tag at the PPS.
1 : Div + Status + Kind
Divided exposure count/exposure status/exposure kind (all). * The VR values that can be set for the tag indicated under
item No. 90 are
2 : Div
Divided exposure count only.
LT, ST, UT, and LO for 1;
LT, ST, UT, LO, and SH for 2;
3 : Status + Kind
Exposure status/exposure kind only.
LT, ST, UT, and LO for 3.
Agreement
required.
92 PPS N-SET Timing
Specifying the time at which the PPS study termination notice

0 : Complete
When the study is terminated after receipt of all images.
(N-SET) should be transmitted to the RIS.
1 : Subscribe
When a study termination process is performed after all
menu IPs are registered or when a study termination
process is performed in situations where setup is completed
so as to delete unregistered menus.
2 : DownloadPDA
At the completion of transfer of a study to the POCKET id
Console.
Agreement
required.
93 Use Distribution
Code Depart Name
0 : Yes
Handles as a distribution code.
1 : No
Does not handle as a distribution code.
Specifying whether or not to handle a requesting department

name as a distribution code.
Agreement
required.
94 Film Size Setup
1100000000
Selecting a film size.
Agreement
required.
* The selectable film sizes are 14" 17", 26 36 cm,

14" 14", 10" 12" and 8" 10".
95 Recept Computer
Type
0 : Standard
FujiFilm Standard
1 : SANYO
Sanyo
2 : TOSHIBA
Toshiba
3 : FUJITSU
Fujitsu
Computer type for connection of a receipt computer.

* To use Synapse RIS, select 0: Standard.
Agreement
required.

010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MU-42
CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items (96 to 102 and 105)

No.
Name
Selection
96 Kanji Patients Name No

Auto Convert
Not used.
Yes
Used.
Meaning
Selecting whether or not to use a function for automatically
converting to a kana patient name when a kanji patient name
is input on the hospital-specified patient information input
window. (Applicable only in Japan.)
For cluster
connection
Agreement
required.

97 Recept Computer
C:\User\IIP\ReceptShare\
Info File Share Folder
Specifying a folder in which the shared information file is to be Agreement

saved when a receipt computer is connected.
required.
98 Recept Computer
Info File Polling
Interval ([sec])
1 to 300 (5)
Specifying a time interval at which the polling process is to be

performed to the shared information file.
99 Recept Computer
Info File Type
0 : XMLOnly
Only XML is used.
1 : CSVOnly
Only CSV is used.
2 : Both
Both XML and CSV are used.
Specifying a file type to be handled as an information file when Agreement

a receipt computer is connected.
required.
100 Recept Computer

Info File Temporal
Folder
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Data\Reserved
Specifying a folder in which an information file where an error

occurred is to be backed up when a receipt computer is
connected.
101 Enable Study

Reservation
(Easy Operation
Only)
No
Not used.
Yes
Used.
Specifying whether or not to use the study reservation function Agreement

for general practitioners. (Applicable only in Japan.)
required.
102 Use Space Padding

ID
(Easy Operation
Only)
No
Not used.
Yes
Used.
Specifying whether or not to use a space-padded patient ID for Agreement

general practitioners. (Applicable only in Japan.)
required.
105 Do Next Study At

Study Scren With
End Button Click
Yes
Used.
No
Not used.
Specifying whether or not to use a function that enables to

start the next study with the study window displayed, when the
study end button is clicked on the study window.
Agreement
required.
* Interval from 1 through 4 can be set when Synapse RIS is

connected. Set the interval longer than 5 when a recept
computer is connected.
* To use Synapse RIS, select 0: XMLOnly.

Agreement
required.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MU-43
CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items (106 to 109 and 111 to 114)

No.
Name
106 Automatic Issuance

patient ID
Selection
Yes
Issued automatically.
No
Not issued automatically.
Meaning
For cluster
connection
Specifying whether or not to issue a patient ID automatically.

* What is defined by the IssuanceIdPreset.dat file in the C:\
Progam Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Config folder applies for the
automatic patient ID issuance logic.
See Setup of Rules Applied for Automatic Patient ID
Issuance in FR11: Function-specific Reference.
107 Enable mAs Value

Recalculation
Yes
Recalculated.
No
Not recalculated.
Specifying whether or not to recalculate the mAs value using

the actual PPS result edit function.
108 Xcon Format Type
0 : Old
Conventional X-CON other than for mammography.
1 : Old-Expand
Expanded Shimadzu X-CON format
4 : Mammo1
X-CON-1 for mammography use.
5 : Mammo2
X-CON-2 for mammography use.
6 : Mammo3
X-CON-3 for mammography use (Not used)
Specifying the X-CON type.
109 Xcon Interlock

Command Transfer
Yes
Transmitted.
No
Not transmitted.
Specifying whether or not to transmit the interlock command.
111 Xcon Serial_TX

Baudrate
0 : 1200
1 : 2400
2 : 4800
3 : 9600
Specifying the X-CON serial transfer rate (unit: bit).
112 Xcon No-Response

Timeout
0-255 (20)
Specifying the timeout value for response coming from the

X-CON (unit: 100msec).
1 : Old-Expand is applicable to Shimadzu UD150B-40/L-40/

L-40E/L-40F models.
113 Xcon Data Reception 0-255 (20)

Timeout
Specifying the timeout value for reception of data coming from

the X-CON (unit: 100msec).
114 Media Auto Mount
Specifying whether or not to automatically mount the media

(DVD) at CL startup.
Yes
Automatically mounted.
No
Not mounted automatically.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MU-44

No.
Name
115 Synapse Host for

Web Query
Selection
Synapse
Meaning
For cluster
connection
Specifying name of the Synapse server that offers the Web

Query function.
* Make sure to enter one-byte characters on the keyboard.
* A maximum of 255 alphanumerics can be used to specify the
server name.
116 Web Query Root

Path
/All%20Patients
Specifying a root folder of the Synapse server to be searched

for with the Web Query function.
* A maximum of 128 two-bytes characters and 256
alphanumerics can be used to specify the root folder.
117 Xcon DoseValue1
0 : Average Organ Dose

Assigns the mammary gland absorption dose to Value 1.
1 : Entrance Dose
Assigns the exposure dose to Value 1.
2 : Dose Product
Assigns the area dose to Value 1.
Specifying which of the mammary gland absorption dose,

exposure dose and area dose (of the two types of dose values
transmitted from the X-CON) is to be assigned to Value 1.
118 Xcon DoseValue2
0 : Average Organ Dose

Assigns the mammary gland absorption dose to Value 2.
1 : Entrance Dose
Assigns the exposure dose to Value 2.
2 : Dose Product
Assigns the area dose to Value 2.
Specifying which of the mammary gland absorption dose,

exposure dose and area dose (of the two types of dose values
transmitted from the X-CON) is to be assigned to Value 2.
119 Enable Velocity

Sensitivity Button
0 : No
Hides all.
1 : Yes (Velocity_T Only)
Displays only on the VELOCITY T.
2 : Yes (Velocity_U Only)
Displays only on the VELOCITY U.
3 : Yes (Both)
Displays on both the VELOCITY T and U.
Specifying whether to display or hide the high-sensitivity

selection button for high-speed erasure of data on the
VELOCITY.
120 Xcon No-Data Default 0 : Output Default Condition

Output
Outputs the default database value by setting it up to the
tag.
1 : Doesnt Output Anything
Does not set up exposure-related information to the tag.
Specifying the setting for output of actual result value when it

couldnt be received from the X-CON.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MU-45

No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
122 External Character

Conversion
0 : Replace asterisk
Replaces an external character with the asterisk.
1 : DataCut
Cut off the kanji patient name.
Specifying how to convert unspecified external characters,

used to represent a kanji patient name, that have been input
from the outside, such as RIS.
123 MWM Not Received

Condition Delete
Study
No
Study information is not deleted.
Yes
Study information is deleted.
Specifying whether or not to delete the study information when

C-FIND-RES is notified even though the Network WL tab has
not been selected.
124 Enable Clear View for Yes

Mammography
Enabled.
No
Disabled.
Specifying whether or not to enable mammography images to

be displayed on the high-luminance view box.
125 Clear View Mode:

Offset GS (100)
-288 to 288 ( -11)
Specifying an offset value ( 100 times) to be added to the

GS value when displaying a mammography image on a highluminance view box.

Offset GA (10)
-80 to 80 ( 1)

GA value when displaying a mammography image on a highluminance view box.

Offset DRE (10)
-20 to 20 ( 4)

DRE value when displaying a mammography image on a
high-luminance view box.
For cluster
connection
* To enable this option, also confirm setup values for Nos. 125
to 130.
* Specify 2 when the SL-IC300 is connected.

Fix DRT
A to T ( E)
Specifying a fixed value (A to T) for DRT when displaying a

mammography image on a high-luminance view box.
* This parameter is used whenever a mammography image is
displayed on a high-luminance view box.

Offset MDE (10)
-20 to 20 ( 4)

MDE value when displaying a mammography image on a highluminance view box.
* Specify 2 when the SL-IC300 is connected.
130 Clear View Mode: Fix A to T ( E)

MDT
Specifying a fixed value (A to T) for MDT when displaying a

mammography image on a high-luminance view box.
* This parameter is used whenever a mammography image is
displayed on a high-luminance view box.

010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MU-46

No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
131 Enable MultipleStudy Yes

Permitted.
No
Not permitted.
Specifying whether or not to permit multiple studies to start at

the same time.
132 Enable SpecialPrint
Specifying whether or not to enable the special print function.
Yes
Enabled.
No
Disabled.
For cluster
connection
* Also confirm the setup value for No. 77 of PRINTER setup

items.
133 Use 12on1 Film Print Yes

in MediaList
Used.
No
Not used.
Specifying whether or not to use 12on1 format output from the

media list.
134 MWM
StudyInstanceUID
Regeneration
Yes
Permitted.
No
Not permitted.
Specifying whether or not to permit regeneration of

StudyInstanceUID for the MWM study.
135 Enable Swap Image

In Order
Yes
Enabled.
No
Disabled.
Specifying whether or not to allow study image swapping/

menu change when an order is received.
136 Xcon Serial_TX

Control Port2
0 to 32 ( 0)
(Type in 0 if this number is not used.)
Serial port number used for the X-CON control.

For Siemens mammography X-CON
137 Exposure Guidance

URL
http://localhost : 8080
Top-page URL of the exposure guidance (Pico positioning

guidance).
* If Yes is selected, normal print is disabled.
* Applicable only in Japan.

138 FUJITSU Recept
Computer
Receiving Port
Number
1 to 65535 ( 5011)
139 FUJITSU Recept

Computer
Receiving Timeout
1 to 1000 ( 1000)
Port number for the FUJITSU receipt computer to receive

data.
Timeout value for the FUJITSU receipt computer to receive
continuous text. (Unit = msec)
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MU-47

No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
140 Enable IP Use Count Yes

List
Enabled.
No
Disabled.
Specifying whether or not to enable list-form display of

information of how many times the IP was used.
141 Enable IP Use Count Yes

Reset
Enabled.
No
Disabled.
Specifying whether or not to enable reset of the IP use count.
142 Xcon Serial_TX

Parity
Specifying the X-CON serial transfer parity.
143 TOSHIBA-RIS
IpAddress
0 : none
1 : odd
2 : even
172.16.1.20
For cluster
connection
* Use the LOG SHARE setup function to register the host

name and IP address of the CL targeted for calculation of IP
use count information.
* Leave the setting to its default value of No.
[Toshiba RIS] IP address of RIS client device. 15 characters at

the maximum.
144 TOSHIBA-RIS
ConnectPortForRIS
0 to 65535 ( 6001)
145 TOSHIBA-RIS
ConnectPortForIIP
0 to 65535 ( 6000)
146 TOSHIBA-RIS
RisDefaultURL
http://172.16.1.30/e-ris/java/fcr-ris.htm?logincode=tosrim
[Toshiba RIS] Port number for RIS connection (RIS side).

[Toshiba RIS] Port number for RIS connection (CL side).
[Toshiba RIS] Default URL of RIS. 256 characters at the
maximum.
147 TOSHIBA-RIS
TemporaryFolder
\\172.16.1.20\RisShare
[Toshiba RIS] Folder shared between RIS and CL. 256

characters at the maximum.
148 TOSHIBA-RIS
ExposureStartMsg
TimeOut
0 to 60 ( 5)
[Toshiba RIS] Time-out duration from sending an exposure

start message till receiving a reply from RIS.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MU-48

No.
Name
Selection
149 TOSHIBA-RIS
ExposureStartMsg
RetryCount
0 to 10 ( 3)
150 TOSHIBA-RIS
PatListDisplayMsg
TimeOut
0 to 60 ( 5)
151 TOSHIBA-RIS
PatListDisplayMsg
RetryCount
0 to 10 ( 3)
152 TOSHIBA-RIS
ExposureEndMsg
TimeOut
0 to 60 ( 5)
153 TOSHIBA-RIS
ExposureEndMsg
RetryCount
0 to 10 ( 3)
154 TOSHIBA-RIS
ApplicationEndMsg
TimeOu
0 to 60 ( 2)
155 TOSHIBA-RIS
ApplicationEndMsg
RetryCount
0 to 10 ( 3)
156 TOSHIBA-RIS
ConnectionWatch
MsgTimeOut
0 to 60 ( 2)
157 TOSHIBA-RIS
ExternalInputMsg
TimeOut
0 to 60 ( 2)
Meaning
For cluster
connection
[Toshiba RIS] Number of retries made for sending an exposure

start message.
[Toshiba RIS] Time-out duration from sending a patient list
display request message till receiving a reply from RIS.
[Toshiba RIS] Number of retires made for sending a patient list
display request message.
[Toshiba RIS] Time-out duration from sending an exposure
completion notification message till receiving a reply from RIS.
[Toshiba RIS] Number of retries made for sending an exposure
completion notification message.
[Toshiba RIS] Time-out duration from sending a RIS
termination request message till receiving a reply from RIS.
[Toshiba RIS] Number of retries made for sending a RIS
termination request message.
[Toshiba RIS] Time-out duration from sending a connection
monitor message till receiving a reply from RIS.
[Toshiba RIS] Time-out duration from sending an external input
information notification message till receiving a reply from RIS.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MU-49
CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items (158 to 163, 165 and 167)

No.
Name
Selection
158 TOSHIBA-RIS
ExternalInputMsg
RetryCount
0 to 10 ( 3)
159 TOSHIBA-RIS
ConnectionWatch
MsgRetryCount
0 to 10 ( 3)
160 TOSHIBA-RIS
IFFilesPreservation
Period
0 to 365 ( 10)
161 TOSHIBA-RIS
ResultType
0 : With series
With series information set
1 : With no series
Without series information set
Meaning
[Toshiba RIS] Number of retries made for sending an external
input information notification message.
[Toshiba RIS] Number of retries made for sending a connection
monitor message.
[Toshiba RIS] Retention period for shared folder information
file (days).
[Toshiba RIS] Type of exposure result information file. With or
without series information set.
0 to 120 ( 60)
162 TOSHIBA-RIS
RISInitializeStartMsg
TimeOut
[Toshiba RIS] Time-out duration from initiating RIS screen till

receiving a RIS initialization completion notification message.
163 Enable Auto IP

Shelter for 550x
Yes
Enabled.
No
Disabled.
Specifying whether to enable or disable the Auto IP Shelter

function.
165 Enable Auto Marker
Yes
Used.
No
Not used.
Specifying whether or not to use the function to automatically

embed markers (lead characters) in an exposed image.
167 PDI Drive Letter
For cluster
connection
Specifying an alphabetical letter assigned to the drive on the

CD-R drive targeted for output by using the PDI function.
* Use an alphabetical letter in capital.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MU-50
CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items (168 to 171 and 177 to 182)

No.
Name
168 PDI Use CrtLut
Selection
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\CrtLut\PDI.lut
Meaning
For cluster
connection
Specifying SoftcopyLUT applied to a processed image by

using the PDI function.
* Use the absolute path to specify the LUT filename (including
extension). If it is left empty, no CrtLut processing is
performed.
* No extension is included in the default setting determined by
software version V6.0 (B). To use the default setting from
software version V6.0 (B), add extension .lut to the end of
the filename.
169 PDI Image Density
0 : ST
1 : HQ
Specifying pixel density of a stored image by using the PDI

function.
170 PDI Use Multibyte
Yes
Included.
No
Not included.
Specifying whether or not to include multi-byte information in

the DICOM contents by using the PDI function.
171 PDI Transfer Syntax
0 : Explicit VR Little Endian

1 : Jpeg Lossless
Specifying a DICOM contents transfer syntax by using the PDI

function.
* Select 0:Explicit VR Little Endian if complied with IHE.
177 DAP Serial_TX Parity 0:none

1:odd
2:even
178 DAP Serial_TX
0-32 ( 0)
Control port
Specifying a DAP serial transfer parity.
179 DAP Message Trial

Count
1-255 ( 3)
Specifying a DAP message transfer trial count.
180 DAP Address
Specifying a DAP address character while a DAP is

connected.
(Specify a capital alphabet.)
181 Wait Time for

Response. From
DAP
1-30 ( 1)
Specifying a time to wait (in seconds) until a response is

received after a related command was transferred to the DAP.
182 DAP Status Display

Strings

( DAP)
Specifying a caption used to indicate a related status while a

DAP is connected.
Specifying a DAP serial transfer control port number.

(0: Not used.)
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MU-51

No.
Name
185 Enable Display

Reverse Marker
186 Reverse Marker

Position [%] (X\Y)
Selection
Meaning
Yes
Enables the function to automatically display the right-andleft reverse marker.
No
Disables the function to automatically display the right-andleft reverse marker.
Specifying whether to enable or disable the function to

automatically display the right-and-left reverse marker.

( 12\5)
Specifying relative positions of the X coordinate and the Y

coordinate at the center, in relation to the width of the rightand-left reverse marker.
For cluster
connection
* Determine the right-and-left reverse marker to

C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Config\ReverseMarker.bmp.
* Determining the top left as the original point, delimit the

numbers from 0 to 100 with \. The fist figure is set to
represent relative position of the X coordinate and the other
that follows is to represent relative position of the Y
coordinate.
187 Reverse Marker
Color (Fore ColorBack Color)
0 : White-Black
While - Black
1 : White-Clear
White - Clear
2 : Black-White
Black - White
3 : Black-Clear
Black - Clear
Specifying foreground and background colors of the right-andleft reverse marker.
188 Mass Order Site

Code Mapping Tag

(Blank)
Specifying to which tag the site identification code, entered

using the screening examination ordering function, is to be
mapped.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MU-52
CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items (197 to 199, 307 and 308)

No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
197 Alert MSG When

Patient Information
will be Modified
SynapseRIS
Yes

Displays the message when the patient information is
changed.
No

Dose not display the message when the patient information
is changed.
Specifying whether or not to display the message when the

patient information is changed at the time of connecting to
Synapse RIS.
198 Grid Data Sort Order
0:String
1:Number
0:Not Overwrite
1:Overwrite
A condition for sorting records in the list window.
307 Simplified Ordering

Report Share Folder
C:\Usr\IIP\OrderingReportShare\
Specifying the directory to share files of the actual result

information when connecting to Synapse RIS.
308 Synapse RIS URL
http://localhost:8080
Specifying the URL to access the Synapse RIS.
199 Overwrite of
the Patient Info
For cluster
connection
Specifying whether or not to overwrite patient data in the local

drive with the one acquired from receipt computer.
(Applicable only in Japan.)
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MU-53
31. ID Online Acquisition Info. Code Setup
CP850 : DOS Latin1
00000504.EPS
CP1252 : Win Latin1
00000503.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MU-54
3.7 Configuration Details 7. CONFIG OPTION

CONFIG OPTION setup items (2 to 7)
No.
2
Name
Selection
Meaning
For cluster
connection
Enable Trimming
Function
Yes
Enables the trimming function.
No
Disables the trimming function.
Specifying whether or not to enable the trimming function.
Enable Reader QC
Function
Yes
Enables the Image Reader QC function.
No
Disables the Image Reader QC function.
Specifying whether or not to enable the Image Reader QC

function.
Agreement
required.
Enable Display
Previous Study
Function
Yes
Enables the Scroll View function.
No
Disables the Scroll View function.
Specifying whether to enable or disable the Scroll View

function (previous study monitoring function).
Agreement
required.
Enable Synapse
WebQuery
Yes
Enables the Synapse Web Query function.
No
Disables the Synapse Web Query function.
Specifying whether to enable or disable the Synapse Web

Query function.
Enable S/L Value

Restriction Function
Yes
Performs setting and warning.
No
Not to perform setting and warning.
Specifying whether or not to perform setting and warning for

the allowable range of S and L values.
Enable
RetakeAnalysis
Function
Yes
Enables the Retake Analysis function.
No
Disables the Retake Analysis function.
Specifying whether or not to enable the Retake Analysis

function.
* Settings for whether the trimming function is enabled or

disabled must be the same in a hospital.
* Select Yes when 8. Enable MammoImage Alignment
Function is enabled.
Agreement
required.
* Note that if the Scroll View function is enabled, you can

select only delayed delivery for image delivery setting.
* To enable this option, use the log storage function offered by

the User Utility to collect necessary logs beforehand.
* To enable this option, specify Yes also for Nos. 34 and 51
of IMAGE MODALITY setup items.
* Use the LOG SHARE setup function to register the host
name and IP address of the CL targeted for calculation of
Retake Analysis.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MU-55
CONFIG OPTION setup items (8 to 10, 12 and 13)

No.
8
Name
Meaning
Yes
Enables the positioning function (button displayed).
No
Disables the positioning function (button not displayed).
Specifying whether to enable the mammography image

positioning function (function button displayed accordingly) or
disable it (function button not displayed).
Yes
Enables 12on1 format output.
No
Disables 12on1 format output.
Specifying whether or not to enable 12on1 format output.
Yes
Enables the exposure guidance function.
No
Disables the exposure guidance function.
Specifying whether or not to enable the exposure guidance

function for general practitioners.
12 Enable MammoQC
Function
Yes
Displays the button.
No
Does not display the button.
Specifying whether or not to display the button to call up the

Mammo QC function.
13 Enable Connecting
DAP Directly
Yes
Connect directly to a DAP.
No
Not to connect directly to a DAP.
Specifying whether or not to connect CL directly to a DAP.
Enable
MammoImage
Alignment Function
Selection
Enable 12on1 Film

Print Function
10 Enable Exposure
Guidance
For cluster
connection
* To enable this option, also specify Yes for No. 2.

* When Yes is specified for this item, set up a used MPM
code using the User Utility.
* To enable this option, also confirm setup value for No. 133 of
CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items and setup values for Nos.
78, 79 and 80 of PRINTER setup items.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MU-56
3.8 Configuration Details 8. CONFIG QC
3.8 Configuration Details 8. CONFIG QC

CONFIG QC setup items (1 to 6)
No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
For cluster
connection
Visible QC Record
Delete Button
Yes
Displays the button.
No
Does not display the button.
Specifying whether or not to show the Delete button on the

Image Reader QC history information display window.
Agreement
required.
Destination Path of
QC Record File
E: \
Specifying a directory for storage of history information on the

Image Reader QC history information display window.
Agreement
required.

3
Country
0:Japanese
Shows the country (area) where this equipment is used

currently.
Visible QCRecord
Delete Button
Yes
Shows the button.
No
Does not show the button.
Specifying whether or not to show the Delete button on the

Mammo QC history information display window.
Destination Path of
QC Record File
E: \
Specifying a directory for storage of history information on the

Mammo QC history information display window.
Select CSV Output

Folder
1: UseQCTransferPath
2: Last Folder
Specifying how to determine an equipment unit where history

information is to be stored on the Mammo QC history
information display window.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MU-57
3.9 Configuration Details 9. CONFIG PDA
3.9 Configuration Details 9. CONFIG PDA
CONFIG PDA setup items (1 to 6) (Applicable only in Japan)

No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
BatteryWarning1
0 to 100 ( 30)
Specifying the timing when the first warning is given to indicate

the remaining battery power.
This is specified according to the ratio assuming the fully
charged battery to be 100.
BatteryWarning2
0 to 100 ( 20)
Specifying the timing when the second warning is given to

indicate the remaining battery power.
This is specified according to the ratio assuming the fully
charged battery to be 100.
For cluster
connection
* When the remaining battery power is lower than the specified

value, the POCKET id Console becomes inoperative. In such
an instance, charge the POCKET id Console main unit
properly.
* Determine values for 1. BatteryWarning1 and
2. BatteryWarning2 so that 1. BatteryWarning1 >
2. BatteryWarning2.
3
StudyFilePath
\Program Files\FujiFilm\P-Console\Job
Specifying a folder path for the POCKET id Console where the

study information file is to be stored.
* Use a folder to be specified according to this folder path
exclusively for the POCKET id Console.
* Specify a folder that is different from the one specified in 4.
CustomFilePath below.
CustomFilePath
\Program Files\FujiFilm\P-Console\Custom
Specifying a folder path for the POCKET id Console where the

screen customize setting file and display item setting file are to
be stored.
* Use a folder to be specified according to this folder path
exclusively for the POCKET id Console.
* Specify a folder that is different from the one specified in 3.
StudyFilePath above.
LoginFlag
0 : OFF
Not to display the login window at startup.
1 : ON
Displays the login window at startup.
Specifying whether login entry is essential or not at startup.

When ON is specified, entry of technologist name and
password is required every time logging onto the POCKET id
Console.
* Entered technologist name and password are transferred
using the CR Consoles User Utility function.
PDAShare Interval
30 to 300 ( 60)
File sharing polling interval (sec) in PDA connection of LAN

connection mode. (reserved)

010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MU-58
3.10 Configuration Details 10. CONFIG QR
3.10 Configuration Details 10. CONFIG QR

CONFIG QR setup items (1 to 3)
No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
Retrieved Image
Viewer Finish Mode
0 : Normal
Normal finish (finishing after clicking the finish button)
1 : Finish After Reprint
Finishes after generating reprint.
Reverse LUT For

Processed Image
Specifying whether or not to perform LUT reverse-conversion

0 : None
No Console reverse-conversion processing is performed.
processing when a processed image is retrieved.
1 : SendConfigurationInformation
Console reverse-conversion processing is performed on the
printer side after LUT type information is sent to the printer.
2 : ApplyReverseLUT
Console reverse-conversion processing is performed at the
output process of the console.
The Patient Format

: (1) family
*
For Search Condition *^*
: (2) family, given
: (3) family, given, middle
*^*^*
: (4) family, given, middle, prefix
*^*^*^*
: (5) family, given, middle, prefix, suffix
*^*^*^*^*
: (1) Multi-byte support to (1) above.
*=*
*^*=*^*
*^*^*=*^*^*
*^*^*^*=*^*^*^*
*^*^*^*^*=*^*^*^*^* : (5) Multi-byte support to (5) above.
For cluster
connection
Specifying image confirmation finish mode.
Specifying which element(s) of a patient name is to be

matched with the search conditions.
* A patient name consists of the following five elements.
This setup item is to determine which of those five elements
are to be matched with the search conditions.
family, given, middle, prefix, suffix
* * appearing in the selective alternatives at left represents
one of the patient name elements.
^shows delimitation between the elements, and =shows
that multi-byte characters can be typed in.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MU-59
3.11 Setting the Name Elements for DICOM Connection
3.11 Setting the Name Elements for DICOM

Connection
5.
Perform the setup steps indicated below:
This appendix explains about the procedure for changing the name
element sequence and delimiter.
At some institutions, a patient name is displayed on the monitor by

changing the sequence of its elements. For example, the name Fuji
Taro may be displayed as Taro Fuji (with the given name and family
name positions interchanged).
II
The DICOM protocol stipulates only one sequence of name elements.

Therefore, it is necessary to define the relationship between the name
element sequence stipulated by standards (or conditions) other than
DICOM and the name element sequence stipulated by DICOM.
1.
Start the Service Utility of the CL.
2.
Click
3.
Click the
4.
Select a standard (condition) (e.g., FINP).
00000424.EPS
I. To validate this standard (condition) change, check it ( ).

II. Enter a one-byte character delimiter between name elements.
u NOTES u
Any one-byte characters can be used as a delimiter. However, a
one-byte space ( ), hyphen (-), comma (,) or period (.) should
normally be used.
.
sign within
III
One or two kinds of delimiters can be defined (either can be used

as a delimiter). For instance, enter -, if you wish to define both of
hyphen and comma.
Input example: Element3=given, middle-family
III. Enter a multi-byte character delimiter between name elements.
u NOTES u
Any one- or two-byte characters can be used as a delimiter.
However, a two-byte space ( ) or hyphen () should normally be
used.
Standard (or condition)
One or two kinds of delimiters can be defined (either can be used

as a delimiter). For instance, enter if you wish to define both of
two-byte space and hyphen.
Input example: Element3=given middle family
00000423.EPS
IMPORTANT
Do not change the settings for DICOM_MWM_PPS, DICOM_IN, or
DICOM_OUT.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MU-60
3.12 Setting Up the DICOM Print Film Sorting Function
6.
Set up name elements for one-byte characters.

Enter name elements directly on the keyboard. To separate one name
element from the other, use a delimiter defined in step 4. above.
One name element
(family (name))
Two name elements
(family given)
Three name elements
(family given middle)
Four name elements
(family given middle
prefix)
3.12 Setting Up the DICOM Print Film

Sorting Function
When a printer targeted for DIOCM printout has a multiple number of
BIN (sorter), film output is possible to different BINs accordingly
depending on the requirement.
In the procedure described herein, the printer targeted for DICOM
printout is the FM-DP L and the requirement (recognition key) for film
output to each BIN is the equipment identification code (DEV_CODE),
as illustrated below.
u Setup example
Five name elements

prefix suffix)
BIN1
MU000010.EPS
7.
BIN2
FM-DPL
Set up name elements for multi-byte characters.

Enter name elements directly on the keyboard. To separate one name
element from the other, use a delimiter defined in step 5. above.
One name element
(family (name))
Two name elements
(family given)
Three name elements
(family given middle)
Four name elements
prefix)
Five name elements
prefix suffix)
RU-1
Equipment
identification code : A
BIN setting :
1
Use the Configuration (F) menu to save the setup data.
RU-3
B
2
C
2
CL
00000400.EPS
Described below is the setup procedure.
1.
Start up CL Service Utility mode.
2.
3.
Select
and
from the tree on the left-hand side of the window. Select
then the DICOM print AE name (fujiprinter - DICOM FM-DP L).
The AE setup window for the FM-DP L opens on the right-hand
side of the window.
MU000011.EPS
8.
RU-2
4.
Click
The DICOMSetup window opens.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MU-61
5.
7.
Make the following selections and entry.
Select
II
III
00000055.EPS
I. Select BIN_I.
II. Select a recognition key (e.g.: DEV_CODE).
(Indent for REQ_SRV, MPM and BODY_PART.)
III. Enter a BIN number (e.g.: 1).
REFERENCE
In the Default Bin Number box, specify the default BIN number to
which the film is to be output when an input number verification is
not possible.
6.
Click
00000054.EPS
The right-hand side of the window changes to the film sorting

setup list.
8.
Click
The Film Sorting window opens.
You are returned to the previous window.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MU-62
9.
The window below shows the results of setup example presented at

the beginning of this section.
Make the following selections and entries.
II
III
00000053.EPS
00000052.EPS
I. Select the AE name.

II. Enter a verification data item.
When the recognition key specified at step 5. above is DEV_
CODE, enter an equipment identification code
(e.g.: A, B or C).
When the recognition key specified at step 5. above is REQ_
SRV*, enter a requesting department name (e.g.: Radio).
When the recognition key specified at step 5. above is MPM*,
enter an MPM code (e.g.: 0200).
When the recognition key specified at step 5. above is BODY_
PART*, enter an anatomical region (e.g.: CHEST).
(Note that * indicates an indent.)
III. Enter a BIN number.
10. Click
You are returned to the previous window.
11. To set up other verification data items continuously, repeat

steps 8. to 10 . above.
12. Use the Configuration menu to save the setup data.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MU-63
3.13 Patient Information Sharing Function Setup
3.13 Patient Information Sharing Function

Setup
5.
Enter settings as directed below:
The patient information sharing function is exercised to share the

patient information between two or more CLs and IDT-IV units existing
in the same network.
In compliance with an ID inquiry (IP barcode) coming from the Image

Reader, the relevant CL will acquire requested ID information from any
IDT-IV or CL even when that CL has no such information.
II
When the IDT-IV and CLs are interconnected as shown below, the
patient information sharing function is set up to enable the units
(e.g., idt4-a and cl-a) to share the patient information.
III
IV
u Connection example
group-A
idt4-a
group-B
172.16.1.101
172.16.1.201
idt4-b
GateWay
cl-a
V
172.16.1.102
172.16.1.202
00000555.EPS
I.
II.
III.
IV.
cl-b
00000549.EPS
Enter the host name.

Enter the IP address.
Select a machine attribute.
Specify the group name.
u NOTE u
The setup procedure is described below:
1.
When you specify the group name for the first time, the GroupName
field contains no entry. Therefore, enter a group name from the
keyboard.
2.
V. When you define the machine as a gateway, check
3.
Click
u NOTE u
When the patient information is to be shared by groups, it is

necessary to define one unit of each group as the gateway (check
).
The right-hand area of the window changes to the CONFIG\IDT

CONNECTING window.
4.
Click
The IDT Connection window opens.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
6.
Click
MU-64
3.14 MAC Address Manual Input
7.
To set up another machine, repeat steps 4. through 6.
8.
With the Config (F) menu, save the setup data.
3.14 MAC Address Manual Input

When the MAC address cannot automatically be acquired, this utility is
used to make a manual entry and let the CL recognize it.
The window shown below indicates the results that are obtained when
the equipment is set up as indicated in the connection example at the
beginning of this section.
u NOTE u
If the MAC address is not acquired, the CL-AP does not start up (Error
20110 or 20111 occurs).
When the following window opens and indicates that the values in the
MAC address fields are all 0s, it means that the MAC address is not
automatically acquired.
In such an instance, enter a 12-digit value (00:50:DA:C4:D5:8D when
only one CL is used). The next time the CL starts up, it recognizes the
entered value as the MAC address so that the CL-AP starts running.
If two or more CLs are used, make the following entries. For each CL
addition, increment the last two-digit value by one (in hexadecimal
notation).
00000556.EPS
2nd unit : 00 : 50 : DA : C4 : D5 : 8E
3rd unit : 00 : 50 : DA : C4 : D5 : 8F
4th unit : 00 : 50 : DA : C4 : D5 : 90
MU000008.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MU-65
3.15 Log Information Sharing Function Setup
3.15 Log Information Sharing Function

Setup
Setup of the log information sharing function enables you to use the
Retake Analysis function and IP use count calculation function.
u NOTE u
6.
Click
7.
To register other CLs successively, repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Use the Config (F) menu to save the setup data.
To make use of the Retake Analysis function, the OpRetakeAnalysis

option key must be installed.
New setup
Described below is the procedure used to newly set up host name and
IP address of the CL with which the log information is to be shared.
1.
Start up the CL Service Utility.
2.
3.
Click
4.
Click
.
.
The Log Share window opens.
5.
I
II
I. Enter the host name.

II. Enter the IP address.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
00000565.EPS
MU-66
3.15 Log Information Sharing Function Setup
Deleting unnecessary settings
Changing settings
1.
Described below is the procedure used to change host names and IP

addresses of other CLs with which the log information is to be shared.
2.
NOTE
3.
Click
Host name and IP address of this equipment are only to be displayed

and cannot be changed.
4.
On the right-hand side pane of the window, select a CL

name to be deleted and then click [Delete].
1.
2.
3.
Click
4.
Select host name and IP address of the CL targeted for

change.
5.
Click
The Log Share window opens.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
6.
Change host name and IP address appropriately.
7.
Click
8.
To change settings of other CLs successively, repeat steps

4 through 7.
9.
MU-67
TPS 9415 TD15

TPS 9416 TD15
Install an LUT file that matches the display characteristics.
TPS 9416TD15_2
REFERENCE
PRESTO! (B/W)
The LUT file is used to adjust luminance values measured on an image

displayed on the monitor.
PRESTO! (Color)
1.
ikegami MDM2130
nanao L350P
2.
Click [LUT].
nanao L351P
The Monitor List window opens.
3.
Select the connected display and then click
Select the connected

display monitor type.
nanao SL-IC200
nanao L362T
Linear LUT
nanao Radiforce
GS310-CLG
nanao Radiforce R31
nanao L568M
nanao L560T-C

: Super Resolution LCD Monitor SL-IC300
(monochrome)
(color)
: Ikegami 1k landscape monitor
: EIZO 15" LCD monitor with a touch panel
(model L350P-TS)
(model L351P-TS)
: LCD SL-IC200
(model L362T)
: Linear (straight line gradation) LUT
: LCD monitor SL-IC300 (color monitor)

(model L560T-C)
nanao Radiforce G22-CL: LCD monitor (2M monochrome monitor)
nanao Radiforce GS220 : LCD monitor (2M monochrome monitor)
: LCD monitor (3M monochrome monitor)
nanao Radiforce
GS310-ECN
nanao Radiforce RX320 : LCD monitor (3M color monitor)
Settings are thus completed, and the system returns to the IIP
Service Utility window.
IN000129.EPS
u NOTE u
To use a nanao L351P (model L351P-TS) with the CL software A08 or
earlier, install the LUT file on the FD provided with the LCD monitor.
[Installation procedures]
Copy the lut.txt and nanao_L351P.env files on the FD to the
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\lut folder (overwrite the lut.txt file).
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MU-68
5. Restoring/Backing Up the Configuration File Configuration Restore/Backup
5. Restoring/Backing Up
the Configuration File
Configuration Restore/Backup
For details of procedures used for restoring the configuration
file, see 14. Restoring the CL-Config in RI: Reinstalling the
Software.
1.
4.
The system returns to the Configuration Restore/Backup window.
5.
Click
u NOTES u
Even when the save process ends, no message appears to
indicate it. While the save process is being performed, the mouse
cursor is replaced by the mark. When the mark changes
back to the mouse cursor, it means that the save process is
ended.
Note, however, that the mark appears only when the mouse
cursor is positioned within the Configuration Restore/Backup
window.
Click [Configuration Restore/Backup] on the main menu.

The configuration Restore/Backup window opens.
2.
Select a save destination directory and then click

.
Click [...] for the Configuration Backup area.
If, on the PC where an FD is used, a message appears prompting

you to change the FD, insert a new FD into the PC.
6.
Click
The system returns to the main menu.

00000417.EPS
A window opens, prompting you to specify the save destination.
3.
Click the downward arrow mark (
) within
in the Drive: box to
select the drive onto which the configuration file is to be

saved.
The Directory: box shows the directory structure of the selected
drive.
REFERENCE
If drive a is selected, a message appears to prompt for the
insertion of an FD.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MU-69
6. Retrieving EDR Data Retrieve EDR Backup Data
6. Retrieving EDR Data

Retrieve EDR Backup Data
1.
2.
Select one or more EDR data.

When selecting only one piece of EDR data
I. Select an EDR data item by clicking it.
The selected item becomes highlighted.
Click [Retrieve EDR Backup Data] on the main menu.
When selecting two or more contiguous EDR data (selecting all

data between A and B in the window illustration below)
A list of EDR data appears.
A
B
EDR data list
00000068.EPS
00000067.EPS
REFERENCE
No EDR data appears immediately after installation.
EDR data listings do not appear until images are transferred to the
CL.
I.
Click the first item of a set of contiguous data (A002 in the

above window illustration).
II. Hold down the Shift key and click the last item (A006 in the
above window illustration) of the contiguous data set.
All the items from the first to the last become highlighted.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MU-70
6. Retrieving EDR Data Retrieve EDR Backup Data
4.
When selecting two or more noncontiguous EDR data
) within
in the Drive box to select the drive

onto which the EDR data is to be saved.
The left-hand area of the window shows the directory structure of
the selected drive.
A
B
5.
Select the save destination directory and then click

.
REFERENCE
If drive a is selected, a message appears to prompt for the
insertion of an FD.
00000069.EPS
I.
Click the first item to be selected (A002 in the above window

illustration).
When the save process ends, the system returns to the Retrieve
EDR Backup Data window.

II. Hold down the Ctrl key and click the second item to be
selected (A004 in the above window illustration).
The second item becomes highlighted as well.
III. Hold down the Ctrl key and click the third item to be selected
(A006 in the above window illustration).
6.
Click
The third item becomes highlighted as well.

IV. To select any additional item, repeat step III.
REFERENCE
Even if highlighted items are hidden when the window scrolls,
they are retained as selected items.
3.
Click
A window opens, prompting you to specify the save destination.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MU-71
7. Verifying the Connection to Other Connected Equipment Verify Connection
7. Verifying the Connection to

Other Connected Equipment
Verify Connection
1.
2.
Verify the Ping or DICOM connection as directed below:

Verifying the connection with the Ping
I.
Click [Verify Connection] on the main menu.
In the
field, enter the host
name or IP address of the equipment to be subjected to

connection verification.
The Verify Connection window opens.
REFERENCE
Clicking the downward arrow mark
within
lists the host names of

equipment registered in the Service Utility.
II. Click

III. Verify the connection.

The connection is normal when the following message is
displayed four times within the command prompt window.

00000070.EPS
Reply from 172.16.1.20: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128
REFERENCE
Values for time<10ms and TTL=128 in the message above
vary depending on the network status. Connection remains
normal even though such values vary.
IV. Close the command prompt window.
The system returns to the Verify Connection window.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MU-72
7. Verifying the Connection to Other Connected Equipment Verify Connection
Verifying the DICOM equipment connection
3.
u NOTE u
To verify connections between DICOM equipment units, it is
necessary that both this equipment and other connected
equipment must support Service Class for the Verification
function.
Click
For details of the setup procedure, see CL+HI-C655/

QA-WS/FCR VIEW (DICOM CR Storage) in
OE3: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment.
I.
within
to specify the AE name of
the DICOM equipment to be subjected to connection

verification.
II. Click
III. Verify the connection.

When the window below opens, the connection is OK.
00000246.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MU-73
8.1 Initializing the Image Database
8. Management of Various
Databases DataBase Utility
2.
Click [DataBase Utility].

The ImageDB Initialization window opens.
This section describes the procedures for initializing the image

database, deleting the queued output images (clearing the contents of
the image output queue), and initializing the patient database.
8.1 Initializing the Image Database

u NOTES u
When the OS is installed newly, be sure to initialize the image
database. If you start up the CL-AP without initializing the image
database, an error window opens (error code: 50001, 20001, 30107,
30151, 20110, etc.).
If the MSDE is not running, database initialization cannot be effected.
While the MSDE is running, the icon is displayed in the task tray
at the lower right corner of the screen. If the icon is not displayed,
restart the PC.
00000130.EPS
3.
Click
u NOTE u
If
is clicked with the version B software, a
confirmation window like that shown below is opened.

Click
to proceed to the next step.
[For Windows Vista]

If the SQL Server is not running, database initialization cannot be
effected. If it is not running, restart the PC.
If the image output queue is not empty, database initialization cannot
be effected. Delete the images from the image output queue.
For the procedure for deleting the images from the image output
queue, see 8.2 Clearing the Contents of the Image Output
Queue.
1.
MU000018.EPS
The command prompt window opens to display the following

message:

For the Service Utility startup procedure, see
1. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility.
00000184.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MU-74
8.2 Clearing the Contents of the Image Output Queue
4.

The image database initialization process ends in about
20 seconds.
8.2 Clearing the Contents of the Image

Output Queue
u NOTES u
1.
When the following message appears, the image database is not

initialized.
2.

The DataBase Utility window opens.
It failed in initialized DB.

Check that the MSDE is running and that no image is placed on the
image output queue.
To start the MSDE
Restart the PC. Verify that the
tray.
Click
u NOTE u
icon is displayed in the task
[For Windows Vista]

To start the SQL Server
I. Restart the PC.
II. Select Control Panel from the
3.
If
is clicked with the version B
software, a confirmation window like that shown below is opened.

Click
menu and then
double-click Administrative Tools.

III. Double-click Computer Management.
IV. Sequentially select Computer Management, Service and
Programs, SQL Server Component Manager and then SQL
Server 2005 Service.
V. Make sure that the SQL Server (MSSQLSERVER) is running.
If the image output queue is not empty
Delete the images from the image output queue.
MU000019.EPS

message:
For the procedure for deleting the images from the

image output queue, see 8.2. Clearing the Contents of
the Image Output Queue.
5.
When the message Press any key to continue appears

again, press the <Enter> key.
00000347.EPS
You are then returned to the ImageDB Initialization window.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MU-75
8.3 Initializing the Patient Database
4.

The images are then deleted from the output queue and you are
returned to the DataBase Utility window.
5.
Click
You are then returned to the main menu.
8.3 Initializing the Patient Database

1.
2.

3.
Click
u NOTE u
If
is clicked with the version B software,
a confirmation window like that shown below is opened.

Click
MU000020.EPS

message:
00000557.EPS
4.

The patient database is then initialized and you are returned to the
DataBase Utility window.
5.
Click

010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MU-76
8.4 Initializing the Study Reservation Database (Only for B version)
8.4 Initializing the Study Reservation

Database (Only for B version)
1.
2.

3.
Click
4.
Click
MU000021.EPS

message:
MU000017.EPS
5.

The patient database is then initialized and you are returned to the
DataBase Utility window.
6.
Click
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MU-77
9.1 Setting the Hospital Card Data Format
9. Setting the Magnetic Card

Magnetic Card Setting
9.1 Setting the Hospital Card Data Format
3.
Click [Read Code].

The ISO Card Read Code window opens.
4.
Edit special characters.
u NOTES u
Characters on the gray background cannot be edited.
Be sure to enter one-byte characters.
For detailed descriptions of the data format setup procedure, see

Appendix 4 Setting Up the Magnetic Card [Option], under
Appx IN: Installation Appendix.
The default setting is complied with ISO7811-6.
9.2 Defining the ISO Card Character Read

Code
When using an ISO type magnetic card, special characters need to be
set up as follows, as required.
u NOTE u
This function will not basically be used in Japan.
1.
Start up the CLs Service Utility mode.
2.
Click [Magnetic Card Setting].

The Magnetic Card Setting window opens.
MU000007.EPS
REFERENCE
To delete an entered character, enter a one-byte space.
5.
Click
You are returned to the Magnetic Card Setting window.
MU000006.EPS
6.
Click
You are returned to the main menu.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MU-78
10. Setting the Barcode Barcode Setting
10. Setting the Barcode

Barcode Setting
To add/modify a format
1.
Operate as follows on the Barcode window.

To add a format, click [Add].
This section describes the procedures used for barcode format settings
(addition, modification and deletion).
A multiple number of formats can be determined. Data will be processed
in the format in which the Barcode Type, Start Character and Stop
Character match the first.
To modify a format, select a format for modification from the list and
then click Modify.
The Barcode Format window opens.
2.
Make necessary settings as follows.
u NOTE u
Note that only one setting will be generated where Other is determined
for the Barcode Type.
1.
Start up the CLs Service Utility mode.

2.
Click [Barcode Setting].

A format list appears on the Barcode window.
00000561.EPS
Barcode Type: Barcode type

0: NW7; 1: Code39 (Not NW7); 2: Others
Start Character: Start character
a to d for NW7; Code39 is fixed to *.
Stop Character: Stop character
a to d for NW7; Code39 is fixed to *.
Barcode Length: Barcode length
Does not include Start Character/Stop Character. 1 represents an
indeterminate length.
Data Offset: Data start position
Data Length: Data length
1 shows that a read barcode length is handled as a data length.
00000560.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Purpose: Purpose of use of the barcode (effective only when

POCKET id Console is used.)
0: Patient ID/Accession No./Reception No., 1: Technologist
username, 2: Technologist password
The barcode is read on the POCKET id Console according to the
barcode format of the purpose specified here.
MU-79
10. Setting the Barcode Barcode Setting
u NOTE u
For NW7, it is not allowed to use a for Start Character and c for Stop
Character because those settings represent an IP barcode.
3.
Click
You are returned to the Barcode window.
4. Click
u NOTE u
When any data other than 0 has been set to Data Offset, be sure to
specify a Data Length value smaller than Barcode Length-Data Offset.
If 1 is specified, data may include a stop character or an indeterminate
value resulting thus in an error to occur.
To delete a format
1.
In the list on the Barcode window, select a format to be

deleted, and click
A format thus selected will be deleted.
2.
Click
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MU-80
11. Customizing the QA Items Customized QA Item
11. Customizing the QA Items

Customized QA Item
Modifying QA items
1.
2.
Click [Customized QA Item].
and then click
The QA window opens.
REFERENCE
Sex
Accession No.
Date of Study
1.
or
.
This section describes the procedures for customizing (adding,

modifying, or deleting) the following six QA items of patient information,
which appear in the QA window:
Kanji Patient Name
Patient ID
Date of Birth
Choose
InputQA opens the QA window that can be used during a study.

ListQA opens the QA window that can be used after completion of
a study.
2.
Customize QA items I through VI.
The patient information list appears.
Patient information list
I
II
III
IV
V
VI
00000553.EPS
00000552.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MU-81
11. Customizing the QA Items Customized QA Item
I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
Group number (If this field is left blank, the patient information is
hidden.)
Element number (If this field is left blank, the patient information
is hidden.)
Private creator flag
VR
Acceptable input character type
0 : Linguistic Area (the language selection is complied with)
1 : Single-byte (ANK)
2 : Ideographic (kanji)
3 : Phonetic (change to katakana)
Adding patient information
1.
Choose
or
, select the item to be added
to the patient information list, and then click
The QA window opens.
REFERENCE
The V. selection can be made only when PN is selected for VR.
VI. Display caption name
3.
Click
You are then returned to the Customized QA Item window.
Deleting patient information
1.
Choose
or
, select the item to be
deleted from the patient information list, and then click

.
The Close Configuration window opens.
2.
Click
00000554.EPS
2.
Make QA data entries and then click
For details on the QA items, see under Modifying QA

items.
The patient information is then deleted.
You are then returned to the Customized QA Item window.
Restoring the QA items to the default settings
1.
Click
The contents of InputQA and ListQA both revert to their default

values (with deleted ones restored).
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MU-82
12. Setting the Selectors Selector Setting
12. Setting the Selectors

Selector Setting
IV. Choose a Reader Type.

5501
5502
Velocity Upright
Velocity Table/Universal
To revert to Cassette, choose a blank from the pull-down
menu of the hostName: field.
V. Enter the character string (consisting of up to five characters) to
be displayed on the selector button.
VI. This entry field appears when 5501 or 5502 is chosen as
Reader Type.
When Yes is specified for No. 163 Enable Auto IP Shelter for
550x under SYSTEM CONFIG - CSL/IDT FUNCTION,
choose Yes if you wish that the exposure mode (Auto IP Shelter
mode) be notified automatically to the built-in type equipment
(predetermined to the selector) and No to manually notifying it
of the exposure mode.
VII. To restore the currently edited selector to the status that
prevailed at CL startup, turn this radio button ON.
This section describes the procedure for setting the selectors.
1.
2.
Click [Selector Setting].

The Selector Setting window opens.
3.

I
II
III
IV
V
VI
VII
4.
Click
u NOTE u
If the host name for the 5501 plus, 5502 plus, or other built-in type
equipment is changed in situations where 5501 or 5502 is
selected as Reader Type, you must perform the hostName
setup procedure again. If you do not observe this precaution, an
error (code: 31099) occurs at CL-AP startup.
00000551.EPS
I. Choose a selector tab.

II. Set the Technique Code paying attention not to set the same
code with other selectors.
III. Select a device to be added to the selector (use the host name
for selection).
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MU-83
13. Collecting the Log and Configuration Files Log/Configuration Files Acquisition Tool
13. Collecting the Log and Configuration Files

Log/Configuration Files Acquisition Tool
This section describes the procedure for copying the CLs log and
configuration files to an HD.
u NOTE u
The procedure for collection of log and configuration files varies
depending on the software version used. Therefore, check the software
version used and then perform necessary procedure appropriately.
For the procedure required for software version V5.0 (B) or earlier,
see 13.1 For Software Version V5.0 (B) or Earlier.
For the procedure required for software version V6.0 (B) or later,
see 13.2 For Software Version V6.0 (B) or Later.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MU-84
13.1 For Software Version V5.0 (B) or Earlier
13.1 For Software Version V5.0 (B) or Earlier
A window where to specify the target destination for file copy

opens.
u NOTES u
This function is useful when asking the software design section for
error analysis. Collect log files before uninstalling the software,
otherwise log files will be deleted consequently.
MU000029.EPS
* The folder targeted for file copy in the C drive is fixed to

C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP.
Before actually asking for error analysis, be sure to collect log files (Log.
cab), various setup files (Config.cab), and image information files
(Image.cab), together with the date when the problem arose and
description of the operation that caused such problem to arise.
1.
2.
Click [Log/Configuration Files Acquisition Tool].

A command prompt window opens.

MU000030.EPS
II. Copies the configuration files.

The Config.cab file is created.
III. Copies the log files.
The Log.cab file is created.
The Log.cab file contains personal data.
IV. Copies the files related to the image information and image
database.
The Image.cab file is created. The Image.cab file contains
personal data.
I
II
III
IV
MU000005.EPS
u NOTES u
If you intend to execute step II, III, or IV without executing step I
(with drive A selected as the copy destination), be sure to insert
an FD into the FDD beforehand.
When you have specified HD as the target destination for copying
files, use USB memory or the like to copy Log.cab, Config.cab
and Image.cab that are located immediately below the C:\
Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP folder.
I.
Specifies the file copy destination (drive A by default).

010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
WARNING
When it is necessary to take a file that contains personal data out
of an institution so that it is submitted to analysis, be sure to
obtain advance approval of the relevant institution.
3.
Click
at the upper right corner of the command prompt
window.
The system returns you to the main menu.
MU-85
13.2 For Software Version V6.0 (B) or Later
I. To delete personal information, checkmark it.

II. Select a time range for which logs are to be collected in the file.
Specify the collection date range value
Collects log files of a specified time range.
Input a desired time range in
.
(Example: If 30 is input in the box, files of the day on which
the collection was made and the preceding 30 days are
collected.)
Collect all
Collects all log files.
Software version V6.0 or later enables you to determine whether or not

to include personal information in log files to be collected.
u NOTES u
This function is useful when asking the software design section for
error analysis. Collect log files before uninstalling the software,
otherwise log files will be deleted consequently.
Before actually asking for error analysis, be sure to collect log files (Log.
cab), various setup files (Config.cab), and image information files
(Image.cab), together with the date when the problem arose and
description of the operation that caused such problem to arise.
1.
2.
Click [Log/Configuration Files Acquisition Tool].

The Acquisition Tool window opens.
3.
WARNING
When it is necessary to take a file that contains personal data out
of an institution so that it is submitted to analysis, be sure to
obtain advance approval of the relevant institution.
4.
Click
Perform the following steps.
REFERENCE
I
When Specify the collection date range value is selected at step

3 above, the time range thus specified is displayed in the
confirmation window that opens.
II
When Collect all is selected, All Routine*.inf will be collected is

displayed.
DCL41302.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MU-86
5.
Click
u NOTE u
When the OS used is Windows Vista, a window like that shown
below is displayed while files are being collected. In such cases, do
not click [Cancel] because an error may be caused to occur.
7.
Click
8.
Copy the collected files onto USB memory or the like.
to close the Acquisition Tool window.
Files thus collected are stored on C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP.

Targeted files are the following two:
(computer name) _NP.cab
A file from which any personal information was deleted. This file is
created when Delete personal information was checkmarked at
step 3 above.
(computer name) _P.cab
A file from which no personal information was deleted. This file is
created when Delet personal information was not checkmarked at
step 3. above.
MU000036.ai
When the file collection processing is complete, a window like that

shown below opens.
DCL41304.EPS
6.
Click
This filename appears when

Delete personal information
was checkmarked at step 3.
above.
The system returns to the Acquisition Tool window.
MU000034.EPS
REFERENCE
Checkmarking Delete personal information at step 3 above will
activate the [Check Results] button.
If the [Check Results] button is clicked, the relevant text file is
displayed enabling you to check contents of the collected files.
Check contents of the collected files accordingly.
Image_Collect_NP.txt : A text file from which any personal
information was deleted.
Image_Show_P.txt : A text file from which no personal
information was deleted.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MU-87
14. Setting the DICOM MWM C-FIND Tags DICOM MWM C-FIND Tag Setting
14. Setting the DICOM MWM C-FIND Tags

DICOM MWM C-FIND Tag Setting
I.
Sets the tags (C-FIND-RQ) for the information about the CLs
inquiries addressed to the RIS.
II. Perform internal data mapping setup for the tags (C-FIND-RSP)
received in the form of a response from the RIS to the CL. (1/2)
III. Perform internal data mapping setup for the tags (C-FIND-RSP)
received in the form of a response from the RIS to the CL. (2/2)
The procedure for DICOM MWM C-FIND tag/internal data mapping

setup is described below:
1.
u NOTES u
The following limitations are imposed on mapping:
2.
The tags that can be set for the inquiry information are limited to
the standard tags for the MWM and the tags extended by the CL.
The response tags can be mapped to up to two destinations.
For response tag mapping, up to three hierarchical layers of the
SQ can be used.
The response tags can be mapped only when they are of the
same VR type.
You cannot select the response tags within the SQ alone. Their
parent tags will also be selected at all times.
When mapping a response tag, an error occurs if only parent SQ
tags are described. Therefore, be sure to describe also daughter
tags.
Received data cannot be processed.
Click [DICOM MWM C-FIND Tag Setting].

The DICOM MWM C-FIND Tag & Mapping Setting window
opens.
3.
4.
Click
REFERENCE
To copy the Requst Procedure ID (0040, 1001) value to the Study ID
(0020, 0010), for instance, input 00200010 in the line of the Request
Procedure ID.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
II
III
MU000015.EPS
00000067.EPS
MU-88
15.1 Transferring the Configuration Data
15. Setting the POCKET id Console

P-Console Setting
Set up the POCEKT id Console following the procedures below.
Transferring POCKET id Console configuration files from the CL to
the POCKET id Console
Registering the device ID
Checking version of the POCKET id Console application
15.1 Transferring the Configuration Data

When any of the configuration data that relates to the POCKET id
Console was changed, the configuration file should be transferred to the
POCKET id Console.
MU000023.EPS
4.
Click
REFERENCE
The POCKET id Console-related configuration data includes the
following.
All items included in CONFIG PDA under Setup Configuration Item
Config SYSTEM CONFIG
Items that specify the language to be used and the like, included in
IMAGE MODALITY under Setup Configuration Item Config
SYSTEM CONFIG
Setting of padding for the study number and patient ID, included in
CSL/IDT FUNCTION under Setup Configuration Item Config
SYSTEM CONFIG
Intended use (Purpose) of the barcode included in Barcode Format
under Barcode Setting
1.
Place the POCKET id Console in the cradle.
2.
Click
The P-Console Setting window opens.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
5.
Click
Transfer of the configuration file starts and then a window opens

to indicate completion of the file transfer.
MU000025.EPS
Upon receipt of the configuration file by the POCKET id Console,

the POCKET id Console will be rebooted automatically.
NOTES
3.
MU000024.EPS
If configuration file transfer failed, re-place the POCKET id Console in

the cradle and make sure that the PC recognizes the POCKET id
Console.
If the POCKET id Console application has not been started, start it up
and then transfer the configuration file.
MU-89
15.2 Registering the Device ID
4.
This section describes the procedure for registering device ID of the

POCKET id Console handled on this CL.
REFERENCE
The POCKET id Console device ID is indicated in the Device ID
tab that appears on the window displayed by selecting the About
icon under Start Setting System tab.
It is allowed to register device ID for a maximum of 3 POCKET id

Consoles.
5.
2.
field, enter device ID of the POCKET
id Console to be handled on this CL (e.g. FF001).
NOTE
1.
In the
Click
Click
The device ID will be added in the PDA DeviceID Registered List

field.
MU000027.EPS
6.
MU000023.EPS
3.
Click
Click
The system returns to the P-Console Setting window.
The PDA DeviceID Registration window opens.
MU000026.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MU-90
15.3 Checking Version of the POCKET id Console Application
15.3 Checking Version of the POCKET id

Console Application
You can check version of the application installed on the POCKET id
Console, as follows.
1.
Place the POCKET id Console in the cradle.
2.
6.
Click
NOTE
For a failure to display the application version, re-place the POCKET id
Console in the cradle and make sure that the PC recognizes the
POCKET id Console correctly.
3.
Click
MU000023.EPS
4.
Click
The P-Console Version window opens.
5.
Check version of the POCKET id Console application.
Verify
MU000028.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MU-91
BLANK PAGE
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MU-92

FR consists of the following:
FR1
FR2
FR3
FR4
FR5
FR6
FR7
FR8
FR9
FR10
Print Output Function

DICOM Tag Mapping Function
Creating /Deleting Markers
Using the DICOM Log Mode
Display Gradation Correction Setup
DICOM Tag Editing Function (for Siemens)
Setup of Log Output Items of the Exposure Result Log Function
Wake-on-LAN Setup
GPR (Grid Pattern Removal Function) Setup
Setup for Addition of Descriptive Characters to Icons
FR11 Setup of Rules Applied for Automatic Patient ID Issuance
FR12 Setup of Exposure Guidance [Applicable only in Japan]
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR13 Setup of Auto Shuttering Processing

FR14 Setup of LUT Reverse-conversion Processing
FR15 Setup of CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 Icons
FR16 Accession Number Data Truncation Function
FR17 Installation of Standard Markers [Applicable only in Japan]
FR18 Setup of Date and Time Display
FR19 Setup of Characters Under the Windows XP and Windows
Vista Coexistent Environment [Applicable only in Japan]
FR20 Adding and Setting the Serial Connector
FR21 Setting the Exposure Index Function
FR22 Accession Number Character String Adding Function
FR-I
Control Sheet
Issue date
Revision number
10/20/2000
12/10/2000
04/10/2001
00
00
01
05/30/2001
05/30/2001
08/30/2001
02
02
03

Revision (FM2950)
Previous Chapter F Function-specific Reference
modified (FM2951)
08/30/2001
03/20/2002
07/20/2002
03
04
05

11/30/2002
06
11/30/2002
03/01/2003
06
07

03/01/2003
08/20/2003
12/10/2003
12/10/2003
02/20/2004
07
08
09
09
10
07/30/2004
11

07/30/2004
11/12/2004
07/30/2005
11
12
14

Corrections (FM4450)
07/30/2005
14
11/30/2005
11/30/2005
07/30/2006
15
15
16

07/20/2007
17
05/09/2008
18
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
Reason
Pages affected
All pages
I, II, 13, 59, 1417
All pages
I, II, 1-116, 18, 2022, 2-1, 2
1-17, 19
I, II, 1-1, 611, 1316, 18, 19, 22,
2-1
1-20, 21
I, II, 1-7, 2-1, 3-14, 4-14
I, II, 1-1, 1719, 2138, 2-2, 5-1, 2,
6-1, 2
I, II, 1-212, 14, 1720, 22, 38, 40,
5-2
1-13, 15, 16, 21, 2337, 39
I, II, 1-511, 13, 15, 1922, 33, 34,
39, 41, 7-1, 2
1-14, 1618, 2332, 3538, 40, 42
I, II, 13, 8-1, 2, 9-1, 2
I, II, 1-13, 15, 20, 22, 41, 9-1
1-21
All pages
I, II, 1-13, 14, 2023, 3-1, 4-1, 2,
5-2, 6-1, 8-1, 9-1, 10-1, 2, 11-14
8-2
I, II, 1-20, 21, 39, 5-1
I, II, 1-1, 6, 8, 11, 1316, 18, 2026,
28, 30, 42, 2-1, 4-2, 12-1, 2, 13-1, 2,
14-1, 2
1-9, 10, 12, 17, 19, 27, 29, 3141,
4346
I, II, 1-38, 41
1-39
IIV, 1-7, 17, 46, 6-1, 8-1, 9-1, 13-1,
15-1, 2
I, II, 1-8, 11, 13, 42, 44, 46, 2-1,
5-18, 6-1, 12-1, 16-1, 2
I, II, 1-16, 2226, 4-2, 14-1, 2
FR-II
Control Sheet
Issue date
Revision number
10/31/2008
19
10/31/2008
11/30/2009
19
20

11/30/2009
03/31/2010
20
21

12/10/2010
22
12/10/2010
22
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Reason
Pages affected
I, III, 1-8, 16, 17, 45, 48, 14-2, 17-1,
2, 18-18
1-1844, 46, 47
I, III, 1-12, 13, 20, 44, 3-1, 4-1, 2,
6-1, 8-1, 4, 9-1, 11-14, 13-1, 14-1,
19-1, 2, 20-118
3-24, 8-2, 3, 9-2
I, III, 1-29, 39, 42, 6-1, 8-1, 9-1,
11-1, 13-1, 20-124, 21-1, 2
I, III, 11-1, 16-1, 20-9, 21-1, 2,
22-14
2-3, 4, 5-7, 8, 6-3, 4, 7-3, 4, 8-3, 4,
9-3, 4, 10-3, 4, 12-3, 4, 13-3, 4,
14-3, 4, 15-3, 4, 16-3, 4, 17-3, 4,
18-7, 8, 19-3, 4, 20-8, 1028,
21-3, 4
FR-III
BLANK PAGE
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
FR-IV

Presented herein are the settings necessary for enabling the print
output function.
Print formats
The CL supports the following formats : Single, Twin, 2on1, 4on1 and
3on1 (energy subtraction images/special format).
Film
Image
u NOTE u
The CR-IR346/348CL and the Local Printer are abbreviated
hereafter CL and LP, respectively.
Setup necessary when connecting the LP
Single
TWIN
4on1
3on1
2on1
Describes various setup items for the sorter or printer type (New or Old)
for when using the LP.
See 1. Setup Necessary When Connecting the LP.
Setup necessary when editing the film annotation

character format
Describes various setup items for the film annotation character format.
See 2. Setup Necessary When Editing the Film Annotation
Character Format.
Film annotation character setup (direct editing of

FilmStrFmt)
Describes the film annotation character setup procedure defined for
each FMT No.
See 3. Film Annotation Character Setup (Direct Editing of
FilmStrFmt).
Setting the DICOM Print output conditions

See 4. Setting the DICOM Print Output Conditions.
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
F0000020.EPS
Single : One image is allotted on film.

Twin : Two same images are allotted on film.
Each of the images are subjected to different image
processing.
2on1 : Two different images are allotted on film.
4on1 : Four different images are allotted on film.
3on1 : Three different images are allotted on film (for output of energy
subtraction images/special format).
REFERENCE
When the image size is larger than the area available for printing an
image on film, the image size will be reduced automatically to the area
available for image printing.
FR1-1
1. Setup Necessary When Connecting the LP
1. Setup Necessary When

Connecting the LP
Setup items necessary when connecting the LP are listed below.
Set up the items listed below in Setup Configuration Item - SYSTEM
CONFIG - 4. PRINETR of the Service Utility mode.
Table Configuration list when connecting the LP

No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
For cluster
connection
Pixel Clock Rate

Changeover
10
Basically select this item.
20
Select when the LP i/f cable exceeds 60m in length.
Specifying the image transfer speed. (Pixel Clock Rage

[*0.1sec/pixel])
Agreement
required.
Enable Magnify
Print
Yes
Magnifies.
No
Does not magnify.
Specifying whether or not to magnify and print a 3543cm/

14"17" 3535cm/14"14" standard image on a 3543cm or
3535cm film in the one-image format.
Agreement
required.
0 : None
1 : Space(2)+Dep.code (8)
2 : Dep.Code(4)+MenuName(6)
3 : Dep.Code(4)+FilmChar1(6)
4 : FCRImageID(1)+Space(9)
5 : Space(4)+MPMcode(4)+Space(2)
6 : Space(4)+FilmChar1(6)
7 : Dep.Code(4)+MPMcode(4)+Space(2)
Specifying the film sorting type when a sorter is used for the
FM-DPL printer.
[Indent]
Film Sorting Info.
Setup
Space
:
Dep.Code :
MenuName :
FilmChar1 :
FCRImageID :
MPMcode :
* Basically select No. To select Yes, a permission is

required from the service maintenance headquarters.
Agreement
required.
* Do not specify 3 and 6 when the HIC655 and QA-WS are

used.
Space
Requesting department in alphanumerics
Menu name in one-byte characters
Film mark
Image ID (ID on the film annotation characters)
MPM code
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
FR1-2
1. Setup Necessary When Connecting the LP
Table Configuration list when connecting the LP

No.
4
5
6
Name
[Indent]
Menu Name Start
Position on Film
[Indent]
Unique ID for Film
Sorting Condition
Printer Interface
Type (Old/New)
Selection
0_16 (0)
0 : Space
1 : ID#
0 : Old
Select when using a CR-LP414N/FL-IM2636N or FMIM3543N /FL-IM3543MN printer.
1 : New
Select when using a printer other than the above.
Film Size Available 0 : 2636 (2636cm)
in Printer
1 : 3543 (3543cm/1417inch)
2 : 3535 (3535cm/1414inch)
Film Base Color
(Blue/Clear)
0 : Blue
1 : Clear
Printer Buffer Size
0 : Single
1 : Double
Meaning
When 2, 3 or 6 is selected for 3 Film Sorting Info. Setup
above, six characters of the Menu Name (20 characters) or
FilmChar (ten characters) will be used. This item is to specify
which portion of the area is selected and used.
For example, if 0 is specified, six characters from the top will
be used. If 2 is specified, six characters counting from the third
character will be used.
For cluster
connection
Agreement
required.
* The portion of setup value + six characters that exceeds the

area of each item will be spaces.
* When FilmChar is used, an error occurs if ten or more is
specified for the number of characters.
Specifying the unique ID for film sorting condition.
Agreement
required.
* Do not specify 1 when the HIC655 and QA-WS are used.
Specifying the printer i/f type.
Specifying the film size used on the printer side.

* This setting is effective only when 0:Old was selected when
the previous i/f printer has been connected (Printer Interface
Type (Old/New)).
Specifying the film base color used on the printer side.
Type (Old/New)).
Specifying the buffer size used on the printer side.
Type (Old/New)).
u NOTE u
Items after 10 are used when editing the film annotation character format,
which are thus described in 2. Setup Necessary When Editing the Film
Annotation Character Format.
2. Setup Necessary When Editing the Film Annotation Character Format
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
FR1-3
2.1 Setup Items Table
2. Setup Necessary When Editing the

Film Annotation Character Format
Setup items necessary when editing the film annotation character
format are listed below.
Set up the items listed below in Setup Configuration Item - SYSTEM
CONFIG - 4. PRINETR of the Service Utility mode.
Setup Items Table

Table Film annotation character format configuration list
No.
Name
10 Black Margin
Setup on Film
Edge
11
Selection
Meaning
Specifying the film margin type.

0 : Margin depend on image ID (default: Transparent)
Transparent or black depending on the image information.
Transparent unless specified by the image information.
1 : Margin depend on image ID (default: Black) Transparent
or black depending on the image information.
Black unless specified by the image information.
2 : Transparent Margin (Fix)Always transparent.
3 : Black Margin (Fix)
Always black.
Trimming Range
[mm]
0~25 (0)
The amount of
trimming
Specifying the amount of trimming in mm (for other than

mammography).
For cluster
connection
Agreement
required.
Agreement
required.
* Be sure to enter one-byte characters on the key board.
12 Trimming Range
for Mammography
[mm]
0~25 (0)
Specifying the amount of trimming in mm (for mammography). Agreement

required.
* Be sure to enter one-byte characters on the key board.
13 Print Barcode
Yes : Outputs.
No : Does not output.
Specifying whether or not to output on film the IP no. read by

the RUs barcode reader.
Agreement
required.
14 Print EDR Mode
Yes : Outputs.
Specifying whether or not to output on film the setup data in

EDR mode.
Agreement
required.
* A for AUTO, S for SEMI, F for FIX and S for SEMI-X

will be printed on film.

010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
FR1-4

No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
For cluster
connection
15 Print Image
Process Condition
Yes : Outputs.
Specifying whether or not to print image processing conditions Agreement

required.
on film.
16 Print L, S, CS, SS
Condition
Yes : Outputs.
Specifying whether or not to print L, S, and CS/SS values on

film.
17 Print Shot Time
Yes : Outputs.
Specifying whether or not to print the date of exposure on film. Agreement

required.
* Other than Japanese version, EXP: will be printed as the
title to the top (on the left side) of the date of exposure.
18 Print Set Process
Yes : Outputs.
Specifying whether or not to print the routine or group

information on film.
Agreement
required.
Agreement
required.
* Film printout example: RT-01, TS 1 01

19 Print Engineer ID
Yes : Outputs.
Specifying whether or not to print the technicians code

information on film.
20 Print Menu Name
Yes : Outputs.
Specifying whether or not to print image processing conditions Agreement

required.
on film.
21 Print Compression Yes : Outputs.

Rate
Specifying whether or not to print image data compression

code information on film.
Agreement
required.
Agreement
required.
* On the Japanese version, compression ratio: will be printed

as the title on the left side of the image data compression
code information.
CC: will be printed for other than the Japanese version.
22 Print EnergySubtraction
Parameter
Yes : Outputs.
Specifying whether or not to print energy subtraction

processing parameter information on film.
Agreement
required.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
FR1-5

No.
Name
Selection
23 Print Image Frame Yes : Printed with image frame.

(3543 film: 1417, No : Printed with no image frame.
1414,1843/
3535 film: 1414/
2636 film: 1014/
2025 film: 810,
1824
Single Format)
Meaning
For cluster
connection
Specifying whether or not to add image frame when printing a Agreement

3543cm, 3535cm, 2636cm or 2025cm film in the following required.
patterns.
14"17"
3543cm/14"17" image in the single format
1843cm image in the single format
14"14"
26x36cm
10"14" image in the single format
8"10"
* Unless the output format is properly positioned, the image
format will not be displayed.

(3543 film:1843, No : Printed with no image frame.
LR/2on1 Format
LR/2on1 Format)
Specifying whether or not to add image frame when printing

an 1843cm image on a 3543cm film in the LR or 2on1
format.

(3543 film:1417, No : Printed with no image frame.
1843 , 810 4on1
Format)
Specifying whether or not to add image frame when printing a

3543cm/14"17", 1843cm or 1824cm/8"10" image on a
3543cm film in the 4on1 format.
26 Print Image Frame No : Printed without image frame.

(3543 film:Energy- Yes : Printed with image frame.
Substraction 3on1
Format)
Specifying whether or not to add image frame when outputting Agreement

an energy subtraction 3on1 format image on a 14"17" film.
required.
27 Print Image Frame No : Printed without image frame.

(2636 film:1824, Yes : Printed with image frame.
2430/2025
film:1824 Single
Mammography
Format)
Specifying whether or not to add image frame to 1824 cm or Agreement

2430cm size images that are printed on 2636cm size film in required.
the single mammography format or to 1824cm size images
that are printed on 8"10" size film in the single mammography
format.
Agreement
required.
* Unless the output format is properly positioned, the image

format will not be displayed.
Agreement
required.
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
FR1-6

No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
For cluster
connection
28 Print Image Frame No : Does not generate outputs.

(2636 film:1824
Yes : Generates outputs.
2on1 100%
Mammography
Format)

an 1824cm size image on 2636cm size film in
mammography 2on1 (100%) format.
Agreement
required.
29 No Print Scale
(User Definition
Rules)
[Dialog setup] (?3??)
Specifying whether or not to print the reading scale.
Agreement
required.
30 Representation of
Age
: Displayed by the age.

Specifying the age representation format.
Age
Other than the Japanese ver. : E.g.) 25Y, 1Y8M, 1Y10D, 13D
: Displayed by the date of birth. * Use 1. IMAGE MODALITY - 1. System Common Date
Date of Birth
Other than the Japanese ver. : E.g.) DATE B is printed.
Format for the DATE representation format.
The setup procedure is described in Details of

[dialog setup].
31 Print Reverse Mark 0 : None

Does not print.
1 : R-reverse
Image not rotated : Does not display.
Image rotated : is displayed.
2 : AP or PA
Image not rotated: AP is displayed.
Image rotated: PA is displayed.
* This setup is effective only when Printed with image frame

is selected.
* This setup can be selected also for each MPM code. A
maximum of 8 MPM codes can be specified (a wild card can
be used).
Specifying whether or not to output the right-and-left image

rotation mark.
Agreement
required.
Agreement
required.
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
FR1-7

No.
Name
32 Print Film
Character Field
(1417-S/4on1,
1843-LR/2on1/
4on1, 810-4on1,
1414-S, 1014-S,
1824-LR/2on1,
810/1824-S
Format)
Selection
0 : None
Does not output film.
1 : Only area 1
Only film annotation character area 1 is displayed.
2 : Only area 2
Only film annotation character area 2 is displayed.
3 : Both
Both areas 1 and 2 are displayed.
Meaning
Specifying the film annotation character area display format
when printing a 3543cm, 3535cm, 2636cm or 2025cm
film in the following patterns.
14"17"
3543cm/14"17" image in the single or 4on1 format
1843cm image in the TWIN, 2on1 or 4on1 format
1824cm/8"10" image in the 4on1 format
14"14"
2636cm
8"10"
For cluster
connection
Agreement
required.
See Film annotation character areas 1 and 2.

33 Print Film Char 2/
Examination
number
0 : Film char 2
Film annotation character 2 (exposure stand information) is
output.
1 : Examination Number
The Accession Number is output.
Specifying whether to output film annotation character 2

(exposure stand information) or the Accession Number.
34 Size Selection of
3543, 3535, 2636,
2025 Film
Character (Single
Format)
0 : Standard
1 : Large
Specifying the film annotation character area display format

when printing a 3543cm, 3535cm, 2636cm or 2025cm
film in the following patterns.
14"17"
14"14"
26x36cm
8"10"
Agreement
required.
* The default setting at shipment from factory is 1:Examination

Number for the CR Console Lite/Plus.
Agreement
required.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
FR1-8

No.
Name
Selection
[Dialog setup] (0010)

35 3543 Film
Character Field
Position & Rotation
[dialog setup].
(1417 Image)
Meaning
Specifying the position and rotation of film annotation
character areas 1 and 2 when printing a 3543cm/14"17"
image in the single or 4on1 format on a 3543cm film.
For cluster
connection
Agreement
required.
* This setup is effective for all exposure menus.

To specify this setup individually for each MPM code, use the
No. 39 setup.

36 3543 Film
Character Field
Position & Rotation
[dialog setup].
(1714 Image)

Agreement
required.

No. 40 setup.

37 3543 Film
Character Field
Position & Rotation
[dialog setup].
(1843 Image)

character areas 1 and 2 when printing an 1843cm image in
the LR, 2on1 or 4on1 format on a 3543cm film.
Agreement
required.

No. 41 setup.

38 3543, 2025 Film
Character Field
Position & Rotation
[dialog setup].
(3543 Film:8104on1, 2025 Film:
810-Single)

Agreement
character areas 1 and 2 when printing an 1824cm/8"10"
required.
image in the 4on1 format on a 3543cm film or printing an
1824cm/8"10" image in the single format on a 2025cm film.
No. 42 setup.
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
FR1-9

No.
Name
39 2025 (Landscape)
Film Character
Field Position &
Rotation (810,
1824-Single)
Selection
[dialog setup].
40 Film Character
[Dialog setup] ( No setup available.)
Field position &
rotation (User
[dialog setup].
Definition Rules 1)
Meaning
character areas 1 and 2 when printing a 90-rotated 8"10"/
1824cm image on an 1824cm film in the single format.
For cluster
connection
Agreement
required.

Agreement
required.
* Setup is necessary for each MPM code. (A maximum of

8 MPM codes can be selected. A wild card cannot be used.)
* This setup data prevails over that in No. 35.
41 Film Character
Field position &
rotation (User
[dialog setup].
Definition Rules 2)

Agreement
required.

42 Film Character
Field position &
rotation (User
[dialog setup].
Definition Rules 3)

character areas 1 and 2 when printing an 1843cm image in
the LR, 2on1 or 4on1 format on a 3543cm film.
Agreement
required.

010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
FR1-10

No.
Name
Selection
43 Film Character
Field position &
rotation (User
[dialog setup].
Definition Rules 4)
Meaning
character areas 1 and 2 when printing an 1824cm/8"10"
image in the 4on1 format on a 3543cm film.
For cluster
connection
Agreement
required.

Agreement
required.
44 Film Character
Field position &
rotation (User
Definition Rules5)

[dialog setup].
45 Film Character
Field position &
rotation (User
Definition Rules6)

[dialog setup].
46 Image Area Move

to the Top of 3543
Film
Yes : Moves to the top of the film.

No : Does not move.
Specifying the image output position when printing a 1530cm, Agreement

3535cm/14"14" or 4343cm/17"17" image in the single
required.
format on a 3543cm film.
47 Patients Name
Justify on Film
0 - 64 (20)
Specifying the maximum patient name length in one-byte

characters when printing it on film.

character areas 1 and 2 when an image overlaps the film
annotation character area.
character areas 1 and 2 when an image overlaps the film
annotation character area.
Agreement
required.
Agreement
required.
* If a number larger than 20, the default, is specified, the film

annotation character area cannot possibly hold other
information items.
48 Patients Name
Length onFilm
(Multibyte)
0 - 64 (10)
Specifying the maximum kanji patient name length in two-byte Agreement

required.
characters when printing it on film.
information items.
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
FR1-11

No.
Name
49 Patients Name
Length on Film
Selection
0 : Left : Left-padding.
1 : Right : Right-padding.
50 Department Name 0 - 64 (20)

Justify on Film
Meaning
For cluster
connection
Specifying whether to select right- or left-padding for printing

patient name on film.
Agreement
required.
Specifying the maximum exposure menu name length in onebyte characters when printing it on film.
Agreement
required.

information items.
51 Menu Name
Length on
Film(Multibyte)
0 - 64 (16)
Specifying the maximum kanji exposure menu name length in

two-byte characters when printing it on film.
Agreement
required.

information items.
52 Menu Name Justify 0 : Left : Left-padding.

on Film

exposure menu name on film.
Agreement
required.

Length on Film
Specifying the maximum requesting department name length

in one-byte characters when printing it on film.
Agreement
required.

information items.
u NOTE u
The patient name, exposure menu, requesting department, as well as the
patient ID and accession number need setups for both maximum length
displayed and right-/left-padding.
These two items should be set up according to Setup Configuration Item
SYSTEM CONFIG 5. IDT/CSL FUNCTION in Nos.15 to 18.
3.6 Configuration Details 5. CLS/IDT FUNCTION under
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
FR1-12

No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
For cluster
connection

Length on Film
(Multibyte)
Specifying the maximum requesting department name length

in two-byte characters when printing it on film.
55 Department Name 0 : Left : Left-padding.

Justify on Film

the requesting department name on film.
Agreement
required.
56 Enable Auto Edit

Function of Film
String Format File
Specifying whether or not to enable the automatic character

format generation function for Nos. 2, 10 to 55 and 57 to 91.
Agreement
required.
Specifying gap between images.
Agreement
required.
Yes : Enables.
No : Does not enable.
0 - 50 (0)
57 Gap between
Image Edge and
Film Edge
(Mammography
Format) [ 0.1mm]
Agreement
required.

information items.
* Be sure to enter one-byte codes from the keyboard.

See Specifying the gap between mammograms.
58 Font Size of
Requesting
Service
0 : Standard : Standard.
: Magnified.
1 : Large
Requesting department name font size.
Agreement
required.
59 Format Type of
Operators Name
0 : None
: Do not display the technologist

name.
1 : Ank Operator Name : Display the technologist name
with one-byte characters.
2 : Kanji Operator Name : Display the technologist name in
kanji.
Specifying whether and how the technologist name should be

displayed.
Agreement
required.
60 Display Image
Feature
Yes : Output to film.

No : Do not output to film.
Specifying whether or not to output the Imager Pixel Spacing

information (distance between pixel centers) to film.
The film output at 10 pixels/mm is 0.10 (mm).
The film output at 20 pixels/mm is 0.05 (mm).
Agreement
required.
[Dialog setup] ( 0020)

61 2636 Film
Character Field
For the setup procedure, see Details of [dialog
Position & Rotation
setup].
(Left Image of 2 on
1 Mammography
Format)
Specifying the left-hand image film annotation character field

Agreement
required.
position and rotation for outputting an image produced from
the mammography menu (1824cm image) to 2636cm film in
2on1 mammography format (100% magnification).
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
FR1-13

No.
Name
Selection

62 2636 Film Character
Field Position &
setup].
Rotation (Right Image
of 2 on 1
Mammography Format)
63 3535 Film
Character Field
Position & Rotation
(Single Format)

setup].
64 Enable Reduce To
810 Film
Yes : Outputs reduced-size images to 8"10" film.

No : Generate outputs at a magnification of 100%.
Meaning
For cluster
connection
Specifying the right-hand image film annotation character field Agreement

required.
position and rotation for outputting an image produced from
the mammography menu (1824cm image) to 2636cm film in
2on1 mammography format (100% magnification).
character fields 1 and 2 for generating a 3535 cm/14"14"
print onto 14"14" film in the Single format.
Agreement
required.
* Valid for all exposure menu items.

Specifying whether or not to reduce a Single-format output
image to print it on an 8"10" film.
Agreement
required.
Output film determination sequence

Field Position &
Rotation (1014 Image)
Field Position &
Rotation (1410 Image)
Field Position &
Rotation
(2636 film: 1824-LR)
Field Position &
Rotation
(2636 film: 1824-2no1)
69 Print Image Frame
(2636 film: 1824-LR,
2no1 Format)
70 Reduction Rate (2636
film: 1824-LR, 2no1
Format)
71 Print Priority in Dicom
Print

setup].
setup].
setup].

characters when printing a 10"14" life-size image on
2636cm film in the single format (default).
characters when printing a 14"10" (horizontal 2636cm)
life-size image on 2636cm film in the single format (default).
characters when printing an 1824cm life-size image on
2636cm film in the LR format (default).
Agreement
required.
Agreement
required.
Agreement
required.

For the setup procedure, see Details of [dialog characters when printing an 1824cm life-size image on
setup].
2636cm film in the 2on1 format (default).
Agreement
required.
Yes : Printed with image frame.

No : Printed with no image frame.
Agreement
required.
0 : 86%
1 : 100%
0 : LOW
1 : MED
1 : HIGH

an 1824cm life-size image on 2636cm film in the LR or 2on1
format.
Specifying a print reduction ratio when printing an 1824cm
image on 2636cm film in the LR or 2on1 format.
Agreement
required.
Specifying priority to printout of images to be transferred to the Agreement

DICOM printer.
required.
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
FR1-14

No.
Name

Field Position Rotation
(1012, 2430-Single)
73 2530(Landscape) Film
Character Field
Position Rotation
(1012, 2430-Single)
74 Film String Format
75
76
77
78
79
80
Selection
Meaning

setup].
setup].

character areas when printing a 10"12" or 2430cm image on
10"12" film in the single format (default).
character areas when printing a 10"12" or 2430cm image on
10"12" film in the single format (90 rotation available)
(default).
Specifying whether to use general-format film annotation
0 : GeneralFormatOnly
General-format film is used.
characters for all images (as has been previously) or special
film annotation characters defined exclusively for
1 : MammographyFormat
Special mammography-format film is used.
mammography images.
Lifesize Film Character [Dialog setup] ( 0010)
Specifying the position and rotation of the film annotation
Field Position &
For the setup procedure, see Details of [dialog character area when printing a long-view image in life size
Rotation
setup].
(default).
Overlap width(mm) of
5 to 30 ( 15)
Specifying the overlap width of two films when printing a longthe Lifesize Film
view image in life size (mm).
Specifying whether or not to apply 1/1 pixel-density conversion
Apply GSFilter On
Yes
for moire elimination when the special print function is
SpecialPrint
Applied.
activated.
No
Not applied.
Film Annotation
Specifying the position of film annotation characters (film
0 : top
Position (12on1 Film
At the top of the film.
annotation character area for each film) when printing images
Format)
in the 12on1 format.
1 : bottom
At the bottom of the film.
Print Image Frame
Yes
(12on1 Film Format)
Printed with image frame.
images in the 12on1 format.
No
Printed without image frame.
Film Character Field
Specifying the position of image annotation characters (film
Position &
For the setup procedure, see Details of [dialog annotation character area for each image) when printing
Rotation(12on1 Film
setup].
images in the 12on1 format.
Format)
* This dialog enables only determination of the display position
(a: Area0position) of film annotation character area 1. Do not
determine other items with this dialog.
For cluster
connection
Agreement
required.
Agreement
required.
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
FR1-15

No.
Name
81 Reduction Rate (810,

2on1 Film Format)
82 Enable Image Frame

(810,100%-Size
Image 2on1 Film
Format)
83 Film Character Field
Position & Rotation
(810,100%- Size
Image 2on1 Film
Format)
Position & Rotation
(814,100%- Size Image
2on1 Film Format)
Position & Rotation
(78,100%-Size Image
4on1 Film Format)
Position & Rotation
(710,100%-Size Image
2on1 Film Format)
87 Film Character Mode
Setting On XCON
Material Info.
88 1530 ExFormat For
1410 Film
89 1530 ExFormat For
108 Film
Selection
0 : 86%
1 : 100%
Meaning
For cluster
connection
Specifying whether to output 100%-size images or

86%-reduced images as has been so previously, when printing
810 images in the 2on1 format.
* 100%-size images are printed on a 3543cm film.
100%-size 8"10" images in the 2on1 format.
Yes
Printed with image frame.
No
Printed without image frame.
For the setup procedure, see Details of [dialog character area when printing 100%-size 8"10" images in the
setup].
2on1 format.
For the setup procedure, see Details of [dialog character area when printing 100%-size 8"14" (one half of
setup].
14"17" landscape) images in the 2on1 format.
For the setup procedure, see Details of [dialog character area when printing 100%-size 7"8" (one fourth of
setup].
14"17") images in the 4on1 format.
For the setup procedure, see Details of [dialog character area when printing 100%-size 7"10" (one half of
setup].
2636cm landscape) images in the 2on1 format.
0 : DICOM
Conforms to the DICOM definitions (as has been so
previously).
1 : XCON-IF
Conforms to the XCON I/F definitions.
Yes
Outputs.
No
Does not output.
Yes
Outputs.
No
Does not output.
Specifying film annotation characters of mammography XCON

material information.
Specifying whether or not to generate image output on

2636cm film in extended format.
Specifying whether or not to generate image output on 8"10"
film in extended format.

010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
FR1-16

No.
Name
Selection
0-10 (0)
90 Setting of minimum
scale to be cut off the
ends of Life-size Output
(cm).
91 Type of processing
0: ExistingFormat
multi-frame format.
Existing image rotation format
1: NewFormat
New image rotation format
Meaning
For cluster
connection
Specifying a length of the trailing edge to cut off of a stitched

image when outputting it in its life size [cm].
Specifying an image rotation direction when the multi-frame
format is applied.
Console Lite/Plus is 1: NewFormat.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
FR1-17
Details of [dialog setup]

Setup of 29. No Print Scale (User Definition Rules)
Double-clicking the No. 29 Value column will open the following dialog.
I. To add reading scale, select None (default), and All Menu

when not adding it to all images. Select Select from MPMCode
when not adding reading scale to images of certain MPM codes.
II. Enter the images MPM code on the keyboard or select it from
the pull-down menu.
Be sure to set up if Select from MPMcode is selected in step I.
above. Specifying using a wild card is also possible, such as
?0?? (? is an arbitrary one-digit alphanumeric from 0 to F.)
III. Click if data set up in I. and II. above are correct.
The system returns to the previous window and any of the
following will be displayed in the Value column.
: To add reading scale.
None
: Not to add reading scale to all images.
All Menu
Four-digit number : MPM code of an image not added with
reading scale.
IV. Click to cancel the setup data to be saved.
II
III
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IV
F0000011.EPS
FR1-18
Setup of 35 to 39, 61 to 63, 65 to 68, 72, 73, 75, 80, 83 to 86. XXXX
Film Character Field Position & Rotation (XX x XX Image)
Double-clicking the Value column of Nos. 35 to 39, 61 to 63, 65 to 68,
72, 73, 75, 80, 83 to 86 will open the following dialog.
I. Specifies the film annotation character area 1 display position.

II. Specifies the 90 image rotation (counterclockwise) of film
annotation character area 1.
III. Specifies the film annotation character area 2 display position.
IV. Specifies the 90 image rotation (counterclockwise) of film
For details of the film annotation character area, see
Film annotation character areas 1 and 2.
II
III
IV
V. Click if data set up in I. to IV. above are correct.

The system returns to the previous window and a four-digit
number will be displayed in the Value column. The meaning of
such four-digit number is as follows.
0031
90 image rotation of film annotation character area 2
(0: Not rotated, 1: Rotated)
Position of film annotation character area 2
(0: Upper left, 1: Upper right, 2: Lower left, 3: Lower right)
VI

F0000012.EPS
F0000014.EPS
VI. Click to cancel the setup data to be saved.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
FR1-19
40 to 45. Film Character Field Position & Rotation (User Definition

Rules)
Double-clicking the Value column of Nos. 40 to 45 will open the
following dialog.
I. Enter on the keyboard the MPM code of the image the film
annotation character area of which is changed or select it from
the pull-down menu.
Specifying using a wild card is not allowed.
II. Specify the film annotation character area 1 display position.
III. Specify the 90 image rotation (counterclockwise) of film
II
IV. Specify the film annotation character area 2 display position.
III
V. Specify the 90 image rotation (counterclockwise) of film

For details of the film annotation character area, see
Film annotation character areas 1 and 2.
VI. Click if data set up in I. to V. above is correct.

The system returns to the previous window and a character
string appears in the Value column to indicate the content of
the setup data.
IV
Definition of image
position or rotation
MPM code
(a maximum of 8 codes can be displayed.)
0031 : 0000 0004 0009 000C 000E 000B 0002 0003

VI
VII
F0000012.EPS

F0000015.EPS
VII. Click to cancel the setup data to be saved.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
FR1-20
Film annotation character areas 1 and 2

Following is the description of film annotation character areas 1 and 2
that can be specified in Nos. 32 and 35 to 45, 61 to 63, 65 to 68, 72, 73,
75, 80, 83 to 86, whether to display it and the positional and rotational
movement.
If an image is printed on a 14"17" film as set by the default, the film
annotation characters are displayed at both the upper right and left of
the image. Areas where those characters are displayed are the film
annotation character areas.
The upper-left area is area 1 and that at the upper right is area 2.
Film annotation
character area 1
Positional and rotational movement of the film annotation character

areas
Specify the positional and rotational movement of the film annotation
character areas in 35 to 45, 61 to 63, 65 to 68, 72, 73, 75, 80, 83 to 86.
XXXX Film Character Field Position & Rotation (XXXXX).
Position 0
Position 1
Not rotated.
90 rotated
(counterclockwise).
One-frame film area
One-frame film area
Film annotation
character area 2
Output print image
(*Default setting)
Position 2
Position 3
Definition of
positional movement
Definition of
rotational movement
F0000009.EPS
F0000010.EPS
Whether to display the film annotation character areas

Select whether or not to display film annotation character areas 1 and/
or 2 using the function in 32. Print 3543, 2025 Film Character Field
(1417- Single/4on1, 1843-LR/2on1/4on1, 810-4on1).
0: None
Neither film annotation character area 1 nor 2 are printed on film.
1: Only area 1
Only film annotation character area 1 is printed on film.
2: Only area 2
Only film annotation character area 2 is printed on film.
3: Both (default)
Both of the film annotation character areas are printed on film.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
FR1-21
Specifying the gap between mammograms

Note the following details when you specify the gap between
mammograms as directed in 57 Gap between Image Edge and Film
Edge (Mammography Format) [ 0.1 mm].
Single format
Image
2on1 format
Left-hand
image
Output film determination sequence

When Yes is chosen for 64 Enable Reduce to 810 Film, the output
film size is determined in the following sequence:
Film combination
14"17"
8"10"
1. When the 3543 (cm) or 3535 (cm), high pixel

density, Single format is used, the image will be
printed onto 14"17" film at a magnification of
100%.
2. When a Single format other than indicated above
is used, the image will be printed onto 8"10"
film.
3. 4on1 and 3on1 format images are printed on
14"17" films.
4. In situations other than above, images are
printed on 14"17" films in the 2636cm film
output format.
2636cm
8"10"
1. When the Single format is used, the image will

be printed onto 8"10" film.
2. In situations other than above, the image will be
printed onto 2636cm film.
10"12"
8"10"
1. When the Single format is used, the 10"12" and

2430cm images will be printed onto 10"12"
film.
film.
3. In situations other than above, there are no
applicable films.
8"10"
14"14"
1. When 3535 (cm), high pixel density, Single

format is used, the image will be printed onto
14"14" film at a magnification of 100%.
film.
3. In situations other than above, there is no
applicable film.
8"10"
1. When the Single format is used, the image will

be printed onto 8"10" film.
2. In situations other than above, there is no
applicable film.
Right-hand
image
4on1 format
Image
Image
Image
Image
Setting range:
0 to 50 mm
(variable in 0.1 mm units)
F0000047.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Determination sequence
FR1-22
2636cm, 3543cm/14"17", 8"10", 3535cm/14"14" and 10"12" film printout patterns [Reference]
2636cm film
5
5
4
2
1
1_1
Routine TWIN
4
5 4
1843 TWIN
4
Pantomography TWIN
2on1
12
11
13
14
12
11
2
13
14
2
1
Pantomography 2on1
2
1
1843cm 2on1
Routine Single
1824cm/810inch Single
1014inch Single (HQ)
1410inch Single (HQ)
- Legends (items are according to the FMT Nos.) 11

4
12
5
13
14
11
13
1
2
Pantomography Single
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
12
14
*1
1, 1_1 : Patient information area
2 : Image processing parameter area (*1)
3 : Image processing parameter area
4 : Hospital name area
5 : Area for barcode, MPM code, etc.
6 : Patient/image processing parameter area (*1)
7 : Patient/image processing parameter area
11 : Reduced patient information area
12 : Reduced image processing parameter area (*1)
13 : Patient information area
: A format that enables information

specific to mammography images
to be printed on film by selecting
1.MammographyFormat of 74
Film String Format in SYS
CONFIG - 4. PRINTER.
F0000018.EPS
FR1-23
2636cm film (continued)

12
11
13
12
11
14
13
12
11
13
14
12
11
13
14
11
11
13
13
14
- Legends (items are according to the FMT Nos.) -
12
1824cm TWIN/2on1 (100%)

90
710inch 2on1 (trimming)
91
91
90
91
90
Special format 2on1
14
14
12
Mammography 2on1
90
91
90
91
90
91
11 : Reduced patient information area

12 : Reduced image processing parameter area
13, 90 : Patient information area
14, 91 : Image processing parameter area
90
91
90
91
90
91
90
91
Special format 3on1
Special format Single
Special format 4on1

FR000058.EPS
3543cm film
12
11
13
14
3543cm/1417inch Single (HQ)
12
11
13
1843cm Single (HQ)
11
12
12
11
12
11
12
- Legends (items are according to the FMT Nos.) 1

2
3
4
5
11
12
13
14
14
1843cm TWIN
1843cm 2on1
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Patient information area

Image processing parameter area (*1)
Image processing parameter area
Hospital name area
Area for barcode, MPM code, etc.
Reduced patient information area
Reduced image processing parameter area
*1 : A format that enables information specific to

mammography images to be printed on film
by selecting 1.MammographyFormat of 74
Film String Format in SYS CONFIG - 4.
PRINTER.
F0000019.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
FR1-24
3543cm film (continued)

11
11
12
12
31
12
11
13
1843
3543cm
14
12
11
3
1414inch
810inch
2
1
12
11
12
11
14
13
12
11
13
14
14
15
Different images 4on1 (example)

11
13
32
12
11
13
3on1
12 11
14
13
12on1
12
1
2
3
4
5
11
12
13
14
15
14
13
14
11
12 11
14
13
12
14
13
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
31 :
32 :
810inch 2on1
90

91
90
91
90
91
90
91
90
90
Special format Single

010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Special format 2on1
90 :
91 :
Special format 3on1

Hospital name area
Reduced patient information area
Reduced image processing parameter area
Patient information/image processing
parameter area (*1)
Patient ID, right-and-left flipping mark and patient
name areas
Hospital name, radiographer name, date of exposure,
and requesting department name areas (*2)
90
91
90
91
90
91
90
91
91
*1 : A format that enables information specific

to mammography images to be printed on
film by selecting 1.MammographyFormat
of 74 Film String Format in SYS
*2 : Annotation character positions can be
changed alternately between top and
bottom of the film.
91
Special format 4on1
F0000053.EPS
FR1-25
2025cm film
(A)
(B)
(C)
21
21
(D)
21
22
(E)
4
6
22
22
1824cm (mammography)
Single
1824cm (mammography)
Single
(F)
(G)
21
22
1824cm/810inch Single,
502 1824cm/810inch,
vertical 1824cm/810inch
2430cm/1012inch,
3535cm, 3543cm,
4343cm, 1843cm,
1014inch, Single
For exposure menus other than mammography, images will be delivered in the (C) format.
For right breast (DSR) (MPM code: 0317) mammographic exposure menus, images will be
delivered in the (A) format.
For other than right breast (DSR) (MPM code: 0317) mammographic exposure menus,
images will be delivered in the (B) format.
21
22
4 : Hospital name area

5 : Area for barcode, MPM code, etc.
6 : Patient information/image processing
parameter area (*1)
*1 : A format that enables

information specific to
mammography images to be
printed on film by selecting
1:MammographyFormat of
74 Film String Format in
SYS CONFIG - 4. PRINTER.
F0000021.EPS
3535cm film
12
11
13
14
- Legends (items are according to the FMT Nos.) 11 : Reduced patient information area
12 : Reduced image processing parameter area (*1)
3535cm/1414inch Single
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)

74 Film String Format in SYS
F0000022.EPS
FR1-26
10"12" film
(A)
(B)
21
22
(C)
22
21
22
21
(D)
1012inch
(E)
21
22
2430cm
2430cm
1012inch
(G)
(I)
(H)
5
(J)
5
810inch, vertical 810inch
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
22
2430cm
(mammography)
2430cm
(mammography)
(K)
(L)
5
1:
2:
4:
5:
6:
22
22
1824cm
1824cm
21
22
1824cm, 502 810inch
1824cm, 502 810inch

(N)
21
21
810inch, vertical 810inch
(M)
21
2
6
(F)

Hospital name area
Patient information/image processing
parameter area (*1)

74 Film String Format in
SYS CONFIG - 4. PRINTER.
F0000035.EPS
FR1-27
2.2 Precautions of the Film Annotation Character Format
2.2 Precautions of the Film Annotation

Character Format
The tables below present precautions (differences between the CL and
the FCR 5000 Series) to be observed when setting up a film annotation
character format using the LP.
Table Differences between the CL and the FCR 5000 Series (1/2)
Item
FCR 5000 Series
CL
14"14"
film size
Can be used.
Cannot be used.
Character
quality/position
Standard fonts cannot be

changed.
Can be changed by directly

editing the FilmStrFmt.env file.
Character quality varies
depending on the font used.
The character display position
can also be different from that
used in the FCR 5000 Series.
Age display format The age counted in the

number of months and days
can be specified in their
maximum digit number.
The age counted in the

number of months and days is
fixed as follows:
(Age in days : Max. 30 days)
(Age in months : Max. 7
months)
Date display format The date display format is

possible in the Japanese
era
( 40.05.15).
Only S40.05.15 is available.

(S cannot be represented by
a kanji character.)
Both Standard and Large Fixed to the two types :

Film annotation
character area size can be specified separately Standard and Large.
change for 14"17" by for the area size.
100%-size image.
Energy
subtraction/PEM
parameter display
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Table Differences between the CL and the FCR 5000 Series (2/2)
Item
FCR 5000 Series
CL
Film annotation
characters 2
To display film annotation

characters 2, technicians
code (GJ) display must be
set up.
Not dependent, different from

the FCR 5000 Series. Each
item can be set up for whether
to display or hide individually.
Whether the FINP

110 is available
To use the FINP110 for

obtaining ID information,
the Config file is used for
making the maximum
number of characters
displayable longer for the
patient ID, patient name,
menu name, requesting
department, and study
number. Specified numbers
of characters are applied,
and an arbitrary value
cannot be specified for each
item.
Whether the FINP 110 is used

or not, the maximum number
of characters displayable can
be specified individually for
the patient ID, menu name,
requesting department, and
study number. (However, if
exceeding the preset
length,the portion that
exceeds will be cut off.)
Requesting
department name
display position in
the 2on1 format
Top of the image.
Lower-left area of the image.
Film annotation
character display
position on the
2on1 format output
of an image that
includes
pantomograph.
Film annotation characters

were used to be output as
follows with the FCR 5000
Series.
A function to rotate some film

annotation characters 90 is
not supported.
Either of the following three In addition to FCR 5000

options can be selected:
Series selections, display of
both energy subtraction and
PEM parameters can be set
1) Neither of them are
up.
displayed,
2) Only energy subtraction [Currently not supported.]
is displayed,
3) PEMparameters are
displayed.
FR1-28
3.1 Procedure for Directly Editing the FilmStrFmt File
3. Film Annotation Character Setup

(Direct Editing of FilmStrFmt)
This section describes the film annotation character setup procedure for
FMT numbers, which are indicated under 2636cm, 3543cm/
14"17", 8"10", 3535cm/14"14" and 10"12" film printout patterns
[Reference] in 2.1 Setup Items Table.
Film annotation character setup is performed by directly editing the
contents of the FilmStrFmt file.
3.1 Procedure for Directly Editing the

FilmStrFmt File
1.
2.
Click Edit/View Film String.

Utility.
IMPORTANT
When directly editing the contents of the FilmStrFmt file, be sure to
select No as the configuration setting for No. 56 (Enable Auto Edit
Function of Film String Format File) in 1. Setup Necessary When
Connecting the LP.
If you directly edit the contents of the file while the setting is left ON, the
Service Utility may restore the previous contents of the FilmStrFmt file.
Therefore, when editing the FilmStrFmt file, follow the steps indicated
below.
1. If you intend to edit the printer-related configuration settings with the
Service Utility, do it first.
2. Complete an editing procedure with the Service Utility (only the
configuration settings related to the printer), save the results, and
then change the No. 56 setting to No.
3. Finally, edit the contents of the FilmStrFmt file.
Once the FilmStrFmt file is directly edited, you should avoid performing
setup with the Service Utility.
After the FilmStrFmt file is edited, you should keep a record of the
applied changes within the FilmStrFmt file in the form of a comment.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
FR000056.EPS
The Edit/View Film String window opens.
3.
Click
Notepad opens.
4.
Edit the file in the format described later (3.2 FilmStrFmt

File Description Format and subsequent sections).
5.
Save the FilmStrFmt file and then close Notepad (Notepad.exe).
u NOTES u
The FilmStrFmt file uses Unicode characters. Therefore, be sure to
use Notepad and save the edited file in Unicode format.
The backup function of the Service Utility does not back up the
FilmStrFmt file (up to version A08). Perform a manual backup/restore
procedure by, for instance, selecting the FilmStrFmt file directly and
saving it on media, such as FD, USB memory stick or the like.
If the application software version is upgraded together with the
FilmStrFmt file, do not restore the FilmStrFmt file that is backed up on
media or the like. Locate the new version of FilmStrFmt file that is
installed upon a software upgrade and edit it according to the backed
up file as needed.
FR1-29
3.2 FilmStrFmt File Description Format

Following is the FilmStrFmt file description format.
Example of description
Format name
Command
Area size and position
Command for specifying the font type

Command for specifying the font size
Settings for one

film annotation
character format
Command for specifying the character string
Command for specifying the character string
Settings for one

film annotation
character format
FR000015 2.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
FR1-30
Following are the details of each setting.

Format name
Describes the name of the format. Do not change the description for
the CL.
REFERENCE
The ImageSize.env file stored in the C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\
Configuration folder defines which format should be used by an
output film.
x_1 for the FMT number (1_2 for FMT1) is a setting for the 20pixel/
mm image and x_M is for the mammography format.
Area size and position
Specify the area size and position between parentheses to the right
of the format name, connecting them with each other using an equal
sign (=).
Character string specifying commands

Output character string specification
Command
Line spacing specification
LineSpacing
Output format and attribute specification FilmStrings
Cautions in editing the FilmStrFmt file

Following are the cautions to observe when editing the FilmStrFmt file.
# at the top of a line indicates a comment line.
Unnecessary spaces, tabs and line changes will be disregarded.
Describe commands by the use of ; between them.
u NOTE u
Because FilmStrFmt is a Unicode-formatted text file, a Unicodeformatted NotePad included in the OS is necessary for file editing.
X-size, Y-size, position

Item
X-size
Description
Specifying the width of the film annotation character
display area (0<X-size<4280pixel)
Y-size
Specifying the height of the film annotation character
display area (0<Y-size<4280pixel)
Position Specifying the position of characters in the film annotation
character display area (C: centering, R: right padding,
L: left padding)
Command
Describes the command for setting film annotation character format.
Here, command format is similar to a programming language.
These commands relate to fonts and character strings.
For details, see 3.3 Changing the Film Annotation Characters.
Font specifying commands

Font specification
Command
Font type specification
SetFontTypeFace
Font size specification
SetFontSize
Font style specification
SetFontStyle
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
FR1-31
3.3 Changing the Film Annotation Characters

Specifying the font type
Use the SetFontTypeFace command to specify the font type.
This command will be effective from the line describing
SetFontTypeFace to the line that directly precedes another
SetFontTypeFace description.
u NOTE u
Because no default values are available for font type, make sure to
specify values for each film annotation character format.
SetFontTypeFace printout examples

Arial specified
G1.2G#0.70+0.30R4R0.5
PARANASAL SINUS
FR000016.EPS
TimesNewRoman specified
G G 70
PARANASA
0 R4R0 5
INU
FR000017.EPS
SetFontTypeFace description format

SetFontTypeFace (font name);
Enclose a True-Type font name between quotation marks ( ).
Any of the fonts that are available when Windows 2000 is installed
can be specified.
SetFontTypeFace description examples
Specifying MS Gothic
SetFontTypeFace(MS Gothic);
Specifying Times New Roman
SetFontTypeFace(TimesNewRoman);
Specifying the font size

Use the SetFontSize command to specify the font size.
This command will be effective from the line describing SetFontSize to
the line that directly precedes another SetFontSize description.
u NOTE u
Specifying ITALIC for characters displayed in reverse video can make
it look like they are missing in parts. ITALIC is thus disabled for
reverse-video characters.
SetFontSize description format

SetFontSize (font size);
Specify a font size using values expressed in terms of pixels.
SetFontSize description examples
Specifying the font size to be 20 pixels
SetFontSize(20);
Specifying the font size to be 40 pixels
SetFontSize(40);
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
FR1-32
Specifying print format and attributes
SetFontSize printout examples

Font size specified as 20 pixels
Use the SetFontStyle command to specify the font style.

This command will be effective from the line describing SetFontStyle
to the line that directly precedes another SetFontStyle description.
JOHN SMITH [M]

02247393 1938.04.08B
SetFontStyle description format
FR000018.EPS
SetFontStyle (font style);

Select either of the following.
Bold : BOLD
Italic : ITALIC
Font size specified as 40 pixels
JOHN SMITH [M]

02247393 1938.04.08B
When selecting the two font styles at the same time, use | to delimit
them (ex.: BOLD|ITALIC).
u NOTE u
FR000019.EPS
Specifying ITALIC for characters displayed in reverse video can

make it look like they are missing in parts. ITALIC is thus disabled
for reverse-video characters.
SetFontStyle description examples
Bold specified
SetFontStyle (BOLD);
Specifying bold and italic at the same time
SetFontStyle (BOLD|ITALIC) ;
SetFontStyle printout examples
Bold specified
1234567890ABC
EXP: 1998.09.29 [10:42]
FR000020.EPS
Bold and italic specified
1234567890ABC
EXP: 1998.09.29 [10:42]
FR000021.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
FR1-33
Specifying print format and attributes
Specifying the line spacing

Specify line spacing with the LineSpacing command.
Use the FilmStrings command to specify character strings.
LineSpacing description format
FilmStrings description format

FilmStrings(format descriptor1, format descriptor2, ),(attribute
descriptor1),(attribute descriptor2) ;
LineSpacing (line spacing);

Use an integer between 1 and 400 (in terms of pixels) to specify line
spacing for film annotation characters.
LineSpacing description examples
Specifying line spacing of 5 pixels
LineSpacing(5);
Specifying line spacing of 50 pixels
LineSpacing(50);
For details, see 3.4 Format Descriptors.
Attribute descriptor n
Specifies the attribute descriptor that shows an attribute to be
printed out as a character string. Basically, one attribute descriptor
is given per format descriptor. The attribute descriptor is a tag
number that represents the attribute to be printed out.
LineSpacing printout examples

Line spacing of 5 pixels specified
1234567890ABC
Format descriptor n
Specifies the format descriptor that shows the format in which
character strings are printed out. A maximum of 512 descriptors
can be specified. However, the maximum total length of all
character strings represented by the format descriptor is 256
characters.
EXP: 1998.09.29 [10:42]
It is not necessary to specify the attribute descriptor when the

format descriptor is attribute-specific.
G1.2G#0.70+0.30R4R0.5
FR000024.EPS
For details, see 3.5 Attribute Descriptors.
Line spacing of 50 pixels specified
1234567890ABC
EXP: 1998.09.29 [10:42]
G1.2G#0.70+0.30R4R0.5
FR000025.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
FR1-34
FilmStrings description examples

Printing out patient and exposure information
The patient and exposure information indicated below are printed
out.
Patient name
: Character string of variable length, up to 20

characters
Sex
Patient ID
: [+M or F+]
: Character string of variable length, up to 15
characters
: YYYY.MM.DD + B
Date of birth
Date of examination : Character string of variable length, up to 15
characters
Date of exposure
Time of exposure
FilmStrings printout examples

Patient and exposure information printout
JOHN SMITH [M]

02247393 1998.04.08B
1234567890ABC
EXP: 1998.09.29 [10:42]
FR000026.EPS
Image processing parameters printout
G1.2G#0.70+0.30R4R0.5
L2.4S325C*1.0*1.0 SCALE: 100%
: EXP+ YYYY.MM.DD
FR000027.EPS
: [+HH:MM+]
FilmStrings(,%*20s,[,%SEX2,]),(0010,0010),(0010,0040);
FilmStrings(,%*15s,,%DATE1,B),(0010,0020),(0010,0030);
FilmStrings(,%*15s),(0008,0050);
FilmStrings(EXP:,%DATE1,[,%TIME1,]),
(0008,0020),(0008,0030)
Printing out image processing parameters
The following image processing parameters are printed out.
Gradation processing
parameters
: G + GA + GT + # + GC + GS
Frequency processing
parameters
: R + RN + RT + RE
: L + latitude
Latitude (L value)
System sensitivity (S value) : S + system sensitivity
: C + gradation correction + density
Corrections
(gradation and density) correction
Image magnif./reduc. rate : SCALE: + percentage
FilmStrings( ,$IMG_PROC);
FilmStrings( ,$L,$S,$CS_SS, ,SCALE:,$MAG,%);
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
FR1-35
3.4 Format Descriptors

Described herein are the format descriptor types and content presented
in 3.3 Changing the Film Annotation Characters Specifying print
format and attributes.
Three format descriptor types are available. The first character of each
format descriptor identifies the type.
First character
\
Character string control descriptor (\)

Shown below are format descriptors that control character strings.
Descriptor
Meaning
\t
Inserts tabs. Each tab is equivalent to 80 pixels.
\r
Displays the characters that follow in reverse

video, which will be effective until \r is
specified again.
Descriptor type
Character string control descriptor
Character string style descriptor
Attribute-specific format descriptor
REFERENCE
The C language command printf format-specified method has been
adopted basically for the format descriptor that specifies the character
string print format.
However, the printf method has been expanded to make the following
items available.
Special print character formats, including characters in reverse video
Some VR-specific patterns, including date format
Information not assigned tag numbers, such as film image
magnification/reduction
Handling of a multiple number of attributes in a group (such as image
processing parameters)
Format descriptors not required by the printf method have been
deleted.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
FR1-36
Character string style descriptor (%)

This format descriptor indicates that the character string style is
composed as follows.
%[flag][width][type]
[flag]
Shows the information necessary for controlling character string
length. Can be omitted. If [flag] has been specified, [width] must also
be specified.
Flag description
Meaning
Outputs character strings padded from the left.

This is effective only when fixed length has
been specified using [width]. If it has not,
character strings will be output padded from the
right.
[width]
Shows the character string length. When * has been specified for
[flag], this indicates the maximum character string length. When it
has not, it indicates the fixed length.
Only when f has been specified for [type] the a.b style
specification will be effective, where a indicates the number of
digits (of an integer) and b the number of decimal places.
In this case, a can be omitted. Omitting a will not determine the
number of digits while determining only the number of decimal
places. When f has been specified for [type], it will not be possible
to omit only b. Specifying 0 for b will cause an error.
%*10d
1234567890
[type] (d=a decimally expressed An integer of a
maximum of
integer )
ten numbers
[width]
Character string length
[flag] (*=maximum number of characters)
Shows that the character string length specified

by [width] consists of a maximum number of
characters. If the length of the character string
to be output is longer than that specified by
[width], it will be output as specified by [width].
If the length of the character string to be output
is shorter than that specified by [width], it will be
output as it actually is.
%*10s
Example of printout
ABCDEFGHIJ
A character string
of a maximum of
[width]
ten characters
[flag] (*=maximum number of characters)
A value specified by [width]
FR000031.EPS
[type] (s=character string data)
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Example of printout
%*5.1f
Example of printout
1234.2
[type] (f=decimally expressed
floating-point number)
[width]
Character string length
[flag] (*maximum number of
characters)
A maximum of
five integers,
one decimally
expressed
floating-point
number
FR000032.EPS
FR1-37
[type]
Shows the type of character string notation. This cannot be omitted.
Two types are available: the standard type supported by C language
and a special type added exclusively for film annotation characters.
The standard type uses small letters to annotates character strings and
the special type uses large alphanumerics. Numbers cannot be used at
the beginning of character strings.
Special type
Annotation Attribute
VR
type
TM
AGEn
Outputs various age display patterns in accordance

with the values specified by n. This setting is valid
only for information on date of birth. Patterns are as
follows.
AGE1: 25 years, 1 year and 8 months, 1 month and
DA
10 days, 13 days
(date of
AGE2: 25Y, 1Y8M, 1M10D, 13D
birth only) Output format will differ with the relevant age, as
follows.
0 years to 0 years and 1 month or under : ** days
0 years and 1 month up to 1 year : ** months
1 to 8 years : ** years and ** months
8 years or over :** years
SEXn
Outputs sex display patterns in accordance with the

values specified by n. This setting is valid only for
CS
information on sex. Patterns are as follows.
(sex only)
SEX1: Male, female, (for others, 1 space)
SEX2: M, F, O (for others, 1 space)
Standard type
Attribute VR
Note
OB,OW,SL,SS, Outputs binary data in decimal form. Image

UL,US
data and overlay data cannot be selected.
AT,OB,OW,SL,
SS,UL,US
Outputs binary data in hexadecimal form.

Letters will be output in capitals.
FL,FD
Outputs binary data in floating-decimalpoint form.
AE,AS,CS,DS,
DT,IS,LO,LT,
PN,SH,ST,UI
Outputs character string data. Character

strings of a maximum length of 256
characters can be output.
Special type
Annotation
type
DATEn
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Attribute VR
DA
Note
Outputs various date display patterns in
accordance with the values specified by n.
Patterns are as follows.
DATE1 : 1998.12.13
DATE2 : 1998.DEC.13
DATE3 : 12.13.1998
DATE4 : DEC.13.1998
DATE5 : 13.12.1998
DATE6 : 13.DEC.1998
DATE7 : H1.01.13
DATE8 : 1.01.13
Outputs various time display patterns in accordance

with the values specified by n. This setting is valid
only for information for which Attribute VR has been
set to TM. Patterns are as follows.
TIME1 : 10:51
TIME2 : 10:51:20
TIME3 : AM 10:51
TIMEn
The table below shows character strings annotation types.

In the table, attributes other than those listed in the Attribute VR
column (UN and SQ) cannot be output as film annotation characters.
Annotation
type
Note
PNn
PN
Outputs name display patterns in accordance with the

values specified by n. This setting is valid only for
information with PN specified for VR. Display patterns
follow.
PN1: For printing kana alongside kanji (ANK
characters are printed only when ideographic
characters are used.)
PN2: Only for use with ideographic characters
(Ideographic characters are printed if used.
Left blank if not used.)
PN3: Only for single-byte characters (Single-byte
characters are printed if used. Left blank if not
used.)
PN4: For display of multi-byte characters (Ideographic
characters are printed if used. Single-byte
characters are printed if they are not used.
Left blank if neither are used.)
FR1-38
Attribute-specific format descriptor ($)
Table of attribute-specific format descriptors (2/3)
The attribute-specific format descriptor is used for outputting a multiple

number of attributes in groups or for outputting information that has not
been assigned tag numbers.
The attribute-specific format descriptor requires no attribute descriptors
(the tag numbers shown below).
Descriptor
Information
displayed
$GPR
GPR
processing
G
identification
characters
Characters will not be output

if this process is not
performed.
$FNC
FNC
processing
F
identification
characters
Characters will not be output

performed.
$MOD
Image
processing
parameter
change
mark
Parameters will be output

only when they have been
changed.
The table below presents attribute-specific format descriptors.

Descriptor
Information
displayed
Image
$IMG_PROC processing
parameter
$GAMMA
Gradation
processing
parameter
$BETA
Frequency
processing
parameter
$1DUSM
1D-USM
processing
parameter
$DRC
DRC
processing
parameter
Sample
character format
Outputs image
processing
parameters
(G,R,O,D,U,H).
Parameter output will
depend on the image
processing parameter
formats described
hereafter.
G 1.0G#1.6-0.20
Note
Processing parameters for
any processing that is not
subjected to in view of
processing path will not be
output.
R 4R0.5
Parameters will not be output

during multi-frequency
processing (MFP).
O 3V1.0

performed.
D 2A0.8

performed.
$MFP
MFP
processing
parameter
M FA0.8FA0.8

performed.
$PEM
PEM
processing
parameter
P ABC1.5

performed.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Sample
character format
Note
For both gradation correction

and density correction,
parameters are output
converted to character
strings.
$CS_SS
Term of
correction
$FCR_ID
FCR image
A 001
ID
Can be output by changing

the image number.
$AP_PA1
Right-andleft reversal
mark (1/2)
Can be output only when

image is reversed.
$AP_PA2
Right-andleft reversal AP (PA)

mark (2/2)
PA will be output when

reversed and AP when not
reversed.
$IP_NUM
IP number
Outputs the number without

a before it and c after it.
$MAG
_RATE
Image
67
magnif. rate
C *1.0/1.5
0412657
Can be output only when the

image size requested has
been set.
FR1-39

Descriptor
$FUNC
_PROC
Information
displayed
Sample
character format
RT-01 is for image
processing type RT.
Pair
processing
ES 01 02-01 is for an
information
image processing
type other than RT.
Note
Image processing type
(0019,2F40)
Set numbers (0021,2F30)
Image numbers in the set
(0021,2F40)
Pair processing information
numbers (0021.2F50)
Can be output only when all
four energy subtraction
parameters are within the
range of A to T.
Energy subtraction
parameters
(50F1, 2F06)
Result of subtraction
registration
(50F1, 2F07)
Normal : Does not add @.
Abnormal : Adds @.
$ES
Energy
subtraction
information
T AGGH
$L
L value
L 2.0
$S
S value
S 20000
$IMG_PS
Pixel value
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
0.10->0.15
Pixel value (0018, 1164) while

an image is read, as well as
pixel value (used for image
processing) while it is printed
will be output. **** will be
output when no pixel value
information is available.
FR1-40
3.5 Attribute Descriptors

Described next are the specific types and contents of the attribute
descriptors discussed in 3.3 Changing the Film Annotation Characters
Specifying print format and attributes.
The attribute descriptor is information used to specify several kinds of
attributes to be printed out as film annotation characters.
One attribute descriptor can be described for each format descriptor.
The attribute descriptor represents a tag number for the attribute to be
printed out.
Attribute descriptor description format

Following is the attribute descriptor description format.
(gggg,eeee)
gggg : Group number. Fixed four digits in hexadecimal form.
eeee : Element number. Fixed four digits in hexadecimal form.
Attribute descriptor description cautions

Parentheses ( ) are required when describing a tag number.
Use a comma , between attributes.
Use a comma , between a group and an element.
If the specified tag is not available, use one half-size space.
For the patients name, create a character string after delimitation
conversion.
When printing out a kanji character string, remove the ESC sequence
and then create the string.
Handle control characters within LT and ST as spaces.
For a tag for which VM is 1 or more, only the head information will be
printed out. However, information for the character string will be
printed out including the \ that represents delimitation.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
FR1-41
Attributes that can be printed out using the CL

Tables below show attributes that can be output using the CLs DICOM
Print function.
Attributes that can be printed out using the CL and its attribute descriptors (1/4)
Attribute
Annotation
Hospital (institution)
name
kanji
ANK
IP no.
The a and c are deleted.
3
4
Film annotation
characters
Format
descriptor
Attribute
descriptor
%s
(0009, 2F80)
FUJI HOSPITAL
%s
(0008, 0080)
04012657
$IP_NUM
(0018, 1004)
EDR mode
A, S, F , M
$EDR_MODE
(0019, 2F50)
Menu code
0900
%s
(0018, 1401)
A 001
$FCR_ID
$IMG_PROC
$GAMMA
System ID
A to Z
Image no.
Decimal under 3 digits
Image proc.
conditions
Gradation proc.
-identifying characters GA, GT,

GC, GS
Frequency proc.
-identifying characters RN, RT,

R 4R0.5
RE
$BETA
1D-USM
1D-USM identification characters

O 3V1.0
ORN, ORD, ORE
$1DUSM
DRC
DRC identification characters

DRN, DRT, DRE
$DRC
MFP
MFP identification characters

U FA0.8FA0.8
HRN, HRT, HRE, HDN, HDT, HDE
$MFP
PEM proc.
PEM proc. parameter characters

P ABC1.5
PRN, edge, calc, PRE
$PEM
GPR proc.
GPR proc. identification

characters
$GPR
FNC proc.
FNC proc. identification

characters
$FNC
$MOD
Image proc. condition

change mark
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
G .0G#1.6-0.20
D 2A0.8
FR1-42
Attribute
6
Exposure menu
name
Annotation
Film annotation
characters
kanji
ANK
CHEST
GENERAL
Normalization
conditions +
correction term
Latitude
7
System sensitivity identification

System sensitivity character
System sensitivity
Correction term
Latitude identification character

Latitude
Correction term identification

character, gradation correction,
density correction
Format
descriptor
Attribute
descriptor
%s
(0019, 2F32)
%s
(0018, 1400)
L 2.0
$L
S 20000
$S
C *1.0/1.5
$CS_SS
kanji
%s
(0009, 2F92)
SURGERY1
%s
(0032, 1033)
Radiographer
code
NT
%s
(0019, 2F60)
Exposure stand
information
100kv10mAs
%s
(0019, 2F91)
1010181139
%s
(0010, 0020)
%s
(0011, 2F10)
Department
name
ANK
10 Patient ID
11 Patient name
12 Examination no.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
kanji
ANK
FUJI TARO
%s
(0010, 0010)
Accession Number
1234567890ABC
%s
(0008, 0050)
FR1-43
Attribute
Annotation
Film annotation
characters
EXP: ..
EXP:
ANSI short format
1998.12.13
%DATE1
ANSI long format
1998.DEC.13
%DATE2
American short format
12.13.1998
%DATE3
American long format
DEC.13.1998
%DATE4
European short format
13.12.1998
%DATE5
European long format
13.DEC.1998
%DATE6
Japanese date format
H10.12.13
%DATE7
10.12.13
%DATE8
Date of
13
exposure
Japanese date (kanji) format

14
Format
descriptor
Attribute
descriptor
(0008, 0020)
Sex: kanji
kanji
[ ] or [ ]
%SEX1
(0010, 0040)
Sex: ANK
Alphabet
[M] or [F]
%SEX2
(0010, 0040)
Y, YM, MD, D
Age
15
Date of birth
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
kanji
25 , 1 8 ,
1 10 , 13
%AGE1
Alphanumerics
25Y, 1Y8M
1M10D, 13D
%AGE2
YYYY.MM.DD
1989.12.13
%DATEn,
YYYY.MM.DDB
1989.12.13B
%DATEn, B
(0010, 0030)
FR1-44
Attribute
Annotation
Film annotation
characters
Format
descriptor
Attribute
descriptor
Pair proc.
Proc. type, pair no., IP and IL
ES01 02-01
Routine proc.
Indicates the routine and serial

routine processing nos.
RT-01
17 Time of exposure
Hour and minute
[10:51]
[ ,%TIME1, ]
(0008, 0030)
18 Film mark
Film annotation characters1
PA
%s
(0019, 2F90)
16
Magnif./reduc.
19
rate
$FUNC_PROC
: 100%
:
$MAG, %
SCALE : 100%
SCALE:,
$MAG, %
20 Patient name (2)

21
: 22
Data compression
code
22
Energy
subtraction
23
Right-and-left
reversal mark
24
Technologist
name
CC : 22
Energy subtraction parameter
table identification characters Ta,
T AGGH
Tb, Tc, Td, and failure flag (only
when there is a failure)
:,%
(0029, 2F50)
CC:,%s
(0029, 2F50)
$ES
R , AP (PA)
$AP_PA1 or
$AP_PA2
kanji
TEC:
TEC: ,%7PN2
(0008, 1070)
ANK
TEC: FUJI TARO
TEC: ,%14PN3
(0008, 1070)
0.05->0.10
$IMG_PS
1.00 dGycm2
%s,dGycm2
25 Pixel value
26
Dose-area
product
(0018, 115E)
To print out attributes other than those listed above, set the relative tag number of the attribute specified in
the Conformance Statement.
Conformance Statement
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
FR1-45
3.6 Film Annotation Character Verification Procedure
3.6 Film Annotation Character Verification

Procedure
4.
From the Format Number pull-down menu, choose the

name of the film annotation character format you want to
verify. Leave the other settings as they are.
With the Service Utility, you can verify the FilmStrFmt file editing results.
The procedure is described below.
1.

Utility.
2.
Click Edit/View Film String.
FR000056.EPS
The Edit/View Film String window opens.
3.
Click
FR000046.EPS
5.
The FilmChar Setup window opens.
The Edit/View Film String window shows a film annotation

character string.
6.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Click
To verify the other film annotation character formats, repeat

steps 3. through 5.
FR1-46
4. Setting the DICOM Print Output Conditions
4. Setting the DICOM Print

Output Conditions
Item
Option
REQ-SRV
Requesting
department
DEV-CODE
Image
generation
device (machine
shipment control
identification
code)
MPM
MPM code
The DICOM Print output condition setup data are detailed below.
Item
Option
BLUE FILM
Media type
(Media Type)
Film output
destination
(Film
Destination)
Film size
(Film Size ID)
Image
interpolation
method
(Mag Type)
Image
smoothing
method
(Smoothing
Type)
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Meaning
Remarks
Film having a
Routine setting.
blue background
Identification key
(Recognition
Code)
Film having a
CLEAR FILM transparent
background
MAGAZINE
BIN_I
Printer trays
8IN10IN
8"10"
10IN12IN
10"12"
10IN14IN
2636 cm
14IN14IN
14"14"
14IN17IN
14"17"
REPLICATE
Replicate
method
BILINEAR
Bilinear method
CUBIC
Cubic method
NONE
No interpolation
A character
string
Exposure
BODY-PART anatomical
region
Magazine
PROCESSOR Processor
A character
string
Meaning
When the output

destination is FN-PS.
NONE
Default BIN
number
(Default BIN
Number)
10-bit image
output
(10Bits Stored
Supported)
Requested
Image Size
(2020, 0030)
Routine setting.
This setting takes effect
only when CUBIC is
selected as the image
interpolation method.
As a character string,
write the character
string that is defined
under Conformance
Statement for the
output destination
printer. If the output
destination is FN-PS,
leave this column blank.
Maximum
density
Dmax
Unchecked
Information for
identifying the BIN
number that is used to
specify the film output
destination
(printer trays)
(character string:
information matching
the information attached
to image data).
No setting
BIN number for printing
images without
matching collation
values.
BIN-numberindicating
number
Checked
Remarks
Generates 10-bit
image output.
Select Checked for a
Generates 12-bit FujiFilm printer.
image output.
Transfers an
SUPPORTED image size
request tag.
Select SUPPORTED
Does not transfer for a FujiFilm printer.
UNSUPPORTED an image size
request tag.
3.0
3.6
If 3.6 is set, images will

be printed at Dmax 3.6
only when the MPM
CODE is x3xx.
FR1-47
BLANK PAGE
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
FR1-48

When generating image outputs using the DICOM CR STORAGE
function, you can edit (copy, move, delete, or initialize) the tag
information (image information). To edit the tag information, open the
setup file (TagReplace.ini) and write desired data in the file.
The procedure is described below:
u NOTE u
Do not use the TagReplace.ini file, which is used by any other
equipment (such as the QA-WS), for the CL. Due to different file storage
format adopted, an error will result.
TagReplace.ini file format

; Tag setup file
;
[DICOM]
;
;
00080090=MOV-T-L,00092F90
00181400=CPY-T,00192F30
00192f90=DEL
;
00192F30=SET,"SKULL,GENERAL"
Open the C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Configuration

folder.
2.
Open the TagReplace.ini file with Notepad (Notepad.exe).
u NOTE u
By default, [DICOM] is described in the TagReplace.ini file. Do not
delete this description,otherwise the CL will not be started.
3.
Write desired tag information in the file in accordance with

the format described later.
REFERENCE
As the editing target tag VR, only character strings are supported.
If a tag VR entry in the setup file is not a character string, an error
dialog box opens at CL startup.
4.
V. Initial value
FR000001.EPS
I.
1.
I. Comment
II. Section name
(protocol name)
III. Editing destination tag
IV.Command
Comment
Lines beginning with a semicolon (;) are handled as a comment.
II. Section name (protocol name)

As the section name, the protocol name targeted for tag information
editing must be written within square brackets ([ ]). Only DICOM is
supported.
III. Editing destination tag
Write the group number/element number of the editing destination tag
information (enter a string of eight characters at all times).
IV. Command
Write a tag information editing command. See the table that is presented
later.
V. Initial value
Write a character string in VR-compliant format to specify the initial
value for a tag information element.
Save the TagReplace.ini file in UNICODE format and then

close Notepad (Notepad.exe).
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
FR2-1
The following commands are available:

Command
CPY
MOV
DEL
SET
Description
Process
Copies an element from another tag.
Format
Editing-destination-tag=CPY[-T],editing-source-tag
-T : Performs an element copy operation after
deleting spaces from the beginning and end
of the source tag element. If, for instance, the
source tag = ABC, the command
copies ABC ( : space).
Process
Moves an element from another tag.
Format
Editing-destination-tag=MOV[-T][-L],source-tag
-L : Performs a move operation after setting the
source tag element length to zero.
-T : Performs an element move operation after
deleting spaces from the beginning and end
of the source tag element. If, for instance, the
source tag = ABC, the command moves
ABC ( : space).
Process
Deletes an element.
Format
Editing-destination-tag=DEL[-L]
-L : Sets the element length of the editing
destination tag to zero.
Process
Sets a fixed initial value for the element.
Format
Editing-destination-tag=SET, initial-value
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
u NOTES u
When writing the TagReplace.ini file, set data in compliance with
DICOM VR. Also, exercise care to avoid internal data inconsistency.
Even if the editing destination tag differs from the source tag in VR,
the editing process is performed as far as they are both in character
string form. Note, however, that even if the character string length is
over the limit specified by the editing destination tag VR, the tag
information is set as is without being checked.
The editing process will not be performed if the associated tag or
element and initial value do not exist on the source side.
For the detailed information about Fujis Private tags, see DICOM
Conformance Statement.
FR2-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR2-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR2-4
Creating/Deleting Markers
By default, the CL allows you to use 83 different markers that are
frequently used at institutions. However, some institutions might want to
use some other markers or delete infrequently used markers from the
list.
This section explains about the procedures for creating new markers
and deleting markers.
u NOTES u
Changing filename of a marker used for automatic markers will cause
an error to result when performing an exposure using a filenamechanged marker.
For this reason, do not change filename of a marker used for
automatic markers. As the need arises to change it, be sure to delete
automatic markers from all the exposure menus beforehand.
Filename
The filename must consist of an alphanumeric character string and
extension (.bmp).
When the CL-AP lists markers, they are arranged in the order
determined by their file names.
REFERENCE
For software version V7.0(B) or later, double-byte characters can be
used to describe a filename.
Minimum/maximum size
The marker size range is from 50 pixels 50 pixels to 1000 pixels
1000 pixels (which corresponds to an actual dimensional range of
0.5 mm 0.5 mm to 100 mm 100 mm).
From Paints Image menu, choose Attributes. In the Attributes
window, specify the size by entering values in the Width and
Height input fields.
Creating markers
New markers can be created with Paint, which is a standard
application supplied with the OS. When creating a marker, launch Paint
and perform the following procedure.
Image format
Only the monochrome format of Windows BMP can be used.
From Paints Image menu, choose Attributes. In the Attributes
window, choose Black and white from the Colors area.
FR000008.EPS
Actual size
One BMP pixel corresponds to an actual size value of 0.1 mm.
To create a 25 mm marker, use Paint to create 250-pixel data.
Example) BMP
: 100 pixels 100 pixels
Actual size : 10 mm 10 mm
FR000007.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
FR3-1
Marker data storage location

You can use a created marker when its file is stored in the following
folder.
The folder can store up to 128 data. Since 83 data are initially
stored, you can additionally store up to 45 data if the initially stored
data is left undeleted.
C:\Program Files\Fujifilm\IIP\MarkerBmp
Marker creation example [Reference]

The procedure for creating a marker is described below. The procedure
presumes that the following marker is to be created:
15mm
8mm
Marker retention after an application upgrade

Even if you upgrade the application, created markers are retained.
123
File Name : 123.bmp
1.
Click
, point to Programs and Accessories, and
then click Paint.

Paint then opens.
2.
From the Image menu, choose Attributes.

The Attributes window then opens.
3.
In the Width and Height fields, enter 150 and 80,

respectively. Turn ON the Black and white radio button in
the Colors area.
u NOTE u
Be sure that Pixels is selected in the Units area.
FR000003.EPS
4.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Click
FR3-2
5.
7.
With Text tool, enter text.
u NOTE u
Enter text in black (against a white background of BMP data).
In a CL-AP window, the white portion of BMP data becomes the
background with the text (marker) displayed in black.
Launch the CL-AP. Verify that 123.bmp is displayed in the

marker list.
123.bmp
FR000004.EPS
Text tool
6.
Enter 123.
Perform the following steps to save the created BMP data in the
predetermined folder (C:\Program Files\Fujifilm\IIP\MarkerBmp).
FR000009.EPS
1. Choose "C:\Program Files\Fujifilm\IIP\MarkerBmp"
FR000005.EPS
2. Enter 123.bmp.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
3. Choose Monochrome Bitmap.
FR3-3
Deleting markers
Move the associated BMP data in the following folder to Recycle Bin or
another folder.
C:\Program Files\Fujifilm\IIP\MarkerBmp
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
FR3-4
3.
The DICOM log is a record of communications with DICOM-connected

equipment. Under normal conditions, the log files record associations
only. However, you can record detailed descriptions of communications
by changing the DICOM Log Mode. This mode change is called a
DICOM Log Mode change.
Enter the parameter value 0, 1, or 2 as shown below.

The meanings of the modes selected by these parameters
are explained below:
0: Records nothing.
1: Records associations only (default).
2: Records detailed information as well.
The log files record the numbers of DICOM tags, the information
attached to DICOM tags, the time of communication with connected
equipment, and other relevant information.
u NOTE u
Changing the DICOM Log Mode
1.
4.
For Windows 2000/XP

From the
(The
Parameter
symbol represents a space.)
Click
FR000010.EPS
A confirmation window opens, notifying you that the DICOM Mode

is changed.
menu, choose Run..., and then click

.
For Windows Vista

From the
menu sequentially choose All
Programs, Accessories and Run and then click

.
2.
Select the DicomLogMode.exe file in the following directory:
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\DicomLogMode.exe
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
FR000011.EPS
5.
Click
The confirmation window closes.
u NOTE u
After completion of a DICOM Log Mode change and log file
verification, be sure to return the mode selection to 1.
FR4-1
Log file storage locations and types
1.
Open the directory (C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Log) in

which the DICOM log files are stored.
2.
Use a text editor (Notepad) to open the DICOM log files.

The following DICOM log files are used:
DICOMMWLSCU.log

: Log of MWM ORDER function

related information
DICOMMWMPI.log
: Log of MWM ID function related
information
DICOMMPPSSCU.log
: Log of PPS function related
information
DicomPrint.log
: Log of DICOM PRINT function
related information
DicomStorage.log
: Log of DICOM STORAGE
function related information
DicomStorageCommitment.log : Log of DICOM STORAGE
COMMITMENT function related
information
DICOMQRRET.log
: Log of DICOM Query/Retrieve
DicomIn.log
: Log of function for image input
from the FCR5000plus or for
DICOM image input using DICOM
QR
DICOM QRSRH.log
: Log of DICOM QR - Query
Previous log files
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Log files are stored here.
FR000012.EPS
REFERENCE
Previous log files are stored in folders named A, B, C, and so
on. The log files saved directly under the Log folder are those
which were generated when the application was last started. When
the application is started again, a new folder is created (e.g., folder
D) and the log files saved directly under the Log folder are
moved to the new folder.
FR4-2
Details of log files

The log file shown below is used in log mode 2 (detail mode) to record
MWM-related communications.
000104242002/01/18 14:04:27 broker S <118> A-ASSOCIATE-RQ
I.
II.
III.
2002/01/18 14:04:27 broker S <118> PresentationContextID -> 0x01

2002/01/18 14:04:27 broker S <118> AbstractSyntax -> "1.2.840.10008.5.1.4.31"
IV.
2002/01/18 14:04:27 broker S <118> TransferSyntax -> "1.2.840.10008.1.2"

2002/01/18 14:04:27 broker R <118> A-ASSOCIATE-AC
2002/01/18 14:04:27 broker R <118> PresentationContextID -> 0x01 Result (0x00)
2002/01/18 14:04:27 broker R <118> TransferSyntax -> "1.2.840.10008.1.2"
V.
VI.
2002/01/18 14:04:42 broker R <118> (0040,0007) 14(0xe) LO

2002/01/18 14:04:42 broker R <118>
I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
VI.
VII.
-> "CHEST, PA/LAT"
Date and time of a data transmission by CL or other connected

equipment
CL association
Information about the transmitter (broker S = CL, broker R = other
connected equipment)
Detailed information (transmitted by CL)
Connected equipment association
Detailed information (transmitted by connected equipment)
Tag information
VII.
FR000014.EPS
REFERENCE
The data to be recorded varies with selected log mode.
Mode 1 records the logged data about associations only (only the
second and fifth lines in the above figure). Mode 2 records the entire
logged data.
Mode 0 records nothing.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
FR4-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
FR4-4

The display gradation correction setup procedure is performed to
optimize the appearance of images displayed on other manufacturers
viewer when they are transmitted from the CL.
Setup procedure
With the Service Utility, perform gradation correction setup as directed
below.
1.
This section explains about the LUT file handling and Service Utility
setup procedures to be performed for gradation correction purposes.
Start the Service Utility mode and open the gradation

correction setup window (LUT Operation).
For the procedure for opening the setup window, see
Equipment for the DICOM CR Storage Function under
CL + Other (DICOM CR Storage: Transfer of Processed
Images) in OE4: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment.
u NOTE u
For image display optimization, it is necessary to use a LUT file that is
created with Fujis CRT-QC gradation correction tool for use with other
manufacturers viewer. Create such a LUT file beforehand.
For how to create a LUT file, see FCR Diagnostic Image
Display Gradation Correction Procedure in the MONITOR QC
Service Manual.
2.
In the setup window (LUT Operation on the DICOM Setup

screen), select a LUT transmission type.
I.
II.
To use the LUT Operation function from software version V5.0(B) or

later, a 16bitLUT file is required.
III.
IV.
V.
For how to create a 16bitLUT file, see 1. LUT Bit Conversion

Tool.
Handling the LUT file

Create a LUT file with Fujis CRT-QC gradation correction tool for use
with other manufacturers viewer.
Copy this file to the CLs specified folder and change its name.
Copy destination : C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\CrtLut folder
Filename
: SCP AE name+.lut (e.g., ViewerA.lut)
u NOTE u
For Siemens viewer, use the LUT file (siemens.lut) that is stored in the
following folder on the CL.
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\CrtLut\siemens.lut
Be sure to change the filename (to SCP AE name+.lut).
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
VI.
FR050001.EPS
I.
Choose this option when outgoing images are not to be

subjected to gradation correction.
II. Choose this option when outgoing images are corrected on the
CL for gradation and then transmitted as DICOM-processed
images.
u NOTE u
Option II. is selectable only when the processed image
transmission option key is installed in the CL and DICOM CR
Storage setup is completed for processed image transmission.
III. Choose this option when DICOM tag information (Modality LUT
module/0028,3000) is to be added to outgoing images so that
they are subjected to gradation correction at the connected
equipment (Kodak, etc.).
FR5-1
IV. Choose this option when DICOM tag information (VOILUT

equipment.
V. Choose this option when DICOM tag information (VOILUT
equipment. The sending LUT used for this purpose is the one
that includes gradation processing data. This option can be
selected only for handling of 12bit processed images.
V. Enter 1 in the Value data field.
NOTE
VI. Click
FR000057.EPS
The screen goes back to the Registry Editor window.
When using the V. option, above, a 16bitLUT file is required. Save

a 16bitLUT file in C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\CrtLut.
VII. Close Registry Editor (Regedit).

VIII. Start the Service Utility mode and open the aforementioned
setup window (LUT Operation of the DICOM Setup screen).
For how to create a 16bitLUT file, see 1. LUT Bit Conversion

Tool.
IX. Locate
VI. Choose this option when the connected equipment used is

manufactured by Siemens. By default, this option is hidden.
To show this option, perform the procedure indicated in the next
step.
3.
X. Check this option (
).
This option is hidden by default. To check this option, you must first
set the system to show it. The procedure is described below.
in the window.
).
u NOTE u
Do not check this option when the 12bit image output setting is
used.
If the connected equipment used is manufactured by

Siemens, check
4.
Save the setup data and then exit the Service Utility mode.
I. Exit the Service Utility mode.

II. Open Registry Editor (Regedit).
III. In the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\FujiFilm\IIP folder,
create a DWORD value named ModlutDisplay.
IV. Double-click
The Edit DWORD Value dialog box opens.
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
FR5-2
1.1 Functions and Overview of the LUT Bit Conversion Tool
1. LUT Bit Conversion Tool

This section explains the LUT Bit Conversion Tool commands and
operations. This tool uses PowerTools Olectra Ver6.0 runtime module.
Olectra Chart
Copyright 2000 ComponentOneLLC
1.1 Functions and Overview of the LUT Bit

Conversion Tool
Operation environment
Use a PC that meets the following requirements.
OS
Windows XP SP2
Windows 2000 SP4
Functions and overview

The LUT Bit Conversion Tool converts a 10bitLUT file to a 10
16bitLUT file.
Activating this tool displays the following window (main menu
hereinafter).
I
II
V
III
VII
VI
IV
VI
FR050002.EPS
Required program
The LUT Bit Conversion Tool consists of the following files.
Conv10bitLUT.exe (LUT conversion program)
ConvLUTGraph.exe (Program to show graph of an LUT file after
conversion.)
Olch2x32.ocx
II
Input File
Specifies a 10bitLUT file targeted for conversion.

(Default path: C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\CrtLut\*.lut)
Output File
Specifies location of storage and filename of a

converted LUT file. The folder where the file specified
in I, above, is located, plus Result.txt are displayed
as the default path.
(Default path: C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\CrtLut\Result.txt)
(Component necessary for executing the LUT

conversion program.)
III Algorithm
IV
Bit number after Enters a bit number (10 16) after data conversion
the converting
processing.
Start of data
conversion
Starts data conversion processing.
VI
Graphical
representation
Shows a graph of a converted LUT file.
VII Exit
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
Selects an algorithm used for data conversion.

cubic spline interpolation :
Bit processing implemented using the cubic spline.
B spline interpolation :
Bit conversion implemented using the B spline.
Exits the LUT Bit Conversion Tool.
FR5-3
1.2 Starting/Exiting the LUT Bit Conversion Tool
1.2 Starting/Exiting the LUT Bit

Conversion Tool
Starting the tool
1.
Execute Conv10bitLUT.exe.
Exiting the tool
1.
Select Exit on the main menu window.
1.3 Bit Conversion of an LUT File

Described herein is the procedure for converting a 10bitLUT file to an
LUT file of the specified bit number.
1.
Start the LUT Bit Conversion Tool.
2.

I
II
III
IV
FR050003.EPS
I.
II.
III.
IV.
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
Specify a 10bitLUT file targeted for data conversion.

Specify location of storage and filename of a converted LUT file.
Select an algorithm used for data conversion.
Enter a bit number after data conversion processing. (Enter 16
for an LUT used with V5.0(B) or later).
FR5-4
1.3 Bit Conversion of an LUT File
3.
Click
When data conversion processing is complete, a window like that

shown below opens.
6.
Verify the graph.
7.
Click
The system returns to the main menu window.
8.
Exit the LUT Bit Conversion Tool.
FR050004.EPS
4.
Click
The system returns to the main menu window.
5.
Click
Data of an LUT file subjected to bit conversion processing is

represented by a graph.
FR050005.EPS
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
FR5-5
BLANK PAGE
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
FR5-6
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR5-7
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR5-8

NOTE
For the CR Console Lite, the CL LUT-ADJUSTMENT FOR LITE option
key needs to be installed.
A character string can be embedded in a tag in accordance with an
input image MPM code. To do this, open the setup file (TagLookup.ini)
and describe an MPM code for character string embedding and the tag
into which a character string is to be embedded.
The procedure is described below.
1.
Open the C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Configuration

folder.
2.
With Notepad (Notepad), open the TagLookup.ini file.
REFERENCE
TagLookup.ini file format

I. Comment
; DICOM-Tag editing function setup
;
[DICOM]
[00181401,00081030]
0301=TEST1
0302=TEST2
I.
II.
III.
3.
Write the settings in the file in compliance with the format

explained later.
IV.
4.
Save the TagLookup.ini file in text format and then close

Notepad (Notepad).
V.
The TagLookup.ini file uses Unicode characters. Therefore, be

sure to use Notepad as an editor and save the edited file in
Unicode format.
The backup function of Service Utility version A08 does not back
up the TagLookup.ini file. Perform a manual backup/restore
procedure by, for instance, selecting the TagLookup.ini file directly
and saving it on media, such as FD, USB memory stick or the
like.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
III. MPM code tag and character

string embedding tag
IV. MPM code
V. Character string
FR000015.EPS
By default, nothing is written in the TagLookup.ini file.
u NOTES u
II. Protocol type
Comment
Lines beginning with a semicolon (;) is handled as a comment.
Protocol type
The name of the protocol to be edited must be written within
square brackets ([ ]). Only DICOM is supported.
MPM code tag and character string embedding tag
Describe an MPM code tag (fixed at 00181401) on the left-hand
side. Describe a character string embedding tag on the righthand side. Separate these two entries with a comma (,).
III. and IV. can be combined to set up two or more III. and IV.
items using different tags.
MPM code
Describe an MPM code for character string embedding. You can
describe one or more MPM codes.
Character string
Describe the character string to be embedded in the tag. Be sure
to enclose the character string in double-quotation marks ().
When an image having MPM code 0301 is entered in situations where

the settings indicated in the above example are used, an output will be
generated with the character string TEST1 embedded in the 00081030
tag (Study Description).
u NOTES u
For the detailed information about Fuji Private tags, see DICOM
Conformance Statement.
Because the TagLookup.ini file is applied after the TagReplace.ini file,
settings performed by the TagLookup.ini file take effect if values have
been set up for the same tag.
FR6-1
BLANK PAGE
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
FR6-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR6-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR6-4
Setup of Log Output Items of the Exposure Result Log Function
4.
Setup of Log Output Items of

the Exposure Result Log Function
To change data items to be stored in a log, edit on Microsoft Access
2000 the ExposureResultLog.mdb setup file backed up using the
Service Utility function. You can change log items in the check boxes of
the EntryFlag column on the ExposureResult table. The necessary
procedure is described as follows.
Edit the ExposureResultLog.mdb setup file on a different PC.
1.
Use Microsoft Access to open the ExposureResultLog.

mdb file.
2.
Open the Exposure Result table.
3.
Turn on/off check boxes in the EntryFlag column

accordingly.
Use either of the following procedures to revert the modified

ExposureResultLog.mdb file to the CL-PCs previous
directory.
Restore the setup file.
Copy the modified ExposureResultLog.mdb file to the
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Param folder.
u NOTE u
Note that if there are a lot of log items, the number of data items
that can be stored in the log will be smaller.
To add a log item, check the relevant check box.

To delete a log item, uncheck the relevant check box.
FR000059.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
FR7-1
BLANK PAGE
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
FR7-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR7-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR7-4
Wake-on-LAN Setup
2.
Wake-on-LAN Setup

The installer starts running and the FF-WakeOnLAN Setup
window opens.
This section describes the setup procedure for the Wake on LAN
function, which automatically starts the Image Reader upon CL startup.
u NOTES u
Only the CR-IR364 can be automatically started by the Wake on LAN
function.
3.
Click
The FF-WakeOnLAN Setup/Choose Destination Location window

opens.
Installing the Wake-on-LAN Utility
1.
FR000060.EPS
4.
Click
The FF-WakeOnLAN Setup/Start Copying Files window opens.
NOTE
5.
Click
The installation process starts.

Upon completion of installation, the Setup complete window
opens.
6.
Click
FR000061.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
FR8-1
Wake-on-LAN Setup
Registering other connected equipment
REFERENCE
As regards the CR-IR364, the MAC address can be obtained with
the maintenance utility.
Perform the following procedure to register other connected equipment

to be started automatically:
1.
From the
menu, choose Programs, Fuji Film,
and FF-WakeOnLAN Utility.
4.
Click
The system returns you to the previous window.
The Wake-on-LAN Utility starts up.
FR000063.EPS
2.
FR000065.EPS
From the Edit menu, choose Register.

The other connected equipment registration window opens.
3.
5.
To register another connected equipment, repeat steps 2.

through 4.
6.
Perform the following steps to verify the automatic startup

process:
I. Put other connected equipment on standby.
II. Select other connected equipment from the list, and then click
.
III. Click
II
IV
7.
III
After verifying startup process for other connected

equipment, click
to exit the Wake-on-LAN
utility.
FR000062.EPS
I.
Enter MAC address (e.g., 11-AB-CD-EF-AB-CD) of other

II. Enter IP address (e.g., 172.16.1.10) of other connected
equipment.
III. Enter host name (e.g., ru0) of other connected equipment.
IV. Make sure that Enable is checked. (If you intend to register
other connected equipment but do not want it to automatically
start up, uncheck Enable.)
010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
Verifying the automatic startup process
1.
Put other connected equipment on standby and then restart

the CL.
2.
Verify other connected equipment starts up the moment the

CL starts up.
FR8-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR8-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR8-4
1.

The main menu of the IIP Setup Tool opens automatically.
NOTE
When the software is upgraded from version A10 or earlier to version

A11, all the GPR processing parameters for existing exposure menus
are disabled.
Whether a grid is used or not is automatically checked for so that the
GPR process is performed only when it is needed. Therefore, the GPR
function should be disabled for menus that will never use the grid for
making exposures, and enabled for the other menus.
Software version A11 additionally incorporates a function for performing
the above setup procedure (enabling/disabling the GPR process).
When the GPR option is newly added for use with software version A11
or later, perform the setup procedure.
To change the GPR process setup, use a menu provided by the IIP
Setup Tool, which is supplied on the CL-AP CD (2 of 2). The procedure
is described below:

FR000077.EPS
2.

The GPR Default Parameter Setup Menu opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
FR9-1
3.
Enter 1 (for the Japanese version) or 2 (for a nonJapanese version), and then press the <Enter> key.
The system sets the GPR processing parameters.
When you perform the above procedure, the following MPM code
menus are disabled (turned OFF) and the other menus are enabled
(turned ON). If the resulting setup does not meet the operating
conditions for a specific institution, manually adjust it accordingly.
Japan
U.S.
Other countries
Breast menu
?3??
?3??
?3??
Test menu
?9??
?9??
?9??
Treatment menu
7 ? 0B, 7 ? 1B
Pneumoconiosis
menu
0210
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
FR9-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR9-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR9-4
Setup for Addition of Descriptive Characters to Icons [Applicable only in Japan]
Setup for Addition of Descriptive

Characters to Icons
010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
FR10-1
BLANK PAGE
010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
FR10-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR10-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR10-4
Setup of Rules Applied for Automatic Patient ID Issuance
Setup of Rules Applied for

Automatic Patient ID Issuance
Rules applied when automatically issuing patient ID can be set up as
follows.
Open the setup file (IssuanceIdPreset.dat) to describe elements (such
as study date, auto increment function, etc.) to be included in the
automatically issued patient ID.
NOTE
To use the screening examination order issuance function for version
V7.1(B) or later, the IssuanceIdMassOrder.dat setup file is used.
Perform necessary operations reading the description presented herein
for it accordingly.
u NOTES u
The IssuancePreset.dat file uses Unicode characters. Therefore,
be sure to use NotePad as an a editor and save the edited file in
the Unicode format.
The backup function of Service Utility does not back up the
IssuanceIdPreset.dat and IssuanceIdMassOrder.dat files. Perform
a manual backup/restore procedure by, for instance, selecting the
IssuanceIdPreset.dat and IssuanceIdMassOrder.dat file directly
and saving them on media, such as FD, USB memory stick.
However in V8.1(B) or later, IssuanceIdMassOrder.dat file is
backed up in Service Utility.
IssuanceIdPreset.dat file format

Elements
1.
Open the C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Config folder.
2.
Use the NotePad function to open the IssuanceIdPreset.dat

file.
REFERENCE
The default IssuanceIdPreset.dat file includes the following
description. System ID (alphanumerics) + study date (year,
month, day) + a five-digit serial number are issued following the
automatic issuance rules.
For IssuanceIdPreset.dat
%SystemID(0)%%Date(YYMMDD)%%AutoInc(A,5,0,99999,1,1)%
For IssuanceIdMassOrder.dat
%SystemID(0)%%Date(YYMMDD)%%AutoInc(AutoIncID,5,1,99999,1,1)%
3.
Describe the settings in the file in compliance with the

format explained below.
4.
Save the IssuanceIdPreset.dat file in the text format and

close NotePad.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Elements
Elements
%SystemID(0)%%Date("YYMMDD")%%AutoInc("A",5,0,99999,1,1)%
A : Character string component

B : Identifier (character string element issuance rule)
FR110001.eps
IssuanceIdMassOrder.dat file format

Elements
Elements
Elements
%SystemID(0)%%Date("YYMMDD")%%AutoInc("AutoIncID",5,1,99999,1,1)%
A : Character string component

B : Identifier (character string element issuance rule)
FR190001.ai
NOTE
If format of the ID issuance setup file is invalid (when the applicable
restrictions are not observed appropriately), a relevant message
appears at CL-AP startup. In such cases, correct the setup file format
as necessary. Note however that even if the format is invalid, it is
converted into fixed values internally and the CL-AP, as a result, starts
up.
FR11-1
Details of setting items (IssuanceIdPreset.dat)

Display item
Component
How to set up the identifier
Setup example
System ID
%SystemID(Type)%
Type (numerical value)

0 : Alphabet (A to Z)
1 : Numerics (1 to 26)
The value set up for No. 14 System Recognition ID (A to Z) of IMAGE MODALITY will
be used.
%SystemID(0)%
Date
%Date(Format)%
Format (character string)

YY : All the four digits representing the Christian Era. (2004)
yy : The lower two digits of the Christian Era. (04)
GG : Three digits with initial for the Japanese Era. (H16)
MM : A two-digit number representing the month.
DD : A two-digit number representing the day.
%Date(YYMMDD)%
Time
%Time(Format)%

%Time(HHMM)%
HH : A two-digit number representing the hour. (An around-the-clock representation)
MM : A two-digit number representing the minute.
SS : A two-digit number representing the second.
Fixed character %Fix(String)%

string
String (character string)

Enter single-byte characters.
Do not use multi-byte characters, * (one-byte character) and @ (one-byte
character).
User-defined
%UFix(ID, Max)%
character string
%UFix(B,4)%
ID (character string)
Enter an identifier for user-defined character strings. Set a value different from the
auto increment identifier. If an identifier same as to the auto increment identifier is set,
the two same values will be set up.
Max (numerical value)
Enter the maximum character string length.
%Fix(FUJI)%
* Elements for a maximum of one character string can be set up in one script.
:
Auto increment %AutoInc(ID, Order, Min, Max, ID (character string)
Order (numerical value) :
(serial numbers) Count, Reset)%
Min (numerical value) :
Max (numerical value) :
Auto increment identifier

%AutoInc(A,4,0,9999,1,1)%
The number of digits. (6)
Minimum value. (0)
Maximum value. (999999) [When reaching the maximum
value, it will be reset to the minimum value.]
Count (numerical value) : Increment range of serial numbers. (Numerical value)
Reset (select one of the following) : Whether or not to reset the serial number at CL-AP
startup.
0 : Not to reset.
1 : Reset to Min at CL-AP startup.
2 : Reset to Min at CL-AP startup only when the specified date is different from that of
the last issuance.
* Set the value so that Max > Min.
* Components for a maximum of one character string can be set up in one script.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
FR11-2
Details of setting items (IssuanceIdMassOrder.dat)

Display item
Component
How to set up the identifier
Setup example
System ID
%SystemID(Type)%
Type (numerical value)

0 : Alphabet (A to Z)
1 : Numerics (1 to 26)
The value set up for No. 14 System Recognition ID (A to Z) of IMAGE MODALITY will
be used.
%SystemID(0)%
Date
%Date(Format)%

YY : All the four digits representing the Christian Era. (2004)
yy : The lower two digits of the Christian Era. (04)
GG : Three digits with initial for the Japanese Era. (H16)
MM : A two-digit number representing the month.
DD : A two-digit number representing the day.
%Date(YYMMDD)%
Time
%Time(Format)%

%Time(HHMM)%
HH : A two-digit number representing the hour. (An around-the-clock representation)
MM : A two-digit number representing the minute.
SS : A two-digit number representing the second.
Fixed character %Fix(String)%

string
String (character string)

Enter single-byte characters.
Do not use multi-byte characters, * (one-byte character) and @ (one-byte
character).
%Fix(FUJI)%
User-defined
%UFix(ID, Max)%
character string
ID (character string)
Make sure to specify SiteCode.
It should not be the same as the registry key name determined based on the
conventional automatic ID issuance function.
Max (numerical value)
Always specify 64.
%UFix(SiteCode,64)%
* Elements for a maximum of one user-defined character string can be set up in one script.
: Auto increment identifier
Auto increment %AutoInc(ID, Order, Min, Max, ID (character string)
* Always specify AutoIncID. (Fixed value)
(serial numbers) Count, Reset)%
Order (numerical value) : The number of digits. (6)
* Do not determine 0 (=variable).
Min (1)
: Minimum value
* Always determine 1. (Fixed value)
Max (999)
: Maximum value (999)
* Always determine 999. The displayed number of digits should be in accordance
with the value determined for Order above. (Fixed value)
Count (1)
: Increment range of serial numbers. (Numerical value)
* Always determine 1. (Fixed value)
Reset (1)
: Whether or not to reset the serial number at CL-AP startup.
* Always determine 0 (=Not to reset). (Fixed value)
%AutoInc(AutoIncID,5,1,99
999,1,1)%
* Only one auto increment character string component can be set up in one script.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
FR11-3
Invalidated Service Utility settings
u NOTE u
The configuration setting for character string of a patient ID must be
longer than a character string issued automatically according to
17. Patient ID Length of 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION under
Setup Configuration Item - SYSTEM CONFIG.
Service Utility settings
In case the auto ID issuance function was determined to be activated,

the following items that can be determined using the Service Utility will
become invalidated.
For details of the setting items, see 3.6 Configuration Details
5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION under MU: Maintenance Utility.
Table Invalidated CSL/IDT FUNCTION setting items
The site identification code included in the order information can be

stored additionally in any of the DICOM tags.
The setting item is as follows.
No.
18
Table CSL/IDT FUNCTION setting item
21
29
No.
188
Name
Selection
Mass Order Site A maximum of 49
one-byte
Code Mapping
characters.
Tag
(Blank)
Meaning
Specifying to which tag the site
identification code, entered
using the screening
examination order function, is
to be mapped.
(Description example)
0038,0500
NOTES
If format of the determined value is invalid, a relevant message
appears at CL startup, causing thus the startup to be unsuccessful. In
such cases, correct the setup file format appropriately.
56
80
83
93
106
Name
Patient ID Padding Method
Remarks
Changing to any desired setting is
disabled.
ExposureListErase
Preset exposure menus must be used.
StudyNumberType
No accession numbers are issued
automatically.
EnablePatientDB
If this function is activated, the patient
database is managed by newly added
automatically issued patient ID history
database.
Enable Auto Menu Creation If this function is activated, no studies
are started with exposure menus
remaining unregistered.
DefaultReqService
UseDistributionCodeDepartName
IssuanceIdNumber
User Utility settings must be observed.
If it is not determined (initial setting), the site identification code will not
be stored in the DICOM tag.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
FR11-4
Setup of Exposure Guidance [Applicable only in Japan]
Setup of Exposure Guidance

010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
FR12-1
BLANK PAGE
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
FR12-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR12-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR12-4
Setup of Auto Shuttering Processing
Setup of Auto Shuttering Processing

Exposure menus applicable to auto shuttering processing have been
added with software version V3.0(B).
To use the auto shuttering processing with version V3.0(B) or later,
enable the processing for those exposure menus by using an automatic
setup tool provided with software version V3.0(B).
To use the automatic setup tool, open first IIP Setup Tool menus
incorporated in the CL-AP CD (2 of 2) and then follow the steps below.
1.

The IIP Setup Tool main menu will open automatically.
NOTE
2.

Mask Processing Default Parameter Setup Menu opens.
FR130002.EPS
3.

Shuttering processing parameters will then be set up.
Performing the above steps will inactivate (OFF) the auto shuttering
processing for the following MPM code menus and activate (ON) the
same processing for other menus. Manually set up shuttering
processing appropriately if the automatic setup will result in settings
unsuitable to your customers.
Table List of MPM codes that turn auto shuttering processing OFF
Menu
TEST Menu
RMI156 (only in Japan)
Treatment Menu (only in Japan)
BREAST, SPOT
PARANASAL SINUS
EAR
PARANASAL SINUS: C
PARANASAL SINUS: T
EAR: T
EAR-2DIV (only in Japan)
MPM Code
?9??
73?9
7??B
03?1
00?1
00?B
10?2
20?0
20?1
60?A
FR130001.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
FR13-1
BLANK PAGE
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
FR13-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR13-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR13-4
Setup of LUT Reverse-conversion Processing
Setup of LUT Reverse-conversion

Processing
1.
For Windows 2000/XP

Select [Run...] from the
menu.
LUT reverse-conversion processing needs to be set up if images to be

queried/retrieved from the DICOM server may go through FCR image
processing and LUT processing on the server side.
LUT reverse-conversion processing can be implemented by either of
the following:
Have a reverse-conversion table be ready for use on the CL so that
reverse-conversion processing can be implemented on the CL side.
Have a reverse-conversion table be ready for use on the DICOM
printer so that reverse-conversion processing can be implemented on
the printer side, based on the LUT type information transferred to the
printer.
Shown below are the two separately described setup procedures.
FR140002.EPS
For Windows Vista

menu sequentially select All
From the
Programs, Accessories and Run.
NOTE
To select a desired procedure, see 3.10 Configuration Details

10. CONFIG QR under MU: Maintenance Utility.
LUT reverse-conversion processing on the CL

Creation of the LUT reverse-conversion file
Reverse-conversion processing requires the LUT reverse-conversion
file. Shown below is the procedure used to create it.
NOTE
When the CL is up and running, shut the CL down while holding down
the <Shift> button to have the system being at ordinary Windows status.
F140005.ai
2.
Type in C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\CreateLUT.

exe for the execution filename and click
.
F140001.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)]
FR14-1
Setup of LUT Reverse-conversion Processing
3.
Settings required on the CL
Perform the following steps.

I
II
F140003.EPS
I.
Use the absolute path to specify an input file in the [Input File]
box. Click
of [LUT used in outputting processed image:],
and then select an output LUT file (receiver AE name + .lut).
II. Enter 10 for software version V6.0 (B) or earlier.
Enter 16 for software version V7.0 (B) or earlier.
NOTE
Do not change [Output File] and [InBit (10-16)].
4.
After the LUT file is created for reverse-conversion processing, perform

necessary settings on the CL.
Start the Service Utility, select CONFIG QR-No2. Reverse LUT For
Processed Image, and select 2: ApplyReverse LUT.
For the CL setup procedure, see CL+DICOM Server (Image
Reprint) under OE20: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment.
LUT reverse-conversion processing on the DICOM

printer
Reverse-conversion processing on the printer requires setting on both
the printer and CL sides
Settings required on the printer side

Have an LUT reverse-conversion table be ready on the DICOM printer
side. Necessary settings are to be performed on the reverse-conversion
table thus created.
NOTE
Click
The LUT reverse-conversion file is created.

A dialog opens to show that the file has been created successfully.
For how to set up/format the table file, see the manual provided for
each printer.
Settings required on the CL side

Start the Service Utility and set up the items below appropriately.
FR140004.EPS
5.
Click
to close the dialog, and click [Exit].
The tool shuts down, closing then the Create LUT for Processed
Images window.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Select CONFIG QR-No2. Reverser LUT For Processed Image and

select 1: SendConfigurationInformation.
Use Network setting to specify printer LUT type information for the AE
that serves as the StudyRootRetriever service class Provider.
For details of the CL setup procedure, see CL+DICOM Server
(Image Reprint) under OE20: Connecting the CL to Other
Equipment.
FR14-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR14-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR14-4
Setup of CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 Icons [Applicable only in Japan]
Setup of CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 Icons

010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
FR15-1
BLANK PAGE
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
FR15-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR15-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR15-4
Accession Number Data Truncation Function
Accession Number
Data Truncation Function
When generating image output using the DICOM Storage function, it is
possible to partially truncate tag information of an Accession Number
and patient ID.
To edit tag information, open the setup file (TagCharDataCut.ini).
Following is the setup procedure to perform.
IMPORTANT
When you are using this function, always obtain users agreement by
fully explaining details of settings you are performing. Do not use this
function on a system where RIS and PACS are linked.
TagCharDataCut.ini file format

; TagCharDataCut
; [AE]
; Tag=Position, Length
; *******************
[AEName1]
00080050=1,3
00100020=TAIL,1
00080050=1,3
[AEName2]
00080050=3,3
I.
II.
III.
TagReplace.ini > TagLookup.ini > TagCharDataCut.ini > TagCharDataAdd.ini

When the same tag has multiple settings, settings with higher priority
are applied.
See Example of Setting when Using Setup Files with Each Other
under Accession Number Character String Adding Function.
1.
2.
Use the NotePad function to open the TagCharDataCut.ini

file.
3.
According to the format shown below, edit the file.
4.
Save the TagCharDataCut.ini file in the text format and

close NotePad.exe.
NOTE
Be sure to use NotePad to edit the TagCharDataCut.ini file and
save the edit result in the Unicode format because the file is based
on the Unicode characters.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
II. AE name
III. Tag
IV. Position to start
truncation
V. Number of characters
to be truncated
FR160001.EPS
NOTE
Tag settings are applied in order of priority:
I. Comment
IV.
V.
Comment
Lines beginning with a semicolon(;) is handled as a comment.
AE name
Describe an AE name targeted for data truncation by putting it
between brackets ([ ]). No line feed is allowed.
Tag
Describe a tag targeted for data truncation. Only Accession Number
and patient ID are the tags targeted for data truncation.
Position to start truncation
Describe a position to start data truncation. Describe a decimal
number for any desired position. To truncate data of a tag starting
from the tail end, enter TAIL.
Number of characters to be truncated
Use a decimal number to describe the number of characters to be
truncated.
NOTE
The number of characters specified in V., above, must not be larger
than that of the tag targeted for data truncation. It is neither allowed to
truncate all characters of the tag nor the number of characters larger
than that of the tag. If such is specified, it is regarded as an error and
disregarded.
The setup example above will result in the following:
Accession Number in AEName1 : Three characters are truncated
starting from the first character.
: One character is truncated
Patient ID in AEName1
starting from the tail end.
Accession Number in AEName2 : Three characters are truncated
starting from the third character.
FR16-1
BLANK PAGE
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
FR16-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR16-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR16-4
Installation of Standard Markers [Applicable only in Japan]
Installation of Standard Markers

010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
FR17-1
BLANK PAGE
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
FR17-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR17-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR17-4
Setup of Date and Time Display
Described below is the procedure used for performing necessary

settings.

At CL-AP startup, perform settings necessary for displaying the current
date and time, as follows.
NOTE
1.
Start Explorer to open C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Tools.
2.
Right-click IIPDispDateTime.exe to select Create

Shortcut.
Perform settings for date and time display after completing CL-AP
installation processing.
REFERENCE
The date and time are displayed as shown below. With the mouse
operation, the display position can be moved as desired.
FR180002.EPS
Shortcut to IIPDispDateTime.exe is created.
3.
Move Shortcut to IIPDispDateTime.exe to C:\Documents

and Settings\Administrator\ Start Menu \Programs\Startup.
NOTE
If startup user of the CL-AP is other than the Administrator, move
the shortcut to the startup folder of that user.
FR180001.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
FR18-1
4.
Change filename of Shortcut to IIPDispDateTime.exe to

DateTimeDisplayAPL.exe.
7.
Make sure that the displayed date and time are correct.
NOTE
Follow the procedure below to correct the displayed date and time.
1.
menu.
2.
Double-click
The Date and Time Properties window opens.

FR180003.EPS
5.
Restart the PC.
3.
Correct the date and time appropriately, and click

.
Within about one minute, the CL-AP starts up and the CL initial
window opens.
6.
Check to see that the current date and time appear on the
window.
FR180008.EPS
FR180004.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
FR18-2
8.
Change the date and time display format as necessary.
IV. Select the Time tab to change the Time format.
I.
REFERENCE
menu.
ss will not be reflected on the actually displayed time.
II. Double-click

III. Click
FR180006.EPS
V. Select then the Date tab to change the Short date.
FR180005.EPS
FR180007.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
FR18-3
9. Change the date and time display font as necessary.

I.
IV. Select Menu in
and a desired font in
menu.
II. Double-click

III. Select the Appearance tab and click
FR180009.ai
FR180010.ai
The Advanced Appearance window opens.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
FR18-4
10. Change sizes of the date and time display font as necessary.
I.
In case there is no registry that is for sizes of the installed monitor,

determine the registry name and the date and time display font size,
based on the values shown in the table below.
menu.

II. Enter regedit and click
REFERENCE
Monitor size
(M)
Monitor
Monitor
width (pixel) height (pixel)
Default font
size
0.7
1024
768
FontSize
1024768
10
1280
1024
FontSize
12801024
11
1600
1200
FontSize
16001200
12
2048
1536
FontSize
20481536
14
DCL70428.EPS
The Registry Editor window opens.
Registry
name
III. Move to HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\FujiFilm\

IIPDispDateTime.
FR180011.ai
IV. Change the FontSizeWWWWxHHHH registry values to desired

font sizes (WWWW: width of the monitor at installation of the
CL-AP and HHHH: height of the monitor at installation of the
CL-AP).
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
FR18-5
BLANK PAGE
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
FR18-6
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR18-7
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR18-8
Setup of Characters Under the Windows XP and Windows Vista Coexistent Environment [Applicable only in Japan]
Setup of Characters Under the

Windows XP and Windows Vista
Coexistent Environment
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
FR19-1
BLANK PAGE
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
FR19-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR19-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR19-4
Adding and Setting the Serial Connector
Adding and Setting the Serial

Connector
The procedure to be observed when adding a serial connector will differ
depending on the software version and the OS used.
For software version V7.0(B) or earlier and the OS used is Windows
2000
For software version V7.1(B) or later
REFERENCE
The following 6 CL functions require serial connectors to be set up
appropriately.
X-CON
ID Online
DAP
15 touch panel
Pocket id Console
UPS
1. Adding a Serial Connector

For software version V7.0(B) or earlier and the OS used
is Windows 2000
To make use of the following functions, the PSI04A board must be
mounted.
X-CON (Siemens Mammography X-CON is not included.)
ID Online
For software version V7.1(B) or later

The procedure to be observed for adding a serial connector differs
depending on the number of used ports of the serial connector.
When 1 port is used

Use the PC-standard serial port. There is no need to add a serial
connector.
When 2 ports are used

Add a serial connector from the mother board.
For how to add a serial connector, see 1.2 Adding a Serial
Connector from the Mother Board.
When 3 to 5 ports are used

Mount the MOXA board.
For how to mount the MOXA board, see 1.3 Mounting the MOXA
Board.
NOTE
When the OS used is Windows XP, the PSI04A board can be used as
well.
When 6 ports are used

Add a serial connector from the mother board and mount the MOXA
board.
For how to mount the MOXA board, see 1.3 Mounting the MOXA
Board.
For how to mount the PSI04A board, see 1.1 Mounting the PSI04A
Board.
For functions other than the above, use PC-standard serial connectors.
When a 2-port connector is to be used, add a serial connector from the
mother board.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
FR20-1
1.1 Mounting the PSI04A Board

This section describes the procedure used to mount the PSI04A board.
NOTES
When the OS used is Windows Vista, the PSI04A board can not be
used.
Make sure that the CL-AP has been installed and then mount the PSI
board.
The PSI serial i/f board driver will not be recognized correctly unless
the CL-AP has been installed.
1.
Shut down the CL and turn OFF the power to the CL-PC.
2.
Disconnect the power cable from the CL-PC.
3.
Make sure that the PSI04A board is set up as illustrated

below. Use CH0, CH1 or CH2 to select RS-422 or RS-232C.
CH0, CH1 and CH2 may be used for the following connectors.
First board
CH0: CH-A CH1: CH-B CH2: CH-C
Second board
CH0: CH-D CH1: CH-E CH2: CH-F
When setting CH0, CH1 and CH2, confirm the interface (RS-422 or
RS-232C) between connected devices.
RS-232C
RS-422
CH0
RS-232C
RS-422
CH1
SW6
SW5
SW8
SW7
SW10
SW9
RS-232C
RS-422
CH2
PSI04A
1
2
SW4
SW5~10
SW4
HARD
First board
SOFT
Second board
00000488.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
FR20-2
Function
Settings
Selection whether to
output CH0 remote
power control signal (at
SW5
master status) as is as a
contact signal or to
control with the register.
output CH1 remote
SW7
This function is enabled

regardless of whether CH0, CH1
and CH2 are set for RS422 or
RS232C
Setup for output
of contact signal
as is : Hardware
Register control

: Software
output CH2 remote
SW9
Function
Settings
Remarks
This function is enabled only
when CH0, CH1 and CH2 are
set for RS422. When set for
RS232C, there will be no output
to CN4.
Output to CN4

: Hardware
Interruption

: Software
transmit remote power
control signal (at slave
SW10 status) from CH2 to CN4
or to handle it as an
interruption.
4.
Setup for output of contact

signal as is: Outputs power
supply status to the no. 8 pin of
CN1 as a contact signal (same
as for CN2 and CN3).
Register control setting: Contact
signal that is output to the no. 8
pin of CN1 can be changed by
changing register setting values
(same as for CN2 and CN3).
SW6
status) from CH0 to CN4
interruption.
SW8
status) from CH1 to CN4
interruption.
Remarks
Setup for output to CN4:

Outputs contact signals from
outside to the CN4 no. 1 pin.
Only the IDT-IV uses CN4.
For GX110
I. Remove the CL-PC cover.
II. When the card cage is removed, its PSI board interferes with a
cable behind the hard disk. A workaround is to slightly pull the
disk unit on the front of the CL-PC toward you before removing
the card cage.
#1 [Push]
Disk unit
#2 [Pull]
#1 [Push]
Cables behind the hard disk
CL-PC
(OptiPlex GX110)
OE000006.EPS
III. Raise the lever as illustrated by the arrow.

IV. Remove the card cage.
V. Mount a PSI board in an empty PCI slot.
V. PSI board
III. Lever
PCI slot
IV. Card cage
Setup for interruption: As contact

signals changes, interruptions
will result in the hosts. The
register makes it possible to
check which CH is ON or OFF.
No. 1 pin of CN4 is Open for
interruption settings.
ON
FR
Mount a PSI board in the PCI slot.
CL-PC
When the PC used is a model other than GX110 or GX150, see

under RI : Reinstalling the Software.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
ON
FR
OE000013.EPS
FR20-3
5.
VI. Remount the card cage in the CL-PC.

VII. Restore the disk unit.
VIII. Reinstall the CL-PC cover.
For GX150
I. Open the CL-PC cover.
II. Holding the card cage handle, remove the card cage.
III. Mount a PSI board in an empty PCI slot.
Within about one minute after Windows has been started up, the
CL-AP will start up. While the CL-AP is being started up, the PSI
board driver installation window opens.
6.
Click [Cancel].
NOTES
Install the AP key and then install the PSI board driver.
For Windows 2000, the PSI board driver is set up automatically
after the CL-AP has started up.
Handle
II. Card cage
III. PSI board
Connect the power cable to the PC to start up the CL-PC.
7.
While holding down the <Shift> key, select Shut Down in

the
(or
) menu.
AGP slot
Extension card
slot connector
NT
O
FR
CL-PC
(GX150 small desktop)
OE000014.EPS
IV. Remount the card cage in the CL-PC.

V. Close the CL-PC cover.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
FR20-4
1.2 Adding a Serial Connector from

the Mother Board
This section describes the procedure on how to add a serial connector
from the mother board.
Add-in serial
connector cable
1.
Open the PC cover.
2.
Connect the serial connector cable.
For how to open the PC cover, read the Operation Manual that
comes with the PC.
#1
[Connect]
Add-in serial
connector
#2
[Mount]
Add-in serial
connector cable
OE180001.EPS
OE180002.EPS
Location of the serial connector: GX60
Serial connector
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE180003.EPS
FR20-5
Serial connector
OE180004.EPS
Serial connector
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE180005.EPS
Serial connector
OE180111.EPS
Serial connector
OE180112.EPS
FR20-6
Location of the serial connector: OptiPlex 745
Serial connector
OE180113.EPS
Serial connector
Serial connector
Serial connector
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE180115.ai
OE180122.ai
OE180114.EPS
FR20-7
1.3 Mounting the MOXA Board

Described herein are the procedures used to mount the MOXA board
and install the driver.
Cautions for connection

CL requirements
Software version required: V7.1 or later
The computer OS used is Windows XP SP2 or later or Windows
Vista.
The computer has the PCI Express x 1 slot.
NOTE
A Windows 2000-installed computer cannot be used because it is not
provided with the PCI Express x 1 slot that provides interface with the
MOXA board.
Connected ports
There are 4 serial ports on a MOXA board, of which the 2 ports are for
connection to a JIS-X5002 protocol-compliant equipment unit. (Note
however that 3 ports are made available for troubleshooting purposes.)
When connecting a JIS-X5002 protocol-compliant equipment unit (such
as X-CON or RIS) to the MOXA board, make sure to connect it to port 1
through 3.
NOTE
To connect a JIS-X5002 protocol-compliant equipment unit, do not use
port 4.
PSI board-used environment

The PSI board and the MOXA board cannot be used mixed. For this
reason, be sure to dismount the PSI board, uninstall the driver, and
install a MOXA board class driver. Establish then a connection
appropriately.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR20-8
1.3.1 Installing the MOXA Board Class Driver

(for Windows XP only)
3.
Installing the CL-AP under Windows XP environment will install the PSI
board class driver as well. Even if the MOXA board is connected with
both the CL-AP and the PSI board class driver installed together, serial
communications established using the MOXA board will not be
activated.
To connect a MOXA board under Windows XP environment, a MOXA
board class driver needs to be installed. The procedure to be performed
is as described herein.
NOTES
It is not necessary to perform this procedure under the Windows Vista
environment, because a MOXA board class driver has been installed
at the time of CL-AP installation.
Double-click D:\Tools\ClassDriverToolForSERIAL-PORTBOARD\SetClassDriver.bat in the CL-AP CD (2 of 2).
FR200030.ai
4.

The CL-AP CD (2 of 2) used in installation must be the one in V8.1 or

later.
When using the PSI board, uninstall the driver of PSI board first.
REFERENCE
The MOXA board class driver (C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\
DsmpuUserModeDll.dll (2010/08/18)) uses the same filename as that
used for the PSI board class driver. (The file date is different with each
other.)
1.

NOTE
FR200031.ai
5.

The command prompt window closes.
6.
7.

Turn OFF the power to the PC.

proceed to step 3.
2.

010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR20-9
6.
1.3.2 Mounting the MOXA Board
1.
Shut down the CL and then turn OFF the power to the
CL-PC.
2.
3.
4.
Mount the MOXA board in the PCI Express x 1 slot.
Connect the power cable to the PC to start up the CL-PC.

Within about one minute after Windows has been started up, the
CL-AP will start up. While the CL-AP is being started up, the
MOXA board driver installation window opens.
7.
Click [Cancel].
REFERENCE
MOXA board
Install the AP key and then install the MOXA board driver.
8.
While holding down the <Shift> key, select Shut Down in

the
menu.
PCI Express 1 slot

OE070001.ai
NOTE
If a PSI board is mounted on the CL-PC, remove it and then mount
the MOXA board.
REFERENCE
The illustration presented above is for Dell OptiPlex 760. The
same procedure is used for mounting Dell OptiPlex 960.
5.
Reinstall the CL-PC cover.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR20-10
2. Installing the Driver
3.

Service Utility mode exits and the Welcome to the Found New
Hardware Wizard window opens.
When the PSI04A board and the MOXA board are mounted, the
relevant drivers must be installed accordingly.
For how to install the PSI04A board driver, see 2.1 Installing
the PSI04A Board Driver.
For how to install the MOXA board driver, see 2.2 Installing
the MOXA Board Driver.
FR200001.ai
2.1 Installing the PSI04A Board Driver

1.
4.
When the initial window opens, sequentially click the upper

left and upper right corners of the window within a period of
3 seconds.
and click
.
Windows goes up and running. After about 1 minute, the CL-AP

starts up.
2.
Select
The installation finish window opens.
5.
Click
The desktop window opens.
6.
menu to
select Properties.
7.
Click the Hardware tab and then

MU000031.EPS
8.
NOTE
If the password entry window opens, enter the login password
(fieldengineer) to Service Utility mode and click
Ensure that the PSI board driver has been installed

appropriately and close both the Device Manager and
System Properties windows.
MU000035.EPS
Service Utility mode starts up displaying then the IIP Service

Utility window.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE000PSI2.EPS
FR20-11
3.
2.2 Installing the MOXA Board Driver
Service Utility mode exits and the Welcome to the Found New
Hardware Wizard window opens.

(For Windows XP)
1.

starts up.
2.

3 seconds.
FR200001.ai
4.
Select Dont search. I wil choose the driver to install. and

click
.
A window where how to install the necessary software is to be
selected will open.
MU000031.EPS
NOTE
FR200002.ai

MU000035.EPS
5.
Insert the CD that comes with the MOXA board into the PC.
6.
Select Install from a list or specific location [Advanced]

and click
.
The Please choose your search and installation options. window
then opens.

Utility window.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR20-12
7.
Select Search for the best driver in these locations. and

then checkmark Removable media (
).
9.
Select product names and a driver that is for the OS used,

and then click
.
FR200025.ai
8.
Click
Product names
OS
FR200004.ai
REFFRENCE
A driver selection window opens.
In case the Hardware Installation window opens, click

FR200005.ai
FR200003.ai
Software installation processing will start. After a while, Completing

the Found New Hardware Wizard window opens.
FR200006.ai
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR20-13
10. Click
12. Select Install the software automatically [Recommended]
and click
NOTE
Upon completion of the board driver setup processing, operation
sequences then proceed to the driver setup processing of each port.
The port number is displayed.
Port 0 will be detected as the new hardware and the Welcome to

the Found New Hardware Wizard window opens.
FR200001.ai
11. Select Dont search. I wil choose the driver to install. and
click
A window where how to install the necessary software is to be

selected will open.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR200007.ai
FR20-14
13. Select the product name and a driver that is for the OS used,
and then click
14. Click
REFFRENCE
When setups are requested for ports 1, 2 and 3, repeat steps 11
through 14 as necessary.
Product name
OS
FR200008.ai
REFFRENCE
In case the Hardware Installation window opens, click
FR200005.ai
Hardware installation processing will start. After a while, the

Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard window opens.
FR200010.ai
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR20-15
3.

(For Windows VIsta)
1.

Service Utility mode exits and the Found New Hardware window
opens.

starts up.
2.

3 seconds.
FR200011.ai
4.
Click Locate and install driver software (recommended).

REFFRENCE
In case the Found New Hardware window opens, click Dont
search online to proceed to the next step.
MU000031.EPS
NOTE
FR200012.ai
A window opens prompting you to insert the disk.
MU000035.EPS

Utility window.
FR200013.ai
5.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Insert the CD that comes with the MOXA board into the PC.
FR20-16
6.
Click
7.
REFFRENCE
In case the Windows Security window opens, click Install this
driver software anyway to proceed to the next step.
Click
NOTE
Upon completion of the board driver setup processing, operation
sequences then proceed to the driver setup processing of each
port.
REFFRENCE
In case the Found New Hardware window opens, click Dont
search online to proceed to the next step.
FR200014.ai
Upon completion of the driver software installation processing, a

window opens to indicate that the driver was installed successfully.
FR200016.ai
A window opens prompting you to insert the disk.
FR200015.ai
FR200017.ai
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR20-17
8.
Click
REFFRENCE
In case the Windows Security window opens, click Install this
driver software anyway to proceed to the next step.
FR200014.ai
Upon completion of the driver software installation processing, a

window opens to indicate that the driver was installed successfully.
FR200018.ai
9.
Click
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR20-18
2.2.3 Confirming Installation of the MOXA Board Driver
1.
For Windows Vista

I. Select Control Panel from the
For Windows XP
menu.
II. Double-click
II. Double-click
menu.
2.
III. Select the Hardware tab and click
Confirm the following.

MOXA Communication Port 1 to 4 are displayed below Port (COM
and LPT).
MOXA CP-104EL Series or MOXA CP-114EL Series is
displayed below Multi Port Serial Adapters.
MT000047.EPS
FR200019.ai
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR20-19
3. Port and Service Utility Settings

To make use of the following functions with software version V7.1(B) or
later, port and Service Utility settings must be performed properly after
adding a serial connector.
X-CON (Siemens Mammography X-CON is not included.)
ID Online
The setting procedures are different with each other between the case
where the PC-standard serial connector and an add-in serial connector
are used and the case where the MOXA board is used.
2.
For Windows XP
menu.
II. Double-click
3.1 The Case Where the PC-standard

Serial Connector and an Add-in Serial
Connector are Used
1.
Use the Service Utility capability to set up the port number

to be used.
For details of the individual setup items, see
3.6 Configuration Details 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION under
Table CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items
No.
Name
32
ID Online Serial Port No.
44
Xcon Serial_TX Control Port
MT000047.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR20-20
5.
For Windows Vista

menu.
II. Double-click
Click
The Advance Settings for COM1 window opens.
6.
Select a port number value, which is the one that is added

by 32 to the value set up in the Service Utility.
Example: Select COM33 for 44:Xcon Serial_TX Control Port=1.
3.
On the Device Manager window that opens, click the

symbol to the left of Ports (COM & LPT).
DXL819008.ai
4.
Right-click the COM port the serial cable is connected to,

and select Properties.
The Communications Port (COM1) Properties window opens.
DXL819010.ai
7.
Click
The system returns to the Communications Port (COM1)

Properties window.
8.
Click
9.
Close the Device Manager window.

10. Close the Control Panel window.
DXL819009.ai
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR20-21
3.2 The Case Where a MOXA Board is Used

NOTES
Presented herein are the procedure and windows applicable to the
MOXA CP-104EL board, which are the same as to the MOXA CP114EL board.
COM33 through COM35 port numbers are assigned on the MOXA
board. In case any of the COM33 through COM35 port number is used
for some other device, such COM port number needs to be changed
as required beforehand, and necessary settings must be performed
appropriately so that a COM port number same as that assigned on
the MOXA board is not used double.
1.
For Windows XP
menu.
II. Double-click
MT000047.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR20-22
3.
For Windows Vista

menu.
Select the Ports Configuration tab. Select then the row for
Port 1 and click the
key.
II. Double-click
2.
On the Device Manager window, right-click MOXA CP104EL Series (PCI Express Bus) to select Properties.
FR200021.ai
The Port 1 window where the Port Number is to be set up will

open.
FR200020.ai
The MOXA CP-104EL Series (PCI Express Bus) Properties

window opens.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR20-23
4.

I. Select COM33 from the Port Number pull-down menu.
II. Check to see that Auto Enumerating COM Number is
checkmarked.
5.
Click
The system returns to the MOXA CP-104EL Series (PCI Express

Bus) Properties window.
I.
II.
FR200023.ai
FR200022.ai
REFERENCE
6.
Select the row for Port 4 and repeat steps 2 through 4 above
to determine COM32 or smaller value for the Port
Number.
Checkmarking Auto Enumerating COM Number will assign

serially numbered COM port numbers to Port 2 and thereafter.
COM port number for Port 4 does not have to be serially
numbered.
Because a maximum of 32 connection port numbers are assigned
to DAP or Siemens mammography X-CON, it is desirable that 32
or smaller COM port number is assigned to Port 4 so that such
equipment can be connected to the CL.
FR200027.ai
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR20-24
7.
Click
9.
8.
Make sure that the board port numbers and the COM port
numbers are determined as shown in the table below.
Port number
MOXA Communication Port 1
Use the Service Utility capability to set up a port number to

be used.
For details of the individual setting items, see
Table CSL/IDT FUNCTION setup items
COM port number
No.
Name
COM33
COM34
COM35
Arbitrary
(COM32 or smaller value is recommended.)
32
44
FR200024.ai
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR20-25
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR20-26
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR20-27
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR20-28
Setting the Exposure Index Function

When an image derived from the Image Reader is received, an index
value, Deviation Index (DI), that represents the degree of deviation
between the Exposure Index (EI) that is proportionate to the X-ray dose
and the ideal EI value (EIt) is calculated and then displayed.
The EI value and the DI value are displayed as floating windows on the
study screen and the QA screen.
This chapter presents the description on how to display the EI and DI
values.
CAUTION
The used Image Reader must regularly be subjected to complete
calibration processing using the Image Reader QC tool, so that
the EI and DI values can be applied for the purpose of control of
actual image quality.
Any changes in exposure menus and/or exchange of images
made with regard to a menu already subjected to exposure do
not affect the functionality to display the EI and DI values (the EI
and DI values will be displayed as commanded according to the
functionality of the originally determined exposure menu). Note,
however, that the EI and DI values will not be displayed even if an
energy subtraction menu that has already been subjected to
exposure is changed to an RT menu. To check the EI and DI
values after changing an exposure menu or exchanging images,
select a correct exposure menu and then perform study.
A long-view exposure menu terminated without undergoing any
image composition processing does not cause the EI and DI
values to be displayed, because it is considered to have been
determined a long-view exposure menu (WS) in terms of the
functionality.
NOTES
Software version V8.0 or later enables the EI and DI values to be
displayed.
The EI value accuracy is 20%.
The Exposure Index function does not support the Mammography
exposure menus. As a result, the EI and DI values will not be
calculated leaving the relevant display boxes to be blank.
The EI and DI values will be displayed only when the determined
functionality is RT.
With respect to a study image that has already been subjected to the
study, the EI and the DI values will not be recalculated even if the ideal
EI value (EIt) that is to be used as a guidepost for the exposure menu
is changed.
REFERENCE
The Exposure Index is displayed on the Study screen and the QA
Processing screen as shown below. Its display position can be moved
as desired with mouse manipulation.
FR210001.ai
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR21-1
Service Utility settings
Correction coefficient parameter file
With the use of the Service Utility capability, it is possible to enable or

disable the Exposure Index function.
Table IMAGE MODALITY setup item
No.
Name
72
Enable
Exposure
Index
Function
Selection
Meaning
Specifying whether to enable

Yes
Enables the Exposure or disable the Exposure
Index function.
Index function.
No
Disables the Exposure
Index function.
Correction coefficient specific to each of the Image Readers (cassette

type: IP VN/VI, dual-side cassette type: ST-BD, built-in type) are stored
in the ExposureIndex.prm file that is located under the following folder.
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Config\ExposureIndex.prm
Do not change unless it is absolutely necessary to do so.
REFERENCE
The Backup/Restore function that the Service Utility capability offers is
available for the ExposureIndex.prm file.
Saving and Outputting Exposure Index

For Software V8.0
The EI, DI and EIt values are stored under the following DICOM tags
(Private).
EI value : (0007,F330) VR name : IS
DI value : (0007,F331) VR name : DS
EIt value : (0007,F332) VR name : IS
The EI value, DI value, and EIt value cannot be output externally.
For Software V8.1 or later

The EI, DI and EIt values are stored under the following DICOM tags
(Standard).
EI value : (0018,1411)
VR name : DS
DI value : (0018,1413)
VR name : DS
EIt value : (0018,1412)
VR name : DS
The EI value, DI value, and EIt value can be output in the following
service classes (including media storage).
DICOM Standard CR Storage (image processed)
DICOM Private CR Storage (standardized)
DICOM Unstandarlized CR Storage (before standardized)
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR21-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR21-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR21-4
Accession Number Character String Adding Function
Accession Number Character String

Adding Function
When the image is output from DICOM STORAGE, an optional
character string (hospital ID etc.) can be added before or after the tag
information of Accession Number and patient ID.
To edit the tag information, open the setup file (TagCharDataAdd.ini).
Following is the setup procedure.
IMPORTANT
When you are using this function, always obtain users agreement by
fully explaining details of settings you are performing. Do not use this
function on a system where RIS and PACS are linked.
NOTE
Tag settings are applied in order of priority:
TagReplace.ini > TagLookup.ini > TagCharDataCut.ini > TagCharDataAdd.ini
When the same tag has multiple settings, settings with higher priority
are applied.
See Example of Setting when Using Setup Files with Each
Other.
1.
2.
Use the NotePad function to open the TagCharDataAdd.ini file.
3.
According to the format shown below, edit the file.
4.
Save the TagCharDataAdd.ini file in the text format and

close NotePad.exe.
NOTE
Be sure to use NotePad to edit the TagCharDataAdd.ini file and
save the edit result in the Unicode format because the file is based
on the Unicode characters.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR22-1
TagCharDataAdd.ini file format
NOTE
The maximum length in each tag is fixed.
; TagCharDataAdd
; [AE]
; Tag=Position, Length
Accession Number : 16 characters

: 64 characters
Patient ID
I. Comment
; *******************
[AEName1]
II. AE name
00100020=FRONT,FujiHospital1
00080050=TAIL,FujiH1
[AEName2]
III. Tag
IV. Adding position
V. Character string
to be added
If the number of characters for each tag after adding a character string
is greater than the maximum number of characters, the character string
will not be added. Therefore, configure the number of characters in
each tag so that the numbers are less than the maximum values.
Also, the number of characters for Accession Number and patient ID
(section 15 and 17 of CSL/IDT FUNCTION) must be set within the
values with the number of added characters subtracted from the
maximum number of characters.
When Accession Number is 9876543210 and patient ID is 0123456789,
the following results will be as follows with this setting example.
Accession Number of AEName1 : 9876543210FujiH1
: FujiHospital10123456789
Patient ID of AEName1
Patient ID of AEName2
: FujiHospital20123456789
FR220003.ai
I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
Comment
Lines beginning with a semicolon(;) is handled as a comment.
AE name
Describe an AE name to which a character string is to be added by
putting it between square brackets ([ ]). No line feed is allowed.
Tag
Describe the tags to which a character string is to be added. The only
tags to which a character string can be added are Accession Number
and patient ID.
Adding position
Describe the position where a character string is to be added. To add
a character string at the beginning, input FRONT, and then input
TAIL to add a character string at the end.
Character string to be added
Describe by single-byte characters except @ and *.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR22-2
Example of Setting when Using Setup Files with Each Other

Indicates the example of setting when the following files are applied to a
tag.
TagReplace.ini file (DICOM Tag Mapping Function)
TagCharDataCut.ini file (Accession Number Data Truncation Function)
Result
The .ini files will be applied as follows according to the priority
sequence of TagReplace.ini > TagLookup.ini > TagCharDataCut.ini
> TagCharDataAdd.ini.
(xxxx, yyyy) = (01234567)
TagCharDataAdd.ini file (Accession Number Adding Character String

Function)
TagReplace.ini
Configuration
Copy (xxxx, yyyy) to (aaaa, bbbb) by DICOM Tag Mapping Function
(TagReplace.ini).
Replacing tags
(aaaa, bbbb) = (01234567)
Delete the first four characters of (aaaa, bbbb) by Data Truncation

Function (TagCharDataCut.ini).
TagCharDataCut.ini
Add FUJI at the end of (aaaa, bbbb) by Character String Adding

Function (TagCharDataAdd.ini).
Set (xxxx, yyyy) to (01234567).
Deleting character strings

(aaaa, bbbb) = (4567)
TagCharDataAdd.ini
Adding character strings
(aaaa, bbbb) = (4567FUJI)
FR220004.ai
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR22-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
FR22-4
SP: Service Parts
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
SP-I
SP: Service Parts
Control Sheet
Issue date
Revision number
Reason
10/20/2000
12/10/2000
04/10/2001
00
00
01
05/30/2001
08/30/2001
03/20/2002
11/30/2002
03/01/2003
02/20/2004
02
03
04
06
07
10
07/30/2004
11/12/2004
11
12
07/30/2005
14
07/30/2006
07/20/2007
07/20/2007
05/09/2008
10/31/2008
11/30/52009
11/30/52009
03/31/2010
03/31/2010
12/10/2010
16
17
17
18
19
20
20
21
21
22

Revision (FM2950)
Previous Chapter C Error Information/Service Parts
divided and modified (FM2951)
Revision (FM3027)
Support provided to NEC PC and corrections
(FM4450)
Support provided to NEC PC (RAID
specifications) and corrections (FM4543)
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Pages affected
All pages
Pages I, II, 1, 6, 8, 10, 13, 15, 16
All pages
I, II, 3, 4
I, II, 3, 4
I, II, 4
I, II, 4-6
I, II, 4
All pages
I, II, 1, 35
IIV, 68
I, II, 37
I, II, 3, 4, 5, 7
I, II, 2, 3, 5, 6
7, 8
I, II, 36
I, II, 36, 912
I, II, 3, 4, 6
5
I, II, 4, 5, 7
6, 811
I, II, 7
SP-II
BLANK PAGE
010-054-12
11.12.2004 FM4450 (ITC)
SP-III
BLANK PAGE
010-054-12
11.12.2004 FM4450 (ITC)
SP-IV
1.1 How to Use Service Parts List
1. Service Parts List

RANK
Parts handling ID symbols used to identify the parts requiring special
operation
The ID symbols are assigned to applicable parts. Parts without the R
mark are replaced and handled in a regular manner.
Symbol
R
Q, T
Description
Repairable parts
Symbol for use other than in Japan
Export regulation mark

This + mark is assigned to the parts subject to Export regulations.
Parts without the + mark are not subject to Export regulations.
Symbol
+
Description
A number for indicating each part in the Service Parts Exploded

Views.
PART NUMBER
A code number that is unique to each part. The rightmost letter of the
code number has the following meaning.
For hardware
The letter denotes the version number of a part. If parts have
different version numbers, they are upward-compatible.
For software
The letter denotes the software specifications.
PART NAME
This represents the general name of a part.
QTY.
QTY. represents the quantity of parts used in a unit or assembly.
Parts subject to Export regulations
Fault rankings used for estimating the recommended stock quality

All parts are assigned a symbol letter from A to E.
Symbol
REF. NO.
REMARKS
Unique name of a part or its relevant information or note is described

in this column.
Description
Consumable parts or parts that will be replaced at short

intervals
Parts that may become faulty accidentally and have a

relatively high failure rate
Parts that have a sufficiently long MTBF, but are expected to

have a high failure rate
Parts that have a sufficiently long MTBF, but are expected to

become faulty
Parts that are necessary for fault analysis or parts that may
be needed in case of faults such as man-induced damage
SERIAL NUMBER
The units may contain different parts depending on their shipment

control number. SERIAL NUMBER indicates the shipment control
number to which the parts are applicable. If this column is blank, the
parts are applicable to all the relevant units.
RANK column description

The symbols for Fault Ranking, Parts Handling, and Export
regulation are assigned in order named. Thus, one to three letters
are put in the RANK column.
010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
SP-1
Recommended quantities of spare parts

It is recommended as a rough guide to hold in stock a specified
quantity of parts according to the rank (A to E) assigned to the parts.
Parts to be replaced at periodic intervals must be held in stock
separately.
Adjust the quantity of parts stock depending on the number of
working units (N) as prescribed below.
Q: Quantity used in a single system
N = 1
Rank A = 1 + Q 0.3
Rank C = 1 + Q 0.05
Rank D = 1 + Q 0.02
2 N 10
Rank A = 2 + N Q 0.3
Rank C = 2 + N Q 0.05
Rank D = 1 + N Q 0.02
11 N 300
Rank A = 3 + N Q 0.3
Rank C = 3 + N Q 0.05
Rank D = 2 + N Q 0.02
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
SP-2

39
7
41
40
15
E
17~23
BorE
NT
O
FR
LP
58
24
16
61
4
2
RIS, etc
34
5
B
5
10
54~57
C
B
SIEMENS X-CON
3
D
44~51,60
Isolator
39
A (USB)
25~32
CL-PC
A (USB)
12
33
42
35
A (USB)
A (USB)
62
36
C
59
11,13,52,53
A (USB)
14
38
A (USB)
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
37
43
00000055.EPS
SP-3
64
63
65, 66
68, 69
67
DXL51001.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
SP-4
RANK REF.
E
PRAT UMBER
PART NAME
QTY.
REMARKS
SERIAL NUMBER
114Y5342001A Software
Main unit software
2.1
340N0205
Knob
For LCD stand
2.2
340N0227
Knob
For LCD stand (black)
3.1
357N1405
Table
For LCD stand
3.2
357N1455
Table
4.1
357N1406
Table
For LCD stand
4.2
357N1456
Table
367N0021
Rubber foot
For LCD stand
401N0811
Retaining plate
For LCD stand
357N1428A
Table
For wall-mounting LCD
357N1429A
Table
For wall-mounting LCD
9.1
813Y0142A/B
Power supply
CR-IR346CL Insulating transformer (only for units used in Japan)
9.2
813Y0145C
Power supply
CR-IR348CL Insulating transformer (only for units used in Japan)
CR
10.1
849N0067A
Monitor display
LCD (9415TD15/G2)
Function repair
CR
10.2
849Y0094/B
Monitor display
LCD (9415TD15/H2 or 9416 TD15/H2-1)
Function repair
CR
10.3
849Y0095
Monitor display
LCD (L350P-TS (black))
Function repair
CR
10.4
849Y0099
Monitor display
LCD (L351P-TS (black))
Function repair
CR
10.5
849Y0103
Monitor display
LCD (L362T)
Function repair
CR
10.6
849Y100027
Monitor display
LCD (L560T-C)
Function repair
CR
10.7
849Y100004
Monitor display
LCD (3M monochrome)
Function repair
CR
10.8
849Y100057
Monitor display
LCD (3M color)
Function repair
CR
10.9
849Y100048
Monitor display
LCD (2M color)
Function repair
CR
10.10 849Y100066
Monitor display
LCD (2M monochrome)
Function repair
852Y0082
Reading unit
MCR-JIS
11
12.1
852N0023A
Reading unit
BCR
DENSO HC36TU-K
12.2
852N0026A
Reading unit
BCR
Optoelectronics
OPT-6125-USB
12.3
852N0032
Reading unit
BCR
Symbol LS1908T
12.4
852N100003
Reading unit
BCR
Metrologic MS3780
13
852Y0083
Reading unit
MCR-ISO
14
357N1408
Table
For wall-mounting MCR
CR
15
113Y1405B
PEI01A
E-i/f serial board
CR
16
113Y1502A/B
PSI04A
Serial i/f board
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
SP-5
RANK REF.
PRAT UMBER
PART NAME
QTY.
REMARKS
17
136Y5869A
FCR i/f cable
5m
18
136Y5870A
FCR i/f cable
15m
19
136Y5871A
FCR i/f cable
30m
20
136Y5872A
FCR i/f cable
45m
21
136Y5873A
FCR i/f cable
60m
22
136Y5874A
FCR i/f cable
100m
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
D
E
D
C
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41.1
136Y5875A
136Y5868A
136Y5757
136Y5758
136Y5759
136Y5760
136Y5761
136Y5522
136Y5523
136Y5524
357S0024
347N1785
136Y8551
136Y8546
357N1528
898Y1008
405N3111
125N0299
136S1245
FCR i/f cable

Conversion cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Rack
Bracket
Cable
Cable
Rack
Ferrite kit
Name plate
Battery
Cable
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
150m
1.2m
CL - RIS OP-09/VH-05 RIS terminal 3m (D-sub 9pin)
CL - RIS/X-ray OP-09/VH-01 3m for RIS terminal/X-ray equipment connction (D-sub 25pin)
For the BCR
Spacer (exclusively for 9416TD15/H2-F)
Hospital-grade (only for units used in Japan), 136Y8550+fastener
Hospital-grade option (only for units used in Japan)
For the BCR (exclusively for Symbol LS1908T)
41.2
136Y9400
Cable
41.3
136Y101344
Cable
D
E
D
D
D
42
43
44
45
46
852N0036C
357N1611
113Y1873
113Y1876
113Y1878
Reading unit
Rack
Memory board
Memory board
Memory board
1
1
1
1
1
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
For the Japanese version only

PDA lithium battery (only for units used in Japan)
Extension serial connector cable (only for units used in Japan)
Extension serial connector cable (only for units used in Japan)
For Dell OptiPlex GX280 SMT/SDT
Extension serial connector cable + decorative laminate (only for units used in Japan)
For Dell OptiPlex GX620 MT, 745 MT, 755 MT
BCR (model: BH2104-FF1)
For the BCR (exclusively for BH2104-FF)
For GX60/260
For GX270 (SDT/SMT)
For GX280 (SDT/SMT)
SERIAL NUMBER
Symbol LS2208T
TS256MDL2075
TS256MDL5075/5076
SP-6
RANK REF.
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
E
E
E
E
E
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
DR
PRAT UMBER
PART NAME
QTY.
REMARKS
113Y1882A
113Y1881
113Y1935
113Y1943
113Y1944
852N0039/A
852N0040/A
136Y100276A
136Y100278A
136Y100280A
136Y100282A
138S0460
Memory board
Memory board
Memory board
Memory board
Memory board
Reading unit
Reading unit
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Ferrite core
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
For WS370
For WS360
For WS330/340
For GX270 (SDT/SMT)
For GX280 (SDT/SMT)
MCR-JIS
MCR-ISO
Isolator to X-CON 3m (only for units used other than in Japan) CR-IR 348
For USB mouse
59.1
850Y0132
Memory
DVD-RAM drive (Panasonics LF-M766JD external type)
DR
59.2
850Y0145
Memory
DVD-RAM drive (Panasonics LF-M860JD external type)
59.3
850Y100026A
Memory
DVD-RAM drive (BUFFALOs DVSM-XL20U2 external type)
59.4
850Y100039
Memory
DVD-RAM drive (BUFFALOs DVSM-XL20U2 external type)
60
113Y100249
Memory board
Used in common to 755/745/GX620/GX280
61
888S0002A
Cradle
(Only for units used in Japan)
62
136N100049
Cable
C
CR
C
C
D
D
D
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
113Y1971E
113Y100435/A
113Y100464
113Y100465
136Y102172
136Y102171
136Y102364
Video board
Video board
PC board
PC board
Cable
Cable
Cable
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Analog video cable for touch panel (FlexScan Moniter Cable V55)
(only for units used in Japan)
Video board for DUAL monitor / 3M monochrome (RealVisionSMD5-PCI)
Video board for DUAL monitor / 2M/3M color/monochrome (ATI FireGL V3600)
Serial port add-in board (RS232C)
Serial port add-in board (RS232C/RS422) (For Shimadzu HLZ100 X-CON )
Relay adapter
Serial conversion cable (RS232C)
Serial conversion cable (RS422)
SERIAL NUMBER
TS512MDL2076
TS512MDL5073
KT-900U-IR-2004
KT-960U-IR-2001
CR-IR 348 (for units

used in Japan)
used in Japan)
used in Japan)
used in Japan)
T8512MOL380
Symbol
CRD8800-100SIMR
MOXA CP-104EL
MOXA CP-114EL
SP-7
1.3 Service Parts List (NEC PC: Applicable only for overseas users)
1.3 Service Parts List (NEC PC: Applicable

only for overseas users)
2
9
12
A
11
13
17
5,6
16
B
1
14
10
19
4
15
18
20
00000056.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
SP-8
1.3 Service Parts List (NEC PC: Applicable only for overseas users)
RANK REF.
PRAT UMBER
PART NAME
QTY.
REMARKS
DQ
850N0013
HDD
CQ
125N0137
Power supply
CQ
113Y1838
PC board
Motherboard
DQ
4.1
102N0085
IC
DIMM-DDR-512-NECC
DQ
4.2
102N0097
IC
512MB memory extension
DQ
102N0087
IC
Pentium4 2.8GHz
DQ
102N0086
IC
Celeron 2GHz
119N0011
Fan
CPU fan
119N0012
Fan
Housing fan
852N0035
CD-ROM drive
10
850N0014
FDD
11
128N0078
Mouse
PS/2 mouse
12
128N0077
Keyboard
Model 104 keyboard
13.1
128N0080
Power supply SW
Power supply SW assembly
13.2
128N0081
LED/SW cable
(RAID specification)
14
136N0455
Cable
HDD signal cable

* This is a special cable, which cannot be substituted by any other cable.
15
136N0456
Cable
CD-ROM unit signal cable
16
136N0457
Cable
FDD unit signal cable
17
136N0458
Cable
Speaker cable
18
350N3135
Cover
Front bezel
CQ
19
113Y1856
PC board
RAID board (RAID specification)
DQ
20
850N0015
HDD
(RAID specification)
SERIAL NUMBER
NOTE
When you are asking for replacing a part free of charge, use the error
analysis tool (TeDoLi) to attach error log of a part that caused an error
to occur.
For details of the device test procedures, see 5.1.2 Device Test
Procedures under MT: Machine Troubleshooting.
For details of the error log save procedures, see 5.1.3 Log Save
Procedure under MT: Machine Troubleshooting.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
SP-9
1.4 Service Parts List (HP PC: Applicable only in Japan)
H
B
24
15
15
11
6
7
A
G
16
12
1
E
5
H
9
20
14
19
B
C
10
F
18
21
13
22
17
23
00000057.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
SP-10
RANK REF. PART NUMBER
PART NAME
QTY.
REMARKS
113Y100405
Board assembly
437793-001 board assembly (M/B)
102N100020
IC
457656-001 IC (CPU
102N100021
IC
418951-001 IC (1GB memory)
850N100009
Memory
449978-001 memory (HDD)
125N100039
Power supply
437797-001 power supply
119N100032
Electric fan
453053-001 electric fan (CPU fan)
379N100043
Radiator
453318-001 radiator (heat sink)
119N100033
Electric fan
451144-001 electric fan (housing fan)
850N100010
Memory
431452-001 memory (FDD)
10
850N100011
Memory
419496-001 memory (DVD-ROM)
11
128N100040
Switch
390937-001 switch (PS/2 mouse)
12
128N100041
Keyboard
435302-291 keyboard (PS/2)
13
136N100052
Cable
451143-001 cable (front I/O)
14
136N100053
Cable
453052-001 cable (serial port)
15
136N100054
Cable
453317-001 cable (SATA for HDD and DVD)
16
136N100055
Cable
454246-001 cable (FDD)
17
136N100056
Cable
292657-191 cable (AC)
18
369N100112
Duct
451145-001 duct (fan duct)
19
350N101276
Cover
451140-001 cover (housing rear cover)
20
107N100003
Solenoid
451149-001 solenoid
21
121N100002
Speaker
394779-001 speaker
22
128N100042
Switch
451141-001 switch (power switch assembly)
23
350N101277
Cover
451148-001 cover (front bezel)
24
357N100471
Table
451150-001 table
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
SERIAL NUMBER
SP-11
BLANK PAGE
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
SP-12
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
PM-I
Control Sheet
Issue date
Revision number
03/31/2010
21
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Reason
Pages affected
All pages
PM-II
1. Preventive Maintenance Items
1. Preventive Maintenance Items

While the CL is being used, maintenance of the items listed in the table
on the right should be performed periodically, observing the Warnings
and Cautions shown below.
WARNING
To avoid electrical shock, turn off the power to the equipment,
before performing maintenance work.
Table of preventive maintenance items

(Recommended cycle of preventive maintenance: Annual)
Work items
Required Replacement
Remarks
time
part
2. Checking for a Fatal Error

2.1 Confirming the Event Log
3. Safety
3.1 Service Voltage
3.2 Power Plug
4. Hardware Cleaning
WARNING/CAUTION
Observe Warnings/Cautions described in the Safety Precautions
section.
CAUTION
When performing maintenance work of the inside of the PC, the
user is required to wear a wrist strap unfailingly to secure proper
grounding.
Otherwise, electronic parts mounted on the boards may be
damaged due to static electricity discharged by the user.
4.1 PC Internal Cleaning

4.2 Keyboard and Mouse Cleaning
4.3 LCD Cleaning
4.4 Optical Drive Cleaning
5. Executing the Error Analysis
5.1
Checking the Memory and

Hard Disk
6. Functional Checks
6.1
Confirmation of Image Input to

Storage onto HDD
6.2 Image Output to Film
[option]
6.3 Image Transfer

7. Backup of Setup Files and Verification of Date and Time
7.1
Backup of Setup Files and Log

Files
7.2 Verification of Date and Time
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
PM-1
2. Checking for a Fatal Error
3. Safety
3.1 Service Voltage
View the OS event log (application) to check for any fatal error
recording.
For the procedure for viewing the event log, see 2. Using the
Event Viewer under MT: Machine Troubleshooting.
Verify the service voltage that is available within the institution.
3.2 Power Plug

WARNING
When making resistance measurements, be sure that the power
plug is disconnected from an outlet.
Measure the resistance values of the power cable.
Terminals
Between L and N
Resistance value
100 k or higher
<For U.S.>
<For Japan>
E
L
N
Between L and M Between N and E
<For European and <For U.K. and

other countries>
other countries>
E
E
L
N
E
N
N
L
DCL61002.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
PM-2
4. Hardware Cleaning
Cooling fans (power supply fan, CPU fan, etc.) are mounted in the PC
to dissipate generated heat through air convection.
If dust is heavily accumulated in the neighborhood of a cooling fan or a
vent in the PC housing, the effect of the cooling fan may decrease,
thereby adversely affecting the operation of the PC. It is therefore
necessary to clean the inside of the PC on a periodic basis.
Preparations
Disconnect all cables from the PC main body.
4.2 Keyboard and Mouse Cleaning

1.
With a vacuum cleaner, remove dust that is accumulated

between keyboard keys.
2.
Rotate the ring on the bottom of the mouse

counterclockwise, and then take the ball out.
3.
With a soft, lint-free cloth, wipe the ball clean.
4.
With an air blower, carefully blow dust away from the mouse
case into which the ball is to be placed.
5.
Place the ball back in the mouse case.
Cleaning
1.
With a brush attached to a vacuum cleaner, carefully

vacuum-clean the slots and other openings in the rear of the
PC.
2.
Open the PC cover.
3.
With an air blower, clean the heat sink and circuit board
section.
4.
Close the PC cover.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
PM-3
4.3 LCD Cleaning
4.3 LCD Cleaning
4.4 Optical Drive Cleaning
1.
With a Cleaner Torch, remove dust from the LCD.
1.
Reconnect all disconnected cables.
2.
If there is any stubborn dirt on the LCD panel surface, wipe

it clean with a cloth (e.g., gauze) well wrung out in water.
2.
Turn ON the power to both monitor and PC.
CAUTION
3.
If you vigorously scrub the LCD panel surface, the liquid crystal
surface may become damaged. Therefore, do not apply any undue
force to the LCD panel surface when you wipe it clean. If the LCD
panel surface is heavily soiled and cannot be cleaned with a
moistened cloth, clean it with the monitor cleaner kit. The monitor
cleaner kit is of a chemical type. Therefore, if the monitor cleaner
kit is repeatedly used for cleaning purposes, the LCD panel
surface will be adversely affected. When using the monitor cleaner
kit, read its operation manual and exercise utmost care.
Windows starts up. In about one minute, the CL-AP starts running.
The Enter Password window opens.
4.
Click Cancel to close the window.
5.
Open the optical drive (CD, DVD/CD-RW drive) tray.
6.
Clean the optical drive with a dedicated lens cleaner.
NOTE
Do not use dehydrated ethanol for cleaning purposes because it
adversely affects the LCDs surface film.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Within three seconds after the initial window opens, click

the upper left corner and then the upper right corner of the
window.
For details of the procedure, see manuals supplied with the

dedicated lens cleaner kit.
7.
Close the optical drive.
PM-4
5.1 Checking the Memory and Hard Disk
5. Executing the Error Analysis
6. Functional Checks
5.1 Checking the Memory and Hard Disk
6.1 Confirmation of Image Input to

Storage onto HDD
See the below to check the memory and hard disk.

4.1 Checking the Memory under MT: Machine Troubleshooting
4.2 Checking the Hard Disk under MT: Machine
Troubleshooting
1.
Read an image and check to see that it is stored without fail.
6.2 Image Output to Film

See the following to perform the specified procedure.
3. Verifying the Connection in CL+FN-PS551/DRYPIX/FM-DP L
(DICOM Print) under OE5: Connecting the CL to Other
Equipment
6.3 Image Transfer

See the following to perform the specified procedure.
3.2 Image Transfer to Other Connected Equipment in
CL+HI-C655/QA-WS/FCR VIEW (DICOM CR Storage) under OE3:
Connecting the CL to Other Equipment
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
PM-5
7.1 Backup of Setup Files and Log Files
7. Backup of Setup Files and

Verification of Date and Time
7.1 Backup of Setup Files and Log Files
See one of the following to perform the specified procedure.
4.6.9 Connection Verification and Setup File Backup under
IN-B: Installation Connection to Two or More RUs, 5000 plus
and CR-IR356/357/359/362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372
4.7.9 Checking Connections and Backing Up Setup Files under
and CR-IR356/357/359/362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372
4.8.7 Connection Verification and Setup File Backup under
and CR-IR356/357/359/362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372
7.2 Verification of Date and Time

See the following to verify date and time of the PC and Pocket id
Console.
4.1.2 OS Setups under IN-B: Installation Connection to Two
or More RUs, 5000 plus and CR-IR356/357/359/362/363/364/366/367/
368/370/371/372
2.4.1 Setting Date and Time in CL+POCKET id Console (Portable
Exposure Function) under OE18: Connecting the CL to Other
Equipment
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
PM-6
IN-A: Installation Connection to One

XG-1 RU or CR-IR355RU/356/357
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
IN-AI
IN-A: Installation Connection to One XG-1 RU or CR-IR355RU/356/357
Control Sheet
Issue date
Revision number
10/20/2000
12/10/2000
00
00

Revision (FM2950)
12/10/2000
00
04/10/2001
01
05/30/2001
02
Previous Chapter A Installation

modified (FM2951)
Revision for software version A02
08/30/2001
03
08/30/2001
03/20/2002
03
04

03/20/2002
04
07/20/2002
05
07/20/2002
11/30/2002
03/01/2003
05
06
07

08/20/2003
12/10/2003
02/20/2004
08
09
10
07/30/2004
07/30/2005
11/30/2005
07/30/2006
11
14
15
16

010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
Reason
Pages affected
All pages
Pages I, II, i, ii, 25, 810, 12, 13,
15, 1724, 2628, 3035, 3742,
4650, 5254, A1-14, A2-1, A3-1,
A3-3, A4-1, A4-2, A4-7, A5-24,
A6-13, A7-1, A7-3, A7-4, A8-18,
A9-14, A10-14
Pages 67, 11, 14, 16, 25, 29, 36,
4345, 51, 55, 56
All pages
I, II, IN-A150, Appx IN2-3,
Appx IN3-1Appx IN7-4
I, II, 1, 3, 6, 12-16, 18-20, 22, 24,
28, 29, 31, 35, 36, 43, 45,
App IN1-1, App IN2-2, App IN3-1,
App IN4-2, 3, 6, App IN5-3, 4, 6,
App IN6-14, App IN7-16,
App IN8-14, App IN9-1, 2
23, App IN1-2, 3
I, II, III, IV, 2, 4, 7, 19, 2230, 35,
36, 41, 42, App IN1-1, App IN2-13,
App IN3-1, App IN4-2, App IN5-13,
6, App IN8-16, App IN9-3, 4
20, 3134, 3740, 4348,
App IN1-2
I, II, 2, 6, 8, 10, 12, 1619, 2124,
30, 34, 48
1315, 20, 2529, 3133, 3547
I, II, 2, 3, 16, 17, 28, 30, 34, 35, 47
I, II, 2, 3, 5, 8, 10, 21, 29, 31, 32,
3437
I, II, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 22, 3033, 35
I, II, 2, 18, 21, 35
All pages
I, II, 6, 1618, 21, 24, 26, 28, 35, 43
I, II, 18, 22, 27, 43, 44
I, II, 7, 11, 22, 29, 31
I, II, 2224
IN-AII
IN-A: Installation Connection to One XG-1 RU or CR-IR355RU/356/357
Control Sheet
Issue date
Revision number
07/20/2007
17
07/20/2007
05/09/2008
10/31/2008
17
18
19

10/31/2008
19
11/30/2009
20
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Reason
Pages affected
I, III, 2, 6, 12, 29, 31, 32, 3638, 44,
51, 52
3943, 4550
I, III, 1, 14, 32, 35
I, III, 2, 3, 16, 19, 30, 31, 33, 37, 40,
43
415, 17, 18, 2029, 32, 3436, 38,
39, 41, 42, 4452
I, III, 25, 27
IN-AIII
BLANK PAGE
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
IN-AIV
1.1 Dimensions and Weight
This section states the PC (controller: DELL OptiPlex GX150)
installation conditions.
u NOTE u
Listed below are the abbreviations adopted in this chapter.
:
Application
:
Local printer
:
CR-IR346CL
:
CR-IR346RU
CL configuration data :
RU configuration data :
AP
LP
CL
RU
CL-Config
RU-Config
For the dimensions and weights of the monitor and peripherals, see the
respective manuals that are supplied with them.
1.1 Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions (width height depth)
390 108 431 (mm)
Weight
Approx. 9.5 kg
1.2 Temperature and Humidity

Condition
Operating
Non-operating
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
Temperature
10C to 35C
-40C to 65C
Humidity
20% to 80% RH (non-condensing)
20% to 80% RH (non-condensing)
1.3 Places of Installation

Environmental conditions
Avoid installing the machine at the following places:
Places where the temperature changes drastically
Places near heaters or other heat sources
Places where the machine is likely to be wet or submerged
Places where the machine is likely to come into contact with any
corrosive gas
Dusty or dirty places
Places where the machine is subjected to constant vibration or shock
Places where the machine is subjected to excessive vibration or
shock
Places exposed to direct sunlight
Also, be sure that the monitor is not installed at the following places:
Places where the monitor is surrounded, such as in a rack case
Places whether the display surface is exposed to direct sunlight
Places near a transformer, another monitor, a power line, or
a 0.02 Gauss or more of AC magnetic field
1.4 Power Requirements

Power voltage/capacity
100 VAC / approx. 0.11 kVA
Remarks
Supplied from a 100 VAC wall outlet
Phase
: Single phase
Power frequency : 50/60 Hz
Grounding
: Ground resistance: 100 or less
1.5 Network Cable

Use an IEC950/UL1950-compliant UTP cable of category 5 or higher.
IN-A1
NOTE
This section explains about the procedures for starting/exiting the

Service Utility, which is used as a service utility tool during CL
installation.
REFERENCE
Startup procedure
If you cannot complete step 2. from the initial window within a

3-second period and allow the AP to start up, perform the following
steps to start the Service Utility.
The procedure for starting the Service Utility varies depending on

whether the CL-PC power is ON or OFF.
1. To exit the AP, choose Shut Down.
When the PC power is OFF
1.
2. Click
3. From the
Fuji Film, and FCR.
Windows 2000 starts up. After about one minute, the CL-AP
starts.
4. When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper left
and upper right corners within a period of 3 seconds.
u NOTE u
Be sure to turn ON the power to the LCD first and then to the PC,
otherwise the touch panel may not operate correctly.
2.
When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper

left and upper right corners within a few seconds.
3.
00000404.EPS
MU000032.EPS
MU000035.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-A2
When the PC power is ON
REFERENCE
1.

Clicking Shut Down in the
(or
menu while the CL-AP is running will display the exit

window. Click
while holding down the <Shift>
2. Click
key.
2.
From the
3. From the
Fuji Film, and FCR.
Fuji Film, and FCR.

The CL-AP starts in about one minute.
3.

left and upper right corners within a few seconds.
4.
MU000032.EPS
00000404.EPS
MU000035.EPS
NOTE
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-A3
Exit procedure
1.
Click [Exit Service Utility] on the IIP Service Utility window.
IN000117.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-A4
3. Installation Procedure Overview
3. Installation Procedure Overview

IMPORTANT
Be sure that the following equipment is completely installed and set up.
CR-IR346RU
See Chapters 1 to 8 of Installation of the RU Service
Manual.
Other equipment (LP, FN-PS551, HI-C655, RIS, etc.)
See the installation instructions set forth in the respective
service manuals.
IMPORTANT
Have on hand a CD-R disk that stores the CLs AP key
(114Y5342002A), which is distributed for use in servicing.
Use the AP key of version A00 or later.
1. Check the supplied component items,

install the CL accessories, and make
cable connections to the RU and LP.
4. CL Hardware Setup
2. Set up the software related to the CL

and RU. The major procedures are
indicated below:
Make preparations for CL-AP startup
(e.g., driver, option key, and AP key
installation).
Set up the software for RU operations
(e.g., RU-AP installation).
Set up the CL system information
(e.g., hospital name).
Perform CL-Config setup that is
needed for the connection of the other
equipment (HI-C655, QA-WS, etc.).
5. Software Setup
3. Verify the connection between the CL

and RU as well as the connections to
the other equipment. Also, generate
film printouts to check for an improper
format, unevenness on printed films,
sensitivity, density and abnormal
output characters.
6. Checkout Procedures
4. Back up the CL and RU setup files.

Also, check the RU error mode, and
delete an error log after completion
of the check.
7. Setup File Backup and

RU Error Log Verification/
Deletion
5. Complete the installation procedures

for the CL and RU.
See Chapter 10 and

beyond in Installation
of the RU Service Manual.
00056004.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-A5
4.1 Unloading and Unpacking

Remove the following items from the packing box.
PC (controller)
Monitor
Insulating transformer (only for units used in Japan)
Others (options, etc.)
4.2 Checking the Component Items

4.3 Installing the Accessories and
Optional Items
4.4 Making a Cable Connection to
the RU
... Install the monitor, PC boards,

insulating transformer (only for
units used in Japan), keyboard,
and mouse.
4.5 Making a Cable Connection to

the LP
... Do not perform this procedure if the

LP is not used.
4.6 Connecting to the Other

Equipment
... Do not perform this procedure if

other equipment (HI-C, QA-WS,
RIS, etc.) is not used.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
CAUTIONS
When unloading, transferring, and unpacking the machine,
observe the following precautions:
Do not subject the machine to vibration or shock.
If the machine is unduly vibrated or shocked while it is unloaded or
transferred, it may become damaged or defective.
Avoid moisture condensation inside the machine.
If the machine is subjected to a drastic temperature change when it is
transferred or unpacked, moisture condensation may occur inside the
machine. If you turn ON the machine while moisture is condensed on
its inner surface, the machine may become defective. To avoid such a
problem, be sure to allow the machine to stand at a room temperature
for a period of 1 hour or longer and then turn ON the power.
IN-A6

Check that the following component items are fully supplied.
PC box
(Product code : IR 346 CL A-B)
PC
Keyboard
Mouse
Power cable
CL-AP (CD-ROM)
XG-1 Standard Key Software (CD-ROM)
For details of the component items, see the documentation
supplied with the PC0.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Monitor box
(Product code : IR 346 DISPLAY LCD (15" monitor with the touch panel)
or IR 346 DISPLAY CRT 17 IN (17" CRT monitor))
Monitor
Monitor cable
Serial cable (only for the 15" monitor with the touch panel)
Touch panel driver CD (only for the 15" monitor with the touch panel)
Power cable
For details on the component items, see the documentation
supplied with the monitor.
When a Super Resolution LCD Monitor SL-IC300 is used, see
manuals provided with the SL-IC300 to check the component
parts.
When an LCD Monitor SL-IC200 is used, see manuals provided
with the SL-IC200 to check the component parts.
IN-A7
Others (separately packed items, options, etc.)

Description
Product
abbreviation
CL insulation power
box kit (only for units
used in Japan)
IR 346
INSULATION BOX
Local print key CD E-i/f

board (PEI01A)
IR 346 LOCAL
PRINT
DICOM print key CD
IR 346 DICOM
PRINT
Qty. Remarks*1
1
each
1
DICOM CR STORAGE
(standard/private)
key CD
IR 346 DICOM
CR STORAGE
LCD display stand*2
IR 346 LCD STAND
LCD display wallmounting bracket

MFP key CD
IR 346 LCD
BRACKET
IR 346 MFP
Grid Pattern Removal

processing key CD
CL GPR
Barcode reader
(with a rack)
IR 346 BARCODE

(JIS)
Qty. Remarks*2
1
1
each
IR 346 MCR JIS

(ISO)
IR 346 MCR ISO

wall-mounting kit
IR 346 MCR
BRACKET
Serial interface board

(PSI04A)
IDT-4 IF BD FOR
PCI
Cable for direct printer

connection
ODF/PS IF
CABLE nM*1
E-i/f conversion cable

(1.2 m)
MF-PS667/DMS
IF CBL
IR 346 DMS
NET- WORK
IN-OUT
FINP input/output key

CD
Product
abbreviation
Description
V, O
V, O
V, O
V, O
*1 n: Cable length
Processed-image
output key CD
IR 346 DICOM IM
PROCESSED
*2 O: Option
*1 V: Variation; O: Option
*2 Not required if the monitor type used is EIZO L350P-TS.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-A8
4.3 Installing the Accessories and Optional Items

Optional Items
Connect the boards (options), insulating transformer (only for units used
in Japan), keyboard, mouse and monitor to the PC as illustrated below:
Monitor power cable
Serial cable attached

to the monitor*
Monitor
Monitor port
Power source
Serial port
PC
power cable
Insulating transformer
power cable
To power
Insulating
source
transformer
To medical
(only for Japan)
grounding
terminal
Additional protective
grounding conductor
PSI board (option)
RIS, etc.
Back of GX60
To LP
1 2
Mouse
Keyboard
PEI board (option)

To IR
Remote power control box
(only when an IR is connected)
* Only when the 15" monitor with the touch panel is used.
IN000001.EPS
u NOTE u
Use the first serial port of the two that are provided on the PC.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-A9
4.3.1 PC Boards
To attach optional boards, observe the procedures described herein.
PEI board (optional)
PSI board (optional)
For how to verify setup of and attach the PSI board, see
1. Hardware Setup, under CL+RIS/IDC4 (ID Online) in
OE7: Connection between CL and Other Equipment.
1.
When connecting printers other than those mentioned on the left

side
DPSW1
DPSW2
DPSW3
SW0
SW2 and SW5
SW3 and SW4
Check that the switches on the PEI board are properly set.
If their settings are incorrect, correct them accordingly.
1 and 2: OFF; 3 and 4: ON

1 to 8: ON
1 to 8: OFF
2 and 3 short-circuited.
Jumpers removed.
u NOTE u
1 2 3
SW0
When no remote signal is to be sent to the printer, turn OFF all the
DPSW1 switches.
When connecting the CR-LP414N/FL-IM2636N or FL-IM3543N/
FL-IM3543MN
2 and 3
DPSW1 1 and 2: OFF; SW0
3 and 4: ON
short-circuited.
DPSW2 1 and 2: OFF; SW2 and SW5 1 and 2
3 to 8: ON

short-circuited.
DPSW3 1 to 8: OFF
SW3 and SW4 Jumpers removed.
ON
1 2 3
SW3
SW2
SW0
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
SW5
DPSW3
ON
SW3
SW2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
SW5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
DPSW2 ON DPSW1
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
1 2 3 4
OFF
SW4
PEI01A board
DPSW3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
DPSW2 ON DPSW1
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
00000007.EPS
1 2 3 4
OFF
SW4
PEI01A board
00000251.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-A10
2.
Mount a PEI board in a PCI slot.
u NOTE u
The procedure presented below applies when the PC used is
GX60.
When the PC used is a model other than GX60, see
Appendix C Removing/Reinstalling the Board (PEI/PSI) under
RI : Reinstalling the Software.

III. Mount a PEI board in the lower PCI slot.
Handle
PCI slot
II. Card cage
III. PEI board
AGP slot
Extension card
slot connector
NT
O
FR
CL-PC (GX60)
IN000022.EPS
IV. Mount the card cage on the CL-PC.

010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-A11

only for units used in Japan)
u NOTE u
Ensure that the power cables connected to the insulating transformer
are for the CL and monitor only.
2.
Connect the power cable between the insulating

transformer and power source.
3.
Turn ON the insulating transformer.
OFF
1.
Connect the keyboard, mouse, and power cable to the PC.

For details on the connection procedures, see the
documentation supplied with the PC.
CAUTION
For a PC provided with the source voltage changeover switch
(between 115 and 230 VAC), set the PC source voltage
according to the voltage supplied to the institution concerned
and then connect the power cable to the power source.
Connect the power cable to the power source.
Procedures followed by equipment used in Japan
(3) Power ON
1.
Connect the keyboard, mouse, and power cable to the PC.
2.
Connect the power cable to the insulating transformer.
3.
Use the long bracket to secure that the power cable is not
disconnected accidentally from the insulating transformer.
(2) Power cable

To power
source
(1) Two connector covers
Procedures followed by equipment used abroad
2.
ON
4.3.3 Keyboard, Mouse, and Power Cable

00000301.EPS
Secure the long bracket using

the two connector cover
retaining screws.
00000383.EPS
REFERENCE
To secure cables, eight brackets (four each of long and short ones)
are attached to the insulating transformer.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-A12
4.3.4 Monitor
1.
The following monitors can be connected.

The connection procedure varies with the monitor type.
15" monitor with the touch panel
17" CRT monitor
Super Resolution LCD Monitor SL-IC300
For the connection procedure of the Super Resolution LCD
Monitor SL-IC300, see manuals provided with the SL-IC300.
LCD Monitor SL-IC200

For the connection procedure of the LCD Monitor SL-IC200,
see manuals provided with the SL-IC200.
For the 15" monitor with the touch panel

The work procedures will differ depending on the installation method
adopted of the monitor.
u NOTE u
Prior to connection of the power cable, connect the serial cable between
PC and monitor.
If the power cable is connected before serial cable connection, the
touch panel driver may not be installed.
2.
Connect the power cable between the monitor and power

source.
u NOTE u
Prior to connection of the power cable, connect the serial cable
between PC and monitor.
If the monitor type used is EIZOs L350/351P-TS, it is stable enough

even without optional rack for actual operations. Thus, it is not
necessary now for you to mount optional rack.
Installation method 2
To replace the monitor with a wall-mounting type monitor, replace
first the bracket with a wall-mounting type (option). Perform then
step 1. thereafter.
For details on cable connections, see the documentation

REFERENCE
Installation method 1
To continue to use the monitor rack, perform step 1. thereafter.
Connect the monitor cable and serial cable to the PC.
2.
Connect the monitor power cable to the insulating

transformer.
3.
Use the short bracket to secure that the power cable is not
When using the wall-mounting bracket, see

Appendix 7 Attaching the Monitor Wall-Mounting Bracket
[Option] to replace the monitor rack.
Secure the short bracket using
retaining screws.
00000384.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-A13
For the 17" CRT monitor
1.
Connect the monitor cable between the PC and monitor.
2.

source.
2.

transformer.
3.
Secure the short bracket using
retaining screws.
00000384.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-A14
4.4 Making a Cable Connection to the RU
4.4 Making a Cable Connection to the RU

Connect a network cable between the RU and CL.
When using an E-i/f LP, connect an E-i/f cable between the LP and CL.
For the stand-alone type (independent type) RU operation

Connect a 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (cross) cable between the RU
and CL.
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
cable (cross)
LP
4.5 Making a Cable Connection to the LP
CL
LP
CL
E-i/f cable
PEI board
00000035.EPS
RU
00000027.EPS
For the network type RU operation

With 10BASE-T 100BASE-TX (straight) cables, connect the RU to
the CL via a hub.
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
cable (straight)
CL
HUB
10BASE-T
cable (straight)
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
cable (straight)
RU
Other connected hosts
(FN-PS, QA-WS, etc.)
00000028.EPS
u NOTES u
Even if the CL and RU will eventually be incorporated into the network
of a hospital for operation, connect the CL and RU while they are
independent of the network (not incorporated into the hospitals
network).
Do not connect the telephone line to the CL and RU network
connectors.
The cable type applicable to this equipment is the IEC950/UL1950compliant UTP cable of category 5 or higher.
REFERENCE
The RU cable connector is located on the lower-left on the rear of the
RU main unit.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-A15
4.6 Connecting to the Other Equipment
4.6 Connecting to the Other Equipment

Connect the following equipment to the CL.
HI-C654/HI-C655/QA-WS/ODF (FINP connection)
See 1. Hardware Setup, under CL+HI-C/QA-WS/OD-F
(FINP: Image Input/Output) in OE2: Connecting the CL to
Other Equipment.
HI-C655/QA-WS/FCR VIEW/Synapse server (DICOM connection)

See 1. Hardware Setup, under CL+HI-C655/QA-WS/
FCR VIEW (DICOM CR Storage) in OE3: Connecting the CL
to Other Equipment.
Other manufacturers equipment (DICOM CR Storage connection)

See 1. Hardware Setup, under CL+Other (DICOM CR
Storage: transfer of processed images) in OE4: Connecting
DRYPIX, FM-DP L (DICOM Print)

See 1. Hardware Setup, under CL+FN-PS551/DRYPIX/
FM-DP L (DICOM Print) in OE5: Connecting the CL to Other
Equipment.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-A16
5.1 CL-AP Startup
5. Software Setup
5.1 CL-AP Startup

The following procedures must be performed for CL-AP startup:
5.1 CL-AP Startup
... Make preparations for CL-AP startup

(e.g., touch panel driver, option key,
and AP key reinstallation).
5.2 CL Setup for RU

Connection
... Perform setup for RU operations

(e.g., RU M-Utility installation, RU-AP
installation, and RU-Config setup).
5.3 Setup with Service Utility ... Perform CL system information setup
(system information and IDT
functionality), LP setup, and film
annotation character setup.
Replace menu database for
equipment used abroad.
5.4 Procedures for Changing the .. This procedure is to be performed as
CL and RU IP Addresses
needed.
5.5 Procedures for Changing ... This procedure is to be performed as
the CL Host Name
needed.
5.6 CL Setup for Connection
to Other Equipment
5.7 Barcode Reader/Magnetic ... This procedure is to be performed as
Card Reader Connection
needed.
OS startup
OS setups
Touch panel driver installation
Option key installation
AP key reinstallation
CL-AP startup verification
u NOTES u
Windows 2000 and Windows XP, follow the procedure specific to the
used OS to perform necessary settings.
REFERENCE
The following OS setup and software installation steps are completed at
factory prior to shipment:
CL setup steps
CL IP address (172.16.1.20)
Subnet mask (255.255.0.0)
CL host name (CLxxxxxxxx, CRxxxxxxxx, CPxxxxxxxx: eight lowest
digits of a manufacturers serial number in the xxxxxxxx position)
Administrator password setup (fcr-iip)
Display setup (screen saver, screen resolution, etc.)
MS-IME setup (only for units used in Japan)
CL-AP (MSDE and SQL included) installation
XG-1 Standard Key Software installation
AP key installation
Image database initialization
RU setup steps
FTP server configuration and setup
RU information registration for CL-Config (host name, IP address,
and connected equipment information)
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-A17
5.1 CL-AP Startup
5.1.2 OS Setups
5.1.1 OS Startup
u NOTE u
Perform the following OS-related setups.
Setting the date, time and time zone.

Defining the character to be used as a decimal point [applicable only
to part of the area where the English software is used.]
1.

The following error display opens 10 seconds after CL-AP startup.
Setting the date, time, and time zone
1.

For Windows 2000
Double-click
on the desktop.
Double-click
For Windows XP
00000421.EPS
Select
IMPORTANT
The above error display opens because an output system
(print or image transfer) option key has not been installed/set
up when the equipment was newly installed.
For error details, see 3.4 Precautions to be Observed During the
Use of Output Options under MT: Machine Troubleshooting.
2.
Click
from the
menu.
2.
Double-click
The Date/Time Properties window opens.
The error display opens again in about 20 seconds.
00000216.EPS
3.
Click

010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-A18
5.1 CL-AP Startup
3.
Verify the date and time.

If the date and time indicated are incorrect, correct them accordingly
and then click
.
5.1.3 Touch Panel Driver Installation

[Skip this procedure if the 15" monitor with a
touch panel is provided.]
When the 15" monitor with the touch panel is going to be used, it is
necessary to install the touch panel driver and adjust the touch panel.
Installing the driver
1.
Click
5.
Verify the time zone setting.
If the setting is wrong, correct it and then click
To install the touch panel driver using the FD or employ the

L362T monitor, see Appendix 1 Installing the Touch Panel
Driver.
For the previous-version CD-ROM

When the CD-ROM is inserted into the CD-ROM drive, a window like
that shown below opens automatically. Click Install MonitorMouse
for Windows 2000.
00000115.EPS
4.
Insert the driver CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
.
IN000105.EPS
6.
7.
Click
00000117.EPS
For the new-version CD-ROM

When the CD-ROM is inserted into the CD-ROM drive, a window like
that shown below opens automatically. Click Install Drive For This
Computer. Click then Install Serial Driver on another window that
opens.

Select . (period) as the character to be sued as a decimal point.
This setup is applicable only to part of the area where the English
software is used.
For details of the setup procedure, see Defining the character

to be used as a decimal point in 2.1.3 Setting the OS under
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN000106.EPS
IN-A19
5.1 CL-AP Startup
After a while, the Elo MonitorMouse for Windows 2000 Setup

window opens.
5.
Click
In about one minute, a window opens to indicate the completion of

installation.
IN000104.EPS
2.
Click
The license agreement window opens.

00000418.EPS
00000412.EPS
3.
Click
6.
Click
The Updating System Settings window opens.
The port selection window opens.
7.
Remove the CD-ROM from the PCs drive.
8.
Click
The PC restarts. The touch panel adjustment window will then

opens automatically.
u NOTE u
00000413.EPS
u NOTE u
Start adjusting the touch panel as soon as the window below has
opened, otherwise it will close with the touch panel left unadjusted.
An error will occur if the serial cable of the LCD display provided
with a touch panel is connected to serial port No. 2.
4.
Click
The Digital Signature Not Found window opens in several

seconds.
00000422.EPS
00000415.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-A20
5.1 CL-AP Startup
Adjusting the touch panel
2.
u NOTE u
The following window may suddenly open during the touch panel
adjustment process. It does not indicate any touch panel adjustment
problem.
Click
Touch the
The
3.
mark gently with your finger.

mark moves to the upper right of the window.
Gently touch the
mark again with your finger.
The Check Video Alignment window opens.
to close the window and then continue with the
touch panel adjustment process.
00000316.EPS
4.
00000321.EPS
Click
u NOTE u
1.
With your finger, gently touch the
mark at the upper left
Click
of the window.
within a period of 30 seconds. Failure to click
within a 30-second period invalidates the previous

adjustments made.
Mark
The Elo TouchSystems Setup window opens.
5.
Deselect
click
) and then
u NOTE u
If a window opens to prompt FD insertion, click
00000227.EPS
mark moves to the lower right of the window. (A beep

The
will sound.)
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
To set up other functions (e.g. for silencing the alarm sound)

of the touch panel, see the documentation for the touch panel
driver.
IN-A21
5.1 CL-AP Startup

Adjust the display contrast and brightness as follows.
Model 9416TD15/H2
Contrast : 127
Brightness : 255
on the screen.)
5.1.4 Procedure for Avoiding a Password Input

Prompt When Exiting the Suspend Mode
1.
(For Windows XP, select Control Panel from the

menu.)
Model 9416TD15/H2-1
Contrast : 65%
Brightness : 100%
on the screen.)
From the
Control Panel.
2.
Double-click
3.
Click the Advanced tab (Advance tab for Windows XP).
Model L350P-TS
Contrast : 80%
Brightness : 80%
Adjustment>, then <Contrast Brightness>.)
IN000110.EPS
4.
Uncheck
( ).
Model L351P-TS
Contrast : 90%
Brightness : 90%
Model L362T
Brightness : 90%
IN000109.EPS
5.
Click

010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-A22
5.1 CL-AP Startup
5.1.5 Setup of CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 Icons

[applicable only in Japan]
To have the CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 icons be displayed on the CL-AP
main window, those icons must be installed properly ahead of time.
Function
Print output
Product Abbreviation
IR346 LOCAL PRINT
LP (local printer) connection
IR346 DICOM PRINT
DICOM Print function
For how to install the CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 icons, see FR15

Setup of CAPSULA/DRYPIX2000 Icons [applicable only in Japan]
under FR: Function-specific Reference.
IR346 DICOM
CR STORAGE
5.1.6 Option Key Installation

The following option keys are available. Install necessary option keys
in compliance with the CL installation specifications.
IMPORTANT
Image
input/output
Either the image input/output function or print output option key must be
installed.
If it is not installed, an error display (error code: 50001) will be indicated
during CL-AP startup, resulting thus in disabling the CL-AP to be started
up.
Moreover, when the IR346 DICOM CR STORAGE or IR346 DICOM
PRINT option key has been installed, be sure to perform configuration
settings that result from Storage or DICOM Print. (This is because an
error would occur if only optional key is installed.)
The 50001 error display will be indicated if an output system (for print or
image output) option key has not been installed/set up properly.
For error details, see 3.4 Precautions to be Observed During
the Use of Output Options under MT: Machine
Troubleshooting.
IR346 DICOM
IM PROCESSED
IR346 DMS NETWORK

IN-OUT
Image
processing
Description
DICOM-based image transmission

functions available (Also include a
function to transmit
unstandardized images to the
QA-WS.)
Options installed are as follows.
CR Storage SCU (Private)
(Private Unstandardized CR
Storage is included in Private.)
Functions available for processedimage transmission with DICOM
The option installed is as follows.
Function for image transfer (input/
output) with FINP
Options installed are as follows.
FINP output
FINP input (Supports only the
reprint function.)
IR346 MFP
CL GPR
Grid Pattern Removal processing

function
REFERENCE
Each option key is supplied on one dedicated CD-ROM for each
product.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-A23
5.1 CL-AP Startup

For the option key uninstallation procedure, see Appendix A
Uninstalling the APs under RI: Reinstalling the Software.
1.
Insert an option key CD into the CD-ROM drive.

seconds.
2.
Click

with the option key
for installation.
5.1.7 AP Key Installation

u NOTE u
Install the AP key after all option keys have been installed.
This is because once an option key has been installed, the AP key is
invalidated requiring thus the AP key to be reinstalled.
REFERENCE
information is generated to define the encryption key.
The associated registry information is generated when the AP key is
installed.
Install the AP key as follows:
1.
Insert the AP key CD into the CD-ROM drive.

2.
Click
00000416.EPS
3.
Click
u NOTE u
window will be displayed some times. Perform steps 2. and 3. as
well.
00000419.EPS
3.
Click
4.
5.
To install other option key, change the CD and repeat steps

2 through 4.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
4.
IN-A24
5.2 CL Setup for RU Connection
5.1.8 CL Startup Verification

Verify the normal startup of the CL.
1.
From the
menu, select Programs, Fuji Film, and
then FCR.
The CL opening window appears on the display. After about one
minute, the CL-AP starts up.
The CL is shipped from factory without installing the RU-AP (the RU is

installed with the RU-AP). It is thus necessary to install the RU-AP in
the CL. To operate the RU, the RU-AP data, etc. must have been
installed in the CL.
For installation of the RU-AP, the use of the RU M-Utility is required.
The RU M-Utility is a utility (also referred to as the FCR TOOL) that
implements RU-AP installation, Configuration backup and other
functions. Since also the RU M-Utility is not installed in the CL prior to
shipment, it needs to be installed upon equipment installation.
u NOTE u
00000195.EPS
When the OS used is Windows XP, be sure to use RU software

When the OS used is Windows Vista, be sure to use RU software
u NOTE u
If the above window does not open or an error display appears,
note the displayed error code and the applicable remedy, and then
make necessary corrections to achieve AP startup.
See 1. Error Code Table in MT: Machine Troubleshooting.
2.
Click
in the
REFERENCE
The RU-AP and RU M-Utility are included in the CD provided with the
RU.
menu.
The exit window opens.
3.
Hold down the <Shift> key and click
The CL-AP exits and the system returns to the desktop screen.
REFERENCE
To shut down the CL-AP only, click [Shut Down] and then [OK]
while holding down the [Shift] key.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
IN-A25
5.2.1 Installing the RU M-Utility
4.
The RU M-Utility installation procedure is described herein on the

assumption that the RU application CD-ROM version A07 or later is
used for the RU M-Utility (PC-MUTL hereinafter) that is to be installed
as follows. A different installation procedure will be required if a version
earlier than that mentioned above is used.
1.
After the completion of installation, the FCR TOOL Setup/

Completing the... window opens.
u NOTES u
Make sure to start the procedure below with the CL-AP quit
accordingly.
Click
00000188.EPS
5.
Click
The system returns to the CR-IR 346RU MAINTENANCE

TOOLS window.
Have on hand the CD that is supplied with the RU.

Insert this CD into the CD-ROM drive.
00000322.EPS
6.
Click
The CR-IR 346RU MAINTENANCE UTILITY main menu window

opens.
Main menu window
(the display differs depending on the software version used.)
00000214.EPS
2.
Click
The RU M-Utility installation start window opens.
00000185.EPS
3.
Click
The FCR TOOL Setup/Read to Install... window opens.

010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
00000215.EPS
IN-A26
5.2.2 Installing the RU-AP
2.
Verify the network connection between the CL and RU, and then install
the RU AP in the CLs FTP server.
REFERENCE
Values for time<10ms and TTL=128 in the message above vary
depending on the network status. Connection remains normal even
though such values vary.
Verifying the network connection between the CL and RU

u NOTES u
REFERENCE
Make sure that the RU power cable is connected to the breaker and
the breaker is turned ON.
If the connection to the RU cannot be verified, it is conceivable that

the following causes may exist:
Exit all running APs (particularly Explorer) other than the RU M-Utility.
Improper cable connections Check the cable connections

again.
RU or CL network board problem Restart the system.
Other
From the main menu, perform the following checks.

I
If you still cannot verify the connection, you can restore the network
connection by initializing RU memory to forcibly return the IP
address stored in the RU main unit to the default.
II
For details of the procedure to restore the network

connection to the CL by initializing memory, see
3.1 CL/RU Connection Recovery Procedure to be
Performed upon RU Memory Initialization under
00000610.EPS
I. Check that the RU host name (ru0) is entered.

II. Check that the RU IP address (172.16.1.10) is entered.
u NOTES u
Never change the IP address.
The host name entered here serves as the actual RU host name
(it is written in the FLASH ROM as the RU host name).
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Verify the network connection to the RU.

The connection is normal if the following message appears four times.
When the OS used is Windows XP, be sure to use RU software

When the OS used is Windows Vista, be sure to use RU software
1.
The process for checking the connection to the RU starts.
3.
u NOTE u
Click
4.
Click the
mark at the upper right corner of the command
prompt window.
IN-A27
4.
Installing the RU-AP
Complete the following setup steps:
u NOTE u
Main menu window
The data set up as follows will be written on the RU-Config file and
then installed in the RU together with the RU-AP.
For the procedure used when changing the setup data
after installation, see Appendix 2 Setting the RU-Config.
I
II
III
IV
V
00000502.EPS
1.
Click INSTALL on the main menu.

The Insert the CD-ROM into a drive window opens.
2.
Since the CD carrying the RU-AP is already inserted into the

CD-ROM drive, just click
The RU-AP version selection window opens.
3.
Select the RU-AP version from the list, and then click
VI
.
IN000063.EPS
List
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
00000190.EPS
I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
Verify that the entry is 172.16.1.10.

Change setup data listed in the table on the right as necessary.
IN-A28
Configuration
Setup Item
Setup
Range
Default
ROUTER IP
ADDR
IP address
setup range
0.0.0.0
Route address
(Do not change the setup.)
SECURE
TELNET HOST
IP ADDR
IP address
setup range
0.0.0.0
IP address available for the

TELNET.
SECURE
TELNET
NETWORK
ADDR
IP address
setup range
0.0.0.0
Range of the IP address

available for the TELNET.
EQUIPMENT
CODE
AZ
Machine serial ID code of the

RU.
(This code is printed on film.)
RANGE OF
ERASE MODE
ERASE 1
ERASE 1,
ERASE 2
ERASE 1
Specifies the erasure mode

range.
ERASE 1: Primary erasure can
be selected.
ERASE 1, ERASE 2:
Both primary and secondary
erasures can be selected.
ERASE MODE
TIMEOUT
0 to 999
(sec)
060
Erase mode timeout setting.
IP ERASE TYPE
(FOR NO
BARCODE)
5, 6
6
Setup needed if no barcode

reader is used.
5, 6 : Types V and VI mixed.
6 : Type VI
ON
Sets alarm ON/OFF when

cassette is inserted.
ON : Alarm sounds.
OFF : Alarm does not sound
ON

erasure processing is selected.
ON : Alarm sounds.
ALARM
(CASSETTE
SET)
ON
OFF
ALARM
ON
(MODE SWITCH) OFF
WARNING OF
OVERXRAY
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
LOG &
MESSAGE LOG &
MESSAGE
LOG
NONE
VI. Select OFF.
Remarks
Selects X-ray over-exposure IP

warning method.
LOG & MESSAGE: Warning by
log and message.
LOG : Warning by log.
NONE : No warning issued.
REFERENCE
The AUTO UPDATE function will automatically have the RU
download RU data from the FTP server if there is a discrepancy
between CL FTP server data and RU FLASH ROM data.
See 5.2 Mechanism of RU-AP/RU-Config AUTO UPDATE
in MD: Machine Description.
5.
Click
RU-AP installation will start. (It completes within a few minutes.)
CAUTION
(Applicable only for RU-AP version A07 or later.)
The RU panel will be illuminated during the RU-AP installation
process. Never turn OFF the power to the RU or press the
reset switch at this time, otherwise the RU CPU board can be
damaged.
u NOTE u
Do not operate the CL-AP and RU M-Utility while RU-AP
installation is being performed.
6.
After completion of RU-AP installation, click

when Completed is displayed on the window.
7.
Click the
The system returns to the CR-IR346RU MAINTENANCE TOOLS

window.
IN-A29
5.3 Setup with Service Utility
8.
Click
9.
Remove the CD from the drive.
u NOTE u
(Applicable only for RU-AP version A06 or earlier.)
If the RU-AP version installed is A06 or earlier, be sure to start the
CL-AP to have the FTP server RU data be downloaded to the RU
FLASH ROM.
u NOTE u
For connection of the CR-IR355RU/356/357, be sure to install the
RU PC-TOOL. See the CR-IR355RU/356/357 Service Manual for
how to install it.

Use the Service Utility to set up the following items:
CL system information
IDT functionality
LP information (required only when an LP is connected)
Menu database replacement (required only for equipment used
abroad)
5.3.1 Starting the Service Utility
1.
Click
and then sequentially choose Programs,
Fuji Film, and FCR.

2.
Within a few seconds after the initial window opens,

the window.
MU000031.EPS
MU000035.EPS
NOTE
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-A30
5.3.2 CL System Information Setup
REFERENCE
2. Click
3. From the
Fuji Film, and FCR.
Complete setup concerning CL system information and IDT functionality

as directed in this section.
Setting the system information
1.
From the IIP Service Utility window, click [Setup

Configuration Item].
3.
00000500.EPS
2.
Click the
sign within
in the Setup
IN-A31
00000404.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
3.
Click
u NOTE u
Use System Common Date Format to specify the date format.

If you change the date format, the following items of information
are changed to match the newly selected format.
The CL system information setup items appear.
Items for CL system setup
Date output on film

Format for birth date input
Date displayed by CL-AP
Other date indications
Make a hospital name entry (one-byte characters) by doubleclicking
for
u NOTE u
Use Institute/Site Name Strings to enter a hospital name string
of one-byte characters for use in the CL system.
The default hospital name is FUJI FILM HOSPITAL. Change
this entry to a hospital name string of one-byte characters as
defined by a specific hospital.
You can enter a string of up to 60 characters.
00000132.EPS
4.
Set the IP size unit system (inch or metric) for
Enter setup data as directed below.
Make a date format selection by double-clicking

for
0: Japanese date (S62.10.07) [Default]
1: ANSI long date (1987.OCT.07)
2: ANSI short date (1987.10.07)
3: American long date (OCT.07.1987)
4: American short date (10.07.1987)
5: European long date (07.OCT.1987)
6: European short date (07.10.1987)
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
u NOTE u
Set the IP size unit system (inch or metric) that the RU can
handle.
IN-A32
Use
to specify the language to be
used.
0: Japanese
1: English
2: German
3: French
4: Spanish
5: Italian
6: Swedish
7: Finnish
8: Danish
9: Norwegian
10: Korean
11: Chinese Simplified
12: Chinese Traditional
13: Portuguese
14: Polish
15: Hungarian
16: Czech
17: Russian
18: Slovene
Setting the IDT functionality
1.
From the Setup Configuration Item window, click

.
The IDT function setup items appear in the right-hand area of the
window.
IDT function setup items
u NOTE u
Do not select 18: Slovene because software version V7.0 (B)
Double-click
for
to enter a hospital name
(consisting of two-byte characters).

00000160.EPS
u NOTE u
Use Institute/Site Name in Two-Byte Characters to enter a hospital
name string of two-byte characters for use in the CL system.
The default hospital name is
. Change this entry
to a hospital name string of two-byte characters as defined by a
specific hospital.
You can enter a string of up to 15 two-byte characters.
5.
2.
Edit the IDT functionality setup as needed.
3.

saved.
Change the other items of system information as needed.

Item number
Description
2
3
6
14
15
Confirmation window display for examination list deletion

Setup of a process to be performed after an
abnormality occurrence
2in1 format with no masking
System ID
Password use for user utility access
For details on individual setup items, see 3.6 Configuration

Details-5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION under MU: Maintenance
Utility.
4.
Click
For details on individual setup items, see 3.4 Configuration

Details-1. IMAGE MODALITY under MU: Maintenance Utility.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-A33
5.
5.3.3 Setting the LP Information

saved.
When the LP is connected to the CL, perform the Registering the LP

procedure below.
6.
Registering the LP
1.

.
A list of registered equipment appears in the right-hand area of the
window.
Click
Changing the LP system information

If the following printer use is intended, change the LP system
information.
When the following old-type printers are used.
CR-LP414N/IM2636N, FL-IM3543N/FL-IM3543MN
00000407.EPS
2.
Click
When the film sort function is to be used.
The FTP CONNECTION window opens.
3.
When the cable connecting the printer to the CL exceeds 60 m in

length.
1.
Perform the following setup steps.

The LP configuration setup items appear in the right-hand area of

the window.
in the
field and select the function (PRINT)
2.
Change the LP system information.
3.
of the connected device.

in the
field and specify the device
(LOCAL).
If the LP option key is not installed, you cannot choose LOCAL.
Click
For details on individual setup items, see 1. Setup Necessary

When Connecting the LP under Print Output Function in

saved.
REFERENCE
4.

.
4.
Click
You are returned to the Setup Configuration Item window.

010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-A34
Setting the film annotation character format

Use the following procedures to change the image information output
on film, film annotation character format and presence/absence of
image frame.
5.3.4 Optimizing the Monitor Display

Set the LUT file as follows to optimize the image display of the monitor
that is being used.
1.
REFERENCE
Click [LUT] on the IIP Service Utility window.
The film annotation character format printed as set by the default is

basically the same as that printed by the FCR 5000 series.
Differences observed between the CL and FCR 5000 series with
regard to film output are described in 2.2 Precautions of the Film
Annotation Character Format under Print Output Function in
1.
00000501.EPS

.
the window.
2.
Set the film annotation character format.
3.
For details on the setup procedure and setup items, see

2. Setup Necessary When Editing the Film Annotation
Character Format, under Print Output Function in

saved.
4.
Click
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-A35
2.
Settings are thus completed, and the system returns to the IIP
Service Utility window.
Select the name of the display monitor that is actually being

used and click
u NOTE u
To use a nanao L351P (model L351P-TS) with the CL software A08
or earlier install the LUT file on the FD provided with the LCD
monitor.

5.3.5 Exiting the Service Utility
1.
IN000129.EPS
TPS 9415 TD15

TPS
9416
TD15
:
15" LCD monitor with a touch panel

TPS 9416TD15_2
PRESTO!
(B/W)
:

(monochrome)
PRESTO! (Color)
(color)
ikegami
MDM2130
:
Ikegami 1k landscape monitor

nanao L350P
(model L350P-TS)
nanao L351P
(model L351P-TS)
nanao SL-IC200
nanao L362T
(model L362T)
Linear
LUT
:
Linear
(linear gradation) LUT

nanao Radiforce
GS310-CLG (monochrome monitor)
nanao Radiforce R31 : LCD monitor SL-IC300 (color monitor)
nanao L568M
nanao L560T-C
(model L560T-C)
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
From the Setup Configuration Item window, choose

Close (C) on the Config (F) menu.
2.
Click
IN-A36
5.3.6 Changing the Menu Database (for non-Japanese

versions only)
menu database must be replaced following individual procedures.
3.
Enter 2 to use the DICOM MG Storage function (a digital

mammography option), and 1 for other than that. Press
then the <Enter> key.
A menu list of languages that can be installed opens.
u NOTE u
Pay attention to the fact that exposure menu settings will revert to the
default if a menu database is replaced.
1.
Insert the CL-AP CD into the CD-ROM drive.

RI0000428.EPS
NOTE
IN000116.EPS
2.

00000301.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-A37
4.
Enter the item number of a language you wish to install and

u NOTE u
step 3 above, a window like that shown below opens. Skip step 5
and proceed to step 6.
5.

When Japanese was selected as the language to be installed:
When you selected Standard and Japanese as the language
to be installed at step 3 above, a window like that shown below
opens. Enter 1 and press the <Enter> key.
When English (U.S.) was selected as the language to be installed:
IN0000954.EPS
IN0000957.EPS

IN0000955.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN0000955.EPS
IN-A38
When a language other than Japanese was selected:

When you selected Standard and a language other than
Japanese as the language to be installed at step 3 above, a
window like that shown below opens. Enter an item number that
is for the connected equipment and press the <Enter> key.
7.

The IIP Setup Tool exits, returning you to the desktop screen.
8.
IN0000956.EPS

When English (U.S.) was selected for the language to be

installed:
IN0000957.EPS
IN0000955.EPS
6.
Select an FNC parameter and press the <Enter> key.
u NOTE u
When the RU used is CR-IR 363, select 5 Use FNC, Highluminance film illuminator, Use 20line/mm image.
The message Menu Database installation completed. appears
completing thus changing the menu database.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-A39
5.4 Procedures for Changing the CL and RU IP Addresses
5.4 Procedures for Changing the CL and

RU IP Addresses
This section explains about the procedures for changing the IP
addresses for the CL and RU. The IP addresses need to be changed in
the following cases.
Case 1: When changing the CL/RU network configuration from the
stand-alone type to the network type.
Case 2: When the CL and RU IP addresses need to be changed for
hospital network management purposes.
To change the IP address, see Appendix 5 Procedures for
Changing the CL and RU IP Addresses.
5.5 Procedures for Changing

the CL Host Name
Procedures observed when the CL host name is changed follow.
See Appendix B Changing the CL Host Name under
5.6 CL Setup for Connection to Other

Equipment
This section explains about the software setup procedures to be
performed when connecting the following equipment to the CL.
See 2. Software Setup, under CL+HI-C/QA-WS/OD-F
(FINP : Image Input/Output) in OE2: Connecting the CL to
Other Equipment.

See 2. Software Setup, under CL+HI-C655/QA-WS/
to Other Equipment.

See 2. Software Setup, under CL+Other (DICOM CR
Storage: transfer of processed images) in OE4: Connecting

See 2. Software Setup, under DRYPIX/FM-DP L (DICOM
Print) in OE5: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment.
5.7 Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader

Connection
When using the barcode reader or magnetic card reader, perform the
following connection and setup.
Barcode reader connection and setup
For details on the connection, see Appendix 3 Connecting
the Barcode Reader [Option].
Magnetic card reader connection and setup

For details on the connection, see Appendix 4 Setting Up the
Magnetic Card [Option].
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-A40
6.1 Checking the Connection between the CL and RU
6.1 Checking the Connection between the

CL and RU
1.
6.1 Checking the Connection

between the CL and RU
Turn ON the RU power. If it is already ON, you do not have to

do anything here.
6.2 Checking the Connection between

the CL and Other Equipment
6.3 Checking the Output Image
... For output image verification,

check for an improper format,
image irregularities, and an
incorrect film annotation
character format.
ON
00000210.EPS
2.
From the
Fuji Film, and FCR.

The CL-AP starts up in about one minute.
After a while, the RU initialization process begins.
The CL-AP window shows a message to indicate that the RU is
being initialized.
u NOTE u
This message will not appear if the RU has been started up
before the CL-AP.
An RU initialization message is displayed.

00000198.EPS
When the RU initialization process ends, the CL-AP window reads

Reading Unit:.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-A41
6.1 Checking the Connection between the CL and RU
3.
RU panel
From the CL user window (Registration), set patient data

and exposure menu, and then click
For details on the patient data input procedure, see the CL

Operation Manual, FCR XG-1 CR-IR346CL.
(Illuminated)
Cassette insertion lamp
Both the CL-AP window lamp and the RU panels cassette

insertion lamp go on.
CL window
00000207.EPS
4.
Set a cassette in the cassette setting unit.

When a certain period of time elapses after the start of an IP read
process, the read image appears on the CL monitor.
Reading Unit:
Reading Unit:
(Illuminated)
00000209.EPS
Read image
00000200.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-A42
6.2 Checking the Connection between the CL and Other Equipment
6.2 Checking the Connection between the

CL and Other Equipment
Check the connection to the following equipment.
See 3. Connection Checkout, under CL+HI-C/QA-WS/OD-F
(FINP : Image Input/Output) in OE2: Connecting the CL to
Other Equipment.

Run the following checks on the output image.
Format check
Irregularity, sensitivity and density checks
Film annotation character format
Preparations
1.
See 3. Connection Checkout, under CL+HI-C655/QA-WS/

to Other Equipment.
For details on the primary erasure procedure, see

2.4 Performing the Image Erasure Process Only (Primary
Erasure), in the RU Operation Manual.
u NOTES u
Check the output image with all IP sizes that are used in the hospital.
Use the Type VI IPs.
Make sure that no important image data (e.g., patient images) is
exposed on the IPs to be checked.
See 3. Connection Checkout, under CL+Other (DICOM CR

Storage: transfer of processed images) in
OE4: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment.

See 3. Verifying the Connection, under CL+FN-PS551/
DRYPIX/FM-DP L (DICOM Print) in OE5: Connecting the CL
to Other Equipment.
Have on the hand the IP to be used. Subject this IP to

primary erasure.
2.
Expose the IP to 1 mR of radiation.
REFERENCE
If the IPs cannot exactly be exposed to 1 mR of radiation, use the
following IP exposure conditions as a guide. Note, however, that
the following conditions are used as a guide for standard IP setup.
Distance : 1.8 m
Voltage : 80 kV
Current : 50 mA
Time
: 0.013 sec
3.
Select Sensitivity from Test as the exposure menu.
4.
Set a cassette in the cassette setting unit.

The image is read and transferred to the CL.
5.
Click
at the upper right corner of the CL window.
The image printout process starts.

010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-A43
Checking the format
1.
Checking irregularities
Check that the white clear portion of the resulting output

film does not exceed 2 mm in width (when an 100% image
output is generated).
Measure
Image frame
1.
Check that the output film and the image displayed on the
CL monitor are both free from peculiar irregularities.
If any abnormality is found, see Troubleshooting of the RU
Service Manual.
2.
Check that the system sensitivity value and film density

value displayed on the output film are approximately 200
and 1.2, respectively.
If any abnormality is found, see "Troubleshooting" of the RU
Service Manual.
White clear portion
00000212.EPS
u NOTE u
If the image is not generated at a magnification setting of 100%,
calculate as follows to check the white clear portion.
2
reduction ratio*
100
mm
* The reduction ratio is printed at the bottom of a film output image.

If any abnormality is encountered, see Troubleshooting of
the RU Service Manual.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-A44
Exiting the CL-AP
Checking the film annotation character format
1.
Check to see that the film annotation character format

information entered from the CL is properly printed out onto
the film.
Also, check for blurred, chipped, or otherwise abnormal

character printings.
REFERENCE
The example in the figure below represents a printout that would be
generated when the default film annotation character format is used
(image size: 35 35cm (14" 14"); print format: TWIN).
When the default settings are used, character strings (1) through (19)
are printed out.
1.
Click
or
A menu opens.
2.
The CL-AP exits returning you to the desktop screen.
REFERENCE
If you click [Shut Down] without holding down the <Shift> key, both
the CL-AP and Windows shut down.
(1) Hospital name (institution name)

FUJIFILM HOSPITAL
04001676
A0000 A020
(12) IP number
(2) EDR mode + menu code
(3) System ID + image number
(13) Image processing conditions
(4) Patient ID
(5) Patient name
R->L
G 1.0G#0.7+0.50R5Q0.5
SKULL, GENERAL
L 4.0 S200C 1.2 1.0AP
Surgi
01
(19)
Technologist's
code
(10) Film mark

(7) Gender
(8) Age or birth date
0000000001 MARY ADAMS

1992. 11. 27 [17:43]
G1.0G#0.7+0.50R5Q1.0
[F] 23
SCALE:50% RT-04
(8) Requesting department

(9) Group process information
(11) Reduction ratio
(14) Exposure menu name
(17) Exposure time
(16) Image reversal mark
(6) Exposure date
00000034.EPS
(15) Normalization conditions + corrections
If any abnormality is found, see Print Output Function in

Function-Specific Reference Guide.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-A45
7.1 Backing Up the CL Setup File
7. Setup File Backup and RU

Error Log Verification/Deletion
This section explains about the procedures for backing up the CL and
RU setup files and verifying/deleting the RU error log.

1.
Insert an FD into the FDD.
2.
Start the Service Utility and then click [Configuration

Restore/Backup] (the second item from the top).
The Configuration Restore/Backup window opens.
When making backups, have the following items on hand.

Four DOS-V formatted FDs
(one for the RU and three for the CL)
3.
Click [.....] in the [Configuration Backup] area.
u NOTES u
Never turn OFF the CL or RU power during a backup process. If the

power turns OFF, the machine may fail to start up.

7.2 Backing Up the RU Setup File
00000417.EPS
A window opens, prompting you to select a storage directory.
7.3 Verifying and Deleting the RU Error Log
4.
for
, and then choose
5.
Click
You are then returned to the Configuration Restore/Backup

window.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-A46
6.
Click
The setup file backup process begins. In about one minute, a

message appears prompting you to replace the FD.
7.
Insert the second FD into the FDD.

In about one minute, a message appears prompting you to change
the FD.
8.
Insert the third FD into the FD drive.

This section explains about the procedure for making an FD backup by
saving the RU machine-specific data onto an FD after the completion of
setup.
u NOTE u
The machine is supplied with an FD that stores machine shipment
control data. Do not use this FD for making a backup. This FD contains
data that can only be measured at factory. If such data is lost, it cannot
be restored at site.
u NOTES u
No message appears to indicate the end of the backup process.
1.
Insert an FD into the CL-PCs FDD.
During the backup process, the mouse cursor changes to the

mark. You may understand that the backup process is completed
when the
mark changes back to the mouse cursor.
2.
Start the RU M-Utility by performing the steps indicated

below.
The
mark does not appear unless the mouse cursor is
positioned in the Configuration Restore/Backup window.
Before removing the FD, verify that the FDD access lamp is
extinguished.
9.
Remove the FD from the FDD.
10. Click
IV. Click.

II. Click.
I. Click.
00000219.EPS
The RU M-Utility starts.

010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-A47
3.
From [LIST OF EXISTING RU], select a target RU for backup.
4.
From the [BACKUP (RU HD FD or HD FD)] area, back

up the following data.
CONFIGURATION
SCN ALL DATA
CONFIGURATION data backup example
I. Click.
II. Select.
III. Click.
00000220.EPS
REFERENCE
During SCN ALL DATA backup processing, the RU produces a
beep sound.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-A48

From the main menu of the RU M-Utility, perform the steps
indicated below.
I. Type in 1 and then press
C:WINNT\System32\telnet.exe
cr-ir346
Password :
-> mutl
0. QUIT
1. LOG
2. VERSION
3. TEST
4. ELECTORICAL UTILITY
5. SCANNER UTILITY
6. MECHANICAL UTILITY
7. SOFTWARE UTILITY
8. BACKUP MEMORY
9. HV OFF
>
II. Type in cr-ir346 and

then press the <ENTER> key.
0. QUIT
the <ENTER> key.
1. ERROR LOG
2. TRACE LOGS
LOG > 1
II. Type in 1 and then press
III. Type in cr-ir346 and

0. QUIT
the <ENTER> key.
1. DISPLAY
2. SAVE TO FTP-SERV
3. CLEAR
LOG > ELG > 1
IV. Type in mutl and

0. QUIT
1. ALL
2. SUMMARY
LOG > ELG > DSP > 1
00000211.EPS
u NOTE u
Be quick to operate II. and III. above. The operation will be
canceled if the <Enter> key is not pressed in a certain period of
time.
If canceled, repeat step II. thereafter.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
If the error log does not exist, the following message appears:
THE LOG IS EMPTY.
RESULT:OK
C:WINNT\System32\telnet.exe
0. QUIT
1. LOG
2. VERSION
3. TEST
4. ELECTRICAL UTILITY
5. SCANNER UTILITY
7. SOFTWARE UTILITY
8. BACKUP MEMORY
9. HV OFF
> 1
I. Click.
RU [ru0] login :
After selecting an error log as directed below, verify it.
REFERENCE
7.3.1 Verifying the RU Error Log
1.
2.
III.Type in 1 and the n press

the <ENTER> key.
0. QUIT
1. FATAL
2. WARNING
3. BOTH
LOG > ELG > DSP > ALL > 3
***ERROR LOG ALL***
CODE DATE
11311.2000.01.01
0. END (DEFAULT=0) :
IV.Type in 1 and then press

the <ENTER> key.
V. Type in 3 and then

press the <ENTER> key.
VI. Verify the error log.
00000221.EPS
IN-A49
7.4 Turning OFF the CL and RU
7.4 Turning OFF the CL and RU
7.3.2 Deleting the RU Error Log
1.
Start the RU M-Utility. Delete the error log as directed below.

C:\WINNT\System32\telnet.exe
0. QUIT
1. LOG
2. VERSION
3. TEST
4. ELECTORICAL UTILITY
5. SCANNER UTILITY
7. SOFTWARE UTILITY
8. BACKUP MEMORY
9. HV OFF
> 1
0. QUIT
1. ERROR LOG
2. TRACE LOGS
LOG > 1
Shut down the CL system.
2.
Turn OFF the RU power.
I. Type in 1 and then press the <Enter> key.
II. Type in 1 and then press the <Enter> key.

0. QUIT
1. DISPLAY
2. SAVE TO FIP-SERV
3. CLEAR
LOG > ELG> 3
III. Type in 3 and then press
the <Enter> key.
2.
1.
OFF
00000224.EPS
u NOTE u
Continue to perform the procedures set forth in Chapter 10, Final
Installation, in Installation of the RU Service Manual.
00000222.EPS
Exit the M-Utility.

C:\WINNT\System32\telnet.exe
ARE YOU SURE?
1.YES 2.NO (DEFAULT=2) : 1
RESULT : OK
->
II. Click.
I. Type in "1" and then
00000223.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-A50
BLANK PAGE
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-A51
BLANK PAGE
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-A52
IN-B: Installation Connection to Two or

More RUs, 5000 plus and CR-IR356/357/
359/362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
IN-BI
IN-B: Installation Connection to Two or More RUs, 5000 plus and CR-IR356/357/359/362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372
Control Sheet
Issue date
Revision number
05/30/2001
08/30/2001
02
03

08/30/2001
03/20/2002
03
04

07/20/2002
05
07/20/2002
11/30/2002
05
06

11/30/2002
03/01/2003
06
07

08/20/2003
08/20/2003
12/10/2003
08
08
09

12/10/2003
02/20/2004
09
10
07/30/2004
07/30/2004
07/30/2005
11
11
14

11/30/2005
15
07/30/2006
16
07/30/2006
16
07/20/2007
17
07/20/2007
17
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Reason
Pages affected
All pages
I, II, 16, 917, 19, 20, 2328,
3150
18
IIV, 5, 12, 13, 16, 19, 20, 23,
2628, 3234, 38, 4048
I, II, 4, 6, 7, 9, 10, 12, 14, 15,
1721, 23, 24, 40
11, 13, 16, 22, 2539, 4146
IIV, 5, 13, 18, 19, 21, 22, 25, 26,
28, 38, 48
20, 23, 24, 27, 29-37, 3947
I, II, 3, 57, 1719, 2226, 2933,
35, 36, 45, 46
I, II, 110, 1216, 19, 20, 2258
11, 17, 18, 21
I, II, 2, 3, 5, 6, 13, 16, 18, 19, 23,
24, 27, 37
3840
All pages
I, II, 4, 5, 1416, 1921, 2729
6, 3058
I, II, 2, 14, 16, 20, 21, 29, 36, 42,
50, 51, 55, 57
I, II, 17, 9, 10, 1216, 1930, 41,
48, 5158
I, II, 14, 15, 21, 23, 24, 2932, 40,
41, 59, 62
1620, 22, 2528, 3339, 4258,
60, 61
I, II, 111, 13, 14, 1621, 2433,
3638, 40, 4244, 46, 4850, 52,
54, 5766
12, 15, 22, 23, 34, 35, 39, 41, 45,
47, 51, 53, 55, 56
IN-BII
IN-B: Installation Connection to Two or More RUs, 5000 plus and CR-IR356/357/359/362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372
Control Sheet
Issue date
Revision number
05/09/2008
18
05/09/2008
18
10/31/2008
19
11/30/2009
20
11/30/2009
20
03/31/2010
21
12/10/2010
22
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Reason
Pages affected
IIV, 19, 11, 13, 14, 16, 17, 2022,
2528, 3034, 3739, 41, 4345,
47, 49, 51, 53, 55, 5862, 6468
23, 24, 29, 35, 36, 40, 42, 46, 48,
50, 52, 54, 56, 57, 63
IIII, 17, 10, 11, 13, 14, 16, 17,
2026, 28, 3034, 3739, 41,
4345, 47, 49, 51, 53, 55, 5862,
6467
I, III, 8, 9, 19, 21, 25, 2729, 33, 35,
3840, 56, 58, 70
26, 3032, 34, 36, 37, 4155, 57,
5969, 71, 72
I, III, 7, 9, 22, 23, 28, 29, 35, 3740,
56
I, III, 9, 28, 34, 40
IN-BIII
BLANK PAGE
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
IN-BIV
For the PC (controller: DELL Optiplex GX150) installation
conditions required, see 1. CL Installation Conditions under
IN-A: Installation - One RU Connection.
Dimensions and weight

Temperature and humidity
Environmental conditions
Power supply conditions
u NOTE u
Listed below are the abbreviations adopted in this chapter.
: AP
Application
: LP
Local printer
: CL
CR-IR348CL
: RU (XG-1 RU)
CR-IR346RU
: IR (5000plus series)
5000plus
: 356
CR-IR 356
: 357
CR-IR 357
*1
: 359
CR-IR 359
: 362
CR-IR 362
: 363
CR-IR 363
: 364
CR-IR 364
: 366
CR-IR 366
: 367
CR-IR 367
: 368
CR-IR 368
*1
: 370
CR-IR 370
*1
: 371
CR-IR 371
*1
: 372
CR-IR 372
CL configuration data : CL-Config
*1 : CR-IR 359, CR-IR 370, CR-IR 371 and CR-IR 372 are the
equipment models available only other than in Japan.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-B1
2. Installation Workflow
Presented below is the procedure used for installing the CL-AP.
Follow the flowchart to install the CL-AP.
u NOTE u
XG-1 RU
5000plus
356
357
359
362
363
364
366
367
368
370
371
372
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
XG-1 RU
FCR5000, etc.
CR-IR 356
CR-IR 357
CR-IR 359
CR-IR 362
CR-IR 363
CR-IR 364
CR-IR 366
CR-IR 367
CR-IR 368
CR-IR 370
CR-IR 371
CR-IR 372
IMPORTANT
Have on hand a CD that stores the CLs AP key (114Y5342002A),
which is distributed for use in servicing.
Be sure to use the AP key of version A00.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-B2
Presented below is the CL-AP installation workflow. Check work items

required for each equipment unit so that the CL-AP can be properly
installed.
XG-1 5000P 356
3.
357
359
362
363
364
366
367
368
370
371
372
CL Hardware Setup
3.1
Unloading and Unpacking
3.2
Checking the Component Items
3.3
Installing the Accessories and Optional Items
3.3.4 Monitor
3.3.1 PC Boards
3.3.2
Insulating Transformer (procedures required only

for units used in Japan)
3.3.5 Remote Power Control Box
3.4
Making a Cable Connection to Other Equipment
3.5
Making a Cable Connection to the LP
3.6
Mounting the Ferrite Core
4.
CL Software Setup
4.1
CL-AP Startup
4.1.1 OS Startup
4.1.2 OS Setups
Touch Panel Driver Installation [Skip this

4.1.3 procedure if the 15 monitor with a touch panel is
provided.]
4.1.4
Procedure for Avoiding a Password Input Prompt

When Exiting the Suspend Mode
4.1.5
Setup for Addition of Descriptive Characters to

Icons [applicable only in Japan]
4.2
Setup for the CL with the Service Utility

010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-B3
XG-1 5000P 356
357
359
362
363
364
366
367
368
370
371
372
4.3
Configuration Settings for LP Connection
4.4
CL Settings for Connection to Other Equipment
4.5
Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader Connection
4.6
Configuration Settings for IR (5000plus series)

Connection
4.6.1 Starting CL Service Utility
4.6.2 Setups Necessary for the CL
4.6.3 Setups Necessary for the IR
4.6.4 Setups Necessary for Exchanging ID Information
IDT CONNECTION (Patient Information Sharing

Function) Setup
4.6.5
4.6.6 Saving Configuration
4.6.7
Selector Setup (applicable only when a built-in

device is connected)
4.6.8
Settings for Transfer of Image Processing

Parameters (only for A02 and A03)
4.6.9 Connection Verification and Setup File Backup
4.7
Setup for RU (XG-1 RU) Connection

4.7.1 Performing Setup with the Service Utility
4.7.3 Installing the RU-AP (for 1st unit)
4.7.4 Installing the RU-AP (for 2nd and 3rd units)
4.7.5 Changing the CL IP Address
4.7.6
Setting Up IDT CONNECTION

(patient information sharing function)
4.7.7 Setting the Selector
4.7.8
Settings Necessary for Connection of Two or More

CLs
4.7.9
Checking Connections and Backing Up Setup

Files
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-B4
XG-1 5000P 356

4.8
357
359
362
363
364
366
367
368
370
371
372
Setup for CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X Connection

4.8.3
IDT CONNECTION (patient information sharing

function) Setup
4.8.4 Selector Setup

4.8.5
Settings Necessary for Connection of Two or More

CLs
4.8.6 CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X Setup
4.8.8 Wake-on-LAN Setup
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-B5

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
Remove the following items from the packing box.

PC (controller)
Monitor
Others (options, etc.)
CAUTIONS
3.4 Making a Cable Connection to Other Equipment
When unloading, transferring, and unpacking the machine,

observe the following precautions:
Do not subject the machine to vibration or shock.

If the machine is unduly vibrated or shocked while it is unloaded or
transferred, it may become damaged or defective.
3.6 Mounting the Ferrite Core
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Avoid moisture condensation inside the machine.

If the machine is subjected to a drastic temperature change when it is
transferred or unpacked, moisture condensation may occur inside the
machine. If you turn ON the machine while moisture is condensed on
its inner surface, the machine may become defective. To avoid such a
problem, be sure to allow the machine to stand at a room temperature
for a period of 1 hour or longer and then turn ON the power.
IN-B6

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
Others (separately packed items, options, etc.)

Description
Product Code
Qty. Remarks*
CL insulation power
box kit (only for units
used in Japan)
IR 346
INSULATION BOX
Local print key CD E-i/f

board (PEI01A)
IR 346 LOCAL
PRINT
1
each
V, O
DICOM print key CD
IR 346 DICOM
PRINT
V, O
FINP input/output key

CD
IR 346 DMS NETWORK IN-OUT
V, O
DICOM CR STORAGE
(standard/private)
key CD
IR 346 DICOM
CR STORAGE
V, O
LCD display stand
IR 346 LCD STAND
LCD display wallmounting bracket
IR 346 LCD
BRACKET
MFP key CD
IR 346 MFP
MFP key CD
IR 348 MFP
When a Super Resolution LCD Monitor SL-IC300 or an Ikegami 1k

landscape monitor is used, see the respective manual to check
the component items.
Detail QA key CD
IR 346 DELUX-QA
When an LCD Monitor SL-IC200 is used, see the respective manual

to check the component items.
Processed-image
output key CD
IR 346 DICOM IM
PROCESSED
371
372
Check that the following component items are fully supplied.
PC box
(Product code : IR 348 CL A B )
PC
Keyboard
Mouse
Power cable
CL-AP (One or two CDs)
Standard Key Software (CD)
For details of the component items, see the documentation
supplied with the PC.
Monitor box
(Product code : IR 346 DISPLAY LCD (15" monitor with the touch panel)
or CL DISPLAY CRT 17 IN A (17" CRT monitor))
Monitor
Monitor cable
Serial cable (only for the 15" monitor with the touch panel)
USB cable (only for the 17" monitor with the touch panel)
Touch panel driver CD or FD (only for the monitor with the touch
panel)
Power cable
For details on the component items, see the documentation
* V: Variation; O: Option
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
IN-B7
Description
Product Code
Qty. Remarks*
Description
Product Code
Qty. Remarks*
QA batch processing
key CD
CL TILE-IM QA
FOR PLUS
Digital Mammography
key CD (image processing
parameters not provided.)
CL DICOM
MAMMO S
Digital Mammography key

CD (image processing
parameters provided.)
CL DICOM
MAMMO P
Image magnification
key CD (for Lite
Standard key)
CL IM-MAGNIFY
FOR LITE
CL LUTADJUSTMENT
FOR LITE
CL SHUTTERPROC
LUT adjustment key

CD for connection to
other competing PACs
(for Lite Standard key)
Annotation key CD
CL ANNOTATION
FOR LITE
Energy subtraction
processing key CD
CL ES
Grid Pattern Removal

processing key CD
CL GPR
Ordering key CD
(serial connection)
CL ORDER
ONLINE
Image Reader QC
function key CD
FCR QC TEST
SOFT
Ordering key CD
(F-RIS)
CL ORDER
ONLINE FOR TST
DICOM Media Storage

key CD
CL DICOM MEDIA
STORAGE B

key CD
CL PEM
DICOM image query/

retrieval key CD
CL DICOM QR
X-CON control key
CL X ONLINE
RETAKE ANALYSIS
key CD
CL RETAKE
ANALYSIS
Image composition key

CD
CL IM
COMPOSITION
POCKET id Console
key CD
CL SOFT FOR
POCKET ID CL
Patient information
online key CD
IR 346 ID ONLINE
DICOM worklist (MWM)

key CD
CL DICOM ORDER
MWM
DICOM worklist (MWM)

key CD
(patient information only)
CL DICOM ID
MWM
DICOM PPS key CD
CL DICOM MPPS
DICOM Commitment
Push key CD
CL DICOM
COMMITMENT
Shadow-masking CD
key
* O : Option
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
* O : Option
IN-B8
Description
Product Code
Qty. Remarks*
Mammo QC key CD
(Applicable only in
Japan)
FCR QC TEST
SOFT M
PDI key CD
CL DICOM PDI
STORAGE
Precise Enlargement
image display function
key CD
CR PRECISE
ENLARGEMENT
QA ROI Measurement
function key CD
CR QA ROI
MEASUREMENT
Ordering key CD
(Synapse RIS)
DX CL SYNAPSE
RIS CONNECT
IR 346 BARCODE
IR 346 MCR JIS

(including a Ferrite
core)
IR 346 MCR JIS F

(ISO)
IR 346 MCR ISO

(ISO, including a Ferrite
core)
IR 346 MCR ISO F

wall-mounting kit
IR 346 MCR
BRACKET
Serial interface board

(PSI04A)
IDT-4 IF BD FOR
PCI
* O : Option
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Product Code
Qty. Remarks*2
Cable for direct printer

connection
ODF/PS IF CABLE
nM*1
RS232C cable for

connection to other
manufacturers RIS
terminal or X-ray
apparatus
IDT3/4 ONLINE
9S-CBL nM*1
IDT3/4 ONLINE
25P-CBL nM*1
E-i/f conversion cable

(1.2 m)
MF-PS 667/DMSIF
CBL
Ferrite core kit

(one smalll core)
IR 346
FERRITE KIT
2M/3M color/
monochrome video board
AMD FireGL V3600
(3M monochrome not
included)
CL VIDEO BD FOR
2MCG3MC
3M monochrome video
board
CL VIDEO BD FOR
SL-IC300
SERIAL PORT BD
SERIAL PORT BD
RS-422
XCON CONNECT
KIT
XCON CONNECT
KIT RS-422
Barcode reader
(with a rack)
Description
Board for serial

capacity enhancement
(MOXA CP-104EL/
RS-232C)
Board for serial
capacity enhancement
(MOXA CP-114EL/
RS-232C or RS-422)
RS-232C X-CON
connection kit
Serial conversion cable
relay adapter
RS-422 X-CON
connection kit
Serial conversion cable
relay adapter
*1 n : Cable length
*2 O : Option
IN-B9

Optional Items
Connect the following accessories and optional items to the PC, as
illustrated below.
PC boards (option)
Keyboard and mouse
Monitor
Remote power control box (only when the 5000 plus series is
connected)
Follow the workflow presented below.
Monitor power cable
Serial cable attached

to the monitor*
Monitor
Monitor port Power

source
Serial port
USB port
PC
power cable
power cable
To power
source
Insulating
transformer
(only for Japan)
To medical
Additional protective grounding
grounding conductor terminal
PSI board (option)
Back of GX60
RIS, etc.
To LP
3.3.1 PC Boards
1 2

3.3.4 Monitor
USB cable
Mouse
attached to
the monitor*2
Keyboard
PEI board
(option)
To IR
Remote power
control box
(only when the IP is connected)
* 1: Only when the 15" monitor with the touch panel is used.
* 2: Only when the 17 monitor with the touch panel is used.
IN000010.EPS
u NOTE u
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Of the two serial ports provided on the PC, be sure to use the No.1
serial port ( ).
IN-B10
3.3.1 PC Boards
XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364

FL-IM3543MN
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
To attach optional boards, observe the procedures described herein.

PEI board (optional)
PSI board (optional)
DPSW1 1 and 2: OFF; SW0

3 and 4: ON
DPSW2 1 and 2: OFF; SW2 and SW5

3 to 8: ON
DPSW3 1 to 8: OFF
SW3 and SW4
1.
DPSW3
ON
For how to verify setup of and attach the PSI board, see
1. Hardware Setup, under CL+RIS/IDC4 (ID Online) in
OE7: Connection between CL and Other Equipment.
1 2 3
SW0
Check that the switches on the PEI board are properly set.
u NOTE u
SW3
DPSW1 switches.
SW2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
SW5
2 and 3
short-circuited.
1 and 2
short-circuited.
Jumpers removed.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
DPSW2 ON DPSW1
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
1 2 3 4
OFF
SW4
PEI01A board
00000251.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-B11
When connecting printers other than those mentioned on the

left side
DPSW1
1 to 8: ON
DPSW2
1 to 8: OFF
DPSW3
SW0
SW2 and SW5 1 and 2 short-circuited.
ON
1 2 3
SW0
DPSW3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
DPSW2 ON DPSW1
ON
2.
u NOTE u
The procedure below applies when the PC used is GX60.
When the PC used is a model other than GX60, see

III. Mount a PEI board in the lower PCI slot.
Handle
3. Card cage
SW3
SW2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
SW5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
1 2 3 4
OFF
4. PEI board
SW4
PEI01A board
AGP slot
Expansion card
slot connector
00000007.EPS
NT
O
FR
CL-PC (GX60)
IN000009.EPS

010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-B12

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
372

1. Connect the keyboard, mouse, and power cable to the PC.
u NOTE u

Ensure that the power cables connected to the insulating transformer

are for the CL and monitor only.
1.
Remove the two connector covers from the insulating

transformer.
2.
Connect the power cable between the insulating transformer

and power source.
3.
9000
364
Turn ON the insulating transformer.
CAUTION
For a PC provided with the source voltage changeover switch
(between 115 and 230 VAC), set the PC source voltage
according to the voltage supplied to the institution concerned
and then connect the power cable to the power source.
2.

1. Connect the keyboard, mouse, and power cable to the PC.
ON
2.
3.
OFF
(3) Power ON
Connect the power cable to the power source.

Connect the power cable to the insulating transformer.

Use the long bracket to secure that the power cable is not
(2) Power cable

To power
source
Secure the long bracket using
retaining screws.
00000383.EPS
(1) Two connector covers
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
00000301.EPS
REFERENCE
To secure cables, eight brackets (four each of long and short ones)
are attached to the insulating transformer.
IN-B13
1.
3.3.4 Monitor
XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
For details on cable connections, see the documentation

372
The following monitors can be connected.

Note that the connection procedure varies with the monitor type.
17" CRT monitor
Ikegami 1K landscape monitor
For the connection procedure of the Super Resolution LCD
Monitor SL-IC300, see manuals provided with the SL-IC300.
u NOTE u
PC and monitor.
2.
LCD Monitor SL-IC200

For the connection procedure of the LCD Monitor SL-IC200, see
manuals provided with the SL-IC200.
For the monitor with the touch panel

The work procedures will differ depending on the installation method
adopted of the monitor.
REFERENCE
If the monitor type used is EIZOs L350/351P-TS, it is stable enough
even without optional rack for actual operations. Thus, it is not
necessary now for you to mount optional rack.
Installation method 1 (for the 15" monitor with the touch panel)
Connect the monitor cable and serial cable or USB cable to

the PC.

source.
u NOTE u
PC and monitor.
2.

transformer.
3.
To continue to use the monitor rack, perform step 1. thereafter.
Installation method 2 (for the 15" monitor with the touch panel)
To replace the monitor with a wall-mounting type monitor, replace
first the bracket with a wall-mounting type (option). Perform then
step 1. thereafter.
When using the wall-mounting bracket, see
Appendix 7 Attaching the Monitor Wall-Mounting Bracket
[Option] to replace the monitor rack.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Secure the short bracket using the two
connector cover retaining screws. 00000384.EPS
IN-B14
For the Ikegami 1k landscape monitor
For the 17" CRT monitor
1.
Connect the monitor cable between the PC and monitor.
1.
Use a monitor cable to connect the monitor to the PC.
2.

source.
2.
Connect the power cable between the PC and insulating

transformer.
3.
IN000108.EPS
Procedure followed by equipment used abroad
2.
Use a power cable to connect the power source to the

monitor.
Secure the short bracket using the two
connector cover retaining screws.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
00000384.EPS
IN-B15
3.4 Making a Cable Connection to Other Equipment
3.4 Making a Cable Connection to Other

Equipment

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
1.
Use a USB cable to connect the CL to the remote power

control box.
2.
Use an optional remote power control cable to connect the

remote power control box to the IR.
u NOTE u
To use the following remote power control cable for the master
IDT741, a conversion cable is required.
IDT-IV-to-FCR5000 connect signal cable REM CBL *M FOR IDT
MAIN D
XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
Use a network cable to connect the CL to other equipment.

When using a HUB, use a straight cable, and when directly connecting
the CL to the IR without HUB, use a cross cable.
For connection using a straight cable
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
cable (straight)
CL
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
cable (straight)
Other Connected
Equipment
HUB
IN000011.EPS
For connection using a cross cable
Remote power
control box
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
cable (cross)
CL
Other Connected
Equipment
IN000012.EPS
USB cable
To CL-PC USB
connector
Conversion cable
[as required]
Remote power
control cable
u NOTES u
FG terminal
[required only when
a conversion cable
is used.]
Do not connect the telephone line to the CL and IR network

connectors.
IR remote switch
connector
IN000014.EPS
3.
Be sure to use an STP shield-type cable for connection to the IR.

Even if the CL and IR will eventually be incorporated into the network
of a hospital for operation, connect the CL and IR while they are
independent of the network (not incorporated into the hospitals
network).
The cable type applicable to this equipment is the IEC950/UL1950compliant UTP cable of category 5 or higher (when a HUB is used).
To connect another IR, use an RU2 connector.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-B16

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
When using an E-i/f LP, connect an E-i/f cable between the LP and CL.
LP
CL
E-i/f cable
3.6 Mounting the Ferrite Core

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
When a magnetic card reader is connected to the CL, mount a Ferrite

core on the USB cable.
PEI board
Rear of the CL
00000035.EPS
Ferrite core (small)
Network
cable
Card reader
RU
20-40mm
Power cable
Ferrite core
00000036.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-B17
4. CL Software Setup
4.1 CL-AP Startup
4.2 Setup for the CL with the Service Utility
4.3 Configuration Settings for LP connection
4.4 CL Settings for Connection to Other Equipment

Connection
4.6 Configuration Settings for IR (5000plus series)

Connection
4.7 Setup for RU (XG-1 RU) Connection
4.8 Setup for CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X Connection
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
IN-B18
4.1 CL-AP Startup
4.1 CL-AP Startup

Start up the CL-AP following the workflow below:
4.1.1 OS Startup
4.1.2 OS Setups
u NOTE u
REFERENCE
The following CL-PC setups and software installation steps are
completed at factory prior to shipment:
4.1.3 Touch Panel Driver Installation

4.1.5 Setup for Addition of Descriptive Characters to

CL IP address (172.16.1.20)
Subnet mask (255.255.0.0)
CL host name (CRxxxxxxxx: 8 lowest digits of a manufacturers
serial number in the xxxxxxxx position)
Administrator password setup (fcr-iip)
Display setup (screen saver, screen resolution, etc.)
MS-IME setup (only for units used in Japan)
CL-AP (MSDE and SQL included) installation
Standard Key Software installation
AP key installation
Image database initialization
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
IN-B19
4.1 CL-AP Startup
4.1.1 OS Startup
XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
The following error display opens 10 seconds after CL-AP startup.

355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
u NOTE u
1.
NOTE
00000421.EPS
A window like that shown below opens in case the date and time
displayed on the PC are older than those when it was started last
time.
Click [OK] on the window that opens, and set correct date and time
on the Date/Time Properties window.
IMPORTANT
The above error display opens because an output system (print or
image transfer) option key has not been installed/set up when the
equipment was newly installed.
For error details, see 3.4 Precautions to be Observed
During the Use of Output Options under, MT: Machine
Troubleshooting.
2.
CLP401002.EPS
Click
The error display opens again in about 20 seconds.
If this window opens, the PC battery is possible to be dead. Use

the procedure below to check.
1. Set the current date/time.
2. Turn the power to the PC OFF and disconnect the power cable
from the outlet.
3. After a few minutes, re-connect the power cable and turn the
power to the PC ON again.
4. Check to see that the set date/time are correct. If the date/time
values revert back to those before settings, have the battery be
changed.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
00000216.EPS
3.
Click
IN-B20
4.1 CL-AP Startup
3.
4.1.2 OS Setups
XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
Verify the date and time.
If the date and time indicated are incorrect, correct them accordingly
and then click
.
Perform the following OS-related setups.

Setting the date, time and time zone.
Defining the character to be used as a decimal point [applicable only
to part of the area where the English software is used.]
Setting the date, time, and time zone
1.
Make setting as follows.
For Windows 2000

00000115.EPS
Double-click
on the desktop.
Double-click
4.
Click
5.
Verify the time zone setting.
If the setting is wrong, correct it and then click
For Windows XP
00000117.EPS
Select
from the
menu.
7.
For Windows Vista

2.
Double-click
The Date/Time Properties window opens.

010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
6.
menu.
Click

Select . (period) as the character to be sued as a decimal point.
This setup is applicable only to part of the area where the English
software is used.
For details of the setup procedure, see Defining the character
to be used as a decimal point in 2.1.3 Setting the OS under
IN-B21
4.1 CL-AP Startup

if the 15 monitor with a touch panel is provided.]
XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
After a while, the Elo MonitorMouse for Windows 2000 Setup

window opens.
372
When the monitor with the touch panel is going to be used, it is

necessary to install the touch panel driver and adjust the touch panel.
2.
1.
IN000107.EPS
Click
Insert the driver CD-ROM into the PC.

To install the touch panel driver using the FD or employ the
L362T or L560T-C monitor, see Appendix 1 Installing the
Touch Panel Driver.
For the previous-version CD-ROM

When the CD-ROM is inserted into the PC, a window like that shown
below opens automatically. Click Install MonitorMouse for Windows
2000.
00000412.EPS
3.
Click
IN000102.EPS
For the new-version CD-ROM

When the CD-ROM is inserted into the PC, a window like that shown
below opens automatically. Click Install Drive For This Computer.
Click then Install Serial Driver on another window that opens.
00000413.EPS
u NOTE u
An error will occur if the serial cable of the LCD display provided
with a touch panel is connected to serial port No. 2.
4.
Click

seconds.
.
IN000103.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
00000415.EPS
IN-B22
4.1 CL-AP Startup
5.
Click

installation.
For how to adjust the touch panel when using the L362T or L560T-C
monitor, see Appendix 1 Installing the Touch Panel Driver.
u NOTE u
problem.
Click

00000418.EPS
6.
Click
7.
Remove the CD-ROM from the PC.
8.
Click
00000321.EPS
1.
The PC restarts. The touch panel adjustment window will then

opens automatically.

of the window.
Mark
u NOTE u
00000422.EPS
00000227.EPS
The
mark moves to the lower right of the window. (A beep will
sound.)
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
IN-B23
4.1 CL-AP Startup
2.
Touch the
The
3.
Adjust the display contrast and brightness as follows.
mark moves to the upper right of the window.
Gently touch the
Model 9416TD15/H2
Contrast : 127
Brightness : 255
on the screen.)
Model 9416TD15/H2-1
Contrast : 65%
Brightness : 100%
on the screen.)
00000316.EPS
4.
Click
u NOTE u
Model L350P-TS
Click

adjustments made.
5.
Deselect
click
Model L351P-TS
) and then
u NOTE u
If a window opens to prompt FD insertion, click
Contrast : 90%
Brightness : 90%
Model L362T
.
To set up other functions (e.g. for silencing the alarm sound) of

the touch panel, see the documentation for the touch panel driver.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Contrast : 80%
Brightness : 80%

Brightness : 90%
Model L560T-C
Brightness : 100%
IN-B24
4.1 CL-AP Startup

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
4.
Uncheck
372
NOTE
When the OS used is Windows Vista, nothing is needed to perform at
this step.
1.
From the
IN000109.EPS
5.
Click
Control Panel. (For Windows XP, select Control Panel

from the
menu.)
2.
Double-click
3.
IN000110.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
IN-B25
).
4.1 CL-AP Startup
4.1.5 Setup for Addition of Descriptive Characters to

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
To enable addition of descriptive characters below the icons displayed

on the CL-AP main window, install the descriptive characters
appropriately.
For the descriptive character installation procedure, see FR10
Setup for Addition of Descriptive Characters to Icons [applicable
only in Japan] under FR: Function-specific Reference.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
IN-B26
4.1 CL-AP Startup

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
Function
357
368
359
370
371
372
The following option keys are available. Install necessary option keys
in compliance with the CL installation specifications.
IMPORTANT
Either the image input/output function or print output option key must be
installed. If it is not installed, an error display (error code: 50001) will be
indicated during CL-AP startup, resulting thus in disabling the CL-AP to be
started up. Moreover, when the IR346 DICOM CR STORAGE and
IR346 DICOM PRINT option keys have been installed, be sure to
perform configuration settings as well.
The 50001 error display will be indicated if an output system (for print or
image output) option key has not been installed/set up properly.
For error details, see 3.4 Precautions to be Observed During the
Use of Output Options under MT: Machine Troubleshooting.
Function
Print
output
Image
input/
output
Product Code
Description
IR346 LOCAL PRINT LP (local printer) connection
IR346 DICOM PRINT DICOM Print function
DICOM-based image transmission
functions available (Also include a function
to transmit unstandardized images to the
QA-WS.) Options installed are as follows.
IR346 DICOM CR
STORAGE
CR Storage SCU (Private) (Private
Unstandardized CR Storage is included
in Private.)
Functions available for processedimage
transmission with DICOM Options installed
IR346 DICOM IM
are as follows.
PROCESSED
Function for image transfer (input/output)
with FINP Options installed are as follows.
IR346 DMS NET FINP output
WORK IN-OUT
FINP input (Supports only the reprint
function.)
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Image input/
output
Image
storage
assurance
QA function
Product Code
CL DICOM MAMMO S
function (Image processing
parameters will not be provided.)
CL DICOM MAMMO P
function (image processing
parameters will be provided.)*1
CL DICOM MEDIA
STORAGE B
Removable Media Image

Storage function
CL DICOM QR
Function for study query/image

retrieve to/from filing devices.
CL DICOM PDI
STORAGE
Function that writes exposed

images onto a CD-R.
CL DICOM
COMMITMENT
Function assuring that an image

has surely been stored in the
archiver unit.*2
IR346 DELUX-QA
QA function addition*3, *4
CL TILE-IM QA FOR
PLUS
QA batch processing
IR346 MFP
IR348 MFP
Image
processing
Description
CL SHUTTER-PROC
Shuttering processing
CL PEM
CL IM COMPOSITION
Image composition
CL IM-MAGNIFY FOR
LITE
Image magnification (for Lite

Standard key)
CL LUT-ADJUSTMENT
FOR LITE
LUT adjustment for connection

to other competing PACS (for
Lite Standard key)
*1 To use this option, the CL DICOM MAMMO S option key must have
been installed.
*2 To use this option, the IR346 DICOM CR STORAGE option key
must have been installed.
*3 When IR346 DELUX-QA is installed, all the QA functions are made
available.
If it is not installed, only a limited number of QA functions available.
*4 No option key is required because this function is available as a
standard on the DR Console Plus.
IN-B27
4.1 CL-AP Startup
Function
Image
processing
Product Code
Description
CL ANNOTATION
FOR LITE
Annotation function
FCR QC TEST SOFT

M
Mammo QC function
(Applicable only in Japan)
CL GPR
Grid Pattern Removal processing

function
FCR QC TEST SOFT
Image Reader QC function
CL ID ONLINE
ID Online function

For the option key uninstallation procedure, see
Software.
1.

seconds.
NOTE
CL DICOM ORDER MWM DICOM worklist function

Acquisition
CL DICOM ID MWM
of patient
information CL DICOM MPPS
DX CL SYNAPSE RIS
CONNECT
DICOM PPS function*1

Ordering function (Synapse RIS)
Energy subtraction function
Make sure to install this function
when XU-D1 is connected.
X-ray
controller
CL X ONLINE
X-CON control function
P-Console
CL SOFT FOR
POCKET ID CL
Portable exposure function
Precise
enlargement CR PRECISE
image
ENLARGEMENT
display
Function to present displayed images

and their additional information on a
capacity-enhanced monitor.
QA ROI
CR QA ROI
measurement MEASUREMENT
Function to display, based on the ROI

determined on an image, width and
height of the ROI, as well as its mean
pixel value, median pixel value,
standard deviation and area.
CL RETAKE
ANALYSIS
2.
REFERENCE
Each option key is supplied on one dedicated CD for each product.
Click

with the option key for installation.
00000416.EPS
3.
Click
u NOTE u
Function for storage/calculation of

exposure/mis-exposure image
information.
*1 This option can be used only by combining it with CL DICOM

ORDER MWM or CL DICOM ID MWM.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817

DICOM worklist function (acquiring

only patient information)
Energy
subtraction CL ES
processing
Other
Insert an option key CD into the PC.

window will be displayed some times. Perform steps 2. and 3. as
well.
4.
5.

To install other optional keys, replace the CD and repeat
steps 2. to 4. above.
IN-B28
4.1 CL-AP Startup

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366

356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
u NOTE u
Verify the normal startup of the CL.

After the completion of startup verification, exit the AP.
Install the AP key after all optional keys have been installed accordingly.
This is because once an optional key is installed, the AP key becomes
invalidated requiring thus the AP key to be reinstalled.
1.
372
menu, select Programs, Fuji Film, and
then FCR.
The CL opening window appears on the display. After about two
minutes, the CL-AP starts up.
REFERENCE
information is generated to define the encryption key.
The associated registry information is generated when the AP key is
installed.
1.
From the
371
Version A software

NOTE
2.
Click
IN000025.EPS
Version B software
IN000127.EPS
00000419.EPS
3.
Click
4.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
IN-B29
4.1 CL-AP Startup
u NOTE u
If the above window does not open or an error display appears,
note the displayed error code and the applicable remedy, and then
make necessary corrections to achieve AP startup.
See 1. Error Code Table in MT: Machine
Troubleshooting.
2.
Click
in the
(or
menu.
The exit window opens.
3.
REFERENCE
To shut down both the CL-AP and Windows, click [OK] without
pressing the <Shift> key.
To shut down the CL-AP only, click [OK] while holding down the
<Shift> key.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
IN-B30
Follow the workflow below to perform settings for the CL using the
Service Utility.
MU000035.EPS
NOTE

(for non-Japanese versions only)
REFERENCE
If you cannot complete step 2 from the initial window within a
steps to start the Service Utility:

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
1.
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
1. To exit the AP, choose Shut Down from the

359
370
371
) menu.
372
2. Click
Click

left and upper right corners within a period of 3 seconds.
3. From the
Fuji Film, and FCR.
Fuji Film, and FCR.
2.
(or
3.
MU000031.EPS
00000404.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
IN-B31
4.

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
Make a date format selection by double-clicking

371
372
Complete setup concerning CL system information and IDT functionality

as directed in this section.
2.
3.
for

0: Japanese date (S62.10.07) [Default]

1: ANSI long date (1987.OCT.07)
2: ANSI short date (1987.10.07)
3: American long date (OCT.07.1987)
4: American short date (10.07.1987)
5: European long date (07.OCT.1987)
6: European short date (07.10.1987)
u NOTE u
Click the
sign within
Use System Common Date Format to specify the date format.

If you change the date format, the following items of information
are changed to match the newly selected format.
Setting the system information
1.
Enter setup data as directed below.
Click
in the Setup
Date output on film

Format for birth date input
Date displayed by CL-AP
Other date indications
The CL system information setup items appear.
Items for CL system setup

Make a hospital name entry (one-byte characters) by doubleclicking
for
u NOTE u
Use Institute/Site Name Strings to enter a hospital name string
of one-byte characters for use in the CL system.
The default hospital name is FUJI FILM HOSPITAL. Change
this entry to a hospital name string of one-byte characters as
defined by a specific hospital.
You can enter a string of up to 60 characters.
Set the IP size unit system (inch or metric) for
.
u NOTE u
00000132.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Select this key to specify whether to display 3543cm (14"17")

and 3535cm (14"14") images in the inch or metric system.
IN-B32
Use
to specify the language to be
used.
0: Japanese
1: English
2: German
3: French
4: Spanish
5: Italian
6: Swedish
7: Finnish
8: Danish
9: Norwegian
10: Korean
11: Chinese Simplified
12: Chinese Traditional
13: Portuguese

14: Polish

15: Hungarian

16: Czech

17: Russian

18: Slovene

19: Turkish

Setting the IDT functionality
1.

.
window.
IDT/Console function setup items
u NOTE u
Do not select 18: Slovene because software version V7.0 (B)
Double-click
for
to enter a hospital name
(consisting of two-byte characters).

00000160.EPS
u NOTE u
Use Institute/Site Name in Two-Byte Characters to enter a
hospital name string of two-byte characters for use in the CL
system.
The default hospital name is
. Change this entry
to a hospital name string of two-byte characters as defined by a
specific hospital.
You can enter a string of up to 15 two-byte characters.
2.
For details of the setup items, see 3.6 Configuration Details

5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION under MU: Maintenance Utility.
3.
is
. If not, set it so.
5.

saved.
For connection to an RU (XG-1 RU) or 356/357/359/36X/37X,

make sure that the setting for
Edit the IDT functionality setup as needed.
4.
Click
Change the other items of system information as needed.

For details of other setup items, see 3.4 Configuration
Details 1. IMAGE MODALITY under MU: Maintenance
Utility.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
IN-B33

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
TPS 9415 TD15

359
370
371
372
Set the LUT file as follows to optimize the image display of the monitor
that is being used.
1.
Click [LUT] on the "IIP Service Utility" window.
IN000115.EPS
2.
Select the name of the display monitor that is actually being

used and click


TPS 9416 TD15
TPS 9416TD15_2
PRESTO! (B/W)
SL-IC300 (monochrome)
PRESTO! (Color)
SL-IC300 (color)
: Ikegami 1k landscape monitor
ikegami MDM2130
: EIZO 15" LCD monitor with
nanao L350P
a touch panel (model L350P-TS)
nanao L351P
a touch panel (model L351P-TS)
nanao SL-IC200
nanao L362T
a touch panel (model L362T)
: Linear (straight line gradation) LUT
Linear LUT
nanao Radiforce GS310-CLG : LCD monitor SL-IC300
: LCD monitor SL-IC300 (color monitor)
nanao Radiforce R31
: 17 color LCD monitor (model L568)
nanao L568M
: EIZOx 17 LCD monitor with
nanao L560T-C
a touch panel (model L560T-C)
nanao Radiforce G22-CL
nanao Radiforce GS220
nanao Radiforce GS210-ECN : LCD monitor (3M monochrome monitor)
: LCD monitor (3M color monitor)
nanao Radiforce RX320
You are returned to the IIP Service Utility window.
u NOTE u
To use a nanao L351P (model L351P-TS) with the CL software A08
or earlier install the LUT file on the FD provided with the LCD
monitor.
IN000129.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
IN-B34
3.

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372


menu database must be replaced following individual procedures.
u NOTE u
Pay attention to the fact that exposure menu settings will revert to the
default if a menu database is replaced.
For V7.0 or earlier
1.
Insert the CL-AP CD into the PC.

RI0000428.EPS
NOTE
IN000116.EPS
2.

00000301.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
IN-B35
4.

u NOTE u
5.

When English (U.S.) was selected as the language to be installed:
IN0000954.EPS
IN0000957.EPS

IN0000955.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
IN0000955.EPS
IN-B36

7.

8.
IN0000956.EPS

When English (U.S.) was selected for the language to be

installed:
IN0000957.EPS
IN0000955.EPS
6.
u NOTE u
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
IN-B37
3.
For V7.1 or later
1.

NOTE
double-click the execution file (Setup: bat) in the CD.
IN000116.EPS
2.
RI0000428.EPS
4.

u NOTE u
00000301.EPS
RI0000472.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
IN-B38
5.
6.

Enter the number for a desired image processing parameter

(for film/for monitor) and press the <Enter> key.
A window opens asking whether or not to use the FNC (Flexible
Noise control processing) parameter.

installed
RI0000471.ai

IN0000957.EPS
When a language other than English (U.S.) was selected as

the language to be installed
RI0000472.ai

IN0000955.EPS
7.
u NOTE u
IN0000956.EPS


8.

RI0000472.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
9.
IN-B39
4.3 Configuration Settings for LP Connection
4.4 CL Settings for Connection to Other

Equipment
4.3 Configuration Settings for LP

Connection
XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
Set the configuration used when connecting an LP to the CL.

See 2. Software Setup in CL + Local Printer (E-i/f Connection)
under OE1: Connecting the CL to Other Connected Equipment.
XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
Perform necessary settings for connecting the equipment shown in the

table below to the CL.
Connected equipment
Function
Ref.
Local Printer
E-i/f Connection
OE1
HI-C/QA-WS/OD-F
FINP: Image Input/Output
OE2
HI-C655/QA-WS/FCR VIEW
DICOM CR Storage
OE3
Other makers equipment
DICOM CR Storage :
Transfer of Processed Images
OE4
FN-PS551/DRYPIX/FM-DPL
DICOM Print
OE5
FN-PS551 or 5000 Series
FINP : Print Output
OE6
RIS/IDC4
ID Online
OE7
RIS
DICOM MWM/DICOM PPS
OE8
Archiver
DICOM Storage Commitment

Push
OE9
QA-WS
Transfer of ES Images
OE10
X-Ray Controller
Serial Connection
OE12
Two or more CLs
Cluster Connection
OE15
Other makers equipment
DICOM MG Storage :
Transfer of Digital
Mammograms
OE16
Removable Media Storage
DICOM Media Storage
OE17
POCKET id Console
Portable exposure function
OE18
Web Query function
OE19
Ordering
OE26
DICOM Server
Image reprint function
OE20
PDI
CD-R write function
OE22
DAP
Dose-area product meter
OE23
Precise enlargement function
OE24
QA ROI measurement function
OE25
Synapse Server
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
9000
364
IN-B40
4.5 Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader Connection

Connection
XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
When using the barcode reader or magnetic card reader, perform the
following connection and setup.
Barcode reader connection and setup
For details on the connection, see Appendix 3 Connecting
the Barcode Reader [Option].
Magnetic card reader connection and setup

For details on the connection, see Appendix 4 Setting Up the
Magnetic Card [Option].
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
IN-B41
4.6 Configuration Settings for IR (5000plus series) Connection
4.6 Configuration Settings for IR

(5000plus series) Connection
Explained below are the CL setup procedures to be followed when
transferring images from the IR to the CL.

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
1.
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
Start up the CL Service Utility mode.

See 1. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility under

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
1.
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
Click the Setup Configuration Item button.
4.6.4 Setups Necessary for Exchanging ID

Information
4.6.5 IDT CONNECTION (Patient Information

Sharing Function) Setup
00000404.EPS
2.
Click


IN000056.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
IN-B42
3.
Click
5.
Make the following settings on the Application Entity List

window.
The [New Node] window opens.

I
II
IN000039.EPS
4.
Select
of the Add Node box and click

.
The Application Entity List window opens.

IN000040.EPS
I. Enter the CL Application Entity Name (DICOM_IIP).

II. Enter the CL Port Number (21760).
6.
Click
REFERENCE
DICOM_IIP and 21760 are the 5000 series defaults values set
when it is shipped from factory.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
IN-B43
7.
Make the following settings on the DICOMSetup window.

VI
VII

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
1.
Click
Setup Configuration Item window.
2.
Click
II
III
9000
364
359
370
371
372
on the
The New Node window opens.
IV
IN000042.EPS
IN000041.EPS
I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
VI.
VII.
8.
3.
Select PrivateUnstandardizedCRStorage.
Select SCP.
Select JPEG Lossless.
Select ST&HQ. Select SH when the 5000MA is connected.
Select HQ/SH.
To handle two-byte characters, check here.
Select OTHER.
Click
Enter the IR host name (fcr5501-n ) in the

field and the IR IP address
(172.116.0.2) in the
field,
respectively.
u NOTE u
The default host name for each IR is as follows:
5000/5000R/5000MA/
: fcr5000-n
5501/5501D/5502D/XU-D1 : fcr5501-n
You are returned to the Application Entity List window.
9.
Click
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
4.
Select
in the Add Node box and click
IN-B44
5.
Enter DICOM_IR for the IR Application Entity Name.
7.
Makes the following settings on the DICOMSetup window.

V
I
II
III
IV
IN000044.EPS
I.
II.
III.
IV.
Select SCU.
Select a destination for film output.
Select IIP when connecting an LP to the CL and FCR5000
when connecting an LP to the IR.
V. Select BUILTIN or CASSETTE.
5000/5000R/5000MA
: CASSETTE
5501/5501D/XU-D1/5520D : BUILTIN
IN000081.EPS
u NOTE u
The default Application Entity Name for each IR is DICOM_IR.
6.
Click
u NOTES u
When the XU-D1 is connected, do not select FCR5000 in the

FilmOutput box because the XU-D1 does not support LP output.
When IIP has been selected for IV, with an LP connected also to
the 5000 plus, make configuration settings (EQUIP file) for the
5000 plus PRINT function set to Local_R.
8.
Click
9.
Click

010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
IN-B45
4.6.4 Setups Necessary for Exchanging ID Information

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
4.
Makes the following settings on the FINP Setup window.
372
u NOTE u
These setups can be omitted for the cassette-type IR. When omitted,
FINP110 will interacts between IR and CL.
II
1.
Click
2.
Click
(host name of other connected equipment) on

the Setup Configuration Item window.
.
The [New Node] window opens.
3.
Make sure that

Node box. Click
has been selected in the Add

.
IN000046.EPS
I.
Select
II. Select BUILTIN or CASSETTE.

5000/5000R/5000MA
: CASSETTE
5501/5501D/5502D/XU-D1 : BUILTIN
5.
IN000045.EPS
Click
The FINP Setup window opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
IN-B46
4.6.5 IDT CONNECTION (Patient Information Sharing

Function) Setup
XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
372
When two or more CLs are connected in the same system, make
settings so that the patient information can be shared by all CLs
connected.
1.
Select Save from the Config (F) menu of the Setup

For the procedure used for patient information sharing function

setup, see 3.13 Patient Information Sharing Function Setup
under MU: Maintenance Utility.
IN000047.EPS
IN000048.EPS
2.
Click
The setup data will be saved.
3.
Select Close from the Config (F) menu.

You are returned to the Service Utility mode window.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
IN-B47

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
2.
Make the following selector settings.

I
372
II
To connect a built-in device to the CL, register it to the selector. When

connecting a cassette device, it needs not be registered because it has
been registered as the default.
III
u NOTE u
IV
Two built-in devices and eight at maximum of each of 5000plus

cassette-type devices can be connected respectively to the CL.
1.
VI
Click the Selector Setting button on the Service Utility

window.
VII
IN000050.EPS
I.
II.
III.
IV.
IN000049.EPS
V.
VI.
VII.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Select an unregistered Selector tab.

As the default, a cassette device is registered to the Selector1
tab.
Set the Technique Code paying attention not to set the same
code with other selectors.
Select a device to be added to the selector (use the host name
for selection).
Choose a Reader Type.
5501
Velocity Upright
5502
Enter a maximum of five one-byte characters in the selector button.
This entry field appears when 5501 or 5502 is chosen as Reader
Type.
550x under SYSTEM CONFIG - CSL/IDT FUNCTION, choose
Yes if you wish that the exposure mode (Auto IP Shelter mode) be
notified automatically to the built-in type equipment (predetermined
to the selector) and No to manually notifying it of the exposure
mode.
To restore the initially selected status when the CL was started,
from the selector that is now being edited, turn the radio button ON.
IN-B48
3.
If no cassette device (including CR-IR346RU) is connected,

delete as follows the cassette device registered to the
selector as the default.
Version B software
1. Select the Selector1 tab.

2. Change the Technique Code to -1.
4.
Click
5.
Click the Exit Service Utility button.

The Service Utility mode will exit and you are returned to the
desktop screen.
REFERENCE
The window shown below represents an example of user display
where one each of cassette device and built-in device have been
set in the selector.
Version A software
Selector
Selector
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
IN000130.EPS
IN000051.EPS
IN-B49

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
Setups necessary for the IR

Set the CPU90E board information as follows.
372
1.
Click
on the
Use the procedure described below to perform network settings

necessary for transferring image processing parameters from the CL to
the IR.
With software versions A02 and A03, image processing parameters are
handled via the CPU90E board. For this reason, be sure to connect a
network cable to the CPU90E board.
With CL software version A04 or later, image processing parameters are
handled via the CPU90F board making it unnecessary to perform
settings at this step.
REFERENCE
Image processing parameter transfer refers to a user utility function that
is responsible for matching the CL image processing parameters with
those for the IR. With this function, you can overwrite the IR image
processing parameter data with the CL image processing parameter
data.
Setups necessary for the CL
IN000038.EPS
2.
Click
NETWORK CONFIG THIS HOST (IIP) settings have already been

made in 4.6.2.
IN000042.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
IN-B50
3.
7.
Enter the CPU90E board host name in
Make the following settings on the DICOMSetup window.

IV
and the IP address (e.g.:

172.16.0.1) of the IR CPU90E board in
.
I
II
III
u NOTE u
The default CPU90E board host name for each IR is as follows.
5000: fcr5000
5501: fcr5501
4.
5000R: fcr5000
XU-D1: fcr55es
5000MA: fcr5000
5502D: fcr5501
IN000054.EPS
Select
in the Add Node box and click
I.
II.
III.
IV.
5.
Enter the Application Entity Name of the CPU90E board

side.
8.
Select SCU.
Select BUILTIN or CASSETE.
5000/5000R/5000MA
: CASSETE
5501/5501D/5502D/XU-D1 : BUILTIN
Click
9.
Click
IN000053.EPS
6.
Click

010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
IN-B51
Saving configuration and exiting the Service Utility mode
1.
Select Save from the Config (F) menu of the Setup


XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
Connection verification
Connection between CL and IR
Connection to other equipment units
Output image (by causing the printer to generate a film output)
Setup file backup
Back up the CL setup file.
IN000047.EPS
See 7.1 Backing Up the CL Setup File under

7. Setup File Backup and RU Error Log Verification/Deletion
in IN-A: Installation One RU Connection.
u NOTE u
If you intend to connect the RU or CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X in a later
procedure, do not back up the CL setup file at this stage.
IN000048.EPS
2.
Click
3.

010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
IN-B52

This section shows how to set up the CL that serves as the RU master
IIP to transfer images to the CL.
For installation of a single CL, follow the procedure described herein to
perform necessary settings for a CL that is to be used as the RU master
IIP. When two or more CLs are to be installed, perform settings for a CL
that will serve as the RU master IIP, and then perform 4.7.8 Settings
Necessary for Connection of Two or More CLs for the 2nd CL or later.
The subsequent explanations are given on the presumption that three
RUs are connected to one CL.
IP address: 172.16.1.20
CL
(RU master IIP) (to be changed to 172.16.1.21
later)
CL*1
TCP/IP
For RU connection setup, perform the following steps:

RU
(1st unit)
RU
(2nd unit)
RU
(3rd unit)
4.7.6 Setting Up IDT CONNECTION

(patient information sharing function)
Host name: RU1

Host name: RU2
Host name: RU3
IP address: 172.16.1.1 IP address: 172.16.1.2 IP address 172.16.1.3
*1 CL that does not serve as the RU master IIP (to be added in section 4.7.8).
IN000069.EPS
REFERENCE
You must perform an extremely complicated procedure to set up the CL
as the RU master IIP for the connection of multiple RUs. It is therefore
recommended that you read the function descriptions in the following
reference sections in advance:
See 5. Relationship between RU and CL, and 6. RU-CL N:N
Connection Function Overview under MD: Machine
Description.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)

More CLs
4.7.9 Checking Connections and Backing Up Setup

Files
IN-B53

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
4.
Click
372
Register the network information and equipment information

(CONNECTING EQUIPMENT) about the three RUs with the CLs
Service Utility.
Registering the network information
1.

IN000042.EPS
5.
In the
field, enter the host name of
the first RU (RU1). In the
field,
enter the IP address (172.16.1.1).

00000404.EPS
2.
3.
6.
Choose
.

Click
in the [Add Node] area and then click
and then click
The [FRUP setup] window opens.
IN000082.EPS
7.
Check
in the [Attribute] area (
).
IN000071.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
IN-B54
8.
In the
field, enter RU1.
REFERENCE
The character string entered need not be the same as the host
name.
9.
Click
2.
The [Connecting Equipment] window opens.
3.
Register the equipment information as directed below:

I
The network information registration is completed for the first RU.
II
10. Register the network information about the second and third
RUs by performing steps 3. through 9.
III
Network information about the second RU

: RU2
Host name
: 172.16.1.2
IP address
Button Caption : RU2
IV
IN000072.EPS
Network information about the third RU

: RU3
Host name
: 172.16.1.3
IP address
Button Caption : RU3
I. Choose READER.
II. Choose RU1.
III. Choose RU2.

IV. Choose RU3.
u NOTE u
Do not register 5000plus series equipment for Connecting
Equipment.
Registering the equipment information

(CONNECTING EQUIPMENT)
1.
Click
In the [Setup Configuration Item] window, click

.
4.
Click
The equipment information registration is now completed.

The system returns you to the [Setup Configuration Item] window.
IN000083.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
IN-B55
Saving the configuration data and exiting the Service

Utility
1.
From the [Config (F)] menu in the [Setup Configuration Item]

window, choose [Save].

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
u NOTES u
The RU M-Utility installation procedure is described herein on the
assumption that the RU application CD version A07 or later is used for
the RU M-Utility (PC-MUTL hereinafter) that is to be installed as
follows. A different installation procedure will be required if a version
earlier than that mentioned above is used.
When the OS used is Windows XP, use RU software of A09 or later.
When the OS used is Windows Vista, use RU software of A13 or later.
Make sure to start the procedure below with the CL-AP quit accordingly.
IN000047.EPS
A window opens, asking whether you want to save the

configuration data.
1.
Have on hand the CD that is supplied with the RU. Insert this
CD into the PC.
After a while, the following window opens:
IN000048.EPS
2.
Click
The system saves your setup data entries.
3.
4.
From the [Config (F)] menu, choose [Close].

The system returns you to the Service Utility window.
00000214.EPS
Exit the Service Utility.
2.
Click
The RU M-Utility installation start window opens.
00000185.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
IN-B56
3.
Click
The [FCR TOOL Setup/Ready to Install...] window opens.
6.
Click
The [CR-IR 346RU MAINTENANCE UTILITY] main menu window

opens.
00000187.EPS
4.
Click
Main menu window

When the installation terminates, the [FCR TOOL Setup/

Completing the ...] window opens.
00000188.EPS
5.
Click
The system returns you to the [CR-IR 346RU MAINTENANCE

TOOLS] window.
00000215.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
IN-B57
2.

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
With the main menu, conduct the following check:

I
371
372
II
Install the RU-AP for the first RU as directed below:

Verifying the network connection
between the CL and RU
00000426.EPS
I. Enter the RU host name (RU1).

II. Check that 172.16.1.10 is entered.
u NOTES u
Verifying the network connection between the CL and RU

Before installing the RU-AP, check that the CL and RU are networkconnected. The RU is factory preset to an IP address of 172.16.1.10.
u NOTES u
Since the host name entry made in step I. above becomes the formal
RU host name, be sure to enter a correct host name here.
Do not change RU IP ADDR to a setting other than 172.16.1.10.
For the RU host name change procedure, see
Appendix 8 Changing the RU Host Name.
When the OS used is Windows XP, use RU software of A09 or later.

When the OS used is Windows Vista, use RU software of A13 or later.
Make sure that the power cables of all the three RUs are connected to
the circuit breaker.
Perform the procedure below with the CL-AP shut down accordingly.
Exit all APs (particularly Windows Explorer) other than the RU M-Utility.
1.
Turn ON only the first RU. Leave the second and third RUs
OFF.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
IN-B58
3.
Click
The system beings to check for the connection to the RU.
4.

Install the RU-AP on the first RU as directed below:
Main menu window
Verify the network connection to the RU.

The connection is normal if the following message appears four times:
REFERENCE
The time<10ms and TTL=128 portions of the above message
vary with the network status. Even when their values vary, the
connection is normal as far as the message appears four times.
u NOTE u
Be sure to verify the network connection. If you install the RU-AP
without completing the proper network verification procedure, an
error occurs when the RU restarts.
REFERENCE
If the connection to the RU cannot be verified, check whether the
following causes exist:
Cable connection
Check again.
RU or CL network board Restart.
Other
If you still cannot verify the connection, initialize the RU memory so
as to return the IP address recorded in the RU main unit to the
default value, and reestablish the network connection.
For details on the procedure for initializing the memory
to reestablish the network connection to the CL, see
3.1 CL/RU Connection Recovery Procedure to be
Performed upon RU Memory Initialization under
5.
Click
at the upper right corner of the command prompt
window.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
1.
2.
00000502.EPS
In the main menu window, click [INSTALL].

The [Insert the CD-ROM into a drive] window opens.
Since the CD containing the RU-AP is already inserted into

the CD-ROM drive, just click
The RU-AP version selection window opens.
3.
Select an RU-AP version (A05 or later) from the list and then
click
List
00000190.EPS
The [READER UNIT SETTING] window opens.
IN-B59
4.
IV. Enter the subnet mask (255.255.0.0 in the above setup example).
V. If necessary, change the settings indicated in the table below:
u NOTE u
The data set up as follows will be written on the RU-Config file and
then installed in the RU together with the RU-AP.
For the procedure used when changing the setup data
after installation, see Appendix 2 Setting the RU-Config.
I
II
III
IV
V
Configuration
Setup Item
Setup
Range
IN000063 EPS
I.
Enter the formal IP address of the first RU (172.16.1.1 in the

above setup example).
II. Enter the IP address of the CL (172.16.1.21 in the above setup
example). Because the installation procedure hereafter can be
simplified, enter 172.16.1.21 (changed IP address), instead of
172.16.1.20.
III. Enter the same IP address as CL IP ADDR (172.16.1.21).
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Remarks
ROUTER IP
ADDR
IP address
0.0.0.0
setup range
Route address
SECURE
TELNET HOST
IP ADDR
IP address
0.0.0.0
setup range

TELNET.
SECURE
TELNET
NETWORK
ADDR
IP address
0.0.0.0
setup range

available for the TELNET.
EQUIPMENT
CODE
AZ
Machine serial ID code of the RU.

(This code is printed on film.)
RANGE OF
ERASE MODE
ERASE 1
ERASE 1, ERASE 1
ERASE 2
Specifies the erasure mode range.

be selected.
ERASE 1, ERASE 2:
ERASE MODE
TIMEOUT
0 to 999
(sec)
060
Erase mode timeout setting.

reader is used.
6 : Type VI
ON

ON : Alarm sounds.
ON

ON : Alarm sounds.
OFF : Alarm does not sound.
IP ERASE TYPE
5, 6
(FOR NO
6
BARCODE)
VI
Default
ALARM
(CASSETTE
SET)
ALARM
(MODE
SWITCH)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
WARNING OF
OVERXRAY
LOG &
MESSAGE LOG &
MESSAGE
LOG
NONE

warning method.
log and message.
IN-B60
VI. Select OFF.
REFERENCE
The AUTO UPDATE function will automatically have the RU
download RU data from the FTP server if there is a discrepancy
between CL FTP server data and RU FLASH ROM data.
See 5.2 Mechanism of RU-AP/RU-Config AUTO UPDATE
in MD: Machine Description.
5.
Click
RU-AP installation will start. (It completes within a few minutes.)
XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
For the second RU, install the RU-AP as directed below. For the third
RU, perform the same installation procedure as for the second unit.
1.
Check to see that the first RU has been turned OFF and then
turn ON the second RU.
Leave the third RU OFF.
2.
In the same manner as for the first RU, verify the network
connection to the second RU.
CAUTION
process. Never turn OFF the power to the RU or press the
reset switch at this time, otherwise the RU CPU board can be
damaged.
u NOTE u
* For the third RU, enter "RU3" in the RU NAME box.
Do not operate the CL-AP and RU-UTILITY while RU-AP

installation is being performed.
00000611.EPS
REFERENCE
6.
The second RU is factory preset to the same IP address

(172.16.1.10) as for the first RU. Use this IP address for verification
purposes.
.
7.
Turn OFF the power to the first RU.
3.
In the main menu window, click [INSTALL]. Install the RU-AP

on the second RU in the same manner as for the first RU.
CAUTION
process. Never turn OFF the power to the RU or press the reset
switch at this time, otherwise the RU CPU board can be damaged.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
IN-B61
REFERENCE
In the [READER UNIT SETTING] window, perform setup for the second
RU as indicated below. (Enter data I through IV as shown below. Edit
data V as needed. For box VI, select OFF.)
READER UNIT SETTING window
XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
Change the CL main units IP address from 172.16.1.20 to 172.16.1.21.

I
II
III
IV
For the change procedure, see Appendix 9 Changing the CL IP

Address.
u NOTE u
When changing the IP address, pay due attention to the netmask
settings. You might have to change the netmask size depending on the
IP address to be set up.
4.7.6 Setting Up IDT CONNECTION (patient

information sharing function)
XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
Set up IDT CONNECTION in the Service Utility mode.
u NOTE u
VI
IN000075.EPS
4.
5.
Install the RU-AP on the third RU in the same manner as for

the second RU.
Be sure to set up IDT CONNECTION even if only one CL is connected

in the same system, otherwise images will not be transferred from the
RU to the CL, resulting thus in an error occurrence (error code: 31418).
For the IDT CONNECTION setup procedure, see 3.13 Patient
Information Sharing Function Setup under MU: Maintenance
Utility.
Exit the RU M-Utility mode.
XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
u NOTE u
(Applicable only for RU-AP version A06 or earlier.)
If the selector has been set to OFF with respect to the RU, perform
setup so as to permit cassette equipment use.
If the RU-AP version installed is A06 or earlier, be sure to start the CL-AP
to have the FTP server RU data de downloaded to the RU FLASH ROM.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
For the selector setup procedure, see 12. Setting the Selectors
Selector Setting in MU: Maintenance Utility.
IN-B62

More CLs
XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
Perform patient information sharing setup for the second and

subsequent CLs.
For details on the patient information sharing setup procedure,
see 3.13 Patient Information Sharing Function Setup in
u NOTES u
Perform patient information sharing setup for the CL serving as the RU
master IIP (first CL) and the CLs not serving as the RU master IIP
(second and subsequent CLs). If setup is not completed for both types
of CLs, images cannot be transferred from the RUs.
In situations where two or more CLs are connected, the second and
subsequent CLs are entitled to receive images from the RUs simply
when you complete patient information sharing setup for them.
Patient information sharing setup
First CL
(RU master IIP)
Transfer to CL where
the associated
ID is registered.
4.7.9 Checking Connections and Backing Up Setup Files

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
Connection checkout
Connection between CL and RU
Connection to other equipment units
Setup file backup
CL setup file
RU setup file (RU master IIP only)
RU error log checkout and deletion (RU master IIP only)
For details of each item, see 6. Checkout Procedures and
under IN-A: Installation One RU Connection.
u NOTE u
If you intend to connect the CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X in a later
procedure, do not back up the CL setup file at this stage. However,
the RU setup file must be backed up at this stage.
Second CL
(not a RU master IIP)
Image
TCP/IP
RU
RU
RU
Installed
IN000080.EPS
Even when two or more of the installed CLs serve as RU master IIPs,
be sure that patient information sharing setup is completed with
respect to each other. The reason is that a certain such CL may
receive images from RUs that it does not manage.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
IN-B63
4.8 Setup for CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X

Connection
This section describes the CL setup procedures for image transfer from
CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X to CL. The setup steps to be performed are
outlined below:

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
When installing the CL at an IP address setting other than 172.16.1.20,

change the CLs IP address by performing the procedure specified
below:
See Appendix 9 Changing the CL IP Address.

function) Setup
u NOTE u
When changing the IP address, pay attention to the netmask setting.
It may be necessary to change the netmask size depending on the IP
address to be set.


More CLs
4.8.6 CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X Setup
XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
With the CL Service Utility, register the network information and

equipment information (CONNECTING EQUIPMENT) about the
CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X.
Registering the network information
1.
2.
9000
364
See 1. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility in

00000404.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
IN-B64
3.
Click
and then
6.
Choose
in the [Add Node] area and then click

.
The FRUP Setup window opens.
IN000071.EPS
4.
Click
IN000082.EPS
7.
In the Attribute area, check as directed below (
).
For CR-IR356/357/359/362/363/368 :
For CR-IR364/366/367/370/371/372 :
8.
In the
field, enter RU11.
REFERENCE
The above entry need not always be the same as the host name.
IN000042.EPS
5.
In the
field, enter the host name of
the CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X.
In the
(172.16.1.11).
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
field, enter the IP address
9.
Click
Network information registration is completed.
10. If you connect more than one unit, repeat steps 3. through 9.
IN-B65
Registering the equipment information (CONNECTING

EQUIPMENT)
1.
In the Setup Configuration Item window, click

.
u NOTE u
Do not register a 5000 plus series equipment for the Connecting
Equipment.
4.
Click
Equipment information registration is now completed.

The system returns you to the Setup Configuration Item window.
Saving the configuration information
1.
From the Config (F) menu in the Setup Configuration

Item window, choose Save.
IN000083.EPS
2.
Click
The Connecting Equipment window opens.
3.
IN000047.EPS

saved.
Register the equipment information as directed below:

I
II
III
IN000048.EPS
IN000072.EPS
I. Choose READER.
II. Select the CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37Xs host name (e.g., RU11).
III. If you connect two or more units of the CRIR356/357/359/36X/37X, select their host names from the
Equipment #2 and subsequent fields.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
2.
Click
IN-B66

function) Setup
XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
With the Service Utility, perform IDT CONNECTION setup.
u NOTE u
Be sure to perform IDT CONNECTION setup even if the system
contains only one CL. If you do not perform IDT CONNECTION setup,
an error (error code: 31418) occurs because the RU does not transfer
images to the CL.

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
When connecting the CR-IR364/366/367/370/371 to the CL, register it

with the selector. When connecting the CR-IR356/357/359/362/363/368,
you do not have to perform a registration procedure because it has
been factory registered prior to shipment.
1.
In the Service Utility window, click the Selector Setting

button.
For the IDT CONNECTION setup procedure, see 3.13 Patient

Information Sharing Function Setup in MU: Maintenance Utility.
IN000049.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
IN-B67
2.
VII. To restore the initially selected status when the CL was started,
from the selector that is now being edited, turn the radio button ON.
Perform selector setup as directed below:

I
3.
II
III
1. Choose the Selector 1 tab.

2. Change the Technique Code to -1.
IV
V
If the CL does not process cassettes of cassette-type

equipment, such as XG-1 RU, CR-IR356/357/359/362/363/368,
or 5000 plus
(if you do not intend to perform the IP registration
procedure), complete the following steps:
4.
Click
The system returns you to the Service Utility window.
VI
5.
If you connect another unit of the CR-IR364/366/367/370/371/

372, repeat steps 2. through 4.
6.
Click the Exit Service Utility button.
VII
IN000050.EPS
I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
VI.
Choose a Selector tab for which no equipment is registered.

For the Selector 1 tab, cassette-type equipment is registered by
default.
Set a Technique Code that is not the same as for the other
selectors.
Set the equipment to be added to the currently chosen selector
(by selecting a host name).
Choose a Reader Type.
5501
Velocity Upright
5502
Enter a maximum of five one-byte characters in the selector button.
This entry field appears when 5501 or 5502 is chosen as Reader
Type.
550x under SYSTEM CONFIG - CSL/IDT FUNCTION, choose
Yes if you wish that the exposure mode (Auto IP Shelter mode) be
notified automatically to the built-in type equipment (predetermined
to the selector) and No to manually notifying it of the exposure
mode.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
The Service Utility exists, returning you to the desktop screen.
IN-B68

More CLs
XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
4.8.6 CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X Setup

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
372
Network setup for CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X main unit
Perform patient information sharing setup for the second and

subsequent CLs.
For details on the patient information sharing setup procedure,
see 3.13 Patient Information Sharing Function Setup in
u NOTES u
Perform patient information sharing setup for the CL serving as the RU
master IIP (first CL) and the CLs not serving as the RU master IIP
(second and subsequent CLs). If setup is not completed for both types
of CLs, images cannot be transferred from the RUs.
In situations where two or more CLs are connected, the second and
subsequent CLs are entitled to receive images from the RUs simply
when you complete patient information sharing setup for them.
From the CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X operation panel, set the following

items of information:
RU IP Address
: CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X main unit IP

address.
FTP-Serv. IP Address : FTP server IP address. The CLs IP address
should basically be set.
: Netmask.
Netmask Address
Gateway IP Address : Gateways IP address. To be set as needed.
For the setup procedure, see IN: Installation of the
CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X Service Manuals, as required.
Patient information sharing setup
First CL
(RU master IIP)
Transfer to CL where
the associated
ID is registered.
Second CL
(not a RU master IIP)
Image
TCP/IP
RU
RU
RU
Installed
IN000080.EPS
Even when two or more of the installed CLs serve as RU master IIPs,
be sure that patient information sharing setup is completed with
respect to each other. The reason is that a certain such CL may
receive images from RUs that it does not manage.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
IN-B69
Installing the RU PC-TOOL
Setting up the RU PC-TOOL
Install the CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37Xs RU PC-TOOL on the CL PC.
NOTE
When the OS used is Windows Vista, use the Windows Vistacompatible RU PC-TOOL.
For the installation procedure, see IN: Installation of the
CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X Service Manuals, as required.
REFERENCE
With the RU PC-TOOL, perform the application installation and

configuration setup procedures for the CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X.
NOTE
When the OS used is Windows Vista, use the Windows Vistacompatible RU application.
For the installation and configuration setup procedures, see
IN: Installation of the CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X Service
Manuals, as required.
The RU PC-TOOL (shown below) is the utility software for

CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X maintenance. Use this software after
installing it on the CL PC.
RU-PC TOOL main menu
IN000123.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
IN-B70

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
Connection verification
Connection between the CL and CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X
See IN: Installation of the CR-IR356/357/359/36X/37X Service
Manuals, as required.
Verify the connection to other equipment.

See OE: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment.
Setup file backup

See 7.1 Backing Up the CL Setup File under 7. Setup File
Backup and RU Error Log Verification/Deletion in
IN-A: Installation One RU Connection.

XG-1 RU 5000plus
362
363
9000
364
355RU
366
356
367
357
368
359
370
371
372
To let the Image Reader (CR-IR356/357/359/364/366/367/370/371/372

only) automatically start upon CL startup, perform the Wake-on-LAN
setup procedure.
See FR8: Wake-on-LAN Setup.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
IN-B71
BLANK PAGE
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
IN-B72
IN-C: Installation Connection to 9000

Series Equipment
010-054-12
11.12.2004 FM4450 (ITC)
IN-CI
IN-C: Installation Connection to 9000 Series Equipment
Control Sheet
Issue date
Revision number
11/12/2004
010-054-12
11.12.2004 FM4450 (ITC)
12
Reason
Revision for software V1.0(C) (FM4450)
Pages affected
All pages
IN-CII
1. CL Installation Conditions [Applicable only in Japan]
010-054-12
11.12.2004 FM4450 (ITC)
IN-C1
BLANK PAGE
010-054-12
11.12.2004 FM4450 (ITC)
IN-C2
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN-I
Control Sheet
Issue date
Revision number
07/20/2002
11/30/2002
03/01/2003
08/20/2003
12/10/2003
05
06
07
08
09

02/20/2004
10
07/30/2004
11

07/30/2004
07/30/2005
07/20/2007
10/31/2008
11/30/2009
11
14
17
19
20

11/30/2009
03/31/2010
20
21

03/31/2010
21
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Reason
Pages affected
I-IV, 3-1, 3-3, 4-2, 4-3, 7-1, 7-6
I-IV, 3-3, 3-4, 5-1, 5-6
I, II, 4-49, 5-4, 6, 7-6, 9-1
I, II, 3-1, 4-2
I, II, 1-1, 1-46, 4-2, 5-3, 5-4, 5-6,
6-4, 7-6, 8-3
All pages
I, II, 1-4, 1-6, 2-1, 3-1, 4-2, 5-1,
5-68, 8-1, 9-1, 9-2
2-24, 5-25
I, II, 5-7, 9-2
I, II, 4-10, 5-1, 5-4
I-IV, 1-1, 68, 5-4, 5, 10-18
I, II, 1-6, 812, 2-1, 3-1, 4-2, 5-1, 6,
7, 8-1, 9-14, 10-5, 7, 8, 10
5-8, 10-6, 9
I, II, 1-1, 4, 6, 7, 9, 10, 2-1, 3-1, 3, 4,
4-13, 6, 10, 5-1, 2, 7-1, 68, 8-1, 2,
5, 7, 8, 10-1, 35, 7, 11-140
1-11, 12
Appx IN-II
BLANK PAGE
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Appx IN-III
BLANK PAGE
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Appx IN-IV
Appendix 1 Installing the Touch Panel Driver
Appendix 1 Installing the Touch

Panel Driver
When using the CD-ROM (previous version)

The window shown below opens when the CD-ROM is inserted
into the PC.
.
Click
This appendix shows the touch panel driver installation and adjustment
procedures to be performed when using a monitor with the touch panel.
When using an L362T monitor for the touch panel, see
Installing the driver (for L362T) and Adjusting the touch
panel (for L362T) to perform necessary procedures.
When using an L560T-C monitor for the touch panel, see
Installing the driver (for L560T-C) and Adjusting the touch
panel (for L560T-C) to perform necessary procedures.

u NOTE u
IN000084.EPS
When using the CD-ROM (new version)

When you insert the CD-ROM into the PC, the following window
automatically opens. Click Install Driver for This Computer. When
the next window opens, click Install Serial Driver.
Be sure to install the Windows 2000 driver.
1.
Insert the driver media (FD or CD) into the PC.
2.
Start up an installation file.

When using the FD
Start up as follows.
III. Specify the file name.

IN000095.EPS
The Elo MonitorMouse for Windows 2000 Setup window

opens in several seconds.
IV. Click here.

00000411.EPS
II. Click here.

I. Click here.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
00000226.EPS
Appx IN1-1
3.
Click
6.
Click

installation.
00000412.EPS
4.
Click

00000418.EPS
7.
Click
8.
u NOTE u
00000413.EPS
If the employed medium is an FD, be sure to remove it from its

drive. If it is left in the drive, the OS does not start up.
u NOTE u
Select the same COM port number as that of the serial port
connected to the PC.
5.
Click

seconds.
Remove the medium from the PCs drive.
9.
Click
The PC restarts and then automatically opens the touch panel

adjustment window.
u NOTE u
00000415.EPS
00000422.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Appx IN1-2
3.
Gently touch the
u NOTE u
problem.
Click

00000316.EPS
4.
Click
u NOTE u
Click
00000321.EPS
1.

adjustments made.
area of the window.

The
mark moves to the lower right area of the window.
(A beep will sound.)
2.
Touch the
The

mark moves to the upper right area of the window.
5.
Deselect
click
) and then
u NOTE u
If a window opens to prompt for FD insertion, click
To set up other functions (e.g. for silencing the alarm sound) of

the touch panel, see the documentation for the touch panel driver.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Appx IN1-3
Installing the driver (for L362T)
4.
u NOTE u
Click
The 3M Software License Agreement window opens.
Be sure to install the Windows 2000/XP driver.
1.
Insert the driver installation CD-ROM into the PC.

IN000303.EPS
5.
Select
and then click

.
A window opens to select a connector type.

IN000299.EPS
2.
6.
Click [Install Software].
Select [Serial (Defa)] and click
IN000304.EPS
The Default Calibration Type window opens.

IN000300.EPS
3.
Click [TouchWare for Windows (95, 98, Me, NT 4, 2000, XP)].
7.
Select [2-point calibration (recommended for most touch)]

and click
IN000301.EPS
The Welcome window opens.
IN000305.EPS
The Serial Installation Type window opens.
IN000302.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN1-4
8.
Adjusting the touch panel (for L362T)
Select [Express Install (Default settings)] and click

.
1.
Double-click
IN000306.EPS
The Setup complete window opens.
2.
Click
IN000307.EPS
9.
Uncheck
click
) and
The Touch Screen Calibration Needed window opens.
10. Click
A window opens asking you to adjust the position to be touched

on the window.
3.
Keep touching the
mark at the lower left corner of the
window for a few seconds.
At the completion of adjusting the touching position, the

mark will appear.
4.
Keep touching the
mark at the upper right corner of
the window for a few seconds.

At the completion of adjusting the touching position, the
mark will appear and the Calibration Complete
window displayed.
IN000308.EPS
11. Remove the driver installation CD-ROM from the CD-ROM

drive.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
5.
Click
The system returns to the TouchWare Properties window.
Appx IN1-5
6.
Installing the driver (for L560T-C)
For Windows 2000/XP
1.
IN000310.EPS
7.
The EIZO Touch Panel Disk Setup window opens.
I.
IN000319.ai
2.
Click Install Touch Ware on the window that opens.
II.
IN000311.EPS
I.
Touch
II. Touch
to set the Touch Mode to [Click on touch].

IN000320.ai
to set the Touch Sound to [System beep on
The Welcome window opens.
touchdown].
8.
Touch
window.
to shut down the TouchWare Properties
To set up other touch-panel-related functions, such as silencing

the click sound, see the manual supplied with the touch panel
driver.
IN000321.ai
3.
Click
IN000322.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN1-6
4.
Select
and then click
The Setup complete window opens.
A window opens to select a connector type.
5.
Select USB and click
.
IN000324.ai
7.
Uncheck
) and click
.
The Touch Screen Calibration Needed window opens.
8.
Click
in the
box.
IN000323.ai
A window opens to select an installation type.
6.
Select [Express Install (Default settings)] and click

.
IN000325.ai
IN000328.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
9.
Remove the driver installation CD-ROM from the PC.
Appx IN1-7
3.
For Windows Vista
1.
Select the Drivers tab and then click Touch Panel Driver
(Windows Vista).
DCL70424.ai
The Touch Panel Driver (Windows Vista) window opens.
DCL70411.ai
2.
Click Execute Launcher.exe.
DCL70414.ai
NOTE
If the AutoPlay window does not open automatically at step 1
above, double-click the execution file (Launcher.exe) in the CD.
4.
Click Install.
The EIZO Touch Panel Disk Setup window opens.
DCL70413.ai
DCL70425.ai
5.
Click
DCL70426.ai
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx IN1-8
6.
Click
9.
Select Custom and click
7.
Select Accept-Installation will continue. and click

.
DCL70430.ai
The Select Components window opens.
10. On the window that opens, select Controller Support and

checkmark only EX II USB Touch Screen Support.
DCL70428.ai
INApp01001.ai
DCL70429.ai
8.
Click
The Setup Type window opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
NOTE
Move the scroll bar up and down to check to see that only EX II
USB Touch Screen Support is checkmarked.
Appx IN1-9
11. Click
The Start Copying Files window opens.
12. Make sure that only EX II USB Touch Screen Support is
displayed for the Controller Support option and then click

[Next].
DCL70431.ai
After completion of the installation processing, the Setup

Complete window opens.
DCL70432.ai
13. Click
The system returns to the Touch Panel Driver (Windows Vista)

window.
14. Click
to close the window.
15. Click [Exit] to exit the EIZO Touch Panel Disk Setup
window.
16. Remove the driver installation CD-ROM from the PC.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN1-10
Adjusting the touch panel (for L560T-C)
6.
For Windows 2000/XP
1.
Keep touching the
mark at the upper right corner of

At the completion of calibrating the touching position, the
Double-click
mark will appear and the Calibration Complete window displayed.
7.
Click
The system returns to the TouchWare Properties window.

IN000326.EPS
2.
Click

on the window.
3.
8.
Touch the
IN000327.ai
9.
window.
I.
mark will appear.
4.
Keep touching the
mark at the lower left corner of
II.

mark will appear.
5.
Touch the
IN000316.EPS
mark at the upper right corner of the
window.
mark will appear.
I.
Select
II. Select
10. Touch
in the Touch Mode box.

in the Touch Sound box.
to shut down the TouchWare Properties
window.
To set up other touch-panel-related functions, such as silencing

the click sound, see the manual supplied with the touch panel
driver.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN1-11
For Windows Vista
6.
NOTE
Check to see that a USB cable is used to make connection between the
PC and a touch panel, and then start working on the necessary task.
1.
Double-click
Click
The system returns to the MT7 Software Control Panel window.
7.
.
DCL70420.EPS
The MT7 Software Control Panel window opens.
8.
DCL70419.ai
2.
Click
I.

on the window.
3.
Keep touching the
II.
4.
Keep touching the
DCL70421.EPS
mark at the upper right corner of the
I.
5.
Keep touching the
Touch
to set the Touch Mode to [Click on touch].
II. Touch some times the button that is in the Touch Sound field until
the
mark at the upper left corner of the
key is activated, so that the touch sound is
set to [System beep on touchdown].
At the completion of adjusting the touching position, the following

appears at the center of the window.
9.
Touch
Panel window.
to shut down the MT7 Software Control
To set up other touch-panel-related functions, such as

silencing the click sound, see the manual supplied with the
touch panel driver.
DCL70434.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN1-12
Appendix 2 Setting the RU-Config
1.

u NOTES u
Verify that Explorer or other application is not running. If any
applications are running, exit them.
Before proceeding to perform the procedure set forth below, exit the
CL-AP.
RU M-Utility is used for RU-Config setup. However, the setup
procedure varies with the employed RU M-Utility version. When the
employed version is 1.2 or later (when RU M-Utility is installed from
RU application CD version A07 or later), you only have to perform
steps 1. through 6.
However, if the employed RU M-Utility version is 1.1 or earlier (when
RU M-Utility is installed from RU application CD version A06 or
earlier), you have to perform all steps.
IV. Click.
II. Click.
When the OS used is Windows XP, the RU M-Utility must be of version

1.4 or later and the RU software, A09 or later.

I. Click.
00000219.EPS

Main menu window
00000215.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN2-1
2.
From the LIST OF EXISTING RU area, click the host name

of the RU whose configuration file is to be set.
RU host name
00000434.EPS
The text color of the EDIT CONFIGURATION button changes

from gray to black.
3.
Click
010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
Appx IN2-2
4.
See the table entitled RU configuration setting list and

change the RU-Config settings.
IV
V
VI
VII
VIII
IX
X
XI
XIII
XIV
XV
IN000086.EPS
Table RU configuration setting list
CL IP ADDR
FTP-SERV
III
IP ADDR
010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
0.0.0.0

TELNET
IP address
setup range
0.0.0.0

available for the TELNET
AZ
RANGE OF
IX ERASE
MODE
ERASE 1
ERASE 1,
ERASE 2
ERASE 1
ERASE MODE
TIMEOUT
IP ERASE
TYPE
XI
(FOR NO
BARCODE)
0 to 999
(sec)
060
XII
II
IP address
setup range
ROUTER IP
ADDR
SECURE
TELNET
VI
HOST IP
ADDR
SECURE
TELNET
VII
NETWORK
ADDR
EQUIPMENT
VIII
CODE
III
RU IP ADDR
Subnet mask
II
Configuration
Setup Item
IV NET MASK
Configuration
No.
Setup Item
Setup
Default
Range
Subnet mask
specification 255.255.0.0
range
IP address
0.0.0.0
setup range
No.
Setup
Range
Default
Remarks
IP address set up
when the RU-AP IP address of the RU.
is installed.
IP address set up
IP address
when the RU-AP IP address of the HOST (CL).
setup range
is installed.
IP address that
is set up during
Subnet mask
RU-AP
FTP server IP address
setup range
installation will
be the default.
IP address
setup range
5, 6
6
ALARM
XII (CASSETTE
SET)
ON
OFF
ON
ALARM
XIII (MODE
SWITCH)
ON
OFF
ON
LOG &
WARNING OF MESSAGE LOG &
XIV
OVER-XRAY LOG
MESSAGE
NONE
AUTO
XV UPDATE
(A07 or later)
ON
OFF
ON
Remarks
Route address
Machine serial ID code of the

RU. (This code is printed on film.)
Specifies the erasure mode range.
be selected.
ERASE 1, ERASE 2:
Erase mode timeout setting
reader is used.
6 : Type VI
ON : Alarm sounds.
ON : Alarm sounds.
warning method.
log and message.
Have the RU automatically
download RU data from the FTP
server if there is a discrepancy
between CL FTP server data
and RU FLASH ROM data.
Appx IN2-3
5.
Click
CL
RU-Config installation will start.
CAUTION
(Applicable only for RU M-Utility version 1.2 or later.)

the RU-Config is being updated.
Never turn OFF the power to the RU or press the reset switch while
the RU panel is illuminated for the RU-Config installation process,
because the RUs CPU board can be damaged.
6.
Click the
Perform steps hereinafter only when the RU M-Utility version used is 1.1
or earlier.
From the
The RU-Config update process ends.
9.
Click
on the CL monitor.
The RU system restarts, making the updated RU-Config settings

effective.
7.
00000433.EPS
After several seconds, the Console Warning window opens.
Fuji Film, and then FCR.

8.
31117 or 31118 can eventually be displayed.
Start the RU (by turning the power ON).

After a while, all the LEDs on the RU panel come on, and the CL
monitor shows a message to indicate that the RU-Config is being
updated.
CAUTION
the RU panel is illuminated, because the RUs CPU board can be
damaged.
00000601.EPS
u NOTE u
Do nothing and wait for a while.
The Console Warning window will disappear.
The RU initialization message appears. The RU becomes
available in about one minute.
RU
!
All the LEDs on the RU panel come on.
010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
00000196.EPS
Appx IN2-4
Appendix 3 Connecting the Barcode Reader [Option]
Appendix 3 Connecting the Barcode

Reader [Option]
This appendix explains about the procedures for connecting and setting
up the barcode reader.
1. Connecting the Barcode

Reader to the CL
Connect a barcode reader to the USB port on the back of the PC. When
the PC is used placing it horizontally, connect the barcode reader to the
bottom port for back connection.
Cable
Just connecting the barcode reader to the PC will set up the driver
automatically making thus it available.
u NOTE u
Because the driver is not set up automatically for Windows XP or
Windows Vista, you have to do it manually.
For how to install the driver, see 4.6 Changing the Barcode
Reader/Magnetic Card Reader Driver Software under
3. Setup for Type B ID Online

Operations
USB port
CL
2. Performing Setup for IP

Barcode Use
Barcode reader
Just connecting the barcode reader to the PC will set up the driver
automatically making thus it available.
00000037.EPS
u NOTES u
After the barcode reader has been connected to the CL, be sure to
restart the OS. Although a window opens immediately after reader
connection to indicate that driver software installation has been
completed, you cannot immediately use the reader because it is not
recognized by the CL-AP yet.
Because the CL system barcode reader sound needs to be produced
only when a barcode is read successfully, it has been designed so that
the PC itself produces a sound. For this reason, the sound produced
by the barcode reader, not only when a barcode is read successfully
but also when it is read unsuccessfully, is disabled for machines when
they are shipped from factory. When it is necessary that the barcode
reader produces a sound for some reason, make the setup accordingly
by reading the barcode described in the section below.
The barcode reader driver is then automatically set to make the
barcode reader operative.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN3-1
BLANK PAGE
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Appx IN3-2
4. DENSO Barcode Reader
<Silencing the buzzer>

Setup started
<Sounding the buzzer>
Sounding the
buzzer three times
Setup started
Sounding the
buzzer three times
All default settings (*)
Sounding the
buzzer three times
Setup completed
Continuous reading mode
Transfer permitted
Transferring a/b/c/d
U.S. English (101 series)
All default settings (*)
U.S. English (101 series)
Transferring a/b/c/d
Transfer permitted
Continuous reading mode
Buzzer disabled
Setup completed
Sounding the
buzzer three times
Appx IN3-3
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
5. OPTOELECTRONICS Barcode Reader

<Silencing the buzzer>
<Sounding the buzzer>
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN3-4
Appendix 4 Setting Up the Magnetic Card [Option]
Appendix 4 Setting Up the Magnetic

Card [Option]
u NOTE u
When using a JIS type reader, use a JIS type magnetic card.
When using an ISO type reader, use an ISO type magnetic card.
The magnetic card reader (hereinafter abbreviated as the reader)
connection and setup procedures are described herein.
Two types of readers can be connected to the CL: JIS type and ISO
type. The choice between these two types depends on the users
operating environment.
JIS type
ISO type
1. Installing the Wall-Mounting

Bracket
When installing the wall-mounting bracket for use with the reader,
perform the following steps.
IMPORTANT
When installing the wall-mounting bracket, ensure that the concrete
strength of the wall is not less than 210 kgf/cm2. If the concrete strength
is inadequate, the required amount of mounting strength will not be
obtained. Be sure to check the concrete strength in advance.
1.
Direction
of magnetic
card insertion
Lamp
(left-hand side)
Reading surface
Determine the mounting position of the wall-mounting

bracket. Mark the center of each of the two wall-mounting
bracket mounting holes for anchor nut installation.
u NOTE u
Be sure that the employed anchor nuts conform to the wall
conditions (use the supplied anchor nuts).
Lamp
(right-hand side)
42mm
Reading surface
Wall-mounting
bracket
00000029.EPS
Anchor nut holes

162mm
00000225.EPS
2.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Drill holes (7.5 mm in diameter and 25 mm in depth) at the

marked positions and drive two anchor nuts into the holes.
Appx IN4-1
3.
Install the wall-mounting bracket as directed below:

I.
With two screws, attach the wall-mounting bracket to the bottom

surface of the reader.
II. With the anchor nuts and their screws, fasten the wall-mounting
bracket to the wall.
Wall-mounting bracket
Reader
I. Two screws
2. Connecting the CL to the Reader

Connect the reader to the USB port on the back of the PC.
1.
Use the cable supplied with the reader to connect the USB
port that is on the back of the CL to the reader. When the PC
is used placing it horizontally, connect the reader to the top
port for back connection.
Ferrite core
II. Secure with

anchor nuts and
anchor nut screws.
Dedicated cable
supplied with the
reader
USB port
CL
Reader
00000030.EPS
The reader driver will be set up automatically, becoming thus

ready for use.
u NOTES u
Wall
00000031.EPS
After the reader has been connected to the CL, be sure to restart
the OS. Although a window opens immediately after reader
connection to indicate that driver software installation has been
completed, you cannot immediately use the reader because it is
not recognized by the CL-AP yet.
Because the driver is not set up automatically for Windows XP or
Windows Vista, you have to do it manually.
For how to install the driver, see 4.6 Changing the
Barcode Reader/Magnetic Card Reader Driver
Software under MT: Machine Troubleshooting.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN4-2
3. Setting the Reader and

Magnetic Card
For detailed format descriptions, see 5. ID Card Data Format

[Reference].
REFERENCE
Perform the following procedures to set the reader type and magnetic
card type.
Setting the reader type
1.
Even if Yes is set for
Fuji format can be used (recognized by the system code).
2.
Start the Service Utility mode of the CL.
Click
in the Service Utility window.
3.
Click the
4.
Click
sign within
.
.
The IDT functionality and magnetic card setup items appear in the
right-hand area of the window.
5.
With
, set the reader type.
Setting the magnetic card type

saved.
For details on the startup procedure, see 1. Starting/Exiting

the Service Utility under MU: Maintenance Utility.
2.
3.
Click
4.

5.
Click
When using a hospital card (in a hospitals unique format)
1.
From the Setup Configuration Item window, change the

setting to Yes.
When using a magnetic card reader in Fuji format
1.
From
, select a magnetic card type.
ISO magnetic card
JIS magnetic card
0: FUJI [default]
6: FJ51

0: FUJI [default]
1: FJ01
2: FJ02
3: FJ03
4: FJ04
5: FJ05
, a magnetic card in
2.

saved.
3.
Click
4.

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN4-3
5.
Click
REFERENCE
This setting is to cope with the problem of cancellation of significant

digits occurring when reading a hospital card, which causes the
relevant patient information to be different from the original.
The Magnetic Card Format window opens.
This setting checks the Data Length and Header String of a

hospital card, causing thus an error to be indicated in the event of a
problem of cancellation of signification digits, which consequently
prevents a data mis-reading error to occur. Note that when both the
Data Length and Header String boxes are blank, this setting will
not be performed.
7.
To add a new item, click
REFERENCE
When changing an item setting, select an item and then click
.
To delete an existing setup item, select it and then click
.
The Data Type window opens.
00000431.EPS
6.
Determine Data Length, Header String and Header

Offset values in accordance with the magnetic card data
format adopted at the hospital.
For data format details, see 5. ID Card Data Format
[Reference].
Data Length : The length of the overall data registered on the

magnetic card.
Header String : The header character string of the data.
Header Offset : The header character string start position.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Appx IN4-4
8.
In accordance with the magnetic card data format used in

the hospital, set Data Type, Format, Card Offset, Data
Length, and Destination.
III. Enter the Card Offset, Data Length , and Destination (storage
offset) settings.
Card Offset
Specify the data start position on the card.
Setup must be performed with the position next to STX (the
character F when the FUJI card is used) regarded as 0.
Do not select the SI/SO or Kanji IN/OUT code portion as the
start position.
II
Data Length
Enter the number of characters existing before the card offset
position to specify the length of the data to be read.
Ensure that the data length does not include the SI/SO or Kanji
IN/OUT code portion.
III
For kanji data, use an even number to specify the data length.
u NOTE u
00000432.EPS
For detailed data format descriptions, see Section 5. ID Card

Data Format [Reference].
I.

setting.
II. Click the downward arrow mark
to select a Data Type
Also, note that the padding process is performed as defined by

CSL/IDT FUNCTION of SYSTEM CONFIG when the effective
number of digits is not reached.
to select a Format setting.
u NOTE u
Selectable only when Patient Sex, Patient Birth Date, or Year
or Month of Patient Birth Date is selected as a Data Type setting.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Be sure that the patient ID number, examination number, and

accession number data lengths do not exceed the effective number
of digits specified for the SYSTEM CONFIG CSL/IDT
FUNCTION examination number character string length, patient
ID character string length, and accession number character string
length. If such a limit is exceeded, an error occurs.
REFFERENCE
The data length cannot be specified for the following data types.
Patient Birthday Date (Day)
Patient Birthday Date (Month)
Patient Birthday Date (Year)
Patient Birthday Date
Patient Sex
Appx IN4-5
Specify the location at which the read data is to be stored.

If, for instance, a setting of 2 is entered, the third character and
thereafter will be stored.
A setting of 0 should normally be used.
9.
Click
The system returns to the Magnetic Card Format window.

If the entered settings are incorrect, an error message appears.
If an error message appears, repeat steps 7-I and beyond.
10. To add any other item, repeat steps 6. through 8.

11. Click
12. Click
4. Hospital Card Data Format

Setup Example [Reference]
This section explains about the setup procedure to be performed when
using the magnetic card reader to load the following JIS-format-defined
hospital card data into the CL.
As a patient ID number (10-digit), a 5-digit number consisting of the
third to seventh digits is used.
Hospital card information and detailed format descriptions

Patient name (16-digit 1-byte code katakana)
Sex (1-digit)
Patient ID number (10-digit)
Birth date (4-digit year/2-digit month/2-digit
day of the month)
Alphanumeric department name (10-digit)
Kanji name (7-digit 2-byte code kanji)
Detailed format description

Digit
Content
Destination (storage offset)
S
T
X
S
O
S
I
Digit 31
32
15
16
17
18
Patient name
(1-byte code katakana, 16-digit)
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
The hospital card

records the items of
information shown
at left in descending
order.
19
20
21
S
O
S
I
Sex
(1-digit)
42
43
44
22
29
30
Patient ID number
(10-digit)
47
48
49
50
Content
Birth date
Year (4-digit)
Month
(2-digit)
Alphanumeric
department name (10-digit)
Day of
the month
(2-digit)
(The symbol is a period.)

52
53
54
E
S
C
S
I
Content
Digit 51
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
55
56
57
58
59
64
65
Kanji name (14-digit)
66
67
68
69
70
Undefined
(2-digit)
71
72
E
T
X
L
R
C
Appx IN4-6
Setup procedure
1.
4.
With
, clear all the current settings.

Current settings
Start the CL service utility and then click [Magnetic Card

Setting] [Card Format].
The Magnetic Card Format window opens.
00000468.EPS
5.
00000467.EPS
2.
Click
and perform Patient Name setup as
indicated in the window shown below:
Since the hospital card is JIS-formatted, verify that 0: JIS

is entered in the
field.
If the entry is not 0: JIS, change it to the JIS format.

See 3. Setting the Reader and Magnetic Card.
3.
Make sure that the Data Length and Header String

boxes are blank and 0 is set to the Header Offset box.
To check the card reading data, the Data Length is set to 70 in this
example.
00000469.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Appx IN4-7
u NOTES u
When performing patient name setup for 1-byte code katakana
(Japanese language version), choose Patient Name (SBCS).
Choosing Patient Name (SBCS) automatically adds the SI/SO
code to both ends of data.
7.
Click
and perform Patient ID number setup
as indicated in the window shown below:
Since the code next to STX is regarded as 0 for counting

purposes, enter 1 in the Card Offset field.
6.
Click
and perform Sex setup as indicated in
the window shown below:
00000271.EPS
00000470.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Appx IN4-8
8.
u NOTE u
Since the third to seventh digits of a hospital card patient ID
number are to be loaded, pay due attention to the Card Offset,
Data Length, and Destination settings.
Date Type
Data Length
Since five digits are to be used, enter 5.
Destination
Since data loading begins with the third digit of the patient ID
area, enter 2.
Content
Sex 1
(1digit)
27 28 29
29 30 31
5
Patient ID number (10-digit)
Not used
Data to be
loaded into CL
Format
Birth date/ Patient Birthday

2000
year (4)
Date (Year)
Birth date/ Patient Birthday
10
month (2) Date (Month)
Birth date/
Patient Birthday
day of the
Date (Date)
month (2)
Alphanumeric
Requesting
department
Service (SBCS)
name (10)
Kanji name Patient Name
(14)
(SBCS)
Settings marked * cannot be changed.
Card Offset
Since the patient ID number data begins with the 21st digit and
does not use the two highest digits, enter 21.
Card 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
Offset
Digit 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Set the remaining items in accordance with the following

table:
Birth
date/
year
(4-digit)
Card Data
Destination
Offset Length
29
0*
34
5*
37
2*
8*
39
10
53
14
The resultant settings are shown below:
Not used
FT100309.EPS
00000607.EPS
9.
In the Magnetic Card Format window, click

You are then returned to the IIP Service Utility window.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Appx IN4-9
5. ID Card Data Format [Reference]

Two types of data formats are available for the ID card: JIS-II type and
JIS-I type (ISO). The system codes are defined as follows depending on
how the area of Extended Specification is used.
: FUJI, FJ01, FJ02, FJ03, FJ04, FJ05
JIS-II type
JIS-I type (ISO) : FUJI, FJ51
Extended Format (FJ01)

To use Kanji characters for the patient name, use the Extended Format.
Its system code is FJ01.
Digit
Content
S
T
X
Digit
28
System code
(FJ01)
Digit
Content
S
T
X
S
O
S
I
System code
(FUJI)
24
25
26
28
29
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
36
37
24
25
26
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
S
O
S
I
45
46
47
48
Number
(10 digits)
Content
Year
Month
Day
Sex
Male/Female
(M) (F)
( denotes a period.)
Digit
49
50
51
52
Distribution code
(4 lower digits)
53
54
55
56
E
S
C
S
I
57
58
Name in Kanji
(14 digits)
69
70
71
72
E
T
X
L
R
C
Birth date
Number
(10 digits)
Content
Year
Month
Day
Sex
Male/Female
(M) (F)
Digit
49
50
Content
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
Undefined (22 digits)

(space: 20H)
69
70
71
72
E
T
X
L
R
C
27
Birth date
Content
Digit
Patient name
(20 digits)
27
S
O
S
I
Patient name
(20 digits)
29
S
O
S
I
JIS-II Type
Fuji Standard Format (FUJI)
It is FUJIFILMs standard format, whose system code is FUJI. Since
undefined regions cannot be used, they must be filled with space (20H).
Note that kanji characters cannot be used for patient names.
Appx IN4-10

To use the department name in alphanumeric characters and distribution
code, use the Extended Format. Its system code is FJ02.
Digit
Content
S
T
X
Digit
28
S
O
S
I
System code
(FJ02)
29
36
37
24
25
26
S
O
S
I
Patient name
(20 digits)
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
27
45
46
47
48

To use the test number and alphanumeric department name, use the
Extended Format. Its system code is FJ03.
Digit
Content
S
T
X
Digit
28
S
O
S
I
System code
(FJ03)
29
36
37
Number
(10 digits)
Year
Content
49
50
55
Alphanumeric
department
name
(8 digits)
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
56
57
58
63
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
Distribution code
(8 digits)
27
45
46
47
48
Birth date
Month
64
26
S
O
S
I
Day
Sex
Male/Female
(M) (F)
Number
(10 digits)
Content
Year
Month
Day
Digit
25
Patient name
(20 digits)
Birth date
Content
24
65
69
Undefined
(6 digits)
70
71
72
E
T
X
L
R
C
Sex
Male/Female
(M) (F)
Digit
49
Content
50
55
56
Alphanumeric department
name (8 digits)
57
58
65
66
Examination number (10 digits)
67
68
69
Undefined
(4 digits)
70
71
E
T
X
Appx IN4-11
72
L
R
C

To use the department name in alphanumeric characters and distribution
code, use the Extended Format. Its system code is FJ04.
Digit
Content
S
T
X
Digit
28
S
O
S
I
System code
(FJ04)
29
36
37
24
25
26
S
O
S
I
Patient name
(20 digits)
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
27
45
46
47
48

To use the test number and alphanumeric department name, use the
Extended Format. Its system code is FJ05.
Digit
Content
S
T
X
Digit
28
S
O
S
I
System code
(FJ05)
29
36
37
Number
(10 digits)
Year
Content
49
50
55
Distribution code
(8 digits)
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
56
57
58
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
Examination number
(10 digits)
27
45
46
47
48
Birth date
Month
65
26
S
O
S
I
Day
Sex
Male/Female
(M) (F)
Number
(10 digits)
Content
Year
Month
Day
Digit
25
Patient name
(20 digits)
Birth date
Content
24
66
67
68
69
Undefined
(4 digits)
70
71
72
E
T
X
L
R
C
Sex
Male/Female
(M) (F)
Digit
50
Content
51
56
57
name (8 digits)
58
59
60
61
62
S
O
S
I
E
S
C
63
64
69
70
Department name in Kanji

(8 digits)
71
72
E
T
X
L
R
C
Appx IN4-12
JIS-I Type (ISO)

In the ISO specification format, to use the alphanumeric department
name, distribution code, test number, use the Extended Format. Its
system code is FJ51.
Fuji Standard (ISO) Format

A standard-specification card that is not particularly specified should
comply with this format. This format is supported by all FCR systems.
4
Content
S
T
X
System code
(FUJI)
Digit
28
29
37
38
39
25
26
27
Patient name
(20 digits)
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
Content
S
T
X
Digit
29
25
26
27
28
28
System code
(FJ51)
30
37
38
Space
Space
Space
Space
Digit
Digit
Patient name
(20 digits)
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
49
Birth date
Birth date
Number
(10 digits)
Content
Year
Month
Day
Sex
Male/Female
(M) (F)
Number
(10 digits)
Content
Year
Month
Day
Sex
Male/Female
(M) (F)
Digit
Digit
50
51
Content
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
52
Undefined
(28 digits)
76
77
78
E
T
X
50 51
56 57 58 59
64 65 66 67
74 75 76 77 78 79
79
L
R
C
Content
name
(8 digits)
Distribution code
(8 digits)
Examination number
(10 digits)
E
Space
T
(2 digits)
X
Appx IN4-13
L
R
C
Data Definition
u NOTES u
Exercise care not to confuse the JIS and ISO cards, since they
contain different character codes.
Undefined regions in the recorded information must be filled with
space code (JIS: 20H/ISO: 00H) if:
Some of the information to be recorded into the ID card cannot be
entered; and
The number of characters actually entered is smaller than the
number of characters specified in this specification.
STX: Start Code
This code indicates the start of text that has been written.
System Code: Identification Code
Four-character code that identifies whether the ID card is for FCR use
or not.
Identification code
Format type
FUJI
Standard format
FU** (*: numeral)
Extension format
Other
Hospital individual format
SI/SO: Extended Code
u NOTE u
Patient Name
For JIS
This indicates a patient name by not greater than 20 Roman
characters or Katakana graphic characters, excluding @ and *.
To switch between alphabet and Katakana modes, use SI/SO code.
Any SI/SO code of not greater than 20 characters of the patient name
is substituted by space code (20H) and handled as part of the
20-character patient name.
For ISO
This indicates a patient name by not greater than 20 Roman
characters or Roman special characters, excluding @ and *.
For Roman special characters, set MAG CARD of the IDT
management information to 1, and set Roman special character
codes and characters used in Setting Character Code for Reading
ISO Card.
Number: Patient Number
This indicates a patient number for identifying the patient by graphic
characters in alphabetic mode, excluding @ and *.
If the patient number falls short of ten digits, enter characters from the
right-most location, and fill the rest with space code (JIS: 20H/ISO:
00H).
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Space code (JIS: 20H/ISO: 00H)
This code exists only in JIS.

SI and SO are used in pair as a special character to extend graphic
characters.
From SI to next SO: Graphic characters for alphabets
From SO to next SI: Graphic characters for Katakana
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Appx IN4-14
Birth Date: Patient Birth Date

This indicates the patients birth date in the dominical year.
Year : Four digits from 0 to 9.
Month : Two digits from 0 to 9.
Day : Two digits from 0 to 9.
If the number of digits for the birth date falls short of its effective number
of digits, enter numbers from the right-most location, and fill the rest
with zero (JIS: 30H/ISO: 10H).
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
Fill 0.
Year
Month
Day
u NOTE u
in the 42nd and 45th digits denotes a period (JIS:2EH/ISO:0EH).
Sex: Patient Sex
The sex of a patient is denoted by one alphabetic character.
Male : M
Female : F
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Appx IN4-15
Distribution Code (8 digits)

The distribution code is used to set a destination of image data transfer.
If the distribution code falls short of eight digits, enter characters from
the right-most location, and fill the rest with space code (JIS: 20H/ISO:
00H).
Correspondence between the transfer destination and distribution code
value may be set arbitrarily by the user.
When this code is not used, fill it with space code (JIS: 20H/ISO: 00H).
Examination Number (10 digits)

The examination number represents the data transferred mainly from
the hospital information system to identify the distinction between
examinations conducted. If the examination number falls short of ten
digits, enter characters from the right-most location, and fill the rest with
space code (JIS: 20H/ISO: 00H).
This code is not used for control purposes.
When this code is not used, fill it with space code (JIS: 20H/ISO: 00H).
ETX: End Code

This code indicates the end of text.
LRC: LRC Code
LRC denotes a horizontal redundancy code for a horizontal parity check
bit of information characters recorded.
Horizontal parity check is performed from the start code to the end
code.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Appx IN4-16
Appendix 5 Procedures for Changing the CL and RU IP Addresses
Appendix 5 Procedures for

Changing the CL and
RU IP Addresses
This appendix explains about the procedures for changing the CL and
RU IP addresses.
The IP addresses need to be changed in the following cases:
Case 1: When changing the CL/RU network configuration from the
stand-alone type to the network type
Case 2: When the CL and RU IP addresses need to be changed for
hospital network management purposes
u NOTE u
2. Changing the Software Settings

Change the IP addresses for the CL and RU as summarized herein:
RU IP address : 172.16.1.10 200.150.100.50
CL IP address : 172.16.1.20 200.150.100.10
To perform necessary procedures, observe the workflow below:
Changing the RU-Config
Changing a setting from the CLs Service Utility
Changing the CL-PC IP address
Verifying the connection after IP address
changes
Changing the IDT CONNECTING configuration
1. Incorporating into the Network

In compliance with the hospital network specifications, connect the CL
and RU network cables to the hospitals network.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN5-1
2.
Changing the RU-Config
u NOTE u
u NOTES u
CL-AP.
AP such as the Explorer should have not been started. If already

started, shut it down.
RU M-Utility is used for RU-Config setup. However, the setup

procedure varies with the employed RU M-Utility version. When the
employed version is 1.2 or later (when RU M-Utility is installed from
RU application CD version A07 or later), you only have to perform
steps 1. through 7.
However, if the employed RU M-Utility version is 1.1 or earlier (when
RU M-Utility is installed from RU application CD version A06 or
earlier), you have to perform all steps.
1.
Turn ON the RU power.
IV. Click.
II. Click.
I. Click.
00000219.EPS
ON
00000210.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN5-2
3.
From the LIST OF EXISTING RU area, click the host name

of the RU whose configuration file is to be set.
6.
RU host name
Click
RU-Config installation will start.
CAUTION
(Applicable only for RU M-Utility version 1.2 or later.)
the RU panel is illuminated for the RU-Config installation process,
because the RUs CPU board can be damaged.
7.
00000434.EPS
Click
Perform steps hereinafter (up to step 12.) only when the RU M-Utility
version used is 1.1 or earlier.
8.
5.
The text color of the EDIT CONFIGURATION button changes

from gray to black.
4.
Click the
From the

I
II
III
IV
00000429.EPS
I. Enter a new RU IP address (e.g., 200.150.100.50).

II. Enter a new CL IP address (e.g., 200.150.100.10).
III. Enter the FTP server IP address that is the same as that for the
CL (e.g., 200.150.100.10).
IV. Enter a net mask.
CAUTION
damaged.
The RU-Config file in the RU FLASH ROM will be updated.
(The RU LED lights and a beep sounds.)
The CL monitor displays a message indicating that the RU-Config
file is being updated.

the RU-Config file is being updated.
00000270.EPS
010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
Appx IN5-3
9.
Click
Changing a setting from the CLs Service Utility
on the CL monitor.
1.
The error window opens in a few seconds.
Click
Fuji Film, and FCR.

2.
31117 or 31118 can eventually be displayed.
00000601.EPS
10. Click
11. Click
(or
).
MU000031.EPS
A menu opens.
12. Hold down the <Shift> key and click

the window.
MU000035.EPS
NOTE
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Appx IN5-4
3.
6.
sign within
.
7.
Enter a new RU IP address (e.g., 200.150.100.50) in the

field.
1. To exit the AP, hold down the <Shift> key and choose Shut
Down on the
4.
(or
) menu.
and then
The HostName window opens in the right-hand area of the

window.
REFERENCE
Click the
select
8.
Click
2. From the Start menu, sequentially choose Programs,

FUJIFILM, and FCR.
9.
10. Click

saved.
11. From the Config (F) menu, choose Close.


00000159.EPS
5.
Click the
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
sign within
Appx IN5-5
Changing the CL-PC IP address
4.
For Windows 2000/XP
1.
Click
Make settings as follows.
5.
For Windows 2000
Double-click

and then click

.
on the desktop.
Double-click

Choose
6.
Choose
7.
For Windows XP
from the
Select

menu.
II
I. Enter a new CL IP address (e.g., 200.150.100.10).

II. Enter a subnet mask.
2.
Double-click
The Network and Dial-up connection window opens.
3.
00000430.EPS
8.
Click

window.
9.
Click
Double-click
REFERENCE
REFERENCE
When a window appears prompting you to restart the system, click
[Yes].
Once the OS has started, the CL-AP will start up automatically.
On Windows 2000/XP, the Local Area Connection icon may not

appear on the display if your PC is not connected to other
equipment (RU) with a network cable.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx IN5-6
For Windows Vista
1.
menu.
2.
Double-click
6.
Choose
7.
.
II
3.
Click [View status].
00000430.ai

8.
Click

window.
9.
Click
10. Click

AWS80302.ai
4.
Click
Choose
REFERENCE
5.
11. Close the Network and Sharing Centerwindow.

[Yes].
and then click

.

opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx IN5-7
Verifying the connection after IP address changes
1.
Click
2.
and exposure menu, and then click
Fuji Film, and FCR.
Both the CL-AP window lamp and the RU panels cassette

insertion lamp go on.

From the CL user window (Registration), set patient data
The RU initialization message appears on the CL monitor. The RU

becomes available in about two minutes.
3.
Version A software
Set the cassette in the RUs cassette setting unit and make
sure that images are transferred to the CL.
REFERENCE
Be sure not to incorrectly enter an IP address for NETWORK
CONFIG ALL OTHER NODES ru0 settings, otherwise an
image transfer error will be indicated.
IN000025.EPS
4.
Click
5.
Click
Version B software
at the upper right corner of the window.
(or
).
A menu opens.
6.
IN000128.EPS
REFERENCE
If the RU initialization message does not appear on the CLs
monitor, restart both the CL and RU.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Changing the IDT CONNECTING configuration

Change the CL IP address that is set up in the IDT CONNECTING
configuration.
See 3.13 Patient Information Sharing Function Setup under
Appx IN5-8
Appendix 6 Installing the Monitor Rack [Option]
Appendix 6 Installing the Monitor

Rack [Option]
Use the following procedure when replacing the rack for the touchpanel-attached 15" monitor with the optional rack.
Note that the procedure for rack replacement differs depending on the
monitor type (model).
3.
Put the monitor face down as shown. Remove the mounting

screws from rack A.
u NOTE u
Check for foreign matter beneath the monitor surface. Observe this
precaution to avoid damaging the monitor.
4.
Disconnect the connector cable from the PC board.
u NOTE u
For TPS9415TD15
1.
Position the monitor as shown below. Remove cover 1 from

rack A.
2.
Remove cover 2.
Remove rack A while exercising care not to pull on the connector

cable. Failure to observe this precaution may cause damage to the
PC board.
5.
Remove rack A.
(3) Four double-sems screws [Remove]
(5) Rack A [Remove]
Monitor
(2) Cover 2 [Remove]
Monitor
(4) Connector cable

[Disconnect from PC board]
Rack A
CAUTION
Do not pull on the
connector cable.

00000017.EPS
00000018.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Appx IN6-1
6.
For TPS9416TD15
Attach rack B to the monitor.

Four screws that have been
attached to rack A.
(6) Rack B [Attach]
1.
Position the monitor as shown below and remove cover 1.
u NOTE u
Putting a screwdriver in the clearance of cover 1 (position A) will
enable you to remove it easily.
Monitor
1. Cover 1 [Remove]
Monitor
00000019.EPS
IN000058.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Appx IN6-2
2.
3.

screws from rack A.
5.
Connect the power cable, serial cable and monitor cable to

the monitor.
u NOTE u
u NOTE u
Be sure to connect the cables and then attach rack B.
6.
u NOTE u
Attach the spacer and rack B to the monitor (fasten the

spacer together with rack B).
Four BR screws

PC board.
4.
(6) Rack B [Attach]
Remove rack A.
(2) Four double-sems
screws [Remove]
(4) Rack A [Remove]
(6) Spacer
Monitor
(3) Connector cable

CAUTION
Do not pull on
the connector cable.
Monitor
IN000059.EPS
IN000060.EPS
7.

For details of cable connection, see the Service Manual that
comes with the monitor.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Appx IN6-3
For L350P-TS, L351P-TS, L362T (reference)
1.
3.
Put the monitor face down as shown below and attach rack B.
Remove the rack.

Rack B
[Attach]
Monitor
Monitor
Rack
[Remove]
IN000312.EPS
2.

the monitor.
u NOTE u
Be sure to connect cables properly before attaching rack B.
IN000313.EPS
4.

For details of used cables, see the manual supplied with the
monitor.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Appx IN6-4
Appendix 7 Attaching the Monitor Wall-Mounting Bracket [Option]
Appendix 7 Attaching the Monitor WallMounting Bracket [Option]

The attachment procedure to be observed differs as follows depending
on the monitor type (model).
Attaching anchor nuts
Attaching anchor nuts

IMPORTANT
Ensure that the concrete strength of the wall on which the wall-mounting
bracket is to be mounted is not less than 210 kgf/cm2.
If the concrete strength is inadequate, the required amount of mounting
strength will not be obtained. Be sure to check the concrete strength in
advance.
1.
Attaching the bracket
(for TPS9415TD15)

(for TPS9416TD15)

(for L350P, L351P,
L362T and L560T-C)
Determine the wall-mounting bracket attaching position.

Mark the center of each of the four wall-mounting bracket
attaching holes for anchor nut installation.
u NOTE u
Be sure that the employed anchor nuts conform to the wall
conditions (use the supplied anchor nuts).
70mm
70mm
190mm
00000021.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN7-1
2.
Drill holes (7.5 mm in diameter and 25 mm in depth) at the

marked positions and drive four anchor nuts into the holes.
3.
Loosely attach four screws (BR M420) to the anchor nuts.
4.
Hook the wall-mounting bracket on the loosely retained

screws and then tighten those screws.
Attaching the bracket (for TPS9415TD15)
1.
Position the monitor as shown below. Remove cover 1 from

rack A.
2.
Remove cover 2.
(3) Screw
[Loosely attach]
(4) [Fully tighten]
(BR M420)
(2) Anchor nut [Drive]
Monitor
7.5mm
25 + 2 mm
00000020.EPS
Rack A
00000267.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Appx IN7-2
3.

screws from rack A.
6.
Attach the bracket to the bottom of the monitor.
u NOTE u
4.
Monitor
u NOTE u
Remove rack while exercising care not to pull on the connector
PC board.
5.
Bracket [Attach]
Remove the rack.

(3) Four double-sems screws [Remove]
(5) Rack [Remove]
00000022.EPS
Monitor
(4) Connector cable

[Remove from PC board]
CAUTION
Do not pull on the
connector cable.
00000268.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Appx IN7-3
7.
Attaching the bracket (for TPS9416TD15)
Mount the monitor on the wall-mounting bracket.
1.
Position the monitor as shown below and remove cover 1.
u NOTE u
Monitor [Mount]
Putting a screwdriver in the clearance of cover 1 (position A) will

enable you to remove it easily.
Monitor
1. Cover 1 [Remove]
00000023.EPS
IN000058.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Appx IN7-4
2.
3.

screws from rack A.
5.

the monitor.
u NOTE u
u NOTE u
Be sure to connect the cables and then attach rack B.
6.
Attach the spacer and bracket to the monitor (fasten the

spacer together with the bracket).
u NOTE u
PC board.
4.
Monitor
Remove rack A.
(2) Four double-sems
screws [Remove]
(6) Spacer
(4) Rack A [Remove]
(6) Bracket
[Attach]
Monitor
IN000090.EPS
(3) Connector cable

CAUTION
Do not pull on the
connector cable.
IN000091.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Appx IN7-5
7.
Attaching the bracket (for L350P, L351P, L362T and L560T-C)
1.
(7) Monitor [Mount]
Position the monitor as shown below and remove the rack.

Attach then the bracket to the monitor.
u NOTE u
Screw holes of the bracket to be used are different from monitor

size to monitor size.
Depending on the monitor size, properly select screw holes for the
used bracket.
Monitor
Bracket [Attach]
IN000089.EPS
Rack [Remove]
IN000111.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN7-6
2.
Monitor [Mount]
Wall-mounting
bracket
IN000112.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN7-7
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN7-8
Appendix 8 Changing the RU Host Name
Appendix 8 Changing the RU

Host Name
RU M-Utility is used to change the RUs host name. However, the
change procedure varies with the employed RU M-Utility version. When
the employed version is 1.1 or earlier (when RU M-Utility is installed
from RU application CD version A06 or earlier), perform the procedure
set forth under 1. When Version 1.1 or Earlier Is Used. When the
employed RU M-Utility version is 1.2 or later, perform the procedure set
forth under 2. When Version 1.2 or Later Is Used.
The use of RU M-Utility version 1.2 or later makes it easier to effect a
host name change. It is therefore recommended that you upgrade RU
M-Utility if RU application CD version A07 or later is available.
NOTE
1. When Version 1.1 or Earlier Is Used

The RU host name cannot be changed with a tool such as the RU MUtility. For this reason, change it accordingly by reinstalling the RU-AP.
u NOTES u
Before performing the procedures described herein, be sure to take

note of all the registered RU configuration information, particularly IP
address and sub-net mask, for the following reason.
When reinstalling the RU-AP, it is necessary to uninstall the RU-AP
that has been installed. While this processing is being performed, the
RU configuration data is deleted (only data stored in the FTP server is
deleted).
When the OS used is Windows XP, the RU M-Utility must be of version

1.4 or later and the RU software, A09 or later.
Change the host name according to the flow below.
Uninstalling the RU-AP
REFERENCE
To upgrade RU M-Utility, first uninstall it and then install its new version.

(changing the host name)
For the RU M-Utility uninstallation procedure, see

Appendix A Uninstalling the APs in RI: Reinstalling the
Software.
Changing the CL Service

Utility settings
For the RU M-Utility installation procedure, see

5.2.1 Installing the RU M-Utility in IN-A: Installation
Connection to One XG-1 RU or CR-IR 355RU/356/357.
Uninstalling the RU-AP

See 3. RU-AP in Appendix A Uninstalling the APs under
u NOTE u
Note that, even if two or more RUs have been registered to the RU
M-Utility, just a single operation uninstalls all those RUs registered.
In such a case, all those RUs must be set up anew. Thus, you have to
surely jot down information on each of those RUs.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN8-1
Installing the RU-AP (changing the host name)
5.
u NOTE u
Verify network connection to the RU.

If the following message appears four times, connection to
the RU has been established accordingly.
Make sure to exit all applications, particularly the Explorer or CL-AP.
1.
REFERENCE
Insert into the PC the RU-CD supplied with the RU.
Values time<10ms and TTL=128 appearing in the message

above can be different depending on the network status. Even if
different values appear in it, network connection has been
established normally.
After a while, the CR-IR346RU MAINTENANCE TOOLS window

opens.
2.
Click [START].
u NOTE u
The RU M-Utility main menu appears.
Before proceeding to steps hereafter, make sure that there are no

problems with the network connection. An error will occur when
starting up the CL if you proceed to steps hereafter without
establishing network connection properly.
00000414.EPS
3.
Enter the RU host name to be changed and the RU IP address.
6.
I
II
7.
Click [INSTALL] in the main menu.

The Insert the CD-ROM into a drive window opens.
8.
Click
A window prompting you to select the RU-AP version opens.
00000426.EPS
I. Enter the RU host name (host name you wish to change).

II. Enter the RU IP address (IP address taken note of before starting
the procedure).
Click the
mark at the upper right corner of the command
prompt window.
9.
Select the RU-AP version from the list and click
u NOTE u
The host name entered at step I. above will be taken as the RUs
correct host name. Be sure to enter the correct host name at this
step.
4.
Click
Connection to the RU will then be verified.

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
List
00000190.EPS
Appx IN8-2
10. Set up configuration information items that have been taken

note of before starting the procedure.

The RU-Config file in the RU FLASH ROM will be updated.
(The RU LED lights and a beep sounds.)
The CL monitor displays a message indicating that the RU-Config
file is being updated.

the RU-Config file is being updated.
00000270.EPS
IN000093.EPS
11. Click
After the completion of RU-AP installation, Completed will appear

on the screen.
12. Click
15. Click
on the CL monitor.
The error window opens in a few seconds.
13. Click the
31117 or 31118 can be displayed

depending on the case.
The system returns to the desktop window.
14. From the
CAUTION
damaged.
16. Click
17. Click
(or
00000601.EPS
).
A menu opens.
18. Hold down the <Shift> key and click
This completes to change the RU host name.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Appx IN8-3
Changing the CL Service Utility settings
1.

Item].
2.
Within the tree in the left-hand area of the window, click

, and then
click the
mark to the left of
3.
Choose
4.
Change the
(the RUs previously selected host name).

corner of the window to a new RU host name (RU1).
5.
Click
6.
From the tree in the left-hand area of the window, choose
, and then set the RU under

READER Function in the right-hand area of the window to
RU1 (new host name).
7.
Click
8.

saved.
9.
Click
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Appx IN8-4
2. When Version 1.2 or Later Is Used

Main menu window
u NOTES u
Verify that Explorer or other application is not running. If any
applications are running, exit them.
CL-AP.
Perform the steps in the following workflow:
Changing the RU host name
Changing the RU host name
1.
Perform the following steps to start RU M-Utility.
00000612.EPS
2.
In the LIST OF EXISTING RU area, click the host name of

the RU whose configuration file is to be set up.
RU host name
IV. Click.
00000613.EPS
The EDIT CONFIGURATION button text color changes from gray

to black.
3.
II. Click.
I. Click.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Click
A window opens to prompt for a host name change.

00000219.EPS
Appx IN8-5
4.
Enter a new host name in the "NEW RU NAME" field.
1.

Item].
00000614.EPS
5.
Click
The RU host name is then changed.
CAUTION
The RU panel will be illuminated while the RU host name is being
changed. Never turn OFF the power to the RU or press the reset
switch during such a change process because the RUs CPU board
can be damaged.
6.
Click
in the upper right corner of the window.
2.
Within the tree in the left-hand area of the window, click

, and then
click the
mark to the left of
3.
Choose
4.
Change the
(the RUs previously selected host name).

corner of the window to a new RU host name (RU1).
5.
Click
6.
From the tree in the left-hand area of the window, choose
, and then set the RU under

READER Function in the right-hand area of the window to
RU1 (new host name).
7.
Click
8.

saved.
9.
Click
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Appx IN8-6
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN8-7
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN8-8
Appendix 9 Changing the CL IP Address
Appendix 9 Changing the CL IP

Address
3.
Double-click
To connect a multiple number of CLs within the same network, the CL

IP address must be changed from the default setup value (172.16.1.20)
to another.
In addition, the sub-net mask must also be changed from the default
setup value (255.255.0.0) to another, for which the procedures
described below should be followed.
On Windows 2000/XP, the Local Area Connection icon may not

appear on the display if your PC is not connected to other
equipment (RU) with a network cable.
REFERENCE
u NOTE u
4.
Click
For Windows 2000/XP
1.
5.
Select
and then click

.
For Windows 2000
on the desktop.
Double-click

Double-click

6.
Select
7.
Change the IP address and sub-net mask.
For Windows XP
Select

from the
menu.
2.
Double-click
II
IN000094.EPS
I. IP address
II. Sub-net mask
The Network and Dial-up connection window opens.

010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx IN9-1
8.
Click

window.
9.
Click
For Windows Vista
1.
menu.
REFERENCE
[Yes]. Once the OS has started, the CL-AP will start up
automatically.
2.
Double-click
3.
Click [View status].
10. Re-set the IDT CONNECTING configuration.

This completes to change the CL IP address and sub-net mask.
AWS80302.ai
4.
Click
5.
Choose
and then click

.

opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx IN9-2
6.
Choose
7.
II
00000430 ai

8.
Click
The system returns to the Local Area Connection Properties

window.
9.
Click
10. Click
11. Close the Network and Sharing Centerwindow.

REFERENCE
[Yes].
12. Perform resettings for the IDT CONNECTING function .

This completes the procedure necessary for changing the CL IP

address and subnet mask.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx IN9-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx IN9-4
Appendix 10 Connecting a High-resolution Monitor
Appendix 10 Connecting a Highresolution Monitor

Described herein is the procedure used to connect a high-resolution
monitor to the PC and perform necessary window settings so that the
CL-AP is set up appropriately.
1. Mounting a High-resolution
Monitor Board (When a
16001200 or 20481536
Resolution Monitor is Used)
1.
2. Installing a High-resolution
Monitor Driver (When a
16001200 or 20481536
Resolution Monitor is Used)
1.

Windows will start up. Within about one minute, the CL-AP will
also start up displaying then the CL initial window.
2.
Within three seconds after the CL initial window opens, click

the upper left corner and then the upper right corner.
Following instructions set forth in the Operation Manual that

comes with the high-resolution monitor, mount a highresolution monitor board on the PC.
MU000035.EPS
NOTE
NOTE
Do not dismount the board assembled at shipment from factory.
For details on how to mount the board, see the relevant

Operation Manual.
2.
Connect monitor cable (DVI cable) and power cable to the

high-resolution monitor.
3.
Connect the power cable from the monitor to the power

supply.
3.
The Service Utility mode starts and then the Service Utility
window opens.
4.
Click Exit Service Utility at the lower right corner of the

window.
The Service Utility exits and the Found New Hardware Wizard
window opens.
DCL70411.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN10-1
5.
Click [Cancel].
8.
6.
Select Disable from the menu that opens at the right-click

of Silicon Motion LynxEM+.
menu. Select
then [Manage] from the menu that opens.
DCL70414.EPS
DCL70415.EPS
DCL70412.EPS
9.
7.
Select Device Manager and double-click Display

adapters in the right pane that opens on the window.
Click
DCL70416.EPS
10. Click
NOTE
If no confirmation window opens disabling the PC to be restarted,
do it from the
DCL70413.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
menu.
After the PC is restarted, Windows will start up. Within about one
minute, the CL-AP will also start up displaying then the CL initial
window.
Appx IN10-2
11. Within three seconds after the CL initial window opens, click
the upper left corner and then the upper right corner.
14. Select No, not this time and click
The Found New Hardware Wizard window opens.
MU000035.EPS
NOTE
DCL70417.EPS
15. Insert into the PC the driver media supplied with the
12. Enter fieldengineer and click
The Service Utility mode starts and then the IIP Service Utility
window opens.
monitor.
16. Select Install from a list or specific location and click

.
13. Click Exit Service Utility at the lower right corner of the
window.
The Service Utility exits and the Found New Hardware Wizard
window opens.
DCL70430.EPS
A search and installation option window opens.
DCL70418.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN10-3
17. Select Search for the best driver in these locations and
checkmark Search removable media (
21. Remove the driver media.
).
22. Click
DCL70421.EPS
DCL70419.EPS
18. Click
23. Click
The PC restarts.
19. Select a driver whose location is winxp and click
DCL70420.EPS
The Hardware Installation window opens.
20. Click
Installation processing will start. After a while, a window opens to

indicate completion of installation processing.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN10-4
3. Changing to a High-resolution
Monitor (12801024,
16001200 or 20481536
monitor)
1.
DCL70422.EPS
3.
Select the high-resolution monitor icon (3 in the display

sample below) and checkmark Extend my Windows
desktop onto this monitor (
).
For Windows 2000/XP

Right-click any position on the desktop and select
Properties from the menu that opens.
For Windows Vista

Choose Personalization from the right-click menu on
the desktop.
Click the Display Settings.
DCL70423.EPS
4.
Checkmark Use this device as the primary monitor (
DCL70424.EPS
MT000015.ai
2.
Select the Settings tab.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN10-5
).
5.
Select the default monitor icon (1 in the display sample

below) and remove checkmark from Extend my Windows
desktop onto this monitor (
).
DCL70425.EPS
6.
Click
The Monitor Settings window opens.
DCL70426.EPS
7.
Click
NOTE
Click [Yes] quickly within 15 seconds, otherwise the system
returns to the previous window.
When a monitor with the touch panel is used, change the window
settings as appropriate, and perform touch panel calibration.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx IN10-6
4. Reinstalling the Application and

Performing Necessary Settings
1.
Remove the CL-AP.
2.
Start up Explorer. If any of the following files or folders

exists, remove it.
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Config.bak\MWMConfig.mdb
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Config.bak\MediaListDB.mdb
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System\Bmp (Delete the entire folder.)
3.
4.
If the Registry Editor includes any of the following keys,

delete it (delete all values included in the relevant key).
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\FujiFilm\IIP\PatientDB
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\FujiFilm\IIP\ShowItem
For details on how to remove the application, see 1. CL-AP

under Appendix A Uninstalling the APs in
For Windows 2000/XP

Select Run from the
menu.
Input regedit and click
DCL70427.EPS
5.
Install the CL-AP.
6.
Start up the Service Utility.
DCL70428.EPS
For Windows Vista

Press the
button.
The start menu opens.
Enter regedit in
For details on how to install the application, see 5.1 Installing

the CL-AP under RI: Reinstalling the Software.
For details on how to start up the Service Utility, see

1. Starting/Exiting the Service Utility under
and

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN10-7
7.
10. On the window that opens, click the
Click [LUT].
mark to the left of
11. Click
Setup data of the CL system information is displayed in the pane

right of the window.
DCL70429.EPS
The Monitor List window opens.
8.
Select a type of the monitor to be connected and click

.
9.

00000248.EPS
12. Perform
setting according to the
connected monitor,
SL-IC200
: 255
SL-IC300
: 207
DCL804001.EPS
13. From the Config menu, choose Save.

saved.
14. Click
15. From the Config menu, choose Close.

00000091.EPS
16. Exit the Service Utility.

17. Restart the PC and check to see that the CL-AP starts up
properly.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Appx IN10-8
Appendix 11 Connecting the 2nd Monitor
Appendix 11 Connecting the 2nd

Monitor
Setting procedures are described to add a second monitor (hereinafter
called 2nd monitor) and display an image read by CL and its overlay
item on the 2nd monitor.
The existent monitor (hereinafter called 1st monitor) is used as a
regular exposure console.
Prior to setup
CL requirements
CL main unit must have been set up accordingly.
Software version required: V7.1 (B) or later
The PC memory is 2GB or more. (If not sufficient, expand it as
appropriate.)
Configuration example
1st monitor
2nd monitor
Overall operation flow

Connect the video board to the CL
and then connect 2nd monitor.
1. Uninstalling the
Video Driver
Connect the video board.
2. Connecting the
Video Board
Install the monitor.
3. Installing the
Monitor
Install the video driver and set the monitor.
4. Installing and
Setting the Video
Driver
Procedure to be performed if necessary

When changing the 2nd monitor.
5. Changing and Setting the 2nd Monitor
OE240001.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN11-1
1. Uninstalling the Video Driver
2.
Select the currently used video driver and click

([Uninstall] when the OS used is Windows Vista).
If the installed video driver (PCs standard driver is excluded) is old,

uninstall it before performing necessary processing.
NOTE
Uninstallation of the video driver is not necessary when the PC is
provided with DVI connectors as the standard items and the 1st monitor
and the 2nd monitor use 0.7M or 1M and 2M (color/monochrome),
respectively.
1.

For Windows XP
Select Control Panel Add or Remove Programs from the
OE240002.ai
menu.
Video driver uninstallation thus completes.
The Add or Remove Programs window opens.
For Windows Vista

Select Control Panel Programs and Features from the
menu.
3.

For Windows XP
Right-click the My Computer icon and select Properties from
the menu that opens.
Click the Hard Ware tab.
Click [Device Manager].
For Windows Vista
Click
and select [Device Manager].
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN11-2
4.
Right-click the display adapter to be uninstalled and select

Uninstall.
AWS823046.ai
5.
Close the Device Manager window and the Control

Panel window.
6.
Turn the PC power OFF.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN11-3
2. Connecting the Video Board
3.
Remove the video board already connected to the PC.
NOTES
The video board to be connected differs for each monitor and/or OS.
Monitor
1st Monitor
2nd Monitor
Resolution
Resolution
2M Color /
Monochrome
0.7/1M Color
3M Color /
Monochrome
2M Color /
Monochrome
2M Monochrome
3M Color /
Monochrome
3M Color /
3M Color
Monochrome
3M Color /
3M Monochrome
Monochrome
Video board
OS
Windows XP
Windows Vista
FireGL V3600
VGA + DVI port

is used.
FireGL V3600
FireGL V3600
FireGL V3600
FireGL V3600
FireGL V3600
FireGL V3600
FireGL V3600
FireGL V3600
FireGL V3600
FireGL V3600
AWS827033.ai
4.
NOTE
Connect the video board correctly as illustrated below. The board
connection location differs depending on the video board type.
Connect the VREngine/SMD5 board on a PC where the PCI

Express x 16 slot is not provided.
Use the VGA + DVI port that is mounted on the PC as a standard
item, when the PC is provided with DVI connectors as the standard
items and the 1st monitor and the 2nd monitor use 0.7M or 1M and 2M
(color/monochrome), respectively. In this case, connection of video
board is unnecessary.
VGA + DVI port used under Windows Vista may disable adjustment
of the screen position to be saved appropriately. To have the screen
position be saved appropriately, use the FireGL V3600 board.
1.
Disconnect the VGA cable or DVI cable from the 1st monitor.
2.
Remove the PC cover.
Connect the FireGL V3600 or VREngine/SMD5 board to

the card slot.
For VREngine/SMD5
For FireGL V3600
AWS827034.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
5.
Release the card retention latch, and fasten the video board.
6.
Reinstall the PC cover.
Appx IN11-4
3. Installing the Monitor

Installing the LCD panel (2nd monitor)
1.
Take the LCD panel (2nd monitor) out of its carton and
install it in a place of use.
NOTES
Place the LCD panel on a level surface.
Place the LCD panel in landscape orientation. After installing the
monitor driver, place the monitor in portrait orientation if necessary
to do so.
1.
Connect the VGA cable (or the DVI cable) of 1st monitor and
the power cable.
NOTES
Do not connect 2nd monitor at this step.
To use a VREngine/SMD5 video board under Windows XP,
connect a VGA cable to the VGA connector provided on the
mother board.
Connect to the VGA cable
VGA cable
Connecting the DVI cable and power cable

NOTES
Use a rating-conformant power cable.
When installing this equipment under the patient environment, connect
the power cable to an insulation transformer.
See the connection diagram presented in 3.3 Installing the
Accessories and Optional Items under IN-B: Installation
Connection to Two or More RUs, 5000 plus and CR-IR356/357/359/
362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372.
Back of the PC
1st monitor
OE240056.ai
In case the 1st monitor cable is a DVI cable, the connector to be

connected differs depending on the version of the used driver CD.
See the illustration below so that the connector is connected
correctly.
Connect to the left-side
connector when the V3600
Video Driver CD (Version
8.593.1) is to be used.
Connect to the right-side

connector when the
AMD/ATI FireGL/FireMV
(Version 8.523.1) or V3600
Video Driver CD for Vista
V1.0 is to be used.
DVI cable
1st monitor
Back of the PC
AWS823037.ai
For connecting method of the DVI cable and power cable, see
the LCD panel operation manual.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN11-5
4. Installing and Setting the

Video Driver
NOTE
Screen settings can not be performed properly if the monitor cable is
disconnected during the setting process. When connecting the monitor
cable, be sure to fasten it firmly with screws.
Procedures used for installation and setting of the monitor driver are
different depending on the OS and the type of connected video board.
Carefully check the OS and the type of connected video board to
perform correct procedure.
When Using a VREngine/SMD5 for Windows XP
4.1 When Using a VREngine/SMD5 for

Windows XP
4.1.1 Installing the video driver
NOTE
Make sure to use a Ver10.0.0N1 (as marked on the CD label) driver,
which is to be used under Windows XP, and do not use a Ver3.2.7N2
driver that is for Windows Vista.
1.
Windows starts up.

See 4.1 When Using a VREngine/SMD5 for Windows XP.
When Using a FireGL V3600 for Windows XP

See 4.2 When Using a FireGL V3600 for Windows XP.
When Using a VREngine/SMD5 for Windows Vista
2.

See 4.3 When Using a VREngine/SMD5 for Windows Vista.
When Using a FireGL V3600 for Windows Vista

See 4.4 When Using a FireGL V3600 for Windows Vista.
When No Video Boards Are Added

See 4.5 When No Video Boards Are Added.
MU000031.EPS
NOTE
MU000035.EPS
The Service Utility starts, and then the IIP Service Utility window
opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN11-6
3.

4.
8.
Select 2 and then click
Insert the driver installation CD for VREngine/SMD5 into

the PC.
The InstallShield Wizard window opens.
OE240006.ai
The Monitor selection window opens.

OE240003.ai
5.
Click
9.
.
I.
The window related to the License Agreement displays.
II.
OE240004.ai
6.
Click
OE240007.ai
OE240005.ai
7.
Click
The Number of monitors window opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
I. For 1st monitor, select the currently determined resolution.

II. For 2nd monitor, make proper selections from the table below, in
accordance with setup orientation, resolution and display color of
the monitor to be connected.
Setup orientation Resolution Display color
Selection item
Color
2M Pixel Color Monitor (Landscape)
2M
Monochrome
2M Pixel Grayscale Monitor (Landscape)
3M Pixel Color Monitor
Landscape
Color
(24bit Color, Landscape, ...)
3M
3M Pixel Grayscale Monitor
Monochrome
8/10bit(Landscape)
Color
2M Pixel Color Monitor (Portrait)
2M
Monochrome
2M Pixel Grayscale Monitor (Portrait)
Portrait
3M Pixel Color Monitor
Color
(24bit Color, Portrait, ...)
3M
Monochrome
3M Pixel Grayscale Monitor 8/10bit (Portrait)
Appx IN11-7
10. Click
13. Click
The Start Copying Files window opens.
After completion of the installation processing, the InstallShield

Wizard Complete window opens.
OE240011.ai
OE240008.ai
11. Click
14. Select
and then click

.
The Hardware Installation window opens.
15. Turn the PC power OFF.

16. Viewed from the back of the PC, connect the 1st monitor DVI
cable to the right-side connector and the 2nd monitor DVI
cable to the left-side connector.
NOTES
OE240009.ai
12. Click
Leave the VGA cable remaining connected to the 1st monitor.

Depending on the PC model used (GX280, WS360 or WS370),
the mother board is mounted in right-and-left reversal, requiring
thus the video board be installed inversely top side down. When
the PC used is either of GX280, WS360 or WS370, connect the
1st monitor DVI cable to the left-side connector and the 2nd
monitor DVI cable to the right-side connector, when viewed from
the back of the PC.
DVI cable
OE240010.ai
1st monitor
2nd monitor
Back of the PC
AWS823038.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN11-8
4.1.2 Setting the monitor
1.
3.
When placing 2nd monitor in portrait orientation, perform

the following settings on it.

For a 2M color monitor

I. Holding down the <> key, press
(Power button).
II. Press the <> key to open the initial setting window.
III. Select Basic... and then Rotation to determine settings as
shown in the table below.
2M color
Monitor setup orientation

Landscape
Portrait
Invalid
Invalid
MU000031.EPS
NOTE
IV. Press Return and Menu Off to shut down the initial setting
window.
(Power button) to turn OFF the monitor power.
V. Touch
VI. Holding down the <> key, press
(Power button).
VII. Press the <> key to make sure that the initial setting window
does not open.
For a 2M monochrome/3M color/3M monochrome monitor

I. While touching Mode on the 2nd monitor control panel,
press
(Power button).
II. After the Signal Selection menu opens, check the
determined settings. Make correction as necessary and then
press the Enter key <>.
III. When the Orientation menu opens, make settings as shown
in the table below.
Landscape
Portrait
2M monochrome Portrait (soft)
Portrait (soft)
Portrait (soft)/
Portrait (hard)/
3M color
Single Link
Dual Link
Portrait (hard)
IV. Press the Enter key <>
2.
Turn the PC power ON.
MU000035.EPS
The Service Utility starts and then the IIP Service Utility window
opens.
4.
NOTE
Perform the following steps when the taskbar is displayed on the
2nd monitor side.
1. Right-click the taskbar, and remove the check mark from the
Lock the Taskbar.
2. Drag the taskbar to the bottom of 1st monitor.
3. Right-click the taskbar, and enter a checkmark for Lock the
Taskbar.
Windows starts up. After about 1 minute, the CL-AP starts running.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN11-9
5.
Select Properties from the right-click menu on the

desktop.
8.
Perform setting for 2nd monitor.
6.
7.
Perform necessary settings for 1st monitor.

I.
I.
II.
II.
III.
IV.
OE240013.ai
I. Select 2nd monitor.

II. Put a checkmark in the Extend my Windows desktop onto this
monitor check box.
OE240012.ai
I. Select 1st monitor.

II. Check to see that the 1st monitor resolution is properly
determined.
III. Put a checkmark in the Use this device as the primary monitor
check box.
IV. Put a checkmark in the Extend my Windows desktop onto this
monitor check box.
NOTE
If the 1st monitor resolution determined is not correct, make
corrections as follows.
I. Click Advanced Settings....
II. Select the Adapters tab and click List All Modes....
III. Select the correct 1st monitor resolution.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
9.
Click
10. Select 2nd monitor and then click
11. Select the VREngine/MD Series tab.

12. From the Monitor pull-down menu, select either of the
following and then click
Landscape : [3M Pixel Grayscale Monitor 8/10bit(Landscape)]

: [3M Pixel Grayscale Monitor 8/10bit(Portrait)]
Portrait
Appx IN11-10
16. Right-click a blank space on the desktop to choose
NOTE
To use another monitor of different resolution, select the one
carefully by seeing setting values presented in the table at step 9 in
Installing the video driver above.
13. Restart the PC.
Properties from the menu that opens.

17. Select the Settings tab.

18. Select 2nd monitor and then click
Windows starts up.

19. Select the VREngine/MD Series tab.
14. When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper
20. From the Color/Palette pull-down menu, select 24-bit

color-conversion grayscale and click [OK].
21. Restart the PC.

Windows starts up.
MU000031.EPS
NOTE
.
MU000031.EPS
NOTE
MU000035.EPS

opens.

MU000035.EPS
opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN11-11

Return to the desktop screen.
24. Right-click a blank space on the desktop, and then choose

25. Select the Settings tab.

26. From the Color quality pull-down menu, select Highest (32
bit) and click
27. Move the monitor icon so that the actually determined

monitor setup orientation is selected.
28. Select a monitor icon displayed being connected to the VGA

cable and remove checkmark of the Extend my Windows
desktop onto the monitor check box.
The monitor icon turns inactive.
29. Click
NOTE
In case the Monitor Settings window opens, click [Yes].
30. To place 2nd monitor in portrait orientation, turn it vertically.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN11-12
4.2 When Using a FireGL V3600 for Windows XP
3.
The system returns to the desktop screen opening then a window

indicating that new hardware was found.

NOTES
Be sure to use Nanaos driver CD (as marked with AMD/ATI FireGL/
FireMV (Version: 8.523.1) on the CD label) that is to be used under
Windows XP.
Do not use the V3600 Video Driver CD for Vista V1.0 driver CD that
is to be used under Windows Vista.
V3600 Video Driver CD (Version: 8.593.1) (114Y5085705A00) can
be used under either one of Windows XP and Windows Vista.
1.
4.
Click [Cancel].
5.
Insert the driver installation CD for FireGL V3600 into the

PC.
The Fire MV 2250 CD window opens.
6.
Perform the following procedure.

For driver CD [AMD/ATI FireGL/FireMV (Version: 8.523.1)]
I.
Click InstallDrivers.
Windows starts up.

After about 1 minute, the CL starts running.
2.

OE240014.ai
The window related to the Welcome to the InstallShield

Wizard for ATI Software displays.
MU000031.EPS
NOTE
OE240015.ai

MU000035.EPS
opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN11-13
For driver CD [V3600 Video Driver CD (Version: 8.593.1)]

I. Click Install Software.
7.
Click
OE240016.ai
AWS823006.ai
II. Select Install Drivers.
8.
Click
The Select Components windows opens.
9.
Click
in the Express: Recommended box.
AWS823007.ai
III. Select Windows XP.
OE240017.ai
Installation processing completes in a few seconds and a window

like that shown below opens.
INApp11001.ai
The window related to the Welcome to the InstallShield

Wizard for ATI Software displays.
OE240052.ai
OE240015.ai
10. Select
and then click

.

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN11-14
1.
When driver CD V3600 Video Driver CD (Version: 8.593.1)

is used, connect the 1st monitor DVI cable to the left-side
connector (in the case the 1st monitor cable is a DVI cable),
and the 2nd monitor DVI cable to the right-side connector,
both viewed from the back of the PC.
NOTE
When driver CD AMD/ATI FireGL/FireMV (Version: 8.523.1) is
used, do not connect the 2nd monitor at this step.
VI. Holding down the <> key, press the

(Power button).
does not open.
For a 2M monochrome/3M color/3M monochrome monitor

I. While touching Mode on the 2nd monitor control panel, press
(Power button).
II. After the Signal Selection menu opens, check the determined
settings. Make correction as necessary and press the Enter key
<>.
III. When the Orientation menu opens, make settings as shown in
the table below.
Landscape
Portrait
Portrait (soft)
3M color
Portrait (soft)/Single Link Portrait (hard)/Dual Link
Portrait (hard)
DVI cable
IV. Press the Enter key <>.
1st monitor
2nd monitor
DVI cable
Back of the PC

(Power button).
INApp11002.ai
2.

For driver CD [AMD/ATI FireGL/FireMV (Version: 8.523.1)]
(Power button).
2M color

Landscape
Portrait
Invalid
Invalid
window.
V. Touch
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
DXL824006.ai
Screen Manager displays.

II. Press the <> key.
III. Make sure that Basic is selected and press the <> key.
IV. Make sure that Rotation is selected and press the <> key.
V. Use the [] key to select Active and press the <> key.
VI. Select Menu Off to shut down the initial setting window.
VII. Touch
VIII. Holding down the <> key, press
(Power button).
IX. Press the <> key to make sure that the initial setting window
does not open.
Appx IN11-15
For a 2M monochrome monitor

(Power button).
III. Select Portrait (HW) in the Orientation menu and press the
Enter key <>.
Mode
AWS827014.ai

(Power button).
DXL824008.ai
II. Select Color 8bit in the Signal Selection menu and press the
Enter key <>.
Enter key <>.
Mode
DXL824008.ai
II. Select 8/10bit in the Signal Selection menu and press the
Enter key <>.
III. Select Portrait (SW) in the Orientation menu and press the
Enter key <>.
AWS827014.ai

(Power button).
Mode
AWS823056.ai
DXL824008.ai
II. Select Dual Link in the Signal Selection menu and press the
Enter key <>.
3.

AWS827013.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN11-16
4.

6.
When driver CD AMD/ATI FireGL/FireMV (Version: 8.523.1)

is used, connect the 1st monitor DVI cable to the right-side
and the 2nd monitor DVI cable to the left-side connector, as
illustrated below.
NOTE
When driver CD V3600 Video Driver CD (Version: 8.593.1) is
used, proceed to the next step because the monitors have already
been connected.
MU000031.EPS
NOTE
DVI cable

MU000035.EPS
opens.
5.
1st monitor
Lock the Taskbar.
Taskbar.
Back of the PC
AWS823038.ai
7.
NOTE
2nd monitor side.
2nd monitor
Right-click a blank space on the desktop to choose

Properties from menu that opens.
8.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN11-17
9.
10. Perform setting for 2nd monitor.
Perform setting for 1st monitor.
I.
I.
II.
II.
III.
IV.
III.
OE240019.ai
I. Select 1st monitor.

II. Check to see that the 1st monitor resolution is properly
determined.
III. Put a checkmark in the Use this device as the primary monitor
check box.
IV. Put a checkmark in the Extend my Windows desktop onto this
monitor check box.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE240020.ai

II. Check to see that the 2nd monitor resolution is properly
determined.
III. Put a checkmark in the Extend my Windows desktop onto this
monitor check box.
11. Click
Appx IN11-18
12. To place 2nd monitor in portrait orientation, return to the

desktop and then perform the following settings.
I.
When a 2M color monitor is used, right-click the ATI icon in the

task tray at the lower right of the window, and then sequentially
select 2. ATI FireGL V3600, Rotate display and Right
(90cw).
REFERENCE
If you double-click the ATI icon in the task tray to open
CATALYST Control Center, you can see what was determined.
OE240053.ai
OE240021.ai
REFERENCE
Depending on the monitor model used, Left (90 ccw) is
appropriate.
II. Turn the monitor vertically.
NOTE
In case a window like that shown below opens while necessary
and proceed to the
settings are being processed, click
next step.
OE240018.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN11-19
4.3 When Using a VREngine/SMD5 for

Windows Vista
3.
4.
Insert the driver installation CD for VREngine/SMD5 into

the PC.
5.
Open Windows Explorer and double-click Setup

InstallShield.exe in the CD.
NOTE
Make sure to use a Ver3.2.7N2 (as marked on the CD label) driver,
which is to be used under Windows Vista, and do not use a
Ver10.0.0N1 driver that is for Windows XP.
1.

The InstallShield Wizard window opens.

Windows starts up.
2.

AWS823001.ai
6.
Click
MU000031.EPS
NOTE
AWS823002.ai

MU000035.EPS
opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN11-20
7.
Click
NOTE
MU000035.EPS
opens.
AWS823003.ai
8.
Click
Installation processing starts.

After installation completed, the InstallShield Wizard Complete
window opens.
9.
Select
and then click

.
The PC restarts.
After restart, the CL-AP starts running.
NOTE
2nd monitor side.
Lock the Taskbar.
Taskbar.
The system returns to the desktop screen and then the Monitor
selection window opens.
MU000031.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN11-21
15. Click
A window opens to indicate that the installation processing was

successfully completed.
I.
16. Select
and then click

.
II.

18. Viewed from the back of the PC, connect the 1st monitor DVI
OE240022.ai
I. For 1st monitor, select the currently determined resolution.

II. For 2nd monitor, select either of the following, in accordance with
the monitor setup orientation.
Landscape : [3M Pixel Grayscale Monitor Type-2(Landscape)]
: [3M Pixel Grayscale Monitor Type-2 (Portrait)]
Portrait
13. Click
cable to the right-side connector (in the case the 1st monitor
cable is a DVI cable), and the 2nd monitor DVI cable to the
left-side connector.
DVI cable
The Confirmation of setting window opens.
1st monitor
2nd monitor
14. Click
Back of the PC
AWS823038.ai
OE240023.ai
OE240024.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN11-22
1.
3.


I.
While touching Mode on the 2nd monitor control panel, press

(Power button).
settings. Make corrections as necessary and press the Enter key
<>.
the table below.
MU000031.EPS
NOTE

Landscape
Portrait
Portrait (hard)

2.

MU000035.EPS
opens.
4.

5.

desktop.
6.

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN11-23
7.
Perform settings for 1st monitor.

I.
II.
III.
IV.
Select 1st monitor.

Put a checkmark to This is my main monitor.
Put a checkmark to Extend the desktop onto this monitor.
Check to see that the 1st monitor resolution is properly
determined.
I.
II.
I.
III.
IV.
II.
III.
AWS823005.ai
NOTE
If the 2nd monitor resolution determined is not appropriate, make
IV.
I. Click Advanced Settings.

III. Select the correct 2nd monitor resolution.
AWS823004.ai
NOTE
If the 1st monitor resolution determined is not appropriate, make
9.

10. Click
Move the monitor icon so that the actually determined

.
NOTE
8.
Perform settings for 2nd monitor.

I.
II.
III.
IV.
Select 2nd monitor.

Determine the Colors to be Highest (32 bit).
Change the Resolution to 1536 2048.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
In case the Display Settings window opens at this step, click [Yes].
11. To place 2nd monitor in portrait orientation, turn it vertically.
Appx IN11-24
3.
4.4 When Using a FireGL V3600 for

Windows Vista

NOTES
4.
Insert the driver installation CD FireGL V3600 into the PC.
Be sure to use Nanaos driver CD (as marked with V3600 Video

Driver CD for Vista V1.0 on the CD label) that is to be used under
Windows Vista.
Do not use the AMD/ATI FireGL/FireMV (Version: 8.523.1) driver CD
that is to be used under Windows XP.
V3600 Video Driver CD (Version: 8.593.1) (114Y5085705A00) can
be used under either one of Windows XP and Windows Vista.
5.
Open Windows Explorer and double-click Autorun.exe.

The ATI Catalyst Software window opens.
6.
Select Install Software.
1.
2.

Windows starts up.
AWS823006.ai

7.
Select Install Drivers.
AWS823007.ai
MU000031.EPS
NOTE
MU000035.EPS
opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN11-25
8.
Select Windows VISTA.
II. Click
AWS823012.ai
AWS823008.ai
The FireGL Drivers window opens.

I.
Click
AWS823009.ai
9.
Click
DXL824011.ai
The FireGL Drivers: Installation Folder window opens.
II. Click
DXL824012.ai
11. Click
AWS823010.ai
10. Perform the following settings on it.
For driver CD [V3600 Video Driver CD for Vista V1.0)]

I.
Click
The PC restarts.
After restart, the End User License Agreement window opens.

AWS823013.ai
AWS823011.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN11-26
12. Click [Accept].
opens.
NOTE
When a message saying Specify folder to install to. appears, click
[Yes].
After installation completed, ATI Catalyst@ Install Manager
window opens.
NOTES
Perform the following steps if the Service Utility is not starting.
1. Press <Ctrl> + <Alt> + <Delete>.
2. Click [Task Manager].
The Windows Task Manager window opens.
3. Select the Processes tab.
4. Right-click on the IIPMAIN.exe, and select End Process
Tree.
AWS823014.ai
13. Click
The PC restarts.
After restart, the CL-AP starts running.
MU000031.EPS
NOTE
AWS823047.ai


5. Click [End process tree].
opens.

MU000035.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN11-27

17. When driver CD V3600 Video Driver CD for Vista V1.0 is to
be used, connect the 1st monitor DVI cable to the right-side
and the 2nd monitor DVI cable to the left-side connector,
both viewed from the back of the PC.
When driver CD V3600 Video Driver CD (Version 8.593.1)
is to be used, connect the 1st monitor DVI cable to the leftside connector (in the case the 1st monitor cable is a DVI
cable), and the 2nd monitor DVI cable to the right-side
connector, both viewed from the back of the PC.
When driver CD V3600 Video Driver CD for Vista V1.0 is

to be used
DVI cable
1st monitor
2nd monitor
Back of the PC
When driver CD V3600 Video Driver CD (Version 8.593.1) is

to be used
DVI cable
1st monitor
2nd monitor
DVI cable
Back of the PC
INApp11003.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN11-28
1.

For driver CD [V3600 Video Driver CD for Vista V1.0]
(Power button).
2M color

Landscape
Portrait
Invalid
Invalid
window.
V. Touch
VI. Holding down the <> key, press
(Power button).
does not open.
For a 2M monochrome/3M color monitor

(Power button).
settings. Make correction as necessary and press the Enter key
<>.
the table below.
Landscape
Portrait
Portrait (soft)
3M color
Portrait (soft)/Single Link Portrait (hard)/Dual Link

(Power button).
DXL824006.ai

VII. Touch
(Power button).
does not open.

(Power button).
Mode
DXL824008.ai
Enter key <>.
Enter key <>.
AWS827014.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN11-29

(Power button).
III. Select Portrait (SW) in the Orientation menu and press the
Enter key <>.
Mode
AWS823056.ai
DXL824008.ai
II. Select Dual Link in the Signal Selection menu and press the
Enter key <>.
2.

3.

AWS827013.ai
Enter key <>.
MU000031.EPS
NOTE
AWS827014.ai

(Power button).

Mode
MU000035.EPS
DXL824008.ai
II. Select 8/10bit in the Signal Selection menu and press the
Enter key <>.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
opens.
Appx IN11-30
4.
7.
NOTE
Perform the following procedures when the taskbar is displayed on
the 2nd monitor side.
Lock the Taskbar.
3. Right-click the taskbar, and enter a check mark for Lock the
Taskbar.
I.
5.
II.
III.

desktop.
IV.
6.

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE240054.ai
I.
II.
III.
IV.
Select 1st monitor.

Put a checkmark to Extend the desltop onto this monitor.
determined.
Appx IN11-31
8.
11. To place 2nd monitor in portrait orientation, perform the
following settings.
I.
I.
When a 2M color monitor is used, right-click the ATI icon in the

task tray at the lower right of the window, and then sequentially
select 2. ATI FireGL V3600, Rotate display and Right
(90cw)..
REFERENCE
Depending on the monitor model used, Left (90 ccw) is
appropriate.
II. Turn the monitor vertically.
II.
III.
OE240055.ai

II. Put a checkmark to Extend the desktop onto this monitor.
III. Check to see that the 2nd monitor resolution is properly
determined.
9.

10. Click
NOTE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN11-32
4.5 When No Video Boards Are Added
VII. Touch
(Power button).
does not open.
4.5.1 Connecting the monitor
1.
Connect both the 1st and 2nd monitors to the PC.

Connect the 1st monitor VGA cable to the VGA connector on the
back of the PC.
Connect the 2nd monitor DVI cable to the DVI connector on the
back of the PC.

(Power button).
NOTE
Place the 2nd monitor horizontally.
Mode
VGA cable
DVI cable
DXL824008.ai
Enter key <>.
Enter key <>.
1st monitor
2nd monitor
Back of the PC
DXL824005.ai
AWS827014.ai
2.
Perform the following settings on 2nd monitor.

I.
Holding down the <> key, press
3.
Have the 2nd monitor be placed horizontally.
(Power button).
DXL824007.ai
DXL824006.ai

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN11-33
6.
1.

2.


I.
II.
III.
IV.
Select 1st monitor.

determined.
I.
MU000031.EPS
NOTE
II.
III.

IV.
AWS823004.ai
NOTE
MU000035.EPS
opens.
3.
If the 1st monitor resolution determined is not appropriate, make


4.

desktop.
5.

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN11-34
7.

I.
II.
III.
IV.
Select 2nd monitor.

Determine the Colors to be Highest (32 bit).
Change the Resolution to 1200 1600.
I.
II.
III.
IV.
AWS823005.ai
NOTE
If the 2nd monitor resolution determined is not appropriate, make
III. Select the correct 2nd monitor resolution.
8.

9.
Click
NOTE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN11-35
4.6 Adjusting Width and Height on the 2nd

Monitor (Common to VREngine/SMD5
and FireGL V3600)
2.
Drag the monitor icon of the 2nd monitor and adjust the
position of 2nd monitor.
To change the width and height to be displayed on a different monitor,

when the mouse pointer or the like was moved from the 1st monitor to
the 2nd monitor as desired by the user, perform the following settings.
1.

For Windows XP
I. Right-click a blank space on the desktop to choose Properties
from the menu that opens.
The Display Properties window opens
For Windows Vista

I. Right-click a blank space on the desktop to choose
Personalization from the menu that opens.
AWS823016.ai
II. Select Display Settings.

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN11-36
5. Changing and Setting the 2nd

Monitor
5.1 Changing the 2nd Monitor
Described herein is the procedure used to change the 2nd monitor.
1.
Uninstall the currently used driver for video board.
2.
Change the video board.
For details, see 1. Uninstalling the Video Driver.
For details, see 2. Connecting the Video Board.
3.
Change the monitor.
4.
Perform installation and setting for video driver.
For details, see 3. Installing the Monitor.
For details, see 4. Installing and Setting the Video Driver.
5.2 Settings Necessary for the 2nd

Monitor to Recognize the Linking
Application
CAUTION
When the 2nd monitor was changed, it is necessary to have the
changed 2nd monitor recognize the linking application.
Perform this recognition processing with respect to all the
installed linking applications.
1.
Insert the linking application installation CD into the PC.

The main window opens.
2.
Click
The Select information window opens.
3.
Select the type of connected 2nd monitor and click

.
DXL824023.ai
The system returns to the main window.
4.
Click
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
5.
6.
Restart the PC.
Appx IN11-37
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN11-38
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN11-39
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Appx IN11-40

OE consists of the following:
OE1
OE2
OE3
OE4
OE5
OE6
OE7
OE8
OE9
OE10
OE11
OE12
OE13
OE14
CL+Local Printer (E-i/f Connection)

CL+HI-C/QA-WS/OD-F (FINP: Image Input/Output)
CL+HI-C655/QA-WS/FCR VIEW (DICOM CR Storage)
CL+Other (DICOM CR Storage: Transfer of Processed Images)
CL+FN-PS551/DRYPIX/FM-DP L (DICOM Print)
CL+FN-PS551 or 5000 Series (FINP: Print Output)
CL+RIS/IDC4 (ID Online)
CL+RIS (DICOM MWM/DICOM PPS)
CL+Archiver (Storage Commitment Push)
CL+QA-WS (Transfer of Energy Subtraction Images)
CL+F-RIS (Ordering) [Applicable only in Japan]
CL+X-Ray Controller (Serial Connection)
CL+RIS (Ordering - Serial Connection) [Applicable only in Japan]
CL+Receipt Computer/Electronic Patient Record System
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE15
OE16
OE17
OE18
OE19
OE20
OE21
OE22
OE23
OE24
OE25
OE26
CL+CL (Cluster Connection)

CL+Other (DICOM MG Storage: Digital Mammogram Transfer)
CL+Removable Media (DICOM Media Storage)
CL+POCKET id Console (Portable Exposure Function)
CL+Synapse Server (Web Query)
CL+DICOM Server (Image Reprint)
CL+T-RIS (Ordering) [Applicable only in Japan]
CL+PDI (Portable Data for Imaging)
CL+DAP (Dose-area Product Meter)
Precise Enlargement Function
QA ROI Measurement
CL+Synapse RIS
OE-I
Control Sheet
Issue date
Revision number
10/20/2000
12/10/2000
00
00

Revision (FM2950)
12/10/2000
04/10/2001
00
01
05/30/2001
02
05/30/2001
08/30/2001
02
03
03/20/2002
04
03/20/2002
07/20/2002
04
05
07/20/2002
11/30/2002
05
06
03/01/2003
07
03/01/2003
07
08/20/2003
08
08/20/2003
08

Previous Chapter B Connecting the CL to
Other Equipment modified (OE13) and new
release (OE47) (FM2951)
I, II, 1-1, 1-48, 13, 2-29, 11, 12,
1416, 3-218, 4-218, 5-114, 16,
17, 6-19, 1114, 7-1, 2, 415,
8-110-17
2-13
I, II, 1-1, 9, 10, 2-3, 14, 15, 17, 18,
3-3, 16, 17, 4-3, 16, 17, 5-1, 2, 6,
11, 12, 14, 16, 6-14, 6, 8, 1113,
7-812, 8-1, 14, 10-13, 14, 11-1, 2,
12-112
I, II, 2-9, 10, 3-1, 2, 8, 10, 11, 4-1,
10, 11, 5-1, 68, 1012, 6-1, 8-1, 4,
10, 1315, 18
8-2, 16, 17, 9-10, 11
IIV, 1-1, 3-9, 11, 12, 4-9, 11, 5-11,
8-2, 3, 1316, 18, 9-10, 14-1, 2
3-13, 8-1, 17, 19, 20, 9-11,12
I, II, 3-11, 14, 4-11, 12, 14, 15-124,
16-116
I, II, 1-4, 7, 8, 2-59, 3-1, 510, 12,
15, 4-512, 15, 5-412, 14, 6-59,
7-3, 4, 711, 8-512, 17, 9-610,
10-516, 12-3, 7, 13-3, 7, 8,
16-510, 13
1-9, 3-14, 4-14, 5-13, 10-17, 18,
13-4
I, II, 1-9, 2-12, 3-13, 15, 4-13, 15,
5-13, 6-11, 7-9, 11, 8-7, 9, 13,
1519, 12-7, 13-8, 15-12, 13, 16-12
8-2022
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
Reason
Pages affected
All pages
I, II, i, ii, B1-110, B2-115,
B3-116
B2-16
All pages
OE-II
Control Sheet
Issue date
Revision number
12/10/2003
09
12/10/2003
02/20/2004
09
10
07/30/2004
11

07/30/2004
11
07/30/2005
14
07/30/2005
11/30/2005
07/30/2006
14
15
16

07/30/2006
07/20/2007
16
17

07/20/2007
05/09/2008
17
18

10/31/2008
19
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Reason
Pages affected
I, III, 1-8, 1-12, 2-6, 15, 3-6, 17, 4-6,
17, 5-5, 11, 14, 15, 6-6, 13, 7-5, 7, 9,
10, 12, 1416, 18, 8-16, 21, 9-11,
10-17, 12-4, 9, 13-5, 7, 11, 14-1, 2,
15-5, 6, 9, 22, 16-14
1-13, 14, 7-11, 13, 17, 12-1012
All pages
I, III, 1-7, 3-11, 15, 4-11, 15, 5-14,
7-7, 8-19, 9-5, 10-12, 14, 16, 12-1,
610, 13-7, 14, 14-1, 15-1015, 28,
16-10, 14, 17-112, 18-1, 2,
19-110
1-811, 7-818, 12-1114, 13-813,
15-1627
IIII, 1-1, 14, 2-16, 3-14, 15, 18,
4-4, 14, 15, 18, 5-3, 8, 14, 17, 6-2,
4, 14, 7-2, 18, 8-5, 1821, 24, 9-12,
10-16, 18, 11-1, 12-2, 9, 10, 13,
13-1, 9, 12, 13, 15-5, 27, 16-1214,
16, 17-12, 19-1, 37, 10, 20-122
8-2123, 19-8, 9
I, III, 21-14
I, III, 3-8, 10, 4-8, 10, 12-1, 2, 5, 6,
913, 16, 18-126, 19-1, 38, 12
19-911
I, III, 1-8, 13, 2-5, 3-5, 11, 12, 15,
4-5, 11, 12, 15, 5-4, 16, 6-5, 7-3, 4,
8, 8-16, 18, 20, 10-12, 14, 16, 11-1,
12-3, 6, 10, 13-14, 16-911, 14,
17-4, 8, 9, 18-4, 19-3, 20-19, 20
3-13, 14, 16, 4-13, 14, 16, 10-15
I, III, 2-3, 3-3, 4-3, 5-2, 6-3, 7-5, 11,
13, 8-3, 4, 13, 16, 9-3, 10-3, 12-10,
15-2, 16-2, 17-1, 7, 8, 18-1, 4, 19-2,
7, 20-3, 22-112
I, III, 1-1, 8, 2-1, 5, 6, 3-1, 2, 5, 6,
4-1, 46, 5-1, 4, 5, 13, 6-1, 5, 6,
7-1, 8, 8-1, 2, 9-1, 6, 12-10, 15-1,
17-1, 4, 11, 22-57, 11, 12, 23-112
OE-III
Control Sheet
Issue date
Revision number
11/30/2009
20
11/30/2009
20
03/31/2010
21
03/31/2010
21
12/10/2010
22
12/10/2010
22
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Reason
Pages affected
I, IV, 1-1, 2-4, 5, 3-4, 5, 8, 12, 4-4, 5,
8, 11, 14, 5-1, 3, 4, 7, 12, 6-4, 5,
7-2, 58, 20, 8-1, 4, 5, 9-4, 5, 10-4,
5, 12-2, 58, 18 15-3, 4, 1518,
16-4, 7, 9, 13, 17-1, 35, 11, 18-1,
5, 9, 17, 24, 28, 20-4 19-57, 20-1,
4, 5, 7, 22-1, 36, 8, 9, 14, 23-8,
24-146
7-919, 12-3, 4, 1017, 15-514,
1932, 18-68, 1016, 1823,
2527, 19-812, 22-7, 8, 1013
I, IV, 1-7, 14, 2-4, 5, 16, 3-4, 5, 18,
4-4, 5, 18, 5-3, 4, 17, 6-4, 5, 14,
7-112, 16, 8-4, 5, 15, 24, 9-4, 5,
12, 10-4, 5, 18, 12-19, 11, 12,
15-23, 24, 31, 16-4, 16, 17-13, 5,
7, 912, 18-2, 3, 5, 6, 14, 24,
19-35, 12, 20-4, 5, 21, 22-3, 4, 11,
12, 14, 23-2, 6, 11, 24-122,
25-116
7-1315, 12-10, 13, 14, 18-4, 713,
1523
I, IV, 3-12, 4-12, 8-2123, 12-11,
16-11, 17-9, 26-116
1-15, 16, 3-19, 20, 4-1320,
5-19, 20, 6-15, 16, 8-2428,
10-19, 20, 11-3, 4, 12-15, 16,
13-3, 4, 14-3, 4, 16-10, 17-1016,
20-23, 24, 21-3, 4, 22-15, 16,
24-23, 24,
OE-IV

The setup procedures set forth below are used for printing images onto
E-i/f-connected printers from the CR-IR346/348CL.
NOTES
The CR-IR 346/348CL and the Local Print are abbreviated
hereafter CL and LP, respectively.
When the OS used is Windows Vista, this function is not supported.
Before setup
CL requirements
The CL main unit must have been set up accordingly.
Software version required : A00 or later.
The LP option key (IR 346 LOCAL PRINT) is required.
REFERENCE
If the PEI board is not mounted when the LP option key is installed, the
CL-AP does not run.
Printer requirements
The printer main unit setup procedure must have been completed.
The connections to the following models are supported.
CR-LP414N/FL-IM2636N (A05 or later)

FL-IM3543N/FL-IM3543MN (A06 or later)
CR-LP415/FL-IM2636II (A06 or later)
CR-LP416/FL-IM3543II (A06 or later)
CR-LP417/CR-LP418/FL-IM D/FL-IM DM (A10 or later)
CR-DP T (C08 or later)
CR-DP 3543T (C03 or later)
CR-DP L (B00 or later)
NOTES
The CR-LP414, FL-IM3543, and FL-IM3543M are not supported.
Even when the printer prints images onto the CR-DP T or
CR-DP3543T, the print process is performed so that the printer
resolution is 10 lines/mm. As is the case with the FCR5000 Series, the
printer enlarges the print image to 7/6 the original size.
The CR-DP L printers support printout generation at a resolution of
20 lines/mm.
For details, see 3.2 Typical Procedure for Achieving

Recovery from an LP (Local Printer) Printout Generation
Failure under MT: Machine Troubleshooting.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE1-1
Overall work flow

Install the PEI board and connect the
CL to the LP with an E-i/f cable.
1. Hardware Setup
Install the LP option key and reinstall

the AP key. Register the LP. Set up the
LP system information and film
annotation character format as necessary.
2. Software Setup
Use the LP to generate images on film

and verify output characters.
3. Verifying the
Connection
Make an LP configuration backup of the

CL setup file.
4. Backing Up the
Setup File
00056009.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE1-2
1.1 Installing the PEI Board
1. Hardware Setup
For the CL and printer, the following hardware setup procedures must
be completed:
Installing the PEI board on

the CL-PCs PCI bus slot
1.2 Connecting the Cable
Connecting the E-i/f cable

between the CL and printer

NOTE
3.
Verify that the switches on the PEI board are properly set.
NOTE
DPSW1 switches.
FL-IM3543MN
DPSW1
DPSW2
DPSW3
SW0
SW2 and SW5
SW3 and SW4

1 and 2: OFF; 3 to 8: ON
1 to 8: OFF
Jumpers removed.
Before installing the PEI board, make sure that the CL-AP is installed.
The PEI01A driver is properly recognized only when the CL-AP is
installed.
1.
Shut down the CL and then turn OFF the CL-PC power.
2.
DPSW3
ON
1 2 3
SW3
SW2
SW0
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
SW5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
DPSW2 ON DPSW1
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
1 2 3 4
OFF
SW4
PEI01A board
00000251.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE1-3
Settings for models other than those listed above

DPSW1
1 to 8: ON
DPSW2
1 to 8: OFF
DPSW3
SW0
SW2 and SW5 1 and 2 short-circuited.
1 2 3
SW3
SW2
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
SW5
I.
II.

When the card cage is removed, its PC board interferes with a
cable behind the hard disk. A workaround is to slightly pull the
disk unit on the front of the CL-PC toward you before removing
the card cage.
#1 [Push]
Disk unit
#2 [Pull]
DPSW3
ON
SW0
For GX110
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
DPSW2 ON DPSW1
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
1 2 3 4
OFF
SW4
ON
FR
#1 [Push]
Cables behind the hard disk
CL-PC
(OptiPlex GX110)
OE000006.EPS
III. Raise the lever as illustrated by the arrow.
IV. Remove the card cage.
V. Mount a PEI board in a PCI slot within the card cage.
PEI01A board
V. PEI01A board
III. Lever
00000007.EPS
4.
PCI slot
IV. Card cage
ON
FR
When the PC used is a model other than GX110 or GX150,

see Appendix C Removing/Reinstalling the Board (PEI/PSI)
CL-PC
OE000007.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE1-4
VI. Mount the card cage in the CL-PC.

VII. Restore the disk unit.
VIII. Reinstall the CL-PC cover.
With the E-i/f cable that is supplied with the CL, connect the CL to the
printer.
For GX150
PEI board

III. Mount a PEI board in an empty PCI slot.
CL
Printer
E-i/f cable
Remove
00000015.EPS
II. Card cage

III. PEI board
AGP slot
Extension card
slot connector
NT
O
FR
CL-PC
(GX150)
OE000001.EPS

010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE1-5
2.1 CL Software Setup
2. Software Setup
This section describes the procedures used for setup of CL and printer
software.
Set up grayed-out items as required. All other items must be set up.
2.1 CL software setup
2.1.1 Installing the LP Option Key
2.1.2 Reinstalling the AP Key
2.1.4 Registering the Printer for
Automatic Image Printout
When a Study is Completed
2.1.5 Setting the System Information
for CL/LP Connection
2.1.6 Setting the Film Annotation
Character Format
2.2 Printer Main Unit Setup
Install the LP option key

reinstall the AP key.
Register the printers.
Set up the LP system
information and film
annotation character
format as necessary.
2.1.1 Installing the LP Option Key

To use the LP, the IR346 LOCAL PRINT option key is needed.
1.
Insert the optional key CD into the PC.

Within several seconds, the installation start window opens.
2.
Click
A window opens to indicate the completion of LP option key

installation.
00000241.EPS
3.
Click
4.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE1-6
6.
Select
.
If the option key is installed, be sure to reinstall the AP key.

Use the AP key CD (114Y5342002A: Version A00 or later) to reinstall
the AP key. The reinstallation procedure is shown below.
1.
The installation finish window opens.
7.
Click
8.
Click
The desktop window opens.
2.
and click
menu to
select Properties.
9.
10. Ensure that the PEI board driver has been installed
00000419.EPS
3.
Click
appropriately and close both the Device Manager and

System Properties windows.
4.
NOTE
For Windows XP, perform steps 5 through 10 to install the PEI board
driver.
5.
Restart the CL.

After restarting the CL, the Found New Hardware Wizard window
opens.
10000002.EPS
10000001.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE1-7
1.
REFERENCE
Turn ON the CL power.

Windows 2000/XP starts up and then the CL-AP starts running in
about one minute.
1. To exit the AP, choose Shut Down on the
REFERENCE
) menu.
If the AP or Windows 2000/XP is already running, start the Service

Utility as directed under REFERENCE in step 2. below.
2.
(or
2. Click [OK] while holding down the <Shift> key on the shutdown
window.
Fuji Film, and FCR.

the window.
3.
window opens.
MU000031.EPS
OE000025.EPS
MU000035.EPS
NOTE
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
OE1-8
2.1.4 Registering the Printer for Automatic Image

2.
Click

window.
Described herein is the procedure used for registering the printer for
automatic image printout when a study is completed.
For a printer that outputs prints only through the QA operation, no
registration is required at this step.
1.

00000081.EPS
3.
Click
The FTP CONNECTION window opens.
4.

in the

the
in
field and select the device
(LOCAL).
00000131.EPS
NOTE
If the LP option key is not installed, you cannot choose LOCAL.
5.
Click
00000404.EPS
6.

saved.
7.
Click

010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
OE1-9
2.1.5 Setting the System Information for CL/LP

Connection
2.1.6 Setting the Film Annotation Character Format

Perform the following film annotation character format setup procedure,
for instance, to specify the image information to be printed out onto film,
the annotation character format, and the use of an image-frame.
If the following printer use is intended, change the LP system

information.
When an old-type printer is to be used
CR-LP414N/FL-IM2636N, FL-IM3543N/FL-IM3543MN
When the cable connecting the printer to the CL exceeds 60m
When the film sort function is to be used
1.
REFERENCE
The default film annotation character format for print output is basically
the same as for printouts generated by the FCR 5000 Series.
Film output differences between the CL and the 5000 Series
are stated in 2.2 Precautions of the Film Annotation
Character Format under Print Output Function in
From the Setup Configuration Item window, click the

sign for
.

2.
Click

the window.
3.
Enter the following settings as needed:
1.
From the Setup Configuration Item window, click the sign

within
.
2.
Click

the window.
NOTE
Setup items 1 through 9 refer to the LP-related system information.
Items 10 thereafter are for the film annotation character format.
3.

saved.
5.
Click
010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)

For details on the setup procedure, see 2. Setup Necessary
When Editing the Film Annotation Character Format, under
Print Output Function in FR1: Function-specific
Reference.
For details on individual setup items, see 1. Setup Necessary

When Connecting the LP, under Print Output Function in
4.
4.

saved.
5.
Click
OE1-10
1.

Close on the Config (F) menu.
2.

010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)

Set up the printer main unit software to ensure that images fed from the
CL can be printed out.
When other connected equipment is the FM-DPL, FM-DP3543 or
FM-DP2636, see System Settings in Installation (IN) and
Chapter C under Setting to Work.
For other printers, see the Service Manual that comes with each
printer.
OE1-11
3.1 Starting the CL-AP
3. Verifying the Connection
Version B software
This section describes the procedures for printing images onto the
printer from the CL for film annotation character format verification
purposes.
OE000099.EPS
3.2 Verifying the Film Annotation

Character Format

1.
From the
menu, sequentially select Programs,

The CL opening window appears on the display.
After about two minutes, the CL-AP reception window opens.
Version A software
OE000017.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE1-12
3.2 Verifying the Film Annotation Character Format

Character Format
1.
If any abnormality is found, see Print Output Function

under FR1: Function-specific Reference.
Print out a read image.

For details on the print output procedure, see
FCR XG-1 CR-IR346CL in the CL Operation Manual.
2.
Check whether the film annotation character format

the film. Also, check for blurred, chipped, or otherwise
abnormal character printings.
REFERENCE
(image size: 35 35cm (14" 14"); print format: TWIN). When the
default settings are used, character strings (1) through (19) are printed
out.
FUJIFILM HOSPITAL
04001676
A0000 A020
(12) IP number
(4) Patient ID
(5) Patient name
R->L
G 1.0G#0.7+0.50R5Q0.5
SKULL, GENERAL
L 4.0S200C 1.2 1.0AP
Surgi
01
(10) Film mark

(7) Gender

1992 11 27 [17:43]
G1.0G#0.7+0.50R5Q1.0
[F] 23
SCALE 50% RT-04

(14) Exposure menu name (17) Exposure time(11) Reduction ratio
(6) Exposure date
(19) Technologists code
00000034.EPS
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
OE1-13
4. Backing Up the Setup File

Make a backup of the CL setup file.
For making a backup, have the following item on hand:
Storage media (FD, USB memory stick or the like)
For details on the backup procedure, see 5. Restoring/Backing
Up the Configuration File Configuration Restore/Backup under
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE1-14
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE1-15
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE1-16
CL+HI-C/QA-WS/OD-F
(FINP: Image Input/Output)
This chapter describes the setup procedures for image input/output
using the FINP between the CR-IR346/348CL and other connected
equipment.
Connection/setup example
HOST name : FCR-CSL*
IP address : 172.16.1.20*
CL
LP
Reprint
NOTE
The CR-IR346/348CL and the HI-C655/HI-C654/QA-WS/OD-F614/624
are abbreviated hereafter CL and other connected equipment,
respectively.
Image output
TCP/IP
FRUP
RU
Image input
(reprint)
Prior to setup
CL requirements

Software version required: A00 or later
The FINP image input/output option key (IR346 DMS NET-WORK
IN-OUT) is necessary.
Other connected equipment
The main units of other connected equipment must have been set up
accordingly.
Following are the equipment connectable to the CL and the protocol
software versions available.
Equipment
HI-C654
HI-C655
QA-WS
OD-F614
OD-F624
CR-IR346CL
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
FINP100

Connected
equipment B
(e.g.: HI-C655)
HOST name
: hic_a*
IP address
: 172.16.1.30*
Device attribute : HD_FILE*
Protocol ID
: 110*
Items marked with * constitute setup examples, which need be
changed depending on the equipment or network environment.
00000435.EPS
FINP110 Software Version

A13 or later
A07 or later
A03 or later
A11/Z02 or later
A11/Z02 or later
A00 or later
OE2-1

Use a network cable to connect the
CL to other connected equipment.
1. Hardware Setup
Make setups for inputting/outputting

images using the FINP.
Install the option key and reinstall the
AP key. Make then the following setup.
2. Software Setup
Setup of information (device

attributes, data compression type,
etc.) on other connected equipment
Make the following setups as required.
Setup for changing the image data
compression type depending on
the MPM code
Setup for automatic image distribution
Setup for CONNECTING
EQUIPMENT (OD attributes only)
Make sure that images can be output

from the CL to other connected
equipment and images can be input
from other connected equipment.
3.Connection
Checkout
Back up the configuration file.
4. Setup File Backup

00000075.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE2-2
1. Hardware Setup
1. Hardware Setup
Connect the CL to other equipment via network as illustrated below.
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX cable
TCP/IP
RU
CL
Other connected
equipment
00000051.EPS
NOTES
Do not connect the telephone line to the network connectors of the CL
and other connected equipment.
The cable type applicable to this equipment is the IEC950/UL1950compliant UTP cable of category 5 or higher.
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
OE2-3
2.1 FINP Image Input/Output Option Key Installation
2. Software Setup
2.1 FINP Image Input/Output Option Key

Installation
Follow the procedures below to set up software for the CL and other
Set up the items shown in gray as required. Be sure to set up all other
items.
Installation
To input/output images using the FINP, the IR346 DMS NET-WORK

IN-OUT option key is needed.
1.
NOTE
2.2 AP Key Reinstallation
2.
2.3 Service Utility Startup
Click
2.4 Setups Required for Outputting Images to

Other Connected Equipment
Equipment (ALL OTHER NODES)
2.4.2 Setup for Changing the Image Data
Compression Type Depending on the
MPM Code (FINP COMPRESSION
TYPE)
(DISTRBUTION CODE)
2.4.4 Setup for CONNECTING EQUIPMENT
Tasks done on
the CL
00000085.EPS
3.
4.
Click
5.
2.6 Service Utility Shutdown
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Click
The installation start window opens again.
2.5 Setup for Inputting Images from Other

Connected Equipment
2.7 Software Setup on Other Connected

Equipment
Click
The system return to the desktop screen.
Tasks done
on other
connected
equipment
6.
REFERENCE
The installation start window opens twice because the two kinds of
keys, for image input and output, are stored on the FINP image input/
output option key CD.
OE2-4


1.
In about one minute after Windows is started up, the CL-AP

launches itself.

1.
REFERENCE
If the AP or Windows is already running, start the Service Utility

mode as directed under REFERENCE in step 2. below.
NOTE
2.
Click
2.

the window.
MU000031.EPS
00000419.EPS
3.
Click
4.
MU000035.EPS
NOTE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE2-5
2.4 Setups Required for Outputting Images to Other Connected Equipment
REFERENCE
If you cannot complete step 2. above from the initial window within
a 3-second period and allow the AP to start up, perform the
following steps to start the Service Utility mode.
(or
) menu.
Described herein are the setup procedures to be observed when

outputting images to other connected equipment.
Connection example
window.
Fuji Film, and FCR.
3.
2.4 Setups Required for Outputting

Images to Other Connected Equipment
CL
LP
Reprint
Image output
TCP/IP
FRUP
The Service Utility mode starts. The IIP Service Utility window
opens.
RU
Image input
(reprint) Other connected
equipment B
(e.g.: HI-C655)
00000079.EPS
OE000028.EPS
4.

The Setup Cofiguration Item window opens.
00000077.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
OE2-6
Setup overview
Service Utility Setup Configuration Item window

1.
Click [Setup Configuration Item] of the IIP Service Utility

window.
I
II
III
00000054.EPS
Setup of information on other connected equipment (I on the window

display)
00000131.EPS
Host name and IP address of other connected equipment

Selection of protocol used (FINP) by other connected equipment
Setup of the protocol ID (FINP100/110) of other connected equipment
Setup of attribute of other connected equipment
Setups for handling HQ images and image compression type
Setup for automatic image distribution (II on the window display)
This setup is needed for automatically transferring images sent by the
RU.
Setup for changing the image data compression type depending on the
MPM code (III on the window display)
Perform this setup only when transferring images by changing the data
compression type depending on the MPM code.
00000404.EPS
2.
Click the
3.
Select
mark of the
field.
and click
NOTE
To enable this setup, the
field must have been
activated before setting the image data compression type (ALL OTHER
NODES).
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
00000436.EPS
OE2-7
4.
Enter the host name (e.g.: hic_a) of other connected
Set information of other connected equipment as follows.
equipment in
5.
8.
Enter the IP address (e.g.: 172.16.1.30) of other connected

.
equipment in
6.
Make sure that
7.
Click
is selected in the
II
column.
III

IV
VI
00000437.EPS
I.
Select the protocol ID (e.g.:

) supported by
other connected equipment.
For the protocol ID that each equipment unit supports,
see Prior to setup.
II.
Select the device attribute (e.g.:

equipment.
) of other connected
Select PRINT for the IR system.

Select HD_FILE for the HI-C/QA-WS system.
Select OD_FILE for the ODF system.
Select OTHER for the CL.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE2-8
III. Select
if other connected equipment can receive
HQ images and
as well.
Device attribute
Protocol ID
if it can receive mammographic images
IV. Select
if other connected equipment can transfer
HQ images.
V. Select the image data compression type used for image transfer.
when transferring images by
Select
changing the data compression type depending on the MPM
code.
NOTE
The archiver (ODF and LF-C1) also has the same image
compression ratio setting as indicated in step V.
Note that the setting selected here (at the CL) takes effect and not
the the setting selected for the ODF or LF-C1.
VI. To transfer annotation-embedded images, select
Select
9.
.
to transfer images not embedded with annotation.
Click
The system returns to the Setup Configuration Item window.
REFERENCES
Items just have been set up will appear on the right-side area of
the Setup Configuration Item window. A displayed item can be
changed. Whenever it is changed, never fail to click
.
If the
deleted.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
key is pressed, currently selected items are
Handling of
HQ images
Image data
compression type
Annotation transfer
00000269.EPS
10. Select Save from the Config (F) menu.

saved.
11. Click
OE2-9

Compression Type Depending on the MPM Code
(FINP COMPRESSION TYPE)
2.
Perform the following settings only when

is
selected for the image data compression type in ALL OTHER NODES.
3.
1.
Select
Click
The FINP Compression Type window opens.
Set I and II on the display as follows.
of the Setup
I
A list showing the data compression type for each MPM code will
be displayed on the right-side area of the window.
List showing the data compression

type for each MPM code
II
ALL MENU (Default)

00000440.EPS
I.
Select the exposure menu name.
REFERENCE
The MPM code that is for the exposure menu selected will be
displayed in the MPM Code column. Using the User Utility, the
user thus can view which MPM code is for the exposure menu
selected.
II. Select the image data compression type.
4.
Settings for data compression ratio for each MPM code
Click

The MPM code set as above and the image data compression
type for the code will appear on the right side of this window.
00000439.EPS
NOTE
ALL MENU (Default) provides a compression ratio setting that
applies to all MPM codes.
5.
FINP COMPRESSION TYPE first determines a compression ratio

for all MPM codes and then determines the compression ratio for
each MPM code.
To set image data compression types for other MPM codes,

repeat steps 2. to 4.
6.
Select Save from the Config (F) menu.
The compression ratio settings for individual MPM codes take

precedence. If there are no settings for individual MPM codes, the
ALL MENU (Default) setting applies.

saved.
7.
Click

010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE2-10

(DISTRIBUTION CODE)
3.
Enter an 8-digit distribution code, for example 12345678, in

the
For an automatic image distribution to equipment of HD_FILE attribute,

set up DISTRIBUTION CODE.
For an automatic distribution to equipment of OD_FILE attribute,

perform the procedure described in 2.4.4 Setup for CONNECTING
EQUIPMENT.
1.
Click
Item window.
of the Setup Configuration
A list showing the destination equipment for automatic image

distribution will be displayed on the right-side area of the window.
field.
Click the downward arrow
NOTE
For an automatic image distribution processing, be sure to change to
Yes ahead of time the setting (item 3 of SYSTEM CONFIG
5.CSL/IDT FUNCTION) under Enable Distribution Code Setup of the
Service Utility function.
of the
to select the host name
of the equipment the image data is to be transferred to

(e.g.: hic_a).
4.
Click
5.

saved.
6.
Click
00000410.EPS
2.
Click
The Distribution Code window opens.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE2-11
3.
To automatically transfer images to the ODF, set up CONNECTING

EQUIPMENT as directed below.
1.
NOTE
Click
within
and select function (OD_FILE) of the connected equipment.
on the Setup
With software version A00, HD_FILE can be selected in the

Function box. However, even though HD_FILE has been
selected, no images will be transferred to equipment of HD_FILE
attribute automatically. It is thus necessary to make setup for
DISTRIBUTION CODE if you wish to transfer images of HD_FILE
attribute automatically.
A list of registered equipment units appears on the right side of the

window.

(DISTRIBUTION CODE)
OE000002.EPS
2.
Click
within
and select equipment (ODF
host name).
The CONNECTING EQUIPMENT window opens.
4.
Click
5.

A window opens prompting you to confirm the setup data.
6.
Click
The setup data will then be saved.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE2-12
2.5 Setup for Inputting Images from Other Connected Equipment
2.5 Setup for Inputting Images from Other

Connected Equipment
No particular settings are required on the CL.
REFERENCE
Images input from other connected equipment are stored directly on the
CL print queue. Note that in the list displayed with the All or Today
tab on the CL user window, you cannot check images input from other
NOTES
[only when other connected equipment is the CL]
If a multiple number of CLs are network-connected, it is designed
that the system omits some of setups for those CLs by copying the
setup file (NetConfiguration.mdb) of one CL onto another CL
connected via the same network.
CL-B
TCP/IP
Print queue
Copying
CL-A
CL
LP
Copyng
Reprint
NetConfig.mdb
Image output
TCP/IP
FRUP
RU
CL-C
Image input
(reprint) Other connected
equipment B
(e.g.: HI-C655)
00000080.EPS
00000078.EPS
To input/output FINP images between among CLs, you would

better for the reason said above to perform setups for image data
input using the FINP, procedures for which are explained as
follows.
1. Select NETWORK CONFIG - THIS HOST (IIP) on the Setup
Configuration Item window and click [NEW].
2. The New Node window appears. Click [OK]. The FINP Setup
window opens.
3. Set up the same content as for other connected equipment
(e.g.: NETWORK CONFIG - ALL OTHER NODES - CL-A
- FINP settings for the CL-B in Service Utility mode, shown in
the connection diagram above).
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE2-13

1.
2.
Select Close from the Config (F) menu of the Setup


Equipment
The system return to the IIP Service Utility window.
Set up the following items so that other connected equipment can

receive images from the CL.
CL host name setup

CL IP address setup
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
For host name and IP address setup procedures, see the relative
Service Manuals.
OE2-14
3.1 CL-AP Startup
3. Connection Checkout
3.2 Image Input/output Checkout
After the CL-AP is started up, make sure that images can be transferred
from the CL to other connected equipment.
Output checkout
Transfer images from the CL to other connected equipment.
1.
3.1 CL-AP Startup
For details of the procedures for the checkout transfer, see

the CL Operation Manual.
3.2 Image Input/output Checkout
2.
3.1 CL-AP Startup

1.
From the
Select an image for checkout, then transfer it to other

For details of the procedures for checking transferred images,

see the operation manual attached to each equipment.

The CL opening window opens.
In about two minutes, the CL-AP reception window opens.
Version A software
Make sure that the image has actually been transferred to

Input checkout
Transfer images from other connected equipment to the CL.
1.
Transfer an image from other connected equipment to the

CL.
For details of the procedures for checking transferred images,
see the operation manual attached to each equipment.
2.
Make sure that the names of the images transferred from

other connected equipment appear on the CL print queue
list.
To display the print queue list, click the Queue tab on the
CL user window.
3.
Make sure that the LP, if connected, outputs the image thus
transferred properly.
OE000017.EPS
Version B software
OE000099.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE2-15

Have the following item ready for use for this purpose:
MU:Maintenance Utility.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE2-16
CL+HI-C655/QA-WS/FCR VIEW (DICOM

CR Storage)
Presented below are the procedures used for transferring images from
the CL-IR346/348CL to the HI-C655 (or QA-WS or FCR VIEW) using
the DICOM CR Storage feature.
Also described are the setup procedures for transferring prestandardized images to the QA-WS.
NOTE
The CR-IR346/348CL and the HI-C655 (or QA-WS or FCR VIEW)
respectively.
The CL supports the following DICOM CR Storage functions, overview
of which is shown below.
CR Storage SCU (10bit)
An image transfer function using the DICOM.
CR Storage SCU Private (10bit) (Private Unstandardized CR
Storage)
An image transfer function using the DICOM, which makes it
possible to add FUJIs own private information to images for transfer.
Private Unstandardized CR Storage is a function that enables

transfer of images (12bit) not subjected to standardization
processing using the DICOM. This function is available only with
JPEG Lossless.
Prior to setup
CL requirements
Option keys are needed.
Key Name
Functions Supported
IR346 DICOM CR STORAGE key

CR Storage SCU Standard

CR Storage SCU Private
(Includes Private Unstandardized
CR Storage.)
Requirements of other connected equipment

Other connected equipment must have been set up accordingly.
When other connected equipment is the HI-C655
DICOM Storage option key (Standard/Private)
When other connected equipment is the QA-WS
When other connected equipment is the FCR VIEW
Yokogawa server
Synapse server
This function can be used when, for example, the QA-WS that is
capable of receiving images not subjected to standardization
processing is connected to the CL.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
OE3-1
Setup example of
other connected equipment
HOST name
: HIC655a*
IP address
: 172.16.1.30*
AE name (Provider) : HIC655a-SCP*
Port number
: 5001*
Service Class
: Private CR Storage*
Transfer Syntax
: JPEG Lossless
Other connected
equipment
(HI-C655 or QA-WS)
TCP/IP
FRUP
RU

1. Hardware Setup

images via DICOM.
AP key. Make then the following
setups.
2. Software Setup
Setup of information (AE name,

device attribute, Service Class, etc.)
on this equipment
Registration of information (AE name,
device attribute, port number, Service
Class, handling of HQ images, etc.)
on other connected equipment
code
Setup for UID issuance
Setup for name elements
EQUIPMENT (OD attribute only)
DICOM CR Storage
CL
CL setup example
HOST name
: fcr-csl*
IP address
: 172.16.1.20*
AE name (User) : CL-SCU*
Service Class : Private CR Storage*
Transfer Syntax : JPEG Lossless*
Make sure that images can be

transferred from the CL to other
3. Connection
Checkout
00000401.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
OE3-2
1. Hardware Setup
1. Hardware Setup
Connect the CL to other connected equipment via network as illustrated
below.
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX cable
TCP/IP
RU
CL
Other connected
equipment
00000003.EPS
NOTES
The cable type applicable to this equipment (CL/HI-C655 or QA-WS)
is the IEC950/UL1950-compliant UTP cable of category 5 or higher.
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
OE3-3
2. Software Setup
Set up software for the CL and other connected equipment.

items.
2.1.1 Installation of DICOM CR Storage
Option Key
2.1.2 AP Key Reinstallation
2.1.3 Service Utility Startup
2.1.4 Setup of Information on This
Equipment for the DICOM CR Storage
Function
2.1.5 Registration of Information on Other
Connected Equipment for the DICOM
CR Storage Function
2.1.6 Settings of Automatic Image
Distribution
2.1.8 Settings for UID Issuance
2.1.9 Changes in Name Elements
2.1.10 Service Utility Shutdown
2.1.1 Installation of DICOM CR Storage Option Key

To activate the DICOM CR Storage function, the IR346 DICOM CR
STORAGE option key is needed.
1.
Insert the option key CD into the PC.

NOTE
Tasks done on
the CL
2.
Click
00000085.EPS

Equipment
Tasks done
on other
connected
equipment
3.
Click
4.
Click
same as in steps 2 and 3, then click

.
5.
REFERENCE
keys, Standard and Private are stored on the DICOM CR Storage
option key CD.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE3-4

1.
1.

launches itself.
REFERENCE

NOTE
2.
Click
2.

the window.
MU000031.EPS
00000419.EPS
3.
Click
4.
MU000035.EPS
NOTE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE3-5
REFERENCE
(or
) menu.
window.
Fuji Film, and FCR.
2.1.4 Setup of Information on This Equipment for the

DICOM CR Storage Function
Make settings for the following information items of this equipment.
Host name and IP address of this equipment
AE name (Application Entity Name) of this equipment
Service Class, Role, Transfer Syntax, device attribute (Attribute)
Other (timeout settings, etc.)
1.

window.
3.
opens.
00000131.EPS
00000403.EPS
00000404.EPS
2.
Click the
3.
Select
mark of the
field.
and click

010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
OE3-6
4.
Make sure that the CL host name and IP address are displayed.
6.
Enter the AE name that is the SCU for the CL (e.g.: CL-SCU)
in the
CL host name
field.
NOTE
CL IP address
There is no need to set the port number in
When selecting SCU as the Role, the set port number will be
disregarded even if it is set.
00000441.EPS
NOTE
The IP address will not be displayed properly unless the CL is
connected to a network.
7.
Click
5.
Select DICOM and click
Select DICOM.
00000405.EPS
00000443.EPS
00000442.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE3-7
8.
Click downward arrow
10. Click downward arrow
in the
in the
field to select the
field to select Service
Transfer Syntax (e.g.: JPEG Lossless).
Class (e.g.: Private CR Storage).

CR Image Storage
Private CR Storage
Private Unstandardized CR Storage
Verification
Transfer Syntax Supported (Selected)

Service Class
REFERENCES
If a Service Class that includes Private CR Storage is selected,
items that need not be set will be hidden on the DICOM Setup
window.
Verification is the Service Class used to verify connection
between DICOM equipment units. For verifying connection,
Verification must be selected.
For details of verification of connection, see 7. Verifying
the Connection to Other Connected Equipment Verify
Connection in MU: Maintenance Utility.
9.
To set up the AE that is the User, select

the Role.
(SCU) for
REFERENCES
If SCU is selected, items that need not be set will be hidden on

the DICOM Setup window.
For DICOM SCU settings on this equipment (THIS HOST (IIP)),
two or more Service Class settings (e.g., CR Image Storage,
Private CR Storage, and other) can be selected for a single
Application Entity. Moreover, two or more Transfer Syntax settings
(e.g., JPEGLossless, ImplicitVRLittleEndian, and other) can be
selected for a single Service Class.
ImplictVR
LittleEndian
ExplictVR
LittleEndian
JPEG
Lossless
CR Image Storage
Private CR Storage
Private Unstandardized
CR Storage
Verification
11. Set the DICOM inter-message timeout value

as necessary.
REFERENCES
To transfer large-capacity image data such as mammograms,
check the time required to transfer those images using the
DICOMStorage.log function, and then determine in the
[Timeout1: ] box a time long enough to perform image transfer
processing.
.
It is not necessary to check
Even if checked, it will be disregarded if the Role set in step 9.
above is the SCU.
in the
field to select OTHER for the device attribute.
NOTE
To set the SCU AE on the CL, select OTHER for the device
attribute for the time being.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE3-8
13. Click

Equipment for the DICOM CR Storage Function
The system returns to the Application Entity List window.
14. Click
REFERENCE
.
If the
Register the following information items of other connected equipment.

AE name (Application Entity Name) and port number of other
connected equipment
Setups for gradation correction
Other (usage of two-byte characters, settings for data conversion
from HQ to standard image, etc.)
1.
Select
Item window and click
deleted.

AE name of this equipment
2.

Enter the Host name (e.g.: HCI655a) in the
field.
Enter the IP address (e.g.: 172.16.1.30) in the
field.
Select DICOM.

00000406.EPS
Select DICOM.
00000405.EPS

saved.
16. Click

010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE3-9
3.
Click
5.
The Application Entity List window opens for setup of information

on other connected equipment.
Click
00000443.EPS
6.
of the
field and select Service
Class (e.g.: Private CR Storage).

00000444.EPS
4.

Enter the AE name of other connected equipment (e.g.: HCI655aSCP) in the
field.
NOTES
Never fail to enter the SCP AE name.
Be sure to enter the upper- or lower-case characters correctly.
Enter the Port number of other connected equipment (e.g.: 5001)
in the
field.
CR Image Storage
Private CR Storage
Private Unstandardized CR Storage
Verification
NOTE
Do not select two or more Service Class settings for a single
Application Entity (e.g., CR Image Storage and Private CR
Storage). Further, do not select two or more Transfer Syntax
settings for a single Service Class (e.g., JPEG Lossless and
Implicit VR Little Endian).
Even if you select two or more settings, only the first one takes
effect.
REFERENCES
If Private CR Storage is selected, items that need not be set will
be hidden on the DICOM Setup window.
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)
OE3-10
7.
8.
Because the AE of other connected equipment is the

Provider, make sure that
(SCP) is selected for the
Role.
Syntax (e.g.: JPEG Lossless).

) within the
field.
NOTE
If the IR346 DICOM IM PROCESSED option key has not been
installed, the Image Processing function will be disregarded even
though PROC is selected (the result will be as if NONE has
been selected).
ImplictVR
LittleEndian
ExplictVR
LittleEndian
JPEG
Lossless
CR Image Storage
Private CR Storage
11. If you have selected
CR Storage
downward arrow
Verification
NOTE
Be sure to select the same Transfer Syntax as that selected for this
equipment.
9.
equipment, select
in the
field to select Transfer
Service Class
10. To transfer processed images to other connected
Change the following settings as required.

Setting of
at step 10. above, click

of
as required to change the
setup value.
10 : Select when generating 10bit processed image output.
NOTE
The value set up in Bit Stored is allowed to change only when
either CR Image Storage or MG Image Storage For Presentation
is selected for Service Class and PROC is selected for Image
Processing.
ST :
Select if other connected equipment cannot receive

HQ images.
ST & HQ : Select if other connected equipment can receive HQ
images.
ST & HQ & SH : Select if the other connected equipment can
receive 20 lines/mm mammographic images as
well.
Setting of
ST :
HQ/SH :
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
Select when transferring standard images only.

Select when transferring HQ or 20 lines/mm
mammographic images.
OE3-11
12. Make setups for gradation correction as required.
NOTE
This setup item is displayed only when the competing brand
PACS LUT adjustment function key (one of the Plus Standard Key
functions) is installed.
in the
field to select device attribute of other connected equipment

(HD_FILE for HI-C655 or QA-WS and OD_FILE for ODF).
16. Set up the following, as necessary.
OE030002.ai
MONOCHROME1 : S
elect when setting the minimum pixel value to
white and the maximum pixel value to black.
MONOCHROME2 : S
black and the maximum pixel value to white.
NOTE
OE030001.EPS
NOTE
Setups are possible for gradation correction only when CR Image
Storage or Private CR Storage is selected for the Service Class.
Note that setups are not possible when Private Unstandardized
CR Storage is selected.
For setup details, see Display Gradation Correction Setup
13. Change the following setting as required.
Photometric Interpretation can be selected only when the following

settings are performed.
Abstract Syntax
Role
LUT Operation
: CR Image Storage
: SCP
: Unable to apply LUT Operation or
Apply LUT correction process to the image
Image Processing : PROC
17. Click
18. Click
Yes : To transfer annotation-embedded images.
to
No : To transfer images not embedded with annotation.
14. To handle two-byte characters, check the
box
).
REFERENCE
needs not be checked. Even if checked, it will be

saved.
20. Click
disregarded.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE3-12
3.

Enter an 8-digit distribution code (e.g.: 12345678) in

.
NOTE

EQUIPMENT.
1.
Click
Item window.
A list of destination equipment for automatic image distribution

appears on the right-side area of the window.
of
to select equipments
host or AE name (HIC655a-SCP as in the Setup example).
4.
Click
5.
6.
Click

saved.

00000410.EPS
2.
Click

EQUIPNET as directed below.
1.
Click
on the Setup

window.
OE000003.EPS
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
OE3-13
2.
Click
3.

Use the procedure below if the UID issuance method needs to be

changed depending on the specifications of other connected equipment
which the image is transferred to.
For default settings, see Table: List of UID settings.
within
NOTE
1.
Click the
mark of
2.
Click
of the Setup
The content of the setup items for the CL system information


within
and select equipment (ODF
host name).
4.
Click
00000408.EPS
5.
6.
Click
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
OE3-14
3.
Make configuration settings as follows for UID issuance.
Table
List of UID settings (IMAGE MODALITY)
No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
9 UID Issuance YES

after Modifying
Issues a new UID.
ID Information NO
Does not issue a new UID.
Whether or not to issue a

new image UID or SOP
Instance UID when any ID
information is modified on
the CL.
10 UID Issuance YES

after Modifying
Issues a new UID.
Normalized
NO
Parameter

Instance UID when image
normalization conditions are
modified on the CL.
11 UID Issuance YES

after Modifying
Issues a new UID.
Image
NO
Processing
Parameter

processing conditions are
modified on the CL.
12 UID Issuance
Before
Sending
Processed
Data
Whether or not to output an

SOP Instance UID as the
UID of a processed CR
image when outputting
processed images from the
CL.
YES
Issues a new UID.
NO
13 DICOM Series 0: 1 Study - N series and 1 Setup of Series Instance UID

issuance logic.
Generation
Series - 1 image
Logic
Issues a number so that it
See
has multiple series for one
3.4 Configuration
study and only one image for
Details 1. IMAGE
one series.
MODALITY under
0: 1 Study - N series
MU: Maintenance
and 1 Series - M image
Utility.
study and multiple images for
one series.
0: 1 Study - 1 series and 1
Series - N image
has only one series for one
one series.
No
Name
Selection
Meaning
39 UID
YES
Issuance
Issues a new UID.
about a
NO
function
(except Image
Processing) to
change to the
image
themselves

Instance UID when
shuttering processing or
energy subtraction
processing condition is
modified on the CL.
45 UID Issuance YES

after Modifying
Issues a new UID.
Trimming
NO
Parameter

Instance UID when trimming
information is modified.
46 UID Inssuance YES

after Modifying
Issues a new UID.
FNC
NO
Parameter

Instance UID when a FNC
parameter is modified.
: Default setting
4.
5.
Click

saved.
: Default setting
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
OE3-15
2.2 Software Setup on Other Connected Equipment
2.1.9 Changing the Name Elements

See 3.11 Setting the Name Elements for DICOM Connection
1. Select Close from the Config (F) menu.
2.


Equipment
Set up DICOM CR Storage in accordance with the software
specifications of other connected equipment so that it can receive
images from the CL.
For the HI-C655
See 5.3.1 Setup Using hic655a under Installation of the
HI-C655 Service Manual when other connected equipment is
the HI-C655.
For the QA-WS

See 5.3.1 Settings on QA-WS under Installation of the QAWS Service Manual.
Other devices
See DICOM-related descriptions included in the manual of
each device.
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
OE3-16
3.1 CL-AP Startup
3.2 Image Transfer to Other Connected

Equipment
After the CL-AP is started, makes sure that images can be transferred
Transfer images accumulated in the CL to other connected equipment.
1.
3.1 CL-AP Startup
For details of the image transfer procedures, see the CL

Operation Manual.
3.2 Image Transfer to Other

Connected Equipment
2.
3.1 CL-AP Startup
1.
From the
Select an image for transfer, then transfer it to other


For details of the transferred image checking procedures, see
the operation manual attached to each equipment.
Fuji Film and FCR.

Version A software
OE000017.EPS
Version B software
OE000099.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE3-17

Have the following item ready for use for file backup:
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE3-18
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE3-19
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE3-20
CL+Other (DICOM CR Storage: Transfer

of Processed Images)
Setup example of
HOST name
IP address
AE name (Provider)
Port number
Service Class
Transfer Syntax
Described herein is the procedure for transferring processed images

(Standard Image) from the CR-IR346/348CL to other connected
equipment using the DICOM CR Storage Standard function.
NOTE
The CR-IR346/348CL and the image transmission equipment are
abbreviated hereafter CL and other connected equipment,
respectively.
Other01*
172.16.1.30*
Other01-SCP*
5001*
CR Image Storage
Implicit VR Little Endian*
Other connected
equipment
(Other maker's equipment)
Prior to setup
CL requirements
Key Name
:
:
:
:
:
:
TCP/IP
FRUP
DICOM CR Storage (Standard)
RU
CL
Functions Supported
IR346 DICOM IM PROCESSED key Generation of CR Storage SCU

Standard processed images
The DICOM CR Storage (SCP) Service Class must be supported.
CL setup example
HOST name
IP address
AE name (User)
Service Class
Transfer Syntax
:
:
:
:
:
fcr-csl*
172.16.1.20*
CL-SCU*
CR Image Storage

00000401.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
OE4-1

1. Hardware Setup

images via DICOM.
Install the option key and reinstall
the AP key. Make then the following
setups.
device attribute, Service Class,
etc.) on this equipment
Registration of information (AE
name, device attribute, port
number, Service Class, handling of
HQ images, etc.) on other
connected equipment
2. Software Setup

Setup for automatic image
distribution code
EQUIPMENT (OD attribute only)
Setup for UID issuance
Setup for name elements
3. Connection
Checkout

00000451.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE4-2
1. Hardware Setup
1. Hardware Setup
below.
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX cable
TCP/IP
RU
CL
Other connected
equipment
00000044.EPS
NOTES
The cable type applicable to this CL equipment is the IEC950/UL1950compliant UTP cable of category 5 or higher.
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
OE4-3
2. Software Setup

items.
2.1.1 Installing the Processed Image
Transmission Option Key
2.1.4 Setup of Information on This Equipment
for the DICOM CR Storage Function
CR Storage Function
2.1.6 Settings of Automatic Image
Distribution (DISTRIBUTION CODE)
2.1.7 Setup for CONNECTING
EQUIPMENT
Equipment
2.1.1 Installing the Processed Image Transmission

Option Key
To activate the processed image transmission function, the IR346
DICOM IM PROCESSED option key is needed.
1.

NOTE
Tasks done on
the CL

2.
Click
Tasks done
on other
connected
equipment
00000046.EPS
3.
Click
4.
Click
same as in steps 2 and 3, then click

.
5.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE4-4

1.

1.
2.
If the AP or Windows is already running, start the Service Utility as

directed under REFERENCE in step 2. below.

Click
Windows starts up and then the CL-AP starts running in about one
minute.
REFERENCE
NOTE
2.

the window.
MU000031.EPS
00000419.EPS
3.
Click
4.
MU000035.EPS
NOTE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE4-5
REFERENCE
(or
) menu.
window.
Fuji Film, and FCR.

DICOM CR Storage Function
Make settings for the following information items of this equipment.
1.

window.
3.
window opens.
00000049.EPS
00000048.EPS
00000091.EPS
2.
Click the
3.
Select
mark of the
field.
and click
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
OE4-6
4.
6.
Make sure that the CL host name and IP address are

displayed.
in the
CL IP address

00000092.EPS
NOTE
field.
NOTE
CL host name
5.
7.
Click
Select DICOM.
00000093.EPS
00000443.EPS
00000094.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE4-7
8.
in the
in the

Class (e.g.: CR Image Storage).
field to select the

Transfer Syntax (e.g.: ImplicitVRLittleEndian).
REFERENCES
If CR Image Storage is selected, items that need not be set will

Service Class

CR Image Storage

9.
ImplictVR
LittleEndian
ExplictVR
LittleEndian
JPEG
Lossless
Verification

as necessary.
REFERENCES
Role.
(SCU) for the
REFERENCES
Private CR Storage, and other) can be selected for a single
Application Entity. Moreover, two or more Transfer Syntax settings
(e.g., JPEGLossless, ImplicitVRLittleEndian, and other) can be
selected for a single Service Class.

processing.
.
above is the SCU.
in the
NOTE
13. Click
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE4-8
14. Click

Equipment for the DICOM CR Storage Function
REFERENCES
Items just have been set will appear on the right-side area of the
Setup Configuration Item window. A displayed item can be
.
If the
key is clicked, currently selected items are
deleted.

connected equipment
1.
Select
2.

Enter the Host name (e.g.: Other01) in the
field.
field.
Select DICOM.
Service Class, Role, Transfer Syntax and device attribute (Attribute)
00000096.EPS
Select DICOM.
00000097.EPS

saved.
16. Click

010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE4-9
3.
Click
5.

Click
00000443.EPS
6.
in the
field and select the
CR Image Storage function.
00000098.EPS
4.
NOTE

Application Entity (e.g., CR Image Storage and Private CR
Storage). Further, do not select two or more Transfer Syntax
settings for a single Service Class (e.g., JPEG Lossless and
Implicit VR Little Endian).
effect.
Enter the AE name of other connected equipment

(e.g.: Other01-SCP) in the
field.
NOTES
REFERENCES

in the
If CR Image Storage is selected, items that need not be set will

field.
7.
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)

Role.
OE4-10
8.
in the
equipment, select
Service Class
CR Image Storage
Verification
ImplictVR
LittleEndian
ExplictVR
LittleEndian
JPEG
Lossless
NOTE
Be sure to select the same Transfer Syntax as that selected for this
equipment.
9.
) within the
field.
Syntax (e.g.: ImplicitVRLittleEndian).


downward arrow

of
setup value.
NOTE
Processing.
Setting of
ST :

HQ images.
images.
well.
Setting of
ST :
HQ/SH :
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)

(
to
).
REFERENCE
needs not be checked. Even if checked, it will be
disregarded.

box
in the
field to select device attribute of other connected equipment

(HD_FILE).
OE4-11
NOTE
This setup item is displayed only when the competing brand
PACS LUT adjustment function key (one of the Plus Standard Key
OE030002.ai
MONOCHROME1 : S
MONOCHROME2 : S
NOTE
OE030001.EPS
For setup details, see Display Gradation Correction Setup under

Abstract Syntax
Role
LUT Operation
: CR Image Storage
: SCP
17. Click
18. Click

saved.
20. Click
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE4-12

(DISTRIBUTION CODE)
3.


EQUIPMENT.
1.
Click
Item window.


.
NOTE
of
host or AE name (e.g.: Other01-SCP).
4.
Click
5.
6.
Click

saved.
00000247.EPS
2.
Click
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE4-13
3.

EQUIPNET as directed below.
1.
NOTE
Click
within
on the Setup


window.

(DISTRIBUTION CODE)
OE000004.EPS
2.
Click
within
and select equipment (ODF AE

name).
4.
Click
5.
6.
Click
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE4-14

1.
Click the
mark of
2.
Click
of the Setup

00000248.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE4-15
3.
Make configuration settings as follows for UID issuance.
No
Table
List of UID settings (IMAGE MODALITY)
No
Name
39 UID Issuance YES

about a
Issues a new UID.
function
NO
(except Image
Processing) to
change to the
image
themselves

Instance UID when
energy subtraction
modified on the CL.
45 UID Issuance YES

after Modifying
Issues a new UID.
Trimming
NO
Parameter


after Modifying
Issues a new UID.
FNC
NO
Parameter

Selection
Meaning
9 UID Issuance YES

after Modifying
Issues a new UID.
ID Information NO

the CL.
10 UID Issuance YES

after Modifying
Issues a new UID.
Normalized
NO
Parameter

modified on the CL.
11 UID Issuance YES

after Modifying
Issues a new UID.
Image
NO
Processing
Parameter

modified on the CL.
12 UID Issuance
Before
Sending
Processed
Data

SOP Instance UID as the
UID of a processed CR
image when outputting
processed images from the
CL.
YES
Issues a new UID.
NO

issuance logic.
Generation
Series - 1 image
Logic
See 3.4 Configuration
Details 1. IMAGE
MODALITY under
one series.
MU: Maintenance
Utility.
one series.
Series - N image
one series.
Name
Selection
Meaning
: Default setting
4.
5.
Click

saved.
: Default setting
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE4-16

under MU: Maintenance U tility.
1.
2.

Equipment
Set up DICOM CR Storage in accordance with the software
specifications of other connected equipment so that it can receive
images from the CL.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE4-17
3.1 CL-AP Startup

Equipment
1.
3.1 CL-AP Startup
For details of the image transfer procedures, see the CL

Operation Manual.

Connected Equipment
2.
3.1 CL-AP Startup
1.
From the


Fuji Film and FCR.

Version A software
OE000017.EPS
Version B software
OE000099.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE4-18

010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE4-19
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE4-20
CL+FN-PS551/DRYPIX/FM-DP L (DICOM Print)
CL+FN-PS551/DRYPIX/FM-DP L
(DICOM Print)
Other connected equipment
HOST name
IP address
AE name (Provider)
Port number
Service Class
Transfer Syntax
Described below are setup procedures used for printing images onto
the FN-PS551, DRYPIX or FM-DP L from the CR-IR346/348CL using
the DICOM Print function.
NOTE
:
:
:
:
:
:
FN-PS551 *
172.16.0.41 *
Printer1*
104*
Basic Grayscale Print
Implict VR Little Endian
The CR-IR346/348CL is abbreviated hereafter simply CL. The FNPS551 and DRYPIX or FM-DP L are abbreviated other connected
equipment.
Other
connected
equipment
Key Name
Functions Supported
IR346 DICOM Print key
Basic Grayscale Print (SCU)

FN-PS551
Software version required: A04 or later.
DRYPIX
Other connected equipment main unit must have been set up
accordingly.
Software version required : A00 or later.
FM-DP L
Other connected equipment main unit must have been set up
accordingly.
Software version required: B03 or later.
A network board (LAN90A) is required.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Printer*
(FM-DPL, etc.)
* Only when the other

connected equipment
is the FN-PS551.
Before setup
CL requirements
The option key is required.
E-i/f
TCP/IP
FRUP
DICOM Print
RU
CL
CL setup example
HOST name
IP address
AE name (User)
Service Class
Transfer Syntax
:
:
:
:
:
fcr-csl*
172.16.1.20*
CL-SCU*
Basic Grayscale Print
Items marked with * constitute setup examples, which

need to be changed depending on the equipment or
network environment.
00000395.EPS
REFERENCE
The default DRYPIX user AE name is FCR-CSL.
OE5-1
1. Hardware Setup
1. Hardware Setup

CL to other connected equipment. If
other connected equipment is the
FN-PS551, use an E-i/f cable to
connect it to the printer.
Make setups for printing images onto
other connected equipment using the
DICOM Print function.
setups.
device attribute, Service Class, etc.)
on this equipment
device attribute, port number,
Service Class, DICOM Print output
conditions, handling of HQ images,
etc.) on other connected equipment
1. Hardware Setup

below.
FN-PS551
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX Cable
2. Software Setup
TCP/IP
RU
CL
FN-PS551
Printer
E-i/f Cable
00000396.EPS
DRYPIX or FM-DP L
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX Cable
TCP/IP

Registration of a printer for
automatic image printout after the
completion of a study
Setup for film annotation character
output format
Setup for name components
RU
CL
DRY PIX/
FM-DPL
OE000005.EPS
NOTES

connected equipment and printed
correctly from it.
3. Verifying the
Connection
4. Backing Up the
Setup File
The cable type applicable to these equipment models (CR-IR346CL,

FN-PS5551, DRYPIX and FM-DP L) is the IEC950/UL1950-compliant
UTP cable of category 5 or higher.
00000486.EPS
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
OE5-2
2. Software Setup

Set up the items in gray as required. Be sure to set up all other items.
2.1.1 Installation of the DICOM Print Option
Key
2.1.4 Setup of Information on This
Equipment for the DICOM Print
Function
Print Function
2.1.6 Registration of Printer That
Automatically Outputs Print Films
Upon Completion of checkout
2.1.7 Film Annotation Character Format
Setup
2.1.9 Setup for Film Sorting Function
Equipment
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
2.1.1 Installation of the DICOM Print Option Key

To activate the DICOM Print function on other connected equipment,
the IR346 DICOM PRINT option key is needed.
1.

NOTE
Tasks done on
the CL
2.
Click
A window opens to indicate the completion of option key

installation.
00000085.EPS
Tasks done
on other
connected
equipment
3.
Click
4.
OE5-3

Use the AP key CD (114Y5342002A: Version A00) to reinstall the AP
key. The reinstallation procedure is shown below.
1.
1.
Windows starts up and then the CL-AP starts running in about one
minute.
REFERENCE
If the AP or Windows is already running, start the Service Utility as

directed under REFERENCE in step 2. below.
NOTE
2.
Click
2.

the window.
MU000031.EPS
00000419.EPS
3.
Click
4.
MU000035.EPS
NOTE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE5-4
REFERENCE
(or
) menu.
window.

DICOM Print Function
Makes settings for the following information items of this equipment.
1.

Fuji Film, and FCR.

window.
3.
window opens.
00000131.EPS
00000397.EPS
00000404.EPS
2.
Click the
3.
Select
mark of the
field.
and click
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
OE5-5
4.
6.

displayed.
in the
CL host name
CL IP address
00000441.EPS
NOTE
5.
field.
REFERENCE
When the connected equipment is DRYPIX or FM-DP L, enter
FCR-CSL. As the AE name of the connected equipment (SCU),
FCR-CSL has been set for DRYPIX and FM-DP L.
NOTE
Select DICOM.
00000405.EPS
00000442.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE5-6
7.
Click
as necessary.
(Determine 300 when connecting the CL to DRYPIX-series

equipment.)
REFERENCE
.
above is the SCU.
00000443.EPS
8.
in the

in the
NOTE
Class (e.g.: Basic Grayscale Print).
REFERENCE
To set the SCU AE on the CL, always select OTHER for the
device attribute.
12. Click

Connection under MU: Maintenance Utility.
9.

Role.
(SCU) for the
REFERENCE
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE5-7
13. Click

Equipment for the DICOM Print Function
REFERENCES
.
If the

connected equipment
Settings for DICOM Print output conditions
Register the necessary information items according to the flow shown
below.
deleted.
Note that the setup procedure when the FM-DPL is connected will differ
from that used for other devices.
Host name and IP address of other
connected equipment
AE name (Application Entity Name) and
......A
port number of other connected equipment
Service Class, Role, Transfer Syntax and
device attribute
......B
Settings for DICOM Print output conditions ......C
00000399.EPS

saved.
15. Click
Other (usage of two-byte characters,

settings for data conversion from HQ to
standard image, etc.)
......D
When the FM-DPL is connected, repeat step

A through D so that the 20pix image AE name
is registered.

010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
OE5-8
Host name and IP address of other connected
3.
equipment
1.
Select
Click

2.

Enter the Host name (e.g.: FN-PS551) in the
field.
field.
Select DICOM.
Select DICOM.
00000444.EPS
00000405.EPS
REFERENCE
Set as follows when the DRYPIX or FM-DP L is connected.
Host name: fujiprinter (default)
IP address: 172.16.1.30 (default)
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE5-9
AE name (Application Entity Name) and port number of

1.
Make the following settings on the Application Entity List

window.
2.
Click
Enter the AE name of other connected equipment (e.g.: Printer1)

in the
field.
NOTE
in the
00000443.EPS
field.
REFERENCE
Set as follows when the DRYPIX or FM-DPL is connected.
DRYPIX
Application Entity Name : DRYPIX (default)
: 17238 (default)
Port number
FM-DPL
Note
Application Entity Name : FM-DP L (for 10pix images)*
FM-DP LD (for 20pix images)* Note
: 17238 (for both 10pix and 20pix
Port number
images)* Note
(* Note) Because these setting values are not the FM-DP L
defaults, be sure to set them in accordance with the
FM-DP L values.
To output 10pixels/mm and 20pixels/mm images mixed,

make settings for an Application Entity Name available
for 10pixels images.
When doing so, be sure to check SH.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE5-10
Service Class, Role, Transfer Syntax and device

attribute
1.
of the
Settings for DICOM Print output conditions

1. Make necessary settings for the following DICOM Print
output conditions.
Set them as shown in the table below if the other connected
equipment is the FN-PS551, DRYPIX or FM-DP L.
Class (e.g.: Basic Grayscale Print).
REFERENCE
For details of connection checkout, see 7. Verifying the
Connection to Other Connected Equipment Verify
2.
Because the AE of the FN-PS551 is the Provider, make sure

that
3.
(SCP) is selected for the Role.
in the
field to select PRINT for the device attribute.
DICOM Print output conditions
Media Type
OE000036.EPS
BLUE FILM (Default)
PROCESSOR (Default)
Film Destination
CUBIC (Default* 2)
Mag Type
Blank (Default)
Smoothing Type
NONE (Default)
Recognition Coed
1 (Default)
Default Bin Number
(Change as needed.)* 1
Film Size ID
SUPPORTED (Default)
Requested Image Size
3.0 (Default)
Dmax
10 Bits Stored Supported Use check mark. (Default)
* 1 Set this item in accordance with the film size available on the
printer.
* 2 For software version A00, BILINEAR is the default.
For details of settings for the DICOM Print output conditions,
see 4. Setting the DICOM Print Output Conditions under
Print Output Function of FR1: Function-specific
Reference.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE5-11
Other (usage of two-byte characters, settings for data

conversion from HQ to standard image, etc.)
1.
Check
(
to
) of Acceptable Density if other
connected equipment can receive mammographic images
(20pixel/mm) as well.
NOTES
To enable transfer of 20pixel/mm images, an Application Entity for
output of 20pixel/mm images needs be set up in other connected
equipment such as FM-DP L.
2.1.6 Registration of Printer That Automatically

Outputs Print Films Upon Completion of
Checkout CONNECTING EQUIPMENT
Use this procedure to register a printer that automatically outputs print
films upon completion of checkout.
A printer that outputs print films only via the QA operation needs not to
be registered here.
1.

When the connected equipment is FM-DP L, perform setup on the

image output channel so that 20pixel/mm images can be
transferred.
2.
To handle two-byte characters, check the

(
to
box
).
REFERENCE
needs not be checked. Even if checked, it
will be disregarded.
00000131.EPS
3.
Click
4.
Click
5.
00000404.EPS

saved.
6.
Click

010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE5-12
2.
Click
2.1.7 Film Annotation Character Format Setup

window.
Perform the following film annotation character format setup procedure,

for instance, to specify the image information to be printed out onto film,
the annotation character format, and the use of an image-frame.
REFERENCE
The default film annotation character format for print output is basically
the same as for printouts generated by the FCR 5000 Series.
Film output differences between the CL and the 5000 Series
are stated in 2.2 Precautions of the Film Annotation
Character Format under Print Output Function in
00000081.EPS
3.
Click
4.

in the
1.
From the Setup Configuration Item window, click the

sign within the
field.
2.
Click

the window.

in the
field and select the AE name
3.
Click
6.
7.
4.
Click

saved.

saved.

For details on the setup procedure, see 2. Setup Necessary
When Editing the Film Annotation Character Format, under
Print Output Function in FR1: Function-specific
Reference.
(e.g.: Printer1) of the FN-PS551.
5.
5.
Click
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
OE5-13
2.2 Software Setup for Other Connected Equipment

When the DICOM is connected, change patient name elements as
necessary.
See 3.11 Setting the Name Elements for DICOM Connection in
2.2 Software Setup for Other Connected

Equipment
Set up the DICOM Print function as follows so that other connected
equipment can receive images coming from the CL.
FN-PS551
2.1.9 Setup for Film Sorting Function

Film sorting conditions must be set up for the printer that supports the
film sorting function.
3.12 Setting Up the DICOM Print Film Sorting Function under
1.
See 7. Service Utility in the Maintenance section of the

FN-PS551 Service Manual.
DRYPIX
See 8.1 Network Connection (DICOM) in IN: Installation of
the DRYPIX Service Manual.
FM-DP L
See 8. Checking the Network (DICOM) Connection in the
Installation section of the FM-DP L Service Manual.
2.

010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
OE5-14

This section describes the procedures for printing images onto the
printer from the CL for film annotation character format verification
purposes.

1.
From the

Version A software

Character Format
OE000017.EPS
Version B software
OE000099.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE5-15
3.2 Verifying the Film Annotation Character Format

Character Format
1.
If any abnormality is found, see Print Output Function


When the FM-DP L is connected, print both 10pix- and 20piximages.
For details on the print output procedure, see FCR XG-1
CR-IR346CL in the CL Operation Manual.
2.
Check whether the film annotation character format

the film. Also, check for blurred, chipped, or otherwise
abnormal character printings.
REFERENCE
(image size: 35 35cm (14" 14"); print format: TWIN). When the default
settings are used, character strings (1) through (19) are printed out.
FUJIFILM HOSPITAL
04001676
A0000 A020
(12) IP number
(4) Patient ID
(5) Patient name
R->L
G 1.0G#0.7+0.50R5Q0.5
SKULL, GENERAL
L 4.0S200C 1.2 1.0AP
Surgi
01
(10) Film mark

(7) Gender

1992 11 27 [17:43]
G1.0G#0.7+0.50R5Q1.0
[F] 23
SCALE 50% RT-04

(11) Reduction ratio
(14) Exposure menu name
(17) Exposure time
(6) Exposure date
(19) Technologist's code
00000034.EPS
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
OE5-16

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE5-17
BLANK PAGE
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE5-18
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE5-19
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE5-20
CL+FN-PS551 or 5000 Series

(FINP: Print Output)
HOST name : FCR-CSL*
IP address : 172.16.1.20*
This chapter presents the procedure for printing images using the FINP
via the FN-PS551 or 5000 series.
CL
IMPORTANT
When using the FINP, the film character format specified will be printed
out in accordance with the film format file defined in the FN-PS551 or
5000 series. Have the film character format be set up on the FN-PS551
or 5000 series.
Note that a film character format set up on the CL will not be enabled.
Image transfer
TCP/IP
Print output
FRUP
Other
connected
equipment
RU
LP
NOTE
The CR-IR346/348CL and FN-PS 551 or 5000 series are
abbreviated hereafter simply CL and other connected equipment,
respectively.
Prior to setup
CL requirements
The FINP image input/output option key (IR346 DMS NET-WORK
IN-OUT) is necessary.
HOST name
: FN-PS551*
IP address
: 172.16.1.30*
Device attribute : PRINT*
Protocol ID
: 110*
00000252.EPS
FN-PS551 requirements
The FN-PS551 main unit must have been set up accordingly.
5000 series requirements
The 5000 series main unit must have been set up accordingly.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
OE6-1

CL to other connected equipment and
an E-i/f cable to connect it to a printer.
1. Hardware Setup
Make setups for transferring images

to other connected equipment.
setups.
Setup for other connected equipment
(device attributes, data compression
type, etc.)
Perform the following as required.
Setup for changing the image
compression type depending on the
MPM code.
Registration of printer used for
automatic image printout when a
study is completed.
2. Software Setup
Transfer images from the CL to other

connected equipment to make sure that
films can be printed from the printer.
3. Connection
Checkout
4. Backing up the
Setup File
00000255.EPS
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
OE6-2
1. Hardware Setup
1. Hardware Setup
below.
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX Cable
TCP/IP
RU
CL
Other
connected
equipment
Printer
E-i/f Cable
00000253.EPS
NOTES
The cable type applicable to these equipment models (CR-IR346CL
and FN-PS5551) is the IEC950/UL1950-compliant UTP cable of
category 5 or higher.
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
OE6-3
2.1 FINP Image Input/Output Option Key Installation
2. Software Setup

Installation

items.
To transfer images to other connected equipment using the FINP, the

IR346 DMS NET-WORK IN-OUT option key is needed.
1.

Installation
NOTE


2.4 Printout Setup
2.4.1 Setup of Information on Other
Connected Equipment (ALL OTHER
NODES)
Compression Type Depending on the
MPM Code (FINP COMPRESSION
TYPE)
2.
Click
Tasks done
on the CL
00000085.EPS
2.5 Registering the Printer for Automatic Image

3.
4.

Equipment
CL host name and IP address settings
Basic printout settings
Film character format settings
Click
Click
Tasks done
on other
connected
equipment
5.
Click
6.
REFERENCE
keys, for image input and output, are stored on the FINP image input/
output option key CD.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE6-4

1.

1.

launches itself.
REFERENCE

NOTE
2.
Click
2.

the window.
MU000031.EPS
00000419.EPS
3.
Click
4.
MU000035.EPS
NOTE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE6-5
2.4 Printout Setup
REFERENCE
(or
2.4 Printout Setup

Set up the printout function as follows for other connected equipment.
Setup overview
Service Utility Setup Configuration Item window
) menu.
window.
Fuji Film, and FCR.
3.
II
opens.
00000054.EPS
OE000034.EPS
4.

The Setup Cofiguration Item window opens.
Setup of information on other connected equipment (I on the window

display)
Selection of protocol used (FINP) by other connected equipment
Setup of the protocol ID (FINP100/110) of other connected
equipment
Setup of attribute of other connected equipment
Setups for handling HQ images and image compression type
Setup for changing the image data compression type depending on
the MPM code (II on the window display)
Perform this setup only when transferring images by changing the
data compression type depending on the MPM code.
NOTE
To enable this setup, the
field must have
been activated before setting the image data compression type (ALL
OTHER NODES).
00000077.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
OE6-6
2.4 Printout Setup
4.

1.
Enter the host name (e.g.: FN-PS551) of other connected

equipment in

window.
5.
Enter the IP address (e.g.: 172.16.1.30) of other connected

equipment in
6.
Make sure that
is selected in the
column.
7.
Click
00000131.EPS
00000404.EPS
2.
Click the
3.
Select
mark of the
field.
and click
00000436.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE6-7
2.4 Printout Setup
8.
Set information of other connected equipment as follows.

I
II
III
IV
III. Select
HQ images.
Select
if other connected equipment can receive

if it can receive mammographic images as well.
IV. Select
when transferring HQ images to other
V. Select the image data compression type used for transferring
images to other connected equipment.

Select
when transferring images by
changing the data compression type depending on the MPM
code.
See 2.4.2 Setup for Changing the Image Data
Compression Type Depending on the MPM Code (FINP
COMPRESSION TYPE).
VI. To transfer annotation-embedded images, select

.
to transfer images not embedded with annotation.
Select
VI
00000437.EPS
I.
Select the protocol ID (

equipment supports.
II. Select the device attribute (

equipment.
) that other connected

) for other connected
REFERENCE
Select PRINT for the 5000 series and FN-PS551.
Select HD_FILE for the HI-C/QA-WS system.
Select OD_FILE for the ODF system.
Select OTHER for the CL.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE6-8
2.4 Printout Setup
9.
Click
REFERENCES

saved.
11. Click
.
If the
deleted.
Device attribute
Protocol ID
Handling of HQ images
Image data compression type
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Annotation transfer
00000438.EPS
OE6-9
2.4 Printout Setup

Compression Type Depending on the MPM Code
(FINP COMPRESSION TYPE)
3.
Set I. and II. on the display as follows.
Perform the following settings only when

is
selected for the image data compression type in ALL OTHER NODES.
1.
II
Select
Item window.
A list showing the data compression type for each MPM code will
be displayed on the right-side area of the window.
00000440.EPS
I.
List showing the data compression type for each MPM code
Select the exposure menu name.
REFERENCE
The MPM code that is for the exposure menu selected will be
displayed in the MPM Code column. Using the User Utility, the
user thus can view which MPM code is for the exposure menu
selected.
II.
4.
Click
Click

The MPM code set as above and the image data compression
type for the code will appear on the right side of this window.
00000439.EPS
2.
Select the image data compression type.
5.
To set image data compression types for other MPM codes,

repeat steps 2. to 4.
The FINP Compression Type window opens.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE6-10
2.5 Registering the Printer for Automatic Image Printout When a Study is Completed CONNECTING EQUIPMENT
2.5 Registering the Printer for Automatic

Image Printout When a Study is
Completed CONNECTING EQUIPMENT
Described herein is the procedure used for registering the printer for
automatic image printout when a study is completed.
For a printer that outputs prints only through the QA operation, no
registration is required at this step.
1.
Click
on the Setup
4.
Click
5.

saved.
6.
Click

window.
00000081.EPS
2.
Click
3.

in the

in the
field and select the host name
(e.g.: FN-PS551) of other connected equipment.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE6-11

1.

The system return to the IIP Service Utility window.
2.


Equipment
Make the following settings on other connected equipment.
FN-PS 551
CL host name and IP address settings
Basic printout settings
Film character format settings
See 7. Service Utility in the Maintenance section of the FN-PS551
Service Manual.
5000 series
EQUIPMENT (EQUIP file) settings
HOST ADDRESS (HOST file) settings
Film annotation character format (PRINT file) settings
See MU: Maintenance Utility of the 5000 series Service Manuals.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE6-12
3.1 CL-AP Startup
3.2 Printout Checkout
After the CL-AP has been started up, make sure that images can be
transferred from the CL to the FN-PS551.
1.
3.1 CL-AP Startup
3.1 CL-AP Startup

From the

For details on the print output procedure, see FCR XG-1
CR-IR346CL in the CL Operation Manual.
3.2 Printout Checkout
1.
Transfer images from the CL to other connected equipment to make

sure that films can be printed from the printer.
2.
Make sure that the output queue of other connected

equipment displays images transferred from the CL.
3.
When prints are output to the printer, make sure that those
printouts are as per the film character format that has been
set up on other connected equipment.
Also, check for blurred, chipped, or otherwise abnormal

character printings.
Fuji Film and FCR.

Version A software
OE000017.EPS
Version B software
OE000099.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE6-13

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE6-14
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE6-15
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE6-16

Presented herein is the procedure used for setup of the ID Online
function that acquires patient information from the RIS.
NOTES
The connection system will differ with each other for RIS and IDC4.
The CR-IR346/348CL is abbreviated hereafter simply CL.
Before setup
CL requirements

The patient information online option key (IR346 ID ONLINE) is
needed.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)

For the RIS, add a serial connector
and use a serial cable to connect the
CL to the RIS.
For the IDC4, use a network cable to
connect the CL to the IDC4.
1. Hardware Setup
Install the patient information online

option key, reinstall the AP key and
make setups for the patient
information online configuration file.
Make sure that the patient information

can be received from the RIS or IDC4
and the ID Online function works
properly.
3. Verifying the
Connection
Back up the patient information online

function configuration file.
4. Backing Up the
Setup File
OE7-1
1.1 Adding a Serial Connector [Only when using the serial i/f]
1. Hardware Setup
Set up hardware as follows for the CL and RIS.
1.1 Adding a Serial Connector Add a serial connector to the
CL-PC (only when using the
[Only when using the
serial i/f).
serial i/f]
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)

[Only when using the serial i/f]
When using the serial i/f, add a serial connector as appropriate.
For details on how to add a serial connector, see 1. Adding a
Serial Connector in FR20 Adding and Setting the Serial
Connector under FR: Function-specific Reference.
RIS:
Use a dedicated serial cable to
connect the CL to the RIS.
IDC4:
Use a network cable to connect
the CL to the RIS.
OE7-2

RIS (serial i/f cable)
Use a dedicated serial cable to connect the CL to the RIS.
When the MOXA board is mounted, use a dedicated serial cable, a
relay adapter and a conversion cable to connect the CL to the RIS.
Serial connector
CL
RIS
Dedicated serial cable/dedicated serial cable +

relay adapter + conversion cable
00000492.EPS
IDC4
Use a network cable to connect the CL to the IDC4.
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX Cable
TCP/IP
CL
IDC4
OE000008.EPS
NOTES
Do not connect the telephone line to the CL network connectors.
The cable type applicable to this CL equipment is the IEC950/UL1950compliant UTP cable of category 5 or higher.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE7-3
2.1 Patient Information Online Option Key Installation
2.1 Patient Information Online Option Key
Installation
2.1 Patient Information Online Option Key

Installation
To use the ID Online function, the IR346 ID ONLINE option key is
needed.
1.
NOTE
2.3 Driver Installation


2.5 Port and Sevice Utility Setup
2.
Click
A window opens to indicate the completion of option key

installation.
2.6 Configuration Setup

2.6.1 Configuration Setup for RIS Connection
2.6.2 Configuration Setup for IDC4 Connection
00000241.EPS
3.
Click
4.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE7-4

1.
2.3 Driver Installation

When using the PSI04A board and the MOXA board, install the relevant
driver.
For details of the driver installation procedure, see 2. Installing
the Driver in FR20 Adding and Setting the Serial Connector
NOTE
2.
Click
00000419.EPS
3.
Click
4.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE7-5

1.
From the
REFERENCE
The CL-AP will start up.
2.
(or
) menu.

the window.
window.
Fuji Film, and FCR.
3.
MU000031.EPS
window opens.
MU000035.EPS
NOTE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
00000403.EPS
OE7-6
2.5 Port and Service Utility Setup
2.5 Port and Service Utility Setup

When the PSI04A board is not to be used with software version V7.1 (B)
or later, the port and Service Utility setup must be performed accordingly
after adding a serial connector.
For details of the port and Service Utility setup procedure, see
3. Port and Service Utility Settings in FR20 Adding and Setting
the Serial Connector under FR: Function-specific Reference.

Set up the following configuration items for the ID Online function.
Setting items will differ with each other for the RIS and IDC-IV.
RIS
IDC4

2.6.2 Configuration Setup for IDC4 Connection
Configuration Item
RIS IDC4
CP850(DOSLatin1)/
CP1252(WINLatin1)
No. of the CH to be inserted into the

PSI board connector
Short/Long format
34 Various timeout
No changes are required for settings.
35 values
Search key
36
type
ID No./Reception No./Accession No.

(only when TypeB or Type-IDC4 is set
for the i/f type.)
37 i/f type
TypeA/TypeB/Type-IDC4
31 Code set used

32
Serial port
number
33 i/f format
38
IDC4 host
name
idc4 (default)
39
IDC4 IP
address
172.16.1.1 (default)
40
IDC4 port
number
13001 (default)
: Essential
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Remarks
: As required
OE7-7
1.
2.
Click
A list of IDT/Console function setup items appear in the right-hand

area of the window.

window.
00000131.EPS

OE000038.EPS
3.
Select for
a Latin font code set
to be used for ID online connection.

For details of the code set, see Detailed explanations in
00000404.EPS
4.
In accordance with the PSI board CH No., set up a serial port

.
number for
5.
To use extended format for the i/f format, change setting for
to 1.Long.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE7-8
6.
Select i/f type for
7.
When Type-B has been selected in step 6. above, select

for the search key type used.
REFERENCE
Type-A : Used when transferring ID information from the RIS (no
queries will be made by the CL).
Type-B : Used when making queries by the CL with the search
key to acquire ID information that corresponds to the
search key from the RIS.
CL user window (Registration) : Version A software
u NOTE u
For the Latin font, either DOS Latin1 or WIN Latin1 code set will be
used.
For the code set used, follow the settings in step 3.
REFERENCE
0 : ID#
1 : ID#&RECEPT#
2 : ID#&EXAM#
ID No. only
ID No. and Reception No.
ID No. and Accession No.
ID No., Reception No., Accession No.
If "Type-B" is selected, the search key entry box appears.

If "Type-A" is selected, the entry box does not appear.
00000493.EPS
CL user window (Registration) : Version B software

Search key
(This window represents an example when
3:ID#&RECEPT#&EXAM# has been selected.)
00000494.EPS
If "Type-B" is selected,
appears on the right of the
search key entry box.
If "Type-A" is selected, the entry box does not appear.
00000122.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE7-9
2.6.2 Configuration Setup IDC4 Connection
1.
On the IIP Service Utility window, click [Setup

Search key
00000131.EPS
00000120.EPS
8.

saved.
9.
Click
00000404.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE7-10
2.
Click
The IDT/console function setup items appear in the right-hand

area of the window.
6.
With
, select a key type for search
(search key).
NOTE
For the Latin font, either DOS Latin1 or WIN Latin1 code set will be
used.
For the code set used, follow the settings in step 3.
REFERENCE
0 : ID#
1 : ID#&RECEPT#
2 : ID#&EXAM#
ID No. only
ID No. and Reception No.
ID No. and Accession No.
ID No., Reception No., Accession No.
OE000038.EPS
3.
With
, select a Latin font code
set for ID online connection.

For detailed code set descriptions, see Detailed
explanations in 3.6 Configuration Details 5. CSL/IDT
FUNCTION under MU: Maintenance Utility.
4.
When using an extended format as the interface format,

change the
5.
Change the
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
setting to 1. Long.
setting to
Search key
00000494.EPS
OE7-11
1.

2.
Click Exit Service Utility.

Search key
00000120.EPS
7.
In the
field, enter the IDC4 host
name.
8.
In the
field, enter the IDC4 IP
address.
9.
In the
field, enter the IDC4
port number.
10. From the Config (F) menu, choose Save.

saved.
11. Click
The system saves the entered setup data.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE7-12
Version B software
Receive patient information from the RIS to verify the CL connection.

3.2 Patient Information Reception Checkout
Type-A setup checkout procedure
Type-B/Type-IDC4 setup checkout
procedure
OE000099.EPS

1.
From the

Version A software
OE000017.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE7-13
3.2 Patient Information Reception

Checkout
Version B software
Shown below are the procedures used for connection checkout of

Type-A, Type-B and Type-IDC4 interface setups.
Type-A setup checkout procedure
1.
Enter patient information on the RIS.

The patient information entered will be transferred to the CL
automatically.
2.
Patient information transferred

from the RIS
OE000101.EPS
Check to see that the patient information items appear on

the CL study registration display.
Version A software
Patient information transferred

from the RIS
00000496.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE7-14
2.
Type-B/Type-IDC4 setup checkout procedure
1.
Enter the search key on the CL study registration display

and click
(or
If patient information that is for the search key entered is

detected on the RIS or IDC4, it will appear on the CL study
registration display.
Version A software
).
Version A software
Patient information
transferred from
the RIS
Select the search key type and enter the search key.
00000497.EPS
Version B software
Select the
search key type.
Enter the
search key.
OE000010.EPS
Version B software
00000121.EPS
Target patient information will be searched for on the RIS or IDC4.
Patient information
transferred from the RIS
OE000102.EPS
NOTE
If the target patient information is not found on the RIS or IDC4, a
message will appear to indicate that no such information has been
registered to the RIS.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE7-15

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE7-16

This chapter describes the DICOM MWM and DICOM PPS setup
procedures.
MWM
Abbreviation of the Modality Worklist Management function, which
enables the CL to receive via networks patient information or
exposure menu registered to the RIS and view it on the study
reception window.
The CL offers two kinds of MWM: MWM(ORDER) that receives both
patient information and exposure menu and MWM (ID) that receives
only patient information.
PPS
Abbreviation of the Performed Procedure Step function, which is
responsible for sending patient's actual measurement values
determined on the CL back to the RIS.
Basically, the PPS function is used combined with MWM. Note
however that the RIS does not support the PPS function depending
on the model. For this reason, the CL offers the MWM and PPS
functions individually.
NOTE
TheCR-IR348CL is abbreviated hereafter simply CL.
Prior to setup
CL requirements

The following option keys are needed.
Key Name
Functions Supported
a. CL DICOM ORDER MWM key* Modality Worklist Management
(patient information and exposure
menu)
b. CL DICOM ID MWM key*
Modality Worklist Management
(only patient information)
c. CL DICOM PPS key
Performed Procedure Step
* Variation
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Connection/setup examples
The following connection/setup examples are used in this chapter to
describe the setup procedure.
RIS setup example
RIS_A* /172.16.1.80*.............................
RIS_SCP* /5010*...............................
Modality Worklist Management....
SCP..........................................
Performed Procedure Step..........
SCP..........................................
HOST name/IP address

AE name/Port number
Service Class (for MWM)
Role
Service Class (for PPS)
Role
RIS
DICOM MWM
TCP/IP
DICOM PPS
RU
CL
CL setup example
fcr-csl* /172.16.1.20*............................... HOST name/IP address
CL-SCU*/Port number
(setup not required**)......................... AE name/Port number
Modality Worklist MFIND............... Service Class (for MWM)
SCU.......................................... Role
Modality Performed Procedure Step.. Service Class (for PPS)
SCU.......................................... Role
* Setup examples that need be changed depending on the equipment
or network environment.
** Port number needs not be set up for the Service Class when the
Role is SCU.
00000520.EPS
OE8-1
MWM/PPS configuration setting information [reference]

CL to the RIS.
1. Hardware Stup
Make setups for the DICOM MWM or

DICOM PPS function.
Optional key installation
DICOM MWM settings
DICOM PPS settings
2. Software Setup
When performing DICOM MWM or DICOM PPS setup, you might have
to perform configuration setup procedures (IMAGE MODALITY and
CSL/IDT FUNCTION) in addition to a normal DICOM connection setup
procedure depending on the specifications for the RIS to be connected.
Details are given below.
For detailed setup procedure, see 2.5 MWM/PPS Configuration
Setup.
When the employed RIS does not support the PPS (or makes the
PPS inoperative)
Select No for IMAGE MODALITY No. 18 (Display Performed
Procedure on Worklist Tab). There are no operational problems even
if No is selected when the employed RIS supports the PPS.

DICOM MWM and DICOM PPS
configuration settings
Name element settings
Setups for exposure menu/study
menu mapping
Verify DICOM MWM and DICOM PPS
operations.
3. Verifying the
Connection
4. Backing Up
the Setup File
When the PPS function is not used, the information about the end of
study cannot be returned to the RIS. This causes the system to send
data about patients who have gone through a study process back to
the RIS. For this reason, such data is displayed unavoidably. This
configuration setting is used to avoid this situation. When No is
selected as the configuration setting, the data about patients who
have gone through a study process will be deleted from the CL
worklist.
When the employed RIS is manufactured by T company
When Ts RIS is used, consult with the hospital administrator to
determine whether or not to enable the following configuration
settings.
Setting the method of inquiring at the RIS
The CL acquires patient information in accordance with a trigger
signal from the RIS.
Setting the compliance with the JJ1017 guideline in Japan
The following three items of information will be displayed within
the exposure menu information sequence.
First information item
: Exposure technique (Plain, Contrast,
etc.)
Second information item : Exposure region (Head, Chest, etc.)
Third information item
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
: Direction of exposure (Frontal,

Lateral, etc.)
OE8-2
1. Hardware Setup
When the employed RIS is capable of inquiring about radiation

condition information
When RIS is capable of inquiring about radiation condition
information, additional MWM inquiry items can be set. These items
should be enabled or disabled in accordance with actual operations
at the hospital.
The following additional items can be set.
Exposure dose sequence
Radiation mode
X-ray generator tube voltage [kV] to be used
X-ray tube current [A]
X-ray exposure time [ms]
Label on the filter placed in the X-ray beam
X-ray absorption filter material
When the employed RIS is capable of acquiring exposure status
information through a private tag
When the RIS is capable of acquiring exposure status information
through a private tag, additional PPS items can be set. These items
should be enabled or disabled in accordance with actual operations
at the hospital.
The following additional items can be set.
1. Hardware Setup
Connect the CL to the RIS via networks as illustrated below.
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX cable
TCP/IP
RU
CL
RIS
00000522.EPS
NOTES
The cable type applicable to the CL equipment is the IEC950/UL1950compliant UTP cable of category 5 or higher.
Exposure status sequence

Number of split exposures
Exposure status
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
OE8-3
2.1 DICOM MWM or DICOM PPS Option Key Installation
2. Software Setup
2.1 DICOM MWM or DICOM PPS Option

Key Installation
Set up software for the CL as follows.
REFERENCE
2.1 DICOM MWM or DICOM PPS Option

Key Installation
You may install both the MWM (ORDER) option key and the MWM (ID)
option key.
Local patient information database, which cannot be used if only the
MWM (ORDER) option key is installed, becomes available when both
are installed.

2.3 Setup for the DICOM MWM Function
2.3.1 Setup of CL Information for the
DICOM MWM Function
2.3.2 Registration of RIS Information
2.3.3 Registration of RIS Used for
MWM
2.4 Setup for the DICOM PPS Function
2.4.1 Setup of CL Information for the
DICOM PPS Function
2.4.3 Registration of RIS Used with
PPS
2.5 MWM/PPS Configuration Setup
2.6 Changing Name Elements
2.7 Setup for Exposure Menu/Study Menu
Mapping
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Compulsory tasks
1.
Insert the DICOM MWM option key CD into the PC.

NOTE
Tasks done only
when the PPS
function is used.
2.
Click
3.
Click
Tasks done as
necessary.
Tasks done only
when handling
ordering information
with the MWM
function.
4.
5.
When using the DICOM PPS function, insert the optional

DICOM PPS key CD to install it following the procedure
described in steps 2. to 4. above.
OE8-4

If an option key is installed, be sure to reinstall the AP key.
Described below is the procedure to be followed to reinstall the AP key
using the AP key CD (114Y5342002A: Version A00 or later).
1.

NOTE
2.
Click

Set up CL and RIS information for the DICOM MWM function.
2.3.1 Setup of CL Information for the DICOM MWM

Function
The items listed below must be set up following the procedure described
herein using NETWORK CONFIG and THIS HOST (IIP) of Service
Utility mode.
CLs AE name (Application Entity Name)
Service Class and Role, Device Attribute (OTHER)
Other (timeout setting)
1.
Start Service Utility mode and click [Setup Configuration

Item] window.
For how to start Service Utility mode, see 1. Starting/Exiting
the Service Utility under MU: Maintenance Utility.
00000419.EPS
3.
Click
4.

00000131.EPS
00000404.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE8-5
2.
Click the
3.
Select
mark of the
field.
and click
4.

displayed.
CL host name
CL IP address
00000441.EPS
NOTE
00000442.EPS

6.
Enter the AE name (e.g. CL-SCU) that is the SCU for the CL
field.
in the
5.
NOTE
There is no need to set the Port number in the
(Port number) field.
When selecting SCU as the Role, the Port number will be
Select DICOM.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
00000405.EPS
OE8-6
7.
Click
in the
NOTE
12. Click
The system return to the Application Entity List window.

00000533.EPS
8.
13. Click
The system returns to the Setup Configuration window.
in the
Class (Modality Worklist MFIND).
REFERENCE
REFERENCE
.

Verification must have been set.
CLs AE name

the Connection to Other Connected Equipment - Verify
9.

the Role.
(SCU) for

as necessary.
Service Class, Role, Transfer Syntax

and device attribute (Attribute)
REFERENCE
You need not to check
Even if checked, it will be disregarded if the Role set in step 9,

above is the SCU.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
If the
00000538.EPS
key is clicked, currently selected items will
be deleted.
OE8-7

The items listed below must be registered following the procedure
described herein using NETWORK CONFIG and ALL OTHER
NODES of Service Utility mode.
3.
Click
The Application Entity List window opens for setup of RIS

information.
RIS host name and IP address

RIS AE name (Application Entity Name) and Port number
Service Class, Role and device attribute (OTHER)
Other (usage of two-byte characters, etc.)
1.
Select
2.
Makes the following settings.

Enter the Host name (e.g. RIS_A) in the
field.
Enter the IP address (e.g. 172.16.1.80) in the

field.
Select DICOM.
00000444.EPS
4.

Enter the RIS AE name (e.g. RIS_SCP) in the
field.
Select DICOM.
00000405.EPS
NOTES
Enter the RIS Port number (e.g. 5010) in the
field.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE8-8
5.
Click
2.3.3 Registration of RIS Used for MWM
1.
Click
of the Setup
A list of connecting equipment units appears on the right-side area

of the window.
00000081.EPS
00000533.EPS
6 .
in the
field
to select Service Class (Modality Worklist MFIND).
7.
8.
3.
(SCP) is selected for the Role.

(
box

in the
field
to select function (MWM) of the connecting equipment.
).
needs not be set. Even if set, it will be

disregarded.
in the
field
to select AE name (e.g. RIS_SCP).
4.
Click
in the
field to select OTHER for the device attribute of other

10. Click
REFERENCE
9.
Click
The Connecting Equipment window opens.
Because the RIS AE is the Provider, make sure that

To handle two-byte characters, check the
2.
5.
11. Click

010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE8-9
2.
Select
(CLs AE name).
Set up CL and RIS information for the DICOM PPS function.
NOTE
Do not perform settings for the DICOM PPS function if the optional
DICOM PPS key has not been installed. Otherwise, an error (30151 or
20110) will occur.
2.4.1 Setup of CL Information for the DICOM PPS Function

Following are the items to be set according to the procedure described
herein. Use Service Utility NETWORK CONFIG THIS HOST (IIP)
for setup purposes.
CLs AE name and device attribute
Service Class and Role
Other (timeout setting)
1.
00000539.EPS
[Already set in 2.3]

window.
The right-hand side of the window will change to the DICOMSetup

window.
3.
Click
00000533.EPS
00000131.EPS
00000404.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE8-10
4.
in the
Class (Modality Performed Procedure Step).
REFERENCE
Verification must have been set.
5.

the Role.
Following are the items to be set according to the procedure described

herein. Use Service Utility NETWORK CONFIG ALL OTHER
NODES for setup purposes.
RIS host name and IP address
RIS AE name, port number and device attribute
Service Class and Role
Other (usage of two-byte characters)
1.
Select

(RIS host name)
(RIS
AE name) in the Setup Configuration Item window.
(SCU) for
REFERENCE
When setting up SCU, items in the DICOMSetup window that
need not be set will be hidden.
6.
Set the DICOM inter-message timeout value

) as necessary.
REFERENCE
You need not to check
.
Even if checked, it will be disregarded if the Role set in step 5,
above is the SCU.
7.
Click
00000540.EPS
The right-hand side of the window will change to the DICOMSetup

window.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE8-11
2.
Click
2.4.3 Registration of RIS Used with PPS
1.
Click
on the Setup
A list of registered equipment appears in the right-side area of the

window.
00000081.EPS
00000533.EPS
3.
2.
in the
Class (Modality Performed Procedure Step).
4.
Make sure that
3.
(SCP) has been selected for the Role
in the
field
and select the function (PPS) of the connected device.

To handle two-byte characters, check
in the
.
(e.g.: RIS_SCP).
You need not to set
Even if set, it will be disregarded.
Click
Perform the following setup steps.

REFERENCE
6.
The Connection Equipment window opens.
because the RIS AE is the Provider.
5.
Click
4.
Click
5.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE8-12

Perform the following configuration setup procedures, which are related
to the MWM or PPS.
General settings for MWM/PPS
Setting the method of inquiring at the RIS
Setting the additional MWM inquiry items
Setting the compliance with the JJ1017 guideline in Japan
Setting the additional PPS items to be returned to the RIS
Setup of timing for transmission of PPS study termination notice
Embedding the exposure information into a PPS standard tag
Exposure result editing setup
Setting the MWM Code Meaning as a menu name
Setting the reissue of StudyInstanceUID for a study retrieved by MWM
2.5.1 General Settings for MWM/PPS
1.

, then
.
The display shows the setup items about CL system information.
2.
3.
Choose
4.
Make the following configuration settings.
Setups items related with the IDT functions appear on the righthand side of the window.
Item
number
Configuration name
15
Examination No. Length

(Character string length
of the examination no.)
17
Patient ID Length
(Character string length
of the patient ID.)
22
Requesting Dept Name

Field Setup
(Setups for the menu
contents to be displayed
in the Requesting
Department field.)
5.
, then
Description
These items are used to change the

character string length in accordance
with RIS settings.
This item selects Sbcs or Dbcs in

accordance with RIS settings.
Use the Config (F) menu to save the edited data.
Item
number
Configuration name
Description
16
SOP Class UID for PPS

When No
FILE Attribute Output
SOP Class UID to be returned to the

PPS when the OD_FILE attribute
output destination is not registered at
the CL.
17
Protocol Name for PPS
Value to be set for the protocol name of

the PPS.
18
Display Performed
Procedure on Worklist
Tab
This item is used to specify whether

the CL worklist should display
completed studies. Even if the MWM
sends information about completed
studies, they will not be displayed when
No is selected as the setting.
Select No when the PPS function
cannot be used.
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
OE8-13
2.5.2 Setting the Method of Inquiring at the RIS
Function overview
There are the following three methods of making patient information
inquiries at the RIS.
Trigger signal from the RIS
Update procedure to be performed at the CL - 1
Trigger signal from the RIS
When the CL receives a trigger signal from the RIS, the CL makes
inquires at the RIS to acquire patient information. An automatic
transition occurs to switch from the worklist tab window to the study
start window only when one piece of study information is acquired.
NOTES
Trigger signal setup is to be performed only when the connection to
T companys equipment is established.
Setup procedure
1.

, then
.
2.
With configuration item No. 66, select an inquiry method,

and then set RIS information for items No. 64 and 65.
Item
number
Configuration name
64
MWM RIS Trigger Port
RIS trigger reception port number for

MWM use.
Enter a numerical value in accordance
with the RIS trigger reception port.
65
MWM RIS Trigger

Timeout
RIS trigger reception timeout value

(sec) for MWM use.
Study start method for MWM use.
Select a method in accordance with the
RIS specifications and actual hospital
operations.
When two or more pieces of study information are received at a

time, the display does not automatically switch to the study start
window but the study information remains within the worklist tab.
The RIS trigger signal is accepted only when the CLs worklist tab
is selected. If the RIS transmits the trigger signal while a tab other
than the worklist tab is selected, a timeout occurs at the RIS.
66

A procedure is performed at the CL to acquire information that is
registered at the RIS. Inquiries can be automatically made at fixed
intervals (user-selectable).
A procedure is performed at the CL to acquire information that is
registered at the RIS. Inquiries can be automatically made at fixed
intervals (user-selectable). An automatic transition occurs to switch
from the worklist tab window to the study start window only when
one piece of study information is acquired.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Description
3.
MWM Execute Study

Type
0: Manual (default)
Update procedure to be performed
at the CL.
1: Trigger
RIS trigger signal.
2: Auto
Update procedure to be performed
at the CL (automatic window
transition).
OE8-14
2.5.3 Setting Additional MWM Inquiry Items
2.5.4 Setting the Compliance with the JJ1017 Guideline
Function overview
Function overview
As MWM inquiry items, the following information about radiation

conditions can be added. When the PPS is supported, the same
information as listed below will be returned to the RIS.
Description
DICOM Tag
Meaning
Exposure Dose Sequence
0040,030E
Exposure dose sequence.
>Radiation Mode
0018,115A
Radiation mode.
>KVp
0018,0060
X-ray generator tube voltage

[kV] to be used.
>X-ray Tube Current in A 0018,8151
X-ray tube current [A].
>Exposure Time
0018,1150
X-ray exposure time [ms].
>Filter Type
0018,1160
Label on the filter placed in the

X-ray beam.
>Filter Material
0018,7050
X-ray absorption filter material.
Setup procedure
1.

, then
.
2.
First information item

: Exposure technique (Plain, Contrast, etc.)
Second information item : Exposure region (Head, Chest, etc.)
Third information item
: Direction of exposure (Frontal, Lateral, etc.)
NOTE
Setup is to be performed only for the connection to the equipment
manufactured by T company.
REFERENCE
At the CL, three values of the codes [(0040,0008)>(0008,0100)] fed
from the RIS are sequentially concatenated and used as an extended
menu code. If, for instance, three menus are fed, a total of nine codes
exist. Sets of three items of information are sequentially concatenated,
beginning with the leading one, and used as an extended menu code.
Setup procedure
1.
Select Yes for the following configuration setting.
Item
number
67
3.
When JJ1017 compliance setup is performed, the following three items

of information are used within the exposure menu information sequence
to decide on the exposure menu.
Configuration
name
MWM Request
Exposure
Dose Status
Description
The configuration function for this inquiry
item is disabled. This inquiry item will be
validated when you add it as one of the
inquiries (listed in the table of Function
Overview above) to be addressed to the
RIS by exercising 14. Setting the DICOM
MWM C-FIND Tags.
2.
Select 1: JJ1017 for the following configuration setting.
Item
number
68
Use the Configuration menu to save the edited data.
3.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)

, then
.
Configuration
name
MWM Exposure
Menu Code
Treatment
Description
Exposure menu code system for MWM use.
This item is used to specify the setting in
accordance with the RIS specifications.
0: Normal (default)
1: JJ1017
2: JJ1017 (Ver3)
OE8-15
2.5.5 Setting the Additional PPS Items to be Returned to the RIS
Function overview
The information about exposure status can be added as the PPS
information to be returned to the RIS.
A private tag is used to return the information.
Description
DICOM Tag
Meaning
Exposure Status
Sequence
0019,XXA0
>Division Count
>0019,XX71 Number of split exposures.
>Exposure Status
Exposure status
>0019,XXA1 (NORMAL: Normal exposure;
MIS: Improperly exposed image).
>Exposure Kind
Exposure kind
>0019,XXA2 (NORMAL: Normal; ADD: Additional;
AGAIN: Reexposure).
Distance Source to
Detector
>0018,1110
Exposure status sequence.
Distance between
X-ray source and detector.
2.
Choose one of the following three options to determine the time at

which the PPS study termination notice should be transmitted to the
RIS:
: When the study is terminated after receipt of all
images.
: When the study is terminated after the completion of
Subscribe
IP registration or when the study is terminated in
situations where setup is completed so as to delete
unregistered menus.
DownloadPDA : At the termination of transmitting the study to the
POCKET id Console.
Completed
The study completion sequence includes the beginning of the next

study in which a magnetic card or the like is used.
Setup procedure

, then
.
Select 1: Status Only or 2: Status + Other Results for the
following configuration setting.
Description
Specifying whether the PPS should use a private
tag to return the information about exposure status (improperly exposed image, reexposure, etc.).
76
PPS
Exposure
Status
Sequence
0: No (default)
Does not return exposure status information.
1: Status Only
Returns only exposure status information.
2: Status + Other Results
Returns exposure status information along with
other results values.

, then
.
The display shows on its right-hand side the setup items about the
IDT function.
Item Configuration
number
name
3.
Function overview
1.
Setup procedure
1.
2.5.6 Setup of Timing for Transmission of PPS Study

Termination Notice
2.
Select 0: Complete, 1: Subscribe, or 2: DownloadPDA

for the following configuration setting.
Item
number
92
3.
Configuration
name
PPS N-SET
Timming
Description
Specifying the time at which the PPS study
termination notice (N-SET) should be
transmitted to the RIS.
0: Complete [default]
1: Subscribe
2: DownloadPDA
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE8-16
2.5.7 Embedding the Exposure Information into a

PPS Standard Tag
Function overview
This function is exercised at the time of PPS study termination
notification to map image-incidental information (divided exposure
count, exposure status, and exposure kind) with a PPS standard tag
and transmit it to the RIS.
NOTE
Although 2.5.5 Setting the Additional PPS Items to be Returned to the
RIS states that a private tag is used to return the information to the
RIS, the captioned function maps the exposure information with a
standard tag and returns it to the RIS.
Setup procedure
1. From the Setup Configuration Item window, choose

, then
.
The display shows on its righr-hand side the setup items about the
IDT function.
2.
Perform the following configuration settings accordingly.
Item
number
90
91
3.
Configuration
name
Description
PPS Exposure
Status Mapping Tag
Setting the tag for mapping exposure

information (divided exposure count,
exposure status, and exposure kind).
0040, 0260 > 0008, 0104 [default]
If this field is left blank, the mapping
operation does not take place.
PPS Exposure
Status
Mapping Kind
Specifying the exposure information to be

mapped.
0: None (default).Does not perform the
mapping operation.
1: Div+Status+KindDivided exposure count,
exposure status, and exposure kind (all).
2: DivDivided exposure count only.
3: Status+KindExposure status and
exposure kind only.
2.5.8 Exposure Result Editing Setup
Function overview
The exposure results to be returned to the RIS are edited from the study
window at the PPS. The following information items can be edited:
Discription
PPS Tag
Item
Setup target
0040,0340>0008,1070
Technologist
information
For each
study
0019,xxA0>0018,1110
Radiation
source-todetector
distance (SID)
For each
menu
(image)
Billing Supplies
and Devices
Sequence
0040,0324
Contrast media
For each
consumption
study
information
Number of Films
0040,0321>2100,0017
Number of
films
For each
menu
(image)
Film SIze ID
0040,0321>2010,0050
Film size
For each
menu
(image)
Radiation Dose
Sequence
0040,030E
X-ray dose
For each
X-ray shot
Performed
Procedure Step
Description
0040,0254
Performed
For each
procedure step
study
description
Protocol Name
0040,0340>0018,1030
Protocol name
Operators Name
Distace Source to
Detector (SID)
For each
study
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE8-17
Setup procedure
1.

, then
.
IDT function.
2.
Perform the following configuration settings accordingly.
Item
number
87
Configuration
name
PPS Edit Billing

Supplies
Description
Specifying from the exposure information
editing dialog box whether the information
about contrast media consumption should
be editable.
2.5.9 Setting the MWM Code Meaning as a Menu

Name
Function overview
The [0040,0100]>[0040,0008]>[0008,0104] Code Meaning acquired
from the RIS as the information about a response from the RIS
(C-FIND-RSP) will be handled as an exposure menu name. The names
received from the RIS will be used as the following menu names:
Image-level menu names for various study lists
Menu names for the study/QA window
Menu names to be displayed on the Image Reader panel
Menu names indicated on an output film
Menu names for a filing device/image display device (output device)
For details on DICOM MWM C-FIND tag setup, see 14. Setting the
DICOM MWM C-FIND Tags DICOM MWM C-FIND Tag Setting in
Yes
: Editable.
No [default] : Noneditable.
88
PPS Edit Exposure

Result
Specifying whether or not to open the

exposure information editing dialog box at
the PPS for purposes other than
radiographer information editing.
Setup procedure
1.
Yes
: Opens.
No [default] : Does not open.
3.

, then
.
IDT function.
2.
Item
number
89
3.
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
Configuration
name
MWM Menu Name

Mapping
Description
Handling the code meaning acquired as
the information about a response from the
RIS as an exposure menu name.
Yes
: Handles as an exposure
menu name.
No [default] : Does not handle as an
exposure menu name.
OE8-18
2.5.10 Settings for Regenerating StudyInstanceUID for

a Study Acquired Using the MWM Function
Function overview
The StudyInstanceUID acquired via MWM was not allowed to modify so
far, which now became possible to be modified from version V3.0(B).
Modification is possible if Yes is specified for setup item No. 134 of
CSL/IDT FUNCTION. Patient information and the like changed following
the configuration settings for the UID generation will consequently
modify SOPInstanceUID and StudyInstanceUID at the same time.
Procedure used for performing configuration settings for

generation of UID (applicable as necessary)
1.
Click the
mark in the
2.
Click
field on the
Setup item information for the CL system information appears at

the right side of the window.
Setup procedure
Procedure used for performing configuration settings for
regeneration of StudyInstanceUID acquired using MWM
1.
Select
and then
on the Setup Configuration Item window.
Setup items for the IDT function appear at the right side of the
window.
2.
Select Yes for the configuration setting below.
Item
number
134
3.
Configuration
name
MWM
StudyInstanceUID
Regeneration
00000408.EPS
Description
Specifying whether or not to permit the
MWM StudyInstanceUID to be
regenerated.
Yes : Permitted.
No : Not permitted (default)
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
OE8-19
3.
Perform the following configuration settings that relate with

the UID generation.
Table
UID-related setup items (IMAGE MODALITY)
No
Name
Selection
Meaning
9 UID Issuance YES

after Modifying
Issues a new UID.
ID Information NO

the CL.
10 UID Issuance YES

after Modifying
Issues a new UID.
Normalized
NO
Parameter

modified on the CL.
11 UID Issuance YES

after Modifying
Issues a new UID.
Image
NO
Processing
Parameter

modified on the CL.
12 UID Issuance
Before
Sending
Processed
Data

SOP Instance UID as the UID
of a processed CR image
when outputting processed
images from the CL.
YES
Issues a new UID.
NO

issuance logic.
Generation
Series - 1 image
Logic
See 3.4 Configuration
Details 1. IMAGE
MODALITY under
one series.
MU: Maintenance
Utility.
one series.
Series - N image
one series.
No
Name
Selection
Meaning
39 UID Issuance YES

about a
Issues a new UID.
function
NO
(except Image
Processing) to
change to the
image
themselves

Instance UID when
energy subtraction
modified on the CL.
45 UID Issuance YES

after Modifying
Issues a new UID.
Trimming
NO
Parameter


after Modifying
Issues a new UID.
FNC
NO
Parameter

: Default setting
4.
5.
Click
A window opens prompting you to confirm the setup data to be

saved.
The setup data is saved accordingly.
: Default setting
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
OE8-20
2.5.11 Setting the Compliance with JJ1017 V3
Setup procedure
1.
NOTES
This function cannot be used with portable radiographic function (CL
SOFT FOR POCKET ID CL) (optional).
If the exposure menu is added/edited on CL for a study supporting
JJ1017 V3, JJ1017 V3 will not be applied to the study.
An exposure menu received from RIS is displayed on CL by combining
the code which is defined in JJ1017 V3. If a different menu name
has been set for the menu code from User Utility, the contents to be
displayed will be different.
Up to 28 characters of menu name can be displayed on CL after being
combined. Be careful when using menus with long codes.
If a normal menu or a menu for JJ1017 V3 is edited in User Utility, the
menu will be registered as a normal exposure menu when the first and
last half of the extended menu code are left blank.
If JJ1017 V3 is set, the study which can be received from RIS will be
only the menu supporting JJ1017 V3.
The mapping database will be backed up/restored in V8.0 HF0004 or
later; so make sure to do it in V8.0 HF0004 or later when backing up/
restoring the menu database from User Utility.
If the menu database is replaced from CL-AP CD (2 of 2), manually
copy the mapping database (MWMMenuCodeMapping.mdb) from
CL-AP CD (2 of 2) and paste it to C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\
MWMStudyList.
When upgrading from V8.0 HF0004 to V8.1, back up/restore the
mapping DB manually because the mapping DB is not taken over.
It will be taken over when upgrading from V8.1 or later.
Function overview
If the setting for JJ1017 V3 is performed, the following functions can be
added.
16 characters can be set in each of first half and last part as an
extended menu code.
The normal exposure menu can be used with the exposure menu for
JJ1017 V3.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Select
the Setup Configuration Item window.
on
window.
2.
No

Name
Selection
Meaning
68 MWM
Exposure
Menu Code
Treatment
0:Normal
1:JJ1017
2:JJ1017(Ver3)
Exposure menu code system

for MWM use.
Make an appropriate
selection in accordance with
the RIS specifications.
89 MWM Menu
Name
Mapping
YES
Handles as an exposure
menu name.
NO
Does not handle as an
exposure menu name.
Specifying whether the Code

Meaning (0040,0100>
0040,0008>0008,0104)
acquired as the information
about a response from the
RIS should be handled as an
exposure menu name.
: Default setting
3.
4.
Click

saved.
5.

OE8-21
6.
Click [DICOM MWM C-FIND Tag Setting].
7.
The DICOM MWM C-FIND Tag & Mapping Setting window

opens.
ID Flag Description DICOM MWL Tag VR

>>Code Valu
12
8.
Click
>>(0080, 0100)
TagSetting1
SH 007F260 00080100
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE8-22

2.7 Setup for Exposure Menu/Study Menu

Mapping
The following examples describe the procedures for mapping the

exposure menu or study menu defined by the RIS.
Exposure menu
Ensure that the ordering information defined by the DICOM tag
((0040,0008)>(0008,0100)) of the RIS agrees with the extended
menu code of CL exposure menu.
Tag mapping
When transmitting order information to the CL for MWM purposes, it is
necessary to standardize the exposure and study menu tag information
for the RIS and CL.
More specifically, you must complete the following steps.
Verify the DICOM tag number that contains RIS ordering information.
Ensure that the RIS ordering information and CL exposure menu/
study menu agree in extended menu codes (this can be
accomplished by rewriting the menu codes as needed with the CLs
user utility).
Ensure that this code agrees with the RIS

ordering information (tag information). OE000056.EPS
If the menu defined by the RIS is not registered in the CL, create a
new exposure menu and then enter the RIS ordering information
related to the exposure menu into the CL extended menu code field.
REFERENCE
The CL performs exposure menu mapping in accordance with a tag
number (0040,0008)>(0008,0100) transmitted from the RIS. Study
menu mapping is performed when no exposure menu tag number is
transmitted from the RIS.
The study menu mapping tag numbers transmitted from the RIS vary
from one RIS manufacturer to another. Therefore, Service Utility must
be used to set such tag numbers for the CL.
Service Utilitys initial setting is (0040,0100)>(0040,0007).
For most of the RIS manufacturers in Japan, the initial setting
(0040,0100)>(0040,0007) can be used as is. For most of RIS
manufacturers other than in Japan, however, the initial setting needs to
be changed.
Enter the RIS ordering information

(tag information) in this field.
OE000058.EPS
REFERENCE
If the section 68 in 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION is set to 2: JJ1017

(Ver3), the first and last half part of the extended menu code can
be set.
For details on setup, see under Tag mapping configuration

setup.
OE080002.ai
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE8-23
2.7 Setup for Exposure Menu/Study Menu Mapping
Study menu
Since no study menu is registered in the CL, create a new study
menu and then enter the RIS ordering information related to the
study menu.
Tag mapping configuration setup

Set the following configuration data (IMAGE MODALITY) as needed:
Item
number
23
24
Tag Mapped on
Study Menu at
MWM Use
Perform Mapping
to Exposure Menu
at MWM Use
Description
DICOM-defined tag numbers to be mapped
onto a study menu.
The default setups are 0040, 0100>0040
and 0007.
Specifying whether or not to perform study
menu/exposure menu mapping.
If No is selected, only the patient
information will be used to initiate a study
process.
The default setup is to perform mapping.
Enter the RIS ordering information

(tag information) in this field. OE000057.EPS
25
REFERENCE
Configuration
name
Display Dialog
When Failed in
Mapping to Menu
at MWM Use
Specifying whether or not to open a

warning window when mapping is not
successfully performed for a CL study
menu or exposure menu.
The default is to open a warning window.
The actual tag information (indicating whether mapping is properly

completed) exchanged between the RIS and CL can be confirmed by
viewing the log files that are generated when the DICOM Log Mode is
enabled.
For details on the DICOM Log Mode, see FR4: Using the
DICOM Log Mode under FR: Function-specific Reference.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE8-24
3.2 Verifying MWM
After the CL-AP has been started up, verify MWM and PPS operations.
Check to see that the patient information registered to the RIS appears
in the MWM worklist.
Patient information registered to the RIS appears here.

3.2 Verifying MWM
3.3 Verifying PPS
1.
From the
Fuji Film and FCR.

Version A software
OE000015.EPS
3.3 Verifying PPS

Make sure that the patient information of the study completed has been
sent back to the RIS.
OE000016.EPS
Version B software
OE000099.EPS
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE8-25

To make a backup, have the following item on hand.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE8-26
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE8-27
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE8-28

This chapter describes the setup procedure for the Storage Commitment
Push function on images to be transferred using DICOM CR Storage
(Standard).
The DICOM Commitment Push function is to assure that images
transferred have been stored in the archiver.
Images stored in the CL will not be deleted before a message comes
from the archiver indicating that it has stored them accordingly.
NOTE
The CR-IR346/348CL will be abbreviated hereinafter simply CL.
This chapter describes the setup procedure using the connection/setup
examples shown below.
Archiver setup example
Scommit* /172.16.1.90*...................... HOST name/IP address
Scommit_SCP* /5020*................... AE name/Port number
CR Image Storage..................... Service Class
SCP....................................... Role
ImplicitVRLittleEndian*.......... Transfer Syntax
SC AE Name*....................... SCommit_SCP
Storage Commitment Push....... Service Class
SCP....................................... Role
Prior to setup
Archiver
CL requirements
The CL main unit must have been set up.

Install the option key below.
Key Name
Functions Supported
IR346 DICOM COMMITMENT key CR Storage SCU Standard

Storage Commitment Push
TCP/IP
DICOM Commitment Push

DICOM CR Storage (Standard)
RU
CL
CL setup example
CL-SCU*/Port number
(setup not required**)....................... AE name/Port number
CR Image Storage......................... Service Class
SCU.......................................... Role
ImplicitVRLittleEndian*.................. Transfer Syntax
SC AE Name*........................... Scommit_SCP
Storage Commitment Push........... Service Class
SCU.......................................... Role
* Setup examples that need be changed depending on the equipment or
** Port number needs not be set up for the Service Class when the Role is SCU.
00000523.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
OE9-1

Use a network cable to connect the CL
to the QA-WS.
1. Hardware Setup
After installing the DICOM CR

Storage option, DICOM Commitment
Push option and the AP key, make the
following setups.
2. Software Setup
DICOM CR Storage (OD_FILE

attribute)
Information of this equipment for
the Commitment Push function
Registration of archiver information
for the Commitment Push function
Registration of SC AE Name
Make sure that the Commitment Push

function is activated.
3. Verifying the
Function
4. Backing Up
the Setup File
00000541.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE9-2
1. Hardware Setup
1. Hardware Setup
Connect the CL to the archiver via networks, as illustrated below.
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX cable
TCP/IP
RU
CL
Archiver
00000524.EPS
NOTES
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
OE9-3
2.1 Installing the DICOM CR Storage Option Keys
2. Software Setup
Set up the CL software by performing the following steps:
2.1 Installing the DICOM CR Storage

Option Keys
NOTE
2.1 Installing the DICOM CR Storage Option Keys
Before installing the DICOM Commitment Push option key, install the
DICOM CR Storage option keys.
2.2 Installing the DICOM Commitment Push

Option Key
1.
After several seconds, the installation start window automatically

opens.
2.3 Reinstalling the AP Key
NOTE
2.4 Performing DICOM CR Storage Setup

2.5 Setting Information on This Equipment for the
Commitment Push Function
2.
Click
2.6 Registering the Archiver Information for the

Commitment Push Function
2.7 Registering the SC AE Name
00000085.EPS
3.
Click
4.
In the same manner as indicated in steps 2 and 3, click

and then click
.
5.
REFERENCE
The DICOM CR Storage option key CD stores two keys (Standard
and Private). That is why the installation start window opens twice.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE9-4
2.2 Installing the DICOM Commitment Push Option Key
2.2 Installing the DICOM Commitment

Push Option Key
1.

opens.
NOTE

After option key installation, be sure to reinstall the AP key.
Use the AP key CD (114Y5342002A, Version A00 or later) to reinstall
the AP key. The procedure is described below:
1.

2.
Click
3.
Click
NOTE
2.
Click
4.
00000419.EPS
3.
Click
4.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE9-5

NOTE
Before using Storage Commitment Push, complete DICOM CR Storage
setup for the archiver.
For details on DICOM CR Storage setup, see 2.1.4 Setup of
Information on This Equipment for the DICOM CR Storage
Function, and subsequent sections under CL + HI-C655/QA-WS/
FCR VIEW (DICOM CR Storage) in Connecting the CL to Other
Equipment (OE3).
2.5 Setting Information on This Equipment

for the Commitment Push Function
The following information items are to be set up by performing the
procedure described in this section. This setup is performed in relation
to the application entity on this equipment that is defined as directed in
2.4.
Service Class, Role, and Transfer Syntax
Other (timeout setting, etc.)
1.
On the Setup Configuration Item window, sequentially

choose
,
,
and
(DICOM CR Storage AE name).
00000543.EPS
The DICOM Setup window opens within the right-hand area of

the current window.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
OE9-6
2.5 Setting Information on This Equipment for the Commitment Push Function
2.
Click
(positioned slightly below the center of
the window).
7.
With the Config (F) menu, save the entered setup data.
REFERENCE
.
00000533.EPS
3.
for the
Service Class, Role, Transfer Syntax

and device attribute (Attribute)
Class (StorageCommitmentPush).
4.
5.
Since the AE for User is to be set, choose

Role.
Adjust the
as the
If the
00000545.EPS
key is clicked, currently selected items will be
deleted.
setting (timeout value for the
intervals between DICOM messages) as needed.
REFERENCE
You do not have to check
.
Even if it is checked, it will be disregarded even if SCU is chosen
as the Role in step 4 above.
6.
Click
You are then returned to the "Setup Configuration Item" window.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE9-7
2.6 Registering the Archiver Information for the Commitment Push Function
2.6 Registering the Archiver Information

for the Commitment Push Function
The following information items are to be set up by performing the
procedure described in this section. This setup is performed in relation
to the archivers application entity that is defined as directed in 2.4.
2.
Sequentially choose
,
,
and
(archivers host name),

(AE name for DICOM CR
Storage).
Service Class, Role, and Transfer Syntax

Other (2-byte character handling, setting for conversion from HQ
images to standard images, etc.)
1.
On the IIP Service Utility window, click [Setup

00000544.EPS
The DICOM Setup window appears within the right-hand area of

the current window.
00000131.EPS
00000404.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE9-8
2.6 Registering the Archiver Information for the Commitment Push Function
3.
Click
(positioned slightly below the center of
8.
the window).
Click
You are then returned to the Setup Configuration Item window.
9.
With the Config (F) menu, save the entered setup data.
00000533.EPS
4.
) for the
Class (StorageCommitmentPush).
5.
Since the AE of the connected equipment is Provider,

is chosen as the Role.
verify that
6.
When handling 2-byte characters, check

(
7.
).
Enter an appropriate value in the
field.
Association control varies with the entered value as

summarized below:
When value 0 is entered:
Uses an association other than that transmitted from the CL to wait
for the connected equipments response.
When a value other than 0 is entered:
Uses the association transmitted from the CL to wait for the
connected equipments response before the entered time elapses.
After the entered time has elapsed, however, another association is
used to wait for the connected equipments response.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE9-9
2.

Perform the following procedure to register DICOM CR Storage (OD
attribute) as the target of Commitment Push.
1.
From the list in the lower right corner of the window, select
CR Image Storage for the Service Class and then click
.

choose
,
,
(archivers host name),
and
(AE name of DICOM CR Storage).
00000548.EPS
3.
) for the

of Commitment Push for the archiver
(e.g.: Scommit_SCP).
00000544.EPS
The DICOM Setup window opens within the right-hand area of

the current window.
4.
Click
You are then returned to the Setup Configuration Item window.
5.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Use the Config (F) menu to save the entered setup data.
OE9-10
3. Verifying the Function
3.2 Transferring an Image to the Archiver
Perform the following steps to start the CL-AP to verify Commitment

Push function:
Perform the following steps to transfer an image stored in the CL to the

archiver and verify that the Commitment Push function properly works.
1.
Select the image to be transferred, and then transfer it to the

archiver.
3.2 Transferring an Image to the Archiver
2.
Check whether the CL displays a message to indicate the

image has been stored in the archiver device.
Also, perform a deletion procedure in relation to an image

that is not transferred to the archiver to verify that the image
remains undeleted.

1.
From the
and FCR.
menu, choose Programs, Fuji Film

For detailed descriptions of the image transfer and image

deletion procedures, see the CL Operation Manual.
Version A software
OE000017.EPS
Version B software
OE000099.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE9-11

For backup, furnish the following items:
For details of the backup procedure, see 5. Restoring/Backing Up
the Configuration File Configuration Restore/Backup under
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE9-12
CL+QA-WS
(Transfer of Energy Subtraction Images)
Described herein is the procedure used when transferring energy
subtraction (ES hereinafter) images to the QA-WS.
To transfer ES images, the two Application Entities, one for the transfer
of raw data (unstandardized images) and the other for the transfer of
standardized images, must be set up.
NOTE
ES images can be transferred only via DICOM, and not via FINP.
NOTE
The CR-IR348CL is abbreviated hereinafter simply CL.
Prior to setup
CL requirements
The CL main unit must have been set up being incorporated into
the 5000 plus (CR-IR348CL) system.
Install the following option keys.
Key Name
Functions Supported
IR346 DICOM CR STORAGE Key CR Storage SCU Standard

CR Storage SCU Standard
(includes Private
Unstandardized CR Storage.)
CL ES
ES image processing function
QA-WS requirements
Software version required : A04 or later
Install the DICOM Storage option key. (Standard/Private)
REFERENCE
The ES image consists of the following four types.
Low-pressure image (L image)
High-pressure image (H image)
Bone image (B image)
Soft tissue image (S image)
The low-pressure and high-pressure images are raw data
(unstandardized images).
The bone and soft tissue images are standardized images generated
from low-pressure and high-pressure images.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE10-1
The following connection/setup examples are used in this chapter to

describe the setup procedure.
QA-WS setup example
QAWS* /172.16.1.100*........................... HOST name/IP address
QAWS_10_SCP* /5030*................... AE name/Port number
Private CR Storage....................... Service Class (for B/S images)
SCP.......................................... Role
JPEG Lossless......................... Transfer Syntax
QAWS_11_SCP* /5040*.................... AE name/Port number
Private Unstandardized CR Storage... Service Class (for L/H images)
SCP.......................................... Role
QAWS_10_SCP....................... Substitute AE Name
QA-WS
TCP/IP
Transfer of ES images
CR-IR348RU
CL setup examples
CL
B/S images: Transferred with DICOM

Private CR Storage.
L/H images: Transferred with Private
Unstandardized CR Storage.

CL_10_SCU*/Port number
Private CR Storage....................... Service Class (for B/S images)
SCU.......................................... Role
CL_11_SCU*/Port number
Private Unstandardized CR Storage.... Service Class (for L/H images)
SCU.......................................... Role

to the QA-WS.
1. Hardware Setup
Make the following setups for

transferring ES images via DICOM.
AE setup of this equipment for the
transfer of B/S images
AE setup of this equipment for the
transfer of L/H images
QA-WS AE registration for the transfer
of B/S images
QA-WS AE registration for the transfer
of L/H images
2. Software Setup
Make the following setups as needed.

Type of the image to be transferred
(system configuration setting)
Automatic image distribution code
Name elements
Make sure that ES images can be

transferred from the CL to the QA-WS.
3. Verifying the
Function
4. Backing Up the
Setup File
00000531.EPS
* Setup examples that need be changed depending on the equipment or

** Port number needs not be set up for the Service Class when the Role is SCU.
00000527.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE10-2
1. Hardware Setup
1. Hardware Setup
Connect the CL to the QA-WS via networks, as illustrated below.
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX cable
TCP/IP
CR-IR348RU
CL
QA-WS
00000528.EPS
NOTES
Do not connect the telephone line to the CL and QA-WS network
connectors.
The cable type applicable to the CL and QA-WS is the IEC950/
UL1950-compliant UTP cable of category 5 or higher.
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
OE10-3
2. Software Setup
Set up software for the CL and QA-WS as follows.

Grayed-out items are those to be set up as necessary. Set up all other
items.
2.1.3 Setup of Information of This Equipment
2.1.4 Registration of QA-WS Information
2.1.5 Selecting the Type of the Image to be
Transferred
2.1.6 Setting the Automatic Image
Distribution Function
2.1.7 Changing Name Elements
2.2 QA-WS Software Setup

The option key of the following two types is installed according to the
procedure presented below.
IR346 DICOM CR STORAGE (Standard/Private)
CL ES (ES image processing function)
1.
Tasks done on
the CL
Insert the IR346 DICOM CR STORAGE option key into the

PC.
Within a few seconds, the installation start window opens.
NOTE
Tasks done on
the QA-WS.
2.
Click
A window opens to indicate the completion of the installation

processing.
3.
Click
4.
REFERENCE
keys, Standard and Private, are stored on the IR346 DICOM CR
STORAGE option key CD.
5.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Repeat steps 2. and 3. above to install the CL ES option key.
OE10-4
2.1.3 Setup of Information of This Equipment

If the option keys are installed, be sure to reinstall the AP key.
Use the AP key CD (114Y5342002A: Version A00 ) to reinstall the AP
key. The reinstallation procedure is shown below.
1.

NOTE
2.
For the transfer of B/S and L/H images, set up information of this
equipment using Service Utility NETWORK CONFIG and THIS HOST
(IIP).
Setup for the transfer of B/S images

The procedure explained herein involves setups of the following items.
AE name of this equipment for the transfer of B/S images (Application
Entity Name)
1.
Click
Start up the Service Utility mode and click [Setup

For how to start up the Service Utility mode, see
00000419.EPS
3.
Click
4.

00000131.EPS
00000404.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE10-5
2.
Click the
3.
Select
sign within
.
and click
5.
4.
Check to see that the CL host name and IP address are

displayed.
Select DICOM.
00000405.EPS
CL host name
CL IP address
00000441.EPS
NOTE
Unless the CL is network-connected, the IP address will not be
displayed correctly.
00000442.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE10-6
6.
For the transfer of B/S images, enter the AE name that is the
SCU for the CL (e.g.: CL_10_SCU) in the
field.
(SCU) for

the DICOMSetup window.
You need not to set

(Port number).
Even if SCU is selected for the Role, it will be disregarded.
Click

the Role.
REFERENCE
NOTE
7.
9.
10. Click the downward arrow
in the
Transfer Syntax (JPEG Lossless).
NOTE
For the transfer of ES images, only the JPEG Lossless Transfer
Syntax will be supported.
11. Set
(DICOM inter-message timeout
value) as necessary.
REFERENCE
00000533.EPS
8.
in the
needs not be checked.

Even if checked, it will be disregarded. (It is effective only when
SCP is specified for the Role.)
field and select the Service

Class (Private CR Storage).
REFERENCE
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE10-7
Setup for the transfer of L/H images
in the
field to select the device attribute
(OTHER).
13. Click
AE name of this equipment for the transfer of L/H images (Application

Entity Name)
1.
14. Click
The procedure explained herein involves setups of the following items.
Select
and click
on the Setup Configuration Item window

.
REFERENCE
.
00000535.EPS

OE000093.EPS
If the
key is clicked, currently selected items will be
deleted.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
00000442.EPS
OE10-8
2.
For the transfer of L/H images, enter the AE name that is the
SCU for the CL (e.g.: CL_11_SCU) in the
6.
in the
field.
NOTE
NOTE
You need not to set

(Port number).
Even if SCU is selected for the Role, it will be disregarded.
3.
Click

Syntax is supported.
7.
Set
(DICOM inter-message timeout
value) as necessary.
REFERENCE
needs not be checked. Even if set, it will be
disregarded. (It is effective only when SCP is specified for the
Role.)
8.
in the
field to select the device attribute
00000533.EPS
(OTHER).
4.
in the
field and select the Service
Class (Private Unstandardized CR Storage).
5.

the Role.
(SCU) for
9.
Click
10. Click
REFERENCE
the DICOMSetup window.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE10-9
2.1.4 Registration of QA-WS Information
3.
Follow the procedure described herein to register QA-WS information

that is used for the transfer of both B/S and L/H images.
Register QA-WS information using NETWORK CONFIG and ALL
OTHER NODES in the Service Utility mode.
Click
Setup for the transfer of B/S images

The procedure explained herein is used to set up the following items.
QA-WS Host name and IP address
QA-WS AE name (Application Entity Name) and Port number for the
transfer of B/S images
Service Class, Role, device attribute (HD_FILE)
Other (handling of two-byte characters, setting for conversion from
HQ image to standard image, etc.)
1.
Select
on the Setup Configuration
2.
00000444.EPS
4.

Enter the QA-WS AE name (e.g.: QAWS_10_SCP) in the
Enter the Host name (e.g.: QAWS) in the

field.
field.
Select DICOM.
field.
NOTES
Enter the QA-WS Port number (e.g.: 5030) in the
field.
Select DICOM.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
00000405.EPS
OE10-10
5.
Click
9.

Setting of
ST:
Select if the QA-WS cannot receive HQ images.
ST & HQ: Select if the QA-WS can receive HQ images.
SH:
Do not select because this is for mammographic
images.
Setting of
00000533.EPS
6.
of the
and select the Service
Class (Private CR Storage).
7.
Check to see that
ST:
ST & HQ: Select when transferring both standard and HQ
images.
10. Select
in the
field.
(SCP) has been selected for the
Role because the QA-WS AE is Provider.
8.
of the
NOTE
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE10-11
11. Set gradation correction as required.

NOTE
This setting item is displayed only when the LUT adjustment
function key (one of the functions included in the Plus Standard
Key) has been installed for competing PACS.


(
to
box
).
REFERENCE
OE030001.EPS
NOTE
Gradation corrections can be set up only when CR Image Storage
or Private CR Storage has been selected for the Service Class,
and cannot be set up if Private Unstandardized CR Storage has
been selected for it.
under FR5 : Function-specific Reference.
Even if checked, it will be disregarded.
of the
field and select the QA-WS device
attribute (HD_FILE).
15. Click
16. Click
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
OE10-12
2.
Setup for the transfer of L/H images
Enter the QA-WS AE name (e.g.: QAWS_11_SCP) in the
The procedure explained herein is used to set up the following items.

QA-WS Host name and IP address [already set as per the procedure
described above]
QA-WS AE name (Application Entity Name) and Port number for the
transfer of L/H images
Service Class, Role, device attribute (HD_FILE)
Other (handling of two-byte characters, setting for conversion from
HQ image to standard image, etc.)
1.
Sequentially select
NOTES
Enter the QA-WS Port number (e.g.: 5040) in the
field.
(QA-WS Host name) and
on the Setup Configuration Item window and

then click
field.
,
,
3.
Click
00000533.EPS
4.
of the
and select the Service
Class (Private Unstandardized CR Storage).

00000444.EPS
5.
Check to see that
(SCP) has been selected for the
Role because the QA-WS AE is Provider.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE10-13
6.
of the
to
).
REFERENCE
NOTE

7.
of the
(e.g.: QAWS_10_SCP) used for the transfer of B/S images.
8.
box
of the
field and select the QA-WS device
attribute (HD_FILE).
12. Click

Setting of
ST:
Select if the QA-WS cannot receive HQ images.
ST & HQ: Select if the QA-WS can receive HQ images.
SH:
Do not select because this is for mammographic
images.
13. Click
Setting of
ST:
ST & HQ: Select when transferring both standard and HQ
images.
9.
Change the following setting as required.

010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
OE10-14
2.1.5 Selecting the Type of the Image to be Transferred
1.
Click [Setup Configuration Item] on the IIP Service Utility

window.
2.1.6 Setting the Automatic Image Distribution Function

To automatically transfer images coming from the CR-IR348RU, set the
automatic image distribution function.
NOTE
To enable the automatic image distribution function, set Enable
Distribution Code Setup (SYSTEM CONFIG and then item No. 3 of
5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION) in Service Utility to Yes.
1.
Click
Item window.
on the Setup Configuration
A list of devices to which images are distributed will appear on the

right-hand side on the window.
OE000021.EPS
2.
Select
and then
on the Setup Configuration Item window.
3.
Double-click
00000410.EPS
of
to select the combination of
types of images to be transferred to the QA-WS.
REFERENCE
2.
4.
3.
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)

Enter an 8-digit distribution code (e.g.: 12345678) in the
field.
L/H/B/S images
L/B/S images
L/S images
L/B images
L/H images
When a setup item is changed, save it using the [Config (F)]

menu.
The following combinations are available.

0.L,H,B,S:
1.L,B,S:
2.L,S:
3.L,B:
4.L,H:
Click
in the
equipment AE name (e.g.: QAWS_10_SCP).
4.
Click
to save the setup data.
OE10-15
2.1.7 Changing Name Elements

3.11 Setting the Name Elements for DICOM Connection under

Set up DICOM CR Storage so that the QA-WS can receive images
coming from the CL.
See the Maintenance section of the QA-WS Service Manual.
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
OE10-16
3.1 CL-AP Startup
3. Verifying the Function
3.2 Image Transfer to the QA-WS
Start up the CL-AP and then make sure that images can be transferred
from the CL to the QA-WS.
Transfer ES images that have been read on the 5501ES to the QA-WS.
1.
Register exposure menus for ES images and perform image

reading on the FCR5501ES.
2.
Select images transferred from the FCR5501ES and send

thus selected images to the QA-WS.
3.1 CL-AP Startup

3.2 Image Transfer to the QA-WS
For details of the procedure used for transferring images to

the QA-WS, see FCR XG-1 CR-IR346CL of the CL Operation
Manual.
3.1 CL-AP Startup

1.
From the
Fuji Film and FCR.
3.
Make sure on the QA-WS side that images have been

transferred correctly.

Version A software
OE000017.EPS
Version B software
OE000099.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE10-17

Have the following ready to use for backup.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE10-18
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE10-19
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE10-20
CL+F-RIS (Ordering) [Applicabl only in Japan]
CL+F-RIS (Ordering)
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
OE11-1
BLANK PAGE
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE11-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE11-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE11-4

Described below is the procedure used for CL+X-Ray Controller
(X-CON hereinafter) connection.
Prior to setup
CL requirements

The X-CON control function option key (CL X ONLINE) is required.
X-CON for other than mammography use
The connected host main unit must have been set up accordingly.
n Overall operation flow

Add a serial connecter and connect
the CL to the X-CON with a dedicated
serial cable.
1. Hardware Setup
Install the X-CON control function

option key, reinstall the AP key and set
up configuration for the X-CON control
function.
2. Software Setup
Check if the CL is serially connected to

the X-CON correctly and can exchange
data with the X-CON.
3. Verifying the
Connection/Data
Exchange
4. Backing Up the
Setup FIle
X-CON supported by the CL are as follows:

Maker
Product Name
Toshiba
Shimadzu
Hitachi
Philips
Siemens
X-CON for mammography use
X-CON supported by the CL are as follows:

Maker
Product Name
Toshiba
Planmed
MGU-100D
Sophie / Sophie mobile / Sophie MaxView ready
/ Sophie with MaxView / Sophie Classic /
Sophie Classic mobile / Sophie Classic
MaxView ready / Sophie Classic with MaxView
MAMMOMAT 3000 Nova V4.4 (no dose
calculation function provided) / MAMMOMAT
3000 Nova V4.5 (dose calculation function
provided; recommended version)
Siemens
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE12-1
1. Hardware Setup

Add a serial connector as required.
NOTE
When using a Siemens mammography X-CON, perform hardware
setups as directed in 1.3 Hardware Setup [for Siemens mammography
X-CON].
For the procedure on how to add a serial connector, see

1. Adding a Serial Connector in FR20 Adding and Setting the
Serial Connector under FR: Function-specific Reference.
For details of the hardware setups, see 1.3 Hardware Setup [for
Siemens mammography X-CON].
... Add a serial connector to the

CL-PC.
Connect the CL to the X-CON

with a dedicated serial cable.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE12-2

Use a dedicated serial cable to connect the CL to the X-CON.
When the MOXA board is mounted, use a dedicated serial cable, a
relay adapter and a conversion cable to connect the CL to the RIS.
1.3 Hardware Setup [for Siemens

mammography X-CON]
Use a dedicated serial cable to connect the CL to the X-CON.
COM port
Serial Connecter
CL
X-CON
Dedicated serial cable/dedicated serial cable +

relay adapter + conversion cable
CL
X-CON
Dedicated serial cable
OE000048.EPS
OE000043.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE12-3
2.1 Installing the X-CON Control Function Option Key
2. Software Setup
2.1 Installing the X-CON Control Function
Option Key
2.1 Installing the X-CON Control Function

Option Key
To use the X-CON, the CL X ONLINE option key is needed.
1.

After a while, the installation start window opens.
NOTE
2.3 Installing the Driver

2.4 Setting the Port and Service Utility
2.
2.5 Setting Configuration for the X-CON
Click

[for Siemens mammography X-CON]
00000085.EPS
3.
Click
The syetem then returns to the desktop screen.
4.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE12-4

If an option key is installed, be sure to reinstall the AP key.
Described below is the procedure to be followed to reinstall the AP key
using the AP key CD (114Y5342002A: Version A00 or later).
1.

After a while, the installation start window opens.
2.3 Installing the Driver

When using the PSI04A board and the MOXA board, install the relevant
driver.
For details of the driver installation procedure, see 2. Installing
the Driver in FR20 Adding and Setting the Serial Connector
NOTE
2.
Click
2.4 Setting the Port and the Service Utility

When the PSI04A board is not to be used with software version V7.1 (B)
or later, the port and Service Utility setup must be performed accordingly
after adding a serial connector.
For details of the port and Service Utility setup procedure, see
3. Port and Service Utility Settings in FR20 Adding and Setting
the Serial Connector under FR: Function-specific Reference.
00000419.EPS
3.
Click
The system then returns to the desktop screen.
4.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE12-5

Set up the following X-CON-related configuration items.
1.
3.
Click
The IDT/Console function setup items will be displayed on the

right-hand side of the window.

For how to start the Service Utility mode, see
2.
OE000038.EPS
00000131.EPS
The [Setup Configuration Item] window opens.
00000404.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE12-6
4.
Set up the following X-CON-related configuration items.

Item
Configuration Item
Remarks
X-CON for other than

mammography use
X-CON for
mammography use
42
Timeout value
Setup not required to change.
43
Image display caption
Default: XCON
44
PSI board serial port number
Number of CH to be inserted into

the PSI board connector
45
Operating condition
reception setting
Default: Receives.
*1
46
Exposure condition
transmission setting
Default: Not to transmit.
*2
47
Minimum tube voltage
Default: 28kV
48
Maximum tube voltage
Default: 110kV
49
Minimum tube current
Default: 9mA
50
Maximum tube current
Default: 400mA
51
Minimum irradiation time
Default: 10msec
52
Maximum irradiation time
Default: 5400msec
107 Whether mAs value is recalculated or not at PPS
108 X-CON model
109 Whether interlock command is sent or not
112 Timeout value
113 Timeout value
111 X-CON serial transfer rate
Default : 4800bits
117 Handling of dose value of Value 1
Only X-CON for mammography use.
118 Handling of dose value of Value 2
Only X-CON for mammography use.
120
Setting for output when there are no actual

X-CON result values
136 X-CON control serial port number
Default: 0
142 X-CON serial transfer parity setting
Default: 2
: Essential
: Changed as required.
*1 : Be sure to set Yes (reception possible) for an X-CON for mammography use.
*2 : Be sure to set No (transmission not possible) for an X-CON for mammography use.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE12-7
5.
NOTE
When the mammography X-CON used is made by Toshiba, Planmed or
Siemens, the following configuration items must be set up as shown in the
table below.
No.
Config item
Toshiba
Planmed
Xcon Serial_TX To be set in the

Control Port
range of 1 to 3.
To be set in the
range of 1 to 3.
108
Xcon Format
Type
Select
4: Mammo1.
Select
5: Mammo2.
Select
6: Mammo3.
Yes
Yes
No (Default)
3:9600.
3:9600.
Xcon Interlock
109 Command
Transfer
111
Xcon Serial_TX
2:4800 (Default)
Baudrate
No.
Siemens (*1)
44
Xcon No112 Response

Timeout
100
20 (Default)
20 (Default)
Xcon Data
113 Reception
Timeout
100
20 (Default)
20 (Default)
117
Xcon
DoseValue1
1:Entrance Dose
(Default)
1:Entrance Dose
(Default)
1:Entrance Dose
(Default)
118
Xcon
DoseValue2
2:Dose Product
(Default)
2:Dose Product
(Default)
2:Dose Product
(Default)
136
Xcon Serial_TX
0 (Default)
Control Prot2
0 (Default)
1 (Serial Port No.)
142
Xcon Serial_Tx
2:even (Default)
Parity
2:even (Default)
0:none
*1: For connection of the CL to the Siemens equipment, be sure to use a

special cable provided with an isolator.
Click PRINETR and set up the following Printer-related

configuration items.
Config item
Meaning
33 Print Film Char

2/Examination
Number
Specifying whether to output film

annotation characters 2 (exposure unit
information) or Accession number.
0 : Film char 2 [default]
Outputs film annotation characters 2
(exposure unit information).
1 : Accession Number [default of the CR
Console Lite/Plus]
Outputs the Accession number.
74 Film String Format
Specifying whether to use ordinary film

annotation characters for all images (as
has been so previously) or film annotation
characters that indicate mammographyspecific information for mammography
images.
0 : GeneralFormatOnly [default]
Uses ordinary film annotation
characters.
1 : MammographyFormat
Uses mammography film annotation
characters.
87 Film Character Mode Specifying film annotation characters on

Setting On XCON
mammography X-CON material
Material Info.
information.
0 : DICOM
Conforms to DICOM definitions (as has
been so previously).
1 : X-CON-IF [default]
Conforms to X-CON IF definitions.
6.

A window opens, prompting you to confirm the
setup data to be saved.
7.
Click
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE12-8
2.6 Setting the OS COM Ports [for Siemens mammography X-CON]
5.

[for Siemens mammography X-CON]
Perform the following settings on the Communications Port

(COM2) Properties window.
I
When using a Siemens mammography X-CON, the COM ports must be

set up accordingly.
1.

Property.
menu to select
II
III
2.
IV
V
VI
3.
Click the
mark to the left of Ports (COM & LPT) on the
Device Manager window.
OE000050.EPS
I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
VI.
OE000049.EPS
4.
Right-click the COM port that is connected to the serial

cable and select Property.
The Communications Port (COM2) Properties window then
opens.
NOTE
Be sure to right-click a port of the same number as to the COM port
specified with the CL Config settings (CONFIG - SYSTEM
CONFIG - CSL/IDT FUNCTION - No 136 Xcon Serial_TX
Control Port2 of IIP Service Utility - Setup Configuration Item).
6.
Select the Port Settings tab.

Select 9600.
Select 8.
Select None.
Select 1.
Select None.
Click
7.
Click
8.
Click
The system then returns to the desktop.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE12-9
3.1 Verifying the Serial Connection
3. Verifying the Connection/Data

Exchange

1.
From the
Fuji Film and FCR.
After starting up the CL-AP, check if the CL is serially connected to the

X-CON correctly and can exchange data with the X-CON.

Version A software
3.2 Checking the Data Exchange
OE000017.EPS
Version B software
OE000099.EPS
2.
Confirm the following displays.

Version A software
When the CL is serially connected to the XCON normally, XCON
displayed on the window will be highlighted in white on the purple
background.
If serial connection between the CL and the XCON is not
recognized for any reason, XCON will not be highlighted
remaining thus in white on the gray background.
Version B software
Make sure that no error message box opens at the right top of the
window (or X-CON Offline is displayed in the box).
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE12-10

Check to see that data can be exchanged with the X-CON as per
configuration settings (CSL/IDT FUNCTION).
If 45. Xcon Performed Info. Reception in Configuration CSL/IDT
FUNCTION is enabled:
When X-CONs actual values, including tube voltage, tube current
and irradiation time, are received, a mark confirming the reception is
displayed at the right top of the exposure menu on the window.
Reception confirmation mark
OE000052.EPS
After the completion of exposures, X-CONs actual values, including

tube voltage, tube current and irradiation time, will be transferred to
RIS or the like via the CL (the values can be verified also on film).
If 46. Xcon Exposure Info. Transfer in Configuration CSL/IDT
FUNCTION is enabled:
Setup items of the exposure menu, such as tube voltage, tube
current and irradiation time, will be reflected on the X-CON during
exposures.
NOTES
For software version V7.1 or earlier
To check if data is exchanged properly during exposures using
a cassette, shot X-rays with targeted exposure menus selected
accordingly (after each X-ray shot, a mark appears to show that the actual
exposure result data was received), and then register the IP barcode.
For software version V8.0
When your Image Reader is a cassette type machine, make sure
to register the IP after completing the exposure processing.
After receiving the actual exposure result data, a mark lights
up at the moment when the IP is registered. Proceeding to the
next exposure process without registering the IP will cause it
to be considered as a split exposure, and disabling the correct
exposure parameters to be displayed.
To have a study be suspended, ensure that IP registration has
been performed with respect to all the exposure menus already
subjected to exposure, otherwise information on X-ray exposure
parameters will be cancelled.
For software version V8.1 or later
The status of the reception confirmation mark when the actual
exposure result information is received from XCON is shown below.
User operation
Before exposure
Status of reception
confirmation mark
Remarks
None
Not connected to any menus.

After the exposure, Blinking
the actual exposure (on the current menu)
result information is
received from XCON
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Select an exposure
menu arbitrarily
Not connected to any menus so

Blinking
(on the selected menu) the reception confirmation mark is
lighted up on the selected menu.
Confirm the IP
for the arbitrary
exposure menu
Lighting
(on the menu that
IP is registered)
The information of actual exposure

result data is connected to the
menu for which IP is registered.
OE12-11

Have the following ready to use for backup.
For detailed backup procedures, see "5. Restoring/Backing Up the
Configuration File - Configuration Restore/Backup" under
"MU: Maintenance Utility".
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE12-12
5. X-CON Specifications [Reference]
5. X-CON Specifications [Reference]

UD150B/B-10
HLZ110 (Tomography)
RS232C
UD150B: RS232C HLZ110: RS422
Communication I/F
4800BPS
4800BPS
spec.
Start:
1bit
Data:
8bits
Start:
1bit
Data: 8bits
Common for
Parity:
1bit
(even)
Stop:
1bit
Parity:
1bit
(even)
Stop: 1bit
semi-duplex and
D-sub25p
male
straight
UD150B:
D-sub25p
male
cross
start/stop system.
(provided by the maker)
(provided by Fuji)
According to
HLZ110: D-sub25p male cross
JIS X-5002.
(provided by the maker)
CL X-ray exposure conditions CL X-ray exposure conditions
setup kVmAms
setup kVmAms
X-ray exposure conditions
X-ray
exposure
conditions
Function
actual CL exposure results
actual CL exposure results
kVmAms
kVmAms
DHF-155H (S)
X-ray tube/
technique code
X-ray tube: Fixed at 0. (Select

according to the technique.)
Techniques 1 to 8
1: General exposure 2: Bucky - 1
3: Bucky - 2
4: AUX1
5: Tomography
6: Spot
7: Continuous
8: AUX2
exposure
X-ray tube: Fixed at 0. (Select

according to the technique.)
Techniques 1 to 5 (8 at max.)
1: Spot
2: Bucky - 1
3: Bucky - 2
4: General
5: Tomography exposure
Exposure/
perspective flag
Film-related code
SUPER 50 CP
Polydros50S
RS232C
RS232C
4800BPS
4800BPS
Start: 1bit Data: 8bits
Parity: 1bit (even) Stop: 1bit Parity: 1bit (even) Stop: 1bit
D-sub25p male cross (the
D-sub25p male cross
same cable as the makers
(provided by Fuji)
will be provided by Fuji)
CL X-ray exposure
conditions setup
APR code
actual CL exposure
results kVmAms
X-ray tube: Fixed at 0.
(Select according to the
technique.)
CL X-ray exposure
conditions setup
Mode selection code
actual CL exposure
results kVmAms
Fixed at 0.
Manually selected by the
controller.
Techniques 1 to 9 Reserved
KXO-80F
KXO-50F
RS232C
4800BPS
Parity: 1bit (even) Stop: 1bit
D-sub25p male cross
(provided by Fuji)
CL X-ray exposure conditions
setup kVmAms
X-ray exposure conditions actual
CL exposure results kVmAms
KXO 50F is only for X-ray
exposure conditions setup CL
CL X-ray is not effective.
Only X-ray CL is effective.
00: BUCKY1
01: BUCKY2
02: GEN1/BKY3
03: GEN2
04: TOMO WO.APR
05: TOMO WITH APR
06: MAMMO
07: SPOT
08: SPOT-ATR
09: ANGIO
10: ANGIO WITH KVR
Without perspective flag: Fixed at 0.
11: DHF-155H
Maker/model code 10: CR-250

(Perspective/tomography)
Tube voltage (kV)
20150
Irradiation time
18000
(ms)
Invalid 00000000
01: UD150B
00: HLZ110
30
40
20150
18000
20
20150
Invalid 0
X-ray actual CL result is
effective.
Invalid 0
X-ray actual CL result is
effective.
39999
101000
20, 50, 100, 160, 200, 250: Small focus
320, 400, 500, 640, 800: Large focus
Tube current (mA)
10630,1250
101000
ID code
1 to 64, techniques
(512 programs in total)
mAs mode: 5 to 8000
If mAs mode is not used (normal): 0
Focus size specified0: Small
focus 1000: Large focus
2: Standard
14
3: 0 standard
1 to 16 or 1 to 32
17
Focus size specified0: Small

focus 1000: Large focus
0: Standard
14
4: 0 standard
0: Standard
14
4: 0 standard
Reserved 1
Reserved 2
Film sensitivity
Detection field
Film density
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE12-13
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE12-14
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE12-15
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE12-16
CL+RIS (Ordering - Serial Connection) [Applicable only in Japan]
CL+RIS (Ordering - Serial Connection)

010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
OE13-1
BLANK PAGE
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
OE13-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE13-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE13-4
CL+Receipt Computer/Electronic Patient Record System [Applicable only in Japan]
CL+Receipt Computer/Electronic
Patient Record System
010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
OE14-1
BLANK PAGE
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE14-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE14-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE14-4
CL2 setup example
Host name : fcr-csl2*
IP address : 172.16.1.30*
The procedure for cluster-connecting two or more units of the

CR-IR348CL is described below.
NOTE
The CR-IR348CL is abbreviated hereafter CL.
CL2
Before setup
CL requirements
The CLs to be cluster-connected must be found on the network and
capable of transferring images.
RU2
FRUP
TCP/IP
FRUP
RU1
CL1
CL1 setup example

Host name : fcr-csl1*
IP address : 172.16.1.20*
Items marked with * constitute setup examples, which need to be
changed depending on the employed equipment and network
environment.
00000200.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
OE15-1
1. Hardware Setup
1. Hardware Setup

Connect the CLs with network cables.
1. Hardware
Setup
To permit study information sharing, perform the

following procedures for all CLs to be clusterconnected.
2. Software
Setup
Ensure that the CLs are network-connected as indicated below.

10Base-T/
100Base-TX cable
TCP/IP
Verifying the host name

Initializing the output queue and image database
Equalizing the configuration settings
Equalizing the menu/environment/table settings
Performing setup for drive sharing
Performing NetBEUI setup
Performing study information sharing setup
Defining the share range
Backing up/restoring the share settings
RU1
CL1
CL2
RU2
00000202.EPS
NOTES
Do not connect the telephone line to the CL network connector.
Perform the following procedures as needed for

individual CLs.
Performing integrated output processing setup
Performing centralized patient information
management setup
Performing study list setup
Verifying that the CLs can share study information
3. Connection
Verification
Backing up the configuration data
4. Setup File
Backup
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
OE15-2
2.1 Software Setup for All CLs
2. Software Setup

To permit study information sharing, use Windows, Service Utility, and
User Utility to complete various setup procedures at the CLs to be
cluster-connected.
Perform the following CL software setup procedure.

2.1.1 Verifying the Host Name
Database
2.1.3 Equalizing the Configuration Settings
2.1.4 Equalizing the Menu/Environment/Table
Settings
2.1.5 Performing Setup for Drive Sharing
2.1.6 Performing NetBEUI Setup
2.1.7 Performing Study Information Sharing
Setup
2.1.8 Defining the Share Range
2.1.9 Backing Up/Restoring the Share Settings
2.2 Software Setup for Individual CLs
2.2.1 Performing Integrated Output
Processing Setup
2.2.2 Performing Centralized Patient
Information Management Setup
2.2.3 Performing Study List Setup
2.1.1 Verifying the Host Name
Tasks done on
all CLs
To permit the CLs to share study information, ensure that their host
names do not exceed ten characters in length. (By the default, the CL
host name consists of no more than ten characters.)
Verify the CL host name as directed below.
For Windows 2000/XP
1.
From the
menu, choose Settings, Control Panel
and then System.

2.
Tasks done on
individual CLs
Choose the Network Identification tab to verify that the

Full computer name consists of no more than ten
characters (excluding the period at the end).
00000270.EPS
If the host name exceeds ten characters in length, change it so that

it consists of not more than ten characters.
For details on how to change the CL host name, see
Appendix B - Changing the CL Host Name in
3.
Click
The System Properties window closes.

010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE15-3
For Windows Vista
1.
menu.

Database
To establish a cluster connection, it is necessary to restore the output
queue and image database of each CLs to their default states.
Initialize the output queue and image database as directed below.
2.
Double-click
1.
Start Service Utility. In the IIP Service Utility window, click

[DataBase Utility].
3.
Click
4.
Select the Computer Name tab and check to see that the
Full Computer Name is described at a maximum of 10
characters (a period at the tail end is not included).
00000615.EPS
2.
Click Clear Output Queue.
OE000100.ai
When the host name is described with 10 or more characters,

change it accordingly so that it is within the 10 characters.
For how to change the CL host name, see Appendix B
Changing the CL Host Name under RI: Reinstalling the
Software.
5.
Click
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
00000616.EPS
OE15-4
The Command Prompt window opens to display the following

message.
00000271.EPS
3.
2.1.3 Equalizing the Configuration Settings

For study information sharing, it is necessary that all the CLs agree with
each other in some Service Utility configuration settings.
Perform the following steps to check the relevant configuration settings
and equalize them as needed.
1.
For the configuration settings that need to be equalized, see

the sections indicated below.
The output queue will then be initialized.
4.
With Service Utility, check the configuration settings.
Click [ImageDB Initialization].
3.4 Confi guration Details - 1. IMAGE MODALITY,

3.5 Configuration Details - 3. QA FUNCTION and
3.6 Configuration Details - 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION
in the MU: Maintenance Utility
1. Setup Necessary When Connecting the LP and
2. Setup Necessary When Editing the Film Annotation Character
Format of FR1 Print Output Function in FR: Function-specific
Reference
Locate the setup item list in the above reference sections, note the
column for cluster connection, and ensure that the CL agrees with
the other CLs in items marked Agreement required.
Items specified to be set up uniquely must be done so unfailingly.
00000617.EPS
The Command Prompt window opens to display the following

message.
2.
When all the relevant settings are equalized to achieve

agreement, click Exit Service Utility in the IIP Service
Utility window.
IIP Service Utility exits.
00000271.EPS
5.

The image database will then be initialized.
6.
Click
You are then returned to the IIP Service Utility window.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE15-5
2.1.4 Equalizing the Menu/Environment/

Table Settings
2.
For study information sharing, it is necessary that all the CLs agree with
each other in some menu, environment, and table settings that can be
accessed from User Utility.
From the
(or
) menu, choose
User Utility
The Main Menu window opens.
Perform the following steps to check the relevant User Utility settings
and equalize them as needed.
Starting User Utility
1.
From the
00000090.EPS
menu, choose Programs, Fuji Film
and then FCR.

After about two minutes, the CL-AP registration window opens.
Version A software
OE000017.EPS
Version B software
OE000099.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE15-6
Equalizing the menu settings
1.
Click
The Menu Setup window opens.
2.
Confirm the following settings and edit them as needed to

achieve agreement with the other CLs.
Image processing parameters
Exposure menu parameters
The X-ray control parameter setting, which is one of the exposure
menu parameters, can be edited independently for all CLs.
(The reason is that the X-ray control parameter setting needs to vary
with the employed Image Reader model.)
When the CLs do not agree in X-ray control parameter setting, the
setting for the CL with which exposure menus are registered takes
effect. Even if an exposure is suspended at a CL at which registration
is completed and later made at another CL, the setting prevailing at
the time of registration takes effect.
The extended menu code and MPM code must basically be in
agreement.
If the CLs do not agree in extended menu code or MPM code, their
operations differ depending on the procedure performed and menu
code difference.
To give an example, the table on the next page shows the relationship
between the operations at CL-B and the exposure menu registrations
at CL-A.
3.
Click
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE15-7
Relationship between operations at CL-B and exposure menu registrations at CL-A

Operation
No.
Function
When CL-B has MPM code

but not extended menu code
When CL-B has neithe MPM code

nor extended menu code
Starting a study after its move to CL-B
The study cannot be started unless there is an extended code for the
Unexposed menu, and the following messages appear.
Failed in acquiring image information
Failed in reading an exposure menu
The process can be resumed by registering a menu or changing the
exposure menu.
As regards the Image entered menu, a study can be started even when
the extended code is unavailable.
Same as left.
Moving an image within a study after its

move to CL-B
If the extended menu code for the image source and destination are not
registered in the menu datafase of a specific CL, it is reported to the user
and no image changeover takes place.
Same as left.
Changing the exposure menu after a study

is moved to CL-B
When a study can be started, a menu change can be applied (Unexposed Same as left.
menu).
Exposure menu for QA within a study after

its move to CL-B
The menu change dialog box opens with no menu selected (although the
currently set menu should be selected).
The sequence to be followed after dialog box opening remains unchanged.
Same as left.
Changing the exposure menu parameters

for QA within a study after its move to CL-B
Changes are possible.
Same as left.
Changing the image processing conditions

for QA within a study after its move to CL-B
Same as left.
Shuttering processing and marking for QA

within a study after its move to CL-B
Processing is possible.
Same as left.
Changing the exposure menu for intensive

QA from CL-B
The menu change dialog box opens with no menu selected (although the
currently set menu should be selected).
The sequence to be followed after dialog box opening remains unchanged.
Same as left.
Changing the exposure menu parameters

for intensive QA from CL-B
Same as left.
10 Changing the image processing condition

parameters for intensive QA from CL-B
Same as left.
11
If the extended menu code for the image source and destination are not
available, it is reported to the user and no image changeover takes place.
Same as left.
Output is possible.
If the MPM code is not available,

different image processing result is
obtained because the output is
generated according to the default value.
Image changeover for intensive QA from

CL-B
12 Integrated output processing from CL-B
For details on User Utility, see the Operation Manual.

010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE15-8
Equalizing the environment settings (distribution settings)
1.
Click
The Property setting window opens.
2.
Choose the
tab.
The Distribution Setting window opens.
3.

Item
no.
Item
Necessity for agreement
Symptom caused by disagreement
Auto distribution setting
The setting can be defined variously

for all CLs.
The setting for the CL that has entered images takes

effect (see *1).
PRINT Attribute
The setting can be defined variously

for all CLs.
The Print properties set for the CL that has entered

images will be employed (see *2).
FILE Attribute
Agreement is required.
If there is a disagreement, different distribution servers

may be used even when the same study is handled.
Energy-Subtraction
Exposure Output Image
The number of images varies with the processing CL.
Output stitched image
The number of images varies with the processing CL.
Setting for reduction ratio

for an output on 8"10" film
The film varies with the output CL.
*1 When a study is moved in the middle of an exposure process from CL 1 which is set for image distribution after QA (Print Attribute
setting. printer A) to CL 2 which is set for image distribution during reading (Print Attribute setting. printer B), the resulting operation is
as indicated below.
Menu status at startup
Image input is completed.
Image distribution timing

After completion of exposure
and QA at CL 2.
Symptom caused by disagreement

The output is delivered to the destination CLs Print
Attribute setting (printer A).
The image is not entered yet and At the time of image input.
is to be entered after the move.

Attribute setting (printer B).
The menu is registered after the

move.

Attribute setting (printer B).
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
At the time of image input.
OE15-9
4.
Click
Equalizing the table settings
1.
Click
The Table Setting window opens.
2.

Item
no.
Item
Necessity for
agreement
Symptom caused by
disagreement
Technologist
Agreement is
Information Setting required.
The information about a

technologist may be improperly
displayed or output.
Agreement is
Requesting
required.
Department
Information Setting
The information about a

requesting department may be
improperly displayed or output.
Film Mark Setting
3.
Click
The setting can

be defined
variously for all
CLs.
Exiting User Utility and AP
1.
Click
User Utility exits.
2.
On the
(or
) menu, click Exit
System.
The Exit window opens.
3.
The AP exits and the desktop screen appears.

010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE15-10
2.1.5 Performing Setup for Drive Sharing
7.
Click
The Select Users, Computers, or Groups window opens.
For study information sharing, perform the following drive C sharing

setup procedure at each CL.
For Windows 2000
1.
2.
Open Windows Explorer.

00000609.EPS
Right-click drive C and then choose Sharing.
8.
Choose Administrators, click
, and then click
REFERENCE
Although Administrators and Administrator are both selectable,
be sure to choose Administrators.
00000606.EPS
3.
Choose the Sharing tab and then click
The New Share window opens.
4.
5.
00000610.EPS
In the Share Name field, enter C.

Click
The Permissions for C window opens.
00000611.EPS
00000608.EPS
6.
Choose Everyone and then click

Everyone is then deleted.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
9.
Choose Administrators and then check Full Control for

Permissions (
).
10. Repeatedly click
until the Local Disk (C:)
Properties window appears.
OE15-11
15. Choose Administrators and then check Full Control for
11. Choose the Security tab.

12. Choose Everyone and then click
Everyone is then removed.
13. Click
Permissions (
16. Click
to close the Local Disk (C:) Properties
window.
The entered setup data is then saved.
The Select Users Computers, or Groups window opens.
14. Choose Administrators, click
, and then click
REFERENCE
When the sharing setup procedure for drive C is completed, the
icon for drive C looks like the figure below.
REFERENCE
00000610.EPS
00000611.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE15-12
4.
For Windows XP
1.
2.
Select Folder Options... from Tools.
Right-click drive C and then choose Sharing and

Security....
The Folder Option window opens.
00000XXX.EPS
5.
Click
The New Share window opens.

00000XXX.EPS
3.
6.
In the Share Name field, enter C.
Select the View tab, and remove the checkmark from Use
simple file sharing (Recommended) (
).
.
Click
00000XXX.EPS
7.
Click
00000XXX.EPS
00000XXX.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE15-13
8.
Choose Everyone and then click
12. Select Administrators and click
until the Permissions for C window appears.
Everyone is then deleted.
9.
Click
repeatedly
The Select Users or Groups window opens.
00000XXX .EPS
REFERENCE
00000XXX.EPS
10. Click

The Common Queries window opens.
11. Click
00000XXX.EPS
00000XXX.EPS
00000XXX .EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE15-14

Allow (
).
14. Click
repeatedly until the Local Disk(C:)
Proterties window appears.
For Windows Vista
1.
2.
Open Folder Options... from the Tools menu.

The Folder Options window opens.
15. Choose the Security tab.

16. Choose Everyone and then click
REFERENCE
When Administrators is not displayed, repeat steps 9. to 12.
OE150001.ai

Allow (
18. Click
3.
Select the View tab and remove the checkmark from Use
Sharing Wizard (Recommended) (
). Then click
window.
REFERENCE
OE150002.ai
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE15-15
4.
8.
Right-click drive C and select the Sharing tab.

Select Everyone and click
9.
Click [Add].
The Select Users or Groups window opens.
OE150003.ai
5.
Click Advanced Sharing.

The Advanced Sharing window opens.
6.
Put a checkmark to Share this folder (

enter C in the Share name field.
) and
OE150006.ai
10. Click
The Common Queries window opens.
11. Click
OE150004.ai
7.
Click [Permissions...].
OE150007.ai
OE150005.ai
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE15-16
12. Select Administrators and click
repeatedly
until the Permissions for C window opens.
16. Select Everyone if there is and then click
REFERENCE
If Administrators is not displayed, repeat steps 9 through 12.
OE150008.ai
REFERENCE
be sure to select Administrators here.
17. Select Administrators and then check Full Control for

).
Allow (
18. Click
window.
REFERENCE
OE150009.ai

OE150010.ai
13. Select Administrators and put a checkmark to Allow in

the Full Control field (
).
14. Click
repeatedly until Local Disk (C:)

Properties window opens.
15. Select the Security tab.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE15-17
2.1.6 Performing NetBEUI Setup
3.
NOTE
Click
The Select Network Component Type window opens.
If Windows2000 SP3 or later is used under Windows XP or Windows

Vista, the NetBEUI setup is not required.
To reduce the time required for file access between cluster-connected
CLs, perform the following NetBEUI setup procedure at each CL.
1.
From the
menu, choose Settings, Network and
Dial-up Connections and then Local Area Connection

Status.
00000602.EPS
4.
Choose Protocol and then click
The Select Network Protocol window opens.
00000600.EPS
2.
Click
00000603.EPS
00000601.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE15-18
5.
Choose [NetBEUI Protocol] and then click
NetBEUI Protocol is then added.
00000604.EPS
6.
Uncheck [NetBEUI Protocol] (
).
00000605.EPS
7.
Click
8.
Restart the CL.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE15-19
2.1.7 Performing Study Information Sharing Setup
3.
To permit study information sharing, perform the following study

information sharing setup procedure at each CL.
1.
In the Study Sharing Configuration window, set [Study

Sharing] to YES.

[Setup Study Sharing].
00000614.EPS
4.
Click

00000612.EPS
The SetCluster window opens.
2.
Click [Setup Configuration].
00000613.EPS
The Study Sharing Configuration window opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE15-20
2.
2.1.8 Defining the Share Range
Click [Host Sharing].
To define the study information share range, perform the following

procedure to register the host name of the CLs that share the study
information.
IMPORTANT
When you register the host name of the CLs that share the study
information, use only one CL. To the other study information sharing
CLs, copy the registered data from the CL at which the host name
registration procedure is completed (by backing up the data and
restoring it).
00000618.EPS
The HostSharing window opens.
Do not change the registered host name individually at the CLs.

If the host name is registered or its registration is changed at the CLs
on an individual basis, the images related to shared study information
may not be displayed.
1.

00000619.EPS
3.
Click
The Host window opens.
00000612.EPS

00000620.EPS
4.
Make entries in the [Hostname] and [Location] fields and

then click
Hostname : Host name (computer name) of a CL that shares

study information.
Location : Name (any name will do) of the location at which the
above CL is installed.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE15-21
The entered host name and installation location name are then
displayed.
2.1.9 Backing Up/Restoring the Share Settings

For cluster-connected CLs, the same sharing setup data about a
registered host name must be used. Therefore, copy the registered host
name data to the other CLs to be cluster-connected.
For the copy operation, use the sharing setup backup/restore function.
The procedure is indicated below.
IMPORTANT
00000621.EPS
5.
If two or more CLs share the study information, repeat steps

3. and 4. as needed.
6.
In the HostSharing window, click
The entered setup data is then saved, and the SetCluster

window opens.
7.
Click
Be sure to perform sharing setup at only one CL. Copy the resulting
setup data to the other CLs. If you register a host name individually at
each CL, images may not be displayed.
REFERENCE
Within the CL, the host name registered for sharing setup is managed
with a unique ID. This ID varies with the order of registration.
8.
00000111.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE15-22
4.
Backing up the sharing setup data

Back up on storage media the sharing setup file of a CL for which the
study information share setting was performed. For this operation, have
the following ready for use.
While the Study Sharing Configuration Restore/Backup

window is open, enter the media drive directory pathname
(e.g., a:\) in the [Configuration Backup] area, and then click
.
1.
Insert the media into the PC.
2.

00000042.EPS
Sharing setup data files
and
are then saved in the
media.
5.
Click

00000612.EPS
3.
6.
Click
Click [Backup/Restore].
7.
00000043.EPS
The Study Sharing Configuration Restore/Backup window opens.
00000111.EPS
8.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE15-23
4.
Restoring the sharing setup data

Restore the sharing setup data file, backed up on media in previous
steps, to other cluster-connected CLs.
1.
Insert the media into the PC created in Backing up the

sharing setup data.
2.

While the Study Sharing Configuration Restore/Backup

window is open, enter the media drive directory pathname
(e.g., a:\) in the [Configuration Restore] area, and then click
.
00000041.EPS
The sharing setup data is then restored.
5.
Click
00000612.EPS
6.
3.
Click
Click [Backup/Restore].
7.
00000043.EPS
00000111.EPS
The Study Sharing Configuration Restore/Backup window opens.
8.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE15-24
3.
2.2.1 Performing Integrated Output Processing Setup
While the Study Sharing Configuration window is open,

set [OutputProcess] to Centered.
To permit a specific CL to exercise centralized management of output to

a printer or other device, define the output processing CL by performing
the following procedure.
1.

00000622.EPS
4.
Click
The OutputMasterList window opens.
5.
In the OutputMasterList, check the host name for the

output processing CL, and then click
00000612.EPS
2.

00000623.EPS
NOTE
The OutputMasterList shows the host names that are registered
as directed in 2.1.8 Defining the Share Range.
00000613.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE15-25
6.
From the OutputMaster pull-down menu, choose the host

name of the output processing CL.
00000111.EPS
00000624.EPS
NOTE
The OutputMaster pull-down menu shows only the host names
that are checked in step 5.
7.
To deliver output to the local printer for the output
processing CL, check [Use LOCAL Printer] (
8.
Click
).

window opens.
9.
Click
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE15-26
2.2.2 Performing Centralized Patient Information

Management Setup
3.
While the Study Sharing Configuration window is open,

set [PatientMaster] to YES.
To permit a specific CL to manage patient information in a centralized

manner, define the patient database centralized management CL by
performing the following procedure.
1.

00000625.EPS
4.
From the Master pull-down menu, choose the host name

for the CL to be designated as the patient database
centralized management CL.
00000612.EPS
2.
00000626.EPS
NOTE
The Master pull-down menu shows the host names that are
registered as directed in 2.1.8 Defining the Share Range.
5.
Click

window opens.
00000613.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
6.
Click
OE15-27
7.
2.2.3 Performing Study List Setup
To change the items of study information to be displayed within a study

list, perform a display item setup procedure from the Study List Setup
window at an individual CL.
For details on how to set the items to be displayed within a study
list, see CL Operation Manual.
NOTE
00000111.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
If the Maximum Display Count for a study list is set to limitless, a

considerable amount of time may be required for study information
operation.
The reason is that the number of study information items to be
displayed within a study list may increase when multiple CLs share the
study information.
It is also well to remember that study information of your interest may
not appear if you reduce the maximum display count setting. In such an
instance, you can display the study information of your interest by
executing the search/sort/filtering command from the study list window.
OE15-28
3.1 Study Registration
3. Connection Verification
Register a study at one of the cluster-connected CLs and then read an

image from an Image Reader. Verify that another cluster-connected CL
can display the information about the registered study and the
associated image.
Register a study at one of the cluster-connected CLs.
1.
From the
Fuji Film and FCR.

In about two minutes, the CL-AP registration window opens.
TCP/IP
Version A software
RU1
CL1
3.2 Image Reading
CL2
RU2
3.3 Study Information and

Image Display
00000627.EPS
NOTE
OE000017.EPS
Before performing the verification procedures, start all the clusterconnected CLs. If any CL is not operating, the study information
possessed by that unit cannot be shared.
Version B software
OE000099.EPS
2.
From the registration window, register study information.

For details on how to register study information, see CL
Operation Manual.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE15-29
3.2 Image Reading
3.2 Image Reading

At the CL with which a study is registered, read an image from the RU.
1.
Perform an image read process in relation to the registered

study information.
For details on how to read an image, see CL Operation
Manual.
2.
Verify that the image is saved in the CL and can be displayed

accordingly.
3.3 Study Information and Image Display

Verify that the study information registered by performing the
aforementioned procedure and the associated image can be displayed
at a CL other than the CL that has performed the registration and image
read processes.
1.
Start the CL-AP at another CL.
2.
Verify that the Study List window shows the study

information registered by performing the aforementioned
procedure.
For details on how to display an image, see CL Operation

Manual.
For details on how to verify the study information from the

Study List window, see CL Operation Manual.
3.
Select the study information to verify that the associated

image appears on the display.
For details on the image display procedure, see
CL Operation Manual.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE15-30

Back up the CL setup files.
When using a cluster connection, it is necessary to back up the cluster
connection setup file as well as the normal setup files.
For backup, have the following items ready for use.
For details on the normal setup file backup procedure, see
5. Restoring/Backing Up the Confiuration File Configuration
Restore/Backup in MU: Maintenance Utility.
For details on the cluster connection setup file backup procedure,
see 2.1.9 Backing Up/Restoring the Share Settings.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE15-31
BLANK PAGE
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE15-32
CL+Other (DICOM MG Storage: Digital Mammogram Transfer)
CL+Other (DICOM MG Storage: Digital

Mammogram Transfer)
Described herein is the procedure for transferring digital mammography
images from the CR-IR348CL to other makers equipment using the
DICOM MG Storage function.
NOTE
The CR-IR348CL and the equipment to which images are transferred
respectively.
Setup example of other connected equipment
HOST name
: Mammo-View
IP address
: 172.16.1.35*
AE name (Provider) : MammoView01-SCP*
Port number
: 5001*
Service Class
: MG Image Storage For Presentation
(Image processing parameters not provided.)
Transfer Syntax
: Implicit VR Little Endian*
Other connected
equipment
(Other maker's equipment)
Prior to setup
CL requirements
Key Name
Functions Supported
CL DICOM MAMMO S key

MG Storage SCU
(Image processing parameters not
provided.)
MG Storage SCU
(Image processing parameters
provided.)
CL DICOM MAMMO P key

NOTE
To install an option that provides image processing parameters, another
option that does not provide image processing parameters must have
been installed.
TCP/IP
Data transfer
5000MA plus, etc.
DICOM MG Storage
CL
CL setup example
HOST name
: fcr-csl*
IP address
: 172.16.1.20*
AE name (User) : CL-mammo-SCU*
Service Class : MG Image Storage For Presentation
(Image processing parameters not provided.)
Transfer Syntax : Implicit VR Little Endian*
00001600.EPS

The DICOM MG Storage (SCP) Service Class must be supported.
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE16-1
1. Hardware Setup
1. Hardware Setup

1. Hardware Setup

digital mammography images via
DICOM.
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX cable
TCP/IP

setups.
Setup on the CL (AE name, device
attribute, Service Class, etc.).
Registration of AE name, device
attribute, port number, Service Class,
handling of HQ images, etc. on other
code.
EQUIPMENT (OD attribute only).
Setup for UID issuance.
Setup for name elements.
RU
CL
Other connected
equipment
00000044.EPS
NOTES

3. Connection
Checkout
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)

below.
OE16-2
2.1 Installing the Digital Mammography Exposure Menu
items.
2.1 Installing the Digital Mammography
Exposure Menu
2.1 Installing the Digital Mammography

Exposure Menu
Replace the exposure menu and exposure menu parameters with the
DICOM MG Storage equivalents.
See 5.2 Replacing the Menu Database in RI: Reinstalling the
Software.
2.2 Installing the Digital Mammogram

Transmissioin Option Keys
2.3 Reinstalling the AP key
2.4 Setting Up on the CL for DICOM MG Storage
Function
2.5 Registering on the Other Connected
Equipment for DICOM MG Storage Function
2.6 Setting Up the Automatic Image Distribution
Function (DISTRIBUTION CODE)
2.7 Setting Up CONNECTING EQUIPMENT
2.8 Setting Up the UID Issuance Method
2.9 Changing the Name Elements
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE16-3
2.2 Installing the Digital Mammogram Transmission Option Keys
2.2 Installing the Digital Mammogram

Transmission Option Keys
For DICOM MG Storage transmission of digital mammograms, it is
necessary to install the CL DICOM MAMMO S option key and CL
DICOM MAMMO P option key.
However, if you do not attach image processing parameters to the
images to be transmitted, install only the CL DICOM MAMMO S option
key.
1.

1.
NOTE
Insert the CL DICOM MAMMO S option key CD into the PC.


opens.
NOTE
2.
Click
2.
Click
A dialog box opens to indicate that the installation process is

completed.
00000419.EPS
3.
Click

00000046.EPS
3.
Click
4.
4.
5.
To install the CL DICOM MAMMO P option key as well,

change the CD and then repeat step 2. through 4.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE16-4
2.4 Setting Up on the CL for DICOM MG Storage Function
2.4 Setting Up on the CL for DICOM MG

Storage Function
Make settings for the following items of the CL side.
Host name and IP address of the CL
AE name (Application Entity Name) of the CL
1.
4.
Select
and click
5.

displayed.
CL host name
Start Service Utility.
CL IP address

Utility.
2.

window.
00000092.EPS
NOTE
00000599.EPS
00000091.EPS
3.
Click the
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
mark of the
field.
OE16-5
6.
8.
Click
Select "DICOM".
00000093.EPS
00000443.EPS
9.
in the
field to select MG Image
Storage For Presentation.
NOTE
To attach image processing parameters, select MG Image Storage
For Processing.
REFERENCES
00000094.EPS
7.
Enter the AE name that is the SCU for the CL (e.g.: CLmammo-SCU) in the
field.
NOTE
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
If MG Image Storage For Presentation is selected, items that

need not be set will be hidden on the DICOM Setup window.
For details of verification of connection, see 7. Verifying the
OE16-6
10. To set up the AE that is the User, select

Role.
(SCU) for the
field to select the device attribute (OTHER).
REFERENCE
DICOM Print, and other) can be selected for a single Application
Entity. Moreover, two or more Transfer Syntax settings (e.g.,
JPEGLossless, ImplicitVRLittleEndian, and other) can be selected
for a single Service Class.

For Processing.
14.
Click
REFERENCES
Transfer Syntax (e.g.: ImplicitVRLittleEndian).

ImplictVR
LittleEndian
ExplictVR
LittleEndian
JPEG
Lossless
MG Image Storage
For Presentation
MG Image Storage
For Processing
Verification

as necessary.
REFERENCES
processing.
.
above is the SCU.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
NOTE
15. Click
in the
field to select the
Service Class
in the
.
If the
deleted.

saved.
17. Click
OE16-7
2.5 Registering on the Other Connected Equipment for DICOM MG Storage Function
2.5 Registering on the Other Connected

Equipment for DICOM MG Storage
Function
3.
Click

Register the following items of other connected equipment.

connected equipment
Service Class, Role, Transfer Syntax, and device attribute (Attribute)
1.
Select
2.
00000098.EPS
4.
Enter the Host name (e.g.: Mammo-View) in the

Enter the AE name of other connected equipment
(e.g.: MammoView01-SCP) in the
field.
field.
Select DICOM.
field.
NOTES
Select "DICOM".
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
Enter the Port number of other connected equipment

00000097.EPS
(e.g.: 5001) in the
field.
OE16-8
5.
Click
8.
in the

Syntax (e.g.: ImplicitVRLittleEndian).
Service Class
00000443.EPS
6.
in the

7.

Role.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
MG Image Storage
For Presentation
MG Image Storage
For Processing
Verification
For image transfer addressed to the image diagnosis server,

select MG Image Storage For Processing.
NOTE
If MG Image Storage For Presentation is selected, items that

need not be set will be hidden on the DICOM Setup window.
JPEG
Lossless
Be sure to select the same Transfer Syntax as that selected for

this equipment.
Image Storage For Presentation function.
REFERENCES
ExplictVR
LittleEndian
NOTES
field and select the MG

For Processing.
Application Entity (e.g., MG Image Storage For Presentation and
MG Image Storage For Processing). Further, do not select two or
more Transfer Syntax settings for a single Service Class (e.g.,
JPEG Lossless and Implicit VR Little Endian).
effect.
ImplictVR
LittleEndian
9.

Setting of
ST :

HQ images.
images.
well.
Setting of
ST :
HQ/SH :

OE16-9
10. To attach image processing parameters to images to be

transfered, select
) within the

(
).
REFERENCE
field.

NOTE
Yes cannot be selected when MG Image Storage For
Presentation is specified for Abstract Syntax. This setup item is
grayed out.

(
equipment, select
) within the

NOTE
This setup item is displayed only when the competing brand PACS
LUT adjustment function key (one of the Plus Standard Key

of
of the
field and select device attribute of other connected

equipment (HD_FILE).
field.
downward arrow
to
box
setup value.
NOTE
Processing.
OE030001.EPS


010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE16-10
19. Click
REFERENCES
OE030002.ai
MONOCHROME1 : Select when the minimum value of pixel value is

set to white and the maximum value of pixel value
is set to black.
MONOCHROME2 : Select when the minimum value of pixel value is
set to black and the maximum value of pixel value
is set to white.
.
If the
deleted.
NOTE
settings are set.
Abstract Syntax
Role
LUT Operation
: MG Image Storage For Presentation

: SCP
18. Click

saved.
21. Click
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE16-11
2.6 Setting Up the Automatic Image Distribution Function (DISTRIBUTION CODE)
2.6 Setting Up the Automatic Image

Distribution Function (DISTRIBUTION
CODE)
3.

.

set up DISTRIBUTION CODE as follows.
of
NOTE
Service Utility.
perform the procedure described in 2.7 Setting up CONNECTING
EQUIPMENT.
1.
Click
Item window.

host or AE name (e.g.: MammoView01-SCP).
4.
Click
5.

saved.
6.
Click
00000247.EPS
2.
Click
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
OE16-12

EQUIPMENT as directed below.
1.
Click
on the Setup

window.
2.8 Setting Up the UID Issuance Method

1.
Click the
mark of
2.
Click
of the Setup

OE000004.EPS
2.
Click
3.

within

within
00000248.EPS
and select equipment (ODF AE name).
4.
Click
5.

6.
Click

010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE16-13
3.
Make UID issuance settings as follows.
Table
List of UID setting (IMAGE MODALITY)
No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
9 UID Issuance
after Modifying
ID Information
YES
Issues a new UID.
NO
Whether or not to issue

a new image UID or
SOP Instance UID when
any ID information is
modified on the CL.
10 UID Issuance
after Modifying
Normalized
Parameter
YES
Issues a new UID.
NO

a new image UID or
image normalization
conditions are modified
on the CL.
11 UID Issuance
after Modifying
Image
Processing
Parameter
YES
Issues a new UID.
NO

a new image UID or
image processing
conditions are modified
on the CL.
12 UID Issuance
YES
Before Sending
Issues a new UID.
Processed Data NO
Whether or not to output

an SOP Instance UID as
the UID of a processed
CR image when
outputting processed
images from the CL.
13 DICOM Series
Generation
Logic
Setup of Series Instance

0: 1 Study - N series and 1
UID issuance logic.
Series - 1 image
Issues a number so that it has
See
multiple series for one study and
3.4 Configuration
only one image for one series.
Details 1. IMAGE
0: 1 Study - N series and 1
MODALITY under
Series - M image
MU: Maintenance
Utility.
multiple series for one study and
multiple images for one series.
Series - N image
only one series for one study and
multiple images for one series.
No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
39 UID
YES
Issues a new UID.
Issuance about
a function
NO
(except Image
Processing) to
change to the
image
themselves

a new image UID or
energy subtraction
modified on the CL.
45 UID Issuance
after Modifying
Trimming
Parameter
YES
Issues a new UID.
NO

a new image UID or
trimming information is
modified.

after Modifying
Issues a new UID.
FNC Parameter NO

a new image UID or
a FNC parameter is
modified.
: Default setting
4.

saved.
5.
Click

: Default setting
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
OE16-14
3.1 CL-AP Startup

Equipment
1.
3.1 CL-AP Startup
For details of the image transfer procedures, see the "CL

Operation Manual".

Connected Equipment
2.
3.1 CL-AP Startup

1.
From the


Fuji Film and FCR.

Version A software
OE000017.EPS
Version B software
OE000099.EPS
010-054-10
02.20.2004 FM4220 (ITC)
OE16-15

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE16-16

This chapter describes the setting procedure used for storage of images
from the CR-IR348CL to the storage media, using the DICOM Media
Storage service.
NOTES
The CR-IR348CL is abbreviated hereafter simply CL.
With software version V8.0 or later, images can be stored in a USB
memory stick using the DICOM Media Storage function.
IMPORTANT
Installation of the CL DICOM MEDIA STORAGE B key will enable
you to use the two kinds of functions said above, (A) and (B). Use
these two functions as appropriate in accordance with the
equipments usage environment.
(A) To use the DVD media (or USB memory stick) only on the CL,
select Private Unstandardized CR Storage.
(B) To write images onto the DVD media (or USB memory stick)
on the CL and read those images on other makers DICOM
server, select CR Image Storage or MG Image Storage for
Presentation.
(A)
Image writing
Prior to setup
CL requirements
Key Name
Functions Supported
CL DICOM MEDIA STORAGE B key DICOM Media Storage

CR Storage (A)

CR Image Storage (B)

MG Image Storage for
Presentation (B)
NOTE
To store digital mammograms, the mammography option key is
required.
For details of digital mammogram settings, see
OE16 CL+Other (DICOM MG Storage: Digital Mammogram
Transfer).
USB memory requirements (V8.0 or later)
USB2.0 is supported.
Dedicated drive and software need not to be installed.
The capacity is 2GB or more.
Writing and reading necessary data are proved to be possible.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Image reading
Removable media
(DVD/USB memory)
CL
(B)
Only image writing
CL
Removable media
(DVD/USB memory)
DVD
LF-C1
Other makers
DICOM server
Image
reading
Removable media
(DVD)
Image reading
* A USB memory stick can be used

with software version V8.0 or later.
OE170021.EPS
Removable media requirements

In Japan, use the specified DVD-RAM drive.
For other than in Japan, use locally procured removable media and
storage media.
OE17-1
TCP/IP
CR Storage
Data transmission
XG-1 RU, etc.
Removable media
(DVD or USB memory)
CL
CL setup example
AE name (Provider)
Removable media (DVD)
drive recognized by the CL
Service Class
Transfer Syntax
: MEDIA *
: F:\ *
: Private UnstandardizedCRStorage *
: JPEG Lossless *
Items marked with * constitute setup examples, which need to be

changed depending on the equipment environment.
OE170011.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Use a USB cable to connect the CL to

removable media.
1. Hardware Setup
Use removable media to perform

settings necessary for storage of
images using DICOM.
Start to install the removable media

driver and the option key, reinstall the
AP key and then perform the following
settings.
Registration of removable media
information (including AE name, drive
name, handling of high-density
images, etc.)
CONNECTING EQUIPMENT settings
Check to see that images can be
stored from the CL to removable
media.
3. Connection
Checkout
Make backup copies of configuration

files.
OE17-2
1. Hardware Setup
1. Hardware Setup
Connect the CL to removable media, as illustrated below.
NOTE
This manual uses Windows 2000 screens, whose contents are the
same as those displayed by Windows XP or Windows Vista.
TCP/IP
RU
CL
Removable media
(DVD/USB memory)
USB cable/USB port
Set up CL software as follows.

2.1 Installation of the Removable Media Driver
OE170000.EPS
NOTE
2.2 Installation of the Media Storage Option Key
To use a DVD in Japan, connect the specified DVD-RAM drive.

To use a DVD outside Japan, make connections appropriately following
the Operation Manual supplied with the locally procured removable
media.
2.3 Reinstallation of the AP Key

2.4 Setup of Removable Media Information on
the DICOM Media Storage Function
2.5 CONNECTING EQUIMENT Settings
2.6 Configuration Settings
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE17-3
2.1 Installation of the Removable Media Driver
2.1 Installation of the Removable Media

Driver
Install the removable media driver as follows.
NOTE
When the OS installed is Windows Vista, the writing software supplied
as a standard of the OS is used. For this reason, no driver needs to be
installed.
For users other than in Japan

Install the DLA driver according to the Operation Manual supplied with
locally procured removable media.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE17-4
2.2 Installation of the Media Storage Option Key
2.2 Installation of the Media Storage

Option Key
2.3 Reinstallation of the AP Key
To store an image using the DICOM Media Storage function, the CL

DICOM MEDIA STORAGE B option key is required.

the AP key. The reinstallation procedure is described below.
1.
1.
After a while, the installation start window opens automatically.
NOTE
NOTE

2.
Click
OE170005.EPS
2.
Click
.
00000419.EPS
A window then opens to show that option key installation

processing has been completed successfully.
3.
Click
A window opens to indicate the completion of reinstallation.
3.
4.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Click
4.
OE17-5
2.4 Setup of Removable Media Information on the DICOM Media Storage Function
2.4 Setup of Removable Media Information

on the DICOM Media Storage Function
5.

displayed.
Described below is the procedure used to set up following removable

media information items.
CL host name
Removable media name and drive name

Service Class, Role, Transfer Syntax, Device Attribute
Other (timeout value, etc.)
CL IP address
1.
Startup Service Utility.
00000092.EPS
For how to start up Service Utility, see 1. Starting/Exiting the

Service Utility under MU: Maintenance Utility.
2.
NOTE
The IP address will not be displayed correctly unless the CL is
6.
Select MEDIA and click
Select MEDIA.
00000599.EPS
OE170006.EPS
00000091.EPS
3.
Click
4.
Select
of the
field.
and click
OE170008.EPS
The New Node window then opens.

010-054-11
07.30.2004 FM4254 (ITC)
OE17-6
7.
9.
Enter the removable media name (e.g.: MEDIA) in
Unstandardized CRStorage or CR Image Storage.
Enter the removable media drive name (e.g.: F:\) in
Private Unstandardized : For reading images on the CL.

CRStorage Select this item when reading the DVD
media (or USB memory) only on the
CL.
Click
in the
field and select Private
8.
CR Image Storage
: For reading images on other makers

DICOM server.
MG Image Storage for Select either of these two items when
Presentation reading the DVD media (or USB
memory) on other makers DICOM
server.
The MEDIASetup window opens.
See Prior to setup for selection details.
in the
field to select
JPEGLossless.
OE170013.EPS
NOTE
Service Class
The following items have been selected automatically on the

MEDIASetup window that opens.
Role
: SCP
Attribute : OD_FILE
OE170014.EPS
ImplicitVR
LittleEndian
ExplicitVR
LittleEndian
JPEG
Lossless
CR Image Storage
CRStorage
MG Image Storage for

Presentation

(
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
to
box
).
OE17-7
12. Make the following settings.
NOTE
The value set up in Bit Stored is allowed to change only in the
following cases:
When CR Image Storage is selected for the Service Class and

PROC is selected for the Image Processing.
When MG Image Storage for Presentation is selected for the
Service Class.
II
15. Perform settings for gradation correction processing as

required.
OE170009.EPS
I. Select ST & HQ & SH

II. Select HQ/SH
13.
NOTE
Make the following settings as necessary.
These setup items are displayed only when the LUT adjustment
function key for competing PACS is installed (one of functions
enabled by the Plus Standard Key).
NONE : Selected when storing an image not subjected to image

processing.
PROC : Selected when storing an already processed image.
NOTE
PROC can be set up only when CR Image Storage has been
selected for the Service Class, which is disabled when Private
Unstandardized CRStorage or MG Image Storage for
Presentation is selected.

downward arrow

of
setup value.
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
OE030001.EPS
NOTES
The gradation correction setting is enabled only when CR Image
Storage or MG Image Storage for Presentation is selected for
the Service Class, and is disabled when Private Unstandardized
CRStorage is selected.
Do not select Using Modality LUT module for using image for MG
Image Storage for Presentation. Even if it is selected, no
operation will be activated.
For details of this setting, see Display Gradation Correction
Setup under FR5: Function-specific Reference.
OE17-8
16. Make the following settings as required.
19. Click
REFERENCES
OE170012.EPS
Yes : Selected for annotation-embedded storage.

No : Selected for storage not embedded with annotation.
Data that has just been set up is displayed on the right-side of the
Setup Configuration Item window that opens. You can change
the display item as needed. Every time you have changed it,
.
make sure to click
will delete the currently selected setup item.
Clicking
20. Select Save from the Config menu.

OE030002.ai
MONOCHROME1 : Select when setting the minimum pixel value to

MONOCHROME2 : Select when setting the minimum pixel value to

saved.
21. Click
NOTE
Abstract Syntax
: CR Image Storage or

MG Image Storage for Presentation
Role
: SCP
LUT Operation
18. Click
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE17-9
2.5 CONNECTING EQUIPMENT Settings
2.5 CONNECTING EQUIPMENT Settings

To record images on removable media, make settings for
CONNECTING EQIUPMENT appropriately.
1.
Click
on the Setup
A list of registered equipment units appears on the right-side of the

window.
OE170019.EPS
2.
Click
3.

in the
field
to select function (OD_FILE) of the connected equipment.

in the
field
to select name (e.g.: MEDIA) of the removable media.
4.
Click
5.
Select Save from the Config menu.

saved.
6.
Click

010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE17-10
3.

Follow the procedure below to set up config items for the DICOM Media
Storage function.
1.
Click
Setup items for the IDT/Console function appear on the right-side

of the window.
Setup items for the IDT/Console function
Start Service Utility.

For how to start Service Utility, see 1. Starting/Exiting the
Service Utility under MU: Maintenance Utility.
2.
OE000038.EPS
4.
Perform settings for the DICOM Media Storage function.

Item Config name
114
00000131.EPS
Media Auto
Mount
Description
Setting whether or not to mount media
(DVD or USB memory) automatically at CL
startup.
Select Yes (to mount media automatically)

or No (not to mount media automatically).
: Set it up as required.
5.

saved.
00000404.EPS
6.
Click
The setup data is then saved.
7.
Select Close from the Config menu.

The system returns to the IIP Service Utility.
8.

010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE17-11
3.1 CL-AP Startup
3.2 Image Storage onto the Storage Media
Start running the CL-AP and then make sure that images can be saved
from the CL to the removable media.
3.1 CL-AP Startup
Use removable media to save images stored in the CL onto the storage
media.
3.2.1 Formatting the Storage Media

Format the storage media on which images are to be saved.
NOTES
3.2 Image Storage onto the Storage

Media
In case a USB memory stick is used for the storage media, this
procedure needs not to be performed. Connect the USB memory to
the PC and then proceed to 3.2.2 Recognizing the Removable
Media.
For how to format storage media, procedures to be performed are
different depending on whether it is to be performed in Japan or
outside Japan.
3.2.1 Formatting the Storage

Media
3.2.2 Recognizing the
Removable Media
3.2.3 Image Storage
For users other than in Japan
NOTE
This manual uses Windows 2000 screens, whose contents are the
same as those displayed by Windows XP or Windows Vista.
Format the storage media according to the Operation Manual supplied

with locally procured removable media.
3.2.2 Recognizing the Removable Media
3.1 CL-AP Startup

1.
From the
Have the CL-AP recognize removable media that stores images, as

follows.
1.
Fuji Film and then FCR.
and then
on the CL
media window.
The CL opening window appears.

The CL-AP reception window then opens in about two minutes.
2.
Click
A window opens prompting you to set up the volume label name.
Make sure that the Media tab has been selected.
OE170002.EPS
OE170020.EPS
2.
Change the volume label name as necessary and click

.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE17-12
3.2 Image Storage onto the Storage Media
3.2.3 Image Storage

Described below is the procedure used to store images onto image
storage.
1.
Select an image to be stored and save it on the image

storage media accordingly.
For details of how to store images on the image storage
media, see the Operation Manual supplied with the removable
media.
2.
Check to see that the image has been stored on the image
storage media properly.
For details of how to check images stored on the image
storage media, see the Operation Manual supplied with the
removable media.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE17-13

Back up CL setup files appropriately.
Have the following item ready for use for backup processing.
the Configuration FileConfiguration Restore/Backup under
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE17-14
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE17-15
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE17-16
CL+POCKET id Console (Portable Exposure Function)
CL+POCKET id Console
(Portable Exposure Function)
This chapter describes how to configure a setup procedure to transmit/
receive study reception information between the CR-IR348CL and the
POCKET id Console (PDA) and perform portable exposure.
NOTES
The CR-IR348CL is hereafter referred to as CL.
When the OS used is Windows Vista, this function is not supported.
Prior to setup
CL requirements
Portable exposure function option key (CL SOFT FOR POCKET ID
CL) is required.
Requirements of the POCKET id Console
Used model : PPT8846-R3BZ00WW manufactured by Symbol
Technology
(Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket
PC)
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)

Unpack and charge the POCKET id
Console. Also, add a serial connector
as required.
1. Hardware Setup
Using the POCKET id Console,

configure a setup to transmit/receive
study reception information between
the CL and the POCKET id Console.
In the first place, connect the CL with
the POCKET id Console, install the
option key, and reinstall the AP key.
Then do the following setup tasks.
Setting up the POCKET id Console
Making device ID registration
Installing and setting up the POCKET
id Console application
Make sure that study reception

information can be transmitted/
received between the CL and the
POCKET id Console.
3. Connection
Verification
OE18-1
1.1 Unpacking and Charging the POCKET id Console
1. Hardware Setup
REFERENCE
With the help of the cradles LED, you can tell when the battery
becomes fully charged. The battery is fully charged when the LED
changes from red to green.
With respect to the CL and the POCKET id Console, perform the

following hardware setup.
1.1 Unpacking and Charging the
POCKET id Console
Take the POCKET id

Console out of its box and
set it in its cradle for
charging.
1.2 Adding the Serial Connector

(*1)
Connect the add-in serial

connector cable to the PCs
mother board.
*1 : The addition of the serial connector is required only when there is

only one serial connector on the rear panel of a PC (such as the
GX60, GX260, GX270 or the like) and this connector is already
being used for the touch panel.
1.1 Unpacking and Charging the POCKET

id Console
Take the POCKET id Console out of its box, set up the cradle, and put
the POCKET id Console in the cradle to charge its battery.
Make initial settings and the like on the side of the POCKET id Console
in order to get it ready for use.
For details of the procedure, see the POCKET id Console (PPT8846)
Operation Manual.
1.
Connect the cradle for the POCKET id Console into a wall

outlet. (It is not necessary to make a connection with the
PC.)
2.
Attach the main battery to the POCKET id Console and

insert the POCKET id Console into the cradle.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
When the battery is used for the very first time, it takes about 24
hours for the backup battery to become fully charged. Therefore,
do not disengage the main battery before 24 hours have passed.
3.
When full charging is completed, turn off the POCKET id

Console.
4.
By following the directions provided by the wizard that

opens, perform a setup (calibration).
1.2 Adding the Serial Connector

If there is only one serial connector mounted on the rear panel of a PC
(such as the GX60, GX260, GX270 or the like) and this connector is
already being occupied by the touch panel, one additional serial
connector is required to be mounted for use with the POCKET id
Console.
For the procedure on how to add a serial connector, see
1.2 Adding a Serial Connector from the Mother Board in
FR20 Adding and Setting the Serial Connector under
OE18-2
2.1 Connecting the CL and the POCKET id Console
NOTE
2.1 Connecting the CL and the POCKET id

Console
This chapter uses Windows 2000 windows, whose contents are the
same as those displayed by Windows XP.
In order to make it possible for the CL and the POCKET id Console

communicate with each other, it is necessary to install software for this
purpose (Microsoft ActiveSync3.7) on the CL side.
The procedure for installing Microsoft ActiveSync3.7 is described below.
In this chapter, perform the software setup procedure on the CL and the
POCKET id Console as follows.
1.
Insert the Microsoft ActiveSync3.7 installer CD that came

with the POCKET id Console into the PC.
2.
Double-click the MSASYNC.EXE file that is in the following

directory.
2.1 Connecting the CL and the POCKET id

Console
<Drive where the CD-ROM is inserted>\ENGLISH\MSASYNC.EXE
2.2 Installing the Portable Option Key
The installer starts and the Set Up Microsoft ActiveSync 3.7

window opens.

2.4 Setting Up the POCKET id Console
2.6 Installing and Setting Up the POCKET id
Console Application
OE180101.EPS
3.
Click
The Select Installation Folder window opens.
OE180077.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE18-3
4.
Click
A connection verification process starts. After successful connection

has been verified, the New Partnership window opens.
The Get Connected window opens.
OE180080.EPS
OE180078.EPS
5.
Directly connect the serial cable of the cradle for the

POCKET id Console to the serial connector (COM port) on
the PC.
10. Click the Guest partnership radio button to enable it, and
then click
NOTE
Do not place the POCKET id Console into the cradle yet.
6.
Turn ON the power to the POCKET id Console.
7.
Insert the power to the POCKET id Console into the cradle.
8.
Click
on the Get Connected window.
OE180081.EPS
OE180078.EPS
The Microsoft ActiveSync (Connected) window opens.
The Windows Security Alert window opens.
OE180079.EPS
9.
Click
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE18-4
11. Make sure that Guest and Connected are being

displayed.
Check to see these are being shown.

OE180082.EPS
12. Click
The Microsoft ActiveSync (Connected) window closes.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE18-5
In order to make it possible to perform portable exposure using the

POCKET id Console, the CL SOFT FOR POCKET ID CL option key is
required.
Once the option key has been installed, be sure to reinstall the AP key.
Use the AP key installation CD (114Y5342002A: Version A00) to
reinstall the AP key. The installation procedure is described below.
1.
1.
NOTE
NOTE


2.
Click
OE180016.EPS
2.
Click

3.
Click
.
OE180017.EPS
4.

3.
Click
4.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE18-6
3.
1.
From the
4.
By tapping on the
or
tab.
arrow next to the
field, set the current time of day.
menu of the POCKET id Console, select
Setting, and then tap on the
next to the
field, and select the time zone appropriate to the use

environment.
This section describes settings that need to be made on the POCKET id

Console side.
2.4.1 Setting Date and Time
Tap on downward arrow
5.
Tap on downward arrow
next to the
field.
The calendar window opens.
OE180085.EPS
6.
Repeatedly tap on the

todays date.
7.
Tap on
OE180083.EPS
2.
Double-click
or
button as required to select
A dialog opens to confirm if you are sure to save the setup data.
The Clock window opens.
OE180086.EPS
8.
Tap on
OE180084.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE18-7
3.
2.4.2 Setting the Device ID
1.
From the
Tap on the Device ID tab.
"Setting", and then tap on the
tab.
OE180088.EPS
The System tab window opens.
The Device ID tab window opens.
4.
Tap on
A data entry panel like that shown below opens.
OE180083.EPS
2.
Double-tap on
The About window opens.
OE180089.EPS
5.
Tap on the
field to place the
cursor in the field, and then enter the device ID (e.g. FF001)
using the data entry panel.
NOTES
If two or more POCKET id Consoles are introduced at a given
institution, unique device IDs should be assigned to them.
For information, a single CL can handle up to three POCKET id
Consoles.
OE180087.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Characters that may be used are uppercase A to Z, lowercase a

to z, numbers 0 to 9 and the underscore character (_).
OE18-8
6.
Tap on
The data entry panel closes.
7.
Tap on
2.4.3 Setting Screen Properties
Backlight setting
1.
From the
tab.
OE180083.EPS
2.
Double-tap on
The Backlight window opens.
OE180090.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE18-9
3.
Checkmark
4.
Tap on the External Power tab.
).
).
OE180091.EPS
The External Power tab window opens.
5.
Checkmark
6.
Tap on
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE18-10
3.
Brightness setting
1.
From the
Tap on the Brightness tab.
tab.
OE180093.EPS
The Brightness tab window opens.
4.
Check to make sure that

the
is being selected in
field.
REFERENCE
If the user wants, for example, to prolong battery life, it is possible
to conserve battery consumption by changing the Brightness level
setting. However, since the window becomes difficult to see (with
reduced brightness), it is necessary for you to have the user
understand this fact.
OE180083.EPS
2.
Double-tap on
5.
Tap on
The Symbol Settings window opens.
OE180092.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE18-11
2.4.4 Setting the Connection Speed
1.
From the
ActiveSync.
The ActiveSync tab window opens.
OE180106.EPS
4.
Tap on
The PC Synchronization Option window opens.
OE180094.EPS
2.
Tap on
3.
Tap on
.
and select [Option].
OE180107.EPS
OE180095.EPS
The Option window opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
5.
Select
6.
Tap on
.
OE18-12
4.
This section describes the procedure used for registering the POCKET
id Console device ID on the CL side.
1.

For details of Service Utility mode startup, see 1. Starting/
Exiting the Service Utility in MU: Maintenance Utility.
Click
field the device ID that
you have set on the POCKET id Console side (e.g. FF001).
5.
Click
REFERENCE
2.
Enter in the
If two or more POCKET id Consoles are used at the same

institution (a maximum of 3 consoles for one CL), repeat steps 4
and 5 for the number of POCKET id Consoles to be used in the
institution.
6.
Click
7.
Click
on the
P-Console Setting window.

OE180045.EPS
3.
8.
Click
Click
The PDA DeviceID Registration window opens.
OE180046.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE18-13
2.6 Installing and Setting Up the POCKET id Console Application
2.6 Installing and Setting Up the POCKET

id Console Application
4.

The Select PDA Type window opens.
2.6.1 Installing the POCKET id Console Application
1.
2.
Place the POCKET id Console into the cradle.

OE180100.EPS
Make sure that the
icon being shown at the bottom right
of the CL desktop turns
(green).
5.

The installer opens, and the installation start window opens.
OE180102.EPS
OE180075.EPS
3.
6.
Click
The installation process starts. As the installation process

completes, the installation complete window opens.
NOTE
OE180103.EPS
7.
Click
The system returns to the IIP Setup Tool main menu.
8.

9.
OE180049.EPS
REFERENCE
The IIP Setup Tool is a utility tool for performing CL-AP installation
and the like. This tool is contained on the CD that came with the CL
as a standard (Product name: Application software, Part No.:
114Y5342001A).
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE18-14
10. Soft-reset the POCKET id Console.

REFERENCE
While holding down either of the right and left scan trigger buttons
on the POCKET id Console, press the Enter key and the Function
key at the same time, and then release these keys.
Scan trigger
Function key
(
button)
Enter key
(
button)
Scan trigger
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE180110.EPS
OE18-15
2.6.2 Setting Up the POCKET id Console Service

Utility
1.
From the
4.
Double-click
The S_UTL window opens.
Programs.
The Programs window opens.
OE180098.EPS
5.
Tap on
6.
Tap on
OE180096.EPS
2.
3.
Double-click
Open the My Device Program Files Fuji Film

P-Console System folder in this order.
The S_UTL window closes.
The contents in the folder are listed.
OE180097.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE18-16
2.6.3 Setting Configuration Items for the POCKET id

Console
3.
Set configuration items related to the POCKET id Console in the

following procedure.
1.
Under
, click
Configuration setup items concerning the POCKET id Console are

listed on the right side of the window.
Start up the Service Utility on the CL side.

2.
Configuration items for the POCKET id

OE180074.EPS
Console are listed.
4.
No.
1
Set the following configuration items concerning the

POCKET id Console.
Config name
BatteryWarning1
Warning threshold for low remaining battery

power (for the first-time warning)
Default : Warning issued when only 30/100 of
the battery power is remaining.
BatteryWarning2
Warning threshold for a low remaining battery

power (for the second-time warning)
Default : Warning issued when only 20/100 of
the battery power is remaining.
StudyFilePath
Setting of the folder in which the study

information file is to be stored.
Default : \Program Files\FujiFilm\P-Console\Job
CustomFilePath
Setting of the folder path where the window

customization setting file and display item
setting file are to be stored.
Default : \Program Files\FujiFilm\P-Console\
Custom
LoginFlag
Whether or not to display the login input

window at startup time.
Default : No
OE180072.EPS
OE180073.EPS
Meaning
: Default setting : May be changed as required.

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE18-17
NOTE
If you have set LoginFlag to ON, set the item no. 37 Enable
Security Function under SYSTEM CONFIG - IMAGE
MODALITY to Yes and define the technologist name and
password in the User Utility, and then transfer the technologist
information to the POCKET id Console.
5.
2.6.4 Starting the POCKET id Console Application

and Transferring the Configuration File
1.
From the
Programs.
The Programs window opens.

A dialog opens to confirm if you are sure to save the setup data.
6.
Click
The setup data is saved.
7.
Select Close from the Config menu.

REFERENCE
OE180096.EPS
Do not close the Service Utility and leave it up and running.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE18-18
2.
Double-click
4.
Click
NOTE
A transfer of the configuration file should be done with the POCKET
id Console up and running.
The startup window opens, and then the "Study list" window of the
POCKET id Console application opens.
OE180045.EPS
5.
Click
A dialog to confirm the execution of the file transfer opens.
OE180061.EPS
OE180059.EPS
3.
Start the Service Utility on the CL side.
6.
Click
Data transfer to the POCKET id Console starts.

When the transfer completes, a message appears informing you

of the completion.
OE180062.EPS
7.
Click
in the message dialog appearing on the
CL display.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE18-19
8.
Click
on the
P-Console Setting window.

9.
Click
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE18-20
3. Connection Verification
After starting the CL-AP, verify that study reception information can be
transmitted/received properly between the CL and the POCKET id
Console.
3.2 Transferring Study Reception

Information from the CL to the
POCKET id Console
1.
On the reception window of the CL-AP, register study

information.
For the procedure for registering study information, see the
CL Operation Manual.
3.2 Transferring Study Reception

Information from the CL to the
POCKET id Console
2.
Select the Local WL tab.
3.3 Performing a Study and Reading

a Barcode
3.4 Receiving Study Reception
Information Transmitted from the
POCKET id Console to the CL
and Checking the Result

1.
OE180104.EPS
From the
menu, select Program Fuji Film
FCR.
3.
On the CLs Local WL window, select the row of a patient

whose information you want to transfer to the POCKET id
Console.
4.
Click

In about 2 minutes, the reception window of the CL-AP opens.
and then
The study reception information is transferred to the POCKET id

Console.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE18-21
3.3 Performing a Study and Reading a Barcode
5.
Make sure that study reception information of the patient

that was selected on the CLs Local WL window has been
successfully transferred to the POCKET id Console.
3.3 Performing a Study and Reading a

Barcode
1.
On the Study list window of the POCKET id Console, tap

on the
2.
tab.
Select the patient whose information you have transferred

from the CL, and tap on
The Start study window opens.
OE180108.EPS
OE180109.EPS
3.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Aim the scan window of the POCKET id Console at the IPs

barcode.
OE18-22
3.4 Receiving Study Reception Information Transmitted from the POCKET id Console to the CL and Checking the Result
4.
Press either of the scan triggers located on the right and left
sides of the POCKET id Console. When doing so, make sure
that red scan beam focuses on the entire barcode.
Scan window
3.4 Receiving Study Reception Information

Transmitted from the POCKET id Console
to the CL and Checking the Result
1.
Scan trigger
On the reception window of the CL-AP, select the Local

WL tab.
Scan trigger
OE180066.EPS
When a barcode is read, the green scan LED lights up and a beep
sounds.
OE180104.EPS
2.
On the Local WL window of the CL-AP, select the row for

the patient whose information has been transferred to the
POCKET id Console.
3.
Click
and then
The CL now receives study reception information transmitted from

the POCKET id Console.
4.
Make sure that the study reception information of the patient

that you selected on the CLs Local WL window is received
from the POCKET id Consol, and the IP number has been
registered.
REFERENCE
If you see an IP number in the IP # column in the lower right
portion of the window, it means that barcode reading using the
POCKET id Console and data reception from the POCKET id
Console have been successfully performed.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE18-23

Back up CL setup files appropriately.
Have the following item ready for use for backup processing.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE18-24

This chapter describes the setup procedure required when using the
Synapse server Web Query function from the CL.
Prior to setup
CL requirements
Microsoft Internet Explorer: Version 5.5 or later (6.0SP1 or later is
recommended.)
NOTE
To use the Synapse server Web Query function, the CL Microsoft
Internet Explorer version must be 5.5 or later.
Synapse server
The CL user account (Administrator) must be registered beforehand
using the Synapse servers Administrator Tool. Specify Referring
Physician as the User Group for registration.
010-054-16
07.30.2006 FM4952 (ITC)

CL and the Synapse.
1. Hardware Setup
Perform the following setups.

Uninstallation of the CL-AP
Uninstallation of NetMeeting
Installation of the Synapse Client
software
Installation of the CL-AP
Installation of the Synapse Web
Query application
Setup of system environment
variables
Web Query-related config settings
Setup of the User Utility
Use the Web Query function to retrieve

images on the Synapse server.
3. Connection
Checkout
Make backup copies of Web Query

function related configuration files.
OE19-1
1. Hardware Setup
1. Hardware Setup
Network-connect the CL and the Synapse server to each other, as
illustrated below.
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX cable
TCP/IP
CL
Synapse
server
OE000062.EPS
NOTES
and Synapse server.
The cable type applicable to the CL and the Synapse server is the
IEC950/UL1950-compliant UTP cable of category 5 or higher.
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
OE19-2
2.1 Uninstalling the CL-AP

1.
Uninstall the CL-AP.
NOTES
2.2 Uninstalling NetMeeting (for Windows XP only)
Be sure to use the CL-AP CD.

Skip this step when software version V8.0 (B) or later is used.
For how to uninstall the CL-AP, see Uninstalling the CLAP in Appendix D Upgrading the AP under RI: Reinstalling
the Software.
2.3 Installing the Synapse Client Software

2.5 Installing the Synapse Web Query Application
2.6 Setting System Environment Variables
2.2 Uninstalling NetMeeting

1.
menu.
2.7 Web Query Related Configuration Settings

2.8 Setting the User Utility
Select Run from the
2.
Type in conf.exe in
and click
3.
Select Rem ote Desktop Sharing... from the Tools menu.
OE190013.EPS
The Remote Desktop Sharing Settings window opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE19-3
4.
Uncheck
.(

Install the Synapse Client software on the CL as follows.
OE190014.EPS
5.
Click
The system returns to the NetMeeting window.
6.
7.
Check to see that the NetMeeting Remote Desktop Sharing

icon (
) has disappeared from the taskbar at the lower
right of the window.
Select Exit from the Call menu.
Installation of the Synapse Client software

Security setup for Microsoft Internet Explorer
For the installation procedure and other settings of the Synapse
Client software, see the Synapse Operation Manual.
NOTE
To use the Synapse server Web Query function, the CL Microsoft
Internet Explorer version must be 5.5 or later (6.0SP1 or later is
recommended.).
REFERENCE
When installing the Synapse Client software, Microsoft Internet Explorer
is used to download files and the like. If no Microsoft Internet Explorer
windows are displayed but the internet connection wizard is displayed,
make the following settings.
For the first window
: Connection via LAN
For the second window : Connection via LAN

For the third window
: No proxy settings are required. (Remove

all checkmarks.)
For the fourth window : Do not set up mail account.

OE190015.EPS
NetMeeting shuts down and the system returns to the desktop.
8.
Restart the PC to make sure that NetMeeting is not up and

running and also that the PC operates normally.

1.
Install the CL-AP.

For how to install the CL-AP, see Installing the CL-AP in
Appendix D Upgrading the AP under RI: Reinstalling the
Software.
NOTE
Skip this step when software version V8.0 (B) or later is used.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE19-4
2.5 Installing the Synapse Web Query Application
2.5 Installing the Synapse Web Query

Application
1.
4.
5.
NOTE
OE190016.EPS
2.

A window like that shown below will open.
OE190017.EPS
3.

The SYNAPSE-WebQuery Application Install was Completed
message displays and the system returns to the IIP Setup Tool
main menu.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE19-5

1.
From the
menu, select Settings and then
Control Panel.
For Windows 2000

From the
For Windows XP
menu, select Settings and then
Control Panel.
Double-click

Double-click
Click the Advanced tab and then
OE190002.EPS
OE190001.EPS
The Environment Variables window opens.
The Environment Variables window opens.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE19-6
2.
For Windows Vista

Select a variable, Path, from the System variables field

and click
menu.
Double-click
Click
OE190003.EPS
3.
The Edit System Variable window opens.
Type in the following text in one-byte characters,

immediately after the already entered variable value
(...\BINN), as illustrated below.
;C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\System
OE190004.EPS
4.
Click
The system returns to the Environment Variables window.

OE190018.ai
5.
Click
6.
Click
The screen returns to the desktop.

010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE19-7
2.7 Web Query Related Configuration Settings
2.7 Web Query Related Configuration

Settings
1.
3.
Click the
symbol at the left of
4.
Click
A list of configuration option setup items appears in the right-hand

area of the window.
For how to start up the Service Utility function, see

2.
on the
Configuration option setup items
OE190005.EPS
00000131.EPS
5.
Double-click
6.
Click
of
and select [Yes].

.
A list of IDT/Console function setup items appears in the righthand area of the window.
00000404.EPS
OE000038.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE19-8
7.
Double-click
of
and enter the Synapse server host name

(e.g.: synapse_server).
With the use of the User Utilitys screen display customization function
(exposure parameter shortcut), add screen display icon for the Web
Query function.
NOTE
When an IP address was used to install the Synapse Client, the IP
address must be input at this step.
8.
Double-click
of
and
For details of the setup procedure, see the CR Console Operation

Manual.
Screen display customization function window

(exposure parameter shortcut)
enter the most-significant directory path targeted for search

by the Synapse server. Change this as required.
REFERENCE
%20 of ALL%20Patients stands for a one-byte space.
9.

10. Click
OE190006.EPS
Screen display sample
11. Select Close from the Config menu.


The screen returns to the desktop.
Web Query
function icon
OE190007.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE19-9
3.1 CL-AP Startup
3.2 Web Query Checkout
Use the Web Query function to search images handled by the Synapse
server.
1.
Register patient ID and exposure menu on the CLs study

reception window.
NOTE
3.1 CL-AP Startup
Data is searched for on the Synapse server based on the patient

ID, which requires the user to enter a patient ID that actually exists
on the Synapse server.
2.
Display the study window.
3.1 CL-AP Startup

1.
From the
menu, select Programs, Fuji Film and
then FCR.
OE000099.EPS
OE190008.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE19-10
3.
Click
6.
After a while, the Connect to synapse window opens.
Ensure that the Synapse Client screen appears on the Image

browse window.
Synapse Client screen
OE190011.EPS
OE190009.EPS
4.
Enter the Synapse servers user name (e.g.: synapseae) and

password (e.g.: synapseae) and click
REFERENCE
If a domain is required to log onto the Synapse server, enter a

domain name in the Domain box.
Mark the Remember my password checkbox as necessary.

When network authentication successfully confirms the user
identity, the Security Warning window opens.
OE190010.EPS
5.
Click
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE19-11
7.
Click a list item (Ec01v4.0e, Dicom... for the Patient Name

on the window above) to display a patient image.
NOTE
Back up the CL setup files.
When the Web Query function is used, there may be cases where
a patient image is not displayed though the list appears at step 6.
above. Make always sure that the patient image is displayed
appropriately.
OE190012.EPS
8.
Click
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE19-12

This chapter describes the setup procedure necessary to search for/
acquire images stored in the DICOM server, from the CL using the
DICOM Query/Retrieve function. This chapter also describes the
procedure for the setup of service classes required for the acquisition of
searched images.
In addition, this chapter explains about the setup procedure used for the
printout of acquired images from the CL to the DICOM printer using the
DICOM Print function.
(1) Connection/setup example (DICOM Query/Retrieve)
Set up the DICOM/Query/Retrieve function following the example
below.
CL setup example
HOST name
IP address
AE name (User)
Service Class
fcr-csl*
172.16.1.20*
CL- SCU-QR*
Study Root Query
Study Root Retrieve
Transfer Syntax : ImplicitVRLittleEndian
NOTE
The CR-IR348CL is abbreviated hereinafter simply as CL.
An equipment unit targeted for image search/acquisition (DICOM
server) and that targeted for image printout (DICOM printer) are
abbreviated herein as other connected equipment.
CL (This equipment)
TCP/IP
Prior to setup
CL requirements
The CL main unit (including DICOM Print/DICOM Storage) must have
been set up accordingly.
Software version required: V3.0(B) or later
Key Name
Functions Supported
CL DICOM QR key
DICOM Query/Retrieve

The main unit of other connected equipment must have been set up
accordingly.
DICOM server
SYNAPSE and other manufacturers DICOM servers should be
connectable. Connection requirements must be checked for in advance.
:
:
:
:
DICOM CR Storage
DICOM Server
(Other connected
equipment)
Setup example of other
connected equipment
HOST name
IP address
AE name (Provider)
Port number
Service Class
Transfer Syntax
:
:
:
:
:
D-Server*
172.16.1.40*
ServerDicom*
12040*
Study Root Query
Study Root Retrieve
: ImplicitVRLittleEndian
Items marked with * constitute setup examples, which need to

be changed depending on the equipment or network environment.
015039.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE20-1
(2) Connection/setup example (CR Image Storage)
REFERENCE
Set up the CR Image Storage function following the example below.

Items other than those grayed out in the illustration below should be
newly set up here.
NOTE
Searched images will be input actually by using the CR Image Storage
or Private CR Storage service class.
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\CrtLut\ReverseLut.lut
CL setup example
HOST name
IP address
AE name (Provider)
Port number
Service Class
Transfer Syntax
When inputting an image from other connected equipment, if it has

undergone image processing and LUT processing, whether to
automatically perform LUT reverse-conversion processing or perform
reverse-conversion processing on the printer side can be selected on
this equipment. To perform LUT reverse-conversion processing on the
CL, the reverse-conversion LUT file (ReverseLut.lut) that is stored in the
directory shown below will be used on this equipment. However, replace
this file for another if you wish to use a different LUT.
:
:
:
:
:
:
fcr-csl*
172.16.1.20*
CL- SCP*
12408*
CR Image Storage*
JPEGLossLess*
CL (This equipment)
TCP/IP
DICOM CR Storage
DICOM server
(Other connected
equipment)
Setup example of
HOST name
IP address
AE name (User)
Service Class
Transfer Syntax
:
:
:
:
:
D-Server*
172.16.1.40*
ServerDicom*
CR Image Storage*
JPEGLossLess*
Items marked with * constitute setup examples, which need to

be changed depending on the equipment or network environment.
015061.EPS
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
OE20-2
1. Hardware Setup
1. Hardware Setup

CL to other equipment.
1. Hardware Setup
Connect the CL to other equipment via network, as illustrated below.

FN-PS551
Perform the following setups that

enable image reprint using DICOM.
Start to install the option key, and
reinstall the AP key. Perform then
the following.
Setup of information on this
equipment (AE name, host name,
IP address, device attributes,
Service Class, and other)
Registration of information on other
connected equipment (AE name,
device attributes, host name, IP
address, port number, Service
Class, handling of high-density
images, and other)
Setup of CONNECTING
EQUIPMENT
Setup of CONFIG QR
2. Software Setup
Printer
FN-PS551
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX cable
TCP/IP
Other connected
equipment
CL
00000044.EPS
DRYPIX/FM-DPL
DRYPIX/
FM-DPL
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX cable
TCP/IP
Make sure that the CL can search

for/retrieve images from the DICOM
server and also that it can print
retrieved images to the DICOM
printer.
3. Verification

files.
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
E-i/f cable
CL
Other connected
equipment
00000044.EPS
NOTES
OE20-3
2. Software Setup

2.1.1 Installing the Image Search/Acquisition
Option Key
2.1.3 Setting the Information on This
Equipment for Image Search/
Acquisition
2.1.4 Registering the Information on Other
Connected Equipment for Image
Search/Acquisition
2.1.5 Setting the Information on This
Equipment for the DICOM CR Storage
Function
CR Storage Function
2.1.7 Setting CONNECTING EQUIPMENT
2.1.8 Setting CONFIG QR
Equipment
2.1.1 Installing the Image Search/Acquisition Option

Key
The CL DICOM QR option key must be installed as follows so that you
can search for/acquire images.
1.

In a few seconds, the installation start widow opens automatically.
NOTE
Tasks done
on the CL
2.
Click
Task done
on other
connected
equipment
00000046.EPS
3.
Click
4.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE20-4

Whenever the option key is installed, be sure to reinstall the AP key.
the AP key. The reinstallation procedure is described below.
1.

NOTE
2.
Click
2.1.3 Setting the Information on This Equipment for

Image Search/Acquisition
Set up the following information items on this equipment.
Host name and IP address
AE name (Application Entity Name)
Service Class, Role, Attribute
Other (timeout value setting, etc.)
1.
The IIP Service Utility main menu opens.

2.

main menu.
00000419.EPS
3.
Click
4.
015015.EPS
015016.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE20-5
3.
4.
Click the
mark of the
Select
7.
.
and click
the CL in the
field.
NOTES
5.
Enter the AE name (e.g.: CL-SCU-QR) that is the SCU for

A maximum of 16 one-byte characters can be entered.
Check to see that the CL host name and IP address are

displayed.
fcr-csl
CL host name
1 72 16 1 20
CL IP address
REFERENCE
You need not to set up the port number in
8.
015017.EPS
Click
NOTES
network-connected.
Select DICOM Protocol in the Add Node box.
6.
Click

015023.EPS
9.
Click
(downward arrow) in the

field to select the Service
Class (Study Root Query).
015018.EPS
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
OE20-6
10. Select
(SCU) for the Role because this equipment is

a user of the DICOM service class.
13. Click
REFERENCES
If the Service Class and Role are selected, contents of Transfer
Syntax and Attribute are determined automatically. The Transfer
Syntax is fixed at ImplicitVRLittleEndian and the Attribute is fixed
at OTHER.
SCU is the abbreviation of Service Class User.

as necessary.
015023.EPS
REFERENCE
It is not necessary to place a checkmark to
disregarded even if placed.
. It will be
14. Click

Class (Study Root Retrieve).
12. Click
15. Select
(SCU) for the Role because this equipment is

a user of the DICOM service class.
NOTE
Syntax is fixed at ImplicitVRLittleEndian and the Attribute is fixed at
OTHER.

as necessary.
015018.EPS
REFERENCE
disregarded even if placed.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
. It will be
OE20-7
17. Click

Connected Equipment for Image Search/
Acquisition
18. Click
Register the following information items on other connected equipment.

AE name (Application Entity Name ), port number
Service Class, Role, Attribute
Other (settings for the supported search key and default target for
acquisition, etc.)
1.
Click the
mark in
on the Setup
The ALL OTHER NODES list opens.
2.
015063 eps
When other connected equipment (D-Server, for example) has

already been properly registered:

saved.
20. Click

Already-registered other
connected equipment
(e.g.: D-Server)
015064.EPS
I.
On the Setup Configuration Item window, sequentially select

,
,
(host
name of the DICOM server that stores images),
and
then
(AE name of the DICOM server).
II. Click
(slightly below the center of the window).
The DICOMSetup window opens. Skip steps 3. through 5. and
continue with the processing from step 6.
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
OE20-8
If other connected equipment is unregistered:
3.
Click
Unregistered other connected

equipment (e.g.: D-Server)
015065.EPS
I.
Select
and click

015005.EPS
II. Perform the following settings on the New Node window.

Enter the host name (e.g.: D-Server) in
Enter the IP address (e.g.: 172.16.1.40) in
NOTE
Select DICOM Protocol in the Add Node field.
III. Continue with the processing from step 3.
4.
.
.

Enter the AE name (ServerDicom, for example) of other connected
.
equipment in
NOTES
Enter SynapseDicomSCP if the connected DICOM server is
SYNAPSE.
Enter the port number of other connected equipment (12040, for
example) in
NOTE
Enter 104 if other connected equipment is SYNAPSE.
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
OE20-9
5.
Click
NOTE
Set any from 1 to 8 if 1: SendConfigurationInformation is specified

for No.2 in 10. CONFIG QR of the SYSTEM CONFIG, and set
NONE for other cases.
11. Click

If other connected equipment is unregistered, the system returns
to the Application Entity List. Click
015023.EPS
6.
Click

Class (Study Root Retrieve).
7.
Select
(SCP) for the Role because other connected
equipment is a provider of the service class.
NOTE
Syntax is fixed at ImplicitVRLittleEndian and the Attribute is fixed at
OTHER.
015066.eps
12. Click
8.
To handle two-byte characters, place a checkmark to

(
).
9.
Set the DICOM inter-message timeout value

as necessary.
10. Set up
as necessary.
015023.EPS
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
OE20-10
13. Click
17. Click

Class (Study Root Query).
14. Select
(SCP) for the Role because other connected
equipment is a provider of the DICOM service class.
NOTES
If the Service Class of Study Root Query is selected, contents of
Transfer Syntax and Attribute are determined automatically. The
Transfer Syntax is fixed at ImplicitVRLittleEndian and the Attribute
is fixed at QUERY.
SCP is the abbreviation of Service Class Provider.
015073.eps
15. To handle two-byte characters, place a checkmark to

(

saved.
).
REFERENCE
be disregarded even if placed.
. It will
19. Click
16. Select the AE name of other connected equipment that is

the default destination for retrieval.
015049.EPS
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
OE20-11
2.1.5 Setting the Information on This Equipment for

the DICOM CR Storage Function
3.
Click
Set up the following information items on this equipment.

AE name (Application Entity Name), port number
Service Class, Role, Transfer Syntax, Attribute
Other (settings of timeout value, etc.)
1.
Select
on the Setup Configuration Item
window and click
2.
Check to see that the host name and IP address of the CL

are displayed.
015005.EPS
fcr-csl
CL host name
1 72 16 1 20
CL IP address
4.

Enter the AE name that is the SCP for the CL
field.
(e.g.: CL-SCP) in the

015004.EPS
NOTES
NOTES
The IP address will not be displayed properly unless the

CR-IR348CL is network-connected.
Set up an AE name that is different from the AE name (for the

FCR5000plus or DVD) of other SCP.
Select DICOM Protocol in the Add Node box.

Enter the port number of this equipment (e.g.: 12408) in the
field.
NOTE
Set up a port number paying attention not to specify the same port
number of other SCP (for the FCR5000plus or DVD). The port
number used for DVD is fixed at 104.
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
OE20-12
5.
Click
REFERENCE
SCP is the abbreviation of Service Class Provider.
8.
Click

field to select the
Transfer Syntax (JPEG Lossless, for example).

Transfer Syntax Supported (Selectable)
Service Class
015006.EPS
6.
Click


CR Image Storage
Private CR Storage
MGImageStorageForPresentation
MGImageStorageForProcessing
NOTE
Set up MGImageStorageForPresentation or MGImageStorageForProcessing only when an option has been installed.
REFERENCE
Verification included in the pull-down menu is the Service Class
used to verify connection between DICOM equipment units. For
verifying connection, Verification must be selected accordingly.
For details of connection verification, see 7. Verifying the
7.
Select
(SCP) for the Role because the CR-IR348CL is
a provider of the DICOM service class.

010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
ImplictVR
LittleEndian
ExplictVR
LittleEndian
JPEG
Lossless
CR Image Storage
Private CR Storage
Verification
NOTE
When setting up ImplicitVRLittleEndian, an image reception error
may result. For the purpose of image storage, use ExplicitVRLittleEndian or JPEGLossless.
9.
To handle two-byte characters, place a checkmark to

(
).
10. Set the DICOM inter-message timeout value (
as necessary.
11. Click
field to select the device attribute (HD_FILE).
12. Click
OE20-13
13. Click
2.
Click
(slightly below the center of the
window).
015010.EPS
015008.EPS

saved.
15. Click

Connected Equipment for the DICOM CR
Storage Function
3.
Click


CR Image Storage
Private CR Storage
NOTE
Set up MGImageStorageForPresentation or MGImageStorageForProcessing only when an option has been installed.
Set up the following information items on other connected equipment.
REFERENCE

AE name (Application Entity Name)
Service Class, Role, Transfer Syntax, Attribute
Verification included in the pull-down menu is the Service Class

used to verify connection between DICOM equipment units. For
verifying connection, Verification must be selected accordingly.
1.

select
,
,
(host name of the DICOM server that stores
images),
and then
(AE name of
the DICOM server).
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
For details of connection verification, see 7. Verifying the

OE20-14
4.
Select
(SCU) for the Role because other connected
equipment is a user of the DICOM service class.
7.
Click
REFERENCE
SCU is the abbreviation of Service Class User.
5.
Click

field to select the
Transfer Syntax (JPEG Lossless, for example).

Transfer Syntax Supported (Selectable)
Service Class
ImplictVR
LittleEndian
ExplictVR
LittleEndian
JPEG
Lossless
015011.eps
CR Image Storage
Private CR Storage
Verification
NOTE
Be sure to set up the same Transfer Syntax as that set up on the
Provider side (SCP).
8.

saved.
9.
Click
REFERENCES
You need not to place a checkmark to
It is not necessary to perform setting for
be disregarded even if set up.
6.
Click
.
. It will
field to select device attribute (OTHER) for other connected

equipment.
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
OE20-15
2.1.7 Setting CONNECTING EQUIPMENT

To search for images based on the DICOM Query protocol, perform
settings of the AE name for the server targeted for inquiry using the
CONNECTING EQUIPMENT function.
1.
Click
on the Setup
Registered equipment units are listed on the right side of the

window.
2.1.8 Setting CONFIG QR

To enable reprint of images acquired using the DICOM Query/Retrieve
function, Service Utility settings are necessary.
For the default settings, see the Table CONFIG QR-related setup data.
1.
Click the
mark in
2.
Click
on the Setup
Setup information on the CL is displayed on the right side on the

window.
OE000004.EPS
2.
Click
3.

Click
20000001.EPS
field to select function (QUERY) of other connected equipment.

Click
field to select equipment (AE name of the server targeted for

inquiry).
4.
Click
5.

saved.
6.
Click

010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
OE20-16
3.
Perform CONFIG QR-related configuration settings as

follows.
Table CONFIG QR-related setup data
No
Name
1 Retrieved
Image Viewer
Finish Mode
Selection
0 : Normal
Normal finish (finishing after clicking the finish button)
1 : Finish After Reprint
Finishes after generating reprint.
Meaning
Specifying image confirmation finish mode.
2 Reverse LUT 0 : None

For Processed
No reverse-conversion processing is performed.
Image
1 : SendConfigurationInformation
Reverse-conversion processing is performed on the
printer side after LUT type information is sent to the
printer.
2 : ApplyReverseLUT
Reverse-conversion processing is performed at the
output process.
Specifying whether or not to perform LUT

reverse-conversion processing when a
processed image is retrieved.
3 The Patient
Format
For Search
Condition
Specifying which element(s) of a patient name

is to be matched with the search conditions.
: (1) family
*
: (2) family, given
*^*
: (3) family, given, middle
*^*^*
: (4) family, given, middle, prefix
*^*^*^*
: (5) family, given, middle, prefix, suffix
*^*^*^*^*
*=*
*^*=*^*
*^*^*=*^*^*
*^*^*^*=*^*^*^*
*^*^*^*^*=*^*^*^*^* : (5) Multi-byte support to (5) above.
See 3.4 Configuration Details

1. IMAGE MODALITY under
* A patient name consists of the following five

elements.
This setup item is to determine which of those
five elements are to be matched with the
search conditions.
family, given, middle, prefix, suffix
* * appearing in the selective alternatives at
left represents one of the patient name
elements.
^shows delimitation between the elements,
and =shows that multi-byte characters can
be typed in.
: Default setting
4.

saved.
5.
Click
The system saves the setup date.

010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
OE20-17
1.

2.

010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)

Equipment
Set up DICOM Query/Retrieve in accordance with the software
specification of other connected equipment so that other connected
equipment is available for image data search/acquisition from the CL.
DICOM server
See descriptions related to DICOM Query/Retrieve included in
the manuals of the individual equipment.
OE20-18
3. Verification
After starting up the CL-AP, make sure that images on the DICOM
server can be searched for/acquired appropriately. Also make sure that
acquired images can be output from the CL to the specified printer.

1.
From the
Fuji Film and then FCR.

The CL-AP reception window opens in about two minutes.
3.2 Searching/Acquiring Images

from the DICOM Server
3.3 Checking Film Output Images
OE000099.EPS
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
OE20-19
3.2 Searching/Acquiring Images from the DICOM Server
3.2 Searching/Acquiring Images from the

DICOM Server
Search for/acquire images stored in the DICOM server and print those
images to the DICOM printer as follows.
1.
Specify search conditions to search for/acquire images from

the DICOM server.
REFERENCE
(image size: 35 35cm (14" 14"); print format: TWIN). When the default
settings are used, character strings (1) through (19) are printed out.
FUJIFILM HOSPITAL
04001676 A0000A020
(12) IP number
For details of the procedure used to search for/acquire

images, see the CL Operation Manual.
2.
Check to see that the specified image was transferred to

this equipment.
For details of the procedure used to check the transferred
image, see the CL Operation Manual.
3.3 Checking Film Output Images

1.
Generate a printout of the transferred image.

For details of how to generate printouts, see the CR Console
Operation Manual.
2.
Make sure that the specified image has been transferred

properly and output with the same patient and study
information.
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
(4) Patient ID
(5) Patient name
R->L
G 1.0G#0.7+0.50R5Q0.5
SKULL, GENERAL
L 4.0S200C 1.2 1.0AP

01
Surgi

1992 11 27 [17:43]
(10) Film mark

(7) Gender
G1.0G#0.7+0.50R5Q1.0
[F] 23
SCALE 50% RT-04

(14) Exposure menu name (17) Exposure time(11) Reduction ratio
(16) Image reversal mark (6) Exposure date
(19) Technologist's code
OE000032.EPS
For any problem that may occur, see Print Output Function in
OE20-20

Have the following item be ready for use.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE20-21
BLANK PAGE
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
OE20-22
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE20-23
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE20-24
CL+T-RIS (Ordering) [Applicable only in Japan]
CL+T-RIS (Ordering)
010-054-15
11.30.2005 FM4760 (ITC)
OE21-1
BLANK PAGE
010-054-15
11.30.2005 FM4760 (ITC)
OE21-2
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE21-3
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE21-4

Described herein is the setup procedure necessary to use the PDI
function for saving study information and image data already output to
the CL, onto the storage media (CD-R).
REFERENCE
A dedicated Viewer is stored on the storage media created using the
PDI function. This Viewer enables you to view image data on a generalpurpose PC.

Connect a CD-RW drive to the CL.
1. Hardware Setup
Perform the following PDI-related

setups.
2. Software Setup
Application installation
Configuration item settings
Institution information settings
Prior to setup
CL requirements
The PDI option key (CL DICOM PDI STORAGE) is required.
NOTES
Write study information using the PDI

function and verify if appropriately.
3. Verification
Make backup copies of configuration files.
The DICOM Media Storage function cannot be used on the CL where

the PDI function is installed.
For a clustered-connection system where study information can be
used in a shared manner, only study information and image data
stored on this CL equipment can be recorded onto the storage media
(CD-R) by means of the PDI function. When any study information
stored on other connected equipment is selected, an attempt to store
such information onto a CD-R will automatically be restricted, following
PDI wizard instructions, only to that stored on this CL equipment.
Requirements of recommended CD-RW drive

In Japan, use only the specified CD-RW drive.
Other than in Japan, use a drive built in the CL.
Requirements to add the PDI function under Windows XP

To newly add the PDI function under Windows XP, upgrade the software
version to V7.1(B) so that such function can be installed appropriately.
For details of the software version upgrade procedure, see
Appendix D Upgrading the AP under RI: Reinstalling the Software.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE22-1
1. Hardware Setup
1. Hardware Setup
Connect a CD-RW drive to the CL, as illustrated below.
TCP/IP
RU
CL
CD-RW drive
USB cable
OE210000.EPS
NOTE
Do not install the driver supplied with the CD-RW drive.
Other than in Japan, use a drive built in the CL.
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
OE22-2
2.1 Installing the PDI Application
2. Software Setup

NOTE
When the DICOM Media Storage function is used, configuration settings
and option key must be removed properly.
2.2 Installing the Option Key

1.

NOTE
2.4 Starting the Service Utility

2.5 Setting the Configuration Items

2.6 Exiting the Service Utility
2.7 Editing the Institution Information
OE220001.EPS
2.
Type in 50 and pres the <Enter> key.

A menu opens to show listing of languages that can be installed.
OE220002.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE22-3
3.
Select a desired language and press the <Enter> key.

Installation processing will start. After completion of the installation
processing, the system soon returns to the IIP Setup Tool main
menu window.
4.

1.
In a few seconds, the installation start window opens automatically.
NOTE
5.
Insert the PDI Option Key CD into the PC.

OE220003.EPS
2.

OE220021.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE22-4
3.
Select the type of an installed OS and then press the

<Enter> key.
5.
Click
Installation processing will start. After completion of the installation

processing, a window like that shown below opens.
OE220005.EPS
NOTE
When the OS installed is Windows XP, a window like that shown
below opens.
OE220022.ai
NOTE
When the OS used is Windows Vista, a window like that shown
below opens.
OE220004.EPS
OE220023.ai
Proceed straight to step 5.
4.
Click [Complete] to restart the PC.
Select a locale and press the <Enter> key.

6.

7.
8.
Restart the PC.
OE220004.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE22-5

1.

NOTE

1.
From the

2.

the window.

2.
Click
Click
Click the upper left and then the upper right corner.
A window opens to indicate completion of the reinstallation

processing.
3.
MU000031.EPS
4.
MU000035.EPS
NOTE
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE22-6
REFERENCE
3-second period allowing the AP to have started up unintentionally,
perform the following steps to start the Service Utility.
1. To shut down the AP, select Shut Down on the
menu.
window.
3. From the [Start] menu, sequentially select Programs, Fuji
Film, and FCR.
3.

Perform settings for the PDI-related configuration items, as follows.
1.

window.
window opens.
OE210004.EPS
OE210003.EPS
OE210005.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE22-7
2.
Click
on the window that opens.

No.
The IDT/Console function setup items appear in the right-hand

area of the window.
Name
Selection
171 PDI Transfer 0 : Explicit VR Little

Syntax
Endian
1 : Jpeg Lossless
Meaning
Specifying a DICOM
contents transfer syntax
* Select 0:Explicit VR
Little Endian if
complied with IHE.
4.
Select [Save] from the Config menu.

saved.
5.
Click

OE210006.EPS
3.
Perform settings for the following PDI-related configuration

items.
No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
167 PDI Drive

Letter
Example: E
Specifying drive letter of

a connected CD-RW
drive.
168 PDI Use

CrtLut
A maximum of 64 singlebyte characters

C:\Program Files\
FujiFilm\IIP\CrtLut\
PDI.lut
Specifying SoftcopyLUT
applied to a processed
image.
169 PDI Image

Density
0 : ST
1 : HQ
Specifying pixel density

of a stored image.
170 PDI Use

Multibyte
Yes
Included.
No
Not included.
Specifying whether or
not to include multi-byte
information in the
DICOM contents.
* Perform the necessary

setting adding
extension .lut.

010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE22-8

1.
Select [Close] from the Config menu on the Setup

2.

2.7 Editing the Institution Information

This section describes the procedure when editing the README.txt file
created and stored onto a CD-R using the PDI function, following
information specific to the institution.
1.
Select Run from the
2.
Enter C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\PDIMaster\README.txt

and click
.
menu.
OE220006.EPS
The README.txt file opens.
3.
I.
II.
OE220007.EPS
I.
Edit details of 2. Facility at which the disk was created following

the institution-specific information.
II. Edit details of 3. Application with which the disk was created
following the CL software version.
4.
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Store edited data accordingly and close the README.txt file.
OE22-9
3. Verification
3.2 Writing study information using the
PDI function

1.
From the
Fuji Film, and FCR.

In about 2 minutes, the CL-AP reception window opens.
3.3 Verifying the created CD-R
OE000099.EPS
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE22-10
3.2 Writing Study Information Using the PDI Function
3.
3.2 Writing Study Information Using

the PDI Function
1.
Check to see that the selected study information is

displayed properly and click
Select the Delivered tab.
OE220008.EPS
2.
Select study information you want to write onto CD-R and

click
OE220009.EPS
A window opens prompting you to insert a CD-R.
4.
Set a blank CD-R into the PC.
OE220010.EPS
The PDI Wizard window opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE22-11
3.3 Verifying the Created CD-R
5.
Click
Use the procedure below to verify the data written onto the CD-R
created as directed in 3.2 Writing Study Information Using the PDI
Function, above, by inserting it into a PC other than the CL.
1.
Set the CD-R created by using the PDI function into the PC
other than the CL.
2.
Start up Explorer and select drive D.

Contents of the CD-R will be displayed.
3.
Double-click INDEX.HTM.
OE220011.EPS
When data writing is complete, a window like that shown below

opens.
OE220012.EPS
OE220013.EPS
6.
Click
7.
Remove the CD-R from the PC.
The Portable Data for Image window opens.
4.
Click [View Image] on the window that opens.
OE220014.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE22-12
8.
Check to see that the specified image data is displayed

correctly on the Viewer window.
OE220015.EPS
5.
Click
The Download complete window opens.
OE220018.EPS
9.
Click
OE220016.EPS
6.
Click
The system returns to the Portable Data for Image window.
The FUJIFILM DICOM MEDIA Viewer window opens.
7.
Select a patients name and click
OE220017.EPS
The Viewer window opens.

010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE22-13
10. Click [About this disk].
Make a backup copy of the CL setup file.

To make a backup copy, have the following item on hand.
OE220019.EPS
The README.TXT window opens.
OE220020.EPS
11. Check to see that what is displayed on the README.TXT

window is as edited in 2.7 Editing the Institution
Information.
12. Click
to close the README.TXT window.
13. Remove the CD-R from the PC.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE22-14
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE22-15
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE22-16

This chapter describes the procedure used to perform settings
necessary for acquisition of X-ray radiation information (dose-area
product information) when an X-ray image is taken, with a dose-area
product meter (hereinafter referred simply to as the DAP) connected
properly to the CL.
The X-ray radiation information (dose-area product information) thus
acquired is displayed in the study information list window on the study
execution screen.
Prior to setup

Connect a DAP to the CL.
1. Hardware Setup
Perform DAP-related settings.
2. Software Setup
Verify CL connection to the DAP and

reception of dose-area product
information.
3. Verification
Make backup copies of configuration files.
CL requirements
Connected DAP
For direct connection
Connect a VacuDAP of VacuTEC directly to a serial port of the PC.
For indirect connection
Connect a VacuDAP of VacuTEC and an X-CON to a conversion box
(Livingstons CR BOX) and then connect the conversion box to the
PSI04A board on the CL.
For the CR-IR371/372, connect a VacuDAP of VacuTEC to an X-CON
and then connect the X-CON to the PSI04A board on the CL.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
OE23-1
1. Hardware Setup
1.
Hardware Setup

When a conversion box is used
Serial connecter
Connect a DAP to the CL, as illustrated below.
TCP/IP

When no X-CON is connected
TCP/IP
RU
RU
CL
Display
Unit
CL
X-CON
DAP
DAP
OE230003.ai
OE230001.ai
When a DAP and an X-CON are connected
For details on the X-CON setting procedure, see OE12: CL+XRay Controller (Serial Connection) under OE: Connecting the
CL to Other Equipment.
When a CR-IR371/372 is connected
Serial connecter
TCP/IP
Conversion
box
Serial connecter
TCP/IP
X-CON
RU
CL
Display
Unit
RU
DAP
X-CON
DAP
OE230004.ai
OE230002.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
CL
OE23-2
2. Software Setup

1.
From the

2.

the window.
Click the upper left and then the upper right corner.
MU000031.EPS
MU000035.EPS
REFERENCE
If you cannot complete step 2. from the initial window within a 3-second
period allowing the AP to have started up unintentionally, perform the
following steps to start the Service Utility.
1. To shut down the AP, select Shut Down on the
menu.
window.
3. From the [Start] menu, sequentially select Programs, Fuji Film,
and FCR.
4. When the initial window opens, sequentially click its upper left and
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
OE23-3
3.
window opens.
OE210003.EPS
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
OE23-4

Perform settings for the DAP-related configuration items, as follows.
1.

window.
4.
Click
The IDT/Console function setup items appear in the right-hand

area of the window.
OE210006.EPS
OE210004.EPS
OE210005.EPS
2.
Click
on the window that opens.
The configuration option setup items appear in the right-hand area

of the window.
3.

No.
13
Name
Meaning
Enable Connecting Specifying whether or not to connect CL

DAP Directly
directly to a DAP.
Yes
Connect directly to a DAP.
No [default]
Not to connect directly to a DAP.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
OE23-5
5.
Perform settings for the following DAP-related configuration

items.
No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
177 DAP Serial_ 0:none

TX Parity
1:odd
2:even
Specifying a DAP serial

transfer parity.
178 DAP Serial_ 0 to 32

( 0)
TX Control
por
Specifying a DAP serial

transfer control port
number.
(0: Not used.)
179 DAP
Message
Trial Count
Specifying a DAP
message transfer trial
count.
180 DAP
Address
Specifying a DAP
address character while
a DAP is connected.
(Specify a capital
alphanumeric.)
181 Wait Time

for
Response.
From DAP
1 to 30
( 1)
Specifying a time to wait

(in seconds) until a
response is received
after a related command
was transferred to the
DAP.
182 Dap Status

Display
Strings
A maximum of 5 onebyte characters

( DAP)
Specifying a caption
used to indicate a
related status while a
DAP is connected.
6.
Select [Save] from the Config menu.

saved.
7.
Click

For details on indirect connection, see 2.5 Setting
Configuration for the X-CON in OE12: CL+X-Ray Controller
(Serial Connection) under OE: Connecting the CL to Other
Equipment.
NOTE
Select 0: Old for No. 108 Xcon Format Type.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE23-6

1.
Select [Close] from the Config menu on the Setup

2.
Click [Exit Service Utility] on the window that opens.

010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
OE23-7
3. Verification
Verify connection to a DAP, as follows.

1.
From the

The CL opening window will open.
The CL-AP reception window opens in about two minutes.
3.2 Verifying Connection to a DAP

3.3 Verifying Reception of Dose-area
Product Information
OE230005.ai
3.2 Verifying Connection to a DAP

For whether a DAP is connected to the CL or not, look into the error
message box at the upper-right corner of the window.
When in online status
No error message box opens or no DAP Offline icon

appears in the box that opens.
When in offline status
The DAP Offline icon appears in the box.

OE230006.ai
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
OE23-8
3.3 Verifying Reception of Dose-area Product Information
3.3 Verifying Reception of Dose-area

Product Information
1.
Register any study menu, and then perform exposure to

read an image.
NOTE
When a cassette is used to perform exposure, IP registration is
needed after a study menu was registered.
2.
Check the X-ray dose value shown on the display unit.
3.
On the CLs study execution screen, display the study

information list window to check the following values.
Total dose-area product of a study
Image-area dose product
Exposure time (for each image)
4.
Display the CLs study reception screen.
5.
Make sure that the data appearing on the display unit is

reset appropriately.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
OE23-9
3.4 Verifying Transfer of Dose-area Product Information
3.4 Verifying Transfer of Dose-area

Product Information
2.

For details on the DICOM Storage function setup procedure,
see OE3: CL+HI-C655/QA-WS (DICOM CR Storage) and
OE4: CL+Other (DICOM CR Storage: Transfer of Processed
Images) under OE: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment.
3.4.1 When DICOM PPS Connection is Enabled
1.
For each of the image information items included in the

received study, check the following values.
On the RIS system, select a study for which the reception of

dose-area product information was definitely confirmed.
NOTE
Select the study that was checked for in 3.3 Verifying Reception of
Dose-area Product Information above.
2.
1.
With regard to the received study, check the following of the

actual measurement values.
Total dose-area product of a study
For details on the DICOM PPS function setup procedure, see
OE8: CL+RIS (DICOM MWM/DICOM PPS) under
OE: Connecting the CL to Other Equipment.
3.4.2 When DICOM Storage Connection is Enabled
1.
3.4.3 When DICOM Print Connection is Enabled
Transfer a study for which the reception of dose-area

product information was definitely confirmed to a DICOM
Storage device.
NOTE
Output a study for which the reception of dose-area product

information was definitely confirmed to a DICOM Printer
device.
NOTE
2.
Make sure that dose-area product information (for each

image) is printed on the output film.
NOTE
As a standard function, no dose-area product information is printed
on output film. Edit the FilmStrFm.env file so that necessary
settings are performed to print dose-area product information on
output film properly.
For how to edit the FilmStrFm.env file, see FR1: Print Output
Function under FR: Function-specific Reference.
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
OE23-10

Have the following item be ready for use.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE23-11
BLANK PAGE
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
OE23-12

Setting procedure to display the display image read by CL and its
overlay item on the 2nd monitor are described. The existent monitor
(hereinafter called 1st monitor) is used as a regular exposure console.
Prior to setup
CL requirements
Precise enlargement function option key (CR PRECISE
ENLARGEMENT) is required.
The OS used on the PC is Windows XP SP2 or later or Windows Vista.
The PC memory is 2GB or more. (If not sufficient, expand it as
appropriate.)
The 2nd monitor has been connected.
For the detailed 2nd monitor connection procedure, see
Appendix 11 Connecting the 2nd Monitor under Appx IN:
Installation Appendix.
NOTE
This function is not supported on the PC models listed below, because
memory expansion is not possible on them.
OptiPlex GX50, 60, 150, 260, 270

Install the Precise enlargement
software, make settings for the firewall,
and install the option key and reinstall
the AP key, and then perform the
following settings.
1. Software Setup
Setting the OS
Setting the User Utility of Precise
enlargement software
Setting the Service Utility of Precise
enlargement software
Confirm that the image is displayed
on the 2nd monitor.
2. Confirming the
Settings
Back up the settings.
3. Backup/Restore
Procedure to be performed if necessary

When restoring the setting files related to Precise enlargement
function.
3. Backup/Restore
When image display to the 2nd monitor is set to OFF.

4. Disabling the Precise Enlargement Function
When turning ON again the 2nd monitor.

5. Enabling the Precise Enlargement Function
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE24-1
1. Software Setup
1. Software Setup
Set up the CL software following the flow chart below.
1.1 Installing the Precise Enlargement Function Software
1.2 Setting the Firewall
1.3 Installing the Precise Enlargement Function Option Key
1.5 Setting the System
1.5.2 Setting the Service Utility
1.5.3 Setting the User Utility
1.5.4 Setting the Overlay Item
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE24-2
1.1 Installing the Precise Enlargement

Function Software
3.
1.1.1 For Software V7.1
4.
NOTE
2.
NOTE
Double-click directly the execution file (Setup.exe) in the CD when
the window does not display automatically.
5.
Windows starts up.

Insert the Precise enlargement function installation CD

(114Y5342318A00) into the PC.
Perform steps 1. through 11. when the OS used is Windows XP SP2 or

earlier.
Performing steps 1. through 11. is not necessary when the OS used is
Windows XP SP3 or Windows Vista. Proceed straight to step 12.
1.
Click [Windows Installer 3.1 Redistributable(v2)].

OE240027.ai
MU000031.EPS
NOTE
REFERENCE
Installation is not required when the following window opens. Click
No and proceed to Step 12.
MU000035.EPS
OE240025.ai
opens.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE24-3
6.
Click
8.
The License Agreement window opens.
Click
NOTE
When a window like that shown below opens after
is clicked at step above, click
on the window that
opens to proceed to the next step.

OE240026.ai
7.
Select
, click
OE240029.ai
After installation completed, the following window opens.
OE240030.ai
OE240028.ai
9.
Click
OE240031.ai
10. Click
11. Turn OFF the power to the PC.

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE24-4
12. Turn ON the PC power.
16. Click [Visual C++ 2008 SP1 Redistributable Package].
Windows starts up.

OE240032.ai
REFERENCE
MU000031.EPS
NOTE


OE240033.ai

MU000035.EPS
opens.

OE240034.ai
15. Insert the Precise enlargement function installation CD

(114Y5342318A00) into the PC.
17. Click
NOTE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE240035.ai
OE24-5
18. Click
20. Click
The system returns to the Install Echo application screen

window.
21. Click
19. Click [.NET Framework 3.5 Service Pack 1].
22. Click [Echo Application].
OE240036.ai
REFERENCE
OE240039.ai
The Welcome to the Echo Setup Wizard window opens.
OE240038.ai
OE240040.ai
23. Click
The Select information window opens.
OE240037.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE24-6
24. Make the following settings.
26. Click
NOTE
Perform reinstallation from the step 8 after restarting PC when
[.NET Framework 3.5] is not installed message displayed.
I.
II.
OE240041.ai
I.
Select a language.
After installation completed, the Windows Security Alert window

opens.
27. Click [Unblock].

NOTE
Select the same language as you selected at the SYSTEM
CONFIG - 7. Language Setup for Screen Message in the Service
Utility.
II. Select the type of added monitor (2nd monitor) for image
confirmation.
OE240043.ai
REFERENCE
After installation completed, the monitor type can be changed by
clicking [Change Monitor] in the Install Echo application screen
window.
25. Click
28. Click
The system returns to the Install Echo application screen

window.
29. Click [Exit].
OE240042.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE24-7
4.
1.1.2 For Software V8.0 or Later
1.
The Install Precise enlargement function screen window opens.
Windows starts up.

2.
Insert the Precise enlargement function installation CD

(114Y5342318A01) into the PC.
NOTE

5.
Click [Precise enlargement function].
MU000031.EPS
NOTE
.
AWS823070.ai
REFERENCE
OK and proceed to Step 6.
MU000035.EPS
opens.
3.

or
AWS825002.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE24-8
II. Select the type of added monitor (2nd monitor) for image
confirmation.
The Welcome to the Precise enlargement function Setup Wizard

window opens.
REFERENCE
After installation completed, the monitor type can be changed by
clicking [Change Monitor] in the Install Echo application screen
window.
8.
Click
AWS823069.ai
6.
AWS823067.ai
Click
The Please select information to setup window opens.
7.
9.
Click
I
II
AWS825004.ai
I.
Select a language.
NOTE
Select the same language as you selected at the SYSTEM
CONFIG - 7. Language Setup for Screen Message in the Service
Utility.
AWS823068.ai
10. Click
The system returns to the Install Precise enlargement function

screen window.
11. Click [Exit].

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE24-9

1.
Open the explorer and double-click the FirewallSetting.bat

directly below the Precise enlargement function installation
CD.
OE240044.ai
2.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE24-10
1.3 Installing the Precise Enlargement

Function Option Key
1.
Open the explorer and double-click the OptionCooper_

Echo.exe directly below the Precise enlargement function
installation CD.

Be sure to reinstall the AP key when you installed the option key. Use
the AP key CD to reinstall the AP key. Installation procedures are shown
below.
1.
The installation start window opens.

NOTE
Double-click directly the execution file (Filename extension : exe) in
the CD when the window does not display automatically.
OE240045.ai
2.
Click
2.
Click
The window to express the completion of installation opens.
3.
Click

OE240046.ai
3.
Click
4.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
4.
OE24-11
3.

NOTE
Select Echo and make the following settings according to

the request from the institution.
I.
II.
III.
IV.
The Precise enlargement function has the dedicated Service Utility

and User Utility.
Note that Service Utility and User Utility for CL are different from those
of the Precise enlargement function.
OE240047.ai
No.
Make settings so that the taskbar is not displayed at the time of starting
the User Utility for Precise enlargement function.
1.
Press <Windows> key and right-click on the displayed

taskbar, then select Properties.
The Taskbar and [Start] Menu Properties window opens.
2.
1.
menu and press
<Enter> key.
The Service Utility window for the linking application opens.
2.
Remarks
MS UI Gothic
Select the display font
Microsoft Sans Serif type for overlay item that
is displayed on the
image confirmation
window.
Select the image density
to display. HQ image
displayed as STD image
if Standard is selected.
III
Zoom ratio for 10

a click (%)
(5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30,
40, 50)
Zoom/reduction ratio for

image Zoom/image
reduction (%)
IV
Maximum
500
zoom ratio (%) (200, 300, 400, 500)
Maximum zoom ratio for

image magnification (%)
: Settings for factory shipment
Input C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Cooper\System\

ServiceUtility.exe into the Start Searching (Run... for
Windows XP) column in the
Font Name of
Overlay
Option
Image Density Highest density

used to display Standard density
II
Remove the check mark from the Keep the taskbar on top
of other windows.
Item Name
Select System and make sure that Allow switch app by

menu is set to [No].
4.
Click
The Service Utility window closes.
5.
Restart the PC.
6.
Confirm that the 2nd monitor starts up with gray background

when opening window for CL displayed.
NOTE
When [No] is not set for Allow switch app by menu, be sure to set
[No].
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE24-12
1.5.3 Setting the User Utility
No.
1.
Right-click on the 2nd monitor screen and select the User

Utility while the patient information input window for CL-AP
is displayed.
Option
II
Loupe area
size
Loupe area size

Small
(small, medium, large)
III
Magnification
ratio of Loupe
(%)
300
(200, 300, 400, 500)
IV
Center point of Position of mouse

scaling
cursor
Center of display
area
Overlay Item
Setting
VI
Version
information
AWS823031.ai
The User Utility window for Precise enlargement function opens.
2.
Make the following settings according to the request for the

institution.
3.
Remarks
Display size of Full-scale display

Initial Image
at all the time.
Use Fit in Window
function only to the
images larger than
the image display
area.
Fit in Window at
all the time.
NOTE
The User Utility for Precise enlargement function should be started
while CL-AP is running.
Item Name
Click
Select the initial display

settings optionally when
displayed CL image on
the image confirmation
window.
Zoom ratio for displayed

images in the Loupe
area.
Determines the center
coordinate of
magnification reduction
processing in image
magnification/reduction
mode.
Refer to
1.5.4 Setting the
Overlay Item
Displays the version of
Precise enlargement
function
I
II
III
IV
V
VI
OE240048.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE24-13
1.5.4 Setting the Overlay Item
1.
III. Display items for overlay item

Set the display items for overlay item in the four corners of
display area (top left, top right, bottom left, bottom right) on the
2nd monitor.
The displayable overlay item is shown below.
Click
on the User Utility
window for Precise enlargement function.
The Additional Information Settings window opens.
2.
Overlay item Patient ID, Patient's Name, Kanji Patient's Name, Sex,
for patient
Patient's Bitrth Date, Patient's Age

I.
Order
infomation
II.
Overlay item Menu Name, S/L, Pixel Spacing, kVp, X-ray Tube
for image
Current, Exposure Time, Exposure, Dose Area Product,
Target/Filter, Grid, Focus, Thickness, Comp Force,
Angle, AEC, VCS+VMCS, AGD, ESE, Laterality, Patient
Orientation, GA/GS
Display
attribute
infomation
III.
OE240049.ai
I.
Accession Number, Acquisition Date, Acquisition Time
Font size
Set the font size of overlay item. Select either 8, 9, 10, 11, 12,
14, 16, 18, 20, 22 (default), 24, 26, 28, 36, or 48.
II. Font color
Set the display font colors of overlay item. Select either Gray
(default), Cyan, Magenta, or Yellow.
Magnification Ratio
Maximum of 10 items for each display area can be set.

Be able to set a overlay item can be see to display only in one corner.
User can edit the Prefix optionally for the overlay item item list. The
(item name) : is set for the factory default setting. If the item name
does not need to be displayed, leave the Prefix blank, and only item
value will be displayed.
The Suffix in the overlay item list cannot be edited.
To change the display position of an item, cancel the setting for the
item once; and then, make the setting for the item again.
Setting method
1.
Select the items to be displayed from the right-side of

overlay item lists.
2.
Select the position (Top-left, Top-right, Bottom-left, Bottomright) to be displayed from the left-side of display area.
3.
Click
Item name is displayed in the selected position.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE24-14
Method for cancelling the settings
1.
Select the items to be hidden from the left-side display area.
2.
Click
Item name is deleted from the selected position.
REFERENCE
Overlay items set as the factory default settings are shown below.
Cancel unnecessary setting items.
Top-left
Patient ID
Patients Name
Patients Sex
Patients Birth Date
Patients Age
Bottom-left
Pixel Spacing
Magnification Ratio
S/L
GA/GS
Top-right
Accession Number
Acquisition Date
Acquisition Time
Menu Name
Laterality
Patient Orientation (Row/Column)
VCS+VMCS
Bottom-right
X-ray Tube Current
Exposure Time
kVp
Exposure
Target/Filter
Grid
Focus
AEC
ESE
Image Area Dose Product
NOTE
Cancel the Focus item.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE24-15
2.2 Confirming the Image Display
2. Confirming the Settings
2.2 Confirming the Image Display
Start up the CL-AP and confirm displayed images.

2.2 Confirming Image Display
1.
Start the QA processing function on read images.
2.
Confirm that the images are displayed on the 2nd monitor,

and also that information set in 1.5.4 Setting the Overlay
Item is displayed correctly.

1.
From the
menu, sequentially select All Programs,
Fuji Film and FCR.

OE000099.EPS
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE24-16
3.2 For Software V8.0 or Later
3. Backup/Restore
The procedures to back up/restore the setting values for the Precise
enlargement function are described.

3.2.1 Backup
1.
3.1 For Software V7.1

Backup
1.
Open Windows Explorer, and back up the Config folder in

C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Cooper to the media.
Select the
menu and then click User Utility.
The User Utility main menu window opens.
2.
Click [Ascent View].

The Ascent View window opens.
3.
Click the [Backup].
Restore
1.
Open Windows Explorer on the PC to be restored, and

overwrite the backed up Config folder to the Config folder in
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Cooper.
AWS825011.ai
4.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Insert the media for backup into the PC.
OE24-17
5.
After backup completed, the following window opens.
Select the targeted backup drive/folder and click [OK].
AWS825013.ai
6.
Click [OK].
7.
AWS825010.ai
CAUTION
When the [Copy File] window opens, do not select [Copy, but keep
both files].
AWS825014.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE24-18
5.
3.2.2 Restore
CAUTION
Select the drive/folder in which the backup data is stored,

and then click [OK].
Data cannot be restored If the version of the installed software and

the version of software at the time of creating data to be restored
are different with each other.
See the version information of backup data (Version.xml) to
restore, and confirm that the versions are the same before
restoring.
1.
Select the
2.
AWS825010.ai
After restoring processing is completed, the following window

opens.
3.
Click [Restore].
AWS825016.ai
AWS825012.ai
The Folder Selection window opens.
4.
6.
Click [OK].
7.
Insert the media for backup into the PC.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE24-19
4. Disabling the Precise Enlargement Function
4. Disabling the Precise

Enlargement Function
4.
Perform the following procedure when turning the Precise enlargement

function OFF and using only the CL in the case such as the 2nd monitor
becoming defective.
1.
Confirm that no error is displayed.

When an error occurred, perform steps 1 through 3 again,
and correct the specified error appropriately. (In the window
below, it is indicated that " corresponding to the 29th
character on the 4th line is illegal. To be more specific, there
is no " that is paired with the other.)
Input the following in the Start Searching column (Run...

for Windows XP) from the
menu and press the
<Enter> key.
notepad C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Cooper\System\Version.xml
Version.xml opens in Note Pad.
2.
AWS823066.ai
Correct the following parts and save.

Before correction
<ExecutableFile> C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Cooper\System\Echo.
exe</ExecutableFile>
After correction (Add Managed=False)
<ExecutableFile Managed=False> C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\
Cooper\System\Echo.exe</ExecutableFile>
3.
5.
Restart the PC.
6.
Confirm that the Precise enlargement function does not

start up.

menu and press the
<Enter> key.
explorer C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Cooper\System\Version.xml
Version.xml opens in the browser.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE24-20
5. Enabling the Precise Enlargement Function
5. Enabling the Precise

Enlargement Function
Perform the following procedure when turning the Precise enlargement
function ON after it was turned OFF following the procedure directed in
4. Disabling the Precise Enlargement Function.
1.

menu and press the
<Enter> key.
notepad C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Cooper\System\Version.xml
Version.xml opens in Note Pad.
2. Correct the following parts and save.

Before correction
<ExecutableFile Managed="False"> C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\

Cooper\System\Echo.exe</ExecutableFile>
After correction (Delete Managed=False)

<ExecutableFile> C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Cooper\System\Echo.
exe</ExecutableFile>
3.

menu and press the
<Enter> key.
explorer C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Cooper\System\Version.xml
Version.xml opens in browser.
4.
Confirm that no error is displayed.
5.
Restart the PC.
6.
Confirm that the Precise enlargement function starts up.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE24-21
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE24-22
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE24-23
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE24-24
QA ROI Measurement
QA ROI Measurement
Described herein are the procedures to use the QA ROI Measurement
function to set up an ROI on an image displayed on the CL and to
display width and height of the displayed ROI, as well as the average
pixel value, median pixel value, standard deviation and area.
Prior to setup
CL requirements
ROI option key (CR QA ROI MEASUREMENT) is requiredey.
The OS used on the PC is Windows XP SP2 or later or Windows Vista.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)

Install the QA ROI Measurement
software, set up the firewall, install the
option key and reinstall the AP key.
Perform then the following.
1. Software Setup
Setup of the Service Utility for the QA

ROI Measurement software
Settings necessary for the
discontinued monitor
Create an exposure menu used for
the QA ROI Measurement.
2. Creating an
Exposure Menu for QA
ROI Measurement
Confirm that the QA ROI information

is displayed properly.
3. Confirming the
Settings
Back up the settings.
4. Backup/Restore
OE25-1
1.1 Installing the QA ROI Measurement Software
1. Software Setup
Set up the CL software following the flow chart shown below.
1.1 Installing the QA ROI Measurement

Software
1.

The PC starts up.
2.


1.5.2 Settings Necessary for the Discontinued
Monitor
MU000031.EPS
NOTE
MU000035.EPS
opens.
3.

010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE25-2
4.
The Welcome to the QA ROI Measurement Setup Wizard

window opens.
Insert the QA ROI Measurement Softeware installation CD

(114Y5342319A00) into the PC.
The Install QA ROI Measurement screen window opens.
NOTE
5.
Click [QA ROI Measurement].
AWS824019.ai
6.
Click
The Please select information to setup window opens.
AWS824020.ai
NOTE
No and proceed to step 6.
or
AWS825002.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE25-3
7.
Make the following settings on the window that opens.
9.
Click
I
II
AWS825004.ai
I.
Select a language.
AWS824022.ai
NOTE
Select the same language as that you selected at SYSTEM
CONFIG 7. Language Setup for Screen Message in the
Service Utility.
II. Select the type of Primary monitor (1st monitor) for image
confirmation.
REFERENCE
After installation is completed, the monitor type can be changed by
clicking [Change Monitor] in the Install QA ROI Measurement
screen window.
8.
Click
10. Click
The system returns to the Install QA ROI Measurement screen

window.
11. Click [Exit].

AWS824023.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE25-4

1.
Open Explorer and double-click FirewallSetting_Roi.bat

directly below the QA ROI Measurement software installation
CD.
1.
After completion of the installation processing, the Press any key

to continue. window opens.
Open Explorer and double-click OptionCooper_Roi.exe

directly below the QA ROI Measurement software installation
CD.
The installation start window opens.
AWS823040.ai
AWS824021.ai
2.
2.
Click
3.
Click
The system returns to desktop screen.
4.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE25-5

below.
1.

NOTE
The QA ROI Measurement function has the dedicated Service Utility
and User Utility.
Note that Service Utility and User Utility for CL are different from those
of the QA ROI Measurement software.
NOTE
Double-click directly the execution file (Filename extension : exe) in
the CD when the window does not display automatically.
1.
Input C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Cooper\System\

ServiceUtility.exe into the Start Searching column in the
menu and press the <Enter> key.
2.
Click
3.
Click
4.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
The Service Utility window for the linking application opens.
2.
Select ROI and then select [HQ Preferred] from the Image
Type pull-down menu that opens.
3.
Click
The Service Utility window closes.
4.
Restart the PC.
OE25-6
1.5.2 Settings Necessary for the Discontinued Monitor
3.
When a discontinued monitor is used, there may be cases where the

measurement results become illegal because of improperly determined
monitor information.
Determine monitor information properly observing the procedure
described below.
NOTE
Monitor models other than those shown in the table below require
settings specific to discontinued monitors.
Resolution
Monochrome/Color
Monitor Model
Copy the ENV file used by the CL-AP, as checked for at step 1.
above.
NOTE
Pay due attention not to move or delete the ENV file from the C:\
Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Lut folder.
4.
Paste the copied ENV file on to the C:\Program Files\

FujiFilm\Cooper\Screen\Monitor folder.
5.
Open the C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Cooper\Screen\Monitor\

MonitorDef.xml folder.
6.
1024768
Color
FlexScan L362T
12801024
Color
Flex Scan L560T-C
16001200
Monochrome
RadiForce GS220
20481536
Color
RadiForce RX320
Use the Notepad capability to add monitor information

checked for at step 1. above to the monitor setup file,
MonitorDef.xml.
20481536
Monochrome
RadiForce GS310
I.
1.
Copy the <Monitor Name=.. (omitted) ../> line and paste it on to

the last line of the file.
II. Correct the following portion of the pasted line to what was
checked for at step 1.

<Monitor Name = (monitor name checked for at step 1.)
PixelPitch = (pixel pitch checked for at step 1.) LutFileName =
C:\Program Files\Fujifilm\Cooper\Screen\Monitor\(ENV filename
checked for at step 1.)/>
Check the used monitor for the following items.

Monitor name
Pixel pitch (unit: mm)
ENV filename used by the CL-AP
NOTES
The Monitor name is to be used as the filename or folder name
at subsequent steps. Therefore, assign a simple name that can
be used as a filename.
Example: NANAO_L560T-C
7.
Open the C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\Cooper\Screen\

Manager folder.
When the ENV filename for a certain monitor is unknown, use the
file below to confirm it.
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Lut\lut.txt
2.
Open the C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\Lut folder.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE25-7
1.5 System Settings
8.
Copy the entire monitor name folder of the same

resolutions and paste it on to the same folder.
NOTE
The table below shows folders of the monitor name folder of the
same resolutions.
Copy and paste a folder of the resolution same as that of the
monitor to be set up (regardless of whether it is monochrome or
color).
Monitor Name Folder
Resolution
Monochrome/Color
NANAO_L362T
1024x768
Color
NANAO_L560T-C
1280x1024
Color
NANAO_GS220
1600x1200
Monochrome
NANAO_RX320
2048x1536
Color
NANAO_GS310
2048x1536
Monochrome
12. Use the Notepad capability to add the monitor name
checked for at step 1. above to the system setup file,

SystemConfig.xml.
Correct the 3 lines of <Config Id=2 Name=Primary
Monitor .. (omitted) .. </Config> starting from the 6th line
to what was checked for at step 1.
<ValueType="string" MinExclusiveValue="0"
MaxExclusiveValue="50" Enum="NANAO_RX211,NANAO_
L362T,NANAO_L560T-C,NANAO_GS220,NANAO_
RX320,NANAO_GS310, (monitor name checked for at
step1.)> (monitor name checked for at step 1.)</Value>
13. Restart the PC.
Example: To use a 2M monitor as the 1st monitor, copy the

NANAO_GS220 folder.
9.
Change the name of the pasted folder to the monitor name

checked for at step 1.
10. Repeat steps 7. through 9. for the C:\Program Files\

FujiFilm\Cooper\Screen\Roi folder.
NOTE
Though folder names are the same as for C:\Program Files\
FujiFilm\Cooper\Screen\Manager and C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\
Cooper\Screen\Roi, the files that consist of each folder are
different with each other. Therefore, be sure to copy the monitor
name folder of the same resolutions that is included in the
respective folder.
11. Move the operation sequence to the C:\Program Files\

FujiFilm\Cooper\Config folder.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE25-8
2. Creating an Exposure Menu for QA ROI Measurement
2. Creating an Exposure Menu for

QA ROI Measurement
5.
For the QA ROI Measurement purposes, it is recommended to perform

exposure using the dedicated exposure menu. Procedures to create the
exposure menu for QA ROI Measurement are shown below.
NOTE
The saving function for QA ROI Measurement is not supported.
1.
Select All Programs Fuji Film FCR from the
AWS824012.ai
I.
menu.
2.
Select the
6.
ANK Exposure Menu Name : QA ROI Measurement
Perform the following settings in the Exposure parameter 1

tab.
menu and then select User Utility.
3.
4.
Click [Menu Setup].

The Menu Setup window opens.
Select MAX4.0 MAMMOGRAPHY from the Exposure/

Study Menu and then click [New].
I
II
AWS824013.ai
I. Select Fix.
II. Set S value up to 120.
AWS824011.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE25-9
2. Creating an Exposure Menu for QA ROI Measurement
7.
Select the DX Parameter tab, and then make settings

according to the operation for the institution.
REFERENCES
9.
Select the QC/TEST tab, and then drag the QA ROI

Measurement menu, created from Exposure/Study Menu,
to the non-setup button.
Patient Orientation, Anatomic Region and View Code are the

items that must be entered essentially.
AWS824015.ai
10. Click [OK].

The system returns to the User Utility main menu window.
AWS824014.ai
8.
11. Click [Terminate].
Click [OK].
The system returns to the Menu Setup window.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE25-10
3. Confirming the Settings

1.
Start up the CL-AP and confirm displayed images.
2.
Select [Customizing the screen display] [QA Palette].

The QA palette customization window opens.
3.

From the
menu, and then select User Utility.
1.
Select the
Select ROI Measurement from the Function List, and

paste it to the optional display region.
menu, sequentially select All Programs,
Fuji Film and FCR.

OE000099.EPS
AWS824016.ai
4.
Click
The system returns to the User Utility main menu window.
5.
Click [Terminate].
The system returns to the CL-AP registration window.
6.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Perform exposure using an exposure menu created in

2. Creating an Exposure Menu for QA ROI Measurement.
OE25-11
3.2 Confirm Image Display
7.
Perform the QA processing.
8.
Click anywhere in the study execution QA window or select

any study already subjected to study processing, and then
click
9.
Confirm that the QA ROI Measurement window is opened.
AWS824018.ai
AWS824017.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE25-12
4.1 Backup
4. Backup/Restore
5.
Select the targeted backup drive/folder and click [OK].
Described herein are the procedures to back up/restore the setting

values for the QA ROI Measurement function.
4.1 Backup
1.
Select the
2.
AWS825010.ai
3.
Click the [Backup].
CAUTION
When the [Copy File] window opens, do not select [Copy, but keep
both files].
AWS825011.ai
4.
Insert media for backup, such as FD, USB memory stick or

the like, into the PC.
AWS825014.ai
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE25-13
4.1 Backup
After backup processing is completed, the following window

opens.
AWS825013.ai
6.
Click [OK].
7.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE25-14
4.2 Restore
5.
4.2 Restore
CAUTION
Select the drive/folder in which the backup data is stored,

and then click [OK].
Data cannot be restored if the version of the installed software and

the version of software at the time of creating data to be restored
are different with each other.
See the version information of backup data (Version.xml) to
restore, and confirm that the versions are the same before
restoring.
1.
Select the
2.
AWS825010.ai
After restoring processing is completed, the following window

opens.
3.
Click [Restore].
AWS825016.ai
AWS825012.ai
The Folder Selection window opens.
4.
6.
Click [OK].
7.
Insert media in which the backup data is stored into the PC.
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE25-15
BLANK PAGE
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
OE25-16
CL+Synapse RIS (Ordering)
CL+Synapse RIS (Ordering)

Describes the setup procedures for the ordering function for acquiring
the patient information and exposure menu from Synapse RIS.
NOTES
The CR-IR348CL is abbreviated hereafter simply CL.
This option cannot be used with the following options.
(These options will be automatically turned OFF when the Synapse RIS
option key is installed.)
Function
Option key
DICOM PPS function
CL DICOM MPPS
CL DICOM ORDER MWM

(acquiring only patient information)
CL DICOM ID MWM
ID Online function
IR 346 ID ONLINE
Study reception information

transfer/reception function
CL SOFT FOR POCKET ID CL
When the user authentication function for CL is used, make sure that
the service engineer synchronizes the user authentication information
for CL and Synapse RIS at the time of installation.
When the image is specified as mis-exposure from QA after the study
is finished, the information of mis-exposure will not be sent to Synapse
RIS.
When the StudyInstanceUID is assigned from the Synapse RIS,
confirm that the StudyInstanceUID is not being assigned redundantly
from the Synapse RIS before installing the Synapse RIS options.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Prior to setup
CL requirements
Synapse RIS option key (DX CL SYNAPSE RIS CONNECT) is
required.
RETAKE ANALYSIS option key (CL RETAKE ANALYSIS) is required.
PC satisfies the following specifications.
OS
Windows XP
Windows Vista
Memory More than 2GB

CPU
Better than Intel Core2Duo 1.8GHz

(CPU with more than two core memories and more than 1.8GHz)

and the Synapse RIS server.
1. Hardware Setup
Perform the following settings related

to Synapse RIS.
2. Software Setup

Shared folder creation and settings
Perform the startup verification of
Synapse RIS window.
3. Verification

files.
OE26-1
1. Hardware Setup
1. Hardware Setup
Network-connect the CL and the Synapse RIS server to each other, as
illustrated below.
10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX cable
TCP/IP
CL
Synapse RIS
server
OE260016.ai
NOTES
and Synapse RIS server.
The cable type applicable to the CL and the Synapse RIS server is the
IEC950/UL1950-compliant UTP cable of category 5 or higher.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE26-2
2. Software Setup

The option keys to install indicated in these procedures are the following
two types.
DX CL SYNAPSE RIS CONNECT
CL RETAKE ANALYSIS
1.
2.3 Creating and Setting the Shared Folder

Windows XP
Windows Vista
Insert the DX CL SYNAPSE RIS CONNECT Option Key CD

into the PC.
In a few seconds, the installation start widow opens automatically.

OE260001.ai
u NOTE u
2.
Click
OE260002.ai
3.
Click
4.
5.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817

Install the CL RETAKE ANALYSIS option key by performing
the step 1 through 4.
OE26-3

below.
1.

u NOTE u
2.
Click
3.
Click
4.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE26-4

The procedures of creating and setting the shared folders for connecting
with Synapse RIS in Windows XP are different from those in Windows
Vista. Perform the settings according to the following procedures for
each.

Windows XP
1.
REFERENCE
menu, and
then select Explorer.

The explorer starts up.
u NOTE u
The folder names of the shared folder of No.97 Recept Computer
Info File Share Folder under 5. CSL/IDT FUNCTION and the shared
folder of No.307 Simplified Ordering Report Share Folder can be
specified arbitrarily at any locations where CL and Synapse can
access.
The shared folder for No.307 Simplified Report Share Folder is not
created by default setting so create the folder manually.
If the location or name of the shared folder is changed from the default
setting, also change the setting in Service Utility.
2.
Select C:\Usr\IIP and create the OrderingReportShare

folder.
3.
Right-click OrderingReportShare folder and then choose

Sharing and Security.
The OrderingReportShare Properties window opens.
4.
Select
) and click
This section mainly deals with the examples of creating the

OrderingReportShare folder and the ReceptShare folder at the
default setting location and setting up the sharing options.
For Windows XP
See 2.3.1 Creating and Setting the Shared Folder in Windows
XP.
For Windows Vista

See 2.3.2 Creating and Setting the Shared Folder in Windows
Vista.
OE260017.ai
The Permissions for OrderingReportShare window opens.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE26-5
5.
Select Everyone and place checkmarks to all the

checkboxes in the Allow column (
).

Windows Vista
1.
Select Computer from the
menu.
The Computer window opens.
2.
Select C:\Usr\IIP and create the OrderingReportShare

folder.
3.
Right-click OrderingReportShare folder and select

Share....
The OrderingReportShare Properties window opens.
OE260018.ai
6.
Click
The system returns to the OrderingReportShare Properties window.
7.
Click
4.
Click
The OrderingReportShare Properties window closes.
8.
Select C:\Usr\IIP and create the ReceptShare folder.
9.
For ReceptShare folder, perform the same procedures as

step 3 through 7.
10. Shut down Explorer.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE260010.ai
The Advanced Sharing window opens.
OE26-6
5.
click
) and
8.
Click
The system returns to the OrderingReportShare Properties window.
9.
Close the OrderingReportShare Properties window.
10. Select C:\Usr\IIP and create the ReceptShare folder.

11. For ReceptShare folder, perform the same procedures as
step 3 through 9.
12. Close the explorer.

OE260011.ai
The Permissions for OrderingReportShare window opens.
6.
Select Everyone and place checkmarks to all the

checkboxes in the Allow column (
).
OE260012.ai
7.
Click
The system returns to the Advanced Sharing window.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE26-7

Set the configuration items of Synapse RIS and Retake Analysis related
to the ordering function (connecting with Synapse RIS).
1.
2.
Click [SetupConfigurationItem].
4.
Click
A list of IMAGE MODALITY setup items appears in the right-hand

area of the window.
For the Service Utility startup procedure, see 1. Starting/

00000248.EPS
00000131.EPS
00000404.EPS
3.
Click the
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
sign within
OE26-8
5.
No.
Set the following configuration items.

Name
34 Enable
Statistical
Info. Output
Selection
No.
Meaning
Yes
Enables the exposure result
data file output function.
Specifying whether or not

to output an exposure
result data file.
No
Disables the exposure result
data file output function.
Exposure result data :

Patient ID, patient
name, study date, study
time, anatomical region,
exposure menu, etc.
* Select Yes when using
the Retake Analysis
function.
* The default setting at
shipment from factory of
the CR Console MINI is
Yes.
37 Enable
Security
Function
Yes
Uses the user authentication
function.
Name
51 Use Reject
Comment
Selection
Yes
Enables the entry.
No
Disables the entry.
Meaning
Specifying whether to
enable or disable entry of
comment on mis-exposed
images.
* Select Yes when using
the Retake Analysis
function.
: Default setting, * : Note
6.
Click
A list of QA FUNCTION setup items appears in the right-hand area

of the window.
QA FUNCTION setup items
Specifying whether
or not to use the user
No
Does not use the user
38 Link User
Account to
Operator's
Name
Yes
Displays the login user name
in the technologist name field.
Specifying whether the

technologist name field
should display the name
of a user who logs in with
No
the user authentication
Does not display the login user
function.
name in the technologist name
field.
OE260013.ai
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE26-9
7.
No.
9.

Name
20 Alert MSG
Type When
Patient
Information
will be
Modified
Selection
Meaning
0 : Connect with RIS

RIS connection
(hospital layer)
1 : Without RIS
Non-RIS connection
(general practitioner layer)
Specifying a message
type to be displayed when
changing the patient
information.
No.

Name
16 Examination
No. Padding
Method
2 : Non-Display
Not displayed.
8.
Click
Meaning
0 : Pad with space to the head Specifying the Accession

( 1234567)
No. padding method.
Right-padded with spaces to
* This function also
the head.
specifies right/left
ad with zero to the head
justification of character
1 : P
(0001234567)
Right-padded with zeros to
* When using Synapse
RIS, select either 0 :
the head.
Pad with space to the
ad with space to the tail
2 : P
head or 2 : Pad with
(1234567 )
space to the tail.
Left-padded with spaces to
the tail.
ad with zero to the tail
3 : P
(1234567000)
A list of IDT/Console function setup items appears in the righthand area of the window.
Setup items for the IDT/Console function
18 Patient ID
Padding
Method
OE000038.EPS
Selection
0 : Pad with space to the head Specifying the patient ID

( 1234567)
padding method.
Right-padded with spaces to
* This function also
the head.
specifies right/left
ad with zero to the head
justification of character
1 : P
(0001234567)
Right-padded with zeros to
* When using Synapse
the head.
RIS, select either 0 :
Pad with space to the
ad with space to the tail
2 : P
head or 2 : Pad with
(1234567 )
space to the tail.
Left-padded with spaces to
the tail.
ad with zero to the tail
3 : P
(1234567000)
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE26-10
No.
Name
95 Recept
Computer
Type
Selection
0 : Standard
FujiFilm Standard
1 : SANYO
Sanyo
2 : TOSHIBA
Toshiba
Meaning
Computer type for
connection of a receipt
computer.
* To use Synapse RIS,
select 0: Standard.
3 : FUJITSU
Fujitsu
97 Recept
C:\User\IIP\ReceptShare\
Computer
Info File
Share Folder
Specifying a folder in
which the shared
information file is to
be saved when a receipt
98 Recept
1 to 300 ( 5)
Computer Info
File Polling
Interval ([sec])
Specifying a time interval at

which the polling process
is to be performed to the
shared information file.
* Interval from 1 through
4 can be set when
Synapse RIS is
connected. Set the
interval longer than 5
when a receipt computer
is connected.
99 Recept
0 : XMLOnly
Computer
Only XML is used.
Info File Type
1 : CSVOnly
Only CSV is used.
2 : Both
Both XML and CSV are used.
No.
Name
Selection
Meaning
100 Recept
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\IIP\
Computer Info
Data\Reserved
File Temporal
Folder
Specifying a folder in which

an information file where
an error occurred is to be
backed up when a receipt
131 Enable
Yes
MultipleStudy
Permitted.

to permit multiple studies
to start at the same time.
No
Not permitted.
197 Alert MSG
Yes
Displays the message when the
When Patient
patient information is changed.
Information
will be
No
Modified
Dose not display the message
SynapseRIS
when the patient information is
changed.

to display the message
when the patient
information is changed at
the time of connecting to
Synapse RIS.
307 Simplified
C:\Usr\IIP\
Ordering
OrderingReportShare\
Report Share
Folder
Specifying the directory

to share files of the actual
result information when
connecting to Synapse
RIS.
308 Synapse RIS http://localhost:8080

URL
Specifying the URL to

access the Synapse RIS.
Specifying a file type to be

handled as an information
file when a receipt
* To use Synapse RIS,
select 0: XMLOnly.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE26-11
10. Click
12. From the Config (F) menu, choose Save.
A list of CONFIG OPTION setup items appears in the right-hand

area of the window.
Setup items for the CONFIG OPTION function

saved.
13. Click
14. From the Config (F) menu, choose Close.
OE260014.ai
11. Set the following configuration items.

No.
7
Name
Enable
Retake
Analysis
Function
Selection
15. Click [ExitServiceUtility].
The system returns to the Desktop screen.
Meaning
Yes
Enables the Retake Analysis
function.
Specifying whether or
not to enable the Retake
Analysis function.
No
Disables the Retake Analysis
function.
*T
o enable this option, use
the log storage function
offered by the User Utility
to collect necessary logs
beforehand.
*T
o enable this option,
specify Yes also for
Nos. 34 and 51 of IMAGE
MODALITY setup items.
* Use the LOG SHARE
setup function to register
the host name and
IP address of the CL
targeted for calculation
of Retake Analysis.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE26-12
3. Verification
3. Verification
Perform the startup verification of the Synapse RIS window.
1.
From the
menu, sequentially select All programs,
FujiFilm and FCR.

After about two minutes, the Synapse RIS window of CL-AP
opens.
2.
Confirm that the URL set in the Service Utility is displayed

correctly on the Synapse RIS window.
OE260019.ai
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE26-13

To make a backup, have the following item on hand.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE26-14
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE26-15
BLANK PAGE
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
OE26-16
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
PC-I
Control Sheet
Issue date
Revision number
07/30/2004
11/12/2004
11
12
11/12/2004
07/30/2005
07/30/2005
11/30/2005
11/30/2005
07/30/2006
07/20/2007
05/09/2008
10/31/2008
11/30/2009
11/30/2009
03/31/2010
12/10/2010
12
14
14
15
15
16
17
18
19
20
20
21
22
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Reason
Revision for software V1.0(C) and corrections
(FM4450)
Pages affected
All pages
I, II, 15
612
I, II, 13, 57, 9
4, 8, 10
IIV, 1, 2, 9, 12
10, 11
I, II, 4, 9
I, II, 1, 2, 9, 10
I, II, 2, 7, 9
I, II, 2, 4, 7, 10
I, II, 2, 4, 5, 10, 11
12
I, II, 2, 4
I, II, 2, 10, 11
PC-II
BLANK PAGE
010-054-15
11.30.2005 FM4760 (ITC)
PC-III
BLANK PAGE
010-054-15
11.30.2005 FM4760 (ITC)
PC-IV
CR-IR346CL Performance Checklist Connection to One XG-1 RU or CR-IR355RU/356/357

Connection to One XG-1 RU or
CR-IR355RU/356/357
The purpose of this checklist is to document the steps performed and
settings determined during installation of the CR-IR346CL in accordance
with the instructions of the CR-IR346/348CL Service Manual. This
checklist is not intended to replace the installation workflow described in
the service manual but to be followed concurrently. Check system
connections and output images not only during installation but also after
servicing to ensure correct operation of the system prior to its delivery
to the customer.
Installation information
Equipment S/N :
Site Name
:
Site Number :
Room Name :
Software Ver.
:
Installed by
:
Signature
:
Date of Installation/Servicing :
Checklist
CL startup verification
CL setup for connection with other equipment
IP adress
: (
)
Subnet mask
: (
)
Host name
: (
)
Default gateway : (
)
Registered AE title
Printer
: (
)
Storage (server) : (
)
Storage (viewer) : (
)
Pass Fail
Pass Fail
Pass Fail
6. Checkout Procedures under IN-A: Installation
Checking the connection between CL and RU Pass Fail

Checking the connection between CL and other equipment

Pass Fail
)
X-CON connection (maker/model
Pass Fail
Checking output images
Printer
Storage (server)
Storage (viewer)
4. CL Hardware Setup under IN-A: Installation
Checking the items supplied

Equipment main unit Accessories
Pass Fail
5. Software Setup under IN-A: Installation
010-054-17E
07.20.2007 FM5201 (ITC)
Making backup copies of setup files

5. Overall Test
6. Storing final Output Films at the Customer Site as
the Records of the Performance Verification
2. Software Setup
Setting/checking the PC system date and time
Installing the option key
DICOM PRINT
LOCAL PRINT
DICOM CR STORAGE DICOM IM PROCESSED
DMS NET-WORK IN-OUT
DICOM COMMITMENT
X-ONLINE(X-CON)
MFP
GPR

under IN-A: Installation
Pass Fail
Pass Fail
Done
Pass Fail
Pass Fail
PC-1
CR-IR348CL Performance Checklist Connection to two or more RUs, 5000plus and CR-IR356/357/359/362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372
CR-IR348CL Performance Checklist Connection

to two or more RUs, 5000plus and CR-IR356/357/
359/362/363/364/366/367/368/370/371/372
The purpose of this checklist is to document the steps performed and
settings determined during installation of the CR-IR348CL in accordance
with the instructions of the CR-IR346/348CL Service Manual. This
checklist is not intended to replace the installation workflow described in
the service manual but to be followed concurrently. Check system
connections and output images not only during installation but also after
servicing to ensure correct operation of the system prior to its delivery
to the customer.
Installation information
Equipment S/N :
Site Name
:
Site Number :
Room Name :
Software Ver.
:
Installed by
:
Signature
:
Date of Installation/Servicing :
CheckList
3. CL Hardware Setup under IN-B: Installation
Checking the items supplied

Equipment main unit Accessories
Pass Fail
4. CL Software Setup under IN-B: Installation
Setting/checking the PC system date and time Pass Fail

Pass Fail
Installing the option key
LOCAL PRINT
DICOM PRINT
DICOM CR STORAGE DICOM IM PROCESSED
DICOM MAMMO S
DICOM MAMMO P
DMS NET-WORK IN-OUT DICOM DVD STORAGE
DICOM COMMITMENT
DICOM ORDER MWM DICOM ID MWM
DICOM MPPS
ID ONLINE
X-ONLINE(X-CON)
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
MFP
SHUTTER-PROC
IM-MAGNIFY(Lite)
DICOM Q/R
PRECISE ENLARGEMENT
DELUX-QA(Lite)
TILE-IM QA
PEM
IM COMPOSITION
LUT-ADJUST(Lite)
RetakeAnalysis
ROI
CL startup verification
CL setup for connection with other equipment
IP adress
: (
)
Subnet mask
: (
)
Host name
: (
)
Default gateway : (
)
Registered AE title
Printer
: (
)
Storage (server) : (
)
Storage (viewer) : (
)
MWM / MPPS : (
)
ES
GPR
FCR QC
ANNOTATION(Lite)
PDI
Synapse RIS
Pass Fail
Pass Fail
Pass Fail
6. Checkout Procedures under IN-A: Installation
Checking the connection between CL and RU Pass Fail

Checking the connection between CL and other equipment

Pass Fail
)
X-CON connection (maker/model
)
MWM connection (maker/model
)
PPS connection
(maker/model
)
DAP connection (maker/model
Pass Fail
Checking output images
Printer
Storage (server)
Storage (viewer)
under IN-A: Installation
Making backup copies of setup files

5. Overall Test
6. Storing final Output Films at the Customer Site as
the Records of the Performance Verification
Pass Fail
Pass Fail
Done
PC-2
CR-IR348CL Performance Checklist 9000 Series Connection

9000 Series Connection
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
PC-3
CR-IR346CL/348CL Config List

1.
IMAGE MODALITY
Check No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
010-054-21E
03.31.2010 FM5670 (ITC)
Name
System Common Date Format
Alert MSG Display When Deleting Image
Activate Error Recovery Retrial
Institute/Site Name Strings
IP Size by inch or Metric
Two Independent Mask Sizes Applicable to
Left and Right Images
Language Setup for Screen Message
Institute/Site Name in Two-Byte Characters
UID Issuance after Modifying ID Information
UID Issuance after Modifying Normalized
Parameter
UID Issuance after Modifying Image
Processing Parameter
UID Issuance Before Sending Processed Data
DICOM Series Generation Logic
System Recognition ID (A to Z)
User Utility Password Required or Not
SOP Class UID for PPS When No FILE
Attribute Output
Protocol Name for PPS
Display Performed Procedure on Worklist Tab
Kind of Output Image (Energy Subtraction)
Send 3 on 1 Format to External Device
Connection Between Reader and Console
Long Type Character Format
Tag Mapped on Study Menu at MWM Use
Perform Mapping to Exposure Menu at MWM
Use
Display Dialog When Failed in Mapping to
Menu at MWM Use
Use Study InstanceUID from RIS
Setup Value
Check No.
27
28
29
30
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
55
56
57
67
72
Name
Setup Value
StudyInstanceUID Generation Logic

Dicom Storage Output Connection Number
Image Number Generation Logic
Display Pixel Size
Kind of Print Image (Image Combining Process)
Kind of Tansfer Image (Image Combining
Process)
Enable Statistical Info.Output
Modality of Mammography Image
Administrator Password
Enable Security Function
Link User Account to Operators Name
UID Issuance about a function (except Image
Processing) to change to the image
themselves
Rotate the 2nd Stitching Image
Rotate the 3rd Stitching Image
Enable Stitching Edge Adjustment
Cut IP Edge for Stitching
Use Series Identification From F-RIS
UID Issuance after Modifying Trimming
Parameter
UID Issuance after Modifying FNC Parameter
Quantity which paints inside the recognition
result of the chest wall [x0.01mm]
Apply GS Filter To 8 x 10 / 1824 Image
Kind of the image used for the displaying
Portable Finish Mode
Use Reject Comment
Time Until Auto Log Off
Horizontal UMB Processing for VELOCITY &
PRELIO
Gradients(x10) of LUT used for Preview Image
Use Password Security
Password for PAS Security
Use Service Utility Password
Enable Exposure Index Function
PC-4
2.
FINP SETUP
Check No.
Name
Setup Value
1 Justify Patient ID When Converting in FUJI
Protocols
2 Justify Patient Name When Converting in
FUJI Protocols
3 Justify Menu Name When Converting in FUJI
Protocols
4 Justify Examination Number When Converting
in FUJI Protocols
5 Justify Department Name When Converting in
FUJI Protocols
3.
QA FUNCTION
Check No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
Name
Setup Value
Enable Image Proc. Pram Update Flag
Enable E-mail Button
Use Dialog for Choosing Folder to Save Jpeg Image
Destination Path of JPEG File
Filename Format of JPEG Information
JPEG Image Processing Use CrtLut
Alert MSG Display When Output
Display Save Button
Alert MSG Display When Save
Alert MSG Display When Image Changed
Enable Dicom File Storage
Tranfer Syntax Used When Using Dicom File Storage
Save Multibyte Code When Using Dicom File Storage
Save Annotation Information When Using
Dicom File Storage
DCM File Image Processing Use CrtLut
Change Modality When Using Dicom File
Storage (MG -> CR)
Enable Change ImageDate and ImageTime
Image File Type For Magnify Display
ProcessingPemForMagnify
Alert MSG Type When Patient Information will
be Modified
4.
PRINTER
Check No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Name
Setup Value
Pixel Clock Rate Changeover
Enable Magnify Print
[Indent] Film Sorting Info.Setup
[Indent] Menu Name Start Position on Film
[Indent] Unique ID for Film Sorting Condition
Printer Interface Type (Old/New)
Film Size Available in Printer
Film Base Color (Blue/Clear)
Printer Buffer Size
Black Margin Setup o n Film Edge
Trimming Range [mm]
Trimming Range for Mammography [mm]
Print Barcode
Print EDR Mode
Print Image Process Condition
Print L, S, CS, SS Condition
Print Shot Time
Print Set Process
Print Engineer ID
Print Menu Name
Print Compression Rate
Print Energy-Subtraction Parameter
Print Image Frame (3543film:1417, 1414,
1843/3535film:1414/2636film:1014/
2025film:810, 1824 Single Format)
Print Image Frame (3543 film:1843 LR/2on1
Format)LR/2on1 Format)
Print Image Frame (3543 film:1417, 1843, 8
10 4on1 Format)
Print Image Frame (3543 film:EnergySubstraction 3on1 Format)
Print Image Frame (2636 film:1824, 2430/
2025 film:1824 Single Mammography
Format)
Print Image Frame (2636 film:1824 2on1
100% Mammography Format)
No Print Scale (User Definition Rules)
Representation of Age
Print Reverse Mark
PC-5
Check No.
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
Name
Setup Value
Print Film Character Field (1417-S/4on1,
1843-LR/2on1/4on1, 810-4on1, 1414-S,
1014-S, 1824-LR/2on1, 810/1824-S
Format)
Print Film Char 2/Examination number
Size Selection of 3543, 3535, 2636, 2025 Film
Character(Single Format)
3543 Film Character Field Position & Rotation
(1417 Image)
(1714 Image)
(1843 Image)
3543,2025 Film Character Field Position &
Rotation (3543 Film:810-4on1, 2025 Film:
810-Single)
2025 (Landscape)Film Character Field
Position & Rotation (810,1824-Single)
Film Character Field position & rotation
(User Definition Rules1)
Image Area Move to the Top of 3543 Film
Patients Name Length on Film
Patients Name Length on Film (Multibyte)
Patients Name Justify on Film
Menu Name Length on Film
Menu Name Length on Film (Multibyte)
Menu Name Justify on Film
Department Name Length on Film
Department Name Length on Film (Multibyte)
Department Name Justify on Film
Enable Auto Edit Function of Film String
Format File
Check No.
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
Name
Setup Value
Gap between Image Edge and Film Edge
(Mammography Format) [0.1mm]
Font Size of Requesting Service
Format Type of Operators Name
Display Image Feature
(Left Image of 2on1 Mammography Format)
(Right Image of 2on1 Mammography Format)
(Single Format)
Enable Reduce To 810 Film
(1014 Image)
(1410 Image)
(2636 film:1824-LR)
(2636 film:1824-2on1)
Print Image Frame (2636 film:1824-LR, 2on1
Format)
Reduction Rate (2636 film:1824-LR, 2on1
Format)
Print Priority in Dicom Print
2530 Film Character Field Position Rotation
(1012, 2430-Single)
2530(Landscape)Film Character Field Position
Rotation (1012, 2430-Single)
Film String Format
Lifesize Film Character Field Position &
Rotation
Overlap width(mm) of the Lifesize Film
Apply GSFilter On SpecialPrint
Film Annotation Position (12on1 Film Format)
Print Image Frame (12on1 Film Format)
Film Character Field Position & Rotation
(12on1 Film Format)
Reduction Rate (810,2on1 Film Format)
Enable Image Frame (810,100%-Size Image
2on1Film Format)
(810,100%-Size Image 2on1 Film Format)
PC-6
Check No.
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
010-054-19E
10.31.2008 FM5460 (ITC)
Name
Film Character Mode Setting On XCON
Material Info.
1530 ExFormat For 1410 Film
1530 ExFormat For 108 Film
Setting of minimum scale to be cut off the
ends of Life-size Output (cm).
Type of processing multi-frame format.
Setup Value
5.
CSL/IDT FUNCTION
Check No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Name
Setup Value
AutoMenuSelect
Default Menu Code for Unregistrated Image
Enable Distribution Code
Enable Film String
Enable Function Setup
Enable Pantomography Processing
Enable Performance Data (RIS)
Enable Automatic Selector Switching
Enable Requesting Dept. Name Field
Enable Technologist Name Field
Image Rotation/Reversal Range
EDR Mode Setup
Image Data Filing Mode Setup
Function Setup
Examination No. Length
Examination No. Padding Method
Patient ID Length
Patient ID Padding Method
Reception No. Length
Reception No.Padding Method
Exposure List Erasure Setup
Requesting Dept. Name Field Setup
Technicians Name Filed Setup
Min.Set Number
Max.Set Number
MCR Customized Card
MCR Card Type (JIS/ISO)
MCR Card Format Setup
Study Number Issuance Logic Setup
Technicians Code Length
ID Online Acquisition Info. Code Setup
ID Online Interface Format
PC-7
Check No.
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
Name
ID Online/Offline Switching Timeout
ID Online Requesting Timeout
ID Online Search Key
ID Online Type
Host Name of RIS Server (Type-IDC4)
Ip Address of RIS Server (Type-IDC4)
Port Number for RIS Server (Type-IDC4)
RIS Type Setup
Wait Time for Performed Exposure Info. from
Xcon
Xcon Status Display Strings
Xcon Performed Info. Reception
Xcon Exposure Info.Transfer
Xcon Exposure Info. Limit Value (Minimum KVP
[kV])
Xcon Exposure Info. Limit Value (Maximum KVP
[kV])
Xcon Exposure Info. Limit Value (Minimum X-ray
Tube Current [mA])
Xcon Exposure Info. Limit Value (Maximum
X-ray Tube Current [mA])
Xcon Exposure Info. Limit Value (Minimum
Exposure Time [msec])
Exposure Time [msec])
Xcon Exposure Info. Limit Value (Minimum
Reserve 1)
Reserve 1)
Distribution Code for FCR5000 SeriesConnection
Enable Patient Info.DB Function
Max. Number of Patient Info.
Patients Name Format
Enable Customaize Function of Study List and
Patient Info.ListDB Function
IP Info. Request Timeout (Reader:CSL=N:N)
010-054-14
07.30.2005 FM4543 (ITC)
Setup Value
Check No.
Name
Setup Value
61 Replace All IP Size When Receive Size Change

Request from Builtin
62 RIS Status Display String
63 RIS Serial-TX Control Port
64 MWM RIS Trigger Port
65 MWM RIS Trigger Timeout
66 MWM Execute Study Type
67 MWM Request Exposure Does Status
68 MWM Exposure Menu Code Treatment
69 Recept Computer Hostname
70 Recept Computer IP Address
71 Recept Computer Port Number
72 Recept Computer Patient Info. Format
73 Recept Computer Request Timeout
74 Search Order of Patient Info.
75 Patient ID# is Unique
76 PPS Exposure Status Sequence
77 IME Mode for Kana Patients Name
78 IME Mode for Kanji Patients Name
79 RIS Type Setup (NEC)
80 Enable Auto Menu Creation
81 Enable Continuous Barcode Read
82 Seletion Type of Requesting Service
83 Default Requesting Service
84 Barcode Type for Search on List
85 Default Value for Underfined Pixel Density
86 Image Ajust Mode
87 PPS Edit Billing Supplies
88 PPS Edit Exposure Result
89 MWM Menu Name Mapping
90 PPS Exposure Status Mapping Tag
91 PPS Exposure Status Mapping Kind
92 PPS N-SET Timming
93 Use Distribution Code Depart Name
94 Film Size Setup
95 Recept Computer Type
PC-8
Check No.
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
105
106
107
108
109
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
Name
Kanji Patients Name Auto Convert
Recept Computer Info File Share Folder
Recept Computer Info File Polling Interval ([sec])
Recept Computer Info File Type
Recept Computer Info File Temporal Folder
Enable Study Reservation (Easy Operation Only)
Use Space Padding ID (Easy Operation Only)
Do Next Study At Study Screen With End Button
Click
Automatic Issuance Patient ID
Enable mAs Value Recalculation
Xcon Format Type
Xcon Interlock Command Transfer
Xcon Serial_TX Baudrate
Xcon No-Response Timeout
Xcon Data Reception Timeout
Media Auto Mount
Synapse Host for Web Query
Web Query Root Path
Xcon DoseValue1
Xcon DoseValue2
Enable Velocity Sensitivity Button
Xcon No-Data Default Output
External Character Conversion
MWM Not Received Condition Delete Study
Enable Clear View for Mammography
Clear View Mode: Offset GS (100)
Clear View Mode: Offset GA (10)
Clear View Mode: Offset DRE (10)
Clear View Mode: Fix DRT
Clear View Mode: Offset MDE (10)
Clear View Mode: Fix MDT
Enable MultipleStudy
Enable SpecialPrint
Use 12on1 Film Print in MediaList
MWM StudyInstanceUID Regeneration
010-054-18E
05.09.2008 FM5356 (ITC)
Setup Value
Check No.
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
165
167
168
169
170
171
Name
Setup Value
Enable Swap Image In Order

Xcon Serial_TX Control Port2
Exposure Guidance URL
FUJITSU Recept Computer Receiving Port Number
FUJITSU Recept Computer Receiving Timeout
Enable IP Use Count List
Enable IP Use Count Reset
Xcon Serial_TX Parity
TOSHIBA-RIS IpAddress
TOSHIBA-RIS ConnectPortForRIS
TOSHIBA-RIS ConnectPortForIIP
TOSHIBA-RIS RisDefaultURL
TOSHIBA-RIS TemporaryFolder
TOSHIBA-RIS ExposureStartMsgTimeOut
TOSHIBA-RIS ExposureStartMsgRetryCount
TOSHIBA-RIS PatListDisplayMsgTimeOut
TOSHIBA-RIS PatListDisplayMsgRetryCount
TOSHIBA-RIS ExposureEndMsgTimeOut
TOSHIBA-RIS ExposureEndMsgRetryCount
TOSHIBA-RIS ApplicationEndMsgTimeOut
TOSHIBA-RIS ApplicationEndMsgRetryCount
TOSHIBA-RIS ConnectionWatchMsgTimeOut
TOSHIBA-RIS ExternalInputMsgTimeOut
TOSHIBA-RIS ExternalInputMsgRetryCount
TOSHIBA-RIS ConnectionWatchMsgRetryCount
TOSHIBA-RIS IFFilesPreservationPeriod
TOSHIBA-RIS ResultType
TOSHIBA-RIS RISInitializeStartMsgTimeOut
Enable Auto IP Shelter for 550x
Enable Auto Maker
PDI Drive Letter
PDI Use CrtLut
PDI Image Density
PDI Use Multibyte
PDI Transfer Syntax
PC-9
Check No.
177
178
179
180
181
182
185
186
187
188
197
198
199
307
308
Name
DAP Serial_TX Parity
DAP Serial_TX Control port
DAP Message Trial Count
DAP Address
Wait Time for Response From DAP
DAP Status Display Strings
Enable Display Reverse Marker
Reverse Marker Position [%] (X\Y)
Reverse Marker Color (Fore Color-Back Color)
Mass Order Site Code Mapping Tag
Alert MSG When
Patient Information will be Modified SynapseRIS
Grid Data Sort Order
Overwrite of the Patient Info
Simplified Ordering Report Share Folder
Synapse RIS URL
Setup Value
7.
CONFIG OPTION
Check No.
8.
Name
Enable Timming Function
Enable Reader QC Function
Enable Display Previous Study Function
Enable Synapse WebQuery
Enable S/L Value Restriction Function
Enable RetakeAnalysis Function
Enable MammoImage Alignment Function
Enable 12on1 Film Print Function
10
Enable Exposure Guidance
12
Enable MammoQC Function
13
Enable Connecting DAP Directly
CONFIG QC
Check No.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Setup Value
Name
Visible QCRecord Delete Button
Destination Path of QC Record File
Country
Visible QCRecord Delete Button
Destination Path of QC Record File
Select CSV Output Folder
Setup Value
PC-10
9.
CONFIG PDA
Check No.
1
BatteryWarning1
BatteryWarning2
StudyFilePath
CustomFilePath
LoginFlag
PDAShare Interval
Name
Setup Value
Name
Setup Value
10. CONFIG QR
Check No.
010-054-22E
12.10.2010 FM5817
Retrieved Image Viewer Finish Mode
Reverse LUT For Processed Image
The Patient Format For Search Condition
PC-11
CR-IR346CL/348CL System Configuration List
CR-IR346CL/348CL System Configuration List

Equipment
Host Name
CL (This
equipment)
IP adress
Function
CR Console
FRUP
FRUP
FRUP
FRUP
FRUP
FRUP
FRUP
FRUP
5000DICOM
5000DICOM
5000DICOM
DICOM PRINT
DICOM PRINT
DICOM PRINT
DICOM Storage
DICOM Storage
DICOM Storage
DICOM MWM
DICOM PPS
FINP
Local Print
CL
IDT CONNECTING
CL
IDT CONNECTING
CL
IDT CONNECTING
010-054-20E
11.30.2009 FM5622 (ITC)
AE name
Port No.
Service Class
Transfer Syntax
PC-12

Ir 346-348CL 22e

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ir 346-348CL 22e

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FCR XG-1/CR CL

Document No. 010-054-22E

Export Restrictions Applying to this Equipment

Precautions in Using the Service Manual

CR-IR348CL Service Manual

CR-IR348CL Service Manual

Important Notice Concerning this Manual

This manual is written for International distribution (including

CR-IR348CL Service Manual

Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)

Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)

MD: Machine Description......................................

MT: Machine Troubleshooting...........................

RI: Reinstalling the Software..........................

MU: Maintenance Utility. .......................................

FR: Function-specific Reference....................

Abbreviations Adopted in This Manual:................................ 47

SP: Service Parts.......................................................

Name of the Target Product of This Manual:........................ 47

PM: Preventive Maintenance. ............................

Caution for Handling Personal Information.......................... 48

Appx IN: Installation Appendix....................

PC: Performance Check........................................

CR-IR346CL Service Manual

Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)

MD: Machine Description

2.20 HP Compaq dc7900 SF................................................ 28

1.1 PC Used for XG-1 (one RU+CL) Connection. ................

2.21 Dell OptiPlex 780. ........................................................ 29

1.2 PC Used for 5000 plus (FCR 5000 Series+CL) or

2. Connectors and Slots.......................................................

2.1 Dell OptiPlex GX110.....................................................

4. Software Function Overview............................................ 33

2.2 Dell OptiPlex GX150, 50, 60. ........................................

5. Relationship between RU and CL.................................... 41

2.3 Dell OptiPlex GX260.....................................................

5.1 RU Software (AP/OS) and Data Flow............................ 41

2.4 Dell Precision WS340...................................................

5.2 Mechanism of RU-AP/RU-Config AUTO UPDATE. ........ 43

2.5 Dell Precision WS330................................................... 10

3. System Connection Examples......................................... 31

6. RU-CL N:N Connection Function Overview.................... 45

2.9 Dell Precision WS360................................................... 15

CR-IR346CL Service Manual

Contents (CR-IR346CL Service Manual)

MT: Machine Troubleshooting

1.1 Referring to Error Messages.........................................

1.3 Error Message. ............................................................

2. Using the Event Viewer....................................................

4.6 Changing the Barcode Reader/

2.1 Overview of the Event Viewer. ......................................

4.7 Reinstalling the Network Driver..................................... 41

2.2 Starting the Event Viewer. ............................................

4.8 Installing the 3Com Network Driver (Ver. A10)............... 48

2.3 Configuration and How to View the Event Viewer...........

2.4 Details of Events..........................................................

5. Troubleshooting (for NEC PC)......................................... 51

2.5 Saving the Event Log. ..................................................

2.6 Deleting the Event Log. ................................................ 10

4.3 USB Ports Recommended for Barcode Reader/

5.1 Error Analysis Tool (TeDoLi)......................................... 53

3. Information Useful for Error Recovery............................ 11

5.2 Service Parts Replacement........................................... 56